


« COCO KM οοοι ν- 


FOWLER 


reo 














UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
AT LOS ANGELES 




































































send 
“Δ Toe emma 





_ SOUTHERN BRANCH 
UNIVER ἷ Y OF CALIFORNIA, 
LIBRARY 


tos ANacrE < CALIF, 














Digitized by the Internet Archive — 
in 2007 with funding from ς 
Microsoft Corporation 


COLLEGE SERIES OF GREEK AUTHORS 


EDITED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 


JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE anp THOMAS D. SEYMOUR. 


THUCYDIDES 
BOOK. V. 


EDITED 


ON THE BASIS OF CLASSEN’S EDITION 


BY 


HAROLD NORTH FOWLER 


INSTRUCTOR IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 


BOSTON: 
PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY. 
1888. 


94794 





Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 





79. ἊὌ 


JoHN WILLIAMS WHITE AND THomas Ὁ, SEYMOUR, 


in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at W: 


ῥ 
¥i 


Typocrarny By J. 8. Cusnine & Co., B 











\ 


Special Notice. — Text Editions of the College Series of Greek Authors can be 
had separately at forty cents each. Any professor can have free as many copies 
of the text as his class is using of the text and notes, these to be the property of 
the college and to be retained in the custody of the professor. The stock will be 
replenished from time to time as copies are worn out, the understanding being, of 
course, that no more copies of the text will be called for than are used of the text 


and notes. 


LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 


USED IN THE 


COLLEGE SERIES OF GREEK AUTHORS. 





abs. = absolute, absolutely. 
acc. = accusative. 


‘acc. to= according to. 


act. = active, actively. 

adj. = adjective, adjectively. 

ady. = adverb, adverbial, adverbially. 
Aeol, = Aeolic. 

antec. = antecedent. 

aor. = aorist. 

apod. = apodosis. 


' App. = Appendix. 


appos. = apposition, appositive. 
art. = article. 


Att. = Attic. 
attrib. = attributive. 
aug. = augment. 


0.5 cc. = chapter, chapters (when nu- 
merals follow). 

cf. = confer (in referring to a parallel 
passage). 

chap. = chapter. 

comp. = comparative. 

cond. = condition, conditional. 

conj. = conjunction. 

const. = construe, construction. 

contr. = contraction, contracted. 

co-ord. = co-ordinate. 

dat. = dative. 

decl. = declension. 


def. = definite. 

dem. = demonstrative. 
dep. = deponent. 

dim. = diminutive. 

dir. = direct. 

disc. = discourse. 

Dor. = Doric. 

edit. = edition, editor. 
editt. = editions, editors. 
€.g.= for example. 

encl. = enclitic. 

Eng. = English. 

Ep. = Epic. 

epith. = epithet. 

equiv. = equivalent. 

esp. = especial, especially. 
etc. = and so forth. 

excl. = exclamation. 

f., ff.—following (after numerical 


statements). 
fem. = feminine. 
Jin. = sub fine. 


freq. = frequently. 

fut. = future. 

G. = Goodwin’s Greek Grammar. 
gen. = genitive. Ἷ 
GMT.=Goodwin’s Moods and Tenses. 
H. = Hadley’s Greek Grammar. 

hist. pres. = historical present. 


ἝΞ 


Wily 


Ri la roe & 


ah ἔστ τὴ oh a δι .% ἘΞ gf δ 
Fa iat Sar hy 
τ Ahi / 2 i * Ν ΤῊΝ ἦν 
ὶ Γ se . fs AF le 
ibid. = in the same place. plpf. = pluperfect. — 
id. = the same. pred, = predicate. — 
i.e. = that is. prep. = preposition. 
impers. = impersonal, impersonally. pres. = present. 
impf. = imperfect. priv. = privative. 


imy. = imperative. 

in. = ad initium. 

indef. = indefinite. 

indic. = indicative, 

indir. = indirect. 

inf. = infinitive. 

interr. = interrogative, interrogatively. 

intr. = intransitive, intransitively, 

Introd. = Introduction. 

Ion. = Ionic. 

Kr. Spr. = Kriiger’s Sprachlehre, Erster 
Theil. 

Kr. Dial = Kriiger’s Sprachlehre, Zwei- 
ter Theil. 

«7é.= καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. 

κτλ. = καὶ τὰ λοιπά. 

Κύμη. = Kiihner’s Ausfiihrliche Gram- 
matik. 


᾿ Lat. = Latin. 


L. &S.= Liddell and Scott’s Lexicon. 
l.c. = loco citato. 

lit. = literal, literally. 

masc. = masculine. 

mid. = middle. 

Ms., Mss. = manuscript, iin aeiahie 
N. = note, 

neg. = negative. 

neut. = neuter, 

nom. = nominative. 

obj. = object. 

obs. = observe, observation. 

opp. to = opposed to. 

opt. = optative. 

P., Pp. = page, pages. 

part. gen. = partitive genitive. 
partic. = participle. 

pass. = passive, passively. 

pers. = person, personal, personally. 
pf. = perfect. 


«δὴ ae ‘ wn ὰ = 


















prob. = probable, probably. 
pron. = pronoun. 
prop. = proper, properly. mae 
prot. = protasis. opi = 
quot. = quoted, quotation, — Ay. γ᾽ 
q.v.= which see. ‘ty 
refl. = reflexive, reflexively, 
= relative, relatively. — 
Rem. = remark. 
S.=Schmidt’s Rhythmic anda 
80. = scilicet. Ἂ : 
Schol. = scholiast, 
sent, = sentence, 


sing. = singular. 
subj. = subject. ἡ 
subjv. = subjunctive. Ν: ΜΑΙ 


subord. = subordinate. 
subst. = substantive, subs 
sup. = superlative. 
8.v.= sub voce. 
trans. = transitive, tra 
viz. = namely. 
v.l.= varia lectio. 
voc, = vocative. 


ὃ, §§ = section, sections, Ὁ 
Plurals are formed geneeae 
ing s. 


Generally small Roman 
(lower-case letters) ai 
referring to the bo 
author ; but A, B, Tr, 
ring to the books of 
and a, 8, y, ete. in ret 
the books of the Odys 


In abbreviating the —— 
authors and of their ν 
dell and Scott’s Ἱμεῖ: 
followed. Ta 


PA 

"Η 52 
Ads 

(888 


PREFACE. 


Tuts edition of Book V. of Thucydides is based upon Classen’s 
second edition, Berlin, 1882. 

The variations from Classen’s text — which are in most cases 
restorations of the Ms. reading — are explained in the notes. 

In the exegetical notes I have generally followed Classen 
closely, but have made many additions and changes. The edi- 
tions of Kriiger and Stahl have been of great value in the revision 
and criticism of the notes, and I have also taken material from 
Arnold’s and van Herwerden’s editions. Jowett’s translation has 
been of service in supplying convenient paraphrases. 

In the critical Appendix I have made considerable additions, 
especially in the parts relating to the treaties given in chapters 18, 
23, 47, 77, and 79, which have been carefully and accurately dis- 
cussed since the appearance of Classen’s last edition by my 
revered master, Ad. Kirchhoff. 

The Introduction is for the most part a translation of Classen’s 

‘ Vorbemerkungen,’ except that the discussion of Miiller-Striibing’s 
Aristophanes und die historische Kritik has been reduced from 
eighteen pages to two. 
"1 take pleasure in expressing my thanks to all who have aided 
me in my work, especially to Professor White, one of the editors- 
in-chief of this series, and to my friend Professor Goodwin, both 
of whom have assisted their former pupil with the greatest kind- 
ness. Both have corrected the proofs with patient care, and have 
offered many suggestions of the utmost value. 


HAROLD N. FOWLER. 
CAMBRIDGE, Mass., February, 1888. 





INTRODUCTION. 


Tue fifth book of Thucydides presents other and greater diffi- 
culties of interpretation than those which precede. In order to 
judge of these difficulties correctly, and, so far as possible, to 
overcome them, it is necessary to examine the nature and compo- 
sition of the entire book. 

The division of the whole extant history into eight books, is 
doubtless due not to Thucydides himself, but to later gramma- 
rians. See Introd. to Book I. p. 54. The purpose of this divis- 
ion was merely to resolve the work into a series of nearly equal 
parts, so that a comprehensive view of the whole should be made 
easier, and yet the connexion should not be destroyed. The gen- 
eral observations and preliminary notices which precede the narra- 
tive of the war itself naturally formed the first book ; the two main 
parts of the history, the account of the Archidamian war and that 
of the Sicilian war, remained to be divided symmetrically. This 
division was determined less by the contents than by the mere 
length of the narrative. The Archidamian war, which lasted for 
ten years, was divided into periods of three years, each of which 
occupied one book, and the tenth year was left over for the begin- 
ning of the fifth book, which was completed by the observations 
of the historian upon the period of some six years during which 
the peace of Nicias lasted. The connected narrative of the Sici- 
lian war occupied a space about equal to two of the preceding 
books, and books six and seven were formed out of it. 

The contents and character of the two parts thus combined to 
form the fifth book, are, however, essentially dissimilar. In the 
first part the narrative of the great war between Athens and 
Sparta is continued; in the second the various political intrigues 
and complications among the greater and smaller states of Greece, 
which led to the decisive conflict at Mantinea, are described. But 
these details are given with such minute accuracy concerning every 
phase of successful or unsuccessful intrigues and negotiations, 


2 INTRODUCTION. 


the personal motives of individuals (of Pleistoanax and Nicias in 
c. 16; of Alcibiades in ὁ. 43; 45; 46; of Agis in c. 71) are so 
carefully depicted, such a lively interest in Spartan affairs and 
customs is repeatedly expressed (in c. 34 ὃ 25 36 § 1; 66 § 2; 72 
§ 2; 75 § 8), an interest evidently arising from fresh impressions, 
that one cannot fail to observe a marked departure from the ordi- 
nary style of the author. On the other hand one not infrequently 
misses the ease and smoothness of expression which on2 might 
desire, and that sometimes in passages of special importance (as 
in c. 36 § 2; 49; 59; 65 ὃ 3; 69 ὃ 2; 71 § 2; 82 § 2 ff.), or 
short remarks, inserted where they have no special connexion, 
arouse rather than satisfy the desire for further explanation (ef. 6. 
31 § 63 32 § 1; 35 $1; 36§ 2; 38 § 4; 39 § 1; 51 and 52). 

The simplest explanation of these unusual phenomena which pre- 
sent themselves to the attentive reader of the fifth book seems to be 
that offered by Classen :' ‘* Though I am convinced that the whole 
work was written in the shape in which we have it after the con- 
clusion of the Peloponnesian war, and that Thucydides was called 
away from life when engaged in the last revision and combination 
of the portions which he had noted down and sketched in outline 
from the beginning of the war, yet I do not believe that all parts 
of the work received an equally thorough review. I think that the 
masterly introduction, which makes our first book, was first com- 
pleted with the full knowledge of the disastrous result of the 
twenty-seven-years war; that then the history of the ten-years 
war, and the Sicilian expedition, for which it is likely that the re- 
sults of laborious inquiry were already at hand more or less per- 
fectly worked out, received their final touches ; and that after this, 
before the thread of the narrative was taken up again with the 
Tonic-Decelean war, the intervening period of the εἰρήνη ὕπουλος was 
described.” 

During this period the chief opponents abstained, as Thucydides 
says, from direct hostilities against each other’s territory (ἀπέσχοντο 
μὴ ἐπὶ τὴν ἑκατέρων γῆν στρατεῦσαι, C. 25.12), but in the light of sub- 


1 In his Introd. to Book V. p.2f. to preserve the connexion. For other 
This has already been givenin the In- views on this subject and for refer- 
trod. to Book I., but is repeated here _ ences, see Introd. to Book I. p. 20 ff. 


INTRODUCTION. — 3 


sequent events the so-called peace appeared as an integral part of 
the whole war, and was consequently so treated by the historian. 
The description of this period constitutes by far the greater part 
of the fifth book. This description is very closely connected with 
the narrative of the last events of the ten-years war (the battle at 
Ampbhipolis and the interrupted expedition of the Lacedaemonians 
to Thrace, see c. 13) ; but still the change in style, the most strik- 
ing points of which have been mentioned above, appears even 
in the description of the feelings at Athens and Sparta which led 
to the peace, and of the negotiations which preceded the treaty. 

The narrative of Books 11., III., IV., and the first thirteen 
chapters of Book V., as well as that of Books VI. and VIL., ad- 
vances regularly and equally, and is based upon the careful use 
and arrangement of the observations and inquiries of the historian. 
But the study of the domestic and foreign intrigues and negotia- 
_ tions carried on among the states of Greece, and especially in 
Peloponnesus, imposed new methods upon him. Thucydides tells 
clearly enough how he succeeded in obtaining accurate information 
concerning those matters which naturally escape the notice of a 
distant observer: ξυνέβη por. . . γενομένῳ παρ᾽ ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγ- 
μασι, καὶ οὐχ ἧσσον τοῖς Πελοποννησίων διὰ φυγὴν καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν τι μᾶλ- 
λον αἴσθεσθαι, c. 26. 24 ff. Doubtless only his long sojourn in 
Peloponnesus, to which these words refer, and his intercourse 
with influential men in the most important states, enabled him to 
give us the instructive account of the secret intrigues which pre- 
ceded the fifty-years truce between Athens and Sparta, and espe- 
cially of the subsequent complications which centred for the most 
part in Argos (c. 27-83). 

At the same time the character of the work, as regards both its 
general tone and its contents, undergoes a change. In all other 
parts of the history, in the superb introduction in Book I. as well 
as in the lively narrative of the first ten-years war and in that 
of the second half of the war so far as it goes, we are made to 
feel that the entire sympathy of the author is with Athens, and that, 
even after he has been forced to leave his native country, Athens 
is still for him the central point of the story. In the account of 
the period of nominal peace this is all changed. Athens retires 


4 INTRODUCTION. 


to the background behind the Peloponnesian states, which are 
seeking their own advantage in the troublous ferment of changing 
party intrigues. Only when the restless ambition of Alcibiades 
succeeds in bringing his native city into the Argive alliance, does 
Athens once more become prominent in the detailed account of 
the negotiations which preceded the treaty of alliance (6. 43-46). 
There is, however, one point of specifically Attic interest which 
Thucydides does not neglect, — the relations of the allies in 
Thrace ; for οἱ ἐπὶ @paxns ξύμμαχοι οὐδὲν ἧσσον (in spite of the con- 
clusion of the peace) πολέμιοι ἦσαν, 6. 26.13. Although no great 
events took place in Thrace, he gives nevertheless an accurate 
though brief account of every movement and change of side. 
These are the isolated remarks mentioned above (c. 31 § 6; 32 
§ 1; 35 81; 38 ὃ 4; 39 ὃ 1), which show that the Thracian Chal- 
cidians seized every opportunity of freeing themselves more and 
more from the hated rule of Athens. An important expedition 
to Thrace which the Athenians had planned for the winter of 417— 
416 B.c. was not actually sent, owing to the defection of Perdiccas 
(see c. 83 § 4 and note). 

On the other hand Thucydides takes pains to make the most 
complete use of the information he derived from trustworthy 
sources concerning external and internal events in Peloponnesus, 
and to communicate to his readers his newly acquired insight into 
conditions with which he had previously been less familiar. The 
information he received seems to have been embodied in his 
history very much as he originally recorded it, and this may 
account for the marked attention given to the institutions and con- 
ditions of Sparta. Instances of this are the account of the disci- 
pline of the Lacedaemonian army (in c. 66), which is elaborated 
with evident interest, the description of the great effect of the 
personal bravery of the Lacedaemonians in the battle of Mantinea 
(in c. 72. 8 ff.), and of their conduct after a battle (in ὁ. 73. 
22 ff.). These and similar passages seem like notes taken from 
personal observation or from conversation with eye-witnesses. 

These portions of the book, when compared with the rest of the 
history, exhibit sometimes a less polished mode of expression, and 
sometimes, probably in consequence of a special striving after 


INTRODUCTION. 5 


clearness, contain repetitions of similar words and phrases. Both 
defects are exemplified in the chapters which form the transition 
from the account of the last warlike events in the autumn of 422 
B.c. to that of the negotiations for the peace in the spring of 
421 5.0. (6. 14 ff.). The account of the return of the Lacedae- 
monian re-inforcements under Rhamphias closes at the end of 
¢. 13 with the remark that they knew τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, dre ἐξήεσαν; 
πρὸς τὴν εἰρήνην μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην ἔχοντας. At the beginning of c. 
14 it is stated in the same words, which here apply to both parties, 
that Athenians and Lacedaemonians alike πρὸς τὴν εἰρήνην μᾶλλον 
τὴν γνώμην εἶχον. In these words we may recognize the joint by 
which the narrative of the internal and external reasons which 
increased the desire for peace in both places, and of the conclu- 
sion of the peace itself, is connected with the reports of the last 
warlike movements, which may have been noted some time before. 
Nor can it be denied that the narrative itself contains a number 
of unusual and incongruent expressions. It is not without rea- 
son that Julius Steup (Rhein. Mus. 25, p. 273-305) finds many 
difficulties and much to criticise in this account, but the radical 
doctrine of interpolations which he adopts is not necessary. With 
the exception of the passage in c. 15. 5, for which a certain emen- 
dation has not yet been proposed, and that in c. 16. 6, which 
Stahl has probably restored to its proper form, all difficulties can 
be overcome by a careful method of interpretation proceeding 
from the proper point of view. For particulars, see the commen- 
tary and the Appendix on ¢. 17. 6.? 


ten-years war was written in the first 
place after 421 B.c., or even after 404 


2 According to the view above ex- 
pressed (see also p. 3), which is that 


of Classen, the dividing line between 
the narrative of the first ten-years 
war and the account of the unsettled 
period which began with the peace 
of Nicias is to be sought at the end 
of c. 13. Steup, Quaest. Thuc., and 
Herbst, Philol. 1879, p. 503 (see also 
p. 434) put it at the end of c. 24. 
Kirchhoff, Sitzungsber. d. Berl. Akad. 
1882, p. 937 ff. and 1883, p. 838, sets 
it at the end of c. 20. If, as seems 
most probable, the narrative of the 


B.C., it would certainly be remarkable 
if the account of the treaties in c. 18f. 
and c. 23 f., with which this part of 
the war ended, were not contained in 
it. Still Classen’s reasons for mark- 
ing the division after c. 13 as given 
above are not without weight. As 
this part of the book was doubtless 
re-written for the express purpose of 
hiding the point of division, it may be 
impossible to fix its position accu- 
rately. 


θ INTRODUCTION. 


By laying before his readers an account of the reasons for the 
change in the policy of Athens and Sparta, and by communicat- 
ing to them the documents recording the peace and the alliance 
between the two states, the historian prepared the ground for the 
presentation of the new times and newevents. It was natural that 
he should wish to prefix to this part of his work beside a brief 
statement of its contents, the proof of the intimate connexion be- 
tween the two periods of war which are apparently separated by a 
peace of more than six years (but which form, in the eyes of the 
careful observer, one whole) as well as the evidence of his own fit- 
ness for the office of historian of this whole period, an office made 
materially easier for him by the events of his life. This he does 
inc. 25 and 26. Just as he begins the whole work by introducing 
himself to his readers, so here, where he begins the treatment of 
material different from that of the preceding books, Thucydides 
brings himself to our notice and seeks to awaken our confidence 
in his will and ability to furnish us a faithful picture of events. 

If we now cast our eyes over the events of the following period 
of so-called peace which lasted somewhat more than six years (from 
c. 27 to 83), the chief impression we derive is this: that amid the 
political complications and bickerings which chiefly occupy this 
period (τὴν μετὰ τὰ δέκα ἔτη διαφοράν τε καὶ ξύγχυσιν τῶν σπονδῶν) the 
hand of a powerful leader is everywhere lacking. In all the more 
important states parties stand opposed to one another with methods 
of violence or intrigue, and their leaders are without personal 
authority or dignity. In Sparta the weak King Pleistoanax and 
his followers, who are driven by pitiful fear to strive anxiously for 
peace (see c. 17), are opposed to the Ephors Cleobulus and Xenares, 
who urge the continuance of the war (see c. 36. 7 ff.), and who find 
in King Agis a pliant but powerless instrument of their designs (see 
c. 54 ff.). In Argos the oligarchical and the democratic parties, 
encouraged, the one by Sparta, the other by Athens, contend with 
various success; but both are always ready to receive proposals 
of worse than doubtful character, and therefore afford Alcibiades 
welcome opportunities for ambitious intrigues-and interference. 
Finally, in Athens we find in its full development that state of 
things which Thucydides describes in fitting terms in ii. 65. 41, in 


INTRODUCTION. . 7 


which the men who succeeded Pericles in the conduct of affairs 
ἴσοι αὐτοὶ μᾶλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὄντες TOD πρῶτος ἕκαστος γίγνεσθαι 
wpéyovro; and now especially the rising ambition of Alcibiades 
strove to gain the upper hand over the-deliberate caution of the 
aged Nicias who longed for rest and quiet (see c. 43 ff.). To be 
sure, the historian, in accordance with his principle, shows us only 
so much of the internal movements of party strife as is necessary 
for the explanation of the position of Athens toward the other 
states, and gives full information only of the negotiations in the 
Athenian assembly which the cunning of Alcibiades so conducted 
as to bring about the conclusion of the treaty with Argos and her 
allies, inc. 97. But he shows with how little energy and consis- 
tency the external policy of Athens was conducted at this time 
and throughout the whole of this period. The troops which had 
been promised to aid the Argives came too late (see c. 59. 15) 
and in insufficient numbers (see c. 61. 1), so that the battle of 
Mantinea was not merely a defeat for the Argives, but inflicted 
heavy losses upon the Athenians as well (see c. 74.9). The de- 
tailed narrative of the military operations which preceded this de- 
cisive battle, and of the external influences brought to bear upon 
them, presents a picture which reflects little credit upon Argives 
or Lacedaemonians (see especially c. 58; 60; 64; 65 f.), and 
something of the indecision and uncertainty to be observed in the 
movements of the troops seems to have passed over into the nar- 
rative of the historian. Repeated revision might have infused 
greater clearness into these passages, and their obscurity must be 
ascribed in part to the. carelessness of copyists, as is often re- 
marked in the commentary ; but the comparative want of precision 
in the narrative is due in great measure to its sympathetic repro- 
duction of the vacillating course of events themselves. 

It is deserving of special notice that Thucydides, before turn- 
ing in the following book to the narration of the Sicilian expe- 
dition, with which the second great period of war begins, employs 
with great art and care a device not elsewhere to be found, in 
order to place in the proper light the spirit which then governed 
the policy of Athens. After it has been determined that the inde- 
pendence of the last of the Cyclades, the Doric Melos, must be 


πω INTRODUCTION. 


destroyed by violence or voluntary submission, the leaders of the 
Athenian besieging force engage in a dialogue with the representa- 
tives of the besieged inhabitants, in which they express with undis- 
guised openness the doctrine of the right of the stronger and the 
motives of naked self-aggrandizement, in accordance with which 
they reject every petition for indulgence and clemency (6. 85-- 
113). And the theoretical justification of the method of brute 
force is immediately followed by its execution. The fifth book 
closes with the fall of the bravely defended town and the cruel 
punishment of its inhabitants. From this last part of the book a 
ray of light is cast forward upon fhe prevailing character of the 
second chief period of the Peloponnesian war. 

From this summary it appears that the fifth book is, as regards 
by far the greater part, a well-planned connecting link between 
the two chief portions of the great history, just as the period of 
uncertain peace was itself recognized by the historian as an inte- 
gral part of the great Peloponnesian war. For the attentive reader 
there remain, to be sure, some inequalities in the style of the nar- 
rative, some difficulties in expression, which can be entirely done 
away with only by repeated consideration and study. Yet with 
all its defects the fifth book affords us a no less clear and satis- 
factory insight into the events of which it treats, than the other 
extant parts of this immortal work. 

The remainder of Classen’s introduction is taken up with a 
sharp discussion and severe criticism of Miiller-Striibing’s Aris- 
tophanes und die historische Kritik, Leipsic, 1873. This writer 
believes that Thucydides, if not actually guilty of falsehood, at 
any rate habitually suppresses part of the truth, especially in 
matters connected with Athenian politics. His opinion is based 
mainly upon a theory that the real ruler of Athens and the Athe- 
nian empire in the fifth century B.c. was the minister of finance 
(6 ταμίας τῆς κοινῆς προσόδου Or ἐπιμελητὴς τῆς διοικήσεως), WhO was 
elected once in four years. This election was naturally of the 
very highest importance, so that one cannot wonder if the strife 
of parties was very violent in Athens once in four years, even to 
the extent of interfering with her external policy and the conduct 
of her wars. Now Thucydides nowhere mentions the ταμίας τῆς 


INTRODUCTION. 9 


προσόδου nor the disturbance caused by these elections; conse- 
quently the uncertain conduct of the Athenians, especially during 
the period treated in the fifth book, is left unexplained, although 
it was the duty of Thucydides to explain it by giving us full infor- 
mation concerning the elections of this all-important functionary. 
This, however, according to Miiller-Striibing, he intentionally neg- 
lected to do on account of his own political position or affilia- 
tions. Miiller-Striibing does not prove that the ταμίας τῆς προσόδου 
existed in the fifth century B.c., and there appear to be sufficient 
reasons for believing that the office was a later creation,’ so that 
this theory falls to the ground. Miiler-Striibing’s explanation 
(p. 400 ff.) of the peculiarly vacillating and undecided conduct not 
only of the Athenians, but also of Argives and Lacedaemonians, 
in the summer of 418 B.c. (see c. 56-61) is based entirely upon 
this theory, and therefore need not be controverted in detail. 
The second point which requires special mention because of its 
bearing upon the character of Thucydides as historian of the 
period succeeding the peace of Nicias, is the discussion (p. 
426 ff.) of Thracian affairs, with special reference to ὁ. 83 
§ 4. According to Thucydides the only important military oper- 
ation of the Athenians in Thrace after the loss of Amphipolis 
in the autumn of 424 B.c. was the attempt to recapture that 
town, which ended with the death of Cleon in November of 
422 8.c. Not until 417 p.c. did the Athenians prepare to send a 
powerful expedition to protect their Thracian interests, and that 
expedition was given up on account of the defection of Perdiccas 
(see c. 83 § 4). Miuiller-Striibing thinks that the Athenians had 
had a large force in Thrace under the command of Demosthenes 
ever since 420 B.c., and that Thucydides is therefore conscionsly 


8 U. Kohler, in his essay zur Ge- 
schichte des delisch-attischen Bundes, in 
the Abhdln. ἃ. Berl. Akad, 1869, says: 
“Tt is yet to be proved that this 
finance-office existed at all before the 
archonship of Euclides.” Fellner, 
Sitzungsber. d. Wien. Akad. XCV. 
(1879) p. 382, says: “In my opin- 
ion the essays which have lately ap- 


peared have proved conclusively the 
impossibility of the existence of a 
superintendent of the finances (ém- 
μελητὴς τῆς διοικήσεως) before Eu- 
clides,’” after which he advances 
further arguments for his opinion. 
See also M. Frankel in the third 
edition of Boeckh’s Staatshaushaltung 
d, Athener, notes 269 and 277. 


10 INTRODUCTION, 


suppressing the truth. The main argument for this view is drawn 
from an inscription recording expenditures made from the treasury 
of Athens in the years 418 to 414 5.0. The inscription, which is 
very fragmentary, was first published by Rhangabé, Ant. Hell. 
No. 119, and afterwards by Boeckh, Staatshaushaltung 11... p. 
29 ff. with numerous restorations. It is now also published by 
Kirchhoff, C. I, A., I., 180-183, and by Miiller-Striibing, Rhein. 
Mus. 1878, p. 83 ff. In two places Boeckh read στρατηγοῖς τοῖς 
ἐπ᾿ “Hidvos τοῖς μετὰ Δημοσθένους. from which it would appear that 
Demosthenes was at this time (418 B.c.) in command of forces at 
Eion. But the letters upon the stone are in one case only os τοῖς 
μετὰ Δημοσθένους, and in the other, according to Lolling’s careful 
reading of the original, AOS (i.e. γος) τοῖς μετὰ Δημοσθένους with 
the remains of either a P or a B before γοςς The most probable 
restoration for both passages is, then, τοῖς és "Apyos τοῖς μετὰ Anpo- 
σθένους. (So Friinkel in the third edition of Boeckh’s Staatshaus- 
haltung, I1., p. 24, N. 4, and p. 25, nN. 2.) In spite of this Miiller- 
Striibing, Rhein. Mus. 1878, p. 83 ff., still maintains that Demos- 
thenes was general in Thrace at this time, but brings forward no 
new arguments to support this opinion now that the inscription 
has failed him. 

The other passages in Aristophanes und die historische Kritik 
which affect the interpretation of the fifth book of Thucydides 
are referred to in the commentary, for in spite of its fundamental 
error Miiller-Striibing’s book contains much which is instructive 
and valuable. 


THUCYDIDES V. 


Tov δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους 


* ΟἹ. 89. 2; B.c, 422, Mar. 


* ε \ > 4 
αι μεν ἐνιαυσιοιῚ1 


. σπονδαὶ διελέλυντο μέχρι Πυθίων - καὶ ἐν τῇ ἐκεχειρίᾳ οἵ 


᾿Αθηναῖοι Δηλίους ἀνέστησαν ἐκ Δήλου, ἡγησάμενοι κατὰ 


΄ > sf > ‘ » ε “A ‘ 
παλαιάν τινα αἱἰτιαν ov καθαροὺς οντας ἱερῶσθαι, και 


a 5 Ν ΄ > = an ΄ὕ - ΄ , 
ἅμα ἐλλιπὲς σφίσιν εἶναι τοῦτο τῆς καθάρσεως, 4 πρότερόν 


μοι δεδήλωται ὡς ἀνελόντες τὰς θήκας τῶν τεθνεώτων 


> “A S28 “A Ν ε Ν ’ 3 4 
ὀρθῶς ἐνόμισαν ποιῆσαι. Kat ot μὲν Δήλιοι ᾿Ατραμύττειον 


4 4 > cal 5 ~ > ,’ὕ » 9 ε 
Φαρνάκου δόντος αὐτοῖς ἐν TH ᾿Ασίᾳ ῴκησαν, οὕτως ὡς 


Tae ΤΈΝΤΗ YEAR OF THE WAR. 
Chaps. 1-24. 

1. The Athenians for religious rea- 
sons drive the Delians from their island. 

2. ai σπονδαὶ διελέλυντο : the truce 
was at an end, but no warlike opera- 
tions are recorded until Cleon led 
the expedition to Thrace, after the 
Pythian festival (Metageitnion, Ol. 
89, 3, ie. Aug., 422 B.c.). See App. 
- ἐκεχειρίᾳ : here and in c. 2. 2; 49. 
14, the truce in consequence of the 
festival. See App.— 4. ἱερῶσθαι: pf. 
pass., depends upon ἡγησάμενοι. It 
refers to the purification and conse- 
eration of Delos which had taken 
place four years before (cf. iii. 104). 
The Athenians now thought that the 
Delians had at that time been conse- 
crated (again) to Apollo when they 
were not yet entirely purified and 
cleansed from an ancient pollution; 
that is, that the re-consecration had 
taken place too soon. But besides 
(καὶ Gua), they thought that the man- 


ner of purification (by removal of 
the coffins) had not been sufficiently 
thorough. — 5. ἢ πρότερόν μοι δεδή- 
λωται: upon this depends the indir. 
disc. ds... ἐνόμισαν ποιῆσαι : “In which 
I have before related that they be- 
lieved,” etc. See App. —7. ποιῆσαι: 
inf. aor. after ἐνόμισαν, refers to 
past time like νομίσαντες... ποιήσα- 
σθαι in vii. 17.9: they believed that in 
removing the coffins they had acted 
rightly. GMT. 23,2; H. 854. —’Arpa- 
μύττειον (not -τιον; here and in viii. 
108. 19 with Vat.): an important place 
on the coast of Mysia, near the foot 
of Mt. Ida.— 8. Φαρνάκου : Pharna- 
ces was at that time still satrap on 
the Hellespont. He was succeeded 
in this office by his son Pharnabazus. 
Cf. viii. 6. 3. — ὥρμητο: with ellipsis 
of οἰκῆσαι. So we might say as each 
man chose. Cf. ii. 67. 10; iv. 48. 26; 
74.43 Vili. 23. 2. 

The expulsion of the Delians is re- 
garded by Boeckh (Abh. d. Berl. 


19 THUCYDIDES V. 1, 2. * Ol. 89. 3; Β.0. 422, Aug. 


Ν 
2 ἕκαστος ὥρμητο. Κλέων δὲ ᾿Αθηναίους πείσας ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ 1 
΄ o> (app * yes > ΄ > ΄ 
Θράκης χωρία ἐξέπλευσε * μετὰ τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν, Αθηναίων 
» , \ , eo ΄ 
μὲν ὁπλίτας ἔχων διακοσίους καὶ χιλίους καὶ ἱππέας 
τριακοσίους, τῶν δὲ ξυμμάχων πλείους, ναῦς δὲ τριάκοντα. 
a Α 
δ σχὼν δὲ ἐς Σκιώνην πρῶτον ἔτι πολιορκουμένην καὶ 2 
‘ > ’ ε 4 lal nw ͵ 
προσλαβὼν αὐτόθεν ὁπλίτας τῶν φρουρῶν, κατέπλευσεν 
3 Ν Ν , “A , > / > Ν 
ἐς τὸν Κωφὸν λιμένα τῶν Τορωναίων, ἀπέχοντα οὐ πολὺ 
τῆς πόλεως. 
οὔτε Βρασίδας ἐν τῇ Τορώνῃ οὔτε οἱ ἐνόντες ἀξιόμαχοι 
10 εἶεν, τῇ μὲν στρατιᾷ τῇ πεζῇ ἐχώρει ἐς τὴν πόλιν, ναῦς 
καὶ πρὸς 4 
‘ , A > a a , an 
τὸ περιτείχισμα πρῶτον ἀφικνεῖται, ὃ προσπεριέβαλε TH 
’ ε 4 > Ν ’ὔ “A Ν ’ 
πόλει ὁ Βρασίδας ἐντὸς βουλόμενος ποιῆσαι τὸ προά- 


“ ν 
ἐκ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ, αἰσθόμενος ὑπ᾽ αὐτομόλων ὅτι 8 


δὲ περιέπεμψε δέκα ἐς τὸν λιμένα περιπλεῖν. 


Akad., 1834, p. 6 ff.) and Curtius 
(Hist. of Greece, III. p. 200) as an 
unjust and tyrannical measure. But 
perhaps the scrupulousness in matters 
of religion which is expressed in the 
beginning of the treaty of peace (iv. 
118. 1), and which caused the Delians 


to be brought back the very next year 


(c. 32. 4), was really the motive of 
the action of the Athenians. 

2. Cleon goes with fresh troops to the 
coast of Thrace, where the siege of Scione 
still continues, and attacks Torone by 
land and sea. 

1. ᾿Αθηναίους πείσας : some per- 
suasion appears to have been needed 
to induce the Athenians to begin the 
war again after the truce of the pre- 
ceding winter. 

5. σχὼν és: steering to. Cf. Hat. 
Vi. 92. 6, ἔσχον és τὴν ᾿Αργολίδα χώρην. 
- Σκιώνην ἔτι πολιορκουμένην : the 
beginning of this siege is mentioned 
in iv. 131. The Athenians had built 
a wall of circumvallation and left a 
guard, but their main force had been 


withdrawn. Cf. iv. 133. 15.—6. αὐτό- 
θεν... τῶν φρουρῶν: refers to the 
guard left at Scione, the ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ 
φυλακή of iv. 133.—7. Kodov λιμένα: 
see App. —Tav Τορωναίων : in the 
territory of the Toronaeans. The har- 
bour of Torone is not mentioned until 
11. 

8. αἰσθόμενος ὑπ᾽ αὐτομόλων: an 
exceptional const., αἰσθόμενος being 
treated as if it were διδαχθείς. The 
more natural prep. would be παρά, 
not Kriiger’s ἀπό. For this unusual 
use of ὑπό, see on i. 130. 3, ὧν ἐν 
μεγάλῳ ἀξιώματι ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων. 
Kiihn, 442, 1, 2 a.—9. οἱ ἐνόντες : of 
the garrison, as iv. 104.2; viii. 84. 14. 
A freq. use of ἐνεῖναι. --- 10. τῇ πεζῇ: 
epexegetical addition to στρατιᾷ. Cf. 
i. 95. 11, ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων τῶν aor 
κνουμένων ; iii. 54. 4. — ἐς τὴν πόλιν: 
against the city. Cf. ii. 18. 2, ἀφίκετο 
és Οἰνόην. --- 11. és τὸν λιμένα : see 
App. ; 
12. τὸ περιτείχισμα: Brasidas had 
united the suburb with the city (ἐντὸς 


THUCYDIDES V. 2, 3. 


\ Ν ~ lal 4 4 Se, > rf 
στειον, καὶ διελὼν τοῦ παλαιοῦ τείχους μίαν αὐτὴν ἐποίησε 
8 πόλιν. βοηθήσαντες δὲ ἐς αὐτὸ Πασιτελίδας τε ὁ Λακε- 
δαιμόνιος ἄρχων καὶ ἡ παροῦσα φυλακὴ προσβαλόντων 
~ > 7 > , a ε 3 , \ ε la 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἠμύνοντο. καὶ ὡς ἐβιάζοντο καὶ ai νῆες 
ν / > ἣν 7 A ὃ ’ 
ἅμα περιέπλεον ἐς τὸν λιμένα περιπεμφθεῖσαι, δείσας 
5 ὁ Πασιτελίδας μὴ αἵ τε νῆες φθάσωσι λαβοῦσαι ἐρῆ- 
μον τὴν πόλιν καὶ τοῦ τειχίσματος ἁλισκομένου ἐγκατα- 
ληφθῇ, ἀπολιπὼν αὐτὸ δρόμῳ ἐχώρει ἐς τὴν πόλιν. οἱ δὲ 
> la) , ν 5 Ν ~ Lal ε ’ἢ \ 
Αθηναῖοι φθάνουσιν οἵ τε ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν ἑλόντες τὴν 
Τορώνην καὶ ὁ πεζὸς ἐπισπόμενος αὐτοβοεὶ κατὰ τὸ δι- 
10 ῃρημένον τοῦ παλαιοῦ τείχους ξυνεσπεσών. καὶ τοὺς μὲν 
3 , ~ ϑ' ‘\ 7 5 ‘ 
ἀπέκτειναν. τῶν Πελοποννησίων Kat Τορωναίων εὐθὺς 


ἐν χερσί, τοὺς δὲ ζῶντας ἔλαβον καὶ Πασιτελίδαν τὸν ap- 


ποιήσας, cf. i. 62. 3; ii. 83. 5; vii. 5. 
14) by breaking down the old wall on 
this side, διελὼν τοῦ παλαιοῦ τείχους, 
and building a new one to enclose 
city and suburb alike. This is the 
περιτείχισμα ὃ προσπεριέβαλε τῇ πόλει. 
--14. καὶ διελὼν κτέ. : the rel. pron., 
which would here be in a new case 
(dat.) must be supplied from the pre- 
ceding 8. G. 156, Nn. Usually a dem. or 
pers. pron. is introduced, as ini. 74. 8; 
122. 14; ii. 4.24. H. 1005. — τείχους : 
gen. of the whole depending upon an 
unexpressed word denoting the part 
broken down, as in ii. 75. 24. Ὁ. 168, 
n. 2; Kiihn. 416, 1, n. 2. --- αὐτήν: 
agrees in gender with the pred. noun 
and refers to city and suburb. 

8. Cleon takes Torone in spite of the 
brave resistance of the inhabitants, who 
are treated with great severity. The 
Boeotians take Panactum, an Attic 
border fort. 

1. ΤΠασιτελίδας : Pasitelidas. Cf. iv. 
132. 19, where he is called Epitelidas. 
See note ad loc.—és αὐτό: into this 


advanced περιτείχισμα, Which (6 and 
17) is called simply τείχισμα, and from 
which he afterwards (7) retires into 
the city. —3. ἐβιάζοντο : pass., as in 
i. 2.4; iii. 94. 10.— 4. See App. — 5. 
φθάσωσι λαβοῦσαι: equiv: to πρότερον 
λάβωσι. 6. 279, 4; H. 984. 

7. οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι of re ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν 
καὶ ὁ πεζός: cf. ii. 95. 5; iii. 13. 19. 
With these two subjs. distributing oi 
᾿Αθηναῖοι agree respectively the two 
partics. ἑλόντες and ξυνεσπεσών, the 
latter being limited by ἐπισπόμενος, 
while both belong with φθάνουσιν. G. 
279, 4; H.984.—9. αὐτοβοεί : which is 
generally used in connexion with ἑλεῖν 
(ii. 81. 21; iii. 113. 29; viii. 62. 8), is 
here joined with ξυνεσπεσών which 
practically implies ἑλών. Cf. iii. 74. 8, 
αὐτοβοεὶ κρατήσειεν, and viii. 71. 12, 
αὐτοβοεὶ λήψεως οὐκ ἂν ἁμαρτεῖν. ---- τὸ 
διῃρημένον : (cf. c. 2. 14) the breach 
made by Brasidas in the old wall. — 
12. ἐν χερσί: in actual battle. ΟἿ. 
c. 10. 49; iii. 66. 10; iv. 96. 14; 113. 
6; vi. 70.1. A similar expression is 


14 


15 κοντα μάλιστα σταδίους μὴ φθάσαι ἐλθών. 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES V, 3. 


XovTa. 


Βρασίδας δὲ ἐβοήθει μὲν τῇ Topdvy, αἰσθόμενος 3 


δὲ καθ᾽ ὁδὸν ἑαλωκυῖαν ἀνεχώρησεν, ἀποσχὼν τεσσαρά- 


ὁ δὲ Κλέων 4 


Ν >.> “ a7 ᾿» ὃ , Ν Ἀ Ν 
καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τροπαιᾶ τε ἐστησαν OVO, TO μεν κατα 


Ν la Ν 4 Ν “A , Ν lal 
τὸν λιμένα, TO δὲ πρὸς τῷ τειχίσματι, Kal τῶν Τορω- 


, ° Ν Ν to > ὃ “ὃ 3 Ν δὲ 
VQAL@V γυναικας μεν και παιθᾶς Ἂν βᾶπο σαν, αὐυτους 


καὶ Πελοποννησίους καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλος Χαλκιδέων ἦν, ξύμ- 


3 ε , > , > Ν > ’ 4 
TAVTAaS ἐς ἑπτακοσίους, ἀπέπεμψαν ἐς τὰς Αθήνας" και 


> “ Ν A 7 9 > “ ’ 
αὐτοῖς τὸ μὲν Πελοποννήσιον ὕστερον ἐν ταῖς γενομέναις 


σπονδαῖς ἀπῆλθε, τὸ δὲ ἄλλο ἐκομίσθη ὑπ᾽ ᾿Ολυνθίων, 


ἀνὴρ ἀντ᾽ ἀνδρὸς λυθείς. 


Εἷλον δὲ καὶ Πάνακτον ᾿Αθηναίων ἐν μεθορίοις 


a) A σις, Ν 23% la , 4 We 
TELYOS Bowwrou ὑπὸ τὸν αυτον χβονον προδοσίᾳ. και ὁ 


ἐς χεῖρας ἰέναι, to come to blows. Cf. 
ii. 3. 21; iv. 72. 15, ἐλθεῖν és χεῖρας ; 
96. 7. 

14. ἀποσχών: denotes at once ac- 
tual distance (definitely expressed by 
τεσσαράκοντα μάλιστα σταδίους) and 
his failure to attain his end (which 
is negatively expressed in μὴ φθάσαι 
ἐλθών, cf. c. 25. 12). With the last 
phrase, cf. ii. 77. 19, ἐλαχίστου ἐδέησε 
διαφθεῖραι, where, however, μή is 
omitted. GMT. 95,2 and n. 1; H. 
1029. He was only about forty stadia 
removed from getting there before (the 
Athenians). 

19. εἴ τις ἄλλος Χαλκιδέων : stands 
in opposition to the αὐτούς, i.e. the men 
of Torone (cf. Hom. A. 4), who were 
also Chalcidians. The Athenians were 
esp. angry with those who had for- 
merly been their 411168. --- ξύμπαντας : 
as in iv. 129. 15, all together, expressing 
the sum total.— 21. αὐτοῖς : 1.6. the 
Athenians. Dat. of interest, as in i. 
48. 9, Κορινθίοις δὲ τὸ μὲν δεξιὸν κέρας 
αἱ Μεγαρίδες νῆες εἶχον; 89, 15, ἐπειδὴ 


αὐτοῖς οἱ βάρβαροι ἀπῆλθον; 101. 6, of 
Εἵλωτες αὐτοῖς ἀπέστησαν; iv. 42. 20; 
iv. 67. 24. 6. 184, 3; H. 771.— 
τὸ μὲν Πελοποννήσιον, τὸ δὲ ἄλλο: 
neut. sing. used as a collective noun. 
Cf. ii. 45. 5; iii. 39. 29, πέφυκε. .- 
ἄνθρωπος τὸ μὲν θεραπεῦον ὑπερφρονεῖν, 
τὸ δὲ μὴ ὑπεῖκον θαυμάζειν ; iv. 61. 19, 
πέφυκε γὰρ τὸ ἀνθρώπειον ἄρχειν μὲν 
τοῦ εἴκοντος, φυλάσσεσθαι δὲ τὸ ἐπιόν. 
- ἐν ταῖς... ἀπῆλθε : were set free in the 
treaty; cf. c. 18.35. The expression 
refers at once to the clause in thé 
treaty and its execution. —22. ἐκο- 
ploOy: were carried away in exchange. 
Of. i. 113. 14. — 23. ἀνὴρ ἀντ᾽ ἀνδρὸς 
λυθείς : ἀνήρ is here in partitive par- 
tic. appos. with τὸ ἄλλοι Cf. ii. 103. 
4, τούς τε ἐλευθέρους ἄγοντες, οἱ ἀνὴρ 
ἀντ᾽ ἀνδρὸς ἐλύθησαν. Κύμη, 406, 8, 
Ν. 11. 

24. Πάνακτον: Panactum was 8 
fortified place (τεῖχος) east of Eleu- 
therae and nearly north of Phyle, 
close to the Boeotian frontier. On its 
further fortunes, see c. 39, 40, 42. 


THUCYDIDES V. 3, 4. 15 


ya, , ?, , ~ , ΕἾ 
μὲν Κλέων φυλακήν καταστησάμενος τῆς Τορώνης ἄρας 
4 Ν » ε a: 2 ‘\ > ’ 
περιέπλει τὸν Λθων ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν. 
4 Φαίαξ δὲ ὁ ᾿Ἐρασιστράτου τρίτος αὐτὸς ᾿Αθηναίων 1 
Φ ᾿ Ἀ 3 5 3 , \ ’ 
πεμπόντων ναυσὶ δύο ἐς ᾿Ιταλίαν καὶ Σικελίαν πρεσβευ- 
‘ ε Ν Ν > Ἂς ld 955 2 A ἈΝ 
τὴς ὑπὸ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον ἐξέπλευσε. Λεοντῖνοι γὰρ 3 
ἀπελθόντων ᾿Αθηναίων ἐκ Σικελίας μετὰ τὴν ξύμβασιν 
δ πολίτας τε ἐπεγράψαντο πολλοὺς καὶ ὁ δῆμος τὴν γῆν 
> ’ > , ε \ Ν 5 ΄ 
ἐπενόει ἀναδάσασθαι. οἱ δὲ δυνατοὶ αἰσθόμενοι Συ- 3 
A > , Ἁ 5 ’ X “~ Ν 
ρακοσίους τε ἐπάγονται καὶ ἐκβάλλουσι τὸν δῆμον. καὶ 
ε Ἀ > / ε 4 ε Ν ἂν ἋΣ ’ 
οἱ μὲν ἐπλανήθησαν ὡς ἕκαστοι οἱ δὲ δυνατοὶ ὁμολογή- 
σαντες Συρακοσίοις καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἐκλιπόντες καὶ ἐρημώ- 
10 σαντες, Συρακούσας ἐπὶ πολιτείᾳ ῴἤκησαν. καὶ ὕστερον 4 


, 2 A \ x A. Ue 3 ΄ 3 
πάλιν αυτῶων τινες διὰ TO μὴ ἀρέσκεσθαι ἀπολιπόντες εκ 


27. ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν : i.e. to 
get it away from Brasidas. For the 
account of the capture of Amphipo- 
lis by Brasidas, see iv. 105 f. 

4, Phaeax is sent from Athens to 
Sicily, and tries without much success to 
form a coalition of the other Sicilian 
Greeks against the Syracusans. 

1. Φαίαξ: at that time one of the 
most noted Athenians. Cf Plut. Alc. 
13, where he is mentioned as a rival 
of Alcibiades. —-rplros αὐτός : with 
two others. Cf. i. 46. 7; viii. 35. 3, 
Δωριεὺς 6 Διαγόρου τρίτος αὐτός. 

3. Λεοντῖνοι γὰρ κτέ. : continuing to 
16, a short account of Sicilian affairs, 
since the time when they were last 
mentioned in iv. 65.—4. ἀπελθόντων 
᾿Αθηναίων : in the summer of 424 B.c., 
after Hermocrates had brought about 
the peace among the Sicilian Greeks. 
See iv. 65.—5. πολίτας τε ἐπεγρά- 
avro: they enrolled new citizens in 
order to strengthen the democratic 
party, and for their benefit a new 
division of land was to be made.— 


τὴν γῆν ἀναδάσασθαν:; cf dvadacuds 


γῆς, Hdt. iv. 159. 8, and the Attic 
oath of the heliasts, Dem. xxiv. 149. 
6. αἰσθόμενοι: with no expressed 
obj., refers to what precedes. Cf. i. 
95. 22, of δὲ αἰσθόμενοι ἀπῆλθον; 118. 
93" 126; 1: χὴν 1; 194.515 Boag: 8s 
iii. 22. 22; iv. 67. 8, and often. —8. 
ἐπλανήθησαν ὡς ἕκαστοι : they (i.e. the 
δῆμος.) were scattered in every direction. 
The aor. referring to continued action 
in the past because this is regarded 
as a single historical event. GMT. 
19, ν.2; H. 822¢. Cfi.6.7; 8.3; ii. 
2.2; iv. 56.2. The ellipsis after ὡς 
ἕκαστοι is to be supplied from ἐπλα- 
νήθησαν. --- 9. Συρακοσίοις, Συρακού- 
σας: see Αγ. --- ἐκλιπόντες καὶ ἐρη- 
μώσαντες : the fact that the city was 
left without inhabitants is empha- 
sized. —10. ἐπὶ πολιτείᾳ ῴκησαν : 
they settled (aor.) there upon the assur- 
ance of citizenship. Cf. i. 13. 5, ἐπὶ 
ῥητοῖς γέρασι πατρικαὶ βασιλεῖαι; iii. 114. 
14, ξυμμαχίαν ἐποιήσαντο ἐπὶ τοῖσδε. 
The dat. with ἐπί expresses the con- 
dition upon which anything is done. 
11, ἀρέσκεσθαι: being contented, 


THUCYDIDES V. 4. 


nw an “ ’ὔ ὕ ; ~~ 

τῶν Συρακουσῶν Φωκαίας τε τῆς πόλεώς τι τῆς Λεον- 
‘\ 

τίνων χωρίον καλούμενον καταλαμβάνουσι καὶ Βρικιν- 


a ΄, 
vias ὃν ἔρυμα ἐν τῇ ΔΛεοντίνῃ. 


Ἀ “ lal 4 , 
καὶ τῶν τοῦ δήμου τότε 


ad Ν / 
15 ἐκπεσόντων οἱ πολλοὶ ἦλθον ὡς αὐτούς, Kal καταστάν- 


τες ἐκ τῶν τειχῶν ἐπολέμουν. 


ἃ πυνθανόμενοι οἱ ᾿Αθη- 


vaio. τὸν Φαίακα πέμπουσιν, εἴ πως πείσαντες τοὺς σφί- 
σιν ὄντας αὐτόθι ξυμμάχους καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους, ἣν δύ- 
νωνται, Σικελιώτας κοινῇ ὡς Συρακοσίων δύναμιν περι- 
20 ποιουμένων ἐπιστρατεῦσαι, διασώσειαν τὸν δῆμον τῶν 


, 
Λεοντίνων. 


ὁ δὲ Φαίαξ ἀφικόμενος τοὺς μὲν Καμαρι- 


’, 
vaiovs πείθει καὶ ᾿Ακραγαντίνους, ἐν δὲ Γέλᾳ ἀντιστάν- 
΄ῪΝὉἩΝ nw » 
τος αὐτῷ τοῦ πράγματος οὐκέτι ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἔρχεται, 

> , > a , > , > ar) ΄ 
αἰσθόμενος οὐκ ἂν πείθειν αὐτούς, ἀλλ᾽ ἀναχωρήσας 
‘ al a > , ᾿ς, Ἄγριος 3 inl , Ν 
25 διὰ τῶν Σικελῶν ἐς Κατάνην, καὶ ἅμα ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ καὶ 


with and without dat. Cf. c. 37.19; 
ii. 68. 7.— ἀπολιπόντες ἐκ: as in iii. 
10, 8, ἀπολιπόντων ὑμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Μηδικοῦ 
πολέμου. Kiihn. 447 c.—12. τῆς πό- 
λεως τι χωρίον : apparently a suburb 
οὗ Leontini, the name of which points 
to a connexion with the Ionic Pho- 
caea (see Holm, Gesch. Siciliens, I. p. 
198), while the fortress of Bricinniae 
was prob. ata greater distance from the 
city, though in the Leontine territory 
(ἐν τῇ Λεοντίνῃ, Holm, II. p. 9). — 14. 
ὄν: agrees with the pred. ἔρυμα. (71. το. 
1. G.135,3,n.4; H.610; Kiihn. 369, 3. 

15. ὡς αὐτούς: i.e. to join them. — 
καταστάντες : 1.6. after they had estab-. 
lished themselves and made prepara- 
tions for defence. Cf.i. 59. 7; ii. 1. 
3; iv. 75.8.—16. ἐκ τῶν τειχῶν : from 
the (two) fortified places.— ἐπολέμουν : 
they carried on war against the Syra- 
cusans. The impf. denotes the con- 
dition of hostility, not definite events. 
- ἃ πυνθανόμενοι xré.: returns to the 
beginning of the chap. — 17, εἴ mas... 


διασώσειαν xré.: in case they should 
persuade, etc., and so save the δῆμος. 
An idea of purpose is implied as an 
apod. The whole is equiv. to a clause 
expressing intention. GMT. 53, x. 2; 
H. 907.—rovg ... ξυμμάχους : refer- 
ring to the conditions which existed 
before 424 s.c. (iv. 65). See iii. 86. 
—19. κοινῇ : with ἐπιστρατεῦσαι, the 
motive for a joint campaign being 
the continual (pres. partic. περιποιου- 
μένων) aggressions of the Syracusans. 
2. ἀντιστάντος aire τοῦ 
paros: since his undertaking did not 
prosper. Asinc, 38.20, ds δὲ ἀντέστη 
τὸ πρᾶγμα, in accordance with the 
well-known meaning of πράσσειν, un- 
dertake, or carry on an undertaking. 
Cf. i. 128. 13, τὰ πρὸς βασιλέα πράγ- 
ματα πράσσειν; iv. 1. 4, ἔπραξαν δὲ 
τοῦτο οἱ Συρακόσιοι. ---- 24. αἰσθόμενος : 
see App. — 25. διὰ τῶν Σικελῶν : the 
Sicels in the country behind Syracuse, 


6 


—év τῇ παρόδῳ: on the march from | 


Gela to Catana, This also goes to 


THUCYDIDES V. 4, 5. 


> ‘ , > s \ , <9 

és τὰς Bpixwvias ἐλθὼν καὶ παραθαρσύνας, ἀπέπλει. 

ὅ ἐν δὲ τῇ παρακομιδῇ τῇ. ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν καὶ πά- 
> 4 Ἁ > Ὁ“ 3 4 Ν ’ 5 ΄ 

hw ἀναχωρήσει καὶ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ιταλίᾳ τισὶ πόλεσιν ἐχρημά- 


Ἁ 4 “ > 7 Ἀ “ 3 ’ 
τισε περὶ φιλίας τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ Λοκρῶν ἐντυγχάνει 
lal i / 
τοῖς ἐκ Μεσσήνης ἐποίκοις ἐκπεπτωκόσιν, οἱ μετὰ THY 


5 Σικελιωτῶν ὁμολογίαν στασιασάντων Μεσσηνίων καὶ 


10 


» ὕ “Ἢ δ» Ὁ Ν ᾿»» > , 
ἐπαγαγομένων τῶν ἑτέρων Λοκροὺς ἔποικοι ἐξεπέμφθη- 


Ja Bed /, “ , 
σαν και ἐγένετο Μεσσηνη Λοκρὼν τινα Xpovov. 


οὖν ὁ Φαίαξ ἐντυχὼν [τοῖς κομιζομένοις) οὐκ ἠδίκησεν - 
ἐγεγένητο γὰρ τοῖς Λοκροῖς πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁμολογία ξυμβά- 


la A ‘ > , 
σεως πέρι πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. 


μόνοι γὰρ τῶν ξυμμά- 


χων, ὅτε Σικελιῶται ξυνηλλάσσοντο, οὐκ ἐσπείσαντο 


prove that Bricinniae lay some dis- 
tance inland from Leontini. 

5. Phaeax, after negotiations with 
several cities of Italy, returns to Athens. 

1. τῇ παρακομιδῇ Kal ἀναχωρήσει: 
the two corresponding nouns with but 
one art., as in i. 120. 10, τὴν κατακομι- 
δὴν καὶ πάλιν ἀντίληψιν, and ii. 64. 27. 
- 2. ἐχρημάτισε: λόγους προσήνεγκε, 
Schol. This is used in like manner of 
conducting public business in c. 61.6; 
i. 87. 17. With the dat., here only. 
Of the conduct of money matters, the 
mid. χρηματίζεσθαι is used in vii. 13. 
13.— 3. φιλίας τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις: cf 
i. 63. 9, τοῖς Ποτειδαιάταις βοηθοί; iii. 
66.17; iv. 23. 4. The dat. depends 
upon the verbal force of φιλίας (ἃ. 
185; H. 765 a) in spite of the fact 
that φιλέω takes the acc. Kiihn. 424, 
2.—4. ἐκπεπτωκόσιν : the attrib. par- 
tic. is not infrequently put by Thuc. 
after its subst. when the latter is fur- 
ther limited by other words. Cf i. 
11. 19; 90. 6; and often. Perhaps, 
however, Cobet (Mnem. 14, p. 4) is 
right in omitting ἐποίκοις as a gloss. — 


τὴν Σικελιωτῶν ὁμολογίαν : the terms 


of this agreement between Athens 
and the Sicilians (424 B.c.) are given 
in iv. 65.—5. στασιασάντων Μεσση- 
viev: Messene was disturbed by fac- 
tions from its foundation to the latest 
times. See vi. 4. 24 ff., and A. Hohn, 
Gesch. Siciliens, I. p. 198 ff.— 6. τῶν 
ἑτέρων : doubtless the Ionic portion 
of the population, which had been 
subjected by Anaxilas (vi. 4. 34 ff.). 
These people, from the moment of 
their first appearance in Sicily, had 
had dealings with the Epizephyrian 
Locrians (Hdt. vi. 23). — ἐξεπέμ- 
θησαν: i.e. by the Locrians to Mes- 
sene in accordance with the invita- 
tion (ἐπαγαγομένων) .---Ἶ. καὶ éyévero: 
joined to the rel. clause in loose 
grammatical connexion. Cf. c. 2. 14. 
8. [rots κομιζομένοις}: see App. 
— 9. ἐγεγένητο yap: on his way te 
Sicily, Phaeax had made a prelimi- 
nary arrangement with the Locrians, 
who had hitherto been averse to the 
Athenian alliance. 
11. οὐκ ἐσπείσαντο: they made no 
treaty, wishing to be free to take 
advantage of any opportunities which 


i 


τούτοις 2 


THUCYDIDES V. 5, 6. 


R : 
᾿Αθηναίοις, οὐδ᾽ ἂν τότε, εἰ μὴ αὐτοὺς κατεῖχεν ὁ πρὸς 
ε ’ ‘ ‘4 / «ε ΄ ¥ εν 
Ἱπωνιέας καὶ Μεδμαίους πόλεμος, ὁμόρους τε ὄντας Kal 


ἀποίκους. 
> ’ 
15 ρον ἀφίκετο. 


καὶ ὁ μὲν Φαίαξ ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας χρόνῳ ὕστε- 


‘O δὲ Κλέων ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς Τορώνης τότε περιέπλευ- 
σεν ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν, ὁρμώμενος ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ηιόνος Στα- 


΄ \ , > , 3 , Ν > . 2 
γείρῳ μεν προσβάλλει Ανδρίων ἀποικιᾳ καὶ οὐχ εἷλε, 


Γαληψὸν δὲ τὴν Θασίων ἀποικίαν λαμβάνει κατὰ κράτος. 


δ καὶ πέμψας ὡς Περδίκκαν πρέσβεις, ὅπως παραγένοιτο 
στρατιᾷ κατὰ τὸ ξυμμαχικόν, καὶ ἐς τὴν Θράκην ἄλλους 
παρὰ Πολλῆν τῶν Ὀδομάντων βασιλέα, ἄξοντας μισθοῦ 


Θ ”~ ε λ ’ 3) ε 4 id > A 
ρᾷκας ws πλείστους, αὐτὸς ἡσύχαζε περιμένων ἐν TH 


ἮἨΙόνι. 


Βρασίδας δὲ πυνθανόμενος ταῦτα ἀντεκάθητο 


10 καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπὶ τῷ Κερδυλίῳ - ἔστι δὲ τὸ χωρίον τοῦτο Ap- 


γιλίων ἐπὶ μετεώρου πέραν 
έχον τῇς ᾿Αμφιπόλεως, καὶ 


might be offered them, such as the 
occurrences at Messene above referred 
to.— 12. οὐδ᾽ ἂν τότε : sc. ἐσπείσαντο. 
— 13. Ἱπωνιέας καὶ Μεδμαίους : see 
App. 

6. Cleon and Brasidas collect rein- 
Sorcements, and take up positions oppo- 
site one another near Amphipolis. 

1, tore: refers to c. 3. 27. τότε 
often refers in this way to a time 
which is supposed to be well known 
to the reader. Cf i. 101. 8; iii. 69. 2; 
iv. 46.5; v. 4.14; and see oni. ror. 
8.—2. Zrayelpw (Strabo vii. frg. 35 
and Steph. Byz. have =rdyecpa): north 
of Acanthus, on the Strymonian Gulf. 
Of. Hat. vii. 115. 6. The birthplace 
of Aristotle. St. now reads here and 
in 6. 18, 25 (not iv. 88. 9) Στάγιρος, 
ace. to the inscriptions. — 4. Tadn- 
ov: between the Strymon and the 


TOU ποταμοῦ, οὐ πολὺ ἀπ- 
’ὔ , > / 
κατεφαίνετο πάντα αὐτόθεν, 


Nestus. Cf. iv. 107, 12; Diod. xii. 
68; Strabo, vii. 35; Steph. Byz. s.v. 

6. κατὰ τὸ ξυμμαχικόν: the alli- 
ance had been renewed, iv. 132. 2. 
—7. τῶν (with Vat. for τὸν) *OS0- 
μάντων: cf. ii. 101.12. This tribe is 
mentioned by Hdt. vii. 112. 7. Its 
home was apparently in the plain 
between Strymon and Nestus. — 
τας: with Linwood (Jahrbb. 1862, p. 
200) for ἄξοντα, for this intention 
must be ascribed to the envoys, not 
to the foreign chief.— μισθοῦ : gen. 
of price, as in iv. 124. 22; vii. 25. 34. 
G. 178; H. 746; Kr. Spr. 47, 17, 8, 
Cf. Ar. Ach, 144.—9. "Huw: of. iv. 
τοῦ. 17 and 18.--- ἀντεκάθητο kal αὐτός: 
refers to ἡσύχαζε (sc. ὃ Κλέων) of the 
preceding line. 

10. ᾿Αργιλίων : in the territory of 
Argilos, but on the right bank of the 


2 


4 ΟἹ. 89.3; 5.0. 422, Sept. 


THUCYDIDES V. 6, 7. 


ὥστε οὐκ ἂν ἔλαθεν αὐτὸν ὁρμώμενος ὁ Κλέων τῷ στρατῷ, 


ν , 4 > , $...% Ν > 4 
ὅπερ προσεδέχετο ποιήσειν αὐτόν, ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν, 


16 ὑπεριδόντα σφῶν τὸ πλῆθος, τῇ παρούσῃ στρατιᾷ ἀνα- 


4 a ἈΝ eA , m td 
βήσεσθαι. ἅμα δὲ καὶ παρεσκευάζετο Θρᾷκάς τε μισθω-. 


Ν 7 ‘ 7 A ‘ > “ id 
τοὺς πεντακοσίους καὶ χιλίους καὶ τοὺς ᾿Ηδῶνας πάν- 


~~ A 4 e , A 4 
Tas παρακαλῶν, πελταστὰς Kal ἱππέας" καὶ Μυρκινίων 


καὶ Χαλκιδέων χιλίους πελταστὰς εἶχε πρὸς τοῖς ἐν : 
τὸ δ᾽ ὁπλιτικὸν ξύμπαν ἠθροίσθη δισχίλιοι 5 


20 ᾿Αμφιπόλει. 


μάλιστα καὶ ἱππῆς Ἕλληνες τριακόσιοι. 


4 ΄ 
τούτων Βρασί- 


ὃ Ἀ ¥ > 8 ὃ a > , > ‘4 a 
᾿ς Bas μὲν ἔχων ἐπὶ Κερδυλίῳ ἐκάθητο ἐς πεντακοσίους καὶ 
χιλίους, οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει μετὰ Κλεαρίδου ἐτε- 


7 τάχατο. 


σθη ποιῆσαι ὅπερ ὁ Βρασίδας προσεδέχετο. 


ὁ δὲ Κλέων τέως μὲν ἡσύχαζεν, * ἔπειτα ἠναγκά- 


στρατιωτῶν ἀχθομένων μὲν τῇ ἕδρᾳ, ἀναλογιζομένων δὲ 


Strymon. —11. οὐ πολύ: about 20 
stadia. —13. αὐτόν : Cl. and one Ms. 
for αὐτόθεν, the repetition of which 
is useless. This renewed mention of 
Brasidas makes his intention in occu- 
pying Cerdylium more prominent, and 
makes the connexion of the following 
προσεδέχετο and παρεσκευάζετο easier. 
(St. and Schiitz, with three Mss., omit 
αὐτόθεν.) --- 14. ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν 
... ἀναβήσεσθαι : explaining the pre- 
ceding ὅπερ. .. ποιήσειν. Cf. iii. 59. 
18, ὅπερ ἀναγκαῖον ... τοῖς ὧδε ἔχουσι, 
λόγου τελευτᾶν. ---15. τῇ παρούσῃ 
στρατιᾷ: without waiting for his ex- 
pected reinforcements. 

16. Θρᾷκας τε xré.: to be taken 
with παρακαλῶν, not with παρεσκευά- 
(ero, which is used abs. as often 
elsewhere. Cf. ii. 11. 22; iii. 46. 9; 
vii. 34.4; vill. 10.4. The te... καί 
admits of no other const., and, more- 
over, the opposition between τοὺς 
*Hdavas πάντας and the definite num- 
ber of the other Thracians is made 


more evident in this way.—18. Muvp- 
κινίων: Myrcinus, also an Edonian 
city, had been for some time in alli- 
ance with Brasidas. Cf. iv. 107. 9. 

21. ἱππῆς Ἕλληνες : to distinguish 
them from the Edonians of 18. — τού- 
των: part. gen. It depends upon the 
obj. of ἔχων implied in és πεντακοσί- 
ovs καὶ χιλίουσ. About 1500 of these. 
— 23. μετὰ Κλεαρίδου: he was sta- 
tioned at Amphipolis. Cf iv. 132. 19. 
—érerdxaro: this form (or the pf. 
τετάχαται) occurs also in iii. 13. 18; 
iv. 31. 7; vii. 4. 34. 6. 118, 5, n.3 
119, 3; H. 464 a. 

7. Cleon is forced by the impatienee 
of his men to march out and reconnoitre. 

1. ἔπειτα: after ἔπειτα, when μέν 
precedes, δέ is sometimes found, and 
sometimes not; examples of both uses 
are about equally numerous. Here 
the Mss. omit δέ. 

3. τῇ ἕδρᾳ: like ii. 18. 19, τῇ nade 
dpa. τῇ προσμονῇ, Schol. Cf. Hat. ix. 
41. 4.— τῶν στρατιωτῶν ἀναλογιζομέ- 


19 


1 


τῶν γὰρ 2 


20 


THUCYDIDES V. 7. 


τὴν ἐκείνου ἡγεμονίαν, πρὸς οἵαν ἐμπειρίαν καὶ τόλμαν 
5 μετὰ οἵας ἀνεπιστημοσύνης καὶ μαλακίας γενήσοιτο καὶ 
οἴκοθεν ὡς ἄκοντες αὐτῷ ξυνῆλθον, αἰσθόμενος τὸν 
θροῦν καὶ οὐ βουλόμενος, αὐτοὺς διὰ τὸ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καθ- 


μένους βαρύνεσθαι ἀναλαβὼν ἦγε. καὶ ἐχρήσατο τῷ 8. 
τρόπῳ, ᾧπερ καὶ ἐς τὴν Πύλον εὐτυχήσας ἐπίστευσέ τι 
al > ld Ν Ν ΘΝ ὦ 4 ε 3 
τὸ φρονεῖν - ἐς μάχην μὲν γὰρ οὐδὲ ἤλπισέν οἱ ἐπεξιέναι 
οὐδένα, κατὰ θέαν δὲ μᾶλλον ἔφη ἀναβαίνειν τοῦ χω- 


ρίου, καὶ τὴν μείζω παρασκευὴν περιέμενεν, οὐχ ὡς τῷ 
> “~ “ἡ > 4 4 5 3 ε 4 
ἀσφαλεῖ, ἣν ἀναγκάζηται, περισχήσων, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς κύκλῳ. 


‘\ 4 ε ’ ‘ ’ 
περιστὰς βίᾳ αἱρήσων τὴν πόλιν. 


ἐλθών τε καὶ καθίσας 4 


15 ἐπὶ λόφου καρτεροῦ πρὸ τῆς ᾿Αμφιπόλεως τὸν στρατόν, 
᾿ς 5 A Ν ATS) a 4 Ν Ἀ θέ 
αὐτὸς ἐθεᾶτο τὸ λιμνῶδες τοῦ Στρυμόνος καὶ τὴν θέσιν 


νων: cf. οἱ στρατιῶται ἀνελογίζοντο, 
viii. 83. 10, where the expression is 


‘used in the same sense as here. — 4, 


τὴν ἐκείνου ἡγεμονίαν : proleptic. Cf. 
i. 23. 26, αἱ δ᾽ ἐς τὸ φανερὺν λεγόμεναι 
αἰτίαι αἵδ᾽ ἦσαν ἑκατέρων, ἀφ᾽ ὧν λύ- 
σαντες τὰς σπονδὰς ἐς τὸν πόλεμον κατ- 
ἔστησαν; ii. 21. 8, μεμνημένοι καὶ Πλει- 
στοάνακτα ὅτε ἐσβαλὼν ἐς ᾿Ἐλευσῖνα ἂν- 
εχώρησε. --- πρὸς οἵαν... μετὰ οἵας: 
the pron. is repeated with the same 
effect of emphasis as in vii. 75. 37. 
The opinion of Thuc. about Brasidas 
as well as Cleon remains the same, 
even after Cleon’s success at Pylos. 
See on iv. 28. 24 and 39. 11, and 
Introd. to Book I., p. 45.—5. ἀν- 
ἐπιστημοσύνης: does not occur else- 
where in Thue. The adj. occurs in ii. 
8g. 31, and freq. elsewhere. — 6. οἴκο- 
θεν: placed first in its clause, even 
before ὡς, for emphasis. C/f.i. 77. 4 ff. 
-- ξυνῆλθον : corresponds to ἐξῆλθε, c. 
8.7. See ΑΡΡ. --- καθημένους : remain- 
ing inactive, as in iv. 124. 24. See 
App. 


9. ᾧπερ... εὐτυχήσας ἐπίστευσέ τι 
φρονεῖν : (the manner) by which he had 
been successful at Pylos, and thus had 
acquired confidence in his own wisdom 
(φρονεῖν τι as in ii. 53. 19, ἀπολαῦσαι 
τι, to have some enjoyment), i.e. his 
method of reckless attacks. — 11. 
κατὰ θέαν : to reconnoitre. Cf. c.9. 10; 
10,8; vi. 31.5. Const. with τοῦ χωρίου, 
ie. Amphipolis.—12. καὶ τὴν μείζω 
xré.: καί is the confirmation οὗ what 
precedes: “and in fact (ii. 2. 26; iv. 
1.9) he was waiting for the reinforce- 
ments (mentioned in c. 6. 5 ff.), not 
that he might gain the victory {περι- 
σχήσων as in vii. 105. 4) without risk 
if he should be forced to fight (ἣν 
ἀναγκάζηται, sc. μάχεσθαι), but with 
the intention of forcing the town to 
surrender by surrounding it.” —14. 
βίᾳ αἱρήσων: take by force of arms. 
This is merely opp. to ὁμολογίᾳ mapa- 
στήσασθαι, acquire by agreement, and 
does not mean take by storm. See 
on i. 102, ἴ. -- ἐλθών τε: and ac- 
cordingly he went, Expressing conse- 


THUCYDIDES Υ͂, 7, 8, 


21, 


Lal : , a*. % & ’ὔ ε ¥ > ’ 39 
τῆς πόλεως ἐπὶ τῇ Θράκῃ ὡς ἔχοι, ἀπιέναι τε ἐνόμιζεν, 5 
ε , 4 > / Ν Ἀ sO > id ¥ > 
ὁπόταν βούληται, ἀμαχεί: Kal yap οὐδὲ ἐφαίνετο οὔτ 
tT. “ ’ 5 Ἀ 3» Ν 4 = 5 4 4 
ἐπὶ τοῦ τείχους οὐδεὶς οὔτε κατὰ πύλας ἐξήει, κεκλῃμέ- 


> lal 
20 val TE σαν πασαι. 


. \ ae > 7 A 
ὥστε Kal μηχανὰς ὅτι οὐκ ἀνῆλθεν 


» ε ~ 50. ἡ ε “A Ν ΕῚ Ν ’ὔ Ν Ν 
ἔχων ἁμαρτεῖν ἐδόκει" ἑλεῖν γὰρ ἂν τὴν πόλιν διὰ τὸ 


8 ἐρῆμον. 


᾿Αθηναίους, καταβὰς καὶ αὐτὸς ἀπὸ τοῦ Κερδυλίου ἐσέρ- 


'χεται ἐς τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν. 


> > ΞΖ Ν x > / ‘ Ν ε Le 
οὐκ ἐποιήσατο πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, δεδιὼς τὴν αὑτοῦ 


παρασκευὴν καὶ νομίζων ὑποδεεστέρους εἶναι, οὐ τῷ 


πλήθει (ἀντίπαλα γάρ πως ἦν), ἀλλὰ τῷ ἀξιώματι (τῶν 


γὰρ ᾿Αθηναίων ὅπερ. ἐστράτευε καθαρὸν ἐξῆλθε, καὶ An- 


quence. eis here not a correlative 
of xal.—17. ἐπὶ τῇ Θρῴάκῃ : in respect 
to the surrounding Thracian country. 
An indefinite description of its situa- 
tion as i. 105. 6, ἐπ᾽ Αἰγίνῃ; ii. 86. 11, 
ἐπὶ τῇ ‘Pig; vi. 2. 6, ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ. 
St. omits these words as an interpo- 
lation. 

17. ἀπιέναι τε ἐνόμιζεν : not to be 
separated by any stronger punctua- 
tion from what precedes. He exam- 
ined the situation at his leisure, and 
believed that he could go away with- 
out a battle whenever he chose. — 
18. ovr, οὔτε: used as if both be- 
longed to one verb, ἐφαίνετο, although 
ἐξήει is irregularly added in the sec- 
ond clause. — 20. ὥστε καὶ... ἐδόκει: 
i.e. he was even sorry that he had not 
brought his storming machines with 
him. ---οὐκ ἀνῆλθεν: refers to avaBal- 
νειν, 11. See App.—21. ἑλεῖν av: se. 
ἐδόκει. His thought was ἕλοιμι ἄν or 
perhaps εἷλον ἄν. GMT.53; H. 964. 

8. Thereupon Brasidas re-enters Am- 
phipolis, and determines to attack the 
Athenians in two divisions commanded 


respectively by himself and Clearidas. 


2. καὶ αὐτός : these words indicate 
reciprocity in the movements of the 
two parties. Brasidas returned to 
the city which Cleon had approached. 
Cf. c. 7. 8 ff. εὐθὺς ὡς εἶδε κινουμένους 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους is the natural conse- 
quence of κατεφαίνετο πάντα αὐτόθεν 
in ec. 6. 12. 

4. δεδιὼς τὴν αὐτοῦ παρασκευήν: 
οὐ θαρρῶν τῇ ἰδίᾳ παρασκευῇ, Schol. 
His force consisted mainly of mer- 


cenaries. Cf. iv. 80.22. — ὑποδεεστέ- 
ρους: refers in accordance with fre- 


quent usage to παρασκευήν (G. 138, 
n. 3; Η. 61 a), and is therefore not to 
be changed (with Portus) to ὑποδεέσ- 
τερος. --- Θ. ἀντίπαλα: without refer- 
ence to a definite subj. Cf. 1. 7. 8; ii. 
56.4; iii. 88.4; iv. 117. 18.---ὀΟὀξιώματι: 
almost with the meaning of ezcel- 
lence, efficiency (τῇ δυνάμει, Schol.) ; 
but their reputation, with the respect 
arising from it, is also expressed by 
this word. — 7. καθαρόν : οὐχὶ συγκλύ- 
δων οὐδὲ ἐπικούρων, ἄλλ᾽ αὐτῶν τῶν 
πολιτῶν, Schol. Cf. χρηστοῖς καταλό- 
γοις ἐκκριθέν, Vi. 31. 28. Similarly 
Hat. i. 211. 3 and iv. 135. 10, τὸ κα- 


ὁ δὲ Βρασίδας εὐθὺς ὡς εἶδε κινουμένους τοὺς 1 


ΕῚ ‘ 
καὶ ἐπέξοδον μὲν καὶ ἀντίταξιν 2 


22 


THUCYDIDES V. 8, 9. 


μνίων καὶ ᾿Ἰμβρίων τὸ κράτιστον), τέχνῃ δὲ παρεσκευά- 


> , 
ζετο ἐπιθησόμενος. 


εἰ γὰρ δείξειε τοῖς ἐναντίοις τό τε 8 


10 πλῆθος καὶ τὴν ὅπλισιν ἀναγκαίαν οὖσαν τῶν μεθ᾽ Eav- 
΄-“ “-“ ΄-“ » 
τοῦ, οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖτο μᾶλλον περιγενέσθαι ἢ ἄνευ προ- 
a An 4, 
ὀψεώς TE αὐτῶν Kal μὴ ἀπὸ TOD ὄντος καταφρονήσεως. 
> , > > 8 , a ἃ ‘ ε ΄, 
ἀπολεξάμενος οὖν αὐτὸς πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν ὁπλίτας, 4 
καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Κλεαρίδᾳ προστάξας, ἐβουλεύετο ἐπιχει- 
15 ρεῖν αἰφνιδίως, πρὶν ἀπελθεῖν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, οὐκ ἂν 
’ > ‘ ε ,’ > au 4 ia 
νομίζων αὐτοὺς ὁμοίως ἀπολαβεῖν αὖθις μεμονωμένους, 


" 4 
εἰ τύχοι ἐλθοῦσα αὐτοῖς ἡ βοήθεια. 


ξυγκαλέσας δὲ τοὺς δ 


ld , Ν , -“ ’ Ν 
πάντας OTPATLWTAS και βουλόμενος παραθαρσῦναί τε και 


‘ | ey ὁ , ¥ , 
τὴν ἐπίνοιαν φράσαι ἔλεγε τοιάδε - 
cae , > “ἃ 4 y , ress 
Avdpes Πελοποννήσιοι, ἀπὸ μὲν οἵας χώρας ἧκο- 1 


θαρὸν τοῦ στρατοῦ. Plut. Aem. P. 8, 
αὐτῶν τῶν Μακεδόνων ἀρετῇ καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 
τὸ καθαρώτατον. --- Λημνίων καὶ Ἰμ- 
βρίων: Attic cleruchi, often men- 
tioned together as trusty followers, 
iii. 5. 5; iv. 28. 18; vii. 57. 8. — 
8. τέχνῃ: by artifice. Cf. c. 18. 16. 
Const. with ἐπιθησόμενος, which is fut. 
partic. without és expressing purpose 
after παρεσκευάζετο. Similarly ii. 91. 
8; vi. 54. 18; vii. 17. 2; viii. 59. 2. 
10. ἀναγκαίαν οὖσαν: barely suffi- 
cient, such as had been obtainable 
under the circumstances. Of. vi. 37. 
17. A similar use of the superl. oc- 
curs in i. 90.21; 82. 10.—12. αὐτῶν : 
objective gen. referring to Brasidas’s 
own forces: ἄνευ προόψεως αὐτῶν is 
equiv. to ei uh αὐτοὺς προίδοιεν. What 
follows carries out the same idea, 
the emphasis upon the consequence 
which was to be avoided being made 
stronger by the use of μὴ ἀπὸ in- 
stead of &vev (for similar phrases, 
cf. i. 91. 28; iii. 40. 28, 30; iv. 130. 
26; vii. 15. 12; 70. 49). καὶ μὴ ἀπὸ 
τοῦ ὄντος καταφρονήσεως is equiv. to καὶ 


εἰ μὴ τοῦ ὄντος (i.e. their real weakness 
which would then appear) καταφρονή- 
σειαν. “If he showed his weakness 
to the enemy, he thought he should 
be less likely (οὐ μᾶλλον for ἧττον) to 
gain a victory than if they did not see’ 
his forces and learn to despise them.” 
This explanation is adopted from that 
of Schiitz, Ztschr. f. d. Gymn. Wesen 
12, p. 406, and St., Symbola Philologo- 
rum Bonnensium, p. 387 f. 

14. προστάξας : προστάσσειν, hand 
over to, place under the command of. 
Cf. vi. 42.8, κατὰ τέλη στρατηγῷ προσ- 
τεταγμένοι. --- 16. ἀπολαβεῖν : cut off, 
get into his power, as in ii. go. 20; iv. 
14. 19.—17. τύχόι ἐλθοῦσα: equiy. 
to τύχῃ ἔλθοι. 

19. φράσαι: tell accurately. ΟΥ̓, 
i. 145.4 and note ; iii. 42. 10 and note. 


9. ΒΡΕΕΟῊ or Brasipas TO HIS 
Troops. 

It is sufficient to remind you briefly 
that you are Dorians opposed to Ionians. 
§ 1. Nezt listen to my plan: we must 
surprise the enemy while they are off 


THUCYDIDES V. 9. 


μεν, ὅτι ἀεὶ διὰ τὸ εὔψυχον ἐλευθέρας, Kal ὅτι Δωριῆς 
, ¥ 4, & > 7 ’ 5 3 
μέλλετε Ἴωσι μάχεσθαι, ὧν εἰώθατε κρείσσους εἶναι, ἀρ- 


κείτω βραχέως δεδηλωμένον τὴν δὲ ἐπιχείρησιν ᾧ τρό- 


δ πῳ διανοοῦμαι ποιεῖσθαι διδάξω, ἵνα μή τῳ τὸ κατ᾽ ὀλί- 


Ν Ἀ ν ’ 3 Ἀ / > 
γον Kal μὴ ἅπαντας κινδυνεύειν ἐνδεὲς φαινόμενον ἀτολ- 


μίαν παράσχῃ. 


ε nw Ν 3 x > 4 ε x > ’ > 
TE ἡμῶν Kal οὐκ ἂν ἐλπίσαντας ὡς ἂν ἐπεξέλθοι Tis av- 


ἂν > 4, > “ ’ x ‘ ’ Ν ἴω 5 ’ 
τοῖς ἐς μάχην, ἀναβῆναί τε πρὸς τὸ χωρίον καὶ νῦν ἀτά- 


28 


Ἀ Ν 3 ’, > ’, ᾿ ’ 
τοὺς γὰρ ἐναντίους εἰκάζω καταφρονήσει 8 


10 κτως κατὰ θέαν τετραμμένους ὀλιγωρεῖν. ὅστις δὲ τὰς 4 


4 of ld lal > , ἊΣ ἰδὰ ‘ ν 
τοιαυτας αμαρτιας των EVAVTL@V καλλιστα LOWY Και αμα 


their guard and not expecting an at- 
tack. Wise use of the mistakes of 
others is the surest means of success. 
ὃ 2-5. 7, with my chosen troops, will 
attack their centre. Then you, Cleari- 
das, in the moment of their confusion, 
will fall upon them with the rest of our 
forces; and if all do their duty, as I 
expect, then all will be sure of perpetual 
Sreedom from. the yoke of Athens. ὃ 6- 
9. I myself will prove that I can not 
only advise, but act. ὃ 10. 

2. ὅτι: namely; explanatory, in 
the particularization of what pre- 
cedes. ὅτι... ἐλευθέρας (sc. ἥκομεν 
ἀπὸ χώρας) bridges over the transition 
from the interr. οἵας to ὅτι Δωριῆς, etc. 
— τὸ εὔψυχον : the noblest expression 
for manly courage. Cf. ii. 39. 7. — 
Δωριῆς, Ἴωσι : the same distinction of 
races is expressed with the same pride 
in 1. 124. 5; vi. 77. 11; vii. 5. 17.— 
3. ἀρκείτω δεδηλωμένον : corresponds 
nearly to the Lat. monuisse suf- 
ficiat. But the partic. modifies the 
double subj. of ἀρκείτω, ἀπὸ μὲν οἵας xré. 
and ὅτι Δωριῆς nré. GMT. 112,2, κ. 1. 

4. τὴν δὲ ἐπιχείρησιν : const. with 
ποιεῖσθαι, although this has at the 
head of the sent. almost an abs. posi- 


omerre 


tion. See on i. 33.16; 32. 18.— 5. ἵνα 
μή τῳ τὸ κατ᾽ ὀλίγον Kré.: lest our ex- 
posing ourselves in detachments and not 
all together seem poor tactics and cause 
discouragement to any one. See App. 

8. Kal οὐκ ἂν ἐλπίσαντας ὡς ἂν ἐπε- 
ξέλθοι: and since they would not have 
expected that anybody could ( possibly) 
come out against them. οὐκ ἂν ἐλπίσαντας 
is equiv. to ὅτι οὐκ ἂν ἤλπισαν. ὡς 
with ἐλπίζειν, also in viii. 54. 4. ---10. 
κατὰ θέαν (cf. c. 7. 11) τετραμμένους : 
τετραμμένος πρός (or, as here, card) is 
the proper expression for a predomi- 
nant inclination in one direction to 
the neglect of other things. See on 
ii. go. 4. Οὗ ii. 25. 11; 51. 18; vii. 
73. 16. ἀτάκτως is to be taken with 
τετραμμένους as Well as dArvywpety, Which 
last is used abs. (‘‘be careless”), as 
in 11, 62. 20; vi. g1. 40. 

11. καὶ ἅμα: καί connects the adv. 
modifier πρὸς (cf. i. 6.15; 10. 8) τὴν 
ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν with the partic. ἰδών, 
which also limits the meaning of the 
verb. — 12. ποιεῖται: indic. in gene- 
ral prot. GMT. 51, x. 3. — μὴ ἀπὸ 
τοῦ προφανοῦς μᾶλλον κτέ. : προφανοῦς 
is in the same const. with évrurapa- 


ταχθέντος, “not so much with regard — 


24 


THUCYDIDES V. 9. 


ἀπὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς μᾶλλον καὶ ἀντιπαραταχθέντος ἢ ἐκ 
a Ν Ν Ν ΄ al > ἃ 2 oe ‘ 
τοῦ πρὸς τὸ παρὸν ξυμφέροντος, πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν ὀρθοῖτο" καὶ 5 
Ν 7, A ld / » a Ν / 
16 τὰ κλέμματα ταῦτα καλλίστην δόξαν ἔχει ἃ τὸν πολέμιον 
’, > »¥ > , ‘ ’ ᾽ 3 3 , 
μάλιστ᾽ av τις ἀπατήσας τοὺς φίλους μέγιστ᾽ ἂν ὠφελή- 


σειεν, 


ν > » 3 ΄ A ‘ ΄“΄ 4 
εως OVV ETL ἀπαρασκεῦοι θαρσοῦσι και του υτπ- 


, / x» a , > - 3 Ν ΄ ‘ 
απιέναι πλέον ἢ τοῦ μένοντος, ἐξ ὧν ἐμοὶ φαίνονται, THY 
lal lal a \ 
διάνοιαν ἔχδυσιν, ἐν τῷ ἀνειμένῳ αὐτῶν τῆς γνώμης καὶ 


20 πρὶν ξυνταθῆναι μᾶλλον τὴν δόξαν, ἐγὼ μὲν ἔχων τοὺς 


» > “A ‘ 0 , ΩΝ ὃ 4 lal 
μετ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ καὶ φθάσας, ἣν δύνωμαι, προσπεσοῦμαι 


ὃ ΄ Ν ΄ \ ΄ δ σας δέ is y 
ρόμῳ κατὰ μέσον TO στράτευμα" σὺ δέ, Κλεαρίδα, ὕστε- 


“ » Ν Ν 

ρον, ὅταν ἐμὲ ὁρᾷς ἤδη προσκείμενον καὶ κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς 
‘al > 4 ‘\ Ν ‘al 4 tee | 

φοβοῦντα αὐτούς, τοὺς μετὰ σεαυτοῦ τούς τ᾽ ᾿Αμφιπο- 


25 λίτας καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ξυμμάχους ἄγων αἰφνιδίως τὰς 


πύλας ἀνοίξας ἐπεκθεῖν καὶ ἐπείγεσθαι ὡς τάχιστα Evp- 


to what is to be seen and to the forces 
which stand arrayed against one an- 
other.” — 13. ἐκ τοῦ... ξυμφέροντος : 
according to what is advantageous under 
the circumstances. 

15. τὰ κλέμματα: τὰ στρατηγήματα, 
Schol., from the specially Lacedae- 
monian expression κλέπτειν for mili- 
tary stratagems (cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 6. 
11 ff., where κλέπτειν is used of tak- 
ing a mountain by stealth). — ἅ (sc. 
κλέμματα) : with ἀπατήσας, a sort of 
schema etymologicum or cog- 
nate acc., since κλέμμα ἀπατᾶν is equiv. 
to ἀπάτην ἀπατᾶν. ---16. ἄν: for its 
repetition, cf. i. 36.14; 77.20; 136.17; 
iv. 114.21. St. denies that this is a 
repetition, because the first ἄν belongs 
to ἀπατήσας, the second to ὠφελήσειε. 
But ἀπατήσας is equiv. to εἰ ἀπατήσειε, 
of course without ἄν. GMT. 42, 3, n. 1. 

18. τοῦ μένοντος : an excellent ex- 
ample of Thuc.’s liking for neut. 
partics. instead of infs. Equally strik- 
ing is ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι, i. 142. 22, 


with which ἐν τῷ ἀνειμένῳ below may 
be compared, GMT. 108, n. 4.— φαί- 
vovrat: with a pers. subj. where we 
should expect ὡς φαίνεται, as in 6. 75. 


12, ἐδόκουν; c. 113. 8, δοκεῖτε, --- 20. 


ξυνταθῆναι : see App. 

23. ἤδη προσκείμενον : already en- 
gaged, after the first attack has been 
made. — 24, τοὺς μετὰ σεαυτοῦ : opp. 
to τοῖς μετ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ, 21, the 2000 Pelo- 
ponnesian hoplites of c. 6. 21 (less 
the 150 which Brasidas kept for him- 
self, c. 8. 13). To these are added 
the Amphipolitans and other allies. 
- τούς τ᾽ ᾿Αμφιπολίτας καὶ τοὺς 
ἄλλους ξυμμάχους: must be joined 
without intervening punctuation to 
the preceding τοὺς μετὰ σεαυτοῦ. It is 
the less usual arrangement by which 
re introduces the second member, and 
καί the third, as in i, 13. 5 f. — 26. 
ἐπεκθεῖν καὶ ἐπείγεσθαι : the only case 
of the use of the inf. in the sense of 
the second pers. imy. in Thuc. G. 
269; H, 957; Kr. δῦ, 1, 5, For the 


THUCYDIDES V. 9. 


25 


4 Ν A 

μίξαι." ἐλπὶς yap μάλιστα αὐτοὺς οὕτω φοβηθῆναι" τὸ 8 
\ nA » 

γὰρ ἐπιὸν ὕστερον δεινότερον τοῖς πολεμίοις τοῦ παρόν- 


τος καὶ μαχομένου; 


Ν 5 4 > 4 5 ἈΝ ’ὔ 
καὶ αὐτός τε ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς γίγνου, 


A ate 3, , A ε Lal > » 
ὠωσπερ σε €LKOS OVTA Σπαρτιάτην, καὶ υμεις, ὦ ἄνδρες 


, > ’ 3 ’ Ν ’ / 
ξύμμαχοι, ἀκολουθήσατε ἀνδρείως, καὶ νομίσατε τρία 


εἶναι τοῦ καλῶς πολεμεῖν, τὸ ἐθέλειν καὶ τὸ αἰσχύνεσθαι 


Ν Ἁ Lal 3, ᾽’ A - ε ~ nm ε , 
καὶ τὸ τοῖς ἄρχουσι πείθεσθαιγκαὶ τῇδε ὑμῖν TH ἡμέρᾳ 


x > A“ 4 > 4 ε ΄ Ἁ 
ἢ ἀγαθοῖς γενομένοις ἐλευθερίαν τε ὑπάρχειν καὶ Λακε- 


δαιμονίων ξυμμάχοις κεκλῆσθαι, ἢ ᾿Αθηναίων τε δούλοις, 


a Ν » » > ὃ ὃ “ἃ 4 ’ὔ 
ἣν τὰ ἄριστα ἄνευ ἀνδραποδισμοῦ ἢ θανατώσεως πράξητε, 


third pers. vi. 34. 55 f. is adduced, but 
with doubtful propriety. 

27. μάλιστα αὐτούς : St. writes 
μάλιστ᾽ ἂν αὐτούς ; but this use of the 
aor. inf. without ἄν with ἐλπίς and 
similar words is very common. Cf. 
ii. 80. 11; iii. 3. 15; 32.15; iv. 28. 
28; 80.3; vi. 87.18; and see on ii. 
3.8. 6. 208, nx. 2; H. 948 a, 952.— 
28. τό ἐπιόν: like rod παρόντος and 
τοῦ μαχομένου neut. sing. in personal 
signification, as in ii. 45. 5; iii. 39. 
29 f.; vii. 43. 44. 

31. νομίσατε τρία εἶναι, τὸ τοῖς 
ἄρχουσι πείθεσθαι: see App. — 33. 
τῇδε TH ἡμέρᾳ: Cf ii. 12. 14, ἥδε 7 
ἡμέρα τοῖς Ἕλλησι μεγάλων κακῶν ἄρξει; 
Ar. Paz, 435, εὐχώμεσθα τὴν νῦν ἡμέ- 
ραν Ἕλλησιν ἄρξαι πᾶσι πολλῶν κἀ- 
γαθῶν ; Xen. Hell. ii. 2.23; Plut. Lys. 
15. In closest connexion with this 
stands only ὑμῖν... ὑπάρχειν depend- 
ing upon νομίσατε: “be sure that on 
this day there awaits you either — or 
—.” ‘This alternative which belongs 
with ὑπάρχειν extends to the end of 
the period, in the first term with the 
subjs. ἐλευθερίαν and Λακεδαιμονίων 
ξυμμάχοις κεκλῆσθαι, in the second 
only with γενέσθαι and its predicates, 
᾿Αθηναίων δούλοις and κωλυταῖς ἐλευ- 
θερώσεως τοῖς λοιποῖς Ἕλλησιν. The 


words καὶ δουλείαν χαλεπωτέραν ἢ πρὶν 
εἴχετε are an emphatic addition to 
᾿Αθηναίων δούλοις (not to be joined 
with ὑπάρχειν.) “and that in a harsher 
bondage than the old one.” In con- 
sequence of this and the other in- 
serted clause (ἣν τὰ ἄριστα. . . mpd- 
ξητε) the regular connexion of ’A@n- 
ναίων τε δούλοις with a following καί 
is interrupted, and instead of this we 
have the more emphatic τοῖς δὲ λοιποῖς 
xré. A similar case occurs in i. 11. 
4 ff. The difficulty of the passage is 
increased by the fact that the second 
% (85) is without any explanatory 
words corresponding to ἀγαθοῖς yevo- 
μένοις. Brasidas avoids saying κακοῖς 
γενομένοις Or any words to that effect, 
but makes the consequences so much 
the more prominent by the expres- 
sidps δουλείαν χαλεπωτέραν and κωλυ- 
ταῖς ἐλευθερώσεως. For another under- 
standing of the passage, see App. — 
35. κεκλῆσθαι: pf. of recognized ap- 
pellation: “bear the (honourable) 
name of allies of the Lacedaemo- 
nians.” Cf. ii. 37.4; iii. 82.51. GMT. 
18, 3 ὁ, n.; H. 849.—35. δούλοις : 
refers to being subjects of Athens, 
ἀνδραποδισμοῦ to actual slavery. — 
36. ἢν τὰ ἄριστα... πράξητε: “even 


if you fare in the best possible way, 


9 


26 THUCYDIDES V. 9, το. 


καὶ δουλείαν χαλεπωτέραν ἢ πρὶν εἴχετε, τοῖς δὲ λοιποῖς 
Ἕλλησι κωλυταῖς γενέσθαι ἐλευθερώσεως. ἀλλὰ μήτε 10 
ὑμεῖς μαλακισθῆτε, ὁρῶντες περὶ ὅσων ὃ ἀγών ἐστιν, ἐγώ 


, A A aA 
40 Te δείξω οὐ παραινέσαι οἷός τε ὧν μᾶλλον τοῖς πέλας ἢ 


10 


> 
καὶ αὐτὸς ἔργῳ ἐπεξελθεῖν. 


Ὁ μὲν Βρασίδας τοσαῦτα εἰπὼν τήν τε ἔξοδον παρ- 


εσκευάζετο αὐτὸς καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους μετὰ τοῦ Κλεαρίδα 


na an Ψ 
καθίστη ἐπὶ τὰς Θρᾳκίας καλουμένας τῶν πυλῶν, ὅπως 


4 » 5 ’ 
WOTTEP ELPNTO ἐπεξίοιεν. 


τῷ δὲ Κλέωνι, φανεροῦ γενομέ- 


rn A ἈΝ ~ , 
νου αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ Tov Κερδυλίου καταβάντος καὶ ἐν τῇ πό- 


λει ἐπιφανεῖ οὔσῃ ἔξωθεν περὶ τὸ ἱερὸν τὴς ᾿Αθηνᾶς θυο- 
μένου καὶ ταῦτα πράσσοντος, ἀγγέλλεται (προυκεχωρή- 


and are not sold as slaves or put to 
death.” ta ἄριστα (adv.) πράσσειν, 
sup. of εὖ πράσσειν, which occurs in ii. 
64. 8; vi. 75. 17. 

39. μαλακισθῆτε: as in ii. 43. 27, 
ἀλγεινοτέρα yap ἀνδρί γε φρόνημα ἔχοντι 
ἡ μετὰ τοῦ μαλακισθῆναι κάκωσις ἢ 6 
μετὰ ῥώμης καὶ κοινῆς ἐλπίδος ἅμα γιγνό- 
μενος ἀναίσθητος θάνατος. --- 41. ἔργῳ 
ἐπεξιέναι : opp. to παραινεῖν or simply 
λόγοις, as in i. 84. 16; 120. 27. 

10. Cleon, having heard of Brasidas’s 
intention, tries to retreat to Eion before 
it can be carried out. But Brasidas, 
after a short address to his men, makes 
the attack as agreed, and Clearidas 
comes up at the right moment. The 
Athenian army is thrown into confusion, 
which soon becomes a rout. In the heat of 
pursuit, Brasidas is mortally wounded, 
while Cleon is killed in his flight by a 
Myrcinian peltast. The rest escape 
after heavy losses to Eion. Brasidas 
dies after receiving the news of the 
victory. 

1. τοσαῦτα : so much and no more, 
esp. after short speeches. Cf. ii. 
12.1; 72.1 and 18; iii. 31.1; 52.14; 


iv. 11.1; vii. 49. 1. So Plat. Prot. 
818 a, τοσοῦτος ὃ ἡμέτερος λόγος. --- 
2. Κλεαρίδα: Dor. gen. as i. 103. 6, 
Διὸς τοῦ ᾿Ιθωμήτα; V. 25. 4, Πλειστόλα. 
— 3. Θρᾳκίας τῶν πυλῶν : acc. to Leake 
in the northeast side of the wall, on 
the road leading to Drabescus. See 
Weissenborn, Hellen, p. 156.—4. εἴρη- 
το: cf. 9. 22 Τῇ, --- ἐπεξίοιεν : after he 
had himself made his ἔξοδος, 1. 
4. φανεροῦ γενομένου : personal (as 
in c. 9. 18, φαίνονται), with the three 
partics. καταβάντος, θυομένου, πράσσον- 
τος. The action of first (καταβάντος) 
was naturally noticed (aor.) by the 
Athenians as soon as it took place (ce. 
8. 2); how that of the other two was 
observed (θυομένου καὶ ταῦτα πράσσον- 
τος, present with reference to γενομέ- 
vov) is explained by ἐπιφανεῖ οὔσῃ ἔξω- 
θεν (as in ο. 6. 12, κατεφαίνετο πάντα 
αὐτόθεν). ---ὅ. αὐτοῦ: sc. Βρασίδου. ---- 
6. θυομένου : mid. used esp. of sacri- 
fices made for the purpose of observy- 
ing the omens. Cf. Hadt. v. 44. 13; 
vii. 167.7; 189. 9; ix. 10. 18; 33. 2; 
62. 5; Xen. Anab, ii. 2. 3; vi. 2. 9. 
This purpose accounts also for the 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. το. 


A , 4 4 , 9 9 A 9 
κει yap τότε κατὰ τὴν θέαν), ὅτι ἥ τε στρατιὰ ἅπασα 
φανερὰ τῶν πολεμίων ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ ὑπὸ τὰς πύλας 
9 
ἵππων τε πόδες πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνθρώπων as ἐξιόντων ὑποφαί- 
ε δέ Κα 4, > A δι, δ > > ’ 
νονται. ὃ δὲ ἀκούσας ἐπῆλθε" καὶ ὡς εἶδεν, οὐ βουλόμενος 


4 ’ ’ ε ‘\ ‘ ‘ 4 Ἀ 
μάχῃ διαγωνίσασθαι πρίν ot καὶ τοὺς βοηθοὺς ἥκειν καὶ 


οἰόμενος φθήσεσθαι ἀπελθών, σημαίνειν τε ἅμα ἐκέ. 
λευεν ἀναχώρησιν καὶ παρήγγελλε τοῖς ἀπιοῦσιν ἐπὶ τὸ 


»"»2 ΄ὕ΄ A ’ Φ'», 9. 54 ε ’, - Bs. 
ευώνυμον κερᾶς, WOTEP μονον OLOV Τ ὭΨ, πυπαάγειν επι 


τῆς Ηιόνος. 


ἐπιστρέψας τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ τὰ γυμνὰ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους 


δἰ τὰν. νι Ν ΄ 
δοὺς aTNYE τὴν στρατιαν. 


use οὗ ταῦτα πράσσοντος referring to 
the sacrificial ceremonies mentioned 
in vi. 69. 16.—8. tore: he had just 
gone out for the reconnoissance men- 
tioned in c. 7. 11. --- ἅπασα: “it was 
evident that the troops were all col- 
lected.” —9. ὑπὸ tds πύλας... ὑπο- 
φαίνονται : under the gate (in the space 
between the gate and the threshold) 
they were seen u little, i.e. as far as was 
possible (éro-) in this way. So, too, 
modes... ὡς ἐξιόντων refers to the 
forces drawn up in readiness to march. 
This all shows accurate observation 
on the part of the scouts, But see 
App. 

11. ἐπῆλθε : 1.6. he went nearer to see 
for himself. — 12. ot: with ἥκειν, like 
the dat. with ἐλθεῖν in i. 13. 12; 27. 
1; 61.1; 107. 27; iii. 7o. 2; vi. 46. 
12; vii. 73. 5; viii.96.1. Plat. Prot. 
821 ὁ. Cf. also vi. 96.2. In all these 
cases the dat. is the ‘obj. for which’ 
coinciding with the limit of motion. 
—13. φθήσεσθαι ἀπελθών: that he 
would get away in time, i.e. before being 
attacked. —14. τοῖς ἀπιοῦσιν: the 


art. indicates the successive execu- 


x ‘ Ν Ν ’ A > ’ ’ 
τον KGLPOV καὶ TO στρατευμα τῶν Αθηναίων κινουμέενον, 


tion of the ἀναχώρησις as commands 
were given: hence Cl. with good Ms. 
authority writes παρήγγελλε (used 
esp. of military orders, cf. c. 58. 16; 
71.18; 73.11) for παρήγγειλε. “To 
the departing troops, i.e. as the sepa- 
rate divisions started, the command 
was given to turn to the left upon the 
road to Eion” (St. omits tots). The 
idea of gradual departure is also con- 
tained in ὑπάγειν. The emphatic con- 
nexion of the two verbs ἐκέλευεν and 
παρήγγελλε by τε Gua and καί gives 
an intimation of Cleon’s efforts to 
hasten the departure, which in the 
following αὐτὸς ἐπιστρέψας τὸ δεξιὸν 
κτέ. lead to pernicious haste.— 15. 
ὥσπερ μόνον οἷόν τ᾽ ἦν: sc. in order 
to reach Eion. 

16. σχολῇ : see App. —17. ém- 
στρέψας τὸ δεξιόν : in his impatience, 
he causes the right wing to turn and 


27 


as δ᾽ αὐτῷ ἐδόκει σχολῇ γίγνεσθαι, αὐτὸς 4 


5 4 4 ε ε “ 
κἂν τούτῳ Βρασίδας ὡς opa 5 


advance (cf. ii. go. 18) before its ~ 


proper turn, thereby exposing it to 
attack.— τὰ γυμνά : the unprotected 
side (iii. 23. 19; v. 71. 6), ie. the 
right side, the left being covered by 
the shield. 


28 


20 


25 


30 


THUCYDIDES V. το. 


“ Ν ¥ 9 A ” 
λέγει τοῖς μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ὅτι “Οἱ ἄνδρες 
ἡμᾶς οὐ μένουσι" δῆλοι δὲ τῶν τε δοράτων τῇ κινήσει 
καὶ τῶν κεφαλῶν οἷς γὰρ ἂν τοῦτο γίγνηται, οὐκ εἰώ- 
θασι μένειν τοὺς ἐπιόντας. ἀλλὰ τάς τε πύλας τις ἀνοι- 

la 
γέτω ἐμοὶ ὡς εἴρηται, καὶ ἐπεξίωμεν ὡς τάχιστα θαρ- 
σοῦντες." καὶ ὁ μὲν κατὰ τὰς ἐπὶ τὸ σταύρωμα πύλας καὶ 
‘ , A “ ’, , ¥ > λθὰ ἔθ 
τὰς πρώτας τοῦ μακροῦ τείχους τότε ὄντος ἐξελθὼν ἔθει 
δρόμῳ τὴν ὁδὸν ταύτην εὐθεῖαν ἧπερ νῦν κατὰ τὸ καρ- 
τερώτατον τοῦ χωρίου ἰόντι τροπαῖον ἕστηκε, καὶ προσ- 
A “~ , 
βαλὼν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, πεφοβημένοις TE ἅμα TH σφετέρᾳ 
ἀταξίᾳ καὶ τὴν τόλμαν αὐτοῦ ἐκπεπληγμένοις, κατὰ μέ- 
σον τὸ στράτευμα τρέπει, καὶ ὁ Κλεαρίδας, ὥσπερ εἴς- 
9 Ν νὰ ’ or. > λθὰ > 
pyro, ἅμα κατὰ τὰς Θρᾳκίας πύλας ἐπεξελθὼν τῷ στρα- 


ὩΣ φ , 
TQ E€7TE €pecTo. 


20. ὅτι: often used to introduce a 
dir. quot. Cf. i. 137. 22; iv. 38. 16; 
viii. 53. 20.—21. δῆλοι δέ: (not δή 
with Kr.) epexegetical, as in i. 46. 3; 
55. 9; iii. 34. 1.— τῇ κινήσει: hints 
at a restless movement toward hasty 
departure, not toward meeting the 
enemy.— 24. ds εἴρηται : sc. ἀνοίγειν. 
He had chosen for his sally not the 
Thracian gate, but two others (τὰς 
ἐπὶ τὸ σταύρωμα). By τὰς πρώτας τοῦ 
μακροῦ τείχους τότε ὄντος an outer gate 
in the long wall built by Hagnon (iv. 
102. 18) seems to be meant. This wall 
was afterwards destroyed. Changes 
made by the Lacedaemonians in the 
fortifications of Amphipolis are re- 
ferred to in iv. 103. 18. 

27. τὸ καρτερώτερον τοῦ χωρίου: 


. the higher parts of the ground, which 


Cleon, acc. to ο, 7. 15, had seized. 
Brasidas directed his attack against 
this point in order to strike at the 
main force of the Athenians while 
still undivided. — 28. ἰόντι: the dat. 


ξυνέβη τε τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ καὶ ἐξαπίνης ap- 


denoting the person in respect to 
whom the statement is made is used 
most freq. of partics. denoting mo- 
tion, estimation, or judgment. Cf 
i. το. 34; 24.1; G. 184, 5; H. 771 Ὁ. 
— 30. κατὰ μέσον τὸ στράτευμα : with 
προσβαλών. 

31. τρέπει, καί ὁ Κλεαρίδας ἐπε- 
φέρετο : the connexion is close. “Just 
as Brasidas was forcing the Atheni- 
ans to retreat, Clearidas fell upon 
them.” The impf. is used of contem- 
poraneous action. — 33. ξυνέβη τε κτέ.: 
“and so it came to pass that by the 
unexpectedness and suddenness (of 
the attack) from both sides at once 
the Athenians were thrown into dis- 
order.” So ξυμβαίνειν of several events 
occurring at once ini, 29. 21; v. 14. 
20 ; 37.20; vii. 75.7; viii. 64.17 ; 82.16. 
—kal ἐξαπίνης : pleonastic strength- 
ening of ἀδοκήτῳ. The art.7¢@ belongs 
with both. St. (Adn. Crit. VI.) takes 
it as consequence of ἀδοκήτῳ and con- 
nects it with θορυβηθῆναι, which, in 


THUCYDIDES V. το. 


29 


, ‘ 9 - 
φοτέρωθεν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους θορυβηθῆναι" καὶ τὸ μὲν 8 
of ’ ι΄ τῶν Ν Ἁ ‘ > ’ ν Ἀ Ἀ 
86 εὐώνυμον κέρας αὐτῶν τὸ πρὸς τὴν ᾿Ηιόνα, ὅπερ δὴ καὶ 
’ > ‘ > ἈΝ ¥ ‘ ε ’ 
προκεχωρήκει, εὐθὺς ἀπορραγὲν ἔφυγε. καὶ ὁ Βρασίδας 
ὑποχωροῦντος ἤδη αὐτοῦ ἐπιπαριὼν τῷ δεξιῷ τιτρώσκε- 
Ἀ ’ 2% e Ν > > > > 4 
ται, Kal πεσόντα αὐτὸν ot μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐκ αἰσθάνον- 


ε Ν / ¥ > ’ 
ται, ot δὲ πλησίον ἄραντες ἀπήνεγκαν. 


τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν τῶν 


᾿Αθηναίων ἔμενε μᾶλλον: καὶ ὁ μὲν Κλέων, ὡς τὸ πρῶ- 
τον οὐ διενοεῖτο μένειν, εὐθὺς φεύγων καὶ καταληφθεὶς 
δες ΄, a 3 ΄ ε x a $ 
ὑπὸ Μυρκινίου πελταστοῦ ἀποθνήσκει, ot δὲ αὐτοῦ ξυ- 
στραφέντες ὁπλῖται [ ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον] τόν τε Κλεαρίδαν ἠμύ- 
vovto καὶ δὶς ἢ τρὶς προσβαλόντα, καὶ οὐ πρότερον ἐν- 


view of the close connexion of cause 
and effect, seems inadmissible (in the 
new ed. St. omits καί). A similar con- 
nexion of two unlike adv. expressions 
occurs in iii. 4. 4f., ἀπαράσκευοι καὶ 
ἐξαίφνης ἀναγκασθέντες πολεμεῖν. 

35. τὸ πρὸς τὴν Hidva: which was 
already on the way to Eion in 15f.— 
37. ἐπιπαριὼν τῴ δεξιῷ: “pressing 
forward (ém-) and turning against 
the right wing.” Cf i. 61. 3, ὡς 
ἤσθοντο kal τοὺς μετὰ ᾿Αριστέως ἐπιπαρ- 
ἰόντας. 

38. πεσόντα αὐτόν: that he had 
fallen. The partic. aor. with αἰσθάν- 
εσθαι to express what has happened 
immediately before is found in Thuc. 
only here and in viii. 102.3. In the 
24 other passages always partic. pres. 
or pf. In c. 30. 3, the partic. pres. 
stands in connexion with the partic. 
aor. where the difference between 
them is plainly marked. The part. 
is equiv. to ὅτι ἔπεσεν. --- 39. τὸ δὲ 
δεξιὸν ἔμενε μᾶλλον: after the fall of 
Brasidas, by which the violence of 
the attack was diminished, the right 
wing, although hard pressed, still 
stood its ground for a while. Cleon, 


to be sure, who had (cf. 17) made 
an ill-advised movement with the 
right wing, and hoped to escape with 
the whole army (ἀπῆγε τὴν στρατιάν), 
took to flight immediately; but the 
hoplites, who had formed in close 
order (ξυστραφέντες, as in ii. 4. 23; 
iv. 68. 25; vi. 91.6) where they stood, 
defended themselves bravely for a 
while, though on the one hand Cleon 
was urging them to retreat, while on 
the other Brasidas was attacking with 
the utmost vigour. See App.—40. ds 
τὸ πρῶτον ov διενοεῖτο μένειν : as he 
had from the first had no intention of 
standing his ground, with reference 
toc. 7. 10. -- 48. ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον: ap- 
parently interpolated to explain αὐτοῦ; 
for that αὐτοῦ must be understood as 
an adv. of place is evident from 
its position. It points expressly to 
the place from which Cleon had just 
fled. Some copier, thinking of c. 7. 
15 ff., thought wrongly that the close 
order was formed ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον, and 
added this explanation of αὐτοῦ, but 
after ἀπῆγε τὴν στρατιάν, 18, it is not 
probable that they were still ἐπὶ 
λόφου καρτεροῦ of c. 7.15.— 44. καὶ 


80 THUCYDIDES V. το, 11. 


, ¢ é > e 
45 ἔδοσαν πρὶν 7 τε Mupkwia καὶ ἡ Χαλκιδικὴ ἵππος Kat οἵ 
πελτασταὶ περιστάντες καὶ ἐσακοντίζοντες αὐτοὺς ἔτρε- 
wn »¥ nw > 

Wav. οὕτω δὴ τὸ στράτευμα πᾶν ἤδη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων φυ- 
γὸν χαλεπῶς καὶ πολλὰς ὁδοὺς τραπόμενοι κατὰ ὄρη, 
ν Ν 4 a» Φ΄. ἐδ > . aA ε Ν “~ X 
ὅσοι μὴ διεφθάρησαν ἢ αὐτίκα ἐν χερσὶν ἢ ὑπὸ τῆς Χαλ- 
50 κιδικῆς ἵππου καὶ τῶν πελταστῶν, οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπεκομίσθη- 
> ἣν > , ε Ν Ν ΄ + > Lod 
σαν ἐς τὴν Hidva. οἱ δὲ τὸν Βρασίδαν ἄραντες ἐκ τῆς 
μάχης καὶ διασώσαντες ἐς τὴν πόλιν ἔτι ἔμπνουν ἐσεκό- 
μισαν: καὶ ἤσθετο μὲν ὅτι νικῶσιν ot μεθ᾽ αὑτοῦ, οὐ 
πολὺ δὲ διαλιπὼν ἐτελεύτησε. καὶ ἡ ἄλλη στρατιὰ ἀνα- 
’ Ν a ’ 5 “A ὃ A , 
55 χωρήσασα μετὰ τοῦ Κλεαρίδου ἐκ τῆς διώξεως νεκρούς 
lire ἐσκύλευσε καὶ τροπαῖον ἔστησε. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα τὸν 

, ε 4 /, Ν bid 5 ’ 
Βρασίδαν οἱ ξύμμαχοι πάντες ξὺν ὅπλοις ἐπισπόμενοι 

ω a an a Ψ 
δημοσίᾳ ἔθαψαν ἐν τῇ πόλει πρὸ τῆς νῦν ἀγορᾶς οὔσης" 
‘ Ν Ν δ... “A ’ 3 lel Ν 
καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν οἱ ᾿Αμφιπολῖται, περιέρξαντες αὐτοῦ τὸ 
δ μνημεῖον, ὡς ἥρῳ τε ἐντέμνουσι καὶ τιμὰς δεδώκασιν 
ἀγῶνας καὶ ἐτησίους θυσίας, καὶ τὴν ἀποικίαν ὡς οἰκιστῇ 


δὶς ἢ τρίς : although he, ete. Cf. i. 82. 11. Brasidas receives a public fune- 


12, διελθόντων ἐτῶν καὶ δύο καὶ τριῶν 
and note. —45. Μυρκινία: cf. c. 6. 
18, where, however, only peltasts 
from Myrcinus are mentioned. 

47. οὕτω δή: see ΑΡΡ.--- τὸ στρά- 
τευμα πᾶν φυγὸν ... τραπόμενοι. .. 
ὅσοι μὴ ϑιεφθάρησαν of . . . λοιποὶ 
ἀπεκομίσθησαν : the subj. is divided 
in the course of the period, and un- 
dergoes progressive modifications. 
Similarly ii. 4. 3 ff.; 65. 3ff.; iv. 68. 
8 ff. — 49. ἐν χερσίν: cfc. 3. 12, 

52. ἔτι ἔμπνουν : also in i. 134. 15. 
— 53. ἤσθετο: 1.6. he received the news 
while still in command of his facul- 
ties. Cf. c. 26.5, where αἰσθανόμενος 
is used in a similar sense. 

55. vexpovs te: the omission of the 
art. is occasioned by the close con- 
nexion with καὶ τρόπαιον. 


ral at Amphipolis, and is honoured by the 
Amphipolitans as a hero. 

The Athenians return home. 

3. πρὸ τῆς νῦν ἀγορᾶς οὔσης: re- 
ferring to later changes, as in c. 10. 
26. Other cases in which the honour 
of burial within a city was con- 
ferred are mentioned in Xen. Hell. 
vii. 3. 12; Cic. ad Fam. iv. 12.3. — 4. 
περιέρξαντες : see App. — 5. ἥρῳ: see 
App. — évrépvover: of sacrifices 
made to the dead, διὰ τὸ ἐν τῇ γῇ 
τῶν σφαγίων ἀποτέμνεσθαι τὰς κεφαλάς " 
οὕτω γὰρ θύουσι τοῖς χθονίοις. Schol. 
The word does not occur again before 
Plutarch and Lucian. — δεδώκασιν : 
‘ pf., as well as the pres. ἐντέμνουσι, is 
the expression of one who is present 
in the neighbourhood and sees the 
yearly repetition of this custom. 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 11. 


, , 7 , > , 
προσέθεσαν, καταβαλόντες τὰ ᾿Αγνώνεια οἰκοδομήματα 
καὶ ἀφανίσαντες εἴ τι μνημόσυνόν που ἔμελλεν αὐτοῦ 
τῆς οἰκίσεως περιέσεσθαι, νομίσαντες τὸν μὲν Βρασίδαν 
σωτῆρά τε σφῶν γεγενῆσθαι καὶ ἐν τῷ παρόντι ἅμα τὴν 

A 7 ΄ , , aS ΄ 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ξυμμαχίαν φόβῳ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων θε- 
’ Ν \¢ Ἀ Ἀ ’ A > 
pamevovtes, τὸν S€"Ayvava κατὰ τὸ πολέμιον τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
’ > Δ ε / 4 ’ 50.» ἃ ε # es Ν 
ναίων οὐκ ἂν ὁμοίως σφίσι ξυμφόρως οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἡδέως τὰς 
τιμὰς ἔχειν. καὶ τοὺς νεκροὺς τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἀπέδοσαν. 
> ’ Lo 7 Ἀ A ε ’ A es 
ἀπέθανον δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων μὲν περὶ ἑξακοσίους, τῶν δ᾽ ἐναν- 
΄ ε Ν Ν Ν 3 ΄, 8... Ν ’, 
τίων ἑπτά, διὰ τὸ μὴ ἐκ παρατάξεως, ἀπὸ δὲ τοιαύτης 


Thue. writes while living on his Thra- 
cian estates’ (Cl.). See Introd. to 
Book I. p. 15. Thuc. probably did 
write part of his history while in 
Thrace, but the tenses here employed 
might be used by any contempora- 
nevus writer.—7. προσέθεσαν : aor. 
is, on the other hand, merely the his- 
torical mention of the fact: “they 
attributed the town to him as found- 
er.” Arbitrary adoption and change 
of ‘oecist’ is mentioned in vi. 3. 13; 
5. 16.—‘Ayvovera οἰκοδομήματα : the 
public buildings dating from the set- 
tlement of Hagnon (iv. 102. 13 ff.), 
especially the heroum, which was 
probably erected after Hagnon’s 
death (Miiller-Striibing, Aristoph. p. 
718). That Hagnon was dead ap- 
pears from 13.— 8. εἴ τι μνημόσυνον 
xré.: “whatever was likely to re- 
mind them of, εἰς. Such reminders 
would probably be continually met 
with in recurring festivals and in 
public proceedings and documents. — 
αὐτοῦ: refers to Hagnon implied in 
‘Ayvdveva.— ἔμελλεν περιέσεσθαι: “was 
likely to remain in future as a re- 
minder.” A cémprehensive expres- 
sion. —10. καὶ ἐν τῷ παρόντι ἅμα: 
connected in somewhat loose const., 


with σωτῆρά re σφῶν γεγενῆσθαι: the 
services already rendered by Brasidas 
are placed in opposition to the present 
interest of the Amphipolitans in the 
alliance with Sparta, but both appear 
as the result of Brasidas’s action; so 
the opposition of τὸν μὲν Βρασίδαν and 
tov δὲ “Ayvwva is preserved. — 12. 
κατὰ τὸ πολέμιον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων : “in 
consequence of their hostile attitude 
towards Athens.” Cf. iii. 56. 7, εἶ 
yap τῷ αὐτίκα χρησίμῳ ὑμῶν τε καὶ 
ἐκείνων πολεμίῳ τὸ δίκαιον λήψεσθε. ---- 
18. ὁμοίως : sc. as formerly, while their 
relation with Athens was a pleasant 
one. Cf. i. 99. 6; 124. 15 (not, “as 
Brasidas”). — οὐδ᾽ dv ἡδέως τὰς τιμὰς 
ἔχειν : not to be taken with the Schol. 
(and Jowett) as referring to σφίσι- 
“Hagnon himself would not receive 
honours paid him after the town had 
become an enemy of Athens, either 
with benefit to the citizens or with 
pleasure to himself.” Such action 
and feeling after death was ascribed 
to the ‘oecist’ who was worshipped as 
a hero. See Hermann, Gottesd. Al- 
erthiimer, 16. 

16. τοιαύτης ξυντυχίας : refers to 
the account in the preceding chap- 
ter, esp. to ξυνέβη τε. . . θορυβηθῆναι, 


31 


THUCYDIDES V. 11, 12, 13. 


* Ol. 89. 8; B.c, 422, Nov. 


4 -- 
ξυντυχίας καὶ προεκφοβήσεως τὴν μάχην μᾶλλον γενέσθαι" 
μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀναίρεσιν οἱ μὲν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀπέπλευσαν, ot 
δὲ μετὰ τοῦ Κλεαρίδου τὰ περὶ τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν καθίσταντο. 

Καὶ ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους τοῦ θέρους τελευτῶν- 
τος Ῥαμφίας καὶ Αὐτοχαρίδας καὶ “Emixvdidas Aaxe- 
δαιμόνιοι ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης χωρία βοήθειαν ἦγον ἐνα- 

’ ε A ‘\ > , 5 ε ᾽ὔ Ν 
κοσίων ὁπλιτῶν, καὶ ἀφικόμενοι ἐς Ἡράκλειαν τὴν ἐν 


a“ bi bd 3 a 25 , ‘ Ao » 
δ Τραχινι καθίσταντο ὁ τι αὕτοις ἐὀόκει μὴ καλῶς εχειν. 


᾿ ἐνδιατριβόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἔτυχεν ἡ μάχη αὕτη γενομένη, 


13 καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα. 


τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου * χειμῶνος 


εὐθὺς μέχρι μὲν Πιερίου τῆς Θεσσαλίας διῆλθον οἱ περὶ 


τὸν Ῥαμφίαν, κωλυόντων δὲ τῶν Θεσσαλῶν καὶ ἅμα Βρα- 
σίδου τεθνεῶτος, ᾧπερ ἦγον τὴν στρατιάν, ἀπετράποντο 
ἐπ᾽ οἴκου, νομίσαντες οὐδένα καιρὸν εἶναι ἔτι τῶν TE 


83 f., of which the reader is here re- 
minded by προεκφοβήσεως (the panic 
before the fight began). Even taking 
these things into account, the differ- 
ence in the losses of the two sides is 
very great. 

18. of μέν: the Athenians. — 19. 
᾿ καθίσταντο: here and in ὁ, 12. 5 the 
- impf. esp. of political regulations in- 
tended to be permanent. Cf. ii. 6. 3; 
ἯΙ. 28.17 5. 35. 7; v. 82. 8. 

12. A reinforcement under Rham- 
phias, sent~by the Lacedaemonians to 
' Thrace, is detained at Heraclea in 
“ Trachis. 

* 2. ‘Papolas: Rhamphias is the fa- 
ther of Clearchus, who is well known 
as a participator in the expedition of 
Cyrus. Of. viii. 8. 14, Κλέαρχος ὃ 
‘Pauplov.— 3. βοήθειαν ἦγον : were on 
the way with reinforcements. A similar 
attempt had failed the year before. 
ΟὟ iv. 132. ὃ ff — 4. Ἡρακλειαν: 
Heraclea was founded by the Lace- 
‘daemonians in 426 B.c, Cf. iii, 92 f. 


---ὅ. ὅ τι... ἔχειν : Heraclea was not 
prosperous owing to the misconduct 
of the Lacedaemonian governors and 
the hostility of the Thessalians. See 
iii. 93. 12 fff. 

18. And, upon hearing of the batile 
at Amphipolis, returns home. 

2. Πιερίου : Pierium ; its position is 
uncertain. Liv. xxxii. 15 has Pieria 
or Pierium.— 3. κωλυόντων τῶν 
Θεσσαλῶν : as they always tried to do. 
Prasidas alone succeeded in passing 
through by his tact and ingenuity, iv. 
78 f. Ischagoras had been stopped, 
iv. 132. ὃ 2,3. — καὶ dpa: introduces, as 
usual, an important reason : and besides 
since Brasidas was now dead. Almost 
like ἄλλως τε καί. See on i. 2.9. — 
4. ᾧπερ ἦγον: dat. of the ‘person 
for whom’ coinciding with the limit 
of motion. Cf. iv. 37. 4, βουλόμενοι 
ἀγαγεῖν αὑτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοις (avtas. — 
5. οὐδένα καιρὸν εἶναι ἔτι: an abs. 
expression: “it was now no longer 
the time,” “the favourable moment 


THUCYDIDES V. 13, 14. 


33 


᾿Αθηναίων noon ἀπεληλυθότων καὶ οὐκ ἀξιόχρεων αὐτῶν 


» nw se 5 A > , , Ἀ > ~ 
ὄντων δρᾶν τι ὧν κἀκεῖνος ἐπενόει" μάλιστα δὲ ἀπῆλθον 2 
“3997 Ν ΄ 9 ΄ Ν x 
εἰδότες τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, ὅτε ἐξήεσαν, πρὸς τὴν 


14 εἰρήνην μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην ἔχοντας. 


ξυνέβη τε εὐθὺς 1 


μετὰ τὴν ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει μάχην καὶ τὴν Ῥαμφίου ἀναχώ- 


was past.” The connexion is made 
plain by the inf. δρᾶν τι... ἐπενόει, 
which belongs to ἀξιόχρεων. Herbst, 
Philol. Anz. 1871, p. 51, connects δρᾶν 
τι with καιρὸν εἶναι, and takes ἀξιόχρεων 
as abs., as elsewhere in Thuc. But 
the position of the words and the em- 
» phasis upon airéyv.seems -to demand 
the connexion of δρᾶν τι with ἀξιό- 
xpewv. In the rel. clause ὧν κἀκεῖνος 
ἐπενόει, kal has its freq. observed pro- 
leptic force. Cf. i. 74. 25; 83. 7; 117. 
16; ii. 86. 5. “Since the Athenians, 
in consequence of a defeat (ἥσσῃ ex- 
presses the reason more distinctly 
than μεθ᾽ ἧσσαν) had gone away, and 
they themselves were not prepared to 
carry out on their own account any 
- part of what he had had in mind.” 

ἢ. μάλιστα δὲ ἀπῆλθον εἰδότες τοὺς 
«Λακεδαιμονίους κτέ.: Thuc. here lays 
peculiar stress upon the state of pub- 
lic feeling which prevailed at Sparta. 
This has been kept in the background 
throughout the narrative of Brasidas’s 
successes, though plain referenee was 
made to it in iv. 80 and 108. 35 ff., in 
contrast with Brasidas’s eagerness for 
action. But now that Brasidas is 
dead, the weaker members of the war 
party feel the full force of the desire 
for peace which they well know pre- 
vails at home. With this accurate 
presentation of the reasons which in- 
duced the Lacedaemonian generals to 
return home without having accom- 
plished anything, Thuc. closes his 
account of the actual events of the 
ten years’ war, and prepares thereby 


a transition to a retrospective glance 
in the next three chapters at the gen- 
eral course of the war. In these chap- 
ters he also shows, as he proceeds, the 
inclination of both sides toward peace, 
and then, in ec. 17, tells of its conclu- 
sion. 

14. The desire for peace gains ground 
both in Athens and in Sparta. The 
reasons for this. 

1. ξυνέβη τε: used to conclude and 
sum up what precedes, as in c. 10. 33. 
But the great importance attributed 
to the following presentation of the 
altered circumstances in the two hos- 
tile states, occasions first the use of 
the significant introductory particle 
ὥστε, and then the completely inde- 
pendent position of the second mem- 
ber of the sent., πρὸς δὲ τὴν εἰρήνην 
μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην εἶχον xré. This 
second member reaches with its sub- 
divisions and explanations into the 
following chapters, and contains those 
observations which seemed to the 
author of most consequence in con- 
nexion with this important division 
between the two periods of the war. 
The first member of the result clause, 
πολέμου μὲν μηδὲν ἔτι ἅψασθαι μηδετέ- 
pous, is prefixed as a statement of fact 
(in the aor.) upon which depends the 
truth-of the succeeding statements. 
This explains how the force of εὐθύς 
before μετὰ τὴν xré. is felt only in 
connexion with the second conse- 
quence (πρὸς δὲ τὴν xré.), and not 
with the first (μηδὲν ἔτι ἅψασθαι μηδε- 
τέργυς), the neg. character of which 


84 


THUCYDIDES V. 14. 


pnow ἐκ Θεσσαλίας ὥστε πόλεμου μὲν μηδὲν ἔτι ἅψα- 
σθαι μηδετέρους, πρὸς δὲ τὴν εἰρήνην μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην 
5 εἶχον, οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι πληγέντες Emit τῷ Δηλίῳ καὶ bv 
ὀλίγου αὖθις ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει, καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες τὴν ἐλπίδα 
τῆς ῥώμης πιστὴν ἔτι, ἧπερ οὐ προσεδέχοντο πρότερον 


τὰς σπονδάς, δοκοῦντες τῇ παρούσῃ εὐτυχίᾳ καθυπέρτεροι 
γενήσεσθαι" καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἅμα ἐδεδίεσαν σφῶν μὴ 


Ν Ν ’ 5 ’ ΦειΝ / > nw 

10 διὰ τὰ σφάλματα ἐπαιρόμενοι ἐπὶ πλέον ἀποστῶσι, μετ- 
εμέλοντό τε ὅτι μετὰ τὰ ἐν Πύλῳ καλῶς παρασχὸν ov ξυν- 
, ε > > ὃ ’ Ν 4 Ν > 

éBnoav: οἱ δ᾽ ad Λακεδαιμόνιοι παρὰ γνώμην μὲν ἀπο- 

΄ ΄ am ΄ 3 ae: 4 2\ 7 9 A 
Baivovros σφίσι τοῦ πολέμου, ἐν @ ῴᾧοντο ὀλίγων ἐτῶν 
, A a > ; ,ὕ , > ‘ lal , 

καθαιρήσειν τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων δύναμιν εἰ τὴν γῆν TE- 
15 μνοιεν, περιπεσόντες δὲ τῇ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ξυμφορᾷ, οἵα οὔπω 


is alone sufficient to preclude any 
relation to εὐθύς. --- 3. ὥστε: an 
emphatic transition (though ποῖ 
after fuuBalvew), also in i. 28. 18; 76. 
17; 'χχρ; ἢν Πᾶν, ingey δ 
Hat. iii. 14. 24.—4. πρὸς δὲ. 
εἶχον: the repetition of the same 
words from the close of the preceding 
chap. is intentional. The state of 
mind there attributed to the Lacedae- 
monians is here expressly extended to 
both sides as the underlying reason 
for their subsequent conduct. — 5. οἱ 
μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι: the reasons are given 
as far as γενήσεσθαι in partics.; then 
in the finite verbs ἐδεδίεσαν and μετε- 
μέλοντο. --- ἐπὶ Δηλίῳ: cf. iv. 100 f. 
See Grote, VI. p. 173 f.— δέ’ ὀλίγου : 
after a short interval. Cf.i. 77.22; v. 69. 
19. — 7. πιστήν : in pred. position re- 
ceives the chief emphasis of the sent., 
so that ἥπερ refers to ἐλπὶς πιστή. --- 
πρότερον: cf. iv. 21. 5 ff.; 41. 10 f.— 
8. καθυπέρτεροι : also in vii. 56. 7. 
9. τοὺς ξυμμάχους... . ἐδεδίεσαν. 

. ἀποστῶσι: proleptic as in ii. 

67. 23, Not only was their confidence 


in their own strength diminished, but 
they feared more general (ἐπὶ πλέον) 
desertion by their allies, if they con- 
tinued the war without success. 
App. —10. μετεμέλοντο : elsewhere 
const. with the partic. (iv. 27. 13; v. 
35. 17; vii. 50. 21), is here used with 
ὅτι to avold the awkwardness of two 


partics, side by side.— 11. παρασχόν + 


παρέσχεν and παρασχήσει (in Hdt. also 
παρέχει, iii. 73. 2; 142.11) are used 
impers. : “the chance offers.” Cf iv. 
85.8; vi. 86. 22, most freq. the partic. 
abs. as in i, 120. 18; iv. 85. 8; v. 60. 
25; 63. 3. 

12. οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι; sc. πρὸς 
τὴν εἰρήνην μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην εἶχον, 
the reasons for which are given partly. 
in the gens. abs. ἀποβαίνοντος πολέμου, 
ληστενομένης τῆς χώρας, αὐτομολούντων 
τῶν Εἱλώτων and προσδοκίας οὔσης, 
partly in the inserted clause with the 
nom. περιπεσόντες. ---18, ὀλίγων ἐτῶν : 
gen. of time as in i. 3. 11; vii. 3. 5.— 
14. εἰ τὴν γῆν τέμνοιεν : by the sys- 
tem οὗ ἐσβυλαί adopted in the first 
years of the war.—15. ἐν τῇ νήσῳ: 


See 


THUCYDIDES V. 14, 15. 


γεγένητο τῇ Σπάρτῃ, καὶ λῃστευομένης τῆς χώρας ἐκ τῆς 
Πύλου καὶ Κυθήρων, αὐτομολούντων τε τῶν Ἐϊλώτων καὶ 


> N ’ ¥ , \ φι “4 va A » 
ἀεὶ προσδοκίας οὔσης μή τι Kal οἱ ὑπομένοντες τοῖς ἔξω 
πίσυνοι πρὸς τὰ παρόντα σφίσιν, ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον, 
’, 4 Ν Ν Ν ἈΝ 3 ’ > A 
20 νεωτερίσωσι" ξυνέβαινε δὲ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους αὐτοῖς 
Ν 4 Ν λιν δε. > ΔΨ 3 
τὰς τριακοντούτεις σπονδὰς ἐπ᾽ ἐξόδῳ εἶναι καὶ ἄλλας οὐκ 
» , e? “A > ’ 3 ~ Ν 
ἤθελον σπένδεσθαι οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι, εἰ μή τις αὐτοῖς τὴν Κυ- 
’ “Ὁ 3 4 4 3 > , > > ’, 
νοσουρίαν γῆν ἀποδώσει: ὥστ᾽ ἀδύνατα εἶναι ἐφαίνετο 


᾿Αργείοις καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις ἅμα πολεμεῖν. 


τῶν τε ἐν Πελο- 


β ’ 
25 πονυνήσῳ πόλεων ὑπώπτευόν τινας ἀποστήσεσθαι πρὸς 


15 τοῦς ᾿Αργείους - ὅπερ καὶ ἐγένετο. 


αὐτοῖς λογιζομένοις ἐδόκει 


Sphacteria. Cf iv. 29 to 30. --- 17. ἐκ 
τῆς Πύλου: iv. 41. 5 ff.— καὶ Kv6y- 
pov: iv. 54.19. — 17. αὐτομολούντων 
τῶν Hitdrov: iv. 41. 11.—18. προσ- 
δοκίας οὔσης py: as in ii. 93. 14.— 
τοῖς ἔξω: those who were beyond the 
border. Cf. iv. 66. 8.—19. ὥσπερ 
Kal πρότερον : in the great revolt of 
the Helots, called the third Messenian 
war, mentioned in i. ror. 6. 

20. ξυνέβαινε δὲ Kal: “an addi- 
tional consideration was,” or, more lit- 
erally, it happened together with this also. 
Cf. ec. το. 83 and note. — 21. τριακον- 
τούτεις : after the analogy of i. 23.19; 
115.9; ii. 2.2; v.27. 1 (the Mss. vary 
here between τριακονταέτεις and τριᾶ- 
kovraereis). ‘The truce came to an end 
in the next year (cf. c. 28. 8) and had 
therefore been made in 451 B.c. — εἰ μή 
τις : a similar use occurs in ii. 37. 2; 
iii. 67. 83; iv. 68. 28, εἴ re μὴ πείσεταί 
τις, αὐτοῦ τὴν μάχην ἔσεσθαι. --- τὴν 
Kvvocovpiav: disputed territory on 
the borders of Laconia and Argolis. 
See on iv. 56.12. Cf ce. 41.—23. 
dor’ ἀδύνατα... ἅμα πολεμεῖν : the 
emphasis rests ppon ἅμα; “it was 


aA 3 > > , 

ταῦτ᾽ οὖν ἀμφοτέροις 
’ > ε , 

ποιητέα εἶναι ἡ ξύμβασις, 


clearly impossible to carry on war 
against both at once.” The neut. pl. 
as in i. 59. 4, where meaning and ex- 
pression are very similar, except that 
instead of Gua as here, the same effect 
is there produced by re... καί. See 
App. — 24. τῶν τε ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ 
κτὲ. : the general feeling against Spar- 
ta in the middle states of Peloponne- 
sus, which came to a head after the 
conclusion of the peace (c. 27.1 ff.; 29. 
17 ff.), was gaining ground on account 
of the inclination to peace which had 
prevailed among them for some time. 
‘If the double war had arisen, Sparta 
would have been in’the greatest dan- 
ger. — 26. ὅπερ καὶ ἐγένετο: cf. c. 29. 

15. Especially strong was the desire 
of the Lacedaemonians to obtain the re- 
lease of their citizens who had been cap- 
tured at Sphacteria. They thought the 
Athenians, too, might now be ready for 
peace. 

1. ἀμφοτέροις αὐτοῖς : the reference 
of ταῦτα to both sides collectively is 
emphasized by the addition of αὐτοῖς, 
after which the subsequent separate 
mention of the Lacedaemonians is all 


35 


86 


10 


16 


THUCYDIDES V. 15, 16. 


καὶ οὐχ ἧσσον τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις, ἐπιθυμίᾳ τῶν ἀνδρῶν 
τῶν ἐκ τῆς νήσου κομίσασθαι" ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ Σπαρτιᾶται 
αὐτῶν πρῶτοί τε καὶ * ὁμοίως σφίσι ξυγγενεῖς. ἤρξαντο 2 
μὲν οὖν καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ τὴν ἅλωσιν αὐτῶν πράσσειν, 
ἀλλ᾽ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὕπως ἤθελον εὖ φερόμενοι ἐπὶ τῇ 


ν 
ton καταλύεσθαι. 


σφαλέντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τῷ Δηλίῳ 


παραχρῆμα οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι γνόντες νῦν μᾶλλον ἂν ἐν- 


δεξαμένους ποιοῦνται τὴν ἐνιαύσιον ἐκεχειρίαν, ἐν ἣ ἔδει 
ξυνιόντας καὶ περὶ τοῦ πλείονος χρόνου βουλεύεσθαι. 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ καὶ ἡ ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει ἧσσα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις 
ἐγεγένητο καὶ ἐτεθνήκει Κλέων τε καὶ Βρασίδας, οἵπερ 
ἀμφοτέρωθεν μάλιστα ἠναντιοῦντο τῇ εἰρήνῃ, ὁ μὲν 


Ν Ν > ~ \ A > lal aA 
διὰ τὸ εὐτυχεῖν τε καὶ τιμᾶσθαι ἐκ τοῦ πολεμεῖν, 


the more remarkable. Cf. iv. 20. 1, 
ἡμῖν ἀμφοτέροις. --- ὃ, καὶ οὐχ ἧσσον: 
as often equiv. to καὶ μάλιστα, Cf. i. 
82. 18; ii. 52. 3; iii. 45. 27; v. 26. 26. 
While, as has been shown above, the 
general state of things occasioned by 
the unexpected course of the war was 
discouraging to the Lacedaemonians, 
they were esp. influenced toward peace 
by the desire of obtaining the release 
of the prisoners. — 4. κομίσασθαι : 
added as an explanation of ἐπιθυμίᾳ 
τῶν ἀνδρῶν, as in Plat. Crit. 52 ο, οὐδ᾽ 
ἐπιθυμία σε ἄλλων νόμων ἔλαβεν εἰδέναι. 
Cf. iv. 108. 87, βουλόμενοι μᾶλλον τούς 
τε ἄνδρας τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου κομίσασθαι. 
— οἱ Σπαρτιᾶται αὐτῶν : the Spartiates 
among them, about 120 in number. Cf. 
iv. 38. 29.—5. καὶ ὁμοίως σφίσι ξνγ- 
γενεῖς : see App. 

5. ἤρξαντο... πράσσειν : they im- 
mediately began negotiations, mentioned 
also in iv. 41. 14.—6. ἅλωσις: not 
elsewhere used of the capture of per- 
sons ; but here this is easily explained, 
since the capture of the men coin- 
cided with that of the island.—7. 


ὁ δὲ 


οὔπως : see App.—evd φερόμενοι: “as 
long as they got on well.” Cf. c. 16, 
9; ii. 60. 7, καλῶς μὲν “γὰρ φερόμε- 
vos ἀνὴρ τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν διαφθειρομένης 
τῆς πατρίδος οὐδὲν ἧσσον ξυναπόλλυται. 
- ἐπὶ τῇ ἵσῃ: elliptical, though no 
particular subst. is to be supplied; 
on equal conditions. See on i: 27.3.— 
9. παραχρῆμα : belongs primarily 
with γνόντες. The Lacedaemonians 
perceived immediately that the de- 
feat at Delium (iv. 89 ff.) would in- 
cline the Athenians to make conces- 
sions. The conclusion of the truce 
was brought about somewhat later. 

Cf. iv. 117. 1.— ἐνδεξαμένους : see 
App.— 10. τὴν ἐνιαύσιον ἐκεχειρίαν : 
“Μ᾿ iv. 117. 1. -- ἐν ἡ ἔδει... βουλεύ- 

: οὐ, ἵν. 118. 50 ff.; iv. 119. 11f. 

are Now that Cleon and Brasidas 
were dead, the disposition to peace was 
encouraged in Athens by Nicias, and in 
Sparta by King Pleistoanax, about whose 
return from exile evil stories were circu 
lated. 

3. 6pév ... ὁ δέ: chiastic order, 
as in 10ff.—4. διὰ τὸ εὐτυχεῖν τε 


THUCYDIDES V. 16. 


, ε ,, , , a - 
5 γενομένης ἡσυχίας καταφανέστερος νομίζων ἂν εἶναι Ka- 
“~ \ > ’ 4 
κουργῶν Kal ἀπιστότερος διαβάλλων, τότε δὲ ἑκατέρᾳ 
Y ρ ρᾳ 


τῇ πόλει σπεύδοντες τὰ μάλιστ᾽ αὐτὴν Πλειστοάναξ τε 


ὁ Παυσανίου, βασιλεὺς Λακεδαιμονίων, καὶ Νικίας ὁ 
Νικηράτου, πλεῖστα τῶν τότε εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατη- 
10 γίαις, πολλῷ δὲ μᾶλλον προεθυμοῦντο, Νικίας μὲν βου- 


5. 
ω 


{ 


λόμενος, ἐν 


ἀπαθὴς ἣν καὶ ἠξιοῦτο, διασώσασθαι 


Ν 5 ,ὔ Ν ¥ Ν SAP ’ la 
Τὴν εὐτυχιᾶν, Καὺ ες TE TO QAUTLKA πονων πεπαῦσθαι 


Ν ἜΝ" \ \ ’ lal . A , 
καὶ αὐτὸς καὶ τοὺς πολίτας παῦσαι, Kal τῷ μέλλοντι 


, a »” e Oe , Ν / 
χρόνῳ καταλιπεῖν ὄνομα ws οὐδὲν σφήλας τὴν πόλιν 


16 διεγένετο, νομίζων ἐκ τοῦ ἀκινδύνου τοῦτο ξυμβαίνειν 
Ἀ 9 > , 4 δ οὖν ’ Ν A 5 7 
καὶ ὅστις ἐλάχιστα τύχῃ αὑτὸν παραδίδωσι, τὸ δὲ ἀκίν- 


Ν > , / 4 \ e Ν a 
Suvov τὴν εἰρήνην παρέχειν: Πλειστοάναξ δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν 


ἐχθρῶν διαβαλλόμενος περὶ τῆς καθόδου καὶ 


καὶ τιμᾶσθαι ἐκ τοῦ πολεμεῖν : “ be- 
cause he owed his great successes as 
well as his reputation (not at Sparta 
only, but among all the Greeks) to 
his previous activity as general,” and 
could therefore only hope to retain 
his influence by a continuance of the 
war. — 5. κακουργῶν : with καταφανέσ- 
Tepos, as διαβάλλων with ἀπιστότερος : 
“with his rascalities, with his (con- 
tinual) calumnies” ; and therefore δια- 
βάλλων is necessary instead of δια- 
βαλών of good Mss. In these words a 
severe judgment of Cleon’s general 
character and conduct, special traits 
of which have been mentioned before 
(cf. iii. 36. 26; iv. 21.9; 27. 18 ff.; 28. 
26 f.; 39. 11; v. 7. 3 ff.), is unequivo- 
cally expressed. — 6. τότε δέ : see App. 
— ἑκατέρᾳ τῇ πόλει σπεύδοντες τὰ μά- 
λιστ᾽ αὐτήν : urging it (sc. τὴν εἰρήνην) 
most vigorously for eack of the two cities, 
i.e. trying to bring it about. See App. 
- 9. πλεῖστα: adv. —11. ἠξιοῦτο: 
in other words, ἐν ἀξιώματι ἦν, as in 


ἐς ἐνθυ- 


i. 130.2 f.; not elsewhere found in this 
signification. — év @ κτέ: “now while 
his good fortune and influence were 
still at their height, he wished to take 
care that they should remain unim- 
paired.” (διασώσασθαι, aor.) —12. πε- 
παῦσθαι: pf., “to have attained his 
end,’ “to have come to rest.” GMT. 
18, 36, ν.--- 14, καταλιπεῖν ὄνομα : 
reputation; also in vi. 33. 20f.— 15. 
διεγένετο: had reached his end. Like 
διεσώθη, iv. 96. 88. Closely connected 
with οὐδὲν σφήλας : without having in- 
jured the state. διαγίγνεσθαι in this 
sense does not oceur again before Plu- 
tarch.—16. καὶ ὅστις : 1.6. καὶ τούτῳ 
ὅς. --- ἐλάχιστα τύχῃ αὑτὸν παραϑδί- 
Swot: the same expression is employed 
by Nicias in vi. 23. 11 about himself. 
ἐλάχιστα like πλεῖστα, 9. --- 18. περὶ 
τῆς καθόδου : his return from his exile 
after the unsuccessful campaign of 
446 po. Of. i. 114. 9ff.; ii, 21.88. 
—és ἐνθυμίαν προβαλλόμενος : pers. 
const. The explanation follows in the 


04799 


37 


THUCYDIDES V. τό. 


A , > 
μίαν τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἀεὶ προβαλλόμενος vr av- 
20 τῶν, ὁπότε τι πταίσειαν, ὡς διὰ τὴν ἐκείνου κάθοδον 


παρανομηθεῖσαν ταῦτα ξυμβαίνοι. 


τὴν γὰρ πρόμαντιν 


τὴν ἐν Δελφοῖς ἐπῃτιῶντο αὐτὸν πεῖσαι μετ᾽ ᾿Αριστο- 
, κι 3 na ν al ,, 95. Ὁ 
κλέους τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὥστε χρῆσαι Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐπὶ 
Ν 3 “ 3 ,’ 2. cn ε id 
πολὺ τάδε θεωροῖς ἀφικνουμένοις, Διὸς υἱοῦ ἡμιθέου 
25 τὸ σπέρμα ἐκ τῆς ἀλλοτρίας εἰς τὸν ἑαυτῶν ἀναφέρειν" 
» A ’ 3 ’ > 4 > ~ 4 δὲ 
εἰ δὲ μή, ἀργυρέᾳ εὐλάκᾳ εὐλαξεῖν - χρόνῳ δὲ προ- 
, ‘ ’ 4 22% > 4 
τρέψαι τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους φεύγοντα αὐτὸν és Λύκαιον 
διὰ τὴν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ποτε μετὰ δώρων δοκοῦσαν ἀνα- 
χώρησιν, καὶ ἥμισυ τῆς οἰκίας τοῦ ἱεροῦ τότε τοῦ Διὸς 


words ὡς διὰ τὴν ἐκείνου κάθοδον παρα- 
νομηθεῖσαν ταῦτα ξυμβαίνοι. ἐς ἐνθυμίαν 
προβάλλειν is “to cast as a reproach,” 
“to cause to weigh upon the con- 
science.” Of. προβαλλόμενα, i. 73. 13; 
τὸν προβαλλόμενον λόγον, Vi.92.19. See 
App.— 20. ὁπότε τι πταίσειαν: ex- 
planatory modification οἵ ἀεί, 19.—21. 
παρανομηθεῖσαν : attrib. partic. placed 
after its subst. On account of his ille- 
gally accomplished return. Thue. freq. 
places the attrib. partic. after its 
subst. when other modifiers are added. 
See on i. 11. 19. 

23. ἀδελφοῦ: see App. — ὥστε: 
const. with πείθειν. Cf. ii. 2. 23; iii. 
70. 21. — ἐπὶ πολύ : temporal, as in i. 
7-6; ii. 16.1. Lit. for a long time, i.e. 
repeatedly, to which the pres. partic. 
ἀφικνουμένοις corresponds, “Every 
time messengers came (on other busi- 
ness) to Delphi.” See on ἀφικνουμένων, 
i, 91. 38. — 24. Διὸς υἱοῦ : so here the 
Mss. For υἱοῦ see Foucart, Revue de 
philol. 1, p. 36. Ἡρακλέους, τὸ σπέρμα, 
τὸν ἀπόγονον, εὐλάκαν δὲ τὴν ὕνιν Λακε- 
δαιμόνιοι λέγουσιν, εὐλαξεῖν (this form 
also in the text, with Schol. and Plut. 
de Pyth. oraculis 403 B, instead of εὐλα- 


κεῖν) δὲ ἀρόσειν, ἀργυρέᾳ εὐλάκᾳ εὐλα- 
ξεῖν τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι λιμὸν ἔσεσθαι καὶ πολλοῦ 
σφόδρα τὸν σῖτον ὠνήσεσθαι ὥσπερ ἀργυ- 
pois ἐργαλείοις χρωμένους. Schol. On 
εὐλαξεῖν, Cobet, Mnem. 6, p. 155, justly 
observes that the Dor. form of the 
fut. must be written with the Dor. 
accent. 

26. χρόνῳ δέ: referring to ἐπὶ πολύ, 
23; and therefore the subj. of προ- 
τρέψαι is τὴν πρόμαντιν, not Πλειστοά- 
νακτα. --- 27. ἐς Λύκαιον: in the Ar- 
cadian mountains, with an ancient 
and celebrated sanctuary of Zeus. — 
28. μετὰ δώρων δοκοῦσαν ἀναχώρησιν: 
δοκοῦσαν, as in i. 32. 15, of the belief 
which was, though not proved, gen- 
erally received. This corresponds to 
the report in ii. 21. 8, ἡ φυγὴ αὐτῷ 
ἐγένετο ἐκ Σπάρτης δόξαντι χρήμασι 
πεισθῆναι τὴν ἀναχώρησιν. See App. 
— 29. τότε: he occupied this dwelling 
at that time while in banishment, — 
ἥμισυ τῆς οἰκίας τοῦ ἱεροῦ : 1.6. a house, 
half of which belonged to the temple 
of Zeus, so that he could, φόβῳ τῶν 
(with Vat. for τῷ, ef. c. 11. 11) Aaxe- 
δαιμονίων, retreat at any moment to 
the shelter of the sanctuary. ἱεροῦ is 


2 


3 


* ΟἹ. 89. 8; B.c. 421, Feb. 


THUCYDIDES V. 16, 17. 


“ “ ’ 
80 οἰκοῦντα φόβῳ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων, ἔτει ἑνὸς δέοντι εἰ- 


~ wr Lal A Lal 
κοστῷ Tots ὁμοίοις χοροῖς καὶ θυσίαις καταγαγεῖν ὥσπερ 


ὅτε τὸ πρῶτον Λακεδαίμονα κτίζοντες τοὺς βασιλέας καθ- 


ioTavro. 


ἀχθόμενος οὖν TH διαβολῇ ταύτῃ Kal νομίζων 


> > Δ Ν > Ν , ’, Ἀ 7 
ἐν εἰρήνῃ μὲν οὐδενὸς σφάλματος γιγνομένου καὶ ἅμα 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τοὺς ἄνδρας κομιζομένων κἂν αὐτὸς 


-“ > Lal > 4 > ’ Ν ~ 
τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ἀνεπίληπτος εἶναι, πολέμου δὲ καθεστῶ- 


he ee, > Χ , pies A 
TOS GEL AVAYKYV EWaL TOUS TPOVKXOVTAS ATO τῶν ξυμφο- 


ρῶν διαβάλλεσθαι, προυθυμήθη τὴν ξύμβασιν. 


\ ΄, 
και τον 


89 


lal nA - 5 λό + SF Ν , » "ὃ 
TE χειμώνα τοῦυτον ῃησαν ες ογους, και προς ΤΟ εαρ On 2 


παρασκευή τε προεπανεσείσθη ἀπὸ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων 


pred. part. gen. H. 732 a.— 30. ἔτει 
ἑνὸς δέοντι εἰκοστῷ : 1.6. 427 B.0., since 
he had left the country in 446 B.c. (i. 
114. 9ff. ; cf. ii. 21.6).—32. τοὺς Bact- 
λέας : the pl. refers doubtless to the 
two kings at Sparta; prob. without 
reference to the controversy men- 
tioned by Hdt. vi. 52. 1ff., as to 
whether Aristodemus himself origin- 
ally occupied the throne. See O. 
Miiller, Dorier, p. 90. 

17. On this account Pleistoanar was 
all the more active in furthering the re- 
conciliation ; and after long negotiations 
a peace was brought about toward the 
end of the winter between the Athenians 
on one side, and the Lacedaemonians, 
with most of their allies, on the other. 

1. ἀχθόμενος οὖν τῇ διαβολῇ ταύτῃ: 
resumes διαβαλλόμενος, in c. 16. 18, 
with its results, while νομίζων intro- 
duces the other considerations by 
which he was influenced, which led 
to the result προυθυμήθη (aor.), he 
conceived the ardent wish; with subst. 
obj. as in viii. 1. 5; 90. 9.—3. κομι- 
Lopevev: 1... εἰ κομίζοιντο. ---- 5. ἀπὸ 
τῶν ξυμφορῶν : ‘ on occasion of,” etc., 
as in ii, 25. 18, ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ τολμήμα- 


τος ἐπῃνέθη. ---Ἴ. ἐς λόγους, καὶ πρὸς 
τὸ ἔαρ ἤδη: the punctuation is that 
adopted by St. and Cl., who put a 
comma after λόγους, and, 10, a comma 
instead of a period after ἐσακούοιεν, 
and, 17, a third comma after Νίσαιαν. 
The τε in τόν τε χειμῶνα τοῦτον brings 
into close connexion with one another 
not the times τὸν χειμῶνα and πρὸς τὸ 
Zap ἤδη, but the events ἧσαν és λόγους 
and παρασκευὴ προεπανεσείσθη, KTE., 
and the re of παρασκευή τε corresponds 
further to καί, 10. This καί intro- 
duces the third member of the period, 
i.e.as far as 17, τότε δή. The tempo- 
ral force of the long clause ἐπειδὴ .. - 
τὴν Νίσαιαν is repeated by τότε δή. 
See App. — ἦσαν: see App. 

7. καὶ πρὸς to ἔαρ ἤδη : in close 
connexion: “and when the spring 
was already near.” See on i. 30. 20. 
— 8. παρασκευή re: corresponding to 
τόν τε χειμῶνα Ἦσαν és λόγους : on the 
one hand, negotiations were con- 
ducted; on the other hand, warlike 
demonstrations were made. On the 
use of re... τε to give equal impor- 
tance to two ideas, see on i. 8. 14; 
also iii. 81. 5. — προεπανεσείσθη : ἧ πο- 


THUCYDIDES V. 17. 


περιαγγελλομένη κατὰ πόλεις ὡς ἐς ἐπιτειχισμόν, ὅπως οἱ 
10 ᾿Αθηναῖοι μᾶλλον ἐσακούοιεν, καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἐκ τῶν ξυνό- 
δων ἅμα πολλὰς δικαιώσεις προενεγκόντων ἀλλήλοις Evv- 
εχωρεῖτο ὥστε ἃ ἑκάτεροι πολέμῳ ἔσχον ἀποδόντας τὴν 


εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι, Νίσαιαν δ᾽ ἔχειν ᾿Αθηναίους (ἀνταπ- 


αἰτούντων γὰρ Πλάταιαν οἱ Θηβαῖοι ἔφασαν ov Big, 
16 ἀλλ᾽ ὁμολογίᾳ αὐτῶν προσχωρησάντων καὶ οὐ προδόν 
ἀλλ ὁμολογίᾳ βοσχώρη pom 

8' ὦ a a na , 
των ἔχειν τὸ χωρίὸν" καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ 


τὴν Νίσαιαν), τότε δὴ παρακαλέσαντες τοὺς ἑαυτῶν ξυμ- 


μάχους οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ψηφισαμένων πλὴν Βοιω- 


»-»" nw »” 
τῶν καὶ Κορινθίων καὶ ᾿Ηλείων καὶ Μεγαρέων τῶν ad- 


20 λων ὥστε καταλύεσθαι (τούτοις δὲ οὐκ ἤρεσκε τὰ πρασ- 
σόμενα), ποιοῦνται τὴν ξύμβασιν καὶ ἐσπείσαντο πρὸς 


λεμικὴ παρασκενὴ προηπειλήθη, Schol. 
The same figurative expression occurs 
in ἐπανάσεισις τῶν ὅπλων, iv. 126. 22. 
Cf. vi. 86. 2, προσείοντες φόβον. --- ἀπὸ 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων : from the Lacedae- 
monian side, similarly i. 141.6; iii. 36. 
24, γνῶμαι ἀφ᾽ ἑκάστων ἐλέγοντο. --- 9. 
περιαγγελλομένη : closely connected 
with παρασκευή. The warlike demon- 
stration of the Lacedaemonians con- 
sisted of proclamations calling for 
military service.— ὡς és ἐπιτειχισ- 
pov: see App.— 10. ἐσακούοιεν: give 
heed, obey. Of. i. 82. 11; 126. 3; iii. 
4.3; iv. 110.1; v. 45. 18; 50. 1; viii. 
31. 10.—11. δικαιώσεις : “demands 
made with an assumption of right.” 
See on i. 141. 6.—-mpoeveyxdvrov: 
gen. abs. with no subj. expressed. 
Cf. i. 2.8 and note ; ii. 52. 9; iii. 82. 6; 
iv. 94.10. For the force of προφέρειν, 
see on iii. 59. 11, προφερόμενοι ὅρκους ; 
iii. 64. 7, μὴ προφέρετε τὴν τότε γενομέ- 
νὴν ξυνωμοσίαν. ---- ξυνεχωρεῖτο: only 
here in neut. pass. The impf. denotes 
the hardly attained result. The agree- 


ment reached is introduced by ὥστε. 
Cf. i. 28. 18, ἑτοῖμοι δὲ εἶναι καὶ ὥστε 
ἀμφοτέρους μένειν κατὰ χώραν. GMT. 
98, 2, n. 2. See App. — 12. ἔσχον: 
had acquired. Inceptive aor. G. 200, 
n. 5 6; H. 841.—13. ἔχειν: retain, 
keep. — ἀνταπαιτούντων : sc. τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων. ---14, ἔφασαν οὐ βίᾳ κτέ.: of. 
iii. 52. 10, where the still more posi- 
tive expression αὐτῶν ἑκόντων προσχω- 
ρησάντων is used. — 15. καὶ οὐ προδόν- 
των: does not continue the idea of: 
προσχωρησάντων with entire accuracy, 
since the subj. of προδόντων comprises 
only part of the subj. of προσχωρη- 
σάντων, but the sense is easily under- 
stood from the connexion, and the 
antithesis is a natural one. —16, καὶ 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι... Νίσαιαν: 86. ἔχειν 
ἔφασαν. A remark of the author, not 
of the Thebans. — 17. 

σαντες: a word used esp. of the ξύμ- 
paxo. Cf. i. 67. 3; 68. 10; ν. 30. 
12.— 20. ὥστε: cf. 12. — τούτοις δέ: 
refers back to the words before τῶν 
ἄλλων. --- οὐκ ἤρεσκε TA πρασσόμενα : 


THUCYDIDES V. 17, 18, 


-% 9 ’ Ν : 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ ὦμοσαν, ἐκεῖνοί τε πρὸς τοὺς Aaxe- 


δαιμονίους, τάδε" 


18 


““Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ Λακεδαιμό- 


ΔΓ... , \ , Ἂν \ ΄, 
νιοι Και OL ξύμμαχοι κατα τάδε, καὶ ὠμοσαᾶν κατα πο- 


Ν ‘\ A ε A A“ “~ 4 > “a 
deus * περι μὲν τῶν ιέρων τῶν KOLWWY, θύειν ἐξεῖναι 


‘ ’ Ν a Ν Ν ’ Ν 
καὶ μαντεύεσθαι καὶ θεωρεῖν κατὰ τὰ πάτρια τὸν βου- 


δ λόμενον καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν ἀδεῶς. 


Χ 
TO 


a A Ν 
δ᾽ ἱερὸν καὶ τὸν νεὼν τὸν ἐν Δελφοῖς τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος καὶ 


Ν a 
Δελφοὺς αὐτονόμους εἶναι καὶ αὐτοτελεῖς Kal αὐτοδίκους 


καὶ αὑτῶν καὶ τῆς γῆς τῆς ἑαυτῶν κατὰ τὰ πάτρια. ἔτη δὲ 


> Ν Ν , > ’ὔ Ν “A , 
εἶναι Tas σπονδὰς πεντήκοντα ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ τοῖς ξυμμά- 
10 χοις τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τοῖς ξυμμάχοις 

a ’ 5 ’ Ν 5 ”~ Ν ϑι ἴω 
τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίων ἀδόλους καὶ ἀβλαβεῖς καὶ κατὰ γῆν 
Ν Ν ld 9 \ NS. 367 3 , the ΝΝ 
καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν. ὅπλα δὲ μὴ ἐξέστω ἐπιφέρειν ἐπὶ πη- 
A , 7 Ν) ‘ : , δ 9 
μονῇ μήτε Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἐπὶ ᾿Αθη- 


the separate negotiations between the 
Lacedaemonians and Athenians, as in 
iv. 121. ὃ 1, — 21. ποιοῦνται τὴν Evp- 
βασιν, «xré.: the conclusion of the 
peace took place in Sparta, as appears 
also from παρακαλέσαντες, 17. See 
Ullrich, Beitr., 1862, p. 4. 
18. The terms of the treaty between 
tthe Athenians on the one hand and the 
Lacedaemonians, with such of their allies 
as joined them, on the other. 

1. Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο xré.: see 
App. — 2. καὶ of ξύμμαχοι : refers esp. 
to the allies of Sparta. The allies of the 
Athenians rarely (but see 10) appear 
in independent action. Cf. c. 47. 1f. 
The same relation exists below § 9; 
and therefore κατὰ πόλεις here and in 


48 refers only to the allies of the 


Lacedaemonians. 

3. περὶ μὲν τῶν ἱερῶν τῶν κοινῶν: 
standing at the beginning of the 
sent., is used almost abs. as regards 


the national sanctuaries. The sanct- 
uaries referred to are esp. those at 
Delphiand Olympia. Cf iii. 57.7, and 
see oniv. 118. 1f.— ἐξεῖναι: see App. — 
5. τὸ ἱερὸν καὶ τὸν νεών: νεώς is the tem- 
ple proper, ἱερόν the consecrated en- 
closure about the temple. Cf. iv. 90. 
7.—T. αὐτονόμους xré.: 1.6. free from 
external influence, esp. that of the 
Phocians, which had occasioned seri- 
ous hostilities between Sparta and 
Athens. See i, 112. 18 ff. The un- 
usual expression αὐτοτελεῖς καὶ αὐτοδί- 
κους is used in order to exclude every 
kind of foreign interference. The 
temple and the inhabitants of Delphi 
are here joined in an indivisible com- 
munity, and the following preds. apply 
to both in common. 

11. ἀδόλους καὶ ἀβλαβεῖς καὶ κατὰ 
γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν : this, like sev- 
eral other expressions in this chapter, 
is the regular formula. Cf.c. 47.§ 1-4. 


41 


42 


25 


Ὄλυνθος, Σπάρτωλος. 


THUCYDIDES V. 18. 


vaiovs καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους μήτε ᾿Αθηναίους Kal τοὺς 
15 ξυμμάχους ἐπὶ Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους, μήτε 
τέχνῃ μήτε μηχανῇ μηδεμιᾷ. ἣν δέ τι διάφορον ἢ πρὸς 
ἀλλήλους, δικαίῳ χρήσθων καὶ ὅρκοις, καθ᾽ ὅ τι ἂν ξυν- 


θῶνται. 


ἀποδόντων δὲ ᾿Αθηναίοις Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ οἱ 


ξύμμαχοι ᾿Αμφίπολιν " ὅσας δὲ πόλεις παρέδοσαν Λακε- 
20 δαιμόνιοι ᾿Αθηναίοις, ἐξέστω ἀπιέναι ὅποι ἂν βούλωνται 


αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἔχοντας " τὰς δὲ πόλεις φερούσας 


Ν ’ Ν 4 ὁ ’ > , ἷ 
τὸν φόρον τὸν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αριστείδου αὐτονόμους εἶναι. 


ὅπλα 


δὲ μὴ ἐξίστω ἐπιφέρειν ᾿Αθηναίους μηδὲ τοὺς ξυμμάχους 
ΦΟΝ, xy > , Ν 4 > Ν ε Ν 
ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἀποδιδόντων τὸν φόρον, ἐπειδὴ αἱ σπονδαὶ 
ἐγένοντο" εἰσὶ δὲ ΓΑργιλος, Στάγειρος, “AxavOos, Σκῶλος, 


ξυμμάχους δ᾽ εἶναι μηδετέρων, 


μήτε Λακεδαιμονίων μήτε ᾿Αθηναίων: ἣν δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
πείθωσι τὰς πόλεις βουλομένας ταύτας, ἐξέστω ξυμμά- 


16. ἤν: see ΑΡΡ. --- διάφορον : adj. 
disputed, as in i. 56. 2. --- 17. δικαίῳ: 
subst. legal means, settlement by law. 
Elsewhere with the art., as in iii. 39. 20. 

18. ἀποδόντων δέ: this paragraph 
concerning the restoration of the 
places taken by the Lacedaemonians 
extends to 31. After the mention of 
the most important one among them, 
Amphipolis, the stipulations regard- 
ing their treatment are inserted (ὅσας 
δὲ πόλεις. .. ἐγένοντο, 25); and then 
the smaller towns which had revolted 
from Athens in the course of the war, 
and are to be restored, are mentioned 
by name: εἰσὶ δὲ (αἵδε, which the infe- 
rior Mss. insert here, interferes with 
the connexion) “Apyi\os . . . Srdprw- 
Aos. Then follows a number of special 
provisions. See App.—19. παρέδο- 
σαν: we should expect ἂν παραδῶσι, 
but in the language of the treaty the 
provision requiring the restoration of 
the towns 18 regarded as already ful- 


filled. Cf. ἐπειδὴ ἐγένοντο in 24. But see 
App. on 18.— 21. αὐτούς : the inhabi- 
tants (or, accepting Kirchhoff’s read- 
ing, παρέλαβον for παρέδοσαν in 19, the 
Athenians who were in these cities) 
themselves. This emphasis upon the 
pronoun necessitates the use of the 
connective καί before ἔχοντες. -- φερού- 
σας τὸν φόρον: expresses the same 
condition as ἀποδόντων τὸν φόρον, 24, 
if they or as long as they pay the tribute. 
— 22. τὸν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αριστείδου: the first 
appointment of the tribute to be paid 
by members of the Delian confederacy 
was ascribed to Aristides (Plut. Arist. 
24; Dem. xx1m1, 209; Paus. viii. 52). 
See on i. 96. 5. —24. ἐπειδὴ ... éyé- 
vovto: i.e. after the ratification of the 
treaty. See on 19, above. Until then 
the Athenians could try to subject the 
cities by violence, and the above pro- 
visions of the treaty were not in force. 
—25. Στάγειρος : see App. on c. 6, 
2.—28, βουλομένας : “ with their own 


-» 


THUCYDIDES V. 18. 


43 


xous ποιεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοις. Μηκυβερναίους δὲ 6 
4A ’ Ἀ a > Cal ‘A ’ Ν ε 
90 KaL Σαναίους και Σιγγαίους οἰκεῖν τὰς πόλεις Tas εαυ- 


' τῶν, καθάπερ ᾿Ολύνθιοι καὶ ᾿Ακάνθιοι. 


ἀποδόντων δὲ 


᾿Αθηναίοις Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι Πάνακτον. 


ἀποδόντων δὲ καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Λακεδαιμονίοις Κορυφάσιον 


καὶ Κύθηρα καὶ Μεθώνην καὶ Πτελεὸν καὶ ᾿Αταλάντην, © 


¥ 9 \ A 
35 Kal τοὺς ἄνδρας ὅσοι εἰσὶ Λακεδαιμονίων ἐν τῷ δημοσίῳ 


τῷ ᾿Αθηναίων ἢ ἀλλοθί που ὅσης ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἄρχουσιν ἐν 


7 ‘ ‘ > ’ ,΄ 
δημοσίῳ: καὶ τοὺς ἐν Σκιώνῃ πολιορκουμένους Πελο- 
a > “ ἈΝ x A 9 ’ 
ποννησίων ἀφεῖναι καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ὅσοι Λακεδαιμονίων 
4 3 ’ > ‘ ‘ 9 / > 4 
ξύμμαχοι ἐν Σκιώνῃ εἰσὶ καὶ ὅσους Βρασίδας ἐσέπεμψε, 
40 καὶ εἴ τις τῶν ξυμμάχων τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ἐν ᾿Αθή- 
‘ a " Bs Ψ 
vais ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ δημοσίῳ ἢ ἄλλοθί που ἧς ᾿Αθηναῖοι ap- 


free will and consent.” See App. — 
29. ᾿Αθηναίοις: const. with ἐξέστω. 
Because this provision applies only 
to the Athenians, they are mentioned 
a second time at the end of the sent. 

MnxvBepvatovs καὶ Zavatovs καὶ 
Σιγγαίους : St. conjectures that these 
places were among those mentioned 
in i. 58. 11 ff., which had united in 
the foundation of Olynthus. Steup, 
Stud. Thuc. I. p. 40 ff., and Kirchhoff, 
Sitzungsber. d. Berl. Akad. 1882, p. 
924, assume that the Olynthians 
claimed the rights of suzerainty over 
Mecyberna, the Acanthians over Sane 
and Singus. These claims are here 
denied, and the three towns are, at 
the instance of the Athenians, placed 
upon an equal footing with Olynthus 
and Acanthus. 

32. IIdvaxrov: this provision, 
made without the consent of the 
Boeotians (see c. 3. 24 and 17. 18), 
was only imperfectly executed. See 
6, 42. 2 ff.— 33. Κορυφάσιον: the 
Lacedaemonian name for Pylos. It 


was taken by the Athenians in 425 
B.c. See iv. 3 ff.—34. Κύθηρα: was 
taken by the Athenians in 424 B.c. 
See iv. 53 ff.— Μεθώνην : was seized 
by the Athenians in 425 B.c. See iv. 
45. 5ff. See App.—IIrekedy: has 
not been mentioned elsewhere by 
Thuc. Perhaps it is the place in 
Boeotia mentioned in Pliny, iv. 7. 26. 
-᾿Αταλάντην: an island near the 
Opuntian Locrians, was occupied by 
the Athenians in 4318.c. See ii.32.— 
35. ἐν τῷ δημοσίῳ: ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ, 
Schol. Cf. iv. 41. 1, of ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐβού- 
λευσαν δεσμοῖς μὲν αὐτοὺς φυλάσσειν 
μέχρι οὗ τι ξυμβῶσιν. --- 36. ἄλλοθι που 
ὅσης: like ἄλλοθι που ἧς, 41, with the 
rare ellipsis of γῆς. Part. gen. 6. 
168, x. 8; H. 757.— 37. τοὺς ἐν 
Σκιώνῃ πολιορκουμένους : see iv. 130. 
34 and 131. 8.—38. ἀφεῖναι: here, 
as above, § 3 and 4, and below, § 9 
and 10, the inf. and imy. interchange. 
GMT. 103 ; H. 957 a; Kiihn. 474 "Ὁ, and 
595, 5. — 39. ὅσους Βρασίδας ἐσέ- 
πεέμψε: see iv. 123. 16, 


44 THUCYDIDES V. 18. 


\ εἶ 
χουσιν ἐν δημοσίῳ. ἀποδόντων δὲ καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ 
οἱ ξύμμαχοι οὕστινας ἔχουσιν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμ- 
μάχων κατὰ ταὐτά. Σκιωναίων δὲ καὶ Τορωναίων καὶ 
45 Σερμυλιῶν καὶ εἴ τινα ἄλλην πόλιν ἔχουσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 

᾿Αθηναίους βουλεύεσθαι περὶ αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πό- 
“ ν Χ , 3 
ὅρκους δὲ ποιήσασθαι ᾿Αθη- 


ναίους πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους κατὰ 


λεων ὅ τι ἂν δοκῇ αὐτοῖς. 
’ > 4 \ Ν > / 9 ε 4 Ν 
πόλεις. ὀμνύντων δὲ τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον ἑκάτεροι τὸν 
, ε ΄, 3 6. EF / eQ> 9 » 
50 μέγιστον (ἑπτακαίδεκα ἐξ ἑκάστης πόλεως)" ὁ δ᾽ ὅρκος ἔστω 
ὅδε" “᾿ D ταῖς ξυνθή ὶ ταῦ dats ταῖσδε ὃ 
ὅδε: “᾿Εμμενῶ ταῖς ξυνθήκαις καὶ ταῖς σπονδαῖς ταῖσδε δι- 
’ Ἁ LO / > ¥ δὲ ὃ 4 Ν A 
καίως Kal ἀδόλως "᾿ ἔστω δὲ Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τοῖς ξυμ- 
4 ‘ aS 9 Ν > 7 Ν δὲ ν 
μάχοις κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὅρκος πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους, τὸν δὲ ὅρκον 
ἀνανεοῦσθαι κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν ἀμφοτίρους. στήλας δὲ στῆσαι 


55 


Ὀλυμπίασι καὶ Πυθοῖ καὶ Ἰσθμοῖ καὶ ᾿Αθήνησι ἐν πόλει 


καὶ ἐν Λακεδαίμονι ἐν ᾿Αμυκλαίῳ. 


εἰ δέ τι ἀμνημονοῦσιν 


ὁποτεροιοῦν καὶ ὅτου πέρι, λόγοις δικαίοις χρωμίνοις 


45. Σερμυλιῶν : from inscriptions 
for Ms. Ἑρμυλίων. The gens., at first 
loosely joined with εἴ τινα ἄλλην πόλιν, 
are taken up again in the following 
περὶ αὐτῶν. See App. — 49. ὀμνύντων 
δέ: this provision concerning the form 
of oath is, like the one above, 19 ff, 
concerning the treatment of the re- 
stored cities, inserted as a parenthe- 
sis between the corresponding mem- 
bers of the sent., ὅρκους δὲ... πόλεις 
and 52, ἔστω δὲ... ἀμφοτέρους. The 
Athenians are to make oath to the 
Lacedaemonians as well as to those 
of their allies who unite in the peace; 
hence the pl. ὅρκους, 47. The Lace- 
daemonians and their allies take an 
oath to the Athenians only; hence, 
53, ὅρκος πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους. ---- ἑκάτεροι: 
i.e. the Athenians on one side, the 
Lacedaemonians and their allies on the 


other. (Kirchhoff brackets ἑκάτεροι.) 
— τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον TOV μέγιστον : 
Friinkel, Hermes, 13, p. 460, has shown 
that the oath by which the Athenians 
usually ratified treaties was sworn by 
Zeus, Demeter, and Apollo. Ullrich, 
Beitr. 1862, p.7 ff., suggests for Sparta 
the Dioscuri, τὼ Sid. — 50. ἑπτακαί- 
Sexa ἐξ ἑκάστης πόλεως : see App. 

δδ. ᾿Αθήνησι : see ΑΡΡ. ---ἐν πόλει: 
i.e. ἐν τῇ ᾿Ακροπόλει. Cf. ii. 15. 88 f. 
- ἐν ᾿Αμυκλαίῳ: i.e. in the temple of 
Apollo of Amyclae, which lay, ace. to 
Polyb. v. 19, twenty stadia from the 
city. 

57. ὅτου : after ὁποτεροιοῦν is easily 
understood in place of dérovodv.— 
λόγοις δικαίοις : “ negotiations about 
what is just,” “the just or legal 
method,” opp. to every sort of vio- 
lence. So also inc. 98, 2. --- ὅ8. εὔορ- 


9 


THUCYDIDES Υ. 18, το. 


εὔορκον εἶναι ἀμφοτέροις ταύτῃ μεταθεῖναι ὅπῃ ἂν δοκῇ 
ἀμφοτέροις, ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις. 

“ἤΑρχει δὲ τῶν σπονδῶν ἔφορος Πλειστόλας ᾽Αρτε- 1 
μισίου μηνὸς τετάρτῃ φθίνοντος, ἐν δὲ ᾿Αθήναις ap- 
χων ᾿Αλκαῖος ᾿Ελαφηβολιῶνος μηνὸς ἕκτῃ φθίνοντος. 
ὦμνυον δὲ οἵδε. καὶ ἐσπένδοντο: Λακεδαιμονίων μὲν 
5 (Πλειστοάναξ, ἾΑγις,) Πλειστόλας, Δαμάγητος, Χίονις, 
Μεταγένης, “AxavOos, Δάϊθος, ᾿Ισχαγόρας, Φιλοχαρίδας, 
Ζευξίδας, ΓΑντιππος, Τέλλις, ᾿Αλκινάδας, ᾿Εμπεδίας, Μη- 
vas, Λάφιλος: ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ οἵδε: Λάμπων, ἸΙσθμιόνι- 
κος, Νικίας, Λάχης, Εὐθύδημος, Προκλῆς, Πυθόδωρος, 


κον: consistent with their oath, i.e. with 
the sworn treaty. 

19. The day of the ratification of 
the treaty and the names of those on both 
sides who took the oath. 

This chapter is part of the official 
document recording the peace. It 
determines the day with which the 
peace shall begin for all parties, and 
gives the names of the men who are 
to take the oath. Inc. 20 the narra- 
tive is resumed with the mention of 
the date of the ratification of the 
treaty. The indics. ἄρχει, ὥμνυον καὶ 
ἐσπένδοντο, are not unusual in treaties. 
See Steup, Stud. I. p. 68. 

1. ἄρχει: the manner of dating 
differs from that of iv. 118. 49, inas- 
much as here, not the day, but the 
year appears as subj.; for ἔφορος 
Πλειστόλας and ἄρχων ᾿Αλκαῖος are the 
usual expressions for the year, Ol. 
89,3. The dats. (τετάρτῃ and ἕκτῃ) 
denoting the day immediately follow 
the nouns denoting the year. Lit., the 
year of the Ephor Pleistolas, etc., begins 
the peace on the fourth day from the end 
of Artemisios ; i.e. the peace begins on 
the fourth, etc. The 27th of Artemi- 
sios in Sparta or the 25th of Elephe- 


bolion in Athens for the year 42] B.c. 
fell about the middle of April. See 
Curtius, Hist. of Greece, 111. p. 207. 
5. Πλειστοάναξ, “Ays: see App.— 
8. ᾿Αθηναίων δέ: of the seventeen Athe- 
nians, eleven (since for ᾿Αριστοκρίτης of 
the Mss. we must certainly write ’Ap:- 
στοκράτης from ¢. 24; cf. viii. 89. 12) are 
known to us as generals in the course of 
the war. Among these Nicias, Laches, 
Hagnon, Lamachus, and Demosthenes 
are the most noted. Lampon was 
celebrated (Plut. Per. c. 6) and de- 
rided (Ar. Av. 521, 988) as an oracle- 
monger. Only Isthmionicus, Procles 
(for the general Procles of Ol. 88. 2 
fell in the campaign against the Aeto- 
lians ; see iii. 98. 23), Myrtilus, Iolcius, 
and Timocrates are not elsewhere men- 
tioned. The reason for the number 
seventeen cannot be determined with 
any degree of certainty. Ullrich sug- 
gests on the Athenian side perhaps two 
priests, half of the generals of that 
year, and one citizen of each phyle. 
Perhaps the oath was taken on the 
Lacedaemonian side by a number of 
Lacedaemonians and one each from 
the allied cities which took part in 
the peace. Certainly the words καὶ 


45 


40 


THUCYDIDES V, 19, 20. 50]. 89, 8; 8.6. 421, aa 


10 Ἄγνων, Μυρτίλος, Θρασυκλῆς, Θεαγένης, ᾿Αριστοκράτης, 
Ἰώλκιος, Τιμοκράτης, Λέων, Λάμαχος, Δημοσθένης." 
Αὗται αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐγένοντο * τελευτῶντος τοῦ χει- 1 


20 


an 4 > > / ὑθὺ “ > a > 
μώνος aua ἦρι ἐκ Διονυσίων evlus τῶν ἀστικων, αὖ- 


’ δ ὧι ’ Ἀ ε A > , E 
τόδεκα ἐτῶν διελθόντων καὶ ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων παρενεγκου- 
“ * ε ἊΝ A ε > Ἀ ε 5 Ν > Ν Ν ε 
σῶν ἢ ὡς τὸ πρῶτον ἡ ἐσβολὴ ἢ ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν καὶ ἢ 


> A lal , vO Ss: δ 
apXn του πολέμου TOVOE ἐγένετο. 


’, , - Ν 
σκοπείτω δέ τις κατὰ 2 


τοὺς χρόνους καὶ μὴ τὴν ἀπαρίθμησιν τῶν ὀνομάτων τῶν 
ἑκασταχοῦ 7) ἀρχόντων ἢ ἀπὸ τιμῆς τινος [ἐς] τὰ προ- 


ὥμοσαν κατὰ πόλεις in ce. 18. 2 seem to 
imply that the allies took part in the 
oath as prescribed in c. 18. 47 ff., 
though Ullrich, p. 19, believes that 
they did not. Perhaps the number of 
Athenian envoys at Sparta had grad- 
ually risen to seventeen, all of whom 
were then commissioned to take the 
oath, or perhaps Kirchhoff is right in 
deducing the number from the pecu- 
liar Spartan constitution, in which 
case the seventeen Athenians would 
be appointed to correspond to the 
seventeen Spartans. See App. on c. 
18. 50. 

20. Previous duration of the war. 
Remarks on the best way of reckoning 
periods of time. 

1. αὗται αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐγένοντο: is a 
brief re-statement of the contents οὗ 
the latter part of c. 17 (τότε δή παρα- 
καλέσαντες, . . . τάδε). --- 2. ἐκ Διο- 
γυσίων εὐθὺς τῶν ἀστικῶν : the city or 
greater Dionysia began before the 
vernal equinox, and lasted several 
days, until about the end of March. ἐκ 
of immediate sequence, as in i. 120. 17, 
ἐκ μὲν εἰρήνης πολεμεῖν ; ii. 49.9, ἔπειτα 
ἐξ αὐτῶν πταρμὸς καὶ βράγχος ἐπεγί- 
Ὕνετο.-- αὐτόδεκα ἔτη : exactly ten years, 
corresponding to Lat. decem ipsi 
dies. (Kr. compares αὐτοτραγικὸς 
πίθηκος, Dem. xvit1. 242.) — 3. παρ- 


ενεγκουσῶν : παραφέρειν here and in 6. 
26. 8 intr. like διαφέρειν, προφέρειν (i. 
93-15), ὑπερφέρειν (i. 81. 2) be in excess, 
vary. With this ἢ ὡς stands in close 
connexion: after exactly ten years had 
passed, and a few days were in excess 
since (i.e. had passed along further . 
than when), etc. In accordance with 
the date of the beginning of the war 
as given in ii. 2, the words ἡ ἐσβολὴ 
ἐὸν τοῦ πολέμου τοῦδε must be closely 
connected, so that ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ πολέμου 
τοῦδε refers to the attack upon Pla- 
taea, i.e. to the beginning of April, 
431 B.c. ἡ ἐσβολὴ ἡ és τὴν ᾿Αττικήν is 
mentioned first, as the more impor- 
tant event, but in the computation of 
the time it is made subordinate to 
the attack upon Plataea. The éatya 
ἡμέραι παρενεγκοῦσαι are, then, in the 
early part of April. The day upon 
which the peace began is mentioned 
in c. 1g. 1, and falls about the middle 
of April. Here the same day is re- 
ferred to as a few days after the first 
of April. But ten days, or even two 
weeks, may well be called a few days 
when a ten years’ war is under con- 
sideration. See App. 


6. Kal μὴ τὴν ἀπαρίθμησιν : this 


passage (to πιστεύσας μᾶλλον) is cor- 


rupt in all Mss. But the sense is evi- 
dently: one must (in order to understand 


THUCYDIDES V. 20, 21. 


γεγενημένα σημαινόντων πιστεύσας μᾶλλον - οὐ yap axpt- 
βές ἐστιν 4 ots καὶ ἀρχομένοις καὶ μεσοῦσι καὶ ὅπως 


»Ὰ 4 > /, 4 
10 ἐτυχέ τῳ ETTEVEVETO τι. 


Ν / Ν Ν “ > 
κατὰ θέρη δὲ Kal χειμῶνας ἀρι- 


θμῶν, ὥσπερ γέγραπται, εὑρήσει, ἐξ ἡμισείας ἑκατέρου 


a 3 A ἈΝ ΄ ¥ , \ PP δ Ἂν 
του ενιαυτου τὰ ig δύναμιν εχοντος, δέκα μεν θέρη, σους 


δὲ χειμῶνας τῷ πρώτῳ πολέμῳ τῷδε γεγενημένους: 


Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ (ἔλαχον γὰρ πρότεροι ἀποδιδόναι 


a 
ἃ εἶχον) τούς τε ἄνδρας εὐθὺς τοὺς Tapa σφίσιν αἰχμα- 


λώτους ἀφίεσαν καὶ πέμψαντες ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης πρέσ- 


Bes *loyayépay καὶ Μηνᾶν καὶ Φιλοχαρίδαν ἐκέλευον 


events properly) date them according 
to the (natural) divisions of time, and not 
acc. to (κατά is understood with ἀπα- 
plounow; see on i. 6. 21; ii. 63. 4; 
ili. 21. 10) the count of the names of the 
persons who serve in each place, either as 
highest magistrate or from any (other, 
e.g. priestly) office (as in Argos; cf. 
li. 2. 4), to designate the year, because 
one considers that safer, for that is inex- 
act (i.e. to embrace a whole year in 
this way), since something happened at 
the beginning as well as in the middle or 
at any other time of their tenure of 
office. ois is used in the sense of ἐπεὶ 
τούτοις to explain ἀρχόντων ἢ ἀπὸ 
τιμῆς Twos. See App.—9. καὶ ὅπως 
ἔτυχέ Tw: sc. ἐπιγενόμενον. “In what- 
ever other part of their time of office 
anevent may have happened,” wheth- 
er at the end, or in the first or in the 
second half, etc.—10. ἐπεγένετο: as 
in i. 16. 1 and vii. 87. 14. 

11. ὥσπερ γέγραπται : “as has been 
done hitherto in my narrative.” Cf. ii, 
1.4.— ἐξ ἡμισείας κτέ. : acc. to the ex- 
planation given in the Introd. to 
Book I. p. 40, equiv. to ἑκατέρου (τοῦ 
τε θέρους καὶ τοῦ χειμῶνος) Thy δύναμιν 
ἔχοντος ἐξ ἡμισείας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, “in- 
asmuch as each of the two divisions 


of the year is to be reckoned (on an 
average) as half a year,” z.e. so that 
the two divisions, though not neces- 
sarily equal to one another, when 
taken together always make a year. 
—13. τῷ πρώτῳ πολέμῳ : also in c. 
24.12 and c. 26.15. This and 6 πρό- 
τερος πόλεμος (vii. 18. 12) and ὁ δε- 
καετὴς πόλεμος (Cc. 25. 3 and 26. 15) 
are the words used by Thue. to de- 
note the first period of the Pelopon- 
nesian war, for which the designation 
᾿Αρχιδάμειος πόλεμος came into use 
among the orators. See Ullrich, Beitr., 
1845, p. 15 ff. 

21. The execution of the terms of the 
treaty meets with opposition at Amphip- 
olis and other places in Thrace. 

1. ἔλαχον γάρ: i.e. in the drawing of 
lots, which evidently took place imme- 
diately after the conclusion of the 
treaty. Cf.c.35.7.—3. ἀφίεσαν : impf. 
after analogy of the use of πέμπειν. It 
expresses continuance of the action. 
Cf. iii. 111. 14, rods μὲν Μαντινέας καὶ 
τοὺς Πελοποννησίους ἀφίεσαν, τοὺς δ᾽ 
᾿Αμπρακιώτας ἔκτεινον, and viii. 41. 18. 
- 4. Ἰσχαγόραν : he took part (see 
iv. 132. 6 and 13) in the Thracian ex- 
pedition. These three men all shared 
in the conclusion of the treaty. Cf c. 


47 


48 


THUCYDIDES Υ 21, 22. 


5 τὸν Κλεαρίδαν τὴν ᾿Αμφίπολιν παραδιδόναι τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 
, Ν ‘ ¥ Ν , ε ¥ Les 
ναίοις καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους τὰς σπονδάς, ὡς εἴρητο ἑκάστοις, 


δέχεσθαι. 


οἱ δ᾽ οὐκ ἤθελον, νομίζοντες οὐκ ἐπιτηδείας 2 


εἶναι" οὐδὲ ὁ Κλεαρίδας παρέδωκε τὴν πόλιν, χαριζόμε- 


vos τοῖς Χαλκιδεῦσι, λέγων ὡς οὐ δυνατὸς εἴη Bia Exei- 


10 νων παραδιδόναι. 


> Ν Ν ὃ τοι Ν ’ὔ Ν ΄ 
ἐλθὼν δὲ αὐτὸς κατὰ τάχος μετὰ πρέσ- 


> , > ’ ’ 5» Ν τὰ 
βεων αὐτόθεν ἀπολογησόμενός τε ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα, 
A ? 9 
ἣν κατηγορῶσιν οἱ περὶ τὸν ᾿Ισχαγόραν ὅτι οὐκ ἐπείθετο, 
» ὍΝ 4 / > ’ > ae Ν » ε ε 
καὶ ἅμα βουλόμενος εἰδέναι εἰ ἔτι μετακινητὴ εἴη ἡ ὅμο- 


λογία, ἐπειδὴ ηὗρε κατειλημμένους, αὐτὸς μὲν πάλιν πεμ- 


Σ , a , Ν , ΄ Ν 
15 πόντων τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ κελευόντων μάλιστα μὲ; 


Ἂς Ν ’ “ > Ν ’ ε ’ 
καὶ τὸ χωρίον παραδοῦναι, εἰ δὲ μή, ὁπόσοι Πελοποννὴ- 


σίων ἔνεισιν ἐξαγαγεῖν, κατὰ τάχος ἐπορεύετο. 


2 Οἱ δὲ ξύμμαχοι ἐν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι αὐτοῦ “ἔτυχον 


» \ 9» κα δ Ν , \ Ν δ» 
OVTES, και αὐτῶν τους μὴ δεξαμένους τας σπονδὰς εκε- 


λευον οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ποιεῖσθαι. 


ot δὲ τῇ αὐτῇ προφά. 


- \ Ν A > , > »¥ / 
σει, Ὥπερ και το 7 PWTOV ATEWOAVTO, OUK ἔφασαν δέξα- 


19. 6f.—5. τὸν Κλεαρίδαν : cf. c. 11. 
19.—6. τοὺς ἄλλους : 1.6. the inhabi- 
tants of the towns mentioned in c. 18. 
19 ff. — ὡς εἴρητο ἑκάστοις : 1.6. acc. 
to the conditions mentioned in ec. 18. 

7. ἐπιτηδείας : this adj. is used 
with σπονδαί also in c. 112. 12 (where 
it is declined as an adj, of two termi- 
nations), proper, acceptable.—9. τοῖς 
Χαλκιδεῦσι: the inhabitants of Am- 
phipolis of Chalcidic descent. — βίᾳ 
ἐκείνων : this use of βίᾳ with gen. 
occurs also in i. 43. 8; 68. 19; iv. 
99. 6. 

10. ἐλθών : sc. Clearidas. Const. és 
τὴν Λακεδαίμονα with ἐλθών. --- μετὰ 
πρέσβεων : not those mentioned in 4, 
but envoys of the Amphipolitans 
themselves, αὐτόθεν. --- 11. ἀπολογη- 
σόμενος : see ΑΡΡ. --- 14. κατειλημμέ- 


vous: see App.— αὐτός : opp. to the 
πρέσβεις (10) with whom he had 
come. He was now sent back; the 
envoys probably stayed to see if they 
might not still accomplish something. 
- 16. καὶ τὸ χωρίον : καί is emphatic. 
He was to surrender the town itself 
if possible. 

22. After vain attempts to induce the 
rest of their allies to join in the peace, 
the Lacedaemonians make a formal alli- 
ance with the Athenians. 

1. οἱ δὲ ξύμμαχοι: the narrative 
recurs to the end of c. 17. See App. 
—3. προφάσει: the expressed reason, 
not a pretended one. Cf. i. 23: 28 
and note. —4. τὸ πρῶτον : see 6. 17. 
18 ff., where a hint of their reasons is 
given in οὐκ ἤρεσκε τὰ πρασσόμενα. --- 
δέξασθαι: on this rare use of the aor. 


THUCYDIDES V, 22, 23. 


x , , ’ A ε » 
δ σθαι, ἢν μή τινας δικαιοτέρας τούτων ποιῶνται. ὡς ὃ 
2A > A ΓΕ, x 3. -f 4 ἃ ΝΣ 
αὐτῶν οὐκ ἐσήκουον, ἐκείνους μὲν ἀπέπεμψαν, αὐτοὶ δὲ 
Ν ν 3 4 ’ > Ὁ“ ’ 
πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ξυμμαχίαν ἐποιοῦντο, νομίζοντες 
δ᾽ Ἄ ΄ , 3 ΄ > X > ¥ 
ἥκιστα ἂν σφίσι τούς τε ᾿Αργείους, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἤθελον 
᾿Αμπελίδου καὶ Λίχου ἐλθόντων ἐπισπένδεσθαι, νομί- 
10 σαντες αὐτοὺς ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων οὐ δεινοὺς εἶναι καὶ τὴν 


ἄλλην Πελοπόννησον μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ἡσυχάζειν" πρὸς γὰρ 
Ὁ ae iS ΄ > 5»5δπ a ΄ > , 
ἂν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, εἰ ἐξῆν, χωρεῖν. παρόντων οὖν πρέσ- 
> Ν a > 4 Ἁ ’ ‘ , 
Bewv ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ γενομένων λόγων Evve- 
βησαν, καὶ ἐγένοντο ὅρκοι καὶ ξυμμαχία ἥδε" 
“Kara τάδε ξύμμαχοι ἔσονται Λακεδαιμόνιοι (Kat 
5» na ͵ὕ 3, » » » Ν A , 
Αθηναῖοι) πεντήκοντα ἔτη " ἥν τινες ἴωσιν ἐς τὴν γὴν πολέ- 
μίοι τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ κακῶς ποιῶσι Λακεδαιμονίους, 


inf. where the fut. inf. seems to be 
required, see GMT. 23, 2,n.3. See 
App. ; 

6. ἐκείνους : i.e. all the allies, both 
those who had and those who had not 
accepted the peace; hence αὐτοί, the 
Lacedaemonians alone.— αὐτοὶ δὲ 
πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους . . . εἰ ἐξῆν, χω- 
ρεῖν : this reading of the Mss. may be 
translated as follows: They themselves 
were about to make an alliance with the 
Athenians, thinking that (if they did 
this) the Argives would by no means 
(ἥκιστα, Lat. minime), since they 
had not been willing to renew their treaty 
when Ampelidas and Lichas came to 
them for that purpose, — thinking, I say, 
that they without the Athenians would 
not be dangerous to them, and that the 
rest of Peloponnesus would be least 
likely to stir. This is certainly very 
harsh, and is open to so many objec- 
tions that an emendation seems necés- 
sary. For a full discussion of the 
passage, see App. — 7. ἐποιοῦντο: 
impf. expressing intended action: 
“they decided to form an alliance 


with Athens.” —8. τοὺς te ᾿Αργείους : 
stands first, being the most important 
consideration (as in c. 14. 20, πρὸς 
τοὺς *Apyelous).—9. ἐπισπένδεσθαι : 
is equiv. to ἄλλας σπένδεσθαι of 6. 14. 
21. The names of the envoys are 
not given in c. 14.— νομίσαντες : re- 
peats the meaning of νομίζοντες (7). 
It is difficult to see why the tense is 
changed to the aor., and the repetition 
is certainly unnecessary, or rather, as 
Kr. says, is inexcusable.— 11. πρὸς 
yap ἂν xré.: “for they thought that 
the Peloponnesians would join the 
Athenians if it were possible,” 1.6. if 
the Spartans did not make an alliance 
with Athens, but in this case the Pelo- 
ponnesians could no longer join with 
Athens to the detriment of Sparta. 

12. παρόντων οὖν πρέσβεων: the 
same who had arranged the treaty 
of peace, and taken the oaths. See 
c. 24. § 1. 

23. The terms of the treaty of alli- 
ance between the Lacedaemonians and 
the Athenians. 

1. (καί ᾿Αθηναῖοι) : see App.—4. 


49 


— 


50 THUCYDIDES V., 23. 


A ve 

ὠφελεῖν ᾿Αθηναίους Λακεδαιμονίους τρόπῳ ὁποίῳ ἂν δύ- 
δνωνται ἰσχυροτάτῳ κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν " ἣν δὲ δῃώσαντες 
οἴχωνται, πολεμίαν εἶναι ταύτην τὴν πόλιν Λακεδαιμο- 
νίοις καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ κακῶς πάσχειν ὑπὸ ἀμφοτέρων, 

‘o> ’ 
καταλύειν δὲ ἅμα ἄμφω τὼ πόλεε. ταῦτα δ᾽ εἶναι δικαίως 

\ 4 es / δι » > ‘ > 4 
καὶ προθύμως Kal ἀδόλως. καὶ ἦν τινες ἐς THY ᾿Αθηναίων 

»"- ΕἿΣ ͵ὕὔ A nw Lal > ’ > 
10 γῆν ἴωσι πολέμιοι Kal κακῶς ποιῶσιν, ᾿Αθηναίους ὠφε- 
“ ’ / 9 ΓΝ 4 > ’ 
λεῖν Λακεδαιμονίους τρόπῳ ὅτῳ ἂν δύνωνται ἰσχυροτά- 

¥ 
ἣν δὲ δῃώσαντες οἴχωνται, πολε- 
> 

μίαν εἶναι ταύτην τὴν πόλιν Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ADn- 


Ν Ν ’ 
T@ KATA TO δυνατόν. 


΄ Ν a ΄, ©3892 , , δὲ 
ναίοις καὶ κακῶς πάσχειν ὑπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων, καταλύειν δὲ 
15 ἅμα ἄμφω τὼ πόλεε. ταῦτα δ᾽ εἶναι δικαίως καὶ προθύ- 
‘ > / a ἈΝ ε , > ~ > 

pos Kal ἀδόλως. ἣν δὲ ἡ δουλεία ἐπανιστῆται, ἐπικου- 
A > / ‘4 Ν / Ν Ν 
ρεῖν ᾿Αθηναίους Λακεδαιμονίοις παντὶ σθένει κατὰ τὸ 
δυνατόν. ὀμοῦνται δὲ ταῦτα οἵπερ καὶ τὰς ἄλλας σπον- 
δὰς ὦμννον ἑκατέρων. ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν 
. 30 Λακεδαιμονίους μὲν ἰόντας ἐς ᾿Αθήνας πρὸς τὰ Διονύσια, 
᾿Αθηναίους δὲ ἰόντας ἐς Λακεδαίμονα πρὸς τὰ Ὑακῶθια. 
στήλην δὲ ἑκατέρους στῆσαι, την μὲν ἐν Λακεδαίμονι 


παρ᾽ ᾿Απόλλωνι ἐν ᾿Αμυκλαίῳ, τὴν δὲ ἐν ᾿Αθήναις ἐν πό- 


25 


λει παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηνᾷ. 


ἣν δέ τι δοκῇ Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ᾿Αθη- 


4 “A Ν » “Ὁ Ἀ nA ͵ὕὔ [ 
ναίοις προσθεῖναι καὶ ἀφελεῖν περὶ τῆς ξυμμαχίας, ὅ τι 
ἂν δοκῇ, εὔορκον ἀμφοτέροις εἶναι." 


τρόπῳ... δυνατόν: the formal and 
somewhat verbose language is char- 
acteristic of the style of documents. 
Cf. 11, and c. 47. 14 and 28. Kiihn. 
582, 2, ν. 4. 

8. καταλύειν : abs. without πόλεμον. 
So also in 14 and vii. 58. 8 f. 

8. εἶναι : used like γίγνεσθαι with 
advs. is a somewhat antiquated usage. 
Cf. 15. 

16. ἡ δουλεία: in collective sense 
occurs also in Plato, Legg. vi. 776 ο. 


and Arist. Pol. ii. 5. The danger 
here referred to was also mentioned 
in c. 14. 17 ff. as one of the reasons 
for concluding the peace. —17. ᾿Αθη- 
ναίους : see App. 

18. dpotvrar: the same transition 
to a finite mood as in c. 18. 12.—20. 
τὰ Διονύσια: the great or city Diony- 
sia (cf. c. 20. 2) at which time many 
foreigners visited Athens. —21. τὰ 
Ὑακίνθια: the festival of Apollo of 
Amyclae in the month Hyacinthios, 


3 


4 


* Ol, 89. 3; 5.0. 421, Spring. THUCYDIDES V. 24, 25. 


51 


“Toy δὲ ὅρκον ὥμνυον Λακεδαιμονίων μὲν οἵδε" 1 


Πλειστοάναξ, ἴάΑγις, Πλειστόλας, Δαμάγητος, Χίονις, 
Μεταγένης, “AxavOos, Δάϊθος, ᾿Ισχαγόρας, Φιλοχαρίδας, 


Ζευξίδας, ἤΑντιππος, 


᾿Αλκινάδας, 


Τέλλις, Ἐμπεδίας, 


5 Μηνᾶς, Λάφιλος ’ ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ Λάμπων, ᾿Ἰσθμιόνικος, 


τ Ψ 
Νικίας, 


Λάχης, 


Εὐθύδημος, 


Προκλῆς, Πυθόδωρος, 


Ἅγνων, Μυρτίλος, Θρασυκλῆς, Θεαγένης, ᾿Αριστοκρά- 


της, Ἰώλκιος, Τιμοκράτης, Λέων, Λάμαχος, Δημοσθένης." 


A ε ’ 3 , ἈΝ Ν \ > 
Αὕτη ἡ ξυμμαχία ἐγένετο μετὰ Tas σπονδὰς οὐ πολ- 


lal y \ ‘\ Ἂν, Ν > ~ ’ > / 
10 Lo voTEpoV, και TOUS ἄνδρας τους εκ TNS VYTOV ἀπέδο- 


σαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις, καὶ τὸ θέρος ἦρχε 


* nae § , ¥ 
του EVOEKGATOUV ETOUS. 


25 πόλεμος ξυνεχῶς γενόμενος γέγραπται. 


corresponding to the Attic Hecatom- 
baeon. 

24. The names of the Lacedaemo- 
nians and Athenians who took the oath, 
Restoration of the prisoners taken at 
Sphacteria. 

1, τὸν δὲ ὅρκον xré.: as Steup, 
Stud. I. p. 84, observes, c. 24. ὃ 1 be- 
longs to the document recording the 
treaty. The narrative begins again 
in 9, αὕτη ἡ ξυμμαχία. The same re- 
lation exists between c. 19 and ο. 20. 
—2. Πλειστοάναξ κτέ. : with the 
exception of some slight differences 
in the order (Τέλλις, ᾿Αλκινάδας, and 
Νικίας, Λάχης above) this list is iden- 
tical with that of c. 19. 

10. καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας: καί denotes 
immediate connexion: “and straight- 
way.” — τοὺς ἄνδρας τοὺς ἐκ τῆς 
νήσου: cf. c. 15. 2 f. and iv. 108. 38, 
—12. ταῦτα τὰ δέκα ἔτη: continues 
the idea of τοῦ ἑνδεκάτου ἔτους (in 
which the δέκα ἔτη are contained by 
implication), and therefore stands 
first, though these words belong gram- 
matically, as acc. of duration of time, 


A \ Ν , ¥ ε lal 
ταῦτα δὲ τὰ δέκα ἔτη ὁ πρῶτος 


μετὰ δὲ τὰς 


with ξυνεχῶς γενόμενος. This attrib. 
partic. is placed after its subst. in 
accordance with the usage discussed 
in the note on i. 11. 17. The more 
usual order would be: 6 πρῶτος ταῦτα 
τὰ δέκα ἔτη ξυνεχῶς γενόμενος πόλεμος 
γέγραπται, i.e. “the history of the first 
(part of the) war which lasted with- 
out interruption for these ten years 
is finished” (pf.). With this ξυνεχῶς 
γενόμενος πόλεμος the period of un- 
certain and unquiet peace until the 
renewal of the φανερὸς πόλεμος is con- 
trasted in c. 25, and in c. 26 we 
have a general retrospect of the whole 
twenty-seven years’ war with its three 
divisions. This furnishes Thuc. an 
occasion to speak of his own relation 
to the war. The division introduced 
by the peace occasions a break in the 
continuous narrative of the war, and 
the great importance of this division 
calls forth these remarks from the 
author. 

25. Character and duration of the 
time of peace between the first and second 
war. 


10 


THUCYDIDES V. 25. 


Ν ᾿ Ν / aA ὃ 7 ‘\ a 
σπονδὰς καὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων Kat τῶν 
3 ΄ Oo 2 Ὁ. Ν Ν ὃ A 5. > NX 
Αθηναίων, at ἐγένοντο pera τὸν δεκαετῇ πόλεμον ἐπὶ 

3 ’ > ¥ 
Πλειστόλα μὲν ἐν Λακεδαίμονι ἐφόρου, ᾿Αλκαίου δ᾽ ap- 
3 ΄, a Ν ΄Ζ δι Ὁ > , 
xovros ᾿Αθήνησι, τοῖς μὲν δεξαμένοις αὐτὰς εἰρήνη ἦν, 
ε Ν / ‘\ A > -_ , ’ 
οἱ δὲ Κορῶώθιοι καὶ τῶν ἐν ἸΤελοποννήσῳ πόλεών τινες 
΄ Ν , Ν 52 Χ »” ἊΝ 
διεκίνουν τὰ πεπραγμένα, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄλλη ταραχὴ καθ- 
΄ A , Ν Ν 4 ue 
ίστατο τῶν ξυμμάχων πρὸς THY Λακεδαίμονα. καὶ ἅμα 
lal os “ 
καὶ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι προϊόντος τοῦ χρό- 
e “ 
νου ὕποπτοι ἐγένοντο, ἔστιν ἐν οἷς οὐ ποιοῦντες ἐκ τῶν 
» 
ξυγκειμένων ἃ εἴρητο. 
» lal 2 
νας ἀπέσχοντο μὴ ἐπὶ τὴν ἑκατέρων γῆν στρατεῦσαι, ἔξω- 


ν᾿ »¥ A Ν δέ a 
καὶ ἐπὶ ἐξ ern μὲν καὶ δέκα μῆ- 


θεν δὲ μετ᾽ ἀνοκωχῆς οὐ βεβαίου ἔβλαπτον ἀλλήλους τὰ 
μάλιστα: ἔπειτα μέντοι καὶ ἀναγκασθέντες λῦσαι τὰς 


3. δεκαετῆ: see App.— 5. ᾿Αθή- 
νησι: cf. c. 18, 55.—6. Kopiv@ror: 
see 6. 17.19 and 27. 5 ff.—7. διεκί- 
vovv: hardly occurs elsewhere in 
Attic prose. Cf. Ar. Nub. 477, διακίνει 
τὸν νοῦν αὐτοῦ. It seems here to de- 
note the attempt to break up and 
unsettle by intrigues the agreements 
(τὰ πεπραγμένα) which had been made. 
- καὶ εὐθὺς ἄλλη ταραχή: “and be- 
sides these intrigues of the Corinthi- 
ans, other disturbances began imme- 
diately (after the end of the conflict 
between Athens and Sparta) between 
the Lacedaemonians and their (for- 
mer) allies.” ἄλλη refers to what 
precedes, not to the following καὶ ἅμα; 
hence St. is wrong in inserting re 
after ἄλλη without Ms. authority. 
This is evident, for the Athenians, 
although they had just made an alli- 
ance with Sparta, are certainly not 
included among the ξύμμαχοι of 8. 
καὶ ἅμα introduces, as it freq. does 
(eg. c. 14. 9), a new and important 
statement. For this was the most 
serious matter, that the friendly rela- 


tions between Sparta and Athens were 
so soon disturbed. 

11. ἃ εἴρητο: are the separate arti- © 
cles of the ξυγκείμενα. Cf. c. 35. 5 ff. 
—kal ἐπὶ ἕξ ἔτη καὶ δέκα μῆνας: 
neither beginning nor end of this 
period is accurately fixed. The be- 
ginning is not μετὰ ras σπονδάς, but 
μετά Thy ξυμμαχίαν, which was formed 
οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον (cf. c. 24.9). (Grote, 
VI. p. 276 and note, thinks this inter- 
val between the two treaties was ‘not 
more than a month or two.’ Curtius, 
Hist. Ill. p. 285, thinks it was ‘a few 
weeks.’) The end is only loosely 
marked by the words ἀπέσχοντο μὴ ἐπὶ 
τὴν ἑκατέρων γῆν στρατεῦσαι. See App. 
—12. μή: after the neg. ἀπέσχοντο. 
See on iii. 32. 14; iv. 40.5. G. 263; 
H. 1029. — ἔξωθεν : 1.6. without invad- 
ing the territory of one another, but 
by taking part in hostile complica- 
tions with others such as are men- 
tioned in c. 26. ὃ 2. Among these, 
the war in Sicily is most important. 
—13. per ἀνοκωχῆς : see App. — 
pera: “during the continuance,” “un- 


THUCYDIDES V. 25, 26. 


15 μετὰ τὰ δέκα ἔτη σπονδὰς αὖθις ἐς πόλεμον φανερὸν 
90 κατέστησαν. γέγραφε δὲ καὶ ταῦτα ὁ αὐτὸς Θούκυδίδης 
> nw ‘or ε 9 δι ‘ 4 Ἀ 
Αθηναῖος ἑξῆς ὡς ἕκαστα ἐγίγνετο κατὰ θέρη καὶ χει- 
μῶνας, μέχρι οὗ τήν τε ἀρχὴν κατέπαυσαν τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
4 / \ ε 4 Ἀ ‘ Ν ’΄ 
ναίων Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, καὶ τὰ μακρὰ τείχη 
5 καὶ τὸν Πειραιᾷ κατέλαβον. ἔτη δὲ ἐς τοῦτο τὰ ξύμ- 
παντα ἐγένετο τῷ πολέμῳ ἑπτὰ καὶ εἴκοσι. 
, 4 ¥ ‘ > ΄ 4 ΄ > 
μέσου ξύμβασιν εἴ τις μὴ ἀξιώσει πόλεμον νομίζειν, οὐκ 


Ν \ Ν 
καὶ τὴν διὰ 


ὀρθῶς δικαιώσει. 


der the influence of.”—14. ἔπειτα 
μέντοι : i.c. when they no longer 
avoided direct attacks. — ἀναγκα- 
σϑθέντες... κατέστησαν : the subj. must 
be here as in 11, Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι. Therefore the sent. cannot 
refer to any single act. First the 
Athenians with thirty triremes rav- 
aged the coast of Laconia in the latter 
part of the summer of 414 B.c. (vi. 
105. 15 f.); the Lacedaemonians en- 
tered Attica to fortify Decelea early 
in the spring of 415 B.c. (vii. 19. ὃ 1). 
This last act is probably considered 
as the beginning of the πόλεμος φανε- 
pés, and strictly speaking ἀναγκασθέν- 
tes λῦσαι applies only to the Lacedae- 
monians whose condition is described 
in vii. 18. § 3, 4. But the various 
stages in the renewal of the war over- 
lap one another chronologically, as do 
the events which mark its beginning. 
Cf. ¢. 20. ὃ 1.—15. ἐς πόλεμον φανε- 
pov: the same words are used to desig- 
nate the beginning of the first war in 
1. 23. 26. 

26. Remarks concerning the duration 
and the division of the whole war, and 
the author’s personal relations to it. 

1. γέγραφε δὲ kal ταῦτα : with ref- 
erence to the introductory words of 
the whole work, i, 1.1. The pf. serves 
to establish the identity of the author, 


“ ‘ ᾿» ε Yd > 7 
τοῖς Te yap ἔργοις ws διήρηται ἀθρεί. 


like the aor. in i. 1. 1 and i. 97.7, and, 
like γέγραπται in ii. 1. 4, anticipates 
the completion of the work. “The 
same Thuc. has written (i.e. is the 


᾿ς author of) this also” does not neces- 


sarily imply that the work was ever 
finished, but is the natural expression 
of one who expects his work to be 
finished before these words come be- 
fore his readers. So when the actual 
narrative is to begin, we find the fut. 
ἐξηγήσομα: in 30.—2. ἐξῆς .. . χειμῶ- 
vas: identical with ii. 1. 4 f., and ac- 
cordingly ἐγίγνετο, which better ex- 
presses the successive development 
of events (ἑξῆς), is preferred to Ms. 
éyévero. —4. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη Kal Tov 
Πειραιᾶ κατέλαβον : acc. to Plut. Lys. 
15, ἕκτῃ καὶ δεκάτῃ Μουνυχιῶνος, i.e. 
the middle of April, 404 8.0. --- 6. ἐγέ- 
vero: used in comprehensive state- 
ments of numbers. See on ii. 20. 11. 
7. τὴν διὰ μέσου ξύμβασιν : 1.6. the 
time of truce between the earlier and 
the later war. See on iv. 20. 2.— 
ἀξιώσει: in characteristic opposition 
to δικαιώσει. “If any one thinks the 
period of truce does not deserve 
(ἄξιον) the name of war, he will ignore 
the relation which is founded upon 
the nature of the case (δίκαιον)." --- 8. 
ὡς διήρηται: the only possible subj. 
appears to be ἣ διὰ μέσον ξύμβασις. 


THUCYDIDES V. 26. 


Ν ε , 3 348 > ’ δ». ~ > 

τω καὶ εὑρήσει οὐκ εἰκὸς ὃν εἰρήνην αὐτὴν κριθῆναι, ἐν 
τ ¥ 5 ’ ld ᾿Ξ, > > 4 a 4 

10} οὔτε ἀπέδοσαν πάντα ovr: ἀπεδέξαντο ἃ ξυνέθεντο, 

ἔξω τε τούτων πρὸς τὸν Μαντινικὸν καὶ ᾿Επιδαύριον πόλε- 


\ Ὁ ¥ > ΄ ε ΄ >. 2 Ν 
μον καὶ ἐς ἄλλα ἀμφοτέροις ἁμαρτήματα ἐγένοντο, καὶ 
οἱ ἐπὶ Θράκης ξύμμαχοι οὐδὲν ἧσσον πολέμιοι ἦσαν 

PQ ” μμ X 1) μ 3 

Β (τε ἐ iav δεχήμερον ἦγον. ὥστε ξὺν τῷ πρώ 

οιωτοί τε ἐκεχειρίαν δεχήμερον ἦγον. D πρώ- 
lal A “ > ε > 

τῳ πολέμῳ τῷ δεκαετεῖ Kal TH MET αὐτὸν ὑπόπτῳ ἀνο- 


κωχῇ καὶ τῷ ὕστερον ἐξ αὐτῆς πολέμῳ εὑρήσει τις το- 
σαῦτα ἔτη, λογιζόμενος κατὰ τοὺς χρόνους, καὶ ἡμέρας 
οὐ πολλὰς παρενεγκούσας, καὶ τοῖς ἀπὸ χρησμῶν τι ἰσχυ- 


, / Ν Lal > Lal 4 
ρισαμένοις μόνον δὴ τοῦτο ἐχυρῶς ξυμβάν. 


ἀεὶ γὰρ ἔγω- 


γε μέμνημαι καὶ ἀρχομένου τοῦ πολέμου καὶ μέχρι οὗ 


> 4 / ε Ν A 9 Ν > 4 ἘΝ 
ἐτελεύτησε προφερόμενον ὑπὸ πολλῶν, OTL τρὶς ἐννέα ETH 


The best rendering seems, then, to be: 
how this (so-called) period of truce was 
really interrupted and torn asunder by 
the actual circumstances. The usual 
meaning of διαιρεῖν, rend asunder, break 
through a fortification (cf. ii. 75. 24; 
76. 2; iv. 48.10; 110. 18; v. 2. 14; 3. 
9), is transferred to the interruption 
of the state of peace; so that διαιρεῖν 
appears as the opposite of ξυμβαίνειν. 
See App. —10. οὔτ᾽ ἀπεδέξαντο : see 
App.—11. ἔξω re τούτων: after theneg- 
ative infringements of the treaty (10), 
the more positive breaches of its pro- 
visions are mentioned; esp. of that in 
ce. 18. § 4, by supporting insurrections 
of allies. See ΑΡΡ. --- πρὸς τὸν Mav- 
τινικὸν : see 6. 33 Π --- πρὸς τὸν "Em- 
δαύριον: see c. 53 ff.—12. ἐς ἄλλα: 
refers particularly to the Sicilian 
expedition. — ἁμαρτήματα ἐγένοντο: 
the pl. of the verb on account of the 
previously expressed reference to a 
variety of cases. H.604b. ἀμφοτέροις 
ἐγένοντο is equiv. to ἀμφότεροι ἐποιή- 
σαντο. --- 18, πολέμιοι ἦσαν: sc. τοῖς 


᾿Αθηναίοις. ---14, ἐκεχειρίαν δεχήμερον : 


“a truce which was (or must be) re- 
newed every ten days.” Βοιωτοὶ πρὸς 
δέκα ἡμέρας ἐκεχειρίαν ἐσπένδοντο πρὸς 
᾿Αθηναίους. Schol. Cf. c. 32.17; νἱ. 7. 
23; 10.13. See App. 

16. ἐξ αὐτῆς : see on 6. 20. 2.—17. 
κατὰ τοὺς χρόνους : see on c. 20.6and 
10. --- ἡμέρας οὐ πολλὰς παρενεγκού- 
σας: see onc. 20.2. The time is to 
be computed from the beginning of 
April, 431 B.c., to the middle of April, 
404 ΒΚ. See App. on ii. 2. 5.—18. 
ἀπὸ χρησμῶν : relying upon prophecies. 
See oniy. 67.1.—19. μόνον δὴ τοῦτο: 
refers perhaps to the various interpre- 
tations of the oracle in ii. 54. § 2 and 
3.— del: const. with προφερόμενον (cf. 
vii. 68. 6). It is explained by kal 
ἀρχομένου Tod πολέμου kal μέχρι ov ἐτε- 
Aetrnoe. The whole is further ex- 
plained by ἐπεβίων δέ, which serves 
to establish the credibility of μέ- 
μνημαι ἔγωγε, an essential element of 
the author’s fitness for his task of 
writing the history of the Peloponne- 
sian war. 

21. τρὶς ἐννέα : a reminiscence of 


3 


THUCYDIDES V. 26, 27. 


δέοι γενέσθαι αὐτόν. 


σθανόμενός τε τῇ ἡλικίᾳ καὶ προσέχων τὴν γνώμην, ὅπως 

5 ta Ὁ» \ ΄, 4 »' > lal 

ἀκριβές τι εἴσομαι - καὶ ξυνέβη μοι φεύγειν τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ 
¥ ¥ ν᾿ N > 5 , ͵΄ κ᾿ 

26 ἔτη εἴκοσι μετὰ τὴν ἐς ᾿Αμφίπολιν στρατηγίαν, καὶ γε- 

νομένῳ παρ᾽ ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγμασι, καὶ οὐχ ἧσσον 

τοῖς Πελοποννησίων διὰ τὴν φυγήν, καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν τι αὐ- 


τῶν μᾶλλον αἴσθεσθαι. 
μ 


5d 


ἐπεβίων δὲ διὰ παντὸς αὐτοῦ, ai- 5 


Ν 
τὴν οὖν μετὰ τὰ δέκα ἔτη δια- ὁ 


΄ \ ΄ a A \ \ Do ε 
φοράν TE και ξύγχυσιν των σπονδῶν καὶ TQ εἐπειτα ὡς 


30 ἐπολεμήθη ἐξηγήσομαι. 


Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ at πεντηκοντούτεις σπονδαὶ ἐγένον- 1 


ἈΝ 9 ε 4 μι ε > Ν Aw 
το, Kal ὕστερον ἡ ξυμμαχία, καὶ ai ἀπὸ τῆς Πελοπον- 
νήσου πρεσβεῖαι, αἵπερ παρεκλήθησαν ἐς αὐτά, ἀνεχώ- 


the original metrical form of the ora- 
ele. Also in Plut. Nic. 9. 

22. αἰσθανόμενος (cf. i. 71. 21) τῇ 
ἡλικίᾳ : “having the necessary degree 
of understanding in consequence of 
my age” (his age was probably from 
about forty years upwards). See In- 
trod. to Book I. p. 4. Dat. of cause. 
G.188,1; H. 776.—25. pera τὴν és ’Ap- 
φίπολιν στρατηγίαν : see iv. 104 15 ff. ; 
106. 16 ff.; and Introd. to Book L. p. 11. 
-- ενομένῳ.. .. πράγμασι: since I be- 
came acquainted with the affairs of both 
sides. οὐχ ἧσσον, ic. μάλιστα. Cf. c. 
15.3. The results of this accurate ac- 
quaintance with the circumstances of 
the various states of Peloponnesus 
are very evident in the subsequent 
narrative. — 28. αἴσθεσθαι. see App. 
— διαφοράν τε kal ξύγχυσιν τῶν σπον- 
δῶν: with these words Thuc. charac- 
terizes the period of uncertain peace, 
much as he calls the unstable condi- 
tion before the breaking out of the 
war σπονδῶν ξύγχυσις (i.146.4). The 
διαφορά, which is closely connected 
with the ξύγχυσις τῶν σπονδῶν by the 
common art. (cf i. 120. 10; iii. 82. 


8 f.), refers particularly, as in i. 81. 
10; 102. 7; 146.1; v. 43.1; viii. ὃς. 
2, to the disagreements which pres- 
ently arose. — 29. τὰ ἔπειτα ὡς ἐπολε- 
μήθη: ze. the events of the second 
war. 

27. Continuation of the narrative. 
The Corinthians are discontented, and 
make overtures to the Argives in order to 
bring about an alliance against Sparta. 

1. ydp: introduces the narrative 
announced in the previous chap.— 
2. Kal ὕστερον ἡ ξυμμαχία: is added 
to ai... σπονδαί almost parentheti- 
eally to remind us that the alliance 
followed the peace, as mentioned in 
c. 24. 9. It has the effect of a rel. 
clause (“which was presently fol- 
lowed by the alliance”), and must 
not be understood as determining 
the time of the following clause. 
“ After the fifty years’ peace had been 
concluded, and then the alliance also, 
the ambassadors, too, went home.” 
The treaty of alliance was concluded 
so soon after the peace, that it is re- 
ferred to in the negotiations at Argos 
(8). See App. — 3. αὐτά: is the 


56 


5 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 27. 


ede > 


ρουν ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος - Kal οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι ἐπ᾽ οἴκου 2 


ἀπῆλθον, Κορίνθιοι δὲ ἐς “Apyos τραπόμενοι πρῶτον λό- 
A ΄“ 2 > 
yous ποιοῦνται πρός Twas τῶν ἐν τέλει ὄντων ᾿Αργείων 
ὡς χρή, ἐπειδὴ Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐκ ἐπ᾿ ἀγαθῷ ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ 
, A ,ὕ δὰ ’ Ἀ ia 
καταδουλώσει τῆς Πελοποννήσου σπονδὰς καὶ ξυμμαχίαν 
πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους τοὺς πρὶν ἐχθίστους πεποίηνται, ὁρᾶν 
Ν 3 ΄ 9 θ ΄ 3 / Ν 
τοὺς ᾿Αργείους ὅπως σωθήσεται ἡ Πελοπόννησος, καὶ 
ψηφίσασθαι τὴν βουλομένην πόλιν τῶν Ἑλλήνων, ἥτις 
Ἂ"..5.8 , fee Ν δί ¥ per). : ΄ διὸ Ν 
αὐτόνομός τέ ἐστι καὶ δίκας ἴσας καὶ ὁμοίας δίδωσι, πρὸς 
᾿Αργείους ξυμμαχίαν ποιεῖσθαι ὥστε τῇ ἀλλήλων ἐπιμα- 
A > A . ¥ 2\ 7 > N > , 
xew, ἀποδεῖξαι δὲ ἄνδρας ὀλίγους ἀρχὴν αὐτοκράτορας 
καὶ μὴ πρὸς τὸν δῆμον τοὺς λόγους εἶναι, τοῦ μὴ κατα- 


“Ὁ 4 » Ἀ ᾽ὔὕ Ν ~ 
avets γίγνεσθαι τοὺς πείσαντας τὸ πλῆθος. 
γιγν μη 


neut. pl. in a pregnant sense referring 
to the matter in hand. This Thue. 
not infreq. uses. See on i.1.10. It 
refers very properly to the negotia- 
tions preceding the treaty as well as 
to the σπονδαί (cf. παρακαλέσαντες, Cc. 
17. 17, where the purpose of the sum- 
mons is left unexpressed) and is there- 
fore not to be changed (with St.) to 
αὐτάς. 

5. πρῶτον : refers to preliminary 
negotiations with prominent men at 
Argos. The further consequences 
appear in Argos (6, 28) and in Cor- 
inth (c. 30).— 7. é dyads: ς i. 
131. 7; ii. 17. 15; iv. 87.10; and see 
on ἐπὶ κακῷ, iv. 86. 1, for further ex- 
amples. —éml καταδουλώσει: cf. iii. 
10. 10.—9. ὁρᾶν: with ὅπως and fut. 
ind., as in iii. 46. 16; vi. 41. 6. So 
with ὅτῳ τρόπῳ in vi. 33. 13; viii. 63. 
20. GMT. 45 Rem.; H. 1054, 3.— 
12. αὐτόνομος : denotes political inde- 
pendence; δίκας ἴσας καὶ ὁμοίας διδόναι 
denotes conduct which respects the 
independence of others. The first is 


ἔφασαν 


intended to exclude the dependent 
allies of Athens and Sparta, the sec- 
ond more particularly Athens itself, 
which obliged the ὑπήκοοι ξύμμαχοι to 
come to Athens for the conduct of 
certain cases (see on i. 77. 1), and 
therefore could not be said δίκας ἴσας 
καὶ ὁμοίας διδόναι. ---- 18. ὥστε: on con- 
dition that. See on i. 28. 18. GMT. 
98, 2, and n. 2; H. 953 b. — rq ἀλλή- 
λων ἐπιμαχεῖν : like ἐπιμαχίαν in c. 48. 
8,a merely defensive alliance; in i. 
44.8 defined by τῇ ἀλλήλων βοηθεῖν. 
—14. ἀρχήν: to be taken with airo- 
κράτορας, but not in the sense of 
“ power” or “authority ” (Kr. “in re- 
gard to their authority”), but like 
τὴν ἀρχήν in ii. 74. 10; iv. 98.4; 56. 
5; here, however, as in Hdt. i. 193. 
14; ii. 95. 13; iii. 16. 31, without the 
art. Originally from the beginning, 
and thence absolutely, entirely. See 
App.— 15. τοῦ μὴ καταφανεῖς ylyve- 
σθαι: sc. τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις. On the 
gen. of the inf., see oni. 4.7; GMT. 


92, 1, x. 5; H.960. The envoys from 


» 
28 οἰκου. 


THUCYDIDES V. 27, 28. 


& ‘ ὔ , A , 
δὲ πολλοὺς προσχωρήσεσθαι μίσει τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων. 

Ν ε Ν ’ ’, A > ’ 4. “ἢ 
καὶ οἱ μὲν Κορίνθιοι διδάξαντες ταῦτα ἀνεχώρησαν én 


οἱ δὲ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ἄνδρες ἀκούσαντες ἐπειδὴ 


τὰ ον \ , ¥ x 3 Ν Ν Ν π᾿ 
ἀνήνεγκαν τοὺς λόγους ἔς τε τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὸν δῆμον, 
> 7 > Ὁ ἈΝ ¥ ὃ ν ’ Ν 
ἐψηφίσαντο ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ ἄνδρας εἵλοντο δώδεκα, πρὸς 
ovs τὸν βουλόμενον τῶν Ἑλλήνων ξυμμαχίαν ποιεῖσθαι 


5 πλὴν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων " τούτων δὲ μηδετέ- 


> ἴω ” a , “a 3 4 7 
pots ἐξεῖναι ανευ του δήμου του Ἀργείων σπείσασθαι. 


3Q 7 4 la e> A A ε A , - 
ἐδέξαντό τε ταῦτα οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι μᾶλλον, ὁρῶντες τόν τε τῶν 


’ / ’ 5 ’ Κ,'ς, 37¢/ Ν 
Λακεδαιμονίων σφίσι πόλεμον ἐσόμενον (ἐπ᾽ ἐξόδῳ γὰρ 


Ν ε \ > A ΄“ 
πρὸς αὐτοὺς at σπονδαὶ ἦσαν) καὶ ἅμα ἐλπίσαντες τῆς 


10 Πελοποννήσου ἡγήσεσθαι. 


other states were to be relieved from 
the necessity of addressing the popu- 
lar assembly concerning offers of alli- 
ance, in order that those who might 
wish to join the Argive alliance, but 
could not persuade the Argive pop- 
ular assembly to accept them as 
allies (τοὺς μὴ meicavtas τὸ wdH00s), 
should not be exposed to danger from 
the Lacedaemonians. See App. — 
17. προσχωρήσεσθαι: sc. to the new 
alliance to be formed under the lead- 
ership of Argos. 

18. διδάξαντες: like διδασκάλους 
γενομένους in Ο. 30. 2, of plans and de- 
liberations set forth with arguments, 
esp. of such as are undertaken with 
hostile intent. Cf. ii. 93. 4; iii. 71. 
7; vii. 18.65 vili. 45. 9. 

28. The Argives accept the pro- 
posals of the Corinthians, and declare 
themselves ready for the formation of 
the new alliance. 

1. of δὲ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ἄνδρες κτέ.: 
on the order of words in the depend- 
ent clause, see on iii. 4.1.—2. ἀνα- 
φέρειν : like referre ad senatum, 
also in Hat. iii. 71. 20, and 80, 30.— 


κατὰ γὰρ τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον 


τοὺς λόγους : 1.6. the proposals of the 
Corinthians. — τὰς ἀρχάς : magistra- 
tus, also in c. 47. 52 and 55; 84. 
20; i. go. 27.— 4. ποιεῖσθαι: de- 
pends grammatically upon ἐψηφίσαν- 
το, though we should expect ποιήσεται 
or ποιεῖσθαι ἐξείη. This use of the 
inf. in rel. clauses occurs most freq. 
in quotations from laws and decrees. 
GMT. 92, 2, n.3b.—5. μηδετέροις : 
depends upon σπείσασθαι. ---- 6. ἄνευ 
τοῦ δήμου: “ without express consent 
of the assembly.” See oni. 91. 23. 
7. ἐδέξαντό re: by the particle re 
Thuc. here introduces a sent. explana- 
tory of what precedes. Cf ii. 8.16; 
13. 22. Cl.’s change to δέ is unneces- 
sary. — τόν te: the const. is planned 
with reference to a second obj.; but 
the general ὁρῶντες is subsequently 
replaced by the more specific ἐλπί- 
σαντες (“because they had come 
to hope”), in consequence of which 
the order of words seems perverted, 
since we should expect ὁρῶντές re τόν 
Kré.— 8. é ἐξόδῳ... ἦσαν : this fact 
is mentioned in ο. 14. 20 and 22. 9 as 
influencing the Lacedaemonians to 


5 


_ 


58 


THUCYDIDES V. 28, 29. 


n τε Λακεδαίμων μάλιστα δὴ κακῶς ἤκουσε Kal ὑπερ- 
ὠφθη διὰ τὰς ξυμφοράς, οἵ τε ᾿Αργεῖοι ἄριστα ἔσχον τοῖς 
πᾶσιν, οὐ ξυναράμενοι τοῦ ᾿Αττικοῦ πολέμου, ἀμφοτέ- 


ροις δὲ μᾶλλον ἔνσπονδοι ὄντες ἐκκαρπωσάμενοι. 


ε Ν 
οἱ μὲν 


15 οὖν ᾿Αργεῖοι οὕτως ἐς τὴν ξυμμαχίαν προσεδέχοντο τοὺς 
39 ἐθέλοντας τῶν Ἑλλήνων. 


Μαντινῆς δ᾽ αὐτοῖς καὶ οἱ 1 


ξύμμαχοι αὐτῶν πρῶτοι προσεχώρησαν, δεδιότες τοὺς 


Λακεδαιμονίους. 


τοῖς γὰρ Μαντινεῦσι μέρος τι τῆς 


lal > 
᾿Αρκαδίας κατέστραπτο ὑπήκοον, ἔτι τοῦ πρὸς ᾿Αθη- 
“4 /, 3, Ν 5 4 > oy 
vaiovs πολέμου ὄντος, καὶ ἐνόμιζον ov περιόψεσθαι 


a ‘ ’ Sd > Ν Ἁ . 
σφᾶς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἄρχειν, ἐπειδὴ Kal σχο- 


κ > σ΄ ΕΣ Ν X > , > , 
λὴν ἦγον: ὥστε ἄσμενοι πρὸς τοὺς Apyelovs ἐτρά- 


make peace. Here reference is made 
to it to explain the motives of the Ar- 
gives (Steup, Rhein. Mus. 25, p. 285 
note, suggests that it be omitted as a 
superfluous gloss). —11. ἥ τε Aaxe- 
Saipwv, οἵ τε ᾿Αργεῖοι : the two equally 
prominent reasons are symmetrically 
opposed. See on i. 8. 14.—11. μά- 
λιστα δή: cf. i. 1.8; 50.10; 138. 10. 
— ἤκουσε: like ὑπερώφθη and, 12, 
ἄριστα ἔσχον, aor. with the significa- 
tion: Lacedaemon had fallen into ill 
repute and had become an object of 
contempt, whereas the Argives had 
attained a desirable position. — 12. 
τοῖς πᾶσιν: in every respect. Cf. ii. 
11. 25; 36.10; 64. 20; vii. 50. 20.— 
13. τοῦ ᾿Αττικοῦ πολέμου: so the 
Peloponnesian war is called here and 
in 6. 31. 11 from the point of view 
of Peloponnesus, as in viii. 18. 10 
and 37. 15, 6 πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους πόλε- 
wos. See Ullrich, Hellen. Kriege, p. 
3, note 6.— ξυναράμενοι : const. with 
gen. as a verb of sharing, also in iv. 
10.1. G.170,2; H.737.—14. μάλλον : 
rather. “Far from taking part in the 
war they stood rather (1,6, on the con- 


trary) on terms of peace with both 
parties.” — ἐκκαρπωσάμενοι : like καρ- 
ποῦσθαι in ii. 38. 7; vii. 68. 16, (ἐκ- 
referring to the source); “they de- - 
rived profit from it (the ἔνσπονδοι 
bvres).” τοὺς καρποὺς καὶ τὰς προσ- 
όδους λαβόντες ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἀκεραίους διὰ 
τὸ μὴ πολεμεῖν. Schol.— 15. προσεδέ- 
χοντο: impf. they were ready to re- 
ceive. 

29, The Mantineans are the first to 
join the league, and a sentiment favour- 
able to it spreads throughout Pelopon- 
nesus, 

3. τοῖς Μαντινεῦσι: with κατέστρα- 
πτο, equiv. to ὑπὸ τῶν Μαντινέων, a freq, 
use of the dat. with the plpf. pass. Cf. 
i. 46. 1; 48. 1; 118. 18. — μέρος τι τῆς 
᾿Αρκαδίας : among others the Parrha- 
sians. Cf. c, 33. 3. — κατέστραπτο 
ὑπήκοον : like i. 8. 16, προσεποιοῦντο 
ὑπηκόους, the pred. adj. expressing re- 
sult.— 6. σφᾶς... ἄρχειν : depends 
upon οὐ περιόψεσθαι. Cf. i. 35. 14, 
δύναμιν προσλαβεῖν περιόψεσθε. GMT, 
112, 2, xn. 6; H. 986; Kiihn, 484, 24, 
— ἐπειδὴ Kal σχολὴν ἦγον: “since, 
inasmuch as the war with Athens 


10 avrot. 


THUCYDIDES V. 29. 


/ ΄ ’ Ἀ 
ποντο, πόλιν τε μεγάλην νομίζοντες καὶ Λακεδαιμο- 
7 Du 4 4 9 Ν 
νίοις ἀεὶ διάφορον, δημοκρατουμένην τε ὥσπερ καὶ 


ἀποστάντων δὲ τῶν Μαντινέων καὶ ἡ ἄλλη Πε- 


lal Ν 
λοπόννησος ἐς θροῦν καθίστατο ὡς καὶ σφίσι ποιητέον 
τοῦτο, νομίσαντες πλέον τέ τι εἰδότας μεταστῆναι αὐ- 


Ν Ν ‘ ’ ν »» lal ¥ S45 
TOUS καὶ TOUS Λακεδαιμονίους αμα du opy7s E€XOVTES, eT 


Ξ7 a ¢ ΕἸ lal A “ > “ » tA 
ἄλλοις TE καιοτιεν TALS σπονδαῖς ταις Αττικαῖις eyeypa- 
A > lal A > wn 9 a» > 
15 πτὸ εὔορκον εἰναι προσθεῖναι καὶ ἀφελεῖν ὅ τι ἂν ἀμ- 
lal a“ , ~ 4 » eS 7 
dow Tow πολέοιν δοκῇ, Λακεδαιμονίοις και Αθηναίοις. 


τοῦτο γὰρ τὸ γράμμα μάλιστα τὴν Πελοπόννησον διεθο- : 


ρύβει καὶ ἐς ὑποψίαν καθίστη μὴ μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων σφᾶς 

βούλωνται Λακεδαιμόνιοι δουλώσασθαι: δίκαιον yap «i 
~ » ’, ΄ ‘ , 9 

20 ναι πᾶσι τοῖς ξυμμάχοις γεγράφθαι τὴν μετάθεσιν: ὥστε 

φοβούμενοι οἱ πολλοὶ ὥρμηντο πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους καὶ 

αὐτοὶ ἕκαστοι ξυμμαχίαν ποιεῖσθαι. 


was over, they now had leisure 
also (as well as inclination) to turn 
their attention to Mantinea.” — 9. δη- 
μοκρατουμένην τε: the third member 
of a series of words or clauses is 
freq. connected by τε with the pre- 
ceding. See oni. 2.6; 76.12. This 
is the first positive mention of a 
democracy at Argos. It may possi- 
bly have been introduced when Argos 
made an alliance with Athens in 460 
B.c. Seei. 102; Paus. i. 29. 9; Grote 
V. p. 175 ff.— ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοί: sc. 
ἐδημοκρατοῦντο as in c. 44.9. Cf.i. 
32. 5. Kiihn. 58, 3. 

11. ἐς θροῦν καθίστατο : in act. sig- 
nification : “they began to talk” ; not 
“they began to be talked about.” — 
12. νομίσαντες: aor., their opinion 
concerning a particular case ; νομίζον- 
tes (8), concerning permanent condi- 
tions. — πλέον τι εἰδότας : re bus me- 
lius compertis (St.), and therefore 


their example would have more 
weight. Cf. vii. 49. 22. -- αὐτούς : sc. 
τοὺς Maytiwéas.— 13. δι ὀργῆς ἔχον- 


ve. Cf. ἢ. 37. 12; 64.2; ν. 46. 82. 


See on ii. 8. 19. --- ἐπ᾽ ἄλλοις : on other 
grounds. Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 9 for ἐν 
ἄλλοις. --- 14. ἐγέγραπτο: cf. c. 18, § 11, 
and c. 23, §6. This refers to both 
documents. 

17. τὸ γράμμα: the single article 
of the treaty. A rare use of the 
word. — διεθορύβει : set in commo- 
tion far and wide.—19. δίκαιον γὰρ 
εἶναι: would in dir. disc. have been 
δίκαιον γὰρ ἦν without ἄν, like καλὸν 
ἦν, i. 38. 10; εἰκὸς ἦν, iii. 40. 26.— 
20. πᾶσι τοῖς ξυμμάχοις: for all the 
αἰϊῖε8. --- τὴν μετάθεσιν : the power to 
προσθεῖναι καὶ ἀφελεῖν or tO μεταθεῖναι 
ὅπῃ ἂν δοκῇ ἀμφοτέροις, c. 18. 58. 

21. πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους : asin c. 27. 
12; 28. 3. ---- καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕκαστοι: pred. 
to οἱ πολλοί: “for their part also.” 


59 


60 THUCYDIDES V. 30. 


30 Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ αἰσθόμενοι τὸν θροῦν τοῦτον év1 
τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ καθεστῶτα καὶ τοὺς Κορινθίους διδα- 
σκάλους τε γενομένους καὶ αὐτοὺς μέλλοντας στείλασθαι 
X , * , , > AY , ἵ 
πρὸς τὸ "Apyos, πέμπουσι πρέσβεις ἐς τὴν Κόρινθον, 
5 βουλόμενοι προκαταλαβεῖν τὸ μέλλον, καὶ ἠτιῶντο τήν 
τε ἐσήγησιν τοῦ παντὸς, καὶ εἰ ᾿Αργείοις σφῶν ἀποστάν- 

, » va 4 ¥ > A 
τες ξύμμαχοι ἔσονται παραβήσεσθαΐ τε ἔφασαν αὐτοὺς 

A 9 A » > A 9 > δέ Ν 3 θ 
τοὺς ὅρκους, καὶ ἤδη ἀδικεῖν ὅτι οὐ δέχονται τὰς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων σπονδάς, εἰρημένον κύριον εἶναι ὅ τι ἂν τὸ πλῆ- 

nw ’ ’ὕ a ,’΄ θ al xX» ε 4 
10 Jos τῶν ξυμμάχων ψηφίσηται, ἣν μή τι θεῶν ἢ ἡρώων 
κώλυμα ἧ. KopivOcor δὲ παρόντων σφίσι τῶν ξυμμάχων, 
ὅσοι οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ ἐδέξαντο τὰς σπονδάς (παρεκάλεσαν δὲ 
αὐτοὺς αὐτοὶ πρότερον), ἀντέλεγον τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις, 


bo 


_ stands after τήν. 


80. The Lacedaemonians protest in 
Corinth against the intended alliance 
with Argos, but meet with a rebuff, for 
the Corinthians declare that they cannot 
betray the Chalcidian cities. 

2. καθεστῶτα, yevope vous, μέλλοντας : 
are all pred. (supplementary) partics. 
dependent upon αἰσθόμενοι. 
38. GMT. 113; H. 982.— 2. διδασκά- 
λους γενομένους : see on iii. 2. 11; v. 
27.18. — 5. προκαταλαβεῖν τὸ μέλλον : 
φθάσαι πρὶν μέλλειν τοὺς Κορινθίους 
προσχωρεῖν τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις, Schol. With 
obj. of the thing affected, as ini. 57.15; 
with pers. obj. ini. 33. 20; 36. 18. —6. 
τήν τε ἐσήγησιν τοῦ παντός: the in- 
stigation of the whole movement, corre- 
sponding to ἐσηγεῖσθαι in iii. 20. 7 ; iv. 
76.8; vi. 99. 7, and ἐσηγητής in- viii. 


Cf. ¢. 10.. 


το, or rather with an ἠγανάκτουν, δει- 
νὸν ἐποιοῦντο, or δεινὸν αὐτοῖς ἐφαίνετο 
supplied from ἠτιῶντο, and cites iv. 85. 
§ 6; vii. 73. § 1; viii. 53. § 2. These 
passages do not offer any very close 
analogy. It is better, with Jowett, to 
take καὶ ei . . . ἔσονται as prot. with 
παραβήσεσθαι, and to put the comma 
before καὶ εἰ, instead of after ἔσονται. --- 
9. εἰρημένον : acc. abs. See on i, 140. 
18, and cf. ο. 39. 12; vii. 18.14. The 
provision to which the Lacedaemo- 
nians here refer must have been con- 
tained in the original treaty of alli- 
ance between the Peloponnesian states 
and Sparta, which is called by the 
Corinthians (20) of τῶν ξυμμάχων ὅρ- 
κοι, and by Thue. (24) of παλαιοὶ ὅρκοι. 
-τὸ πλῆθος : the majority, as ini. 125. 


48. 40. τε is the correlative of the 4. 
following καί, which belongs with 11. σφίσι: ic. in Corinth.—12. 
ἔφασαν. τε belongs with ἠτιῶντο, but ὅσοι. .. τὰς σπονδάς: those men- 


τε is occasionally 
carelessly put between the art. and 
its noun even when it belongs with 
the word preceding the art.—al εἰ 
«ον ἔσονται : Cl. takes this with ἠτιῶν- 


tioned inc. 17. ὃ 2. οὐδ᾽ αὐτοί corre- 
sponds to καὶ αὐτός (cf. i. 50. 18; 62. 
21), “also ποί." --- παρεκάλεσαν δέ: 
epexegetical δέ, See on c. to, 21. 
Aor, in the sense of plpf. — 18, αὐτοί: 


THUCYDIDES V. 30. 


ἃ μὲν ἠδικοῦντο οὐ δηλοῦντες ἄντικρυς, OTL οὔτε Σόλ- 
15 λιον σφίσιν ἀπέλαβον παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων οὔτε ᾿Ανακτόριον, 
¥ lA 3» oF > cal ’ Ν , 
εἴ τέ τι ἄλλο ἐνόμιζον ἐλασσοῦσθαι, πρόσχημα δὲ ποιού- 
μενοι τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης μὴ προδώσειν - ὀμόσαι γὰρ αὐ- 
τοῖς ὅρκους ἰδίᾳ τε, ὅτε μετὰ ἸΠοτιδαιατῶν τὸ πρῶτον 

5» ,ὕ Ἁ ¥ 9 > > ’ 
ἀφίσταντο, καὶ ἄλλους ὕστερον. οὐκ οὖν παραβαίνειν 
Ἀ lal 4 9 » > > ’ὔ > ‘ 
20 τοὺς τῶν ξυμμάχων ὅρκους ἔφασαν οὐκ ἐσιόντες és TAS 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων σπονδάς - θεῶν γὰρ πίστεις ὀμόσαντες 
ἐκείνοις οὐκ ἂν εὐορκεῖν προδιδόντες αὐτούς. εἰρῆσθαι 


δ᾽ ὅτι “ἢν μὴ θεῶν ἢ ἡρώων κώλυμα 7”: φαίνεσθαι οὖν 


σφίσι κώλυμα θεῖον τοῦτο. 


on their own responsibility, paying no 
attention to the Lacedaemonians, 
whose opposition they naturally ex- 
pected. —14. ἃ μὲν ἠδικοῦντο: in 
what respects (acc. to their opinion) 
they had been wronged. — ἄντικρυς : 
straightforwardly, openly, also in viii. 
92. 65.— Σόλλιον : Κορινθίων πόλισμα 
in Acarnania, was taken by the Athe- 
nians in the first year of the war (cf. 
ii. 30. 2), Anactorium in the seventh 
(ef. iv. 49). —15. οὔτε... σφίσιν 
, ἀπέλαβον map ᾿Αθηναίων: that they 
(the Lacedaemonians) had not recov- 
ered these places from the Athenians for 
them (the Corinthians), i.e. that in 
making the peace they had not forced 
the Athenians to restore them. —16. 
εἴ τέ τι ἄλλο : parallel to ὅτι... ᾽Ἄνακ- 
τόριον, is in appos. to the obj. οὗ δη- 
λοῦντες. τε ἶβ not a correlative of οὔτε 
in 15. ---ἐλασσοῦσθαι : “they were get- 
ting less than their rights ”; also ini. 
77-1.—17. τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης μὴ προδώ- 
σειν : collectively the obj. οὗ πρόσχημα 
(see on i. 96. 4). That they (the 
Corinthians) would not give up the 
Greeks on the Thracian coast (to the 
rule of Athens) was the chief rea- 


Ἁ Ἀ Ἀ ΄-“ἰ an 
Kal περὶ μὲν τῶν παλαιῶν 


son they gave for their opposition 
to Sparta.— 18. ἰδίᾳ: the Corin- 
thians alone, so that with ἄλλους ὕστε- 
pov (sc. ὅρκους) some word like κοινῇ 
(Kr.) is to be understood, although 
not expressed.— ὅτε... ἀφίσταντο: 
cf. i. 58. § 1. 

19. οὐκ οὖν: written (with Cl.) 
as two words. — 20. οὐκ ἐσιόντες : 
by not joining, as the Lacedaemonians 
had asserted in 8, ἀδικεῖν ὅτι οὗ δέχον- 
ται τὰς ᾿Αθηναίων σπονδάς (here τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων; the usual variation in the 
use of the art. with names of peoples). 
—21. θεῶν ... ὀμόσαντες : θεῶν ὅρκους 
ἐπὶ πίστει, Schol. “Since they had 
bound themselves by oaths sworn 
by the gods.” —22. οὐκ ἂν εὐορκεῖν : in 
dir. disc. οὐκ ἂν εὐορκοῖμεν (“ preserve 
the εὔορκον"; cf.c. 18. 58), εἰ προδιδοῖ- 
μεν. ---- εἰρῆσθαι: “that the words of 
the agreement were”; after which 
ὅτι has no effect upon the const., but 
serves as a mark of punctuation. 
GMT. 79; H. 928 b. —23. φαίνεσθαι 
οὖν σφίσι xré.: “so it seemed to them 
that this, the solemn oath, was a hin- 
drance interposed by the gods them- 
selves.” 


62 


THUCYDIDES V. 30, 31. 


9 A > ἣν Ν ~ > 4 4 
25 ὅρκων τοσαῦτα εἶπον, περὶ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αργείας ξυμμαχίας, 


A ν Xa 
μετὰ τῶν φίλων βουλευσάμενοι ποιήσειν ὅ τι ἂν δίκαιον 


> 
1): 


Ν ε Ν ’, 2 > , > 3 
καὶ ot μὲν Λακεδαιμονίων πρέσβεις ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ 


οἴκου. ἔτυχον δὲ παρόντες ἐν Κορίνθῳ καὶ ᾿Αργείων πρέσ- 


ἃ Ἐν εὖ ’, 5». Π 5 Ν 
βεις, ot ἐκέλευον τοὺς Κορινθίους ἰέναι ἐς τὴν 


ξυμμα- 


80 χίαν καὶ μὴ μέλλειν οἱ δὲ ἐς τὸν ὕστερον ξύλλογον αὖ- 


a“ Ν Ν ᾽’ lal ν 
3lrots τὸν παρὰ σφίσι προεῖπον ἥκειν. 


5 


ἦλθε δὲ Kat 


Ἠλείων πρεσβεία εὐθὺς καὶ ἐποιήσαντο πρὸς Κοριν- 
θίους ξυμμαχίαν πρῶτον, ἔπειτα ἐκεῖθεν ἐς “Apyos 
5 ’, ’ὔ / > 4 4 Do. ὦ 
ἐλθόντες, καθάπερ προείρητο, ᾿Αργείων ξύμμαχοι eye 


VOVTO. 
4, Ἀ 4 
νίοις περι Λεπρέου. 


διαφερόμενοι γὰρ ἐτύγχανον τοῖς Λακεδαιμο- 
πολέμου γὰρ γενομένου ποτὲ 


πρὸς ᾿Αρκάδων τινὰς Λεπρεάταις καὶ ᾿Ηλείων παρα- 


κληθέντων ὑπὸ Λεπρεατῶν ἐς ξυμμαχίαν ἐπὶ τῇ ἡμι- 


ia τῆς γῆς καὶ λυσάντων τὸν πόλεμον, Ἠλεῖοι τὴν 

σείᾳ τῆς γῆς ν μον, τὴ 
- nw A ’, ’ὔ »Ἤ 

10 γῆν νεμομένοις αὐτοῖς τοῖς Λεπρεάταις τάλαντον ἔταξαν 


25. περὶ δὲ τῆς ᾿Αργείας ξυμμαχίας : 
(so with the best Mss. for ᾿Αργείων ; 
the less usual expression like αἱ ’Ar- 
τικαὶ σπονδαί in c. 29. 14 and 36. 18) 
const. with εἶπον. “In regard to the 
Argive alliance, they declared that 
they would,” etc. 

28. ἔτυχον παρόντες : they were al- 
ready present in Corinth during these 
negotiations with the Lacedaemonian 
envoys. — 29. ἰέναι és: equiv. to 
ἐσιέναι, 20. — 30. αὐτοῖς προεῖπον : 
equiv. to ἐκέλευον αὐτούς. Cf. 1. 26. 20. 

81. The Eleans make an alliance 
with Corinth and Argos, because they 
have a quarrel with the Lacedaemonians 
about Lepreum. Thereupon the Corinthi- 
ans join the Argive alliance, as do also 
the Thracian Chalcidians. The Boeo- 
tians and Megarians keep quiet. 

2. ἐποιήσαντο : see App. — 4. καθά- 
mep προείρητο; in the proclamation 


which the Argives made (c. 28. § 1), 
acting on the advice of the Corinthi- 
ans (6. 27. ὃ 2).—6. Λεπρέου : Le- 
preum in Triphylia, not far from the 
boundaries of Elis and Laconia (c. 34. 
7). Remains of its fortifications still 
exist. Curtius, Pe/op. II. p. 84. 

8. ἐπὶ τῇ ἡμισείᾳ τῆς γῆς : “on the 
condition that they should cede half 
of their land” to the Eleans. Kiihn. 
405, 5c.— 9. καὶ Avodvrev: see App. 
The same subj. in the main clause and 
in the gen. abs. occurs freq. in Thuc. 


See on ii. 83. 15 and iii. 13. 30. — τὴν 


γῆν νεμομένοις αὐτοῖς : the Eleans al- 
lowed the Lepreans to remain in pos- 
session of the half of their land which 
they had relinquished, but obliged 
them to pay a rent of a talent to 
Olympian Zeus, whose temple was 
under the control of the Eleans.— 
10. ἔταξαν : τάξαι is used of the im- 


2 


THUCYDIDES V. 31. 


- ‘ nan? ΄ 5 , 
τῷ Διὶ τῷ ᾿Ολυμπίῳ ἀποφέρειν. 


Ἁ ΄ Aa 3 “ 
καὶ μέχρι του ᾿Αττικου 


΄ > ia » 4 νος ’ lal 
πολέμου ἀπέφερον, ἔπειτα παυσαμένων διὰ πρόφασιν τοῦ 


7 oo = a 5 ’, ε > > , Ν 
πολέμου οἱ ᾿λεῖοι ἐπηνάγκαζον, οἱ δ᾽ ἐτράποντο πρὸς 


τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους. 


\ 7 7 5 
και δίκης Λακεδαιμονίοις επιτρα- 


4 ε 4 e's al 4 ¥ 4 5 7 
15 πεισῆς, ὑποτοπήσαντες OL Ηλεῖοι μὴ ισον ἕξειν, ανεντες 


τὴν ἐπιτροπὴν Λεπρεατῶν τὴν γῆν ἔτεμον. 


ot δὲ Λακε- 


΄ 29% 4 3207 > ΄, > 
δαιμόνιοι οὐδὲν ησσον ἐδίκασαν αυτονομοῦς εἰναι Ae- 


΄ ἡ. γα. ἃ ΠΥ. ΄ ΟΣ, > > , 
πρεατας και ἀδικεῖν Ηλείονς, καὶ ὡς οὐκ εμμειναντῶων 


na > κ ν ε a ΓΚ" > , 
τῇ ἐπιτροπῇ φρουρὰν ὁπλιτῶν ἐσέπεμψαν ἐς Λέπρεον. 
20 δὲ Ἠλεῖοι νομίζοντες πόλιν σφῶν ἀφεστηκυῖαν δέξασθαι 


ε 
οι 


‘ 7 ἈΝ ‘ 4 ’ 5» 
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τὴν ξυνθήκην προφέροντες ἐν 
ἂν ἄρ > ἈΝ > ἈΝ ΄ ΄, , 
ἡ εἴρητο, ἃ ἔχοντες ἐς τὸν ᾿Αττικὸν πόλεμον καθίσταντό 


“ 3, Ν > A ε > ΕΣ ¥ 
τινες, ταῦτα ἔχοντας καὶ ἐξελθεῖν, ws οὐκ ἴσον ἔχοντες 
5317 ‘ y as ΄ὕ ‘ \ , ΄ 
ἀφίστανται πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους, καὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν, ao- 


Ν “ ’΄ 
25 περ προείρητο, καὶ οὗτοι ἐποιήσαντο. 


5 ’ Ν Ἁ ε 
eyevovTo δὲ και OL 


Κορίνθιοι εὐθὺς μετ᾽ ἐκείνους καὶ οἱ ἐπὶ Θράκης Xad- 


position of tribute ini. 19. 6; iii. 50. 6. 
11. τοῦ ᾿Αττικοῦ πολέμου: see on 
ec. 28. 13.—12. παυσαμένων: se. τοῦ 
φόρου. --- 13. ἐπηνάγκαζον : “they pre- 
pared to force them,” impf. ἐπαναγ- 
κάζειν also in Plat. Prot. p. 345 e.— 
14. ἐπιτραπείσης : “having been re- 
ferred to the Lacedaemonians for ar- 
bitration.” Cf.i. 28.9; iv. 83.10; vii. 
18. 24.—15. μὴ ἴσον ἕξειν : that they 
would not receive fair treatment at the 
hands of the Lacedaemonians. — ἀνέν- 
tes: shows that they had originally 
agreed to accept the arbitration: παυ- 
σάμενοι τοῦ ἐπιτρέψαι τὴν δίκην τοῖς 
Λακεδαιμονίοις, Schol. Equiv. to οὐκ 
ἐμμεινάντων τῇ ἐπιτροπῇ, 18. 

17. οὐδὲν ἧσσον ἐδίκασαν: they 
gave their decision notwithstanding 
the refusal of the Eleans to acknowl- 
edge their jurisdiction. — 18. ἀδικεῖν : 
were in the wrong.— ὡς οὐκ ἐμμεινάν- 


των: “because they had, as they said, 
refused to submit to the judgment 
of those whom they had previously 
accepted as arbitrators.” 

20. δέξασθαι: had taken under pro- 
tection. Cf. i. 34.2; 40.17, 22.—21. τὴν 
ξυνθήκην : this agreement between the 
states hostile to Athens must have 
been made shortly before the outbreak 
of the Peloponnesian war. See Grote 
VI. p. 290. It is not mentioned else- 
where. See App. — προφέροντες: cf. 
c. 17. 11.—22. ἃ ἔχοντες, ταῦτα ἔχον- 
τας: a quotation from the treaty, the 
formality of the expression being part 
of the official style “ what any (τινες) 
had when they entered upon the war, 
that shall they have when they leave 
it.’ — 23. ὡς οὐκ ἴσον ἔχοντες : “on 
the ground that they had not received 
what was their due.” — 24. ὥσπερ 


προείρητο; cf. καθάπερ προείρητο, 3. 


63 


3 


64 


κιδῆς ᾿Αργείων ξύμμαχοι. 


THUCYDIDES V. 31, 32. 


* Ol. 89. 4; B.c. 421, Summer, 


Βοιωτοὶ δὲ καὶ Μεγαρῆς τὸ 


oe ’ ε 4 4 ε Ν nw 
αὐτὸ λέγοντες ἡσύχαζον περιορώμενοι [ὑπὸ τῶν Λακε- 
δαιμονίων] καὶ νομίζοντες σφίσι τὴν ᾿Αργείων δημοκρα- 
80 τίαν αὐτοῖς ὀλιγαρχουμένοις ἧσσον ξύμφορον εἶναι τῆς 


Λακεδαιμονίων πολιτείας. 


3. Περὶ δὲ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους τοῦ θέρους τούτου * Σκι- 


’, Ν 3 “A > / > , Ν 
ὠναίους μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκπολιορκήσαντες ἀπέκτειναν τοὺς 


eon a \ \ A 3 ΄ ἂς τὰς 
ἡβῶντας, παῖδας δὲ και γυναικας ἠνδραπόδισαν και THY 


γῆν Πλαταιεῦσιν ἔδοσαν νέμεσθαι Δηλίους δὲ κατήγα- 


26. οἱ ἐπὶ Θρᾳκης Χαλκιδῆς : their 
independence was most endangered 
by the peace (see c. 18. § 5 and § 8). 
— 27. Βοιωτοὶ δὲ καὶ Μεγαρῆς : their 
envoys were present in Corinth at the 
discussions, acc. to c. 30. 11 f. and 17. 
18 f.— 70 αὐτὸ λέγοντες : τὴν αὐτὴν 
γνώμην ἔχοντες, Schol., and so also in 
iv. 20. 17, 1.6. “though they were of 
the same mind” as the Corinthians 
and Chalcidians. Bohme and Jowett 
explain “saying the same thing,” 1.6. 
“agreeing ”: “the Boeotians and Me- 
garians agreed to refuse” (Jowett). 
— 28. ἡσύχαζον : equiv. to οὐκ évew- 
τέριζον, as in ii. 3.5; v. 22. 12, they re- 
mained quiet. — περιορώμενοι : mid. as 
in vi. 93. 3, μέλλοντες δ᾽ ἔτι καὶ περιορώ- 
μενοι. See on iv. 71. 7, ἀμφοτέροις 
ἐδόκει ἡσυχάσασι τὸ μέλλον περιιδεῖν 
(the aor. mid. is not in use), where 
the two expressions are joined as 
here. The sense of the passage is: 
“they were of the same mind as the 
Corinthians, but remained quiet await- 
ing the event and thinking,” etc. See 
App. — 30. αὐτοῖς : them themselves. 
Boeotians as well as Megarians, who 
in the summer of 424 B.c., és ὀλιγαρ- 
χίαν τὰ μάλιστα κατέστησαν Thy πολι- 


τείαν. ΟΥ̓ ἵν. 74.16.—31. πολιτείας : 


γον πάλιν ἐς Δῆλον, ἐνθυμούμενοι τάς τε ἐν ταῖς μάχαις 


political constitution, as in i, 18. 9; ii. 


να αὶ 

82. The Athenians take Scione and 
treat the inhabitants with great severity. 
They restore the Delians to their island. 
The Corinthians and Argives try with- 
out success to induce the Tegeans to 
leave the alliance with Sparta. The 
Boeotians and Corinthians enter into 
ineffectual negotiations with Athens. 

1. Σκιωναίους : their fate had been 
decided at Athens two years before 
at the instigation of Cleon (see iv. 
122. § 6), and they had been left at 
the mercy of the Athenians by the 
Lacedaemonians in making the peace. 
See ὁ. 18. ὃ 8.— 2. ἀπέκτειναν: τῷ 
φόβῳ βουλόμενοι καταπλήξασθαι τοὺς ἐν 
ὑποψίᾳ ἀποστάσεως ὄντας παράδειγμα 
πᾶσιν ἀνέδειξαν τὴν ἐκ τῶν Σκιωναίων 
τιμωρίαν, acc. to Diod. xii. 76. But 
this severe measure did not have the 
desired effect.— 3. παῖδας... 
πόδισαν : see App. —4. Πλαταιεῦσιν : 
those who had been received in Ath- 
ens before the siege of Plataea (cf 
ii. 78. 10), and those who had made 
their escape thither by a successful 
sally (cf. iii, 24. § 3). — κατήγαγον 
πάλιν: cf. c. 1. --- ὅ. ἐνθυμούμενοι : 
here equiv. to ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι, Of. 


10 


THUCYDIDES V. 32. 65 


ξυμφορὰς Kal Tov ἐν Δελφοῖς θεοῦ χρήσαντος. καὶ Φωκῆς 2 
καὶ Λοκροὶ ἤρξαντο πολεμεῖν. καὶ Κορίνθιοι καὶ ᾽Αρ- 3 
Lal ἠδ ’ 3, » 9... ’ > , 
γεῖοι ἤδη ξύμμαχοι ὄντες ἔρχονται ἐς Τεγέαν, ἀποστή- 
σοντες Λακεδαιμονίων, ὁρῶντες μέγα μέρος ὄν, καὶ εἰ 
’ ld ’ A “ἡ » ’ 
σφίσι προσγένοιτο, νομίζοντες ἅπασαν ἂν ἔχειν Πελοπόν- 

ε Ν 5 \ “Δ » 5» A ε ΄“-ἢ 
νῆσον. ὡς δὲ οὐδὲν ἂν ἔφασαν ἐναντιωθῆναι οἱ Τεγεᾶται 4 
Λακεδαιμονίοις, οἱ Κορίνθιοι μέχρι τούτου προθύμως 
πράσσοντες ἀνεῖσαν τῆς φιλονικίας καὶ ὠρρώδησαν μὴ 
> ἣν ’ ¥ “A ἊΨ lal 9 A > 
οὐδεὶς σφίσιν ἔτι τῶν ἄλλων προσχωρῇ. ὅμως δὲ ἐλ- 5 
θόντες ἐς τοὺς Βοιωτοὺς ἐδέοντο σφῶν τε καὶ ᾿Αργείων 
’ , ‘\ φ La ’ ’ 
γίγνεσθαι ξυμμάχους καὶ τἄλλα κοινῇ πράσσειν: τάς τε 
, > 4 a > 5 , Ν al 
δεχημέρους ἐπισπονδάς, at ἦσαν ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ Βοιωτοῖς 
Ν > , > eA ’ὔ , la 
πρὸς ἀλλήλους οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον γενόμεναι [τούτων] τῶν 


vii. 50. 29; c. 16. 18. “Since they 
took their mishaps (at Delium and 
Amphipolis) to heart,” seeing in them 
a proof of the divine wrath. — rds re: 
much as in ὁ. 28.7 after ὁρῶντες, we 
should here after τάς re... ξυμφοράς 
expect a second obj. of ἐνθυμούμενοι, 
instead of which we find the gen. abs. 
καὶ τοῦ... χρήσαντος. Kiihn. 417, 5, 
n. 9. Still a change of the reading 
in either passage is unadvisable (Co- 
bet, Mnem. 14, p. 9, proposes re rds). 
— 6. χρήσαντος: the restoration of 
the Delians was, then, commanded by 
the god. 

καὶ Φωκῆς «ré.: this isolated state- 
ment is all the notice that is taken 
of this war. See Introd. p. 2. 

8. Τεγέαν: Bekker and others ac- 
cent Téyeav wrongly, as the Ion. form 
is Teyén. Godttling, Doctr. Accent., p. 
128. This town and its territory on 
the border of Laconia always main- 
tained an independent position in Ar- 
cadia as well against Spartan plans of 
conquest as in this instance against 


the anti-Spartan alliance of the Corin- 
thians and Argives. Curtius, Pelopon. 
I. p. 152. —9. μέγα μέρος : (as in ii. 20. 
10 of Acharnae) “a place of impor- 
tance”; perhaps implying that its 
adherence would throw the balance 
of power upon one side or the other. 
— 10. ἅπασαν dv ἔχειν Πελοπόννη- 
σον: equiv. to c. 28. 9 f., τῆς Πελο- 
πούνήσου ἡγήσεσθαι. 

12. προθύμως πράσσοντες: “who 
had hitherto been zealous” in carry- 
ing out the plan of c. 27. ὃ 2.— 18. 
ἀνεῖσαν: with gen. as in vii. 43. 45, 
ἀνέντων τῆς ἐφόδου. G.174; H.748.— 
14. μὴ οὐδείς... προσχωρῇ : they re- 
linquished their hopes as quickly as 
they had (c. 27. § 2) accepted and 
expressed them. 

17. ἐπισπονδάς: this word, which 
does not occur elsewhere, is formed 
like ἐπισπένδεσθαι (renew a treaty, Ο. 
22. 9), and is adapted to express the 
nature of these constantly renewed 
truces. See onc. 26. 14. — 18. [τού- 
τῶν] τῶν πεντηκοντουτίδων : see App. 


THUCYDIDES V. 32, 33. 


Lal oh ie ε ’ : 
πεντηκοντουτίδων σπονδῶν, ἐκέλευον ot Κορίνθιοι τοὺς 
Ν 3 4 > / Ν 4 nw 

20 Βοιωτοὺς ἀκολουθήσαντας. ᾿Αθήναζε καὶ σφίσι ποιῆσαι, 
9 Ν 53 ἈΝ ὃ / de "AB. ν 4 > ι 
ὥσπερ Βοιωτοὶ εἶχον, μὴ δεχομένων δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπει- 

a) > Ν Ν , A 
πεῖν τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν μὴ σπένδεσθαι ἄνευ 


αὐτῶν. 


Ν 
Βοιωτοὶ δὲ δεομένων τῶν Κορινθίων περὶ μὲν ὃ 


Cte ΄ , 3 A > Ν 3. 18 3 , 
τῆς ᾿Αργείων ξυμμαχίας ἐπισχεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκέλευον, ἐλθόν- 
25 τες δὲ ᾿Αθήναζε μετὰ Κορινθίων οὐχ ηὕροντο τὰς δεχη- 

, 4 5 > > ’ (8 r 
μέρους σπονδάς, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπεκρίναντο ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι Kopw- 


Ἁ 
θίοις εἶναι σπονδάς, εἴπερ Λακεδαιμονίων εἰσὶ ξύμμαχοι. 


Βοιωτοὶ μὲν οὖν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἀπεῖπον τὰς δεχημέρους, 


ἀξιούντων καὶ αἰτιωμένων Κορινθίων ξυνθέσθαι σφίσι" 


80 Κορινθίοις δὲ ἀνοκωχὴ ἄσπονδος ἦν πρός ᾿Αθηναίους. 


Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους πανδημεὶ ἐστρά- 


A ; 4 , 
τευσαν, Πλειστοάνακτος τοῦ Παυσανίου Λακεδαιμονίων 


βασιλέως ἡγουμένου, τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας ἐς Παρρασίους, 


, , 
Μαντινέων ὑπηκόους ὄντας, κατὰ στάσιν ἐπικαλεσαμένων 


σφᾶς, ἅμα δὲ καὶ τὸ ἐν Κυψέλοις τεῖχος ἀναιρήσοντες, 


- 20. καὶ σφίσι ποιῆσαι : procure for 
them also from the Athenians. — 21. 
ὥσπερ Βοιωτοὶ εἶχον: see App. — 
22. μὴ σπένδεσθαι : sc. τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις. 

24. ἐπισχεῖν: wait a while, have 
patience. Of. viii. 5. 11. — 25. οὐχ 
nipovro: did not succeed in obtaining. 
Cf. i. 31. 10, ὠφελίαν τινὰ πειρᾶσθαι ἀπ’ 
αὐτῶν εὑρίσκεσθαι, and i. 58. 6. Lat. 
non impetraverunt. 

29. ἀξιούντων: sc. ἀπειπεῖν. ἔυν- 
θέσθαι σφίσι depends upon αἰτιωμένων 
(μοΐ, as Kr. thinks, upon ἀξιούντων) : 
“although the Corinthians demanded 
that they give up their agreement with 
Athens, and accused them (the Boeo- 
tians) of having agreed with them 
(the Corinthians) to do so if the 
Athenians did not accede to their re- 
quest.” The Corinthians had asked 
the Boeotians to do this (22), and be- 


lieved, apparently, that they had 
agreed. — 30. ἀνοκωχηὴ ἄσπονδος : opp. 
to the δεχήμεροι σπονδαί; an actual 
cessation of hostilities, but without any 
guarantee. 

33. The first hostile acts of the 
Lacedaemonians against the Mantineans 
in consequence of their alliance with the 
Argives. 

3. τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας : stands first as in 
iii. το. 6, τῆς Καρίας, and freq. — TIap- 
ρασίους : an old Pelasgic tribe the 
capital of which, Parrhasia, is men- 
tioned in J/. B 608. They dwelt at 
the base of Mt. Lycaeum toward the 
southeast. See Curtius, Pelop. I. 
p. 279; Bursian, II. p. 225 and 235. 
— 4. ἐπικαλεσαμένων : τῶν Παρρασίων, 
Schol. On the gen., see GMT. 110,1, 
n. 5; H. 972 d.—5. σφᾶς : τοὺς Λακε- 


_ Saimoviovs, Schol.— τὸ ἐν Κυψέλοις 


> rere 


ἘΒ.. 421, toward Autumn, THUCYDIDES V. 33, 34. 


x ὃ ΄ δε" δ. Ὁ A ‘ > = 2 2 , 
ἣν δύνωνται, ὃ ἐτείχισαν Μαντινῆς καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐφρούρουν, 
ἐν τῇ Παρρασικῇ κείμενον ἐπὶ τῇ Σκιρίτιδι τῆς Λακω- 
Ν “a lal 
νικῆς. καὶ ot μὲν Λακεδαιμόνιοι τὴν γῆν τῶν Tlappa- 
’ “ 
σίων ἐδήουν, οἱ δὲ Μαντινῆς τὴν πόλιν ᾿Αργείοις φύλαξι 
ὃ / > Ν Ἀ ’ » 4 > 4 
10 παραδόντες αὐτοὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν édpovpovy: ἀδύνατοι 
5 Ψ cal , > , lal Ν ᾿ ' » 
δ᾽ ὄντες διασῶσαι τό τε ἐν Κυψέλοις τεῖχος καὶ τὰς ἐν 
Παρρασίοις πόλεις ἀπῆλθον. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ τούς τε 
Παρρασίους αὐτονόμους ποιήσαντες καὶ τὸ τεῖχος καθε- 
λόντες ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. 
34 * Kai τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους, ἤδη ἡκόντων αὐτοῖς τῶν ἀπὸ 
z 4 Ν 4 > / σὰ a ε 
Θράκης μετὰ Βρασίδου ἐξελθόντων στρατιωτῶν, οὺς ὁ 
Κλεαρίδας μετὰ τὰς σπονδὰς ἐκόμισεν, οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι 
> 7 ‘ 4A ‘ (ὃ A ,ὔ 
ἐψηφίσαντο τοὺς μὲν μετὰ Βρασίδου Εϊλωτας μαχεσαμέ- 
> , > κ > κα “ a , ‘ 
5 vous ἐλευθέρους εἶναι καὶ οἰκεῖν ὅπου ἂν βούλωνται" καὶ 


τεῖχος: its exact position is now un- 
known. Curtius, Pelop. I. p. 340; 
Bursian, I. p. 243. — ἀναιρήσοντες : 
cf. ¢. 77.5, καὶ τὸ τεῖχος ἀναιροῦντας; 
viii. 24. 7. Therefore not to be 
changed (with Meineke) to καθαιρή- 
σοντες. ---ἴ. τῇ Σκιρίτιδι : the moun- 
tainous region between the upper 
Eurotas and the valley of the Oenus, 
one of the most important districts 
inhabited by Laconian perioeci. See 
Curtius, Pelop. 11. p. 263. ἐπὶ τῇ Σκι- 
ρίτιδι, i.e. threatening the border. Cf. 
c. 51.4; iii. 16. 4, τὸ ἐπὶ Λέσβῳ ναυτι- 
κόν; iv. 14. 29, ἔμενον ἐπὶ τῇ πύλῳ. 

9. τὴν πόλιν: 1.6. their own city, 
Mantinea. — 10. τὴν ξυμμαχίαν : the 
region under their supremacy and 
protection. Of. iv. 118. 17 and 27; 
viii. 44. ὃ; ἣν ὑπήκοον κατεστρέψαντο, 
6. 29.4.— 11. τὰς ἐν ΠΠαρρασίοις πό- 
Aes: the names of none of these can 
be given with certainty. Curtius, 
Pelop. 1. p. 340; Bursian, II. p. 241. 

84. Measures adopted by the Lace- 


daemonians to confer honours upon the 
troops which had taken part in Brasi- 
das’s expedition to Thrace, and to ren- 
der those citizens who had returned from 
captivity incapable of causing trouble to 
the state. 

1. τῶν ἀπὸ Θράκης: the use of 
ἀπό is occasioned by ἡκόντων. It is 
here ambiguous on account of ἐξελ- 
θόντων. τῶν ἀπὸ Θράκης μετὰ Βρασί- 
δου ἐξελθόντων seems to imply that 
Brasidas returned from Thrace, so 
that Kr.’s suggestion to read τῶν 
μετὰ Βρασίδου is not without reason. — 
2. ἐξελθόντων: cf. iv. 78. ὃ 1, and 80. 
§ 5.—3. ἐκόμισεν : brought home, in 
accordance with the command re- 
ceived in c. 21. 15 ff. κομίζειν is used 
in the same sense in iv. 16. 19, ἀπο- 
στεῖλαι δὲ αὐτοὺς τριήρει ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ 
πάλιν κομίσαι, but with πάλιν. ---- 4. μα- 
χεσαμένους: placed after its subst. 
acc. to the usage discussed oni. 11- 
18.— 5. οἰκεῖν ὅπου dv βούλωνται : i.e. 
no longer as serfs glebae ad- 


THUCYDIDES %. 34, 35. 


ὕστερον οὐ πολλῷ αὐτοὺς μετὰ τῶν νεοδαμώδων ἐς Aé€- 


mpeov κατέστησαν, κείμενον ἐπὶ τῆς Λακωνικῆς καὶ τῆς 
Ἠλείας, ὄντες ἤδη διάφοροι ᾿Ηλείοις - τοὺς δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς 
νήσου ληφθέντας σφῶν καὶ τὰ ὅπλα παραδόντας, δεί- 

, ‘ Ν Ν Ψ > , 
10 σαντες μή τι διὰ τὴν ξυμφορὰν νομΐσαντες ἐλασσωθή- 
σεσθαι καὶ ὄντες ἐπίτιμοι νεωτερίσωσιν, ἤδη καὶ ἀρχάς 


¥ ϑ 5 / 3 , de U4 ὃ A 
τινας EXOVTaAS QTLLOUS ETOLNO AY, ATULLLAV € TOLAVOE WOTE 


μήτε ἄρχειν μήτε πριαμένους TL ἢ πωλοῦντας κυρίους 


> 
εἰναι. 


4 \ > 4 = πὸ ~ Ξπ-. 
ὕστερον δὲ αὖθις χρόνῳ ἐπίτιμοι EYEVOVTO. 


Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους καὶ Θυσσὸν τὴν ἐν τῇ Αθω 
᾿Ακτῇ Διῆς εἷλον, ᾿Αθηναίων οὖσαν ξύμμαχον. 


scripti. This is one of the first 
requisites of ἐλευθερία. ----6. τῶν veo- 
δαμώδων : a class of new citizens com- 
posed of liberated Helots, though 
they seem to be distinct from the 
Helots who have just received their 
freedom. They are mentioned here 
for the first time, then freq. in Thuc. 
(vii. 19. 16; 58. 12; viii. 5. 7) and 
Xen., but not afterwards. See Scho- 
mann, Antig. of Greece, I. p. 198 ff.; 
Gilbert, Griech. Staatsalt, I. p. 35 f. 
The accent acc. to Hdn. i. p. 428, 13. 
See v. Bamberg, Ztschr. f. d. Gymn.- 
Wesen, 28, p.7.—6. és Λέπρεον : see 
6. 31. § 1 and § 2. 

8. ὄντες ἤδη διάφοροι: with refer- 
ence to c. 31. 5, διαφερόμενοι γὰρ ἐτύγ- 
xavov.—9. ληφθέντας, καὶ τὰ ὅπλα 

jvras: the ultimate result 
stands first. Cfiv. 38.§3f.—10. διὰ 
τὴν ξυνφορὰν νομίσαντες : the Spar- 
tans were afraid that these men who 
had returned from captivity would 
fear lest their misfortune might be 
regarded as their fault and cause them 
to be less respected (ἐλασσωθήσεσθαι 
here in the form of the fut. pass. as 
in Dem, xxiv. 66, while in c. 104. 4 
and 105. 12, the mid. form ἐλασσώσςε- 


σθαι is used), and that they would 
therefore endeavour to change the 
constitution of the state (νεωτερί- 
owot) if they remained in the exercise 
of all their rights as citizens (καὶ ὄντες 
ἔντιμοι). To prevent this, ἀτίμους 
ἐποίησαν, they took from them for a 
time the most important rights of 
citizenship, making them incapable 
of holding office and of conducting 
business transactions. —11, ἤδη καὶ 
ἀρχάς τινας ἔχοντας : this adds to the 
whole obj. τοὺς... παραδόντας a special 
part as appos. in the same case. See 
on ¢. 3.29; ii. 95.4; iii. 13.17. Itisnot 
remarkable that they already held of- 
fices, ἦσαν γὰρ of Σπαρτιᾶται αὐτῶν πρῶ- 
τοι κτὲ. Of.c. 15.4. On ἀτιμία and 
its degrees, esp. in Athens, but also 
in other Greek states, see Hermann, 
Griech. Staatsalt. ὃ 124, 6; Schomann 
Antiq. of Greece, I. p. 800 f. 

835. The summer passed while the 
Athenians and the Lacedaemonians were 
vainly endeavouring to obtain from one 
another the fulfilment of the conditions 
of the treaty. 

1. Θυσσόν: for the accent, see on 
iv. 109. 9.—év τῇ Ἄθω ᾿Ακτῇ Aus: 
see App. — 2, ᾿Αθηναιών οὖσαν Evppa- 


THUCYDIDES Υ, 35. 


69 


Kai τὸ θέρος τοῦτο πᾶν ἐπιμιξίαι μὲν ἦσαν τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 2 
’ ‘ 4 ε ’ A > ’ > A 
ναίοις καὶ Πελοποννησίοις, ὑπώπτευον δὲ ἀλλήλους εὐθὺς 


δ“ Ν Y > a ΠΕΡῚ ey ΄ Ἀ 

5 μετὰ τὰς σπονδὰς ot Te Αθηναῖοι καὶ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι κατὰ 
κ a ΄ > ΄ rete See Ἀ φ as ΄, 

τὴν τῶν χωρίων ἀλλήλοις οὐκἀπόδοσιν. τὴν yap’ Ἀμφίπολιν 

΄ λ ’ ε ὃ ΄ > ὃ ὃ ’, Ἁ Ν 

πρότεροι λαχόντες οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἀποδιδόναι καὶ τὰ 


ἄλλα οὐκ ἀποδεδώκεσαν, οὐδὲ τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης παρεῖχον 


,’ Ν Ν 7 > \ ‘ > s 
ξυμμάχους τὰς σπονδὰς δεχομένους οὐδὲ Βοιωτοὺς οὐδὲ 
10 Κορινθίους, λέγοντες ἀεὶ ὡς μετ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων τούτους, ἢν 


μὴ θέλωσι, κοινῇ ἀναγκάσουσι, χρόνους τε προύθεντο 
ΕἾ “ > es Lal ‘ Ἁ > ’ > / 
ἄνευ ξυγγραφῆς ἐν οἷς χρῆν τοὺς μὴ ἐσιόντας ἀμφοτέροις 


΄ὕ΄ > 
πολεμίους εἶναι. 


4 > ε “ a > ‘ 
TOUT@VY ουν OP@VTES οι Αθηναῖοι οὐδὲν 


¥ , ε tA ‘ / 4 
εργῳ γίγνομενον, υπώπτευον TOVS Λακεδαιμονίους μηδὲν 


Lal 9 ¥ 
15 δίκαιον διανοεῖσθαι, wore οὔτε Πύλον ἀπαιτούντων αὐὖ- 


“ 5 / > Ν ‘ \ > -~ ΄ ,’ 
τῶν ἀπεδίδοσαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου δεσμώτας 


μετεμέλοντο ἀποδεδωκότες, τά τε ἄλλα χωρία εἶχον, pe 


νοντες ἕως σφίσι κἀκεῖνοι ποιήσειαν τὰ εἰρημένα. 


xov: since the Dians also, acc. to c. 
82. 1, belonged to the Athenian alli- 
ance, their attack upon an allied town 
is incomprehensible. Steup. Stud. 1. 
p. 34, therefore regards these words 
as an interpolation. But in several 
places in this book where events are 
briefly mentioned, the connexion is 
not made clear. See Introd. p. 2. 

3. ἐπιμιξίαι : used of friendly inter- 
course, like the related verbal forms 
ἐπιμιγνύναι and ἐπιμίγνυσθαι. See on 
i. 2. 5.—6. τὴν οὐκ ἀπόδοσιν : see on 
i. 137.29. ἀλλήλοις depends upon the 
verbal force of ἀπόδοσιν. See on i. 
63. 9; 73-1; iii. 66. 17. G. 185; H. 
765 a. 

7. πρότεροι λαχόντες : cf.c. 21.1.—8. 
ἀποδεδώκεσαν : so the Mss. St. writes 
the plpf. everywhere with syllabic 
aug. See Stahl, Quaest. Graec. Ὁ. 17.— 
οὐδὲ παρεῖχον δεχομένους : the partic. 


Λακε- 


const. with παρέχ εἰν after the analogy 
of adjs. Cf. ii. 84. 20, ἀπειθεστέρας 
(τὰς vats); iii. 12. 6, ἐχυρόν; iv. 67. 
31, βεβαίους (ras riAas).—10. λέγον- 
τες ἀεί: although they constantly as- 
sured them.—11. προύθεντο : the com- 
Position is the same as that of προθεσ- 
μία, fore-appointed time. —12. Evyypa- 
gis: written agreement; συμφωνία yey- 
ραμμένη, Schol.—rovs μὴ ἐσιόντας: 
with this ἐς τὰς σπονδάς (cf. c. 30. 20) 
is to be supplied from the preceding 
τὰς σπονδὰς δεχομένους (but not, with 
Meineke, to be received into the 
text). 

13. οὐδὲν ἔργῳ γιγνόμενον : in spite 
of the ἀεὶ λέγειν. ---14. ὑπώπτευον : 
here and in viii. 76.6 for Mss. ὑὕπετό- 
mevov. See on i. 20. 9.—15. ἀπαι- 
τούντων : this (pres.) and ἀπεδίδοσαν 
(impf.) imply repeated negotiations. 
—17. μετεμέλοντο ἀποδεδωκότες : see 


70 


THUCYDIDES V. 35. 


/ Ν 

δαιμόνιοι δὲ τὰ μὲν δυνατὰ ἔφασαν πεποιηκέναι" τοὺς 
’ 5 “ 

90 γὰρ παρὰ σφίσι δεσμώτας ὄντας ᾿Αθηναίων ἀποδοῦναι 
A Ν ¥ 

καὶ τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης στρατιώτας ἀπαγαγεῖν Kal εἰ TOV 


ἄλλου ἐγκρατεῖς ἦσαν" ᾿Αμφιπόλεως δὲ οὐκ ἔφασαν κρα- 


A 9 A . , Ν 
τεῖν ὥστε παραδοῦναι, Βοιωτοὺς δὲ πειράσεσθαι καὶ Κο- 


la Ν , > 
ρινθίους ἐς τὰς σπονδὰς ἐσαγαγεῖν καὶ Ilavaxtov ἄπο- 


A > a > / 
25 λαβεῖν, καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐν Βοιωτοῖς αἰχμάλωτοι 


κομιειν. 


lal > ἈΝ 
Πύλον μέντοι ἠξίουν σφίσιν ἀποδοῦναι" εἰ δὲ 


μή, Μεσσηνίους τε καὶ τοὺς Εἵλωτας ἐξαγαγεῖν, ὥσπερ 


lal , 
καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀπὸ Θράκης, ᾿Αθηναίους δὲ φρουρεῖν τὸ χωρίον 


5» 
αὐτούς, εἰ βούλονται. 


πολλάκις δὲ καὶ πολλῶν λόγων 


’ 3 ~ , 4 » Ν > 4 
30 γενομένων εν τῳ θέρει τουτῷ επεισαν TOUS Αθηναίους 


9ὅ 


» A ΕἿΣ 
ὥστε ἐξαγαγεῖν ἐκ Πύλου “Μεσσηνίους καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους 


[Εἵλωτάς τε καὶ] ὅσοι ηὐτομολήκεσαν ἐκ τῆς Λακωνι- 


κῆς" καὶ κατῴκισαν αὐτοὺς ἐν Κρανίοις τῆς Κεφαλλη- 


νίας. 
ἀλλήλους. 


on c. 14. 10. --- 18, ποιήσειαν : for the 
form, see on iii. 49. 10. Stahl, Quaest. 
Graec. p.18. On the mood, see GMT. 
77, 1d; H. 987 a. 

21. τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης στρατιώτας : as 
in c. 67. 4. --- καὶ εἴ του ἄλλου (neut. 
not masc.) ἐρκρατεῖς ἦσαν : in a per- 
fectly general sense: and whatever else 
they had been able; and accordingly a 
general expression like ποιῆσαι, not 
ἀποδοῦναι or ἀπαγαγεῖν is to be supplied. 
Cf. 19, τὰ μὲν δυνατὰ ἔφασαν πεποιηκέ- 
ναι. -- 28. ὥστε: see on 6. 14. 1.—24. 
ἀπολαβεῖν : cf. ο. 30. 15.— 26. κομιεῖν : 
depends upon ἔφασαν, not upon πειρά- 
σεσθαι: they said they would attend to 
the restoration of the captives. 

27. Μεσσηνίους τε καὶ τοὺς Εἰλω- 
τας: several editt. following Reiske 
have adopted ye for re. But since, 
acc, to iv. 41. ὃ 2, the Messenians had 


‘ ᾿ > θ ΄, A ε , > \ »¥ ὃ > 
τὸ μὲν οὖν θέρος τοῦτο ἡσυχία ἦν καὶ ἔφοδοι παρ 


been expressly transferred to Pylos 
from Naupactus, whereas the Helots 
had simply run away thither, the 
separation by means of re, καί seems 
very appropriate. 

30. ἔπεισαν ὥστε: cf. ο. 16, 29. --- 
31. καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους [Εἰλωτάς τε καὶ] 
ὅσοι : see App.—33. κατῴκισαν : else- 
where const. with és. See oni. 103. 
9.—év Kpavlois: from nom, Κράνιοι 
acc. to Steph. Byz. s.v. Κράνιοι πόλις 
ἐν Κεφαλληνίᾳ, τὸ ἐθνικὸν Κρανιεῖς. 
(Bursian, Geogr. v. Griech. ΤΙ. p. 878, 
calls the town Krane; Jowett, Cranii.) 
The Athenians had been in posses- 
sion of Cephallenia since the first 
year of the war. See ii. 30.§ 2 (where 
Κράνιοι seems to be used as ἐθνικόν). 

34. ἔφοδοι: equiv. to ἐπιμιξίαι, 3. 
Cf. i. 6. 2, διὰ τὰς οὐκ ἀσφαλεῖς παρ᾽ 
ἀλλήλους ἐφόδους. ὶ 


.1 


36 


* Ol. 81. 4; B.c. 421-420, 
Winter. 


THUCYDIDES V. 36. 


A Ν 5 9135 Φ ε θυ 9 , >» ἊΨ 
ἕτεροι, καὶ οὐκ ἐφ᾽ ὧν ai σπονδαὶ ἐγένοντο, ἄρχοντες ἤδη, 


΄ 2 A \ 
καὶ τινες αὐτῶν και 


ἐναντίοι σπονδαῖς) 


ἐλθουσῶν 


‘al 5 Ν a / ‘ ’ > Δ 
πρεσβειῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ξυμμαχίδος καὶ παρόντων ᾿Αθηναίων 
5 καὶ Βοιωτῶν καὶ Κορινθίων καὶ πολλὰ ἐν ἀλλήλοις εἰ- 


΄ Ν ὑδὲ ΄ ε DT φω | ¥ 
πόντων καὶ οὐδὲν ξυμβάντων, ὡς ἀπῇσαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου, 


τοῖς Βοιωτοῖς καὶ Κορινθίοις Κλεόβουλος καὶ Ἐενάρης, 


οὗτοι οἵπερ τῶν ἐφόρων ἐβούλοντο μάλιστα διαλῦσαι τὰς 


΄ ΄ a 297 A 9 ΄ 
σπονδάς, λόγους ποίουνται ἰδίους, TAPALWOVVTES OTL μα- 


10 λιστα ταὐτά ye γιγνώσκειν καὶ πειρᾶσθαι Βοιωτούς, ‘Ap- 


΄ ΄, A > Ν , > \ 
γείων γενομένους πρῶτον αὐτοὺς ξυμμάχους, αὖθις μετὰ 
Βοιωτῶν ᾿Αργείους Λακεδαιμονίοις ποιῆσαι ξυμμάχους - 


36. LEndeavours of the Lacedaemo- 
nian war party to induce the Boeotians to 
join the Argive alliance, in order that 
through their instrumentality an alliance 
between Argos and Sparta may be brought 
about. 

1. ἔφοροι ἕτεροι : the annual change 
of the five ephors took place at the au- 
tumnal equinox, the beginning of the 
Lacedaemonian year. See Hermann, 
Griech. Staatsalt. § 45, 3.—2. dpxov- 
τες ἤδη : Const. with ἔτυχον. --- 3. σπον- 
Sais: see App.—4. τῆς ξυμμαχίδος : 
i.e. the allied states, as in i. 110. 10, ἐκ 
δὲ rv’ AOnvar καὶ τῆς ἄλλης ξυμμαχίδος. 
Of the whole body of allies the three 
most important are esp. mentioned ; 
the Athenians as new allies, the Boe- 
otians and Corinthians as members of 
the old alliance, though not partici- 
pators in the peace with Athens. — 
6. ὡς ἀπῇσαν : as they were on the point 
of departing. —7. Ἐξενάρης : see App. 
—9. ἰδίους: is not as common as 
ἰδίᾳ, but is not (with v. Herwerden) to 
be emended. Cf. c. 39. 10; viii. 9. 5. 
—10. ταὐτά: adopted by Poppo and 
subsequent editt. for ταῦτα of the 


Mss. — ταὐτὰ γιγνώσκειν : agree, adopt 
the same policy.— These negotia-~ 
tions with the Boeotians and Corin- 
thians, have for their first object to 
induce the Boeotians to accept the 
proposal made them in c. 32. ὃ 5, 6 
(1.6. to join the Argive alliance as the 
Corinthians had done), in regard to 
which they had asked for time to 
consider (ἐπισχεῖν). Taking it for 
granted that the Boeotians will now 
agree to the proposal of the Corinthi- 
ans, the two ephors address the sec- 
ond part of their proposition (re καί 
shows this division into two heads) to 
the Boeotians alone, πειρᾶσθαι. Βοιω- 
τούς xré. The great importance of 
the part the Boeotians have to 
play occasions the unusual repeti- 
tion of the subst. μετὰ Βοιωτῶν, in- 
stead of the pron. μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν. We 
must connect Βοιωτῶν closely in 
thought with ξυμμάχους. If the Boeo- 
tians were once allies of the Argives, 
then it would be possible to bring 
about an alliance between Sparta and 
Argos. The repetition of ξυμμάχους 
increases the emphasis laid upon this 


71 


* Tov δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος (ἔτυχον yap ἔφοροι 1 


‘ 


THUCYDIDES V. 36, 37. 


ν Ν ν ‘ian | 5 “ Ν 3 Ν 3 
οὕτω γὰρ ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν ἀναγκασθῆναι Βοιωτοὺς ἐς τὰς ᾿Ατ- 
Ν Ν > A ε ’ Ν 4 
τικὰς σπονδὰς ἐσελθεῖν - ἑλέσθαι yap Λακεδαιμονίους 


15 πρὸ τῆς ᾿Αθηναίων ἔχθρας καὶ διαλύσεως τῶν σπονδῶν 
> ’ vA ’ ‘\ ’, 4 ἂς Ν 

Ἀργείους σφίσι φίλους καὶ ξυμμάχους γενέσθαι. τὸ γὰρ 
ἼΑργος ἀεὶ ἠπίσταντο ἐπιθυμοῦντας Τοὺς Λακεδαιμονί- 


ovs καλῶς σφίσι φίλιον γενέσθαι, ἡγουμένους τὸν ἔξω Tle 


, ΄ es a > 
λοποννήσου πόλεμον pdw ἂν εἶναι. 


τὸ μέντοι Πάνακτον 3 


20 ἐδέοντο Βοιωτοὺς ὅπως παραδώσουσι Λακεδαιμονίοις, 


ἵνα ἀντ᾽ αὐτοῦ Πύλον, ἢν δύνωνται, ἀπολαβόντες ῥᾷον 


37 καθιστῶνται ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐς πόλεμον. 


Ἀ ε . 
καὶ ov μὲν Boww- 


‘ Ν ΄, “ > ΄ > ’ A 4 
τοὶ καὶ Κορίνθιοι ταῦτα ἐπεσταλμένοι ἀπό τε τοῦ Ξενά- 


ρους καὶ Κλεοβούλου καὶ ὅσοι φίλοι ἦσαν αὐτοῖς τῶν 


idea. See App.—11. αὖθις: after 
πρῶτον as in 6. 76, 9.—13. οὕτω γὰρ 
ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν ἀναγκασθῆναι κτέ. : the 
argument likely to persuade the 
Boeotians is stated first, viz. that 
the possibility (referred to in c. 35. 
11) that the Lacedaemonians and 
Athenians together would force the 
Boeotians to accept the peace, would 
disappear. Then in 14, in the words 
ἑλέσθαι γὰρ (ἂν) Λακεδαιμονίους κτὲ. the 
interest which the Lacedaemonians 
would have in an alliance with Argos 
is set forth. See App.—14. ἑλέσ- 
θαι: choose, be glad. Here πρό is not 
equiv. to ἀντί (cf. iv. 20.6) but tem- 
poral (as may be the case in iii. 59. 
21, ἑλοίμεθα ἂν πρό γε τούτου λιμῷ 
τελευτῆσαι, “before we do that we 
would starve to death”): “ the Lace- 
daemonians would prefer that the Ar- 
gives (’Apyelouvs first for emphasis) 
should join them in friendship and 
alliance before they declared their 
hostility to the Athenians and put an 
end to the peace,” which they would 
probably do before long, since their 
friendly relations had been disturbed 


εὐθὺς μετὰ Tas σπονδάς, C. 35.2. This 
is then further explained in 16, τὸ yap 
“Apyos... ῥάῳ ἂν εἶναι, “ the Boeotians 
knew that the Lacedaemonians wished 
all along to be on good terms with 
Argos, because then their rear would 
not be exposed in case of a war out- 
side of Peloponnesus,” 1.6. with Athens. 
See App.—18. καλῶς: rightly ex- 
plained by St.: opportune; “under 
favourable circumstances,” “if they 
had a good opportunity.” Cf i. 124. 
1; v. 65. 24. --- ἡγουμένους : the state- 
ment is evidently to be made of the 
Lacedaemonians. See App. 

20. ἐδέοντο xré.: see App.—21. 
ῥᾷον : in the same sense as in 19, with 
greater safety. 

87. Similar proposals are made by 
influential Argives. Negotiations are 
begun between the Boeotians and the 
Argives. 

2. ταῦτα ἐπεσταλμένοι : ἐπιστέλλειν 
in pass., const. like ἐπιτρέπειν in i, 126. 
33. G. 197, x. 2; H. 819 b. With 
this, ἀπό, not smd, ace. to the usage 
established by Herbst, gegen Cobet, p. 
50f. Cf.i. 141. 6; iii. 36.24; 82. 41, 


5 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 37. 


Λακεδαιμονίων ὥστε ἀπαγγεῖλαι ἐπὶ τὰ κοινά, ἑκάτεροι 
ἀνεχώρουν. ᾿Αργείων δὲ δύο ἄνδρες τῆς ἀρχῆς τῆς με- 
γίστης ἐπετήρουν ἀπιόντας αὐτοὺς καθ᾽ ὁδὸν καὶ Evyye 
νόμενοι ἐς λόγους ἦλθον, εἴ πως οἱ Βοιωτοὶ σφίσι ξύμ- 
Y A 9 rd XY 9 ~ Ν 

μάχοι γένοιντο, ὥσπερ Κορίνθιοι καὶ ᾿Ηλεῖοι καὶ Μαν- 
τινῆς " νομίζειν γὰρ ἂν τούτου προχωρήσαντος ῥᾳδίως ἤδη 
καὶ πολεμεῖν καὶ σπένδεσθαι, καὶ πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους, 
εἰ βούλοιντο, κοινῷ λόγῳ χρωμένους, καὶ εἴ τινα πρὸς 
¥ ΄ 

ἄλλον δέοι. 


¥ Ν 4 Ν ἐδ ¢ 4 - Ν ε 
ρεσκε" κατα τυχὴν γαρ E€OECOVTO τούτων ὠνπέερ και OL 


lal A An ~ ᾽’ > , 
τοῖς δὲ τῶν Βοιωτῶν πρέσβεσιν ἀκούουσιν 
5 ~ 4 > “a V4 > 7 ἈΝ ε 
ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος αὐτοῖς φίλοι ἐπεστάλκεσαν. καὶ οἱ 
A > , ¥ ε ¥ > ‘ 7 Ν 
τῶν ᾿Αργείων ἄνδρες ὡς ἤσθοντο αὐτοὺς δεχομένους τὸν 
λόγον, εἰπόντες ὅτι πρέσβεις πέμψουσιν ἐς Βοιωτοὺς 


ἀπῆλθον. 


- 4. ὥστε: with ἐπιστέλλειν, as in c. 
16.23 with πείθειν. ---- ἐπὶ τὰ κοινά : pl. 
οὗ κοινόν. Cf. i. 89. 14; go. 29; ii. 12. 
6. The most important legislative 
body ismeant. Here pl. because both 
Thebes and Corinth are referred to. 
5. τῆς ἀρχῆς τῆς μεγίστης : prob. 
the ἀρτῦναι mentioned in ec. 47. 53, 
though it may be that the strategi are 
intended. See Gilbert, Griech. Staats- 
alt. 11. p. 79, note2.— 6. ἀπιόντας : sc. 
ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. Cf. c. 36.6.— καθ᾽ ὁδόν : 1.6. 
on the way home through Argive ter- 
ritory. —8. γένοιντο : the opt. depends 
upon the notion of indir. disc. implied 
in és λόγους ἦλθον. GMT.77,1c¢; 53, 
n.2; Η. 937. --- ὥσπερ Κορίνθιοι: cf. c. 
31. 20. ---ἑ Ἠλεῖοι : ef. c. 31. 20. — Μαν- 
τινῆς: cf. c. 29. 1.—10. καὶ πολεμεῖν 
Kal σπένδεσθαι, kal πρὸς AakeSaipo- 
vious καὶ el τινα πρὸς ἄλλον δέοι: two 
pairs of alternatives. The first con- 
cerns the fact (peace or war), the sec- 
ond the persons (Lacedaemonians or 
anybody else). εἴ tis is equiv. to ὅσ- 
τισοῦν (cf. i. 14. 11; iv. 26. 16), and 


> / A ε Ν > 4 lal 
ἀφικόμενοι δὲ οἱ Βοιωτοὶ ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς 


cannot be separated, which accounts 
for the peculiar position of the prep. 
πρός. --- 11. κοινῷ λόγῳ χρωμένους : 
is the consequence arising from τού- 
του mpoxwphoavtos: “if the Argives, 
Boeotians, Corinthians, Eleans, and 
Mantineans pursued a joint policy.” 
The subj. of νομίζειν is still the two 
Argives, but when we come to the 
dependent infs. πολεμεῖν καὶ σπένδε- 
σθαι (with ἄν) introduced by τούτου 
προχωρήσαντος the subj. embraces the 
whole body of allies. — εἰ δέοι : if cir- 
cumstances demanded it. 

13. ἐδέοντο : sc. the two Argives. — 
ὧνπερ : const. with ἐπεστάλκεσαν. Gen. 
by assimilation for ἅπερ. See oni. t. 
12; iv. 20. 4. G. 153; H. 994. For 
τούτων, Schiitz and Naber, Mnem. 14, 
p. 319, prefer τῶν αὐτῶν. ---οἱ.... φί- 
λοι: οἱ περὶ τὸν Κλεόβουλον δηλονότι, 
Schol.—15. δεχομένους τὸν λόγον: 
almost like an adj., inclined to accept 
the proposal, Of. c. 35. 9. 

17. ἀφικόμενοι: sc. at Thebes. — 
τοῖς Βοιωτάρχαις : see on iy. oI. 4. 


74 


THUCYDIDES V. 37, 38. 


, 4 > A ’ Ν ‘ > Ν Lal 
βοιωτάρχαις τά τε ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος καὶ τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν 
ξυγγενομένων ᾿Αργείων : καὶ οἱ βοιωτάρχαι ἠρέσκοντό τε 
20 καὶ πολλῷ προθυμότεροι ἦσαν, ὅτι ἀμφοτέρωθεν Evv- 

4 > “A 4 ’ [ων 4 Lal 
εβεβήκει αὐτοῖς τούς Te φίλους τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τῶν 


7 A val ἈΝ Ν 3 , 5 ΣΝ Ἢ a , 
QAUTWV δεῖσθαι και τους Ἀργείους ες Ta ομοια σπεύδειν. 


\ > Ἂν , n~ > 4 Ν. > 
καὶ ov πολλῷ ὕστερον πρέσβεις παρῆσαν ᾿Ἀργείων τὰ εἰρη" δ 


μένα προκαλούμενοι: καὶ αὐτοὺς ἀπέπεμψαν ἐπαινέσαντες 


‘ ‘4 ε ΄ ᾿ / ε ’ 
25 τοὺς λόγους οἱ βοιωτάρχαι καὶ πρέσβεις ὑποσχόμενοι 


98 


> Ὁ“ Ν “ ’  » 

ἀποστελεῖν περὶ τῆς ξυμμαχίας ἐς “Apyos. 
3 Ν , 29 » A a 4 Ν 
Εν δὲ τούτῳ ἐδόκει πρῶτον τοῖς βοιωτάρχαις καὶ 


Κορινθίοις καὶ Μεγαρεῦσιν καὶ τοῖς ἀπὸ Θράκης πρέσβε- 


ὅν ἃ Ψ > , > \ » a , 
σιν ὀμόσαι opKous ἀλλήλοις H μὴν EV TE TH παρατυχόντι 


ἀμυνεῖν τῷ δεομένῳ καὶ μὴ πολεμήσειν τῳ μηδὲ ξυμβή- 


σεσθαι ἄνευ κοινῆς γνώμης, καὶ οὕτως ἤδη τοὺς Βοιω- 


Ν Ν , Ν Ν 9: — > rd αὐ Ν 3 
τοὺς καὶ Μεγαρέας (τὸ γὰρ αὐτὸ ἐποίουν) πρὸς τοὺς “Ap- 


The Boeotarchs were the chief mag- 
istrates of the Boeotian confederacy. 
At this time they seem to have been 
eleven, in number. Later they were 
only seven. See Boeckh, Corp. Insc. 
Gr. I. 729. Hermann, Griech. Staats- 
alt. § 179, 10. Gilbert, Griech. Staats- 
alt, II. p. 54 f.—19. ἠρέσκοντο : see 
on 6. 4. 11.— 20. ξυνεβεβήκει : see on 
9. 10, 33.—21. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων : 
part. gen. as in 8. ---τῶν αὐτῶν: de- 
pends upon δεῖσθαι, wanted the same 
things, i.e. had the same needs and de- 
sires as themselves. G. 172, 1; H. 
743.— 22. és τὰ ὁμοῖα: Thue. else- 
where uses σπεύδειν without a prep. 
(cf. c. 16.7; vi. 10. 15), but Xen. Cyr. 
i. 4. 4.has és τὸ αὐτὸ ἡμῖν σπεύδετε. 
Cf. Aesch. Prom. 192; Eur. Jon. 599 
(Kr. proposes to omit és). 

23. παρῆσαν: sc. ἐν Θήβαις-.---τὰ 
εἰρημένα : here refers only to the pro- 
posals of 6 ff., not “that which had 
been agreed upon,” as in c, 35. 18. — 


24. προκαλούμενοι: with acc. as in ii. 
74. 15, προκαλεσάμενοι γὰρ πολλὰ καὶ 
εἰκότα οὐ τυγχάνομεν. Cf. ο. 111. 19. 

88. But owing to the resistance of 
an opposing party in Boeotia, nothing is 
accomplished. 

1. ἐδόκει: not ἔδοξε. As presently 
appears, it was only a proposition, not 
a decision. — 2. Κορινθίοις xré.: that 
the envoys of these states had come 
to Thebes has not been stated, but is 
evident from the context. See 20f.— 
τοῖς ἀπὸ Opaxns: cf. c. 31. 26.—3. ἐν 
τῷ παρατυχόντι: “under the circum- 
stances that might at any time arise.” 
mapa- has the force of ἀεί, and hence 
the sing. See on i. 122. 6; iii. 82. 47. 
—4. τῷ «δεομένῳ: general, like τὸν 
βουλόμενον, i. 26. 8, and freq. —5. 
οὕτως ἤδη : thereupon, “then and not 
till then.” οὕτως denotes the fulfil- 
ment of certain conditions. Qf i. 37. 
4; iii. 96. 8; iv. 88.8; v.55.8.—6. τὸ 
yap αὐτὸ ἐποίουν : like c. 31.27, τὸ αὐτὸ 


~ 


THUUYDIDES V. 38. 


75 


yelous σπένδεσθαι. πρὶν δὲ τοὺς ὅρκους γενέσθαι οἱ Bor- 2 
ὠτάρχαι ἐκοίνωσαν ταῖς τέσσαρσι βουλαῖς τῶν Βοιωτῶν 
ταῦτα, αἵπερ ἅπαν τὸ κῦρος ἔχουσι, καὶ παρήνουν γενέ- 
10 σθαι ὅρκους ταῖς πόλεσιν, ὅσαι βούλονται ἐπ᾽ ὠφελίᾳ 


σφίσι ξυνομνύναι. 


οἱ δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς βουλαῖς τῶν Βοιωτῶν 


» > δέ Ν do ὃ ὃ ΄ 4 5 ΄ 
OVTES OV προσ EXOVTAL TOV oyov, €OLOTES μὴ eVaVvTLa 


Λακεδαιμονίοις ποιήσωσι, Tots ἐκείνων ἀφεστῶσι Kopw- 
θίοις ξυνομνύντες - οὐ γὰρ εἶπον αὐτοῖς οἱ βοιωτάρχαι 
15 τὰ ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος, ὅτι τῶν τε ἐφόρων Κλεόβουλος 
‘ ΄ ‘ « ’ A > ΄ lal 
καὶ Ἐενάρης καὶ ot φίλοι παραινοῦσιν ᾿Αργείων πρῶτον 
καὶ Κορινθίων γενομένους ξυμμάχους ὕστερον per αὐτῶν 
Λακεδαιμονίων γίγνεσθαι, οἰόμενοι τὴν βουλήν, κἂν μὴ 


λέγοντες, and c. 36. 10, ταὐτὰ γιγνώ- 
σκειν, denotes, esp. in the impf., gen- 
eral agreement in act and word. 

8. ταῖς τέσσαρσι βουλαῖς : they are 
not mentioned elsewhere, and the or- 
ganization of the Boeotian confed- 
eracy is altogether but imperfectly 
known. See Hermann, Griech. Staats- 
alt.§ 179,11. Gilbert, Griéch. Staats- 
alt. 11. p. 57.—10. ἐπ᾽ ὠφελίᾳ: cf. 1. 
3. 9, ἐπαγομένων αὐτοὺς ἐπ᾽ ὠφελίᾳ ἐς 
τὰς ἄλλας πόλεις. 

18. τοῖς ἐκείνων ἀφεστῶσι : cf. c. 27. 
§ 2; 30. § 2 Ε΄ ---14, οὐ γὰρ εἶπον : 
they had not informed them.— 1ὅ. τῶν 
τε ἐφόρων: part. gen. opp. to καὶ οἱ 
φίλοι. Cf. c. 37. 2.—16. παραινοῦ- 
σιν: sc. τοῖς Βοιωτοῖς, as in c. 36.9 f. 
—17. μετ᾽ αὐτῶν : rightly restored by 
St. for μετὰ τῶν (on this error of the 
Mss. see App. on 6. 16. 6); for upon 
this the whole plan of the ephors and 
their party depended. They wished 
first to induce the Boeotians to form 
an alliance with Argos (and Corinth, 
which was already in the Argive con- 
federacy), and then to bring about 
an alliance between these and Sparta, 


so that Athens should be entirely 
isolated. Where the reconciliation 
of Argos and Sparta is the main 
point, we read in c. 36.11 f., μετὰ Βοιω- 
τῶν ᾿Αργείους Λακεδαιμονίοις ποιῆσαι 
ξυμμάχους ; here where the restoration 
of the somewhat loosened alliance be- 
tween Thebes and Sparta is most 
prominent, the same idea is expressed 
somewhat differently: (τοὺς Βοιωτούς, 
for this is the obj. of παραινοῦσιν and 
subj. of γίγνεσθαι) μετ᾽ αὐτῶν (sc. τῶν 
᾿Αργείων καὶ Κορινθίων) Λακεδαιμονίων 
(sc. ξυμμάχουΞ) γίγνεσθαι. The way to 
the goal is in both cases the same: 
᾿Αργείων πρῶτον (καὶ Κορινθίων, which 
is omitted as superfluous in c. 36) 
γενομένους ξυμμάχους. Only the dif- 
ference between ποιῆσαι and γίγνεσθαι 
occasions that between μετὰ Βοιωτῶν 
and μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, i.e. μετὰ τῶν ᾿Αργείων 
καὶ Κορινθίων. ---19. σφίσι: refers to 
the subj. οὗ ψηφιεῖσθαι: “they would 
adopt no other measures than those 
which they (the Boeotarchs) recom- 
mend to them after previous delibera- 
tion.” The indir. refi. pron. often 
refers in Thuc. to the subj. of a de- 


20 παραινοῦσιν. 


THUCYDIDES V. “38, 39. 


εἴπωσιν, οὐκ ἄλλα ψηφιεῖσθαι ἣ ἃ σφίσι προδιαγνόντες 


ε Ν 3 , Ν “ ε Ν 4 
as δὲ ἀντέστη TO πρᾶγμα, ot μὲν Kopiv- 4 


θ i οἱ ἀπὸ Opa έσβεις ἄπρακτοι ἀπῆλθ t 
tot Kal οἱ ἀπὸ Θράκης mp ς ἄπρακτοι ἀπῆλθον, ot 
/ lal 
δὲ βοιωτάρχαι, μέλλοντες πρότερον, εἰ ταῦτα ἔπεισαν, 
καὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν πειράσεσθαι πρὸς ᾿Αργείους ποιεῖν, 
» ’ 3 ΄ \ 3 ’ 5 Ν rg sQX > 
οὐκέτι ἐσήνεγκαν περὶ ᾿Αργείων ἐς τὰς βουλάς, οὐδὲ és 
. 9 Ν , a ε / ¥ > / 
25 TO “Apyos τοὺς πρέσβεις ods ὑπέσχοντο ἔπεμπον, ἀμέλεια 
δέ τις ἐνῆν καὶ διατριβὴ τῶν πάντων. 
Καὶ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χειμῶνι τούτῳ Μηκύβερναν Ὀλύν- 
θιοι ᾿Αθηναίων φρουρούντων ἐπιδραμόντες εἷλον. 
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα (ἐγίγνοντο γὰρ ἀεὶ λόγοι τοῖς τε 
᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις περὶ ὧν εἶχον ἀλλήλων) 


ἐλπίζοντες οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, εἰ Πάνακτον ᾿Αθηναῖοι πα- 


a“ a Ν 
ὰ Βοιωτῶν ἀπολάβοιεν, κομίσασθαι ἂν αὐτοὶ Πύλον, 
ρ 


ἦλθον ἐς τοὺς Βοιωτοὺς πρεσβευόμενοι καὶ ἐδέοντο σφίσι 


Ἀ 
Πάνακτόν τε καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίων δεσμώτας παραδοῦναι, 


pendent verb. Cf. i. 20. 10; 30. 14; 
58. 7; iii. 3. 19; iv. 113. 11. Kiihn. 
555, x. 9. The change to σφεῖς or ἐν 
σφίσι, which has been proposed, is 
therefore unnecessary. 

20. ἀντέστη : see on 6. 4. 22.— 22. 
el ταῦτα ἔπεισαν : the aor. indic. is 
chosen under the influence of the 
failure of their attempt (“if they had 
succeeded, which they did not”) ; μέλ- 
λοντες πειράσεσθαι would otherwise 
lead us to expect here a fut. prot., 
ἐὰν πείσωσι Or εἰ πείσειαν. GMT. 49, 
2, ν. 8 6. --- 28, καὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν : 
the alliance with the Argives, which 
has been previously mentioned, is the 
important one; hence the art. — 24. 
ἐσήνεγκαν: ἐσφέρειν, propose for de- 
liberation, occurs also in viii. 67. 5 and 
9.—25. ots ὑπέσχοντο: cf. c. 37. 25. 

89, The Lacedaemonians make a 
separate alliance with the Boeotians, 


1. MyxvPepvav: mentioned by Stra- 
bo, vii. frg. 29, as ἐπίνειον of Olynthus 
on the Toronaic Gulf. It now loses 
its independence, which Athens had 
tried to secure (c. 18. 29) in the treaty 
of peace. 

3. ἐγίγνοντο λόγοι τοῖς Te’ Αθηναίοις 
κτέ.: ἴ.6. of ᾿Αθηναῖοι κτὲ. λόγους ἐποι- 
οὖντο. τε intimates that sometimes 
one party and sometimes the other 
took the initiative. —4. περὶ ὧν ἀλλή- 
λων εἶχον : 1.6. by conquest during the 
war. These places were to be restored 
ace. to the treaty. Of. c. 35. 5, κατὰ 
τὴν τῶν χωρίων ἀλλήλοις οὐκ ἀπόδοσιν. 
—6. ἀπολάβοιεν : ἀπολαβεῖν, get back, 
either directly or by the mediation 
of others. Cf. c. 30. 15; 35. 24; 36. 
21; iv. 90. 9. -- κομίσασθαι: cf. c. 15. 
4; 17.3; iv. 41. 15.—7. πρεσβευόμενοι : 
ef. i. 31. 18, where the fut. partic. 
πρεσβευσόμενοι 1β used in the same way. 


THUCYDIDES V. 39, 40. 77 


* ΟἹ. 89. 4; B.c. 420, Feb. 
** Mar. 


ot δὲ Βοιωτοὶ οὐκ 3 
10 ἔῤξασαν ἀποδώσειν, ἣν μὴ σφίσι ξυμμαχίαν ἰδίαν ποιή- 
7 > 4 ’ 4A > / >} 
σώνται ὥσπερ ᾿Αθηναίοις. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ εἰδότες μὲν 


ἵνα ἀντ᾽ αὐτῶν Πύλον κομίσωνται. 


ὅτι ἀδικήσουσιν ᾿Αθηναίους, εἰρημένον ἄνευ ἀλλήλων 
΄ ΄ δε ΄ ΄, Xr A / δὲ Ν 
pyre σπένδεσθαί τῳ μήτε πολεμεῖν, βουλόμενοι δὲ τὸ 
΄ ™ ε Ἅ 4 > > > nw 4 
Πάνακτον παραλαβεῖν ὡς τὴν Πύλον ἀντ᾽ αὐτοῦ κομιού- 
15 μενοι, καὶ ἅμα τῶν ξυγχέαι σπευδόντων τὰς σπονδὰς 
προθυμουμένων τὰ ἐς Βοιωτούς, ἐποιήσαντο τὴν ξυμμα- 
rn “ “ 3», Ν ᾿ 
χίαν, τοῦ χειμῶνος τελευτῶντος * ἤδη καὶ πρὸς ἔαρ, καὶ 
x , 5 ‘ a) ‘ ε ΄, » ~ 
τὸ Πάνακτον εὐθὺς καθῃρεῖτο. καὶ ἑνδέκατον ἔτος τῷ 
πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα. 
40 ** Ἅμα δὲ τῷ ἦρι εὐθὺς τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους οἱ 1 
> A ε ΩΣ ΄ a A a ¥ 
Ἄργειοι, ὡς οἱ TE πρέσβεις των Βοιωτῶν ovs ἔφασαν 
΄ 3 a 4 ΄ Ψ ΄ 
πέμψειν οὐχ ἧκον, τό τε Πάνακτον ἥσθοντο καθαιρού- 
μενον καὶ ξυμμαχίαν ἰδίαν γεγενημένην τοῖς Βοιωτοῖς 
5 πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, ἔδεισαν μὴ μονωθῶσι καὶ ἐς 


12. εἰρημένον κτέ.: either this pro- 
vision is regarded as contained in c. 
23. § 1, or it was subsequently added 
to the treaty. See App. Cf ec. 46. 
15.—14. παραλαβεῖν : denotes the ac- 
quisition of Panactum preparatory to 
exchanging it with the Athenians. — 
15. τῶν ξυγχέαι σπευδόντων τὰς σπον- 
Sds: 1.6. the party of the two ephors. 
See c. 36.7. The verb ξυγχεῖν occurs 
only here in Thuc.; but σπονδῶν ξύγ- 
χυσις in i. 146. 5 and c. 26.29. Cf 
confundere foedus, Verg. Aen. 
v. 496. — 16. προθυμουμένων : with 
ace. See on 6. 17. 6. --- τὰ és Bow- 
τούς: a general expression: the con- 
nexion with the Boeotians. Cf. c. 46. 
5, ἐπισχόντας τὰ πρὸς ᾿Αργείους. --- 17. 
ἤδη: const. with τοῦ χειμῶνος τελευ- 
τῶντος (not as in iv. 135. 2 with ἔαρ), 
intimates that the winter had been 
frittered away in the repeated negoti- 


ations. — καί: connects the following 
words closely with ἐποιήσαντο τὴν 
ξυμμαχίαν, and makes the destruction 
of Panactum appear as a consequence 
of the alliance—18. καθῃρεῖτο: ὑπὸ 
τῶν Βοιωτῶν, Schol. The impf. de- 
notes the beginning of the work which 
is still uncompleted in c. 40. 3 (καθαι- 
ρούμενον), and is not finished (καθῃρη- 
μένον) until c. 42.6. The reasons for 
it are given inc.42.7f. The words of 
Plut. Ale. 14, Λακεδαιμόνιοι... Πάνα- 
κτον οὔχ ἑστῶσαν, ὥσπερ ἔδει, τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίοις παρέδωκαν, ἀλλὰ καταλύσαντες 
show that the Lacedaemonians were 
regarded as morally responsible for 
this breach of the spirit of the provis- 
ion (see c. 18. 31 f.) of the treaty. 

40. Thereupon the Argives, fearful 
of being isolated, begin to negotiate with 
Sparta. 

3. ἧκον: see App.—6. χωρήσῃ: 


78 


10 


15 


20 


ee eee 


THUCYDIDES V. 40. 


, A ε ΄ / Ν Ν 
Λακεδαιμονίους πᾶσᾳ ἡ ξυμμαχία χωρήσῃ " τοὺς yap Βοι- 
al ἃ es ’, 
wtovs wovto πεπεῖσθαι ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων τό τε Πάνα- 
A \ > Ν 3 , δὰ 3 4 
κτον καθελεῖν καὶ és τὰς ᾿Αθηναίων σπονδὰς ἐσιέναι, 
τούς τε ᾿Αθηναίους εἰδέναι ταῦτα, ὥστε οὐδὲ πρὸς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίους ἔτι σφίσιν εἶναι ξυμμαχίαν ποιήσασθαι, πρότερον 
Lal nw ial 
ἐλπίζοντες ἐκ τῶν διαφορῶν, εἰ μὴ μείνειαν αὐτοῖς αἱ 
πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους σπονδαί, τοῖς γοῦν ᾿Αθηναίοις ξύμ- 
“ la) “ Ν 
μαχοι ἔσεσθαι. ἀποροῦντες οὖν ταῦτα οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ φο- 
βούμενοι μὴ Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ Τεγεάταις, Βοιωτοῖς 
Raw 4 9 A / 3 ΄ Ν 
καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις ἅμα πολεμῶσι, πρότερον οὐ δεχόμενοι τὰς 
, ’ > > > ? + Lal 
Λακεδαιμονίων σπονδάς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν φρονήματι ὄντες τῆς 
Πελοποννήσου ἡγήσεσθαι, ἔπεμπον ὡς ἐδύναντο τάχιστα 
> iY , , » \ » 
ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις Evotpodoy καὶ Αἴσωνα, 
ot ἐδόκουν προσφιλέστατοι αὐτοῖς εἶναι, ἡγούμενοι ἐκ τῶν 
παρόντων κράτιστα πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους σπονδὰς ποιη- 


χωρεῖν ἔς τινα seems to differ from the 
more usual χωρεῖν πρός τινα (cf. i. 18. 
28; v. 22. 10; 43. 6) as accedere 
ad aliquem differs from se con- 
vertere ad aliquem, and thus 
lays more stress upon the central po- 
sition of Sparta. 

9. τούς τε ᾿Αθηναίους εἰδέναι ταῦτα : 
the Argives were in error, believing 
that the Athenians had agreed to 
the destruction of Panactum prepara- 
tory to admitting the Boeotians into 
the alliance headed by Sparta and 
Athens. — ὥστε οὐδὲ... ποιήσασθαι: 
a consequence of this erroneous opin- 
ion. The inf. εἶναι still depends upon 
@ovro. The neg. οὐδέ (not μηδέ) is 
retained. Their thought was ὥστε 
οὐδὲ. . . ἔστι. --- 10. εἶναι: equiv. to 
παρεῖναι, as in ii, 97.4, od γὰρ ἦν πρᾶξαι 
οὐδὲν μὴ διδόντα δῶρα. --- 11. ἐκ τῶν 
διαφορῶν : in consequence of the differ- 
ences existing between the Lacedae- 


: 


monians and Athenians, which the 
Argives falsely believed were now 
removed. —ai πρὸς «Λακεδαιμονίους 
σπονδαί: the expiration of this truce 
was at hand (see c. 14. 21; 22.8f.; 
28. 8). Cleobulus and Xenares had 
tried to renew it (see ὁ, 36. 8. 1). εἰ μὴ 
μείνειαν then means: “if the thirty 
years’ truce should not be renewed.” 
See App. 

13. ἀποροῦντες οὖν ταῦτα: the adv. 
acc. of the neut. pron. (as with other 
similar verbs) occurs also in vii. 48. 
36, τὰ μὲν ἀπορεῖν, and 55. 11, τά τε πρὸ 
αὐτῶν ἠπόρουν. Cf. Xen. Hell. vi. 1. 
4.—15. πρότερον οὐ δεχόμενοι: cf. 
c. 22.8 ἴ,--- 16. ἐν φρονήματι ὄντες : 
“ proudly hoping ” ; a stronger expres- 
sion for ἐλπίσαντες of ὁ. 28. 9.—19. 
αὐτοῖς: i.e. τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις. ---- 20. 
κράτιστα: const. with ἡγούμενοι as 
pred. adj. modifying ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν. 
Cf. i. 85. 11, ταῦτα yap κράτιστα βου- 


τῷ 


2 


THUCYDIDES V. 41. 


41 σάμενοι, ὅπῃ ἂν ξυγχωρῇ, ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν. 


79 


Ai: ἃ , 
και OL TT pe- 1 


> 4 > Lon ’ » A ‘ x 
σβεις ἀφικόμενοι αὐτῶν λόγους ἐποιοῦντο πρὸς τοὺς Aa- 


& 


΄ 5!» > ΄, ne Ν ΄ὕ 
κεδαιμονίους ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἂν σφίσιν αἱ σπονδαὶ γίγνοιντο. 


. 
και 2 


Ν Ν A ε» a 7¢/ / > ‘ ΄ 
τὸ μὲν πρῶτον οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἠξίουν δίκης ἐπιτροπὴν σφίσι 
/ x > 4, ‘ x» 3? 4 \ A 
5 γενέσθαι ἢ ἐς πόλιν τινὰ ἢ ἰδιώτην περὶ τῆς Κυνοσου- 
’ ~ 4Φ δὲ. ’ ΄ ’ 4 ¥ 
plas γῆς, ἧς ἀεὶ πέρι διαφέρονται μεθορίας οὔσης (ἔχει 
δὲ ἐν αὑτῇ Θυρέαν καὶ ᾿Ανθήνην πόλιν, νέμονται δ᾽ 


αὐτὴν Λακεδαιμόνιοι) " 


"»» > 
ἔπειτα δ᾽ οὐκ ἐώντων Aaxkedat- 


, nw A > “ 5 » » ’ ’ 
μονιων μεμνῆσθαι ΡΝ — ἀλλ᾽ εἰ βούλονται σπεν- 
hu δεσθαι ὥσπερ πρότερον, ἑτοῖμοι εἶναι, οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι πρέ- 


σβεις τάδε ὅ ee ᾿ἐπηγάγοντο τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ξυγχω- 


ρῆσαι, ἐν μὲν τῷ παρόντι σπονδὰς ποιήσασθαι ἔ ΕΤἢ πεν- 


λεύσεσθε. ---- 21.. ξυγχωρῇ : impers. 11- 
ceat, it should be feasible; a usage 
found only in Xen. £q. 9. 11, but as- 
sured by the analogy of ἐγχωρεῖ in 
Plat. Phaedo, 116 e; Sophist. 246 ¢; 
Gorg. 520d: “they thought it was, 
under the circumstances, best to 
make peace with the Lacedaemonians 
in whatever “way (1.6. on whatever 
terms) was possible, and to keep 
quiet,” 1.6. give up their pretensions 
to the hegemony. — ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν : 
‘like ἡσυχάζειν in c. 22. 12; 31. 28. 

41. The Argive envoys arrive at 
Sparta, and after making a foolish stip- 
ulation about Cynuria, prepare to con- 
clude a treaty of peace with the Lace- 
daemonians for fifty years. 

2. αὐτῶν: sc. τῶν ᾿Αργείων. --- ὃ. at 
σπονδαί: the treaty of peace which 
was now ardently desired. σφίσιν also 
here and in 4 (where Kr. and v. Herwer- 
den would omit it) points to the lively 
interest of the Argives in the matter. 

5. és πόλιν: with the subst. ém- 
τροπή, Whereas with the verb ἐπιτρέπειν 
the dat.is used. Cf. i. 28.9; iv. 83. 
10; v. 31. 14. — 6. ἧς del πέρι: ἀεί 


is freq. inserted between closely con- 
nected words. See on i. 18. 29.— 7. 
νέμονται δ᾽ αὐτὴν Λακεδαιμόνιοι: the 
Lacedaemonians had established there 
the Aeginetans who had been expelled 
from their home. See iv. 56. 13 f. 
On the situation of the towns, see 
Curtius, Pelopon. 11. p. 376; Bursian, 
Geogr. v. Griech. TI. p. 71.— 9. μεμνή- 
σθαι: mentionem facere: else- 
where used by Thuc. only in the aor. 
μνησθῆναι (i. το. 26; 37. 4; 11. 45.7; 
iii. 90.6; vi.15.6; viii. 47.10); nor is 
the pf. found in other Att. writers, nor 
in Hdt. (hence v. Herwerden writes 
μνησθῆναι). ---10. ὥσπερ πρότερον : 1.6. 
on the same conditions as in the thirty 
years’ peace concluded in 451 B.c. 
See on c. 14. 21. — ἑτοῖμοι εἶναι : ana- 
coluthon after ἐώντων, but no change 
in the text should be made, for οὐκ 
ἐώντων suggests the idea of indir. 
disc., as if we had λεγόντων after ἀλλά, 
9. Cf. viii. 48.§ 6; 104. 13 f£., ἐπειγο- 
μένων δὲ τῶν Πελοποννησίων πρότερόν 
τε ξυμμῖξαι, καὶ... ὑπερσχόντες αὐτοί. 
Kiihn. 593, ν. 1.— 11. τάδε: const. 
with ξυγχωρῆσαι. --- 14. διαμάχεσθαι : 


80 THUCYDIDES V. 41, 42. 
’ 3 “ ΘΝ “A , 4 
τήκοντα, ἐξεῖναι δ᾽ ὁποτεροισοῦν προκαλεσαμένοις, μήτε 
, ¥ ΄ ΄ ΄ ,» 
νόσου οὔσης μήτε πολέμου Λακεδαίμονι καὶ “Apyet, δια- 
15 μάχεσθαι περὶ τῆς γῆς ταύτης, ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερόν ποτε, 
9 >  ε ’ > ’ “ ὃ , de QA > -“ 
ὅτε αὐτοὶ ἑκάτεροι ἠξίωσαν νικᾶν. διώκειν δὲ μὴ ἐξεῖναι 
, “~ Ν. ν Ν -φ hid “ 
περαιτέρω τῶν πρὸς "“Apyos καὶ Λακεδάίμονα ὅρων. τοῖς 3 
δὲ Λακεδαιμονίοις τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἐδόκει μωρία εἶναι 
a ¥ > , ‘ ee ΄ ’, 
ταῦτα, ἔπειτα (ἐπεθύμουν γὰρ τὸ “Apyos πάντως φίλιον 
20 ἔχειν) ξυνεχώρησαν ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἠξίουν καὶ ξυνεγράψαντο. 
> ’ 3 ε ’ \ , > “A ¥ 
ἐκέλευον δ᾽ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, πρὶν τέλος τι αὐτῶν ἔχειν, 
3 ΝΥ A 3 , > Ν a a 
ἐς τὸ Ἄργος πρῶτον ἐπαναχωρήσαντας αὐτοὺς δεῖξαι τῷ 
᾽’ὔ Ν x > , 3 7 > AS ’ Ν 
πλήθει, καὶ ἣν ἀρέσκοντα ἢ, ἥκειν ἐς τὰ Ὑακίνθια τοὺς 
42 ὅρκους ποιησομένους. καὶ οἱ μὲν ἀνεχώρησαν, ἐν δὲ τῷ 1 
χρόνῳ τούτῳ ᾧ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ταῦτα ἔπρασσον οἱ πρέσβεις 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ᾿Ανδρομένης καὶ Φαίδιμος καὶ “Avti- 
(ὃ ἃ £5 Ν , Ν Ν KA ὃ ‘ 
pevidas, ods ἔδει τὸ Πάνακτον καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας τοὺς 


decertare, “fight it out.” ΟἿ 1. 
143. 25.— 15. ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον : 
this battle is described in detail in 
Hdt. i. 82. The conditions of the 
struggle were to be agreed upon now 
as in the old days (about 550 B.c.). 
Fair warning was to be given (zpo- 
kaAeoauévas), the enemy was not to 
be taken at a disadvantage (μήτε 
νόσου μήτε πολέμου xré.), nor was the 
defeated party to be pursued beyond 
the boundary of Cynuria (16, διώκειν 
δὲ μὴ ἐξεῖναι κτὲ.). --- 16. αὐτοὶ ἑκάτεροι 
ἠξίωσαν (claimed) νικᾶν : so in Hat. 
i. 82. 27, αὐτοὶ ἑκάτεροι ἔφασαν νικᾶν. 
Cf. i. τος. 23, καὶ ἐνόμισαν αὐτοὶ ἑκά- 
τεροι οὐκ ἔλασσον ἔχειν. 

19. ἐπεθύμουν γάρ: cf. c. 36. 17, 
where καλῶς is quite as justifiable as 
here πάντως, under all circumstances, 
in any case.— φίλιον : for Mss. φίλον. 
Cf. c. 36. 18.— 20. ξυνεγράψοντο: 
συνθήκην ἔγγραφον δεδώκασι, Schol. 


They drew up the treaty in writing, 
but withheld the ratification for the 
present, and ἐκέλευον δεῖξαι (to present 
it, of. i. 133. 1) τῷ πλήθει. --- 21. τέλος 
ἔχειν : go into effect. The subj. is τι 
αὐτῶν. --- 23. ἀρέσκοντα: adj.; of. i. 
38. 8, εἰ τοῖς πλέοσιν ἀρέσκοντές ἐσμεν. 
- τὰ Ὑακίνθια: about midsummer. 
See on 6. 23. 21. 

42, Meanwhile the Athenians are 
greatly incensed against the Lacedae- 
monians on account of the destruction of 
Panactum and the conclusion of the alli- 
ance between Sparta and the Boeotians. 

1. ἐν δὲ 1d... ἔπρασσον : the events 
recorded in c. 42 and 43 are contem- 
poraneous with those of c. 40 and 41. 
—2. ᾧ: the dat. is to be explained 
rather by the continuation of the 
force of ἐν than by assimilation. Cf 
i. 41. 10, καὶ ἐν καιροῖς τοιούτοις ἐγένετο, 
οἷς μάλιστα ἄνθρωποι ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι. 


— 3. ᾿Ανδρομένης : see ΑΡΡ. ---ὅ, πα- 


THUCYDIDES V. 42. 


5 mapa Βοιωτῶν παραλαβόντας ᾿Αθηναίοις ἀποδοῦναι, τὸ 
μὲν Πάνακτον ὑπὸ τῶν Βοιωτῶν αὐτῶν καθῃρημένον 
a > 4 ΄ ε ἀξ δ > ΄ Ν 
ηὗρον ἐπὶ προφάσει ὡς ἦσάν ποτε ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ Βοι- 
ὠτοῖς ἐκ διαφορᾶς περὶ αὐτοῦ ὅρκοι παλαιοὶ μηδετέρους 
5» »" Ν ’ 5» ‘ > , ‘ > ¥ A 
οἰκεῖν TO χωρίον ἀλλὰ κοινῇ νέμειν, τοὺς δ᾽ ἄνδρας ods 
10 εἶχον αἰχμαλώτους Βοιωτοὶ ᾿Αθηναίων, παραλαβόντες ot 


‘ Ν > ὃ ’ » 4 “a > θ ’ Ν > 
περὶ τὸν Ανὸρομένη ἐκόμισαν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ ἀπ- 


“ ’ ‘ ’ > “ 
ἔδοσαν, τοῦ τε Πανάκτου τὴν καθαίρεσιν ἔλεγον αὐτοῖς, 


΄ Ν a 3 ὃ δά ΧΩ Ν Ὁ Ὁ 
νομίζοντες καὶ τουτὸο ἀποοιθονᾶαι" πολέμιον YAP OUKETL 


» > a > ’ » ’ > 4 
ἐν αὐτῷ ᾿Αθηναίοις οἰκήσειν οὐδένα. 


λεγομένων δὲ τού- 


‘15 των οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι δεινὰ ἐποίουν, νομίζοντες ἀδικεῖσθαι 


ε ἂν ᾽΄ὕ rn ’ “a ΄ a 
ὑπο Λακεδαιμονίων τοῦ τε Πανάκτου τῇ καθαιρέσει, ὃ 


ἔδει ὀρθὸν παραδοῦναι, καὶ πυνθανόμενοι ὅτι καὶ Βοι- 


is ἰδίᾳ ξυμμαχίαν πεποίηνται, φάσκοντες πρότερον 
ὠτοῖς ἰδίᾳ ξυμμαχίαν Ἥνται, ς πρότερ 

~ Ν ’ 
κοινῇ τοὺς μὴ δεχομένους τὰς σπονδὰς προσαναγκάσειν. 
20 τά τε ἄλλα ἐσκόπουν ὅσα ἐξελελοίπεσαν τῆς ξυνθήκης καὶ 


ραλαβόντας : see on 6. 39. 14.—6. 
τῶν Βοιωτῶν: the genuineness of 
these words is wrongly doubted by v. 
Herwerden, Stud. Thuc. p.74. But the 
suspicion expressed in c. 40. 7, πεπεῖ- 
σθαι ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων, is meant to be 
met by saying that “the Boeotians 
themselves,” etc. — καθῃρημένον : see 
on c. 39. 18. ἐπὶ προφάσει is to be 
const. with καθῃρημένον. “They had 
destroyed the fort, giving as their 
reason that,” etc.—9. κοινῇ νέμειν : 
κοινὴν νομὴν ἔχειν ἐν αὐτῷ, Schol. Only 
the use of the land, not its permanent 
occupation, was to be permitted. — 
11. ἐκόμισαν : cf. c. 35. 26. — 13. vopt- 
ἵοντες Kal τοῦτο ἀποδιδόναι: sc. εἶναι. 
“They thought that this, too, was re- 
storing it,” 1.6. that in this way also 
they were fulfilling the conditions of 
thetreaty. (Οὔ ο. 18. 51 ἔ,, ἀποδόντων... 
Πάνακτον. (Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 10, 


proposes to insert εἶναι after ἀποδιδόναι; 
Naber, ibid. p. 319, would read οὕτως 
for τοῦτο. 

14. λεγομένων τούτων: (pres. par- 
tic.) “‘ the moment this was said,” “as 
soon as they heard this.”— 15. δεινὰ 
ἐποίουν : only here in Thuc., who uses 
the mid. δεινὸν ποιεῖσθαι τι in i. 102. 
17 and vi. 60. 21. The two expressions 
arise from different points of view. 
The latter means, strictly speaking, 
“to regard something as terrible or 
intolerable”; the former, “to do ter- 
rible things,” “to act so as to inspire 
terror.” — 17. ὀρθὸν παραδοῦναι : 
though this was not expressly stipu- 
lated, it was naturally their duty, 
ἔδει. --- καὶ πυνθανόμενοι: continues 
τοῦ τε Πανάκτου τῇ καθαιρέσει with a 
different const.—18. ἰδίᾳ: ἄνευ τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων, Schol. — φάσκοντες πρότε- 
pov: cf. ο, 35. 10 f.— 20, τά τε ἄλλα: 


81 


THUCYDIDES V. 42, 43. 


ἐνόμιζον ἐξηπατῆσθαι, ὥστε χαλεπῶς πρὸς τοὺς πρέσβεις 


ἀποκρινάμενοι ἀπέπεμψαν. 


Κατὰ τοιαύτην δὴ διαφορὰν ὄντων τῶν Λακεδαι- 1 


μονίων πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους οἱ ἐν ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις αὖ 


, A . N Ps foe δ 2 
βουλόμενοι λῦσαι τὰς σπονδὰς εὐθὺς ἐνέκειντο. 


ἄλλοι τε καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ὁ Κλεινίου, ἀνὴρ ἡλικίᾳ μὲν ἔτι 


,ὕ “Ὁ A ε 5 ¥ , > , A Ψ 
τότε ὧν νέος ὡς ἐν ἄλλῃ πόλει, ἀξιώματι δὲ προγόνων 


’ - 9 7 Ν ‘\ ὟΝ» 5 Ν Ν 
τιμώμενος - ᾧ ἐδόκει μὲν καὶ ἄμεινον εἶναι πρὸς τοὺς 
3 ’ A Ὁ 3 4, > Ν Ν lo 

Αργείους μᾶλλον χωρεῖν, οὐ μέντοι ἀλλὰ Kal φρονήματι 


lal > “A ν 
φιλονικῶν ἠναντιοῦτο, ὅτι 


τε connects with what precedes, and 
is not the correlative of the following 
«al, The reference is to the com- 
plaints of c. 35. ὃ 2 and 3.— ἐσκό- 
πουν: they took into consideration, A 
clearer expression would be ἀνεσκό- 
πουν, as in i. 132. 8; vii. 42. 24. — τῆς 
ξυνϑήκης : part. gen. with ὅσα, which 
belongs not only with ἐξελελοίπεσαν, 
but also with ἐξηπατῆσθαι: and the 
things in which they thought they had 
been deceived. — 21. πρὸς τοὺς mpé- 
σβεις : unusual for τοῖς πρέσβεσιν. Cf. 
i. 144. 6, τούτοις ἀποκρινάμενοι. 

48. This increases the influence of 
the war party at Athens, and Alcibiades 
in particular exerts himself to attract 
Argos and her allies to the Athenian al- 
liance. 

2. av: with reference to the party 
in Sparta which was working for the 
same end (cf. c. 36. ὃ 1): likewise. αὖ 
belongs with ἐνέκειντο. Cf. c. 14. 12; 
ii. 45. 1.—3. ἐνέκειντο : abs. exerted 
themselves eagerly. See on iv. 22. 5, 
where (as also in viii. 85. 18) it is 
used in much the same sense. Else- 
where it refers to hostile attacks, 

4. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης: this is the first 
mention of him by Thuc. He was 


Λακεδαιμόνιοι διὰ Νικίου 


born about 450 B.c., since he is said 
to have been in his fifth year when 
his father was killed in the battle of 
Coronea in 446 8.c. He must there- 
fore have been at this time about 
thirty years of age. See Grote, VI. 


c. 55, p. 301.—5. ὡς ἐν ἄλλῃ πόλει :" 


ut in alia civitate; according to 
the view held in other cities, implying 
that at Athens younger men were in- 
fluential in politics than elsewhere. 
ὡς as in iii. 113. 25, ὡς πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος 
τῆς πόλεως; iv. 84.9; vi. 20. 8, and 
like ut in Lat., as in magno ut 
populo, Hor. Sat. i. 6. 79. --ο προγό- 
νων: the founder of his family was 
said to be Eurysaces, the son of Ajax. 
His father Clinias fought in his own 
trireme in the battle of Artemisium in 
480 B.c. His mother Deinomache was 
the daughter of the Alemaeonid Me- 
gacles.—6. ἐδόκει μέν: “it was to be 
sure his sincere opinion, but his chief 
motive (od μέντοι ἀλλά with increasing 
emphasis, see App.; also note on i. 
3-17) was ambition.” —7. φρονήματι: 
pride, as in ii. 43. 28, ἀλγεινοτέρα 
γὰρ ἀνδρί γε φρόνημα ἔχοντι ty... κάκω- 
σις Hb... θάνατος. --- 8. φιλονικών : 
(not φιλονεικῶν, see Stahl, Qu. Gr. p. 


ἦσαν δὲ 2 


»Ἐχ ὦ. 


a ae 


THUCYDIDES V. 43, 44. 


‘A , ¥ Ν ὃ ’ ε Ν ’, \ 
Kat Λάχητος ἔπραξαν τὰς σπονδάς, ἑαυτὸν κατά τε THY 
’ ε ’ ἈΝ Ν Ἁ Ν 4 
10 νεοτήητα ὑπεριδόντες καὶ κατὰ τὴν παλαιὰν προξενίαν 
ποτὲ οὖσαν οὐ τιμήσαντες, ἣν τοῦ πάππου ἀπειπόντος 
αὐτὸς τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου αὐτῶν αἰχμαλώτους θεραπεύων 
διενοεῖτο ἀνανεώσασθαι. 
lal ’ an 5 “~ 5 4 4, 
σοῦσθαι τό τε πρῶτον ἀντεῖπεν, ov βεβαίους φάσκων 
16 εἶναι Λακεδαιμονίους, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ᾿Αργείους σφίσι σπεισά- 
> ‘ > ee ee , , ¥ 
μενοι ἐξέλωσι καὶ αὖθις ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίους μόνους ἴωσι, 
, 9 / > , Ν / 3 Ν ε 
τούτου ἕνεκα σπένδεσθαι αὐτούς, καὶ τότε, ἐπειδὴ ἡ δια- 
Ν 5 / / 39% > ¥ 297 4 
φορὰ ἐγεγένητο, πέμπει εὐθὺς ἐς “Apyos ἰδίᾳ, κελεύων 
ὡς τάχιστα ἐπὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν προκαλουμένους ἥκειν με- 
‘ 4 a ’ ε lal » Ἀ φῇ ' 
20 τὰ Μαντινέων καὶ ᾿Ηλείων, ὡς καιροῦ ὄντος καὶ αὐτὸς 
44 ξυμπράξων τὰ μάλιστα. οἱ δὲ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἀκούσαντες 
ed > ’ Ἁ 5 Ν » > > > 
τῆς τε ἀγγελίας καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἔγνωσαν ov pet ᾿Αθη- 
͵ὕ -“ A Cal an ͵ὕ 5 > 
ναίων πραχθεῖσαν τὴν τῶν Βοιωτῶν ξυμμαχίαν, ἀλλ 


3 ’ > 
πανταχόθεν τε νομίζων ἐλασ- : 


13) is used of jealous striving for ad- 
yancement, as in iv. 64.5.—9. Aa- 
xnros: Laches appears also in c. 19 
and c. 24, with Nicias, among the 
seventeen who took the oaths at the 
conclusion of the two treaties. — éav- 
τόν : see App. — 10. τὴν παλαιὰν προ- 
ξενίαν ποτὲ οὖσαν: cf. vi. 89. ὃ 2, τῶν 
δ᾽ ἐμῶν προγόνων τὴν προξενίαν ὑμῶν 
κατά τι ἔγκλημα ἀπειπόντων αὐτὸς ἐγὼ 
πάλιν ἀναλαμβάνων ἐθεράπευον ὑμᾶς 
ἄλλα τε καὶ περὶ τὴν ἐκ Πύλου ξυμφοράν, 
and Plut. Ale. 14.—11. οὐ τιμήσαν- 
τες: they did not treat him with the 
respect he had anticipated. — τοῦ πάπ- 
που: i.€. his paternal grandfather, 
Alcibiades the elder.—12. θεραπεύ- 
wv: also in vi. 89.5. See on 10. 

13. πανταχόθεν: in general. Const. 
with ἀντεῖπεν. Cf. i. 17. 7, οὕτω 
πανταχόθεν ἡ Ἑλλὰς κατείχετο μήτε 
. + « κατεργάζεσθαι. ---14. τό τε πρῶ- 
τον: opp. to καὶ τότε, 17. --- οὐ βε- 
βαίους : untrustworthy. Cf. ii. 102. 8, 


&vdpas οὐ δοκοῦντας βεβαίους“ εἶναι ἐξήλα- 
σαν, and ποίο. ---15, σφίσι : τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίοις, Schol. — 16. ἐξέλωσι : overthrow, 
conquer utterly. See on iii. 113. 27. 
In this sense used only in aor. — αὖθις : 
as in c. 36.11; 76.9, thereupon, after- 
wards.—19. ἥκειν : he told them to 
“come (in the persons of ambassa- 
dors) to Athens as quickly as possi- 
ble in order to invite (προκαλουμένους, 
fut.) the Athenians to form an alli- 
ance.” —20. ὡς: with the gen. abs. 
and also with the nom. partic. ξυμπρά- 
ἕων, so that the two are very closely 
connected. Cf. iv. 5. 2 f. 

44, The Argives, Eleans, and Man- 
tineans immediately send envoys to 
Athens. Envoys from Sparta also ar- 
rive. 

2. τῆς τε ἀγγελίας : the connective 
particle belongs in strictness with 
ἀκούσαντες, but is joined instead with 
the obj., because ἀγγελίας really con- 
tains the idea opp. to ἔγνωσαν: “on 


83 


“2 


84 


THUCYDIDES V. 44. 


ἐς διαφορὰν μεγάλην καθεστῶτας αὐτοὺς πρὸς τοὺς 
5 Λακεδαιμονίους, τῶν μὲν ἐν Λακεδαίμονι πρέσβεων, 


a / \ A A » 3 ’ 3 
ot σφίσι περὶ τῶν σπονδῶν ἔτυχον ἀπόντες, ἠμέλουν, 


πρὸς δὲ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην εἶχον, 


Ν 
νομίζοντες πόλιν τε σφίσι φιλίαν ἀπὸ παλαιοῦ καὶ 


δημοκρατουμένην ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ καὶ δύναμιν με- 


10 γάλην ἔχουσαν τὴν κατὰ θάλασσαν ξυμπολεμήσειν σφί- 


15 


_ Alcibiades. 


x A 3 aN 
ow, ἣν καθιστῶνται ἐς πόλεμον. 


> Ν 
ἔπεμπον οὖν εὐθὺς 


πρέσβεις ὡς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους περὶ τῆς ξυμμαχίας" 


ξυνεπρεσβεύοντο δὲ καὶ οἱ 


Ἠλεῖοι καὶ Μαντινῆς. 


ἀφ- 


ίκοντο δὲ καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων πρέσβεις κατὰ τάχος δο- 


κοῦντες ἐπιτήδειοι εἶναι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, Φιλοχαρίδας καὶ 


Λέων καὶ Ἔνδιος, δείσαντες 


the one hand the message of Alcibiades 
reached them; on the other hand they 
had obtained information from other 
sources” that their suspicion in re- 
gard to Athens (c. 40. ὃ 2) had been 
unfounded, od μετ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων (i.e. 
ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων, Atheniensibus in- 
Vitis) πραχθεῖσαν τὴν τῶν Βοιωτῶν 
ξυμμαχίαν. ----θΘ. οὗ σφίσι περὶ τῶν 
σπονδῶν ἔτυχον ἀπόντες: i.e. those 
who were carrying on the negotiations 
of c.41. But the Argives had as yet 
received no news of the result of 
these negotiations or of the departure 
of their envoys (c. 42. 1), nor did 
they wait for such news (ἠμέλουν) be- 
fore acting upon the suggestion of 
Consequently the recom- 
mendations of the Lacedaemonians 
(see c. 41. 21 ff.) were never carried 
out.— σφίσι: a free use of the dat. 
(ethical dat.), as in ὁ. 3.21, αὐτοῖς. G. 
184, 3, ν. 6; H.770.—7. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς 
. +. τὴν γνώμην εἶχον: see on iii. 25. 
10. Used with a common noun inc. 
13.8; 14.4.—8. νομίζοντες xré.: re- 


μὴ τήν τε ξυμμαχίαν dpyt- 


Jlecting that it was a city which had been 
Jriendly to them of old, and that since 
it was, like themselves, governed by a 
democracy, it would aid them with its 
great naval power if they were involved 
in war. — ἀπὸ παλαιοῦ : an alliance 
had been formed between Athens and 
Argos in 460 B.c. Of. i. 102. 19 ἢ. -- 
9. δημοκρατουμένην xré.: the same 
words are used in c. 29. 9, in explain- 
ing the feelings of the Mantineans 
toward the Argives.—10. τὴν κατὰ 
θάλασσαν : see App. 

13. ᾿Ηλεῖοι καὶ Μαντινῆς : the Man- 
tineans (see c. 29. 1) and Eleans (see 
c. 31. 1 ff.) were the first to join the 
Argive league. 

14. δοκοῦντες xré.: attrib. with 
πρέσβεις : “such as were thought to 
be acceptable to the Athenians.” Phi- 
locharidas is one of those who took the 
oaths in concluding the treaties (6. 19 
and 24) ; Endius appears in viii. 6.17 as 
a friend of the family of Alcibiades. — 
16. δείσαντες : refers not merely to the 
envoys, but to the Lacedaemonians 


10 ξυναλλάξειν. 


THUCYDIDES V. 44, 45. 


, Ν Ν 3 ΄ὕ ΄ τς ἊΨ ΄ 
ζόμενοι πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους ποιήσωνται, καὶ ἅμα Πύλον 


> / > \ , Ν Ἁ “ -“ 
ἀπαιτήσοντες ἀντὶ ἸΤανάκτου, καὶ περὶ τῆς Βοιωτῶν ἕυμ- 
μαχίας ἀπολογησόμενοι ὡς οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 


45 ἐποιή καὶ λέ ἐν τῇ βουλῇ περί , ὶ 
ἐποιήσαντο. γοντες ἐν τῇ βουλῇ περΐ τε τούτων καὶ 


ε > 7 9 A 7 »“ lal 4 
ὡς αὐτοκράτορες ἥκουσι περὶ πάντων ξυμβῆναι τῶν διαφό- 
pov, τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην ἐφόβουν μή, ἣν καὶ ἐς τὸν δῆμον 

ἥν. τοι 4 > 7, Ν “ ᾿ > “A ε 
ταὐτὰ λέγωσιν, ἐπαγάγωνται τὸ πλῆθος καὶ ἀπωσθῇ ἡ 


> , ΄ ΄ “ \ Ν +, ὅπ ΄ 
5 Ἀργείων ξυμμαχία “ μήηχαναται δὲ προς GAUTOUS τοιόνδε τι 


6 ᾿Αλκιβιάδης - τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους πείθει, πίστιν ad- 


~ 4 * Ν ε ’, > “a 7 > 4 
τοις δούς, nV μὴ ὁμολογήσωσιν εν τῳ δήμῳ αυτοκρατο- 


Ga , 4, A 3 ΄ , x > 
pes Ἴκειν, Πύλον TE αυτοις ἀποδώσειν (πείσειν γαρ αυ- 


τὸς ᾿Αθηναίους, ὥσπερ καὶ νῦν ἀντιλέγει) καὶ τἄλλα 


΄ \ > ‘ , 3 “ 
βουλόμενος δὲ αὐτοὺς Νικίου τε ἀποστῆ- 


A ¥ , 9 > A ΄ \ > 
σαι TAVTA ἐἔπρᾶσσε και οπῶς EV TH δήμῳ διαβαλὼν αυ- 


4A ε 5 Ἁ 5 Ἀ > “ 2 » A YA > 
τοὺς ὡς οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἐν νῳ ἔχουσιν οὐδὲ λέγουσιν οὐ- 


in general, as freq. in such cases. — 
17. καὶ dpa Πύλον κτέ.: this second 
reason for their haste in reaching 
Athens is no longer dependent upon 
δείσαντες, as we should expect after 
τήν Te ξυμμαχίαν. The inexact use of 
the particles does not, however, jus- 
tify a change in the text.—19. ἐπὶ 
«kako: as in iv. 86. 1, and like ἐπ᾽ aya- 
θῷ in c. 27. 1. --- ἀπολογησόμενοι : al- 
though we read in ec. 39. 11, Λακεδαι- 
μόνιοι εἰδότες ὅτι ἀδικήσουσιν Αθηναίους. 
45. Alcibiades by a trick frustrates 
the endeavours of the Lacedaemonian en- 
voys, and inclines the Athenians to ac- 
cept the advances of the Argives and 
their allies. Further proceedings are, 
however, interrupted by an earthquake. 
2. ξυμβῆναι: aor. “come to a final 
agreement.” — τῶν διαφόρων: points 
of difference, as in i. 56.2; 78. 13.— 
3. és τὸν δῆμον: cf. i. 72. 14; iv. 58. 
9; vi. 41.13 ; 89. 1.— qv καί : see App. 


— 4. ταὐτά : see App. — ἀπωσθῇ : used 
of rejecting the ξυμμαχία, as inc. 22. 4, 
the σπονδαί. 

5. μηχανᾶται δέ : see App. —6. πί- 
otw ... δούς: assuring them with an 
oath. Cf. i. 133. 14; viii. 73. 138. — 7. 
μὴ ὁμολογήσωσιν: μὴ φανερῶς εἴπωσι, 
Schol.—9. καί: after ὥσπερ is pro- 
leptic in the rel. clause, for καί really 
belongs with πείσειν. See on i. 74. 
25. For the inf. (ἀντιλέγειν) in a rel. 
clause in indir. disc., see on i. 91. 23. 
GMT. 92, 2, n. 3; H. 947; Kr. Spr. 
55, 4,9; 53, 2,9; Kiihn. 594, 5. 

11. καὶ ὅπως. .. ποιήσῃ: parallel 
ἴο βουλόμενος αὐτοὺς Νικίου τε ἀποστῆ- 
σαι. But τε, which would naturally 
stand after βουλόμενος, is forced out 
of its place by the connective δέ and 
so comes to stand after Νικίου. --- 12. 
ὡς οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἐν vo ἔχουσιν : corre- 
sponds to οὐ βεβαίους φάσκων εἶναι in 
43. 14 (Plut. says ὑγιές, which Kr. 


85 


86 THUCYDIDES V. 45, 46. 


δέποτε ταὐτά, τοὺς ᾿Αργείους καὶ Ἠλείους καὶ Μαντινέας 
ξυμμάχους ποιήσῃ. καὶ ἐγένετο οὕτως. ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἐς τὸν 4 
A » ν 
15 δῆμον παρελθόντες καὶ ἐπερωτώμεμοι οὐκ ἔφασαν ὧσ- 
> “A “A > , wa ε» θ ἴω, > έ 
περ ἐν τῇ βουλῇ αὐτοκράτορες ἥκειν, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐκέτι 
A A a x 
ἠνείχοντο, ἀλλὰ τοῦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδου πολλῷ μᾶλλον 7 πρό- 
τερον καταβοῶντος τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ἐσήκουόδν τε καὶ 
A Ν 
ἑτοῖμοι ἦσαν εὐθὺς παραγαγόντες τοὺς ᾿Αργείους καὶ 
20 τοὺς μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ξυμμάχους ποιεῖσθαι: σεισμοῦ δὲ γενο- 
΄ Φ᾽ 3 On δον Xx ’ ν 3 re 40 
μένου πρίν τι ἐπικυρωθῆναι, ἡ ἐκκλησία αὕτη ἀνεβλήθη. 
4677 δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ὁ Νικίας, καίπερ τῶν Aa- 1 
κεδαιμονίων αὐτῶν ἠπατημένων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐξηπατη- 
lal “ ν 9 
μένος περὶ τοῦ μὴ αὐτοκράτορας ὁμολογῆσαι ἥκειν, ὅμως 
ἴω Yd » ~ ’, A“ ᾽ 
τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἔφη χρῆναι φίλους μᾶλλον γίγνε- 
Ν > , ‘ Ν 3 ’ 4 A ε 
δ σθαι, καὶ ἐπισχόντας τὰ πρὸς ᾿Αργείους πέμψαι ἔτι ὡς 
> ‘ ‘\ > , 4 lal , > Ν ἊΝ 
αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰδέναι ὅ τι διανοοῦνται, λέγων ἐν μὲν τῷ 


prefers with no sufficient reason): 
“that they were not to be trusted.” — 
14. ποιήσῃ : act., used of the statesman 
who influences the people; in 20 ποι- 
εἶσθαι is mid. of the sovereign people. 
—és τὸν δῆμον : i.e. after the prelimi- 
nary discussion had been held ἐν τῇ 
βουλῇ (1). 

15, παρελθόντες : παριέναι and παρελ- 
θεῖν are the regular expressions for 
coming before a deliberative assem- 
bly. See on i. 67. 16. To this cor- 
responds παραγάγοντες in 19, and ce. 
46. 34. — 18. καταβοῶντος : inveighing 
against, as in i. 67. 4 and 115. 3. — 
20. σεισμοῦ δὲ γενομένου : earthquakes 
were regarded as divine signs, and 
sufficed to put an end to all public 
business, Cf. c. 50. 26; viii. 6. 29; 
Plut. Nic. 10, σεισμός τις διὰ μέσου 
γενόμενος καὶ διαλύσας τὴν ἐκκλησίαν. 
On γίγνεσθαι used of natural phe- 
nomena, see on i. 54. 6. 


46, Next day Nicias persuades the 
Athenians to send ambassadors, of which 
he himself is one, to Sparta. The Spar- 
tans refuse to give up their alliance with 
the Boeotians ; consequently the Atheni- 
ans conclude the alliance with Argos. 

1. ὑστεραίᾳ: Thuc. uses this word 
most freq. to denote the following 
day (though ἡμέρᾳ is never expressed), 
but sometimes, as here, with other 
substs. to denote what happened on 
the following day. See on i. 44. 4.— 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων αὐτῶν ἠπατημένων : 
see App. — 3. περὶ τοῦ py... ὀμολο- 
γῆσαι ἥκειν : in regard to the announce- 
ment that they had not come with full 
powers. Const, with both ἠπατημένων 
and ἐξηπατημένος, ---- 5. ἐπισχόντας : 
in meaning as in c. 32. 24 (delay, 
wait) ; but here, as in c. 63. 13 and ii. 
76. 4, const. with the acc.— τὰ πρὸς 
᾿Αργείους : as in c. 39. 16, τὰ és Βοιω- 
τούς. τὴν ξυμμαχίαν τῶν ᾿Αργείων, 


THUCYDIDES V. 46. 


σφετέρῳ καλῷ, ἐν δὲ τῷ ἐκείνων ἀπρεπεῖ τὸν πόλεμον 


ἀναβάλλεσθαι" σφίσι μὲν γὰρ εὖ ἑστώτων τῶν πραγμά- 


ε ~ 9 A »¥ > 4 Ἁ > 
TOV WS επι πλεῖστον αριστον εἰναι διασώσασθαι THV ευ- 


͵΄ ΠΡ x a ἢ , y 
10 Tpayiayv, EKEWOLS δὲ δυστυχοῦσιν OTL τάχιστα ευρημα 


εἶναι διακινδυνεῦσαι. 


ΕἾ , , ,ὕ - Ν 
ἔπεισέ τε πέμψαι πρέσβεις, ὧν καὶ 


> 8 > , , "» ’, 
αυτος Ἤν, κελεύσοντας Λακεδαιμονίους, ει Tb δίκαιον 


διανοοῦνται, Πάνακτόν τε ὀρθὸν ἀποδιδόναι καὶ ᾿Αμφί- 


‘ ‘ A 4 > ‘a a ‘ > ‘ 
πολιν, Kat τὴν Βοιωτῶν ξυμμαχίαν ἄνειναι, ἣν μὴ ἐς TAS 


15 σπονδὰς ἐσίωσι, καθάπερ εἴρητο ἄνευ ἀλλήλων μηδενὶ 


ξυμβαίνειν. 


To ἀδικεῖν, ἤδη ἂν ᾿Αργείους ξυμμάχους πεποιῆσθαι, ὡς 


Ὁ“ 4 5» > Ἀ 3 “ἢ, 4 A 
παρεινᾶυ Ὕ GAVTOVS AVTOV TOVTOVU EVEKA. 


εἴ τέ τι ἄλλο 


» ΄ ’ > ’ 5 ’ Ἅ Ἁ 
ἐνεκάλουν, πάντα ἐπιστείλαντες ἀπέπεμψαν τοὺς περὶ 


20 τὸν Νικίαν πρέσβεις. 


Schol.— 6. ἐν... καλῴ: ἐν (as in 
the conj. ἐν ᾧ, see on ii. 1. 2) de- 
notes the circumstances, the state of 
things. “He urged them to put off 
the war, under circumstances (i.e. 
since the circumstances were) favour- 
able for them, but humiliating for 
the Lacedaemonians.” The words κα- 
λόν and ἀπρεπές are justified by the 
fact that Athens could very well re- 
main in her present condition, whereas 
Sparta must try to improve hers by 
means of war. ἐν καλῷ as inc. 59. 17; 


60.11. Cf. i. 33. 1.— 9. ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖ- 
στον: as long as possible. See on i. 
82. 20. — διασώσασθαι τὴν εὐπραγίαν : 


as in iii. 39. 26, τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν, and c. 
16. 11, τὴν εὐτυχίαν ; mid., preserve their 
own good fortune. —10. ὅτι τάχιστα: 
const. with διακινδυνεῦσαι. --- εὕρημα: a 
piece of good luck. So in Hat. vii. 155. 
8; Xen. Anab. ii. 3. 18; vii. 3. 13; and 
ἕρμαιον, Plat. Phaedo, 107 ¢; Sympos. 
217 a. 

11. ἔπεισέ τε : expresses the result: 


Ἁ 5 la > “~ ‘ > 
και ἀφικομένων αυτῶν και απαγ- 


“and “he succeeded in persuading 
them.” — 13. ὀρθόν: as in c. 42. 17. 
Const. with Πάνακτον only. — 14. ἀνεῖ- 
vat: give up, as in c. 31. 15, τὴν ἐπι- 
τροπήν; i. 75.13, τὴν ἀρχήν. --- ἢν μὴ 
...€olwor: cf. c. 42. ὃ 2. --- 1δ. καθά- 
περ εἴρητο : on the lack of agreement 
between this passage and c. 23. § 1, 
see App. on c. 39. 12. 

16. ὅτι καὶ σφεῖς... ἄν... πεποι- 
ἦσθαι: instead of ἐπεποίηντο, as we 
should expect. Kr. Spr. 55, 4, κ. 10, 
gives examples of a similar confusion 
of two consts. in Xen. All these cases 
seem to he the result of carelessness 
in the author. — 17. ὡς παρεῖναι av- 
τούς: sc. τοὺς ᾿Αργείους. Here the 
inf. of the indir. disc. is retained in the 
dependent clause. Cf. c. 45.9. GMT. 
92, 2, xn. 3 4; Η. 947. ὡς corresponds 
to the causal cum: “ for this was just 
the purpose for which they had come.” 
—19. πάντα: repeats ef τι ἄλλο. --- 
τοὺς περὶ τὸν Νικίαν πρέσβεις : ἱ.. 
Νικίαν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους πρέσβεις. 80 


87 


2 


> A a 
εἰπεῖν τε ἐκέλευον ὅτι Kal σφεῖς, εἰ ἐβούλον- 3 


88 THUCYDIDES V. 46. 


’ὔ , »” Ν ’ 3 / ν 3 Ν Ν 
γειλάντων τά τε ἀλλα καὶ τέλος εἰπόντων OTL, εἰ μὴ τὴν 
ξυμμαχίαν ἀνήσουσι Βοιωτοῖς μὴ ἐσιοῦσιν ἐς τὰς σπον- 

3 A 
dds, ποιήσονται καὶ αὐτοὶ ᾿Αργείους Kal τοὺς μετ᾽ αὐτῶν 
ξυμμάχους, τὴν μὲν ξυμμαχίαν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι Βοιω- 

΄ς“' » A 

25 τοῖς οὐκ ἔφασαν ἀνήσειν, ἐπικρατούντων τῶν περὶ TOV 
»- , Ν » “ ’ὔ , », lol 
Ξενάρη τὸν ἔφορον ταῦτα γίγνεσθαι, καὶ ὅσοι ἄλλοι τῆς 
αὐτῆς γνώμης ἦσαν, τοὺς δὲ ὅρκους δεομένου Νικίου 

3 ᾽ὔ 5 ~ Ν Ν 4 > a Ψ 3 , 
avevedoavto: ἐφοβεῖτο yap μὴ πάντα ἀτελῆ ἔχων ἀπέλ- 

Ἢ a Ψ hae (ne? 3, A 

On Kat διαβληθῇ, ὅπερ καὶ ἐγένετο, αἴτιος δοκῶν εἶναι 
80 τῶν πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους σπονδῶν. ἀναχωρήσαντός τε 

> ma e¢ ¥ ¢ 3 A > Ν > A ‘4 
αὐτοῦ ὡς ἤκουσαν ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐδὲν ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμο- 
νος πεπραγμένον, εὐθὺς Sv ὀργῆς εἶχον, καὶ νομίζοντες 

> “A » Ν / ε» A ‘\ ε , 
ἀδικεῖσθαι (ἔτυχον yap παρόντες οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ ot ξύμ.- 
/ > Ud > v4 ‘ 
μαχοι), παραγαγόντος ᾿Αλκιβιάδου, ἐποιήσαντο σπονδὰς 


\ ld Ν 3 ‘ 4 
καὶ ξυμμαχίαν πρὸς αὐτοὺς THVOE * 


also in 25 and vi.96.14. 6. 141, ν. 8; 
H. 666 c. 

22. Bow rots μὴ ἐσιοῦσιν : ‘dat. of in- 
terest,’ loosely connectedwith the verb 
(ἀνήσουσι) ; not unlike the gen. abs. in 
meaning. See on iv. 56. 1, and App. 
oniv.10.11. H.77la. ἐσιοῦσιν is the 
cond. partic.,and so μή, ποῦ οὐὄ. Cf.14. 
— 25. ἐπικρατοῦντων : with inf. of re- 
sult, as in vi. 74. 8, ἐπεκράτουν μὴ δέχε- 
σθαι. ---- 26. τὸν ἔφορον: cf. c. 36. 7. 
The art. is repeated with the explana- 
tory designation, as in ii. 67. 14, τὸν 
Σάδοκον τὸν γεγενημένον ᾿Αθηναῖον. ---- 
τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης ἦσαν : “were of the 
same political party.” Cf. i. 113. 10. 
— 28. ἀνενεώσαντο: this was to be 
done annually, ace. to the provision 
of the treaty. Cf. c. 18. 54. Since 
the conclusion of the treaty in the 
spring of 421 B.c. a year had passed. 
See on 6. 40. 1. ---ἐφοβεῖτο γάρ: gives 
a reason for δεομένου Nixiov, By the 


renewal of the oaths Nicias hoped at 
least to prove that the peace which he 
had been so prominent in arranging 
was still effective. —py ...dméAOy καὶ 
διαβληθῇ : “that his mission would be 
absolutely unsuccessful (which would 
be painful enough for him), and he 
would be exposed to the attacks of 
his enemies in addition.” The sense 
would be more exactly expressed by 
μή, ἣν πάντα ἀτελῆ ἔχων ἀπέλθῃ, καὶ 
διαβληθῇ, taking καί in a pregnant 
sense. 

32. 80 ὀργῆς εἶχον: abs. Cf διὰ 
φυλακῆς (ii. 81. 16), ἐν φυλακῇ, (iv. 14. 
26), and ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ (ii. 89. 3) with 
éxew: “were in a state of angry 
excitement.” — 33. παρόντες : refers 
to the presence of the envoys in 
Athens (see c. 44. 11 ff.), παραγαγόντος, 
34, to their introduction into the as- 
sembly (see on 6. 45. 15) where the. 
treaty was concluded. The parenthe- 


THUCYDIDES V. 47. 


89 


“Smovdas ἐποιήσαντο ἑκατὸν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἔτη καὶ 1 
> »“" ἈΝ ~ \ 3 ~ ε Ν »“ δι A 4 
Ἀργεῖοι καὶ Μαντινῆς καὶ ᾿Ηλεῖοι, ὑπὲρ σφῶν αὐτῶν Kat 
τῶν ξυμμάχων ὧν ἄρχουσιν ἑκάτεροι, ἀδόλους καὶ ἀβλα- 
βεῖς καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν. ὅπλα δὲ μὴ ἐξέστω 


5 ἐπιφέρειν ἐπὶ πημονῇ μήτε ᾿Αργείους καὶ ᾿Ηλείους καὶ 


Μαντινέας καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἐπὶ ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ τοὺς 
4 e 3, > Kal ’ > a ἈΝ 
ξυμμάχους ὧν ἄρχουσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι μήτε ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ 
‘ , Μ' Ὃν νι 7 4.4 ’ ‘ 
τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἐπὶ ᾿Αργείους καὶ ᾿Ηλείους καὶ Μαντι- 
/, ‘ ‘ / ͵΄ ἈΝ “ an 
νέας καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους, τέχνῃ μηδὲ μηχανῇ μηδεμιᾷ. 
x , , > > ͵΄ . 9 , \ 
10 κατὰ τάδε ξυμμάχους εἶναι ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ ᾿Αργείους Kai 
ὲ > ΄ ν , ε Ν ¥ Ἁ ΄ ¥ 
Ηλείους καὶ Μαντινέας ἑκατὸν ἔτη " ἢν πολέμιοι ἴωσιν 
ἐς τὴν γῆν τὴν ᾿Αθηναίων, βοηθεῖν ᾿Αργείους καὶ Ἠλεί.- 
ους καὶ Μαντινέας ᾿Αθήναζε, καθ᾽ ὅ τι ἂν ἐπαγγέλλωσιν 
> A ͵΄ ε ΄ ΡΥ , > , ‘ ‘ 
Αθηναῖοι, τρόπῳ ὁποίῳ ἂν δύνωνται ἰσχυροτάτῳ κατὰ τὸ 


15 δυνατόν. ἣν δὲ δῃώσαντες οἴχωνται, πολεμίαν εἶναι 


ταύτην τὴν πόλιν ᾿Αργείοις καὶ Μαντινεῦσι καὶ Ἠλείοις 


, Se / Ν ΄“ ’ ε Ν “ an , 

καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ κακῶς πάσχειν ὑπὸ πασῶν τῶν πό- 

“ 4 

λεων τούτων - καταλύειν δὲ μὴ ἐξεῖναι τὸν πόλεμον πρὸς 
“ A ~ > Ν ε 4 

ταύτην τὴν πόλιν μηδεμιᾷ τῶν πόλεων, ἢν μὴ ἁπάσαις 


20 δοκῇ. βοηθεῖν δὲ καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους ἐς ΓἼΑργος καὶ Μαντί. 


ὮΜ ΗΝ λ ΄ ¥ 5. Ν "ἢ ~ Ν 
νειαν καὶ Ἤλιν, ἣν πολέμιοι ἴωσιν ἐπὶ τὴν γὴν τὴν 


Ἠλείων ἢ τὴν Μαντινέων ἢ 


sis includes therefore only ἔτυχον... 
ξύμμαχοι, Not παραγαγόντος ᾿Αλκιβιάδου, 
as Bekker and others have thought. 

47. Terms of the alliance between 
the Athenians on one side, and the Ar- 
gives, Mantineans, and Eleans on the 
other. 

1. σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο «ré.: see 
App.— 3. ἀδόλους καὶ ἀβλαβεῖς : the 
same formula as in c. 18.11. Seyv- 
eral other expressions of c. 18 and 
23 are repeated here. —4. ὅπλα δέ: 


Ν > / JF ΦΨ “Δ 
τὴν ᾿Αργείων, καθ᾽ 6 τι ἂν 


also occurs in c. 18, 12 preceded by 
the same words as here. It stands 
very properly opp. to the declaration 
of peace, so that δέ should not (with 
Kr.) be omitted. 

9. τέχνῃ μηδὲ μηχανῇ : a slight 
variation from c. 18. 15, but there is 
no change in meaning. 

11. ἢν πολέμιοι ἴωσιν κτέ.: cf. 6. 23. 
2-15 and below 21 and 36, — 13. 
ἐπαγγέλλωσιν : demand, call for; also 
in vi. 56. 5. 


3 


4 


90 


90 


35 


THUCYDIDES V. 47. 


ἐπαγγέλλωσιν ai πόλεις αὗται, τρόπῳ ὁποίῳ ἂν δύνων- 

3 ’ὔ Ν Ν ’ ΕΣ Ν 7 » 

ται ἰσχυροτάτῳ κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν: ἣν δὲ δῃώσαντες οἵ- 

’,ὔ > , ‘ ’ 39 ’, ἈΝ 

25 χωνται, πολεμίαν εἶναι ταύτην τὴν πόλιν ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ 
3 ’ Ν ΄“ \ 3 s« ‘\ A , 

Apyetous καὶ Μαντινεῦσι καὶ ᾿Ηλείδις καὶ κακῶς πάσχειν 

ε Ν ~ , “A , 4 Ν 4 > a“ 

ὑπὸ πασῶν τούτων τῶν πόλεων" καταλύειν δὲ μὴ ἐξεῖ- 


Ν ΄, Ν , Ν , x ᾿ς ΟΝ 
ναι τὸν πόλεμον πρὸς ταύτην τὴν πόλιν, ἣν μὴ ἁπάσαις 


δοκῇ ταῖς πόλεσιν. 


Ψ \ A 398 ¥ ΄ > ὃ 
ὅπλα δὲ μὴ ἐᾶν ἔχοντας διιέναι ἐπὶ 


, ‘ - a a , 7. A A ol 
πολέμῳ διὰ τῆς γῆς τῆς σφετέρας αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν Evp- 
μάχων ὧν ἂν ἄρχωσιν ἕκαστοι μηδὲ κατὰ θάλασσαν, ἣν 


μὴ ψηφισαμένων τῶν πόλεων ἁπασῶν τὴν δίοδον εἶναι, 


᾿Αθηναίων καὶ ᾿Αργείων καὶ Μαντινέων καὶ ᾿Ηλείων. τοῖς 6 
δὲ βοηθοῦσιν ἡ πόλις ἡ πέμπουσα παρεχέτω μέχρι μὲν 
τριάκοντα ἡμερῶν σῖτον, ἐπὴν ἔλθῃ ἐς τὴν πόλιν τὴν 


> , A i. 2 a Ν So: x 
ἐπαγγείλασαν βοηθεῖν, καὶ ἀπιοῦσι κατὰ ταὐτά: ἣν δὲ 
, “ lal a e , 
πλέονα βούλωνται χρόνον τῇ στρατιᾷ χρῆσθαι, ἡ πόλις 
ε ’ ’, ~ ~ A ε ’ \ “ 
ἡ μεταπεμψαμένη διδότω σῖτον, τῷ μὲν ὁπλίτῃ Kal ψιλῷ 


31. μηδὲ κατὰ θάλασσαν: Kr. con- 
sidered these words an interpolation, 
as they disagree with c. 56. 6; it ap- 
pears, however, from the count of the 
letters and spaces in the inscription dis- 
cussed in the App., that they were con- 
tained in the original document (see 
App.). This provision evidently af- 
fects the Athenians only, as the other 
members of the alliance were power- 
less at sea, and seems to prove that 
the sea was regarded as part of the 
domain of Athens, through which she 
binds herself to allow no one διιέναι ἐπὶ 
πολέμῳ. (Pericles, in ii. 62. 10 ff., says: 
δύο μερῶν és χρῆσιν φανερῶν, γῆς καὶ θα- 
λάσσης, τοῦ ἑτέρου ὑμᾶς παντὺς κυριωτά- 
tous ὄντας.) The expression διὰ τῆς 
γῆς is, therefore, not to be taken too 
literally ; and indeed γῆς is omitted 
in c. 56. 5.— qv μή: elliptical, as 
elsewhere εἰ uy. Cf. Dem. xxiv. 46, 


οὐκ ἐῶν λέγειν οὐδὲ χρηματίζειν ἂν μὴ 
τῆς ἀδείας δοθείσης. In Thue. supply 
διίωσι with ἣν μή, in Dem. λέγωσι καὶ 
χρηματίζωσι. GMT. 42, 8, x. 2; Ἡ, 
905 a. 

35. ἐπὴν ἔλθῃ: the sing. may be 
explained by supposing that the city 
herself is supposed to go in the per- 
sons of her soldiers or by supplying a 
sing. from βοηθοῦσιν, such as βοήθεια or © 
ὁ βοηθῶν. St. and v. Herwerden (fol- 
lowing Kirchhoff) read ἔλθωσιν, which 
is obtained by calculating the space 
on this line of the inscription, 
and is certainly easier and simpler. 
These words are closely connected 
with μέχρι τριάκοντα ἡμερῶν, “from 
the day on which,” ete. Cf. viii. 58. 
19 and 24, ἐπὴν af βασιλέως νῆες agl- 
κωνται, and Ar. Av. 1355.—37. Bov- 
λωνται: this, which is the reading of 
the Mss., is a rather awkward con- 


40 τῷ δ᾽ ἱππεῖ δραχμὴν Αἰγιναίαν. 


45 


50 


55 


THUCYDIDES V. 47. 


, \ ΄ a2 \ > , re Re. Cee 
καὶ τοξότῃ τρεῖς ὀβολοὺς Αἰγιναίους τῆς ἡμέρας ἑκάστης, 
ἡ δὲ πόλις ἡ μετα- 
4 Ν ε / > ’ ν > “a > iad ε 
πεμψαμένη τὴν ἡγεμονίαν ἐχέτω, ὅταν ἐν τῇ αὐτῆς ὁ 
΄, > x , ΄ A , na , 
πόλεμος H. ἢν δέ ποι δόξῃ ταῖς πόλεσι κοινῇ oTpared- 
εσθαι, τὸ ἴσον τῆς ἡγεμονίας μετεῖναι πάσαις ταῖς πό- 
λεσιν. 
σφῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων, ᾿Αργεῖοι δὲ καὶ Μαν- 


» ’ Ἀ Ν Ν > ‘4 Ν ε la 
ὀμόσαι δὲ τὰς σπονδὰς ᾿Αθηναίους μὲν ὑπέρ τε 


ial = AR ΄" \ ε ,ὔ 4 Ν , 
τινῆς καὶ ᾿Ηλεῖοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι τούτων κατὰ πόλεις 
ὀμνύντων. ὀμνύντων δὲ τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον ἕκαστοι τὸν 
μέγιστον κατὰ ἱερῶν τελείων. ὁ δὲ ὅρκος ἔστω ὅδε: 
“Ἐμμενῶ τῇ ξυμμαχίᾳ κατὰ τὰ ξυγκείμενα δικαίως καὶ 
3 “ \ iO 4 \ > , , ὑδὲ 
ἀβλαβῶς καὶ ἀδόλως, καὶ οὐ παραβήσομαι τέχνῃ οὐδὲ 

ες Ά WT) a2 > , δὲ "AA ΄ Ν ε β λὴ Ν 
μηχανῇ οὐδεμιᾷ. ὀμνύντων δὲ ᾿Αθήνησι μὲν ἡ βουλὴ καὶ 
ey» ὃ 3 ae 4 δὲ ε ,  *¥ 
ai ἔνδημοι ἀρχαΐ, ἐξορκούντων δὲ οἱ πρυτάνεις - ἐν ΓΑργει 
Ἁ ε ᾿ Ν ε > la Ν ε 5 “ 3 4 
δὲ ἡ βουλὴ καὶ οἱ ὀγδοήκοντα καὶ at ἀρτῦναι, ἐξορκούν- 
των δὲ οἱ ὀγδοήκοντα - ἐν δὲ Μαντινείᾳ οἱ δημιουργοὶ 

4-18 Ἀ Ν εν > BE AZ ΄ δὲ ε θ 
καὶ ἡ βουλὴ καὶ αἱ ἄλλαι ἀρχαί, ἐξορκούντων δὲ οἱ θεω- 
pot καὶ ot πολέμαρχοι: ἐν δὲ Ἤλιδι οἱ δημιουργοὶ καὶ 


structio ad sensum with πόλις. 
Kirchhoff, St., and v. Herwerden read 
βούληται. --- 39. Atywatous: the Aegi- 
netan system of coinage was the one 


᾿ most in vogue throughout Greece, and 


therefore best adapted for use in in- 
ternational transactions. The Aegi- 
netan drachma, also called παχεῖα, was 
heavier than the Attic, containing, as 
Hultsch, Metrol. p. 192 ff., shows from 
the weight of coins which have been 
preserved, 8.3 Attic obols, while the 
Attic drachma contained six. Poll. 
ix. 76 and 86 says wrongly that the 
Aeginetan drachma contained ten 
Attic obols. 

41. τῇ αὐτῆς : Duker for Mss.77 αὐτῇ. 

46. κατὰ πόλεις : cfc. 18. 48. 

47. ὀμνύντων... κατὰ tepov: cf. Ar. 


Ran. 101, ὀμόσαι καθ᾽ ἱερῶν. The ἱερὰ 
τέλεια are probably the hostiae 
maiores, full-grown victims, which 
Hat. i. 183. 8 opposes to τὰ γαληθινά. 
— 52. ai ἔνδημοι ἀρχαί: magistrates 
whose official functions were confined 
to the city, and did not, like those of 
the generals, extend beyond its limits ; 
opp. to ὑπερόριοι apxal. — ἐξορκούν- 
τῶν : used of the magistrates who pre- 
side over the ceremony and adminis- 
ter the oath; also in Hdt. iii. 133. 7; 
iv. 154. 13.—53. αἱ ἀρτῦναι : probably 
as in αἱ ἀρχαί above the office stands for 
the officials ; therefore the reading of 
the Mss. is not to be changed to οἱ ἀρ- 
But little is known of these 
See 


τῦναι. 
and the following magistrates. 
on 6. 37. ὃ, 


91 


9 


THUCYDIDES V. 47, 48. 


ε Ν , ¥ ἈΝ € -€ , > 4 ε 
οι τα τέλη ἔχοντες καὶ οἱ ἑξακόσιοι, ἐξορκούντων δὲ οἱ 


δημιουργοὶ καὶ οἱ θεσμοφύλακες. 


ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τοὺς 


ὅρκους ᾿Αθηναίους μὲν ἰόντας ἐς Ἦλιν καὶ ἐς Μαντίνειαν 

Ts ’ ε ’, Ν᾿ 4 > κα 
00 καὶ ἐς ΓΑργος τριάκοντα ἡμέραις 7pd ᾿Ολυμπίων, ᾿Αργεί- 
ous δὲ καὶ Ἠλείους καὶ Μαντινέας ἰόντας ᾿Αθήναζε δέκα 


ἡμέραις πρὸ Παναθηναίων τῶν μεγάλων. 


τὰς δὲ ξυν.- 


A an lal Ν 
θήκας τὰς περὶ τῶν σπονδῶν καὶ τῶν ὅρκων καὶ τῆς 


ξυμμαχίας ἀναγράψαι ἐν στήλῃ λιθίνῃ ᾿Αθηναίους μὲν ἐν 


65 πόλει, ᾿Αργείους δὲ ἐν ἀγορᾷ ἐν τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος τῷ ἱερῷ, 


M ,ὔὕ δὲ 5 lal A Ἀ ἴω ε wn > nw > nw Ξ' 
Μαντινέας O€ EV του tos TQ LEep@ εν ΤΊ) αγορᾳ κατα- 


θέντων δὲ καὶ ᾿Ολυμπίασι στήλην χαλκῆν κοινῇ ᾿Ολυμπίοις 


aA , 
τοις VUVL. 


an Ψ A 
ἐὰν δέ τι δοκῇ ἄμεινον εἶναι Tats πόλεσι ταύ- 


ταις προσθεῖναι πρὸς τοῖς ξυγκειμένοις, ὅ τι ἂν δόξῃ 


70 ταῖς πόλεσιν ἁπάσαις κοινῇ βουλευομέναις, τοῦτο κύριον 


> 2: 
εἰναι. 


: ν 
Αἱ μὲν σπονδαὶ καὶ ἡ ξυμμαχία οὕτως ἐγένοντο" καὶ 


60. τριάκοντα ἡμέραις : the differ- 
ence between the thirty days here and 
the ten days in 61 arises from the 
fact that the Athenian envoys were 
to take the oaths in three cities, the 
others only in Athens. ἡμέραις is 
‘dat. of degree of difference’ before 
πρὸ Ολυμπίων. ---- ΤΠΤαναθηναίων : in the 
third year of each olympiad. The 
two festivals were therefore two years 
apart. 

64. ἐν πόλει : see on c. 18. 55.— 66. 
καταθέντων δὲ καὶ ᾿Ολυμπίασι: to be 
executed by the Eleans as sovereigns 
and directors of the temple of Zeus 
and the Olympic festival, but in the 
name of all the members of the 
league, κοινῇ. ---- 67. ᾿Ολυμπίοις τοῖς 
νυνί: “at the Olympic games of this 
year.” Of.c. 49. 1. 

68. ἐάν... εἶναι : see App. 


48. The treaty between Athens and 
Sparta (c. 18) is, however, not re- 
nounced. The Corinthians refuse to 
join the Argives in the Athenian alliance, 
but turn their thoughts again toward the 
Lacedaemonians. 

1. ἡ ξυμμαχία: to correspond to c. 
46. 35 (see on c, 27. 2), for ai ξυμμα- 
χίαι of the Mss. ἐγένοντο (not ἐγένετο, 
as in 6. 80. 1 and i. 102. 22, κατέστη) 
has for its subj. ai σπονδαὶ καὶ  Evp- 
μαχία regarded as a compound subst. 
of which the pl. ai σπονδαί is the most 
important part; accordingly the fol- 
lowing ai τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων refers grammatically only to 
σπονδαί. Indeed the ξυμμαχία (c. 23) of 
the Lacedaemonians and Athenians 
was practically if not formally at an 
end, since both parties had entered 
into obligations which conflicted with 


10 


12 


a 


THUCYDIDES V. 48. 


ε A , + ae ,ὕ 3 > , 
ai τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων οὐκ ἀπείρηντο 


‘ ͵ὕ yy > > e > 5 4 
τούτου ἕνεκα οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἐτέρων. 


Κορίνθιοι δὲ ᾿Αργείων 


ὄντες ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἐσῆλθον ἐς αὐτάς, (ἀλλὰ καὶ γενο- 


\ an 
μένης πρὸ τούτου ᾿Ηλείοις καὶ ᾿Αργείοις καὶ Μαντινεῦσι 


ξυμμαχίας, τοῖς αὐτοῖς πολεμεῖν καὶ εἰρήνην ἄγειν, οὐ 
ξυνώμοσαν,) ἀρκεῖν δ᾽ ἔφασαν σφίσι τὴν πρώτην γενο- 


μένην ἐπιμαχίαν, ἀλλήλοις βοηθεῖν, ξυνεπιστρατεύειν δὲ 


μηδενί. 


it.—2. οὐκ ἀπείρηντο : the treaty was 
not renounced, 7.ec. was not regarded 


as void. — ὃ. οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων: not’ 


by either party. Equiv. to ὑπ᾽ οὐδετέ- 
pwr. Of. ii. 67. 34, rods μηδὲ μεθ᾽ 
ἑτέρων. 

3. Κορίνθιοι δὲ ᾿Αργείων ὄντες ξύμ- 
μαχοι xré.: the conduct of the Corin- 
thians is represented as equivocal 
from the beginning: “ although they 
were allies of the Argives (see c. 31. 
25 ff.), they did not join the alliance 
with the Athenians.” To this is 
added the parenthetical sent., ἀλλὰ 
kal... οὐ ξυνώμοσαν (see a similar 
parenthesis in c. 72.3f.). This refers, 
as explanation and confirmation, to 
the events recorded in c. 29-31: 
“for that matter, when the Eleans, 
Mantineans, and Argives had (at their 
instigation) made an alliance (see c. 
29. 1f. and 31. 24) the year before 
(πρὸ τούτου), they had not joined it.” 
(ξυνώμοσαν, aor. in parenthetical clause 
with the force of plpf.; see on ii. 2. 
12. GMT. 19, xn. 4; H. 837.) We 
now learn for the first time that the 
Eleans and Mantineans had bound 
themselves to the Argives τοῖς αὐτοῖς 
πολεμεῖν kal εἰρήνην ἄγειν (either when 
they first became allies of Argos, or 
by some subsequent agreement of 
which no mention is made), whereas 


ε Ν ’ . > , la 
οἱ μὲν Κορίνθιοι οὕτως ἀπέστησαν τῶν Evp- 


the Corinthians, who in c. 31. 25 εὐθὺς 
μετ᾽ ἐκείνους ᾿Αργείων ξύμμαχοι ἐγένοντο, 
had confined themselves, in accord- 
ance with their invitation to the Ar- 
gives (c. 27. 13), to an émmayla, ἄλλή- 
λοις βοηθεῖν, ξυνεπιστρατεύειν δὲ μηδενί, 
i.e. to a defensive alliance. Now they 
declare themselves contented with this 
treaty (ἀρκεῖν σφίσι τὴν πρώτην yevo- 
μένην ἐπιμαχίαν, which is no other than 
that mentioned in c. 31. 25 f.), and 
refuse to join in the new alliance with 
Athens. This Thuc. regards as a 
departure from their previous con- 
nexions (οὕτως ἀπέστησαν τῶν ξυμμά- 
χων) and a return to their old rela- 
tions with the Lacedaemonians, πάλιν 
pointing to a renewal of earlier rela- 
tions (cf. c. 32.5). —4. ἀλλὰ kal... 
ov ξυνώμοσαν : is properly a parenthe- 
sis, for ἀρκεῖν δ᾽ ἔφασαν xré. must ex- 
plain οὐκ ἐσῆλθον és αὐτάς, and the fact 
that they had not joined the Eleans, 
Argives, and Mantineans in their of- 
fensive and defensive alliance is mere- 
ly introduced as an illustration of the 
half-heartedness of the Corinthians, 
but is not of sufficient importance to 
warrant the further explanation dp’ 
κεῖν δ᾽ ἔφασαν xré. (St. and Schiitz 
think ἀρκεῖν δ᾽ ἔφασαν xré. explains 
ξυνώμοσαν, and that there is therefore 
no parenthesis). 


94 


10 


49 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 48, 49. 500]. 90.1; B.c. 420, July. 


μάχων καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους πάλιν τὴν γνώμην 


εἶχον. 
* ᾿Ολύμπια δ᾽ ἐγένετο τοῦ θέρους τούτου, οἷς ᾿Ανδρο- 
σθένης ᾿Αρκὰς παγκράτιον τὸ πρῶτον ἐνίκα - καὶ Λακε- 
΄, nA ε eel oe - τ ἃ ΄ὕ » Ψ΄ A 
δαιμόνιοι τοῦ ἱεροῦ ὑπὸ Ἠλείων εἴρχθησαν ὥστε μὴ 
, +> a / > a Ν ΄, Sis 
θύειν pnd ἀγωνίζεσθαι, οὐκ ἐκτίνοντες τὴν δίκην av- 
lal ἃ > ~ S “~ 4 > A 4 
τοῖς ἣν ἐν TO ᾿Ολυμπιακῷ νόμῳ ᾿Ηλεῖοι κατεδικάσαντο 
| ie! 4 a A 4 Ἂ ν > 
αὐτῶν, φάσκοντες σφᾶς ἐπὶ Φύρκον τε τεῖχος ὅπλα ἐπ- 
ενεγκεῖν ἐς ὁπλίτας ἐν ταῖς 
Ὀλυμπιακαῖς σπονδαῖς ἐσπέμψαι. ἡ δὲ καξαδίκη δισχί- 
λιαι μναῖ ἦσαν, κατὰ τὸν ὁπλίτην ἕκαστον δύο μναῖ, 
“ ε , " ΄ \ , , 
ὥσπερ ὁ νόμος ἔχει. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ πρέσβεις πέμ- 
? ΓΑΕ ᾿ , A , , 
ψαντες ἀντέλεγον μὴ δικαίως σφῶν καταδεδικάσθαι, λέ- 


A 4 ε “ 
καὶ Λέπρεον QUT@V 


Ν > ’ > 4 ‘ ’ 
γοντες μὴ ἐπηγγέλθαι πω ἐς Λακεδαίμονα τὰς σπονδάς, 
9 3 > 4 Ἀ ε ’ 3 “ Ν Ν > 3 
ὅτ᾽ ἐσέπεμψαν τοὺς ὁπλίτας. ᾿Ηλεῖοι δὲ τὴν Tap av- 

A > , » » > , Ν / 
τοῖς ἐκεχειρίαν ἤδη ἔφασαν εἶναι (πρώτοις yap σφίσιν 


3 A > , ‘ ς ΄ A Ν > 
αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγέλλουσι), καὶ ἡσυχαζόντων σφῶν καὶ ov 


10. πρὸς τούς... γνώμην εἶχον: see phylia. Paus., iii. 8, 3, gives some 


on 6. 44. 7 and iii. 25. 10. 
49. The Eleans exclude the Lacedae- 


‘monians from the Olympic games, on the 


ground that they had broken the Olympic 
truce and refused to pay the fine im- 
posed upon them. 

2. παγκράτιον: in later times the 
name of the victor in the stadium is 
usually the one given. In iii. 8. 5 the 
kind of contest is not specified. — τὸ 
πρῶτον : points to subsequent victories 
of the same man.— 4. δίκην: fine or 
punishment imposed by judicial sen- 
tence. Cf. vi. 29.5.— 5. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ: 
see App. — κατεδικάσαντο: mid. be- 
cause they gave sentence in their own 
case. — 6. σφᾶς : see App. — Φύρκον : 
Phyrcus was a fort near Lepreum not 
far from the southern border of Tri- 


details of this attack under King Agis. 
—7. αὑτῶν ὁπλίτας : see App.—éyv 
ταῖς σπονδαῖς : temporal, as in 16 be- 
low; i. 55. 14; ii. 2.19; iii. 52. 20.— 
9. ἦσαν : agrees with the pred. ΟἿ]. 
το. 30, ὅτι μὲν Μυκῆναι μικρὸν ἦν. 

11. καταδεδικάσθαι : mid. with subj. 
αὐτούς understood, not pass. — 12. μὴ 
ἐπηγγέλθαι πω: “that the sacred 
truce had not yet been proclaimed.” 

13. τήν... ἐκεχειρίαν : the truce 
occasioned by the festival. See App. 
on 6. I. 1.— παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς : const. with 
εἶναι (“it had been already in force 
in their country”; εἶναι as preterite), 
stands proleptically with the subst. — 
14. πρώτοις γὰρ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς : refers 
to the Eleans, not (as E. Curtius, 
Hermes 14, p. 151, thinks) to the 


3 


— 


50 4 > \ ε Ν > 7 > "4 
γίγνεται αυτοι ὕπερ EKELV@V EKTLO ELV. 


THUCYDIDES V. 49, 50. 


ὃ 3 ὡς ἐ δαῖς, αὐτοὺς λαθεῖν ἀδική 
προσδεχομένων ὡς ἐν σπονδαις, αὑτοὺς Aalew aduKn- 
ε Ν ’ ε / > Ν 

σαντας. οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὑπελάμβανον οὐ χρεὼν 
> Ν 5 ~ » > 7, > > “a 

εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐπαγγεῖλαι ἔτι ἐς Λακεδαίμονα, εἰ ἀδικεῖν 


᾿Ψ ΟΕ > 4 > > > ε 4 “ 
γε ἤδη ἐνόμιζον αὐτούς, add’ ody ὡς νομίζοντας τοῦτο 


20 δρᾶσαι, καὶ ὅπλα οὐδαμόσε ἔτι αὐτοῖς ἐπενεγκεῖν. ᾿Ηλεῖοι 


‘ a > - , ¥ ε A 5 > a ie 
δὲ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λόγου εἴχοντο, ὡς μὲν οὐκ ἀδικοῦσι μὴ ἂν 
πεισθῆναι, εἰ δὲ βούλονται σφίσι Λέπρεον ἀποδοῦναι, 
τό τε ε ῶν , ib / ~ 59 » ν ἃ ῶ θ m” 
6 αὑτῶν μέρος ἀφιέναι τοῦ ἀργυρίου καὶ ὃ τῷ θεῷ 
ὡς δ᾽ οὐκ ἐσ- 
ἤκουον, αὖθις τάδε ἠξίουν, Λέπρεον μὲν μὴ ἀποδοῦναι, 
> A v4 9 Ud Ν Cee Ν Ν lal Ν 
εἰ μὴ βούλονται, ἀναβάντας δὲ ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν τοῦ Διὸς 
τοῦ ᾿Ολυμπίου, ἐπειδὴ θυμοῦ σθαι τῷ ἱερῷ 

μπίου, ἐπειδὴ προθυμοῦνται χρῆσθαι τῷ ἱερῷ, 

5 ’ 5 ’ lal ε ,ὕ > A > , 9 
ἐπομόσαι ἐναντίον τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἢ μὴν ἀποδώσειν ὕστε- 
ρον τὴν καταδίκην. ὡς δὲ οὐδὲ ταῦτα ἤθελον, Λακεδαι- 
μόνιοι μὲν εἴργοντο τοῦ ἱεροῦ, θυσίας καὶ ἀγώνων, καὶ 


Lacedaemonians. — 16. λαθεῖν: 1.6. 21. μὴ ἂν πεισθῆναι: ‘the Eleans 


before they (the Eleans) knew any- 
thing about it. 

17. ὑπελάμβανον : replied (took 
speech against them) as in ὑπολαβὼν 
εἶπε, ii. 72.1; iii. 113. 11. — οὐ xpéov 
εἶναι κτέ. : they need not have announced 
(GMT. 49, 2, x. 8 a) the truce in Sparta 
if they had been of the opinion that the 
Lacedaemonians had already trans- 
gressed it (by beginning hostilities) ; 
but they had not done it (i.e. proclaimed 
the truce) in this belief at all. For 
τοῦτο δρᾶσαι, see on i. 5. 11; ii. 49. 22; 
iii. 40. 21; iv. 59. 6).—19. οὐχ ds 
vopt{ovres: not as if they thought so, 
but as if they didn’t think so. (Naber, 
Mnem. 14, p. 320, suggests οὐχ οὕτω 
νομίζοντες.) --- 20. καὶ ὅπλα οὐδαμόσε 
ἔτι αὐτοῖς ἐπενεγκεῖν : they (the Lace- 
daemonians) had not continued hostili- 
ties against them after the truce had 
been announced at Sparta. 


were still positive that the Lacedae- 
monians were in the wrong, and said 
that they would never be persuaded of 
the contrary’ (Jowett). — 23. τό τε 
αὑτῶν μέρος : the fine of 2000 minae 
would, if paid, have been divided be- 
tween the state of Elis and the tem- 
ple. — γίγνεται : ὀφείλεται, Schol. 

50. Still the fear of a disturbance at 
the games turns out to be unfounded. 
Fruitless negotiations at Corinth. 

3. ἀναβάντας: a necessary cor- 
rection for ἀναβάντες of most Mss. — 
4. ἐπειδὴ προθυμοῦνται: since they 
eagerly desired. — 5. ἐπομόσαι: see 
App. 

7. θυσίας καὶ ἀγώνων: in appos. 
with rod ἱεροῦ, answering the same 
purpose as ὥστε with the correspond- 
ing infs. in c. 49. 3. These words are 
not necessary, but are not out of 
place here (Kr. and St. bracket them 


95 


5 


90 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 50. 


οἴκοι ἔθυον, ot δὲ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες ἐθεώρουν πλὴν Aempe- 


ατῶν. 


ὅμως δὲ οἱ ᾿Ηλεῖοι δεδιότες μὴ βίᾳ θύσωσι, ξὺν 


ὅπλοις τῶν νεωτέρων φυλακὴν εἶχον - ἦλθον δὲ αὐτοῖς 
Ν» ~ A lal / ε ’ ἈΝ, ἃ 
καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ Μαντινῆς, χίλιοι ἑκατέρων, καὶ ᾿Αθη- 


’ ε ~ ἃ > c ’ ε 4 ‘ ε id 
ναίων ἱππῆς, ov ev Αρπίνῃ ὑπέμενον THY EOpTHY. 


δέος 


δ᾽ ἐγένετο τῇ πανηγύρει μέγα μὴ ξὺν ὅπλοις ἔλθωσιν οἱ 
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἐπειδὴ καὶ Λίχας ὁ ᾽Αρκε- 


σιλάου, Λακεδαιμόνιος, ἐν τῷ ἀγῶνι ὑπὸ τῶν ῥαβδού- 


Α » 9 nw lal ε nA 4 XN 
χων πληγὰς ἔλαβεν, ὅτι νικῶντος τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ ζεύγους καὶ 


5 [4 A id Ν Ν > > 
ἀνακηρυχθέντος Βοιωτων δημοσίου κατὰ τὴν οὐκ ἐξου- 


΄ “A > ‘4 A > Ν 3 A >. δ 
σίαν τῆς ἀγωνίσεως, προελθὼν ἐς τὸν ἀγῶνα ἀνέδησε 


as an interpolation derived from c. 
49.3).— 8. οἴκοι ἔθυον : for ‘ participa- 
tion in the sacrifice at the festival of 
the Olympian Zeus belonged to the 
state religion of the Spartans’ (Cur- 
tius, Hermes 14, p. 131). — ἐθεώρουν : 
“were on the spot and took part in 
the festival.” Cf. c. 18. 4; viii. το. 2. 

9. μὴ βίᾳ θύσωσι : “that they would 
force their way to the sacrifice by 
arms,” aor. — ξὺν ὅπλοις τῶν vewre- 
ρων: an unusual expression: cum 
iuuentute armata, with the young 
men under arms. The simple ξὺν ὅπ- 
λοις or ξὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις (ef. 18; ii. 2. 
11; 90. 28; iv. 14. 13; vi. 105. 10) 
freq. denotes arms in actual use, and 
is practically equiv. to ξὺν ὁπλίταις. 
Cf. Scott, Marmion, i. 20. 


The sight of plundering Border spears 
Might justify suspicious fears. 


Here the ὅπλα are limited to the vedre- 
po because the-rest of the population 
was just then busy with the festival. — 
12. Αρπίνῃ : ΤΟΥ Ἄργει of the Mss. is an 
emendation of Michaelis (Philol. 24, 
p. 166) adopted by Cl. and St. Har- 
pina, one of the eight towns of the 
Pisatid (Strab. viii. 32), was situated 
in the valley of the Alpheus, twenty 


stadia above Olympia (Curtius, Pelo- 
pon. II. p. 50; Bursian, II. p. 287 f.), 
near enough for protection, and far 
enough away to avoid disturbing the 
festival by the sight of arms. 

14. Atxas: the same who appears 
freq. in the course of the war as a 
man of some influence. Cf. c. 76. 11; 
viii. 39. 8, etc. — 15. ῥαβδούχων : prob. 
the subordinates of the agonothetae 
or hellanodicae, whose duty was to 
keep order and correct offenders. 
Hermann, Griech. Alt. ΤΙ. § 50, note 20. 
— 17. Βοιωτῶν δημοσίου : τοῦ δημοσίου 
τῶν Βοιωτῶν, Schol. Apparently Li- 
chas had the community or state 
of the Boeotians proclaimed victor. 
Others take δημοσίου with ζεύγους. ---- 
κατὰ τὴν οὐκ ἐξουσίαν : διὰ τὸ μὴ ἐξεῖ- 
ναι Λακεδαιμονίοις ἀγωνίζεσθαι, Schol. 
Cf. i. 137. 38, τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὗ διάλυ- 
σιν, and c. 35. 6. Lichas had the 
Boeotians proclaimed victor because 
he, as a Lacedaemonian, could not 
take part in the games. He was struck 
by the beadles because he went upon 
the course and crowned his charioteer. 
—18. dywvicews: this word occurs 
only here in Thuc. and prob. nowhere 
else in Att, Greek.— ἐς τὸν ἀγῶνα: 


* 5.6. 420, Oct. 
ἘΞ B.c. 420-419, Winter. 


THUCYDIDES V. 50, sr. 


‘ Φ ΄ a 9 ε “, ,,ᾷκᾳΜΝ“4 νὸν 
τὸν ἡνίοχον, βουλόμενος δηλῶσαι ὅτι ἑαυτοῦ ἦν τὸ ἅρμα" 
20 ὦστε πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον ἐπεφόβηντο πάντες καὶ ἐδόκει τι 


΄ ¥ ἑ ε , , €.-20 ΄, Ν 
νεον ἔσεσθαι. Ol μεντοι Λακεδαιμόνιοι ησυχαάασαν TE και 


ἡ ἑορτὴ αὐτοῖς οὕτω διῆλθεν. 


ἐς δὲ Κόρινθον μετὰ τὰ 


᾿Ολύμπια ᾿Αργεῖοί τε καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἀφίκοντο δεησό- 


μενοι αὐτῶν παρὰ σφᾶς ἐλθεῖν. 


A 
καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων 


25 πρέσβεις ἔτυχον παρόντες " καὶ πολλῶν λόγων γενομένων 


τέλος οὐδὲν ἐπράχθη, ἀλλὰ σεισμοῦ γενομένου διελύθησαν 


9 > > ¥ 
E€KQAOTOL ΕἾ οἰκου. 


καὶ * τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα. 


Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ** Ἡρακλεώταις τοῖς 


> a ΄, ΓΟ Ν 2 A ‘ ΄ 
εν Τραχινι μαχὴ ἐγένετο προς Αἰνιανας Kat Δόλοπας 


ν »-“ ‘\ “~ lal x x 
καὶ Μηλιᾶς καὶ Θεσσαλῶν Twas: προσοικοῦντα yap τὰ 


ἔθνη ταῦτα τῇ πόλει πολέμια ἦν" οὐ γὰρ ἐπ᾽ ἄλλῃ 


‘\ a da “A 4 Ν ’ > ,ὔ 
τινι Yn ω) ΤΊ τουτῶν TO χώριον ἐτειχίσθη. 


‘ > , 
καὶ εὐθύς τε 


4 “Ὁ ’ > ΄»“ 53 ν » 4 
καθισταμένῃ ΤΊ πόλει ἡναντίιουνῖο, ἐς οσὸον ἐδύναντο 


’ Ἀ /, ~ U4 πιὸ ‘ e 4 
φθείροντες, kat τότε TH μάχῃ ἐνίκησαν τοὺς ἫἩρακλεώ- 


τας, καὶ Ξενάρης ὁ Κνίδιος, Λακεδαιμόνιος, ἄρχων αὐ- 


τῶν ἀπέθανε, διεφθάρησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι τῶν Ἥρακλεω- 


upon the course. — ἀνέδησε: ἐστεφά- 
νωσε, Schol.— 20. τι νέον: in the 
sense of the more usual comp. vedre- 
ρόν τι, as in i, 132. 25; vii. 86. 22. — 
22. οὕτω διῆλθεν: i.e. without any 
further disturbance. αὐτοῖς refers not 
to the Lacedaemonians but the Greeks 
(πάντες, 20) present at Olympia. 

26. τέλος: adv. finally.— σεισμοῦ 
γενομένου: cf. c. 45. 20. 

51. The Heracleans of Trachis are 
defeated by the neighbouring tribes. 

1. Ἡρακλεώταις : Heraclea in Tra- 
chis was founded in 426 B.c. See iii. 
92.— 3. Μηλιάς : see App. 

3. προσοικοῦντα : in pred. position, 
gives the reason for πολέμια jv. Be- 
ing neighbours of the Heracleans they 


felt that the town was dangerous to 
them. The same idea is expressed by 
ὧν ἐπὶ τῇ γῇ ἐκτίζετο, iii. 93. 7, where 
the foundation of Heraclea is de- 
scribed.— 5. ἐτειχίσθη : τειχίζειν of 
the fortified settlement, as in iii. 92. 
24,— 6. καθισταμένη : pass. like καθί- 
στασθαι, iii, 92. 14.—7. φθείροντες : 
denotes continued destructive action, 
Cf. ἔφθειρον, iii. 93. 8.— ἐνίκησαν: 
aor., expressing the momentary re- 
sult without regard to further conse- 
quences, See on i. 29. 19.— 8. Κνί- 
Sos: gen. of Kvidis. Of. iv. 107. 11, 


Todiios. Meineke (Hermes 3, p. 363) 
suggests Κνιδίου. The name is un- 
certain. Xenares is doubtless the 


ephor of c. 36. 7. 


97 


98 


10 


52 


10 


THUCYDIDES V. 51, 52. * 5,0. 419, Spring. 


A \ c \ > 4 Ν ὃ ὃ lA ¥ “A 
τῶν. Kal ὁ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, Kal δωδέκατον ἔτος τῷ 
πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα. 

Τοῦ δ᾽ * ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου τὴν 
ε ’ὔ ε ἈΝ Ἀ ’ὔ A > 7 
Ηράκλειαν, ὡς μετὰ THY μάχην κακῶς ἐφθείρετο, Βοι- 

‘\ ’ Ν ε , Ν , 
wTot παρέλαβον, καὶ Ἡγησιππίδαν τὸν Λακεδαιμόνιον 
δείσαντες δὲ παρέλα- 


; Ν ΄ Ν ΄, Ν Ν ΄ " 
Bov τὸ χωρίον μὴ Λακεδαιμονίων τὰ κατὰ Πελοπόννησον 


ε > A Ψ 9 2 
ὡς οὐ καλῶς ἄρχοντα ἐξέπεμψαν. 


θορυβουμένων ᾿Αθηναῖοι λάβωσι Λακεδαιμόνιοι μέντοι 
ὠργίζοντο αὐτοῖς. 

Καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ὁ Κλεινίου, στρα- 
τηγὸς ὧν ᾿Αθηναίων, ᾿Αργείων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων ξυμ- 
πρασσόντων ἐλθὼν ἐς Πελοπόννησον per ὀλίγων ᾿Αθη- 

’ἅ ε lal Ἀ Ὁ“ Ἀ A > ’ 4 
ναίων ὁπλιτῶν καὶ τοξοτῶν, καὶ τῶν αὐτόθεν ξυμμάχων 
Ν 4 Ἂν 4 ‘\ A ye 
παραλαβὼν τά τε ἄλλα ξυγκαθίστη περὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν 
διαπορευόμενος Πελοπόννησον τῇ στρατιᾷ, καὶ Πατρέας 
τε τείχη καθεῖναι ἔπεισεν ἐς θάλασσαν καὶ αὐτὸς ἕτερον 


52. The Boeotians take possession of 
Heraclea to protect it against the Athe- 
nians. Alcibiades, acting in concert 
with the Argives and their allies, tries to 
increase the power of the confederacy in 
Peloponnesus. 

2. ἐφθείρετο: 1.6. by its hostile 
neighbours. Cf. c. 51.7.—3. παρέ- 
AaPov: 1.6. in a friendly way, for pro- 
tection (not κατέλαβον); but the 
Lacedaemonians regarded it differ- 
ently. —4. ὡς οὐ καλῶς ἄρχοντα: 
about the misconduct of the Lacedae- 
monian governors in Heraclea com- 
plaints were made as early as iii. 93. 
15, χαλεπῶς τε καὶ ἔστιν ἃ οὐ καλῶς 
ἐξηγούμενοι (sc. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων οἱ 
ἀφικνούμενοι). ----ὅ. «Λακεδαιμονίων τὰ 
κατὰ Πελοπόννησον θορυβουμένων : 
“since the Lacedaemonians had their 
hands full with Peloponnesian affairs 
just then” (pres.). 


8. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης : on his position and 
conduct at this time, see Miiller-Strii- 
bing, Aristoph. und die hist. Krit. p. 
398 f. —11. τῶν αὐτόθεν (ἀπὸ Πελο- 
ποννήσου, Schol.) ξυμμάχων : part. gen. 
with παραλαβών, as in iv. 80. 7 with 
ἐκπέμψαι. ---- 12. περὶ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν: 
he made the arrangements required 
by the treaty of c. 47.—13. Tlarpéas: 
Patrae, now Patras. On the impor- 
tance of its position at the entrance 
of the Gulf of Corinth, see Curtius, 
Peloponnes. 1. p. 484 ff. Hertzberg, 
Alkibiades, p. 101, shows the impor- 
tance of this expedition. —14. τὰ 
τείχη καθεῖναι... és θάλασσαν: i.e. 
μακρὰ τείχη ἐς θάλασσαν οἰκοδομεῖν acc. 
to a regular principle of Athenian 
policy, to make the town accessible 
from the sea. See on i. 103. 14.— 
ἕτερον (sc. τεῖχος) τειχίσαι: cf. i. 90. 
7; 91.3.—15. τῷ Ῥίῳ τῷ ᾿Αχαϊκῴ : 


THUCYDIDES V. 52, 53. 


15 διενοεῖτο τειχίσαι ἐπὶ τῷ Ῥίῳ τῷ ᾿Αχαϊκῷ. 


Κορῶθιοι δὲ 


καὶ Σικυώνιοι καὶ οἷς ἦν ἐν βλάβῃ τειχισθὲν βοηθήσαν- 


τες διεκώλυσαν. 


Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους ᾿Ἐπιδαυρίοις καὶ ᾿Αργείοις 


’ 5 ’ 4, Ν Ν lal 4 la 
πόλεμος ἐγένετο, προφάσει μὲν περὶ τοῦ θύματος Tod 


᾿Απόλλωνος τοῦ Πυθαέως, ὃ δέον ἀπαγαγεῖν οὐκ ἀπ- 


, ε Ν ’ > ’ ’ Ν n 
ἔπεμπον ὑπὲρ βοταμίων ᾿Ἐπιδαύριοι- κυριώτατοι δὲ τοῦ 


ε ana Ἂ᾿ > a 286 de Ν 4 Lal φυ αὶ Ἀ 
ἰερου NO av Ἀργείου" E€OOKEL OF καὶ AVEV Τὴς ALTLAS TYV 


Ἐπίδαυρον τῷ τε ᾿Αλκιβιάδῃ Kai τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις προσλα- 


β lal “Δ ὃ , a ΄ ᾽’ θ A e , Ἁ 
Εειυν, nv υνωνται, TNS TE Kopw ου EVEKQ NTVK LAS και 


a low point of land on the coast of 
Achaea. On the opposite side of the 
gulf is a similar cape called τὸ Ῥίον 
τὸ Μολυκρινόν. Cf. ii. 84. 29; 86. 6 
and 11.—16. ols ἦν ἐν βλάβῃ τειχι- 
σϑέν : (sc. τὸ Ῥίον) “those to whom the 
fortification of Rhium by the Atheni- 
ans was injurious” (because they 
would then have entire control of the 
entrance to the Gulf of Corinth). 
The const. is like i. 100. 16 f., οἷς 
πολέμιον ἣν τὸ χωρίον κτιζόμενον. ἐν 
βλάβῃ is a periphrasis for the adj. 
Cf. ἐν ἡδονῇ, Hat. iv. 139. 8; vii. 15. 
Hi: 

58. The. Argives acting under the 
advice of Alcibiades make war against 
the Epidaurians. 

2. προφάσει: the dat. (here and in 
vi. 76.5) and the ace. (in c. 80. 17; 
ili, 111. 2; vi. 33.9) are used by Thuc. 
with the same signification. — θύμα- 


τος: arare word, corresponding to the 


Dor. σύματος in ec. 77. 11.—3. τοῦ 
ΠΠυθαέως : from nom. Πυθαεύς, used by 
Paus. ii. 24. 1, who says of the inhabi- 
tants of Hermione, ii. 35. 2, τὸ τοῦ 
Πυθαέως ὄνομα μεμαθήκασι mapa ᾿Αργείων 
(the uncontracted form is retained 
after the analogy of Μηλιέως, iv. 100. 
2). Prob. the temple of Apollo Pythae- 


us is meant, which was the only build- 
ing left standing by the Argives when 
they destroyed Asine, acc. to Paus. 
ii. 36. 5. Perhaps the Epidaurians, 
even though the Argives were κυριώ- 
Tato. τοῦ ἱεροῦ, claimed a share in the 
use of the lands of the temple for pas- 
turage or similar purposes, and the 
expression ὑπὲρ βοταμίων, which does 
not occur elsewhere, may refer to 
this. (St. writes ὑπὲρ βοτανῶν and 
cites Plat. Rep. 401 b, pro pascuis. 
παραποταμίων, which Poppo took from 
inferior Mss., is still more difficult to 
explain.) — δέον: acc. abs., equiv. to 
ἔδει. When they ought to have (but 
did not). —dmwayayetv: pay. Cf. Ar. 
Vesp. 707, τὸν φόρον ἀπάγουσιν ; Xen. 
Ουν. ii. 4. 12. —5. ἐδόκει : “it was their 
opinion,” “they favoured the plan.” 
Cf. iii. 30. 2; iv. 71. 6. — καὶ ἄνευ τῆς 
αἰτίας : “even apart from the above- 
mentioned ground of complaint.” 
— 6.. προσλαβεῖν : 1.6. to force them 
to join the Argive alliance. Cf i. 
35. 14; iii. 13. 31. —7. τῆς te Κορίν- 
Bou ἕνεκα ἡσυχίας kal... βραχυτέραν 
ἔσεσθαι τὴν βοήθειαν : the first reason 
is expressed by ἕνεκα ἡσυχίας: “in 
order to keep Corinth quiet” (which 
was now in a position of doubtful 


99 


100 


THUCYDIDES V. 53, 54. 50]. 90. 2; 8.0. 419, July. 


ἐκ τῆς Αἰγίνης βραχυτέραν ἔσεσθαι τὴν βοήθειαν ἢ 


Σκύλλαιον περιπλεῖν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις. 


παρεσκευάζοντο 


10 οὖν οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ὡς αὐτοὶ ἐς τὴν ᾿Επίδαυρον διὰ τοῦ 


54 Ovparos τὴν ἔσπραξιν ἐσβαλοῦντες. 


ἐξεσράτευσαν δὲ 


καὶ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι κατὰ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους πανδη- 


‘ > A ~ ε A θ U Ν ‘ 4 
pec ἐς Λεῦκτρα τῆς εαὐυτων μεθορίας πρὸς τὸ Λύκαιον, 


ἴΑγιδος τοῦ ᾿Αρχιδάμου βασιλέως ἡγουμένου: ἤδει δὲ 


> Ν 4 4 > A ε ’ 3 - “Ὁ ,’ 
οὐδεὶς οτποι στραάτενουσιν, οὐδὲ αι πόλεις ἐξ ων επεμ- 


φθησαν. 


’ > ’ > ~ 2.2 » 
προύχωῤβει, αυτοι TE ἀπῆλθον ΕἾ οἰκου 


μάχοις περιήγγειλαν μετὰ 


friendship toward Argos; cf. c. 48. 
§ 2); the second by the acc. and fut. 
inf. which is still under the influence 
of ἐδόκει: “and the Athenians (they 
thought) would be able to bring aid 
to Argos more quickly by way of Ae- 
gina (if they could march through the 
Epidaurian territory) than if they 
were obliged to sail around Scyllae- 
um.” — 8. ἢ περιπλεῖν : a loose const. 
caused by attraction of the preceding 
inf. περιπλεῖν stands as the subj. of 
ἔσεσθαι which is to be supplied from 
the preceding line: “than (it would 
be) to sail round,” ete. We should 
naturally expect a cond. clause after 
he Of. iv. 66. 15, καὶ ᾿ νομίζοντες 
ἐλάσσω σφίσι τὸν κίνδυνον ἢ τοὺς ἐκ- 
πεσόντας ὑπὸ σφῶν κατελθεῖν. --- 9. 
Σκύλλαιον : Scyllaeum, a promontory 
between Hermione and Troezene. — 
10. αὐτοί: sponte. They did not 
wish the influence of Alcibiades to be 
observed; and therefore they men- 
tioned only one reason for hostilities, 
that they must collect the arrears of 
sacrifice. — διὰ τοῦ θύματος τὴν ἔσ- 
πραξιν: on the position of the words, 
see on i. 32. 8; iii. 46. 19. 

54. Ademonstration of the Lacedae- 


ὡς δ᾽ αὐτοῖς τὰ διαβατήρια θυομένοις ov 


* καὶ τοῖς ξυμ- 


τὸν μέλλοντα (Καρνεῖος δ᾽ χ 


monians against Argos and for the as- 
sistance of Epidaurus is without result. 

3. Λεῦκτρα: can be only the Arca- 
dian Leuctra, since it is described as 
πρὸς τὸ Λύκαιον (another Leuctra was 
in Laconia, near the mouth of the 
Pamisus). At this time the Lace- 
daemonians counted it among their 
possessions, although it was situated 
in the μεθορία, and they wished to cross 
the border from this point. It after- 
wards belonged to the territory of 
Megalopolis. See Curtius, Pelopon. 
I. p. 293 and p. 336, note 9.—5. 
αἱ πόλεις : αἱ Λακωνικαί, Schol., doubt- 
less correctly. At first only the peri- 
oeci were called out (πανδημεί, 2). 
kal τοῖς ξυμμάχοις περιήγγειλαν, 7, ap- 
plies only to the later campaign. 

6. τὰ διαβατήρια: sc. iepd. Cf c. 
116.3. The sacrifice offered to Zeus 
by the Spartan kings before crossing 
the border; freq. in Xen. Hell. (iii. 4. 
3; iv. 7. 2; v. 3. 14; 4.37 and 47), 
who describes it, de Rep. Lac. 13. 2 ff. 
—T. προυχώρει: cf Xen. Hell. iii. 4. 
8, ἐξῆλθε. Elsewhere in Thuce., 6. 55. 
15 and ο. 116. 8, and Xen. Il.cc., ἐγέ- 
vero. — 8. μετὰ τὸν μέλλοντα : SC. μῆνα. 


The Laconian month Καρνεῖος corre- 


THUCYDIDES V. 54, 55. 


Hv μήν, ἱερομηνία Δωριεῦσι) παρασκευάζεσθαι ὡς στρα- 


10 τευσομένους. 


> “ a> , 7 A ΄“ Ν 
Ἀργεῖοι δ᾽ ἀναχωρησάντων αὐτῶν τοῦ προ 


τοῦ Καρνείου μηνὸς ἐξελθόντες τετράδι φθίνοντος, καὶ 
ΕἾ Ν 
ἄγοντες τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην πάντα τὸν χρόνον, ἐσέβαλον 


5 A > , Ἀ 9 ’ὔὕ 
ἐς τὴν Επιδαυρίαν καὶ ἐδήουν. 


᾿Επιδαύριοι δὲ τοὺς 


ξυμμάχους ἐπεκαλοῦντο - ὧν τινες οἱ μὲν τὸν μῆνα πρου- 
15 φασίσαντο, οἱ δὲ καὶ ἐς μεθορίαν τῆς ᾿Επιδαυρίας ἐλ- 


55 θόντες ἡσύχαζον. καὶ καθ᾽ ὃν χρόνον ἐν τῇ ᾿Επιδαύρῳ 


«> a“ > > 4 “Ὁ > Ν A , 
οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἦσαν, ἐς Μαντίνειαν πρεσβεῖαι ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων 


ξυνῆλθον, ᾿Αθηναίων παρακαλεσάντων. 


καὶ γιγνομένων 


λόγων Εὐφαμιδας ὁ Κορῶθιος οὐκ ἔφη τοὺς λόγους τοῖς 
ἔργοις ὁμολογεῖν - σφεῖς μὲν γὰρ περὶ εἰρήνης ξυγκαθῆ- 


sponds to the Att. Μεταγειτνιών as the 
second month of summer, nearly our 
August. — 9. ἱερομηνία : see App. 
11. τετράδι φθίνοντος : 1.4. on the 
27th of the month.—12. ἄγοντες τὴν 
ἡμέραν ταύτην πάντα τὸν χρόνον: 
with this punctuation (comma after 
πάντα τὸν χρόνον, not before), which 
᾿ is that adopted by Bekker, Grote, VI. 
p- 336, explains: ‘keeping that day 
during the whole time’; i.e. they called 
every day the 27th as long as they 
were in Epidaurian territory, and in 
that way postponed the following 
month as long as they pleased. Mad- 
vig (Advv. Critt. I. p. 324) gives the 
same explanation: Argivi fraude 
minime sane subtili utentes, 
ne mense Carneo, ut adver- 
sarii, quiescere cogerentur, 
per totum tempus unum diem 
se agere finxerunt eodemque 
omnes numero nomineque 
signarunt, τριακάδα [rather τετράδα] 
φθίνοντος Mensis qui Carneum 
praecedebat appellantes. He 
compares with this a similar trick 
told of Alexander by Plut. Alez. 16. 


Grote reminds us that the Argives 
once tried a similar trick against the 
Lacedaemonians. Cf. Xen. Hell. iv. 
7.1. (Schiitz, Ztschr. fiir ἃ. Gymn. 
Wesen 1, 31, p. 258, thinks it means 
“marching this day all the time,” z.e. 
‘they employed the whole day in 
marching.’) 

14. τινες οἱ μέν: Kr. explains this 
by saying that τινες shows that of μέν 

. . of δέ do not include all the allies, 
some of whom may actually have 
come. This seems prob. from c. 55. 
6, τοὺς δ᾽ ᾿Επιδαυρίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμά- 
xovs. (Cl. explains τινες of μέν as 
equiv to of μέν τινες, but suggests that 
of μέν may be a copyist’s addition.) 

55. A conference held at Mantinea. 
The war between Argos and Epidaurus 
is intermitted at the suggestion of the 
Corinthians, but is presently renewed. 

2. ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων : primarily from 
the allied cities (c. 47); but the nar- 
rative shows that envoys from other 
places, or at any rate from Corinth, 
were present. — 3. παρακαλεσάντων: 
used esp. of invitations to allies. Cf. 
i. 67.3; v. 17.17; 27.3.—5. ὅμολο- 


101 


_ 


102 


THUCYDIDES V, ss. 


σθαι, τοὺς δ᾽ ᾿Επιδαυρίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους καὶ τοὺς 
3 ΄ > 9 > , a > A 
Αργείους μεθ᾽ ὅπλων avrurerdyOar+ διαλῦσαι οὖν πρῶτον 
κι od, 1 , > 06 Ν 4 ὃ A 9 
χρῆναι ἐφ᾽ ἑκατέρων ἐλθόντας τὰ στρατόπεδα, Kal οὕτω 


πάλιν λέγειν περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης. 


δ , » 
καὶ πεισθέντες ᾧχοντο 2 


\ Ν 5 4 > td > a > 4 4 
10 καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αργείους ἀπήγαγον ἐκ τῆς ᾿Επιδαυρίας. ὕστερον 
δὲ ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ ξυνελθόντες οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἐδυνήθησαν ξυμβῆ- 
vat, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι πάλιν ἐς τὴν ᾿Επιδαυρίαν ἐσέβαλον 


\4 > la 
και ἐδήουν. 


ἐξεστράτευσαν δὲ καὶ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐς 8 


Καρύας: καὶ ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἐνταῦθα τὰ διαβατήρια αὐτοῖς 


15 ἐγένετο, ἐπανεχώρησαν. 


ὶ , ε Ν ΄ , 2 A 5/19 ὧν 
Savpias ως TO TPLTOV μέρος ἀπῆλθον ΕἾ οἰκου. 


᾿Αργεῖοι δὲ τεμόντες τῆς Ἔπι- 4 


καὶ ᾿Αθη- 


ναίων αὐτοῖς χίλιοι ἐβοήθησαν ὁπλῖται καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης 
,ὔ / Ν ‘\ / 5 
στρατηγός, πυθόμενοι [δὲ] τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἐξεστρα- 


τεῦσθαι, καὶ ὡς οὐδὲν ἔτι αὐτῶν ἔδει, ἀπῆλθον. 


20 θέρος οὕτω διῆλθεν. 


yetv: only here in figurative sense, 
agree, correspond; elsewhere used of 
persons, come to an agreement. — 8. ἐφ᾽ 
ἑκατέρων ἐλθόντας : St. (followed by 
Cl. and vy. Herwerden) for ἀφ᾽ ἐκατέρων 
of Mss. Euphamidas calls upon the 
envoys present to go to the camps of 
the two hostile parties and bring about 
a cessation of hostilities (διαλῦσαι). 
—kal οὕτω: “and when that had 
been accomplished.” See on ὁ. 38. 
5.— 9. πάλιν λέγειν: “they might 
renew their conference.” 

9. πεισθέντες : sc. the envoys. (Cl. 
says: ‘the envoys of both parties, 
who had agreed to this.’ Perhaps 
rather the envoys present at Man- 
tinea, whose influence would certainly 
suffice to effect a truce.) —10. ἀπή- 
yayov: they induced them to depart. 
ΟΠ iii. 36. 3; v. 35. 21.— 11. οὐδ᾽ ὡς 
ἐδυνήθησαν ξυμβῆναι: refers esp. to 
those engaged in the war, i.e. the Ar- 
gives and Epidaurians. 


a 
και TO 


14. Καρύας: Caryae, on the road 
from Sparta to Tegea. In early times 
it was a canton of the Tegeans, later 
a town of the Perioeci. It lay near 
the present Arachova. Curtius, Pelo- 
pon. I. p. 261.—15. ἐγένετο : see on 
Ὁ; δὴν 1 

16. ὡς τὸ τρίτον μέρος: ὡς with 
numerals denotes that they are only 
to be taken approximately, as in iv. 
31. 8, ὡς τριάκοντα. --- 17. ἐβοήθησαν : 
aor., corresponds to our plpf., as in ¢. 
48. 7, ξυνώμοσαν. Opp. to this and 
completing the account, stand the 
words καὶ ὡς ... ἀπῆλθον: “as soon 
as they heard that the Lacedaemoni- 
ans had marched out, they hastened 
to take the field, and now that they 
were no longer needed, they went 
home.” — 18. πυθόμενοι [δὲ] τοὺς 
AaxcSaipoviovs: see App. — 19. ds 
οὐδὲν ἔτι αὐτῶν Se: intimates briefly 
that they had also heard of the de- 
parture of the Lacedaemonians, — 


56 





* B.c, 419, Nov. 


THUCYDIDES V. 56. 


Δ > / 4 ’ Ν > 
θόντες ᾿Αθηναίους φρουρούς τε τριακοσίους Kal ᾿Αγη- 


Ε 
σιππίδαν ἄρχοντα κατὰ θάλασσαν és ᾿Επίδαυρον ἐσέπεμ- 


ψαν. 


᾿Αργεῖοι δ᾽ ἐλθόντες παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίους ἐπεκάλουν 


9 - a a lal 
5 ὅτι, γεγραμμένον ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς διὰ τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἑκά. 


DSA X 7 ὃ , 37 Ν ’ 
στους μη εαν πο εμιοὺυς WEVaL, εασειαν κατα θάλασσαν 


Xx lal A > Ἀ > lal > 4 “ Φι 
TAPaTr ευσαι" και EL μη KQKELVOL ες Πύλον κομίιουσιν ETL 


Λακεδαιμονίους τοὺς Μεσσηνίους καὶ Εἵλωτας, ἀδική- 


σεσθαι αὐτοί. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ᾿Αλκιβιάδου πείσαντος τῇ μὲν 


A , / 9 
10 Λακωνικῇ στήλῃ ὑπέγραψαν ὅτι οὐκ ἐνέμειναν οἵ Λακε- 


ὃ ΄ na ¢ 2 δὲ Ππύλ 9 τοῖν δ 2 
QULLOVLOL τοις opkots, ες ε VAOV εἐκομισαν TOUS EK 


Kpaviov Ἐἴλωτας λήζεσθαι, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα ἡσύχαζον. 


χ 
TOV 


δὲ ~ ed 4 3 Φ UF 
€ χειμῶνα τοῦτον πολεμούντων ᾿Αργείων καὶ Επιδαυ- 


20. οὕτω διῆλθεν: Miiller-Striibing, 
Aristoph. und die hist. Krit. p. 400, 
note, thinks this expression intimates 
that the summer had been uneventful. 
But διελθεῖν is so freq. used by Thuc. 
to denote the passage of time (cf. i. 
82. 12; iv. 115. 1; v- 20. 3; 50. 22), 
that no special signification should be 
attached to it here. 

56. The Lacedaemonians send a 
garrison to Epidaurus. The Athenians 
bring Helots to Pylos to plunder La- 
conia, The Argives make an unsuccess- 
Sul attack upon Epidaurus. 

1. λαθόντες ᾿Αθηναίους : their ships 
were doubtless on guard in the Gulf 
of Argos. These words express the 
opinion referred to in ec. 47. 31, that 
the sea was under the rule of Athens, 
— 2. ᾿Αγησιππίδαν : prob. the same 
whose name is given in Att. form, 
Ἡγησιππίδαν, in c. 52. 3. 

5. γεγραμμένον : acc. abs. of the 
impers. verb like εἰρημένον in c. 30.9; 
39.12. G. 278, 2; H. 973.— διὰ τῆς 
ἑαυτῶν: with intentional omission of 
γῆς of c. 47.30. See on c. 47. 31 and 


Grote VI. c. 56, p. 340. —év ταῖς 
σπονδαῖς: const. with γεγραμμένον. 
σπονδαί, treaty, is here used to mean 
the written document. — ἑκάστους : 
corresponding to ὧν ἂν ἄρχωσιν ἕκαστοι, 
ec. 47. 51. --- 7. κομιοῦσιν: transfer, 
see to the transportation of. Cf. c. 35. 
26. — 8. τοὺς Μεσσηνίους καὶ Ἐϊΐλω- 
τας: cf. ο. 35. 27.— ἀδικήσεσθαι : in 
pass. signification occurs also in vi. 
87. 17. 

10. τῇ .. - Δακωνικῇ στήλῃ: ἢν 
ἔστησαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἔχουσαν Tas Λακωνι- 
κὰς σπονδάς, Schol. On the Acropolis. 
See c. 23. 23.— ὑπέγραψαν : this did 
not officially put.an end to the peace 
with Sparta, but prepared the way 
for war by showing that the Atheni- 
ans no longer considered themselves 
bound by the treaty. —12. ἐκ Kpa- 
νίων: on the island of Cephallenia, 
where they had given them a home. 
See c. 35. § 1.---Οληήζεσθαι: for the 
simple inf. expressing purpose, ¢/- c. 
2. 11, περιπλεῖν; ii. 84. 25, κατέστησαν. 
τρέπεσθαι; vi. 16, 33. GMT. 97; H. 
951. 


103 


* Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος Λακεδαιμόνιοι λα- 1 


2 


104 


THUCYDIDES V. 56, 57. 


gs B.C. 418, Mar, 
** ΟἹ. 90. 8; Β.0. 418, July. 


ρίων μάχη μὲν οὐδεμία ἐγένετο ἐκ παρασκευῆς, ἐνέδραι 


. ‘ ’ » e ε 4 ε / A 
15 δὲ καὶ καταδρομαί, ἐν als ὡς τύχοιεν ἑκατέρων τινὲς 


διεφθείροντο. 


καὶ τελευτῶντος τοῦ χειμῶνος πρὸς ἔαρ 


ἤδη κλίμακας ἔχοντες οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Επίδαυ- 


ε 3 4 ¥ A Ν / ’ c ’ 
pov ὡς ἐρήμου οὔσης διὰ τὸν πόλεμον βίᾳ αἱρήσοντες" 


Ν ΕΣ ΕῚ -“ 
καὶ ἀπρακτοι ἀπῆλθον. 


Ν ε Ν > 4 
Kal ὃ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, 


Ἁ 
* καὶ 


4 ‘ ’ »ν “A ’ > 4 
20 τρίτον Kal δέκατον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα. 


Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους 


** μεσοῦντος Λακε- 


ὃ , ε 5 a ν 3 ὃ 4 , »” 3 
αιμόνιοι, ὡς αὕτοις οἱ τε Ἐπιδαύριοι ξύμμαχοι οντες ἐτα- 


λαιπώρουν καὶ τἄλλα ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ τὰ μὲν ἀφει- 


’ ἊΝ > > A - ’ > Ἀ 
στήκει, τὰ δ᾽ οὐ καλῶς εἶχε, νομίσαντες, εἰ μὴ προκατα- 


4 > 4 a , 4 > ’ > vd 
λήψονται ἐν τάχει, ἐπὶ πλέον χωρήσεσθαι αὐτά, ἐστρά- 


ΕῚ Ν Ἀ ε 4 ψ oe ε lal 
Tevov αὐτοὶ καὶ οἱ Εἵλωτες πανδημεὶ ἐπ᾽ “Apyos: ἡγεῖτο 
δὲ ἾΑγις ὁ ᾿Αρχιδάμου, Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλεύς. ἔξυν- 2 
εστράτευον δ᾽ αὐτοῖς Τεγεᾶται καὶ ὅσοι ἄλλοι ᾿Αρκάδων 


14. ἐκ παρασκενῆς : ἐκ φανερᾶς πα- 
ρατάξεως, Schol. Cf. iv. 94. 4.—15. 
ὡς τύχοιεν, διεφθείροντο: impf. after 
the opt. of the cond, rel. sent. in gen- 
eral supposition. So ii. 4.3, τὰς προσβο- 
Aas ἣ προσπίπτοιεν ἀπεωθοῦντο. GMT. 
62; Η. 914, Β, (2). 

10. πρὸς ἔαρ ἤδη: see on 6. 17. 7; 
1; 30. 20.— 18. ὡς ἐρήμου οὔσης κτέ.: 
in the belief that since the place was 
stripped of its defenders by the war they 
would take it by storm. On the use of 
the gen. abs., see GMT. 110, 1, n. 5; 
H.972d. ὡς belongs with αἱρήσοντες, 
but also affects ἐρήμου οὔσης. 

57. The next summer (418 B.c.) the 
Lacedaemonians and their allies take 
the field with a great armament against 
Argos. 

2. αὐτοῖς : dat. as in c. 3. 21.—3. 
τἄλλα: the other states. τὰ μέν and τὰ 
δέ distribute the preceding τἄλλα 
(part.appos. G,.137,n.2; H. 624d), 


so that οὐ καλῶς εἶχε must be taken as 
referring to their disaffection. On the 
other hand, αὐτά, 5, refers, not to the 
separate states, but to the general 
condition of things, acc. to the usage 
of i, 1.10. See on c. 27.3.—4. προ- 
καταλήψονται: abs. here, as in iii. 2. 
15; 3. 9. and 46. 25: “take measures 
of precaution” (Jowett). On the 
various uses of προκαταλαμβάνειν, see 
oni. 57.15. (Herbst, Philol. 24, p.626, 
defends the reading of inferior Mss. 
καταλήψονται.) --- ὅ. ἐπὶ πλέον χωρή- 
σεσθαι: would go further, as in vii. 50. 
19, ἐπὶ τὸ BéAriov. — ἐστράτευον ἐπὶ 
“Apyos: in a general way, they took the 
Jield against Argos. Since the Boeo- 
tians and Corinthians chose Phlius as 
the place in which their contingents 
were to unite (10, és Φλιοῦντα ξυνελέ- 
yovro), Agis also marched in that 
direction. 


8, ὅσοι ἄλλοι; i.e. the Heraeans 


THUCYDIDES V. 57, 58. 


Λακεδαιμονίοις ξύμμαχοι ἦσαν. 


οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς ἄλλης Πε- 


10 λοπονυνήσου ξύμμαχοι καὶ" οἱ ἔξωθεν ἐς Φλιοῦντα ἕυν- 


4 ‘\ \ 4 ε aA \ nw 
ελέγοντο, Βοιωτοὶ μὲν πεντακισχίλιοι ὁπλῖται Kal τοσοῦ- 


Ἀ ν ε ~ ’ ‘ ν » , 
τοι ψιλοι καὶ ἱππῆς πεντακόσιοι Kal ἅμιπποι ἴσοι, Kopiv- 


θιοι δὲ δισχίλιοι ὁπλῖται, οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ὡς ἕκαστοι, Φλιά- 


\ na ¢ > ΜΠ Ee 5 Ν , 
σιοι δὲ πανστρατιᾳ, OTL εν ΤΊ εκεινων ὴν ΤΟ στράτευμα. 


ὅδ᾽ Αργεῖοι δὲ προαισθόμενοι τό τε πρῶτον τὴν παρασκευὴν 


A ’, Ἀ Ἁ “ 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων, καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἐς τὸν Φλιοῦντα βου- 


λόμενοι τοῖς ἄλλοις προσμῖξαι ἐχώρουν, τότε δὴ ἐξεστρά- 


Ἀ 3 , > ’ > 5 ww x Lal 
τευσαν καὶ αὐτοί: ἐβοήθησαν δ᾽ αὐτοῖς καὶ Μαντινῆς 


5 ἔχοντες τοὺς σφετέρους ξυμμάχους καὶ ᾿Ηλείων τρισχίλιοι 


ε wn 5 ad > ~ om , 
ὁπλῖται "Και προιοντες απαάντωσι TOLS Λακεδαιμονίοις 


ἐν Μεθυδρίῳ τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας. 


\ ΄ ΓΕΔ 
και καταλαμβάνουσιν εκα- 


’ὔ ‘\ ε Ν 5 “Ὁ ε , A 
τεροι λόφον. καὶ οἱ μὲν ᾿Αργεῖοι ws μεμονωμένοις τοῖς 


Λακεδαιμονίοις παρεσκευάζοντο μάχεσθαι, ὁ δὲ *Ayis 


_and Maenalians. Cf. c.67.7.— 10. Φλι- 
otvra: see Bursian, II. p. 35, note 5. 
See App. —12. ἅμιπποι: (cf. Xen. 
Hell. vii. 5. 24, ἁμίππους πεζούς) ‘foot- 
soldiers, who being attached each to 
a horseman (which is to be inferred 
from ἴσοι), accompanied him on foot 
or, as occasion demanded, sprang 
upon his horse’ (Kr.) ; ‘foot-soldiers 
who ran alongside with the horsemen’ 
(Grote). In Thue. and Xen. a Boeo- 
tian custom. Caes., Bell. Gail. i. 48. 
5, ascribes the same custom to the 
Germans of Ariovistus; there we find 
totidem, as here ἴσοι. 

58. The Argives march out to meet 
them. The Lacedaemonians effect a 
union with their allies at Phlius, after 
which they advance in three divisions by 
three roads into the plain of Argos. 

1. ᾿Αργεῖοι δὲ προαισθόμενοι... ἐχώ- 
ρουν, τότε δή κτέ.: ᾿Αργεῖοι προαισθό- 
μενοι Thy τε πρώτην τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων 


παρασκευὴν καὶ αὖθις προσχωροῦντας 
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἐπὶ Φλιοῦντος ὑπὲρ 
τοῦ τοῖς ἰδίοις συμμῖξαι συμμάχοις, Schol, 
Two members of a period are con- 
nected, of which one is expressed by 
a partic., while the other begins with 
ἐπειδή and ends with a finite verb. Cf. 
c. 44.§ 1. See App. —3. προσμῖξαι: 
see App. —4. ἐβοήθησαν δ᾽ αὐτοῖς... 
τρισχίλιοι ὁπλῖται: inserted paren- 
thetically, so that the story begins 
again with καὶ προϊόντες. ἐβοήθησαν 
has therefore the force of the plpf., 
had joined them. See on ο. 48. 3 and 
11, 2. 12. 

7. Μεθυδρίῳ: Methydrium in the 
highlands of Arcadia, at the junction 
of the brooks which form the Ladon, 
Curtius, Pelopon. I. p. 306 ff. Hence 
the name. The Lacedaemonians had 
turned considerably toward the west 
in order to avoid Mantinea. ἐν Me- 
θυδρίῳ as in c. 55. 1, ἐν τῇ ᾿Επιδαύρῳ. 


105 


106 


THUCYDIDES V. 58. 


“ Ν > ’ Ν Ν ἈΝ Ν > 4 
10 τῆς νυκτὸς ἀναστήσας τὸν στρατὸν καὶ λαθὼν ἐπορεύετο 


ἐς Φλιοῦντα παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους ξυμμάχους. 


καὶ οἱ ᾽Αρ- 


“ 9 ¥ 
γεῖοι αἰσθόμενοι ἅμα ἕῳ ἐχώρουν, πρῶτον μὲν ἐς “Ap- 


¥ & δέ Ν ὃ ’ Ν 
γος, ἔπειτα ἣ προσεδέχοντο τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους μετὰ 
“ , ’ὔ Ἀ Ν ’ ε , 
τῶν ξυμμάχων καταβήσεσθαι, τὴν κατὰ Νεμέαν dor. 
15 Ἶγις δὲ ταύτην μὲν ἣν προσεδέχοντο οὐκ ἐτράπετο, παρ- 


αλλείλας δὲ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ᾿Αρκάσι καὶ ᾿Ἐπι- 


δαυρίοις ἄλλην ἐχώρησε χαλεπὴν καὶ κατέβη ἐς τὸ ᾿Αρ- 


γείων πεδίον: καὶ Κορίνθιοι καὶ Πελληνῆς καὶ Φλιά- 


»” δ 5 , a Ν a \ 
σιοι ὄρθιον ετερᾶαν €TOPEVOVTO * τοις δὲ Βοιωτοῖς και 


20 Μεγαρεῦσι καὶ Σικυωνίοις εἴρητο τὴν ἐπὶ Νεμέας ὁδὸν 


΄, Φ ἈΦ" A 3 , 9 > e 2 a 
KataBaivew, ἢ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἐκάθηντο, ὅπως εἰ οἱ Αργεῖοι 


ἐπὶ σφᾶς ἰόντες ἐς τὸ πεδίον βοηθοῖεν, ἐφεπόμενοι τοῖς 


΄ ἴω 
ὑπποις Χχρβρῳντο. 


— 10. ἐπορεύετο : impf. he set out in ἃ 
northerly direction through Orchome- 
nus and Alea.—12. ἐχώρουν: also 
impf.; therefore és “Apyos: “on the 
road to Argos.” From this road they 
then turned more to the north toward 
Nemea, which lies between Argos and 
Phlius, but near Phlius. 

13. ἔπειτα : without δέ. Cf.c. 7.1. 

15. ταύτην οὐκ ἐτράπετο: the acc. 
as in iii. 24. 1, ἐχώρουν τὴν ἐς Θήβας 
φέρουσαν ὅδόν, νομίζοντες ἥκιστα σφὰς 
ταύτην αὐτοὺς ὑποτοπῆσαι τραπέσθαι. 
This is continued by the same case in 
the rel. clause (Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 11, 
rejects ἣν προσεδέχοντο). --- 16. τοῖς 
“Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ᾿Αρκάσι καὶ Ἔϊπι- 
δαυρίοις : i.e. those troops with which 
he had set out (see c. 57. 8), with the 
addition of the Epidaurians. παραγ- 
γείλας intimates that Agis commanded 
this division of the army in person. 
The allies, who had met in the terri- 
tory of Phlius (see c. 57. 10) and had 
been joined by the Pellenaeans of 


καὶ ὁ μὲν οὕτω διατάξας καὶ ἐσβαλὼν ἐς 5 


Achaea (see ii. 9. 6), the Megarians 
and the Sicyonians, pressed forward 
by two different roads into the plain 
of Argos. — 19. ὄρθιον (less usual 
ending of the fem.) ἑτέραν: a road, 
which, like the one called χαλεπή just 
before, was also (that is the meaning 
of ἑτέραν, like ἑτέραν τοσαύτην, Vi. 37. 
13) steep. To the Boeotians, δές., on 
the other hand, since they had cay- 
alry with them (see 6. 57. 12), the 
more level road by Nemea had been 
allotted (εἴρητο, cf. iv. 77.8; v. 10.4; 
vi. 30.4; viii. 11. 15). On the vari- 
ous roads from Phlius into the plain 
of Argos, see Curtius, Pelopon. II. p. 
582, note 56. His explanation of ὄρθιον 
ἑτέραν as the straight road is, however, 
very doubtful. — 21. ἐκάθηντο : see 
App. — 22. ἐπὶ σφᾶς : i.e. against the 
main force under Agis.— ἐφεπόμενοι 
τοῖς ἵπποις xpovro: that they might 
Sollowing them use their horses, i.e. attack 
the Argives in the rear with their cay- 


alry. — 23. διατάξας : cf. iv. 31. 7. 





Ι 


10 Λακεδαιμόνιοι. 


THUCYDIDES V. 59. 


597d πεδίον ἐδήου. Σάμινθόν τε καὶ ἄλλα. 


107 


οἱ δὲ ᾿Αργεῖοι 1 


’ 5 aq < ia . ¥ > iad ’,’ \ 
γνόντες ἐβοήθουν ἡμέρας ἤδη. ἐκ τῆς Νεμέας, καὶ περι- 
τυχόντες τῷ Φλιασίων Kat Κορινθίων στρατοπέδῳ τῶν 


μὲν Φλιασίων ὀλίγους ἀπέκτειναν, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν Κορινθίων 


5 αὐτοὶ οὐ πολλῷ πλείους διεφθάρησαν. 


A 
Kal ot Βοιωτοὶ 2 


ES A \ ε , ay y ¥ 
και οι Meyapys και OL Σικυώνιοι εχώρουν, WOTTEP €tpynTo 


5 Ὁ“ 5 ἈΝ ΄“ ’ ἈΝ A > , 5 4 
αὕτοις, ἐπὶ τῆς Νεμέας καὶ τοὺς Ἀργείους OUKETL κατ- 


έλαβον ἀλλὰ καταβάντες, ὡς ἑώρων τὰ ἑαυτῶν δῃούμενα, 


ἐς μάχην παρετάσσοντο, ἀντιπαρεσκευάζοντο δὲ καὶ οἱ 


ἐν μέσῳ δὲ ἀπειλημμένοι ἦσαν οἱ ᾽Αρ- 


εἴοι: ἐκ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ πεδίου οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι εἶργον 
γ μεν γαρ μ PY. 


τῆς πόλεως καὶ οἱ per αὐτῶν, καθύπερθεν δὲ Κορίνθιοι 


καὶ Φλιάσιοι καὶ Πελληνῆς, τὸ δὲ πρὸς Νεμέας Βοιωτοὶ 


καὶ Σικυώνιοι καὶ Μεγαρῆς. 


24. Σάμινθον: its position is very 


uncertain; ‘it seems to be the name 


of a mountain,’ Curtius, Pelopon. II. 
p. 582. See Bursian, 11. p. 49. 
59. When the Argives are already 


surrounded by the three divisions of the 


enemy, two prominent citizens enter into 
negotiations with Agis. 

2. ἡμέρας ἤδη : equiv. to ἐπεὶ (ἤδη) 
ἡμέρα ἐγένετο (cf. iii. 24. 18), not long 
after the Gua ἕῳ of c. 58. 12. The 
gen. followed by ἤδη, as in i. 30. 20, 
χειμῶνος ἤδη. Cf. c. 17. 7, πρὸς τὸ 
ἔαρ ἤδη. --- 5. αὐτοί: on their side. 

6. ὥσπερ εἴρητο αὐτοῖς: cf. c. 58. 
20.—7. οὐκέτι κατέλαβον: sc. κατὰ 
χώραν ὄντας. Cf. ii. 56. 20, οὐκέτι 
κατέλαβον ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ ὄντας, ἀλλ᾽ 
ἀνακεχωρηκότας. Everywhere else κα- 
ταλαμβάνειν in the sense of find, come 
upon is used with a partic. or an ex- 
pression denoting place. Cf i. 59.2; 
61. 6; ii. 18. 17; 56. 20; 94. 19; iii. 
69.5; 115. 6; iv. 70. 7 (ἀνάλωτον as 


Y ἈΝ 3 A > 
ὑπποὶι δὲ QUTOLS OV παρ- 


pf. partic.) ; 92.3; 129. 2; vi. 53. 1; 
94. 17; vil. 2. ὃ; 33. 24; viii. 55. 3.— 
8. καταβάντες : sc. οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι. Change 
of subj. after ἀλλά, as in i. 26. 17.— 
τὰ ἑαυτῶν Syoupéva: cf. c. 58. 24. 

11. ἐκ τοῦ πεδίου: into this plain 
Agis himself with his Lacedaemonians 
ἐσέβαλε, c. 58. 23. They were drawn 
up between the Argive army and 
Argos, which is about fifteen miles 
south of Nemea. This position the 
Argives thought would be for their 
own advantage (18, ἀπειληφέναι ἐν τῇ 
αὑτῶν te καὶ πρὸς τῇ πόλει), for the 
Lacedaemonians would be harassed 
from the city, to which special refer- 
ence is made in c. 60. 26. The ex- 
pression ἀπειληφέναι (18) is intention- 
ally repeated from 10, not without 
irony. Each party thought it had 
caught the other in a trap.—12. κα- 
θύπερθεν : for they had followed the 
ὄρθιος ὁδός of c. 58. 19.—13. τὸ πρὸς 


Νεμέας: from the direction of Ne- 


108 THUCYDIDES V. 509, 60, 


15 σαν: οὐ γάρ mw οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι μόνοι τῶν ξυμμάχων 
κ᾿ ‘ > A aA 3° , a ee ΄ 
τὸ μὲν οὖν πλῆθος τῶν ᾿Αργείων καὶ τῶν ξυμμά- 4 

3 ν ὃ Ν Ν Ν ιν » > > > A 
χων οὐχ οὕτω δεινὸν τὸ παρὸν ἐνόμιζον; ἀλλ᾽ ἐν καλῷ 


δὶ 
1KOV. 


25 4 ε ’ὔ ¥ Ν Ν : ’ 3 
ἐδόκει ἡ μάχη ἔσεσθαι, καὶ τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἀπει- 
τῶν δὲ ὃ 
20 ᾿Αργείων δύο ἄνδρες, Θράσυλλός τε τῶν πέντε στρατη- 


ληφέναι ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν τε καὶ πρὸς τῇ πόλει. 


γῶν εἷς ὧν καὶ ᾿Αλκίφρων, πρόξενος Λακεδαιμονίων, 
3» A 
ἤδη τῶν στρατοπέδων ὅσον ov ξυνιόντων προσελθόντε 
ἔἤλγιδι διελεγέσθ ὴ ἵν μάχην : ἑτοί ὰρ εἶ 
γιδι διελεγέσθην μὴ ποιεῖν μάχην " ἑτοίμους γὰρ εἶναι 
"A ΄ δί ὃ “ Ν ὃ ta 0 ¥ 6 ΄ ¥ 
ργείους δίκας δοῦναι καὶ δέξασθαι ἴσας καὶ ὁμοίας, εἴ 
25 τι ἐπικαλοῦσιν ᾿Αργείοις Λακεδαιμόνιοι, καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν 
καὶ οἱ μὲν ταῦτα 


re 


2 ’ ¥ Ν 4 
θθεἰρήνην ἄγειν σπονδὰς ποιησαμένους. 
> ’ “A > ’ > > ε Las Ν » ww , 
εἰπόντες [τῶν ᾿Αργείων] ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν καὶ οὐ Tod πλήθους 
, > Ν 4. Ὁ 4, Ν / 
κελεύσαντος εἶπον, καὶ ὁ ἾΑγις δεξάμενος τοὺς λόγους 
ν 4% Ν » Ν “Ὁ ’ > Ν δι , 
αὐτὸς Kal οὐ μετὰ τῶν πλειόνων, οὐδὲ αὐτὸς βουλευσά- 


mea, after they had marched ἐπὶ Ne- 
péas.—15, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι : upon their 
cavalry the Argives had relied; but 
they did not come until c. 61, 2. 

17. οὐχ οὕτω δεινόν : not so very 
dangerous. See on ii. 11, 24 and ο. 
104. 8.—év Kado: under favourable 
circumstances here and in c. 60. 11. 
Similarly καλῶς, c. 36. 18.— 18. τοὺς 
“Λακεδαιμονίους ἀπειληφέναι : acc. and 
inf. with ἐδόκει in spite of the nom. 7 
μάχη, ἐδόκει being equiv. to ἐνόμιζον. 

19. τῶν δὲ ᾿Αργείων δύο ἄνδρες: 
opp. to τὸ μὲν πλῆθος, 16.— 20. τῶν 
πέντε στρατηγῶν : there were in Ar- 
gos five generals, as in Athens ten; 
possibly the number at Argos has 
some such connexion with the. révre 
λόχοι οὗ c. 72. 21, as that at Athens 
has with the ten. tribes. — 21. πρόξε- 
vos: diplomatic representative. This 
title was an honour bestowed upon 
foreigners, who then represented the 
state in their own cities, See on ii. 


29. 4, and Schémann, Griech, Alt. ΤΙ, 
p. 25,— 22. ὅσον οὐ: cf. i. 36. 8, and 
ὅσον οὔπω, iv. 125. 9. — ξυνιόντων : 
confligere, also iv. 94. 11; v. 69. 
2.— προσελθόντε: see App. — 23. 
ποιεῖν μάχην: bring on a battle, or 
“allow it to take place.” See on ii. 
86. 22. — 24. ’Apyelovs: the two men 
evidently claim to be representatives 
of the state. — ἴσας kal ὁμοίας : as in 
c. 27. 12. 

60. <Agis and the two Argives, with- 
out consulting the proper authorities of 
either state, make a truce for four months, 
which causes great displeasure in both 
armies. 

2. εἰπόντες [τῶν ᾿Αργείων]: see 
App. — 4. αὐτός: for himself alone. 
See on iv. 49. ὅ. -- οὐδὲ αὐτὸς βουλευ- 
σάμενος xré.: and without any delibera- 
tion on his own part, further than to 
communicate the matter to one man. ἀλλ᾽ 
#, nisi. Cf. c. 80.6. See on iii. γι. 
4,—5. τῶν ἐν τέλει: probably one 





THUCYDIDES V. 60. 


5 μενος ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ κοινώσας τῶν ἐν τέλει ξυστρα- 


τευομένων, σπένδεται τέσσαρας μῆνας ἐν οἷς ἔδει ἐπι- 


΄ > ‘ ‘ ε / 
τελέσαι αὐτοὺς τὰ ῥηθέντα. 


καὶ ἀπήγαγε τὸν στρατὸν 


εὐθύς, οὐδενὶ φράσας τῶν ἄλλων ξυμμάχων. οἱ δὲ Aa- 


ὃ ’,’ Ἀ ε a 7 A ε ε A Ν 
κε αιμονιοὶι και OU ξύμμαχοι ELTTOVTO μεν ως Ἤγειτο διὰ 


10 τὸν νόμον, ἐν αἰτίᾳ δ᾽ εἶχον κατ᾽ ἀλλήλους πολλῇ τὸν 
*Ayw, νομίζοντες ἐν καλῷ παρατυχὸν σφίσι ξυμβαλεῖν 
καὶ πανταχόθεν αὐτῶν ἀποκεκλῃμένων καὶ ὑπὸ ἱππέων 
καὶ πεζῶν, οὐδὲν δράσαντες ἄξιον τῆς παρασκευῆς ἀπιέναι. 
στρατόπεδον γὰρ δὴ τοῦτο κάλλιστον Ἑλληνικὸν τῶν μέ- 


χρι τοῦδε ξυνῆλθεν. 


ὦφθη δὲ μάλιστα ἕως ἔτι ἦν ἀθρόον 


> / > ΑΒ. / ΄ σὰν; ' ‘ 
εν Νεμέᾳ, εν ῳ Λακεδαιμόνιοί ΤΕ πανστρατιᾳ σαν και 


of the two ephors who accompanied 
the king upon military expeditions, 
as did also, acc. to Arnold, the pole- 
marchs, ὅμοιοι, and two Pythii. See 
Gilbert, Griech. Staatsalt, I. p. 60, 64, 
80. — ξυστρατενομένων : Cl. suggests 
ξυστρατευομένῳ. --- 7. τὰ ῥηθέντα: i.e. 
what they had offered to do in ec. 59. 
23 ff.— 8. τῶν ἄλλων ξυμμάχων : as in 
i. 128. 21, in contradistinction to the 
Lacedaemonians. That he said noth- 
ing to his own countrymen has already 
been stated ; but he was silent toward 
the allies as well. ἄλλων does not 
imply that the Lacedaemonians are 
put upon an equal footing with the 
allies, and should therefore be omitted 
in English. See on i. 128.21. (St. 
and v. Herwerden follow Kr. in re- 
jecting ξυμμάχων.) 

9. elrovro μὲν ὡς ἡγεῖτο διὰ τὸν 
νόμον: “they followed his guidance 
(i.e. obeyed the order to march away, 
ἀπήγαγε τὸν στρατόν) because of their 
discipline, because the rules of mili- 
tary subordination compelled them ; 
but,” ete. — 10. ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον πολλῇ : 
cf. i. 35, 10, ἐν πλείονι αἰτίᾳ ἡμεῖς... 


ὑμᾶς ἕξομεν, and 21 below. — κατ᾽ ἀλλή- 
λους: as in iv. 84. 4. --- 11, παρατυ- 
χόν: cf. i. 76. 14. --- 12. αὐτῶν: i.e, 
τῶν ᾿Αργείων. See c. 59. ὃ 8. 

14. στρατόπεδον κτέ. : on the mode 
of expression and the order of words, 
see on i. 1. 8.— κάλλιστον: is esp. 
explained by the following λογάδες ἀφ᾽ 
ἑκάστων. --- 15. ὥφθη μάλιστα: this 
(the excellence of the army) was 
especially noticeable. —16. ἐν Νεμέᾳ: 
Cl., St., and others take this as re- 
ferring to c. 59.§ 3. But the Argives 
had at that time descended into the 
plain of Argos (ἀλλὰ καταβάντες, c. 
59.8), and there they were surrounded 
by the Lacedaemonians and their al- 
lies (c. 59. 11 ff.). The valley of 
Nemea is completely separated from 
the plain of Argos, the only con- 
nexions being by passes neither broad 
nor low. Itis therefore impossible to 
believe that ἐν Νεμέᾳ refers to any 
part of the plain of Argos. ζητεῖται 
πῶς, τριχῇ διαιρεθέντος τοῦ τῶν Πελο- 
ποννησίων στρατεύματος εἰς Φλιοῦντα, 
καὶ ἑνὸς μόνου μέρους τὴν ἐπὶ Νεμέαν 
ἰόντος, τῶν δὲ ἄλλων ἄλλαις χρησαμένων 


109 


110 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES Υ. 60. 


᾿Αρκάδες καὶ Βοιωτοὶ καὶ Κορίνθιοι καὶ Σικυώνιοι καὶ 
Πελληνῆς καὶ Φλιάσιοι καὶ Μεγαρῆς, καὶ οὗτοι πάντες 
λογάδες ἀφ᾽ ἑκάστων, ἀξιόμαχοι δοκοῦντες εἶναι οὐ τῇ 
> ΄ ΄ , i\Aa Ν LAX ¥ 
Αργείων μόνον ξυμμαχίᾳ, ἀλλὰ Kal ἄλλῃ ἔτι προσγενο- 
μένῃ. τὸ μὲν οὖν στρατόπεδον οὕτως ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχοντες 
Ν «4 > 4 ‘ 4 > > κά 4 
τὸν "Ayw ἀνεχώρουν τε καὶ διελύθησαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἕκα- 
3 A Ν Ἀ 3 ᾿ ν" > “A 7 : 
oto. ᾿Αργεῖοι δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔτι ἐν πολλῷ πλείονι αἰτίᾳ 
εἶχον τοὺς σπεισαμένους ἄνευ τοῦ πλήθους, νομίζοντες 
> A A » / A 4 Ν 
κἀκεῖνοι μὴ ἂν σφίσι ποτὲ κάλλιον παρασχὸν Λακεδαι- 
’ ld / Ν “~ 4 , 
poviovs διαπεφευγέναι: πρός τε yap τῇ σφετέρᾳ πόλει 
A ‘ ia Ν 3 A 4 Ν > Lal 
καὶ μετὰ πολλῶψ καὶ ἀγαθῶν ξυμμάχων τὸν ἀγῶνα ἂν 


γίγνεσθαι. 


ὁδοῖς καὶ οὐδαμοῦ συμμιξάντων, ἔφη ἀθρό- 
ους αὐτοὺς ὦφθαι περὶ Νεμέαν, Schol., 
who is evidently puzzled. Philippi, 
Rhein. Mus. 36, p. 256, says ἐν Νεμέᾳ 
is a gloss. If it really belongs in the 
text, it must refer to something not 
made plain in the preceding narrative, 
prob. something connected with the 
movements of c. 58. — πανστρατιᾷ 
ἦσαν: Jowett takes this with Aaxedar 
μόνιοι Only, but the Phliasians were 
certainly present πανστρατιᾷ (cf. Ο. 57. 
18). The Epidaurians are mentioned 
in ec. 58. 16, but are omitted here, 
perhaps, as St. suggests, because only 
part of their force was present. We 
must take πανστρατιᾷ with all the 
subjs. This St. reconciles with Aoyd- 
des ἀφ᾽ ἑκάστων by the assumption 
that πανστρατιᾷ means cum uni- 
versis quas tum instructas 
habebant copiis, not πανδημεί. 
There seem to be considerable corrup- 
tions in the passage. — 20. καὶ ἄλλῃ 
Kré.: for another force, too, if it were 
added. GMT. 52,1 and Rem.; 74.1; 
77; H. 932, 2; 934; 987. See App. 
22. ἀνεχώρουν: they set out upon 
their way home, impf. Pl. after τὸ στρά- 


τόν τε Θράσυλλον ἀναχωρήσαντες ἐν τῷ Xa- 


τευμα, as in i. 89. 14 with τὸ κοινόν, 
and iii. 80. 1 with δῆμος. 

24. ἄνευ: cf. i. 128. 11; iv. 25. 54. 
See on i. 91. 23. — 25. κἀκεῖνοι: is a 
repetition of καὶ αὐτοί with marked 
emphasis. — μὴ ἂν σφίσι ποτὲ κάλλιον 
παρασχόν: these words are in close 
connexion, so that the force of the 
neg. μή does not pass beyond παρα- 
σχόν. Cf.c.63.3. They thought it was 
the Lacedaemonians who had eseaped, 
since circumstances could never be more 
Javourable for them (the Argives). μή 
is used because it is in the inf. clause, 
although οὐ would be more regular 
after νομίζοντες. Kr. Spr. 67,8. ἂν 
παρασχόν is here equiv. to παράσχοι ἄν. 
On the ace. abs., ef. παρατυχόν, 11. ἃ. 
278, 2; H.973.— 26. πρὸς τῇ σφετέρᾳ 
mode: near Argos. Cf.c.59. 11 and 19. 
— 27. μετὰ... ξυμμάχων : the Mantine- 
ans and Eleans. See ὁ. 58. 4f£,— 
dv γίγνεσθαι: the pres. inf., corre- 
sponding to the impf. ind. of dir. disc. 
(6 ἀγὼν ἂν ἐγίγνετο), represents the 
Argives as thinking, “ we should have 
fought under these favourable circum- 
stances.” 

28. ἐν τῷ XapdSpw: ‘about the 


4 


5 


61 


THUCYDIDES V. 60, 61. 


ao a Ν 2% ΄ , ‘ 3 , ΄ 
ράδρῳ, οὗπερ τὰς ἀπὸ στρατείας δίκας πρὶν ἐσιέναι κρί- 
30 νουσιν, ἤρξαντο λεύειν, ὁ δὲ καταφυγὼν ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν 


περιγίγνεται: τὰ μέντοι χρήματα ἐδήμευσαν αὐτοῦ. 
Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ᾿Αθηναίων βοηθησάντων χιλίων 


ε ΄“ Ν ’ ε ’ - > ’΄ ’ 
ὁπλιτῶν και τριακοσιων ἱππέων, ὧν ἐστρατήγουν Λάχης 


ἈΝ ΄ ε» A 9 Ν Ν Ν 
καὶ Νικόστρατος, οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι (ὅμως γὰρ τὰς σπονδὰς 


¥ a Ν Ἅ ’, » ’ > la 
@KVOUV λῦσαι προς TOVS Λακεδαιμονίους) απιεναι EKE- 


5 λευον αὐτοὺς καὶ πρὸς τὸν δῆμον οὐ προσῆγον βουλο- 


10 


μένους χρηματίσαι, πρὶν ἢ Μαντινῆς καὶ Ἠλεῖοι (ἔτι 


γὰρ παρῆσαν) κατηνάγκασαν δεόμενοι. 


A ἂν ε 
καὶ ἔλεγον οἱ 


᾿Αθηναῖοι ᾿Αλκιβιάδου πρεσβευτοῦ παρόντος ἔν τε τοῖς 
> 7 Ν ’ “ 9 > > “~ ε Ἁ 
Ἀργείοις καὶ ξυμμάχοις ταῦτα, ὅτι οὐκ ὀρθῶς ai σπονδαὲ 


ΕΣ A ¥ , \ , ἈΝ A 3 
ἄνευ τῶν ἄλλων ξυμμάχων καὶ γένοιντο, καὶ νῦν (ἐν 


καιρῷ γὰρ παρεῖναι σφεῖς) ἅπτεσθαι χρῆναι τοῦ πολέ- 


μου. 


northeast part of the city wall ex- 
tended, like a natural moat, the gorge 
of the Charadrus, in the wide bed of 
which generals returning from the 
field were tried before they entered the 
city. Curtius, Pelopon. 11. p. 363. — 
29. στρατείας : a necessary correction 
of the reading of most Mss. στρατιᾶς. 

61. After the arrival of troops from 
Athens, the Argives are persuaded by 
their allies to break the truce. Accord- 
ingly their united forces besiege Orcho- 
menus, in Arcadia, which surrenders to 
them. 

2. τριακοσίων: Diod., xii. 79. 1, 
says two hundred. — Λάχης καὶ Nixo- 
otpatos: are both freq. mentioned in 
the earlier course of the war (iii. 75. 
15; 86.2; 115. 7; iv. 53. 5; 119. 10). 
— 3. ὅμως : is to be explained by as- 
suming that a concessive sent., “al- 
though they were dissatisfied with the 
truce,” is understood. Cf. iii. 28. 13; 
80. 4.— 6. χρηματίσαι; cfc. 5. 2; 1. 


Ἀ ΄’ 5 “ ’, ‘ , > ‘ 
καὶ πείσαντες ἐκ τῶν λόγων τοὺς ξυμμάχους εὐθὺς 


87. 17.— πρὶν ἤ: as elsewhere in 
Thue. πρὶν δή (ili. 29. 5; vii. γι. 26; 
Haase, followed by St., writes πρὶν δή 
here) or the simple πρίν (see on i. 
51. 5) with the aor. indic. (Perhaps 
Thuc. wrote πρὶν of Μαντινῆς.) 

8. παρόντος : see App. — 9. ταῦτα: 
see App. — 10. καὶ γένοιντο, καὶ viv 
ἅπτεσθαι χρῆναι: καί is used before 
γένοιντο, as if some similar const. (as 
καὶ viv ἔτι μένοιεν.) were to follow (see 
on iii. 67. 24), instead of the inf. The 
present duty of the Argives is empha- 
sized by νῦν as opp. to the past time 
expressed by γένοιντο. --- 11. σφεῖς: 
is nom. referring to the subj. of the 
main verb. G. 138, x. 8; H. 940 b. 

12. πείσαντες... ἐχώρουν πάντες: 
the subj. is at first only the Atheni- 
ans (πείσαντες can refer only to them), 
but is enlarged until it includes πάντες 
πλὴν ᾿Αργείων. On similar changes 
of subj. (though usually contracting 
rather than expanding its content), 


111 


112 


16 πρῶτον, ἔπειτα δ᾽ ὕστερον καὶ οὗτοι ἦλθον. 


Ι 


THUCYDIDES V. 61, 62. : 


ΤΡ» δ Ὁ Ν Ν 3 ‘ , Ν 
ἐχώρουν ἐπὶ ᾿Ορχομενὸν τὸν ᾿Αρκαδικὸν πάντες πλὴν 
3 ’΄ φ Ν 9 Ν , ε ’, 

Αργείων οὗτοι δὲ ὅμως καὶ πεισθέντες ὑπελείποντο 


καὶ προσ- 


id Ν » ἣν 4 > ’ ᾿ 
καθεζόμενοι τὸν ᾿Ορχομενὸν πάντες ἐπολιόρκουν καὶ 
Ν > A 4 ¥ , 
προσβολὰς ἐποιοῦντο, βουλόμενοι ἄλλως τε προσγενέσθαι 
7 Ν 9 > “A > 7 > / | es 
σφίσι καὶ ὅμηροι ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας ἦσαν αὐτόθι ὑπὸ 


, ’ 
Λακεδαιμονίων κείμενοι. 


οἱ δὲ Ὀρχομένιοι δείσαντες τήν 


lal ’ > 4 Ν lal lal Ν a 
20 τε τοῦ τείχους ἀσθένειαν καὶ τοῦ στρατοῦ τὸ πλῆθος, 


θϑνιοι παραδοῦναι. 


Kai, ὡς οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐβοήθει, μὴ προαπόλωνται, ξυν- 


΄ 9 4 ’ > be / Le > 
ἔβησαν ὥστε ξύμμαχοί τε εἶναι Kal ὁμήρους σφῶν TE av- 


“ a nw Ἀ A δ᾽ 
τῶν δοῦναι Μαντινεῦσι καὶ ods κατέθεντο Λακεδαιμό- 


μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἔχοντες ἤδη τὸν Ὄρχομε- 


Ν 5 ’ ε 4 55 9 A “Ὁ 77 
νὸν ἐβουλεύοντο ot ξύμμαχοι ἐφ᾽ 6 τι χρὴ πρῶτον ἰέναι 


τῶν λοιπῶν. 


A \ 
καὶ ᾿Ηλεῖοι μὲν ἐπὶ Aémpeov ἐκέλευον, Μαν- 


“ Ν " 8, , A , ει9 lal Ν 
τινὴς δὲ ἐπὶ Τεγέαν" καὶ προσέθεντο οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ 


᾿Αθηναῖοι τοῖς Μαντινεῦσι. καὶ οἱ μὲν ᾿Ηλεῖοι ὀργισθέντες 2 


see on i. 18. 21; 49. 14, and ο. 64. 12. 
— ἐκ τῶν λόγων : cf. vii. 48. 23, ἐκ τού- 
των αὐτοὺς πείσεσθαι, and viii. 47. 5, 
πεῖσαι δ᾽ ἂν ἐνόμιζε μάλιστα ἐκ τοῦ τοιού- 
του. --- 13. τὸν ᾿Αρκαδικόν : to distin- 
guish it from the Βοιώτιος of iii. 87. 
11.— 14. ὅμως: const. with ὑπελεί- 
movro. — καὶ πεισθέντες: “although 
the speech of the Athenians (i.e. of 
Alcibiades) had not failed to convince 
them.” 

15. προσκαθεζόμενοι: const. with 
ace. also in i. 26. 19; 61. 8.— 16. 
πάντες: here the Argives also are 
included.— 17. προσγενέσθαι σφίσι: 
cf. α. 32.10. — 18. καὶ ὅμηροι αὐτόθι: 
the inorganic connexion of these 
words with the preceding βουλόμενοι 
ἄλλως τε προσγενέσθαι σφίσι makes 
them only more prominent: “and 
besides, there were,” etc. — 19. κείμε- 
vou: ἴ,6, κατακείμενοι, as pf, pass. par- 


tic. of κατέθεντο, 23. Cf. vi. 61. 16, 
ὁμήρους τοὺς ἐν ταῖς νήσοις κειμένους. 

21. καὶ... μὴ προαπόλωνται : is, 
like τήν τε τοῦ τείχους ἀσθένειαν καὶ τοῦ 
στρατοῦ τὸ πλῆθος, Obj. οὗ δείσαντες. 
καί introduces μὴ ἀπόλωνται; the ex- 
planatory ὡς οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐβοήθει is, 
then, a parenthesis.— uve Byoav ὥστε: 
cf. iv. 46. 8.— 23. Μαντινεῦσι: the 
Mantineans, as the most powerful of 
the Arcadian allies, are given the 
charge of these Arcadian hostages. 

62. The allies decide to attack Te- 
gea, whereupon the Eleans return home 
in anger because their proposal to attack 
Lepreum had been rejected. 

2. ἐφ᾽ ὅ τι χρὴ ἰέναι : is the regular 
periphrasis for the deliberative subj. 
in dependent clauses. Cf. i. 40. 20; 
gt. 4; ii, 4. 10; iii. 11. 18; 53. 9; iv. 
34-25; 125.5.—3. ἐκέλευον : se. ἰέναι. 
So also in 6, with ἐψηφίσαντο. 


ΝΜ ΝϑΝϑ....... 


THUCYDIDES V. 62, 63. 


9 > > N , ; , > , a ¥ 

ὅτι οὐκ ἐπὶ Λέπρεον ἐψηφίσαντο, ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου " 
ε Ἀπ 4 ΄ > A ΄ 
οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ξύμμαχοι παρεσκευάζοντο ἐν τῇ Μαντινείᾳ 


ε , Ay. ’ »"ἤ, 
ὡς ἐπὶ Τεγέαν ἰόντες. 


4 > A Ἀ > “A 
και τινες αὐτοὺς καὶ AUTWV [Τε- 


γεα]τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐνεδίδοσαν τὰ πράγματα. 


Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ, ἐπειδὴ ἀνεχώρησαν ἐξ “Apyous 


‘ / Ν /, > > ’ 
τὰς τετραμήνους σπονδὰς ποιησάμενοι, Ayw ἐν μεγάλῃ 


27 > > ΄ ΄ Ly ὁ Ν 
αιυτιᾳ εὐχον OV χειρωσαμενον σφίσιν βγος, παρασχον 


“ ε ¥ , > Ἂν εὐ. 2 
καλῶς ὡς οὕπω πρότερον αὐτοὶ ἐνόμιζον. 


ἀθρόους γὰρ 


, , \ , > es > 
TOO OVUTOVS ξυμμάχους και TOLOVTOVS OU ῥᾷδιον ειναι λα- 


βεῖν. ἐπειδὴ δὲ καὶ περὶ ᾽᾿Ορχομενοῦ ἠγγέλλετο ἑαλωκέναι, 


πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ ἐβούλευον εὐθὺς ὑπ᾽ 


ὀργῆς παρὰ τὸν τρόπον τὸν ἑαυτῶν, ὡς χρὴ τήν τε οἰκίαν 


5 lal 4, A , , “ an 
αὐτοῦ κατασκάψαι καὶ δέκα μυριασι δραχμῶν ζημιῶσαι. 


ὁ δὲ παρῃτεῖτο μηδὲν τούτων δρᾶν. ἔργῳ γὰρ ἀγαθῷ 


8. [Τεγεατῶν : see App. — 9. ἐνεδί- 
δοσαν: impf. expressing attempted 
action. So also in iv. 76. 18. --- τὰ 
πράγματα: cf. ii. 65. 43, τὰ πράγματα 
ἐνδιδόναι. 

63. The Lacedaemonians are very 
angry with Agis, and appoint ten Spar- 
tans to be his advisers. 

1. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δέ xré.: the nar- 
rative of c. 60. ὃ 4 is resumed. The 
indignation which had already been 
expressed on the march (c. 60. 21) 
broke out with more violence ἐπειδὴ 
ἀνεχώρησαν .----. ἐν μεγάλῃ αἰτίᾳ εἶχον : 
is repeated from ec. 60. 10 and 21.— 
4. ὡς οὔπω πρότερον αὐτοὶ ἐνόμιζον : 
sc. παρασχεῖν. ‘‘ When such an oppor- 
tunity was offered as they, for their 
part, thought had never been offered 
before.” Cf. c. 60. 25. οὔπω πρότερον 
occurs again in 13 and c. 64.6. This 
repetition may be due to a lack of care- 
ful revision by the author. See App. — 
5. λαβεῖν : ἀντὶ τοῦ συλλαβεῖν, ἀθροίζειν, 


Schol. Cf. c. 102. 2, κοινοτέρας τὰς τύ- 
xas λαμβάνοντα; vi. 86. 18, ὅταν καιρὸν 
λάβωσιν. 

6. περὶ ᾿ρχομενοῦ ἠγγέλλετο ἑαλω- 
κέναι: a loose const. for Ὀρχόμενος 
ἠγγέλλετο ἑαλωκώς. See Kiihn. 600, 
3 8B. —8. παρὰ τὸν τρόπον τὸν ἑαυτών : 
their usual mode of conduct is de- 
scribed in i. 132. 27, μὴ ταχεῖς εἶναι 
περὶ ἀνδρὸς Σπαρτιάτου Kré.— 9. δέκα 
μυριάσι δραχμῶν : if these are Aegine- 
tan drachmae, as is likely (see c. 47. 
39), the sum amounts to about $24,840. 

10. παρῃτεῖτο: deprecabatur. 
Cf. Plat. Rep. iii. 387 Ὁ; Dem. xxt. 
58, παραιτήσομαι ὑμᾶς μηδὲν ἀχθεσθῆναί 
μοι. -- 11. ῥύσεσθαι : ἀπολύσειν, Schol. 
The word is seldom found elsewhere 
in this sense (but cf. Soph. 0. 7. 313), 
at least in Attic prose; but St.’s re- 
mark that this is prob. an expression 
of Agis, not of Thuc., makes any 
emendation unnecessary. Inc. 75.11 
Thuc. uses ἀπολύεσθαι in the same 


113 


ΓΟ 


eo 


114 


THUCYDIDES V. 63, 64. 


f 


e7 ‘ > 7 es Cee A > 
ῥύσεσθαι τας ALTLAS στρατευσάμενος" Ἢ TOTE ποίειν αὖυ- 


τοὺς ὅ τι βούλονται. 


ε Ν ‘ Ν 7 Ν Ν 
οἱ δὲ τὴν μὲν ζημίαν καὶ τὴν κατα- 4 


‘ ee , δὲ “A > “A Δ a ¥ 
σκαφὴν ἐπέσχον, νόμον ὃὲ ἔθεντο ἐν TH παρόντι, OS οὔ- 


πω πρότερον ἐγένετο αὐτοῖς’ 


δέκα γὰρ ἄνδρας Σπαρται- 


an a ΕΣ 
15 τῶν προσείλοντο αὐτῷ ξυμβούλους, ἄνευ ὧν μὴ κύριον 
εἶναι ἀπάγειν στρατιὰν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως. 
> 4 > > A > “ > ΄ Ν aA 
Ev τούτῳ δ᾽ ἀφικνεῖται αὐτοῖς ἀγγελία mapa τῶν 


3 ’, 3 , 9 > Ἁ uA > ud 
ἐπιτηδείων εκ Τεγέας OTL, εἰ μη παρέσονται εν τάχει, 


5 ’ > A [2 Ν > ’ ‘ ‘ 

ἀποστήσεται αὐτῶν Teyéa πρὸς ᾿Αργείους καὶ τοὺς Evp- 
td Ν 9 > > 4 > “A Ν ’ 

μάχους καὶ ὅσον οὐκ ἀφέστηκεν - ἐνταῦθα δὴ βοήθεια 2 


sense. — στρατευσάμενος : see App. — 
H: te. εἰ δὲ μή. Cf. i. 78. 18; 140. 8, 
βοηθεῖν, ἢ μηδὲ κατορθοῦντας τῆς ξυνέ- 
σεως μεταποιεῖσθαι. See Kr. Spr. § 69, 
29, 1.—-rore: then, after he had tried 
to make good his fault. Cf Dem. rv. 
I, εἰ δὲ μή, τότ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς ἐπειρώμην. 
13. ἐπέσχον : see on c. 46. 5; ii. γ6. 
4.—vopov δὲ ἔθεντο xré.: the wording 
of the new law is not given, but 
merely the application of it to King 
Agis. ἐν τῷ παρόντι, for the present, 
may imply that the law was passed 
for this special case, and was intended 
to apply only to Agis. But if Arist., 
Pol. ii. 9. 30, ἐξέπεμπον συμπρεσβευτά», 
refers to this law, it must have been 
a general one. — 14. δέκα γὰρ ξυμβού- 
λους: a council of ten men was as- 
signed to him, without whose ‘consent 
or company he could not lead an army 
from the city. In this way his actions 
as general were under constant super- 
vision. Advisers had accompanied 
Spartan admirals before (see ii. 85. 
1; iii. 69. 7; 76. 6), but had never 
been forced upon an adult king in 
command of the army. Pleistoanax 
was accompanied by one or more on 
account of his youth. See Plut. Per. 
22, See on ii. 85, 1, and Herbst, 


Jahrbb. 1858, p. 682 ff.—16. εἶναι: 
the inf. in rel. clauses occurs occasion- 
ally, as here, without a preceding inf. 
when provisions of a law are quoted. 
GMT. 92, 2, n. 3 (Ὁ); Η. 957a. — 
ἀπάγειν : is ordinarily used of the 
withdrawal of troops from foreign ter- 
ritory. Here it seems to show the 
strict nature of the new law. He 
was not allowed to lead troops away 
from the city. In other words, his 
power as general was entirely under 
the control of his advisers, whose au- 
thority did not cease with the ἐξάγειν 
but extended to the ἀπάγειν (and all 
subsequent action) after the army had 
left the city. It is then not necessary 
to follow Haase, Lucubr. Thuc. p. 88 ff., 
and read ἐκ τῆς πολεμίας for ἐκ τῆς 
πόλεως. Besides, as St. observes, if 
Thue. had written ἐκ τῆς πολεμίας, we 
should expect τὴν στρατιάν with the art. 

64. The Lacedaemonians lead out 
their whole force to the support of Tegea. 
They invade the territory of Mantinea 
after having summoned their allies to 
meet them there. 

1. παρὰ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων : opp. to the 
hostile faction mentioned in c. 62. 8. 
—4. ὅσον οὐκ: with pf. or plpf. al- 
ready almost ; so in iv, 69. 15; vii. 6. 4. 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 64. 115 


δ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων γίγνεται αὐτῶν τε καὶ τῶν Ἐϊλώτων 
Ν > ial Ν ν ¥ / 3 4 A 3 
πανδημεὶ ὀξεῖα καὶ οἵα οὔπω πρότερον. ἐχώρουν δὲ ἐς 
᾿Ορέσθειον τῆς Mawadias: καὶ τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αρκάδων ode- 3 
τέροις οὖσι ξυμμάχοις προεῖπον ἀθροισθεῖσιν ἰέναι κατὰ 
“ὃ e “a > ΄ > Ν Ν ΄ \ > ),9 
πόδας αὑτῶν ἐς Τεγέαν, αὐτοὶ δὲ μέχρι μὲν τοῦ *Ope- 
10 σθείου πάντες ἐλθόντες, ἐκεῖθεν δὲ τὸ ἕκτον μέρος σφῶν 
7 A > , > > ¥ > ag Ν , , 
αὐτῶν ἀποπέμψαντες ἐπ᾽ οἴκου, ἐν ᾧ TO πρεσβύτερόν TE 
καὶ τὸ νεώτερον ἦν, ὥστε τὰ οἴκοι φρουρεῖν, τῷ λοιπῷ 
’ > ~ > rf \ 3 δὰ δὶ 
στρατεύματι ἀφικνοῦνται ἐς Τεγέαν. καὶ οὐ πολλῷ ὕστε- 
ε 4 yp fe AS , “A ’ Ν 
ρον οἱ ξύμμαχοι am ᾿Αρκάδων παρῆσαν πέμπουσι δὲ 4 
Ν > Ν ’ὔ Ν Ν ἃ ’ Ἁ 
καὶ ἐς τὴν Κόρινθον καὶ Βοιωτοὺς καὶ Φωκέας καὶ Λο- 
4 “ 4 Ν , > ’ 
κρούς, βοηθεῖν κελεύοντες κατὰ τάχος ἐς Μαντίνειαν. 
> ᾿ a \ 2f Χλ7 iy τ \ ery > κ 
ἀλλὰ τοῖς μὲν ἐξ ὀλίγου τε ἐγίγνετο καὶ οὐ ῥᾷάδιον ἦν μὴ 
3 ’ a oS ’ id A Ν ’ 
ἀθρόοις καὶ ἀλλήλους περιμείνασι διελθεῖν τὴν πολεμίαν - 


The pf. ind. (like the preceding fut. 
inds.) is of course retained in the 
indir. disc. after the pres. ἀφικνεῖται 
ἀγγελία. GMT. 70, 1; H. 932, 1.— 
βοήθεια τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων γίγνεται: 
equiv. to of Λακεδαιμόνιοι ποιοῦνται βοή- 
θειαν.---Θ. οἵα οὔπω πρότερον : sc. ἐγέ- 
veto. They exerted themselves to the 
utmost, for the question whether 
Sparta or Argos should be leader in 
Peloponnesus was to be decided. —7. 
᾿Ορέσθειον : also called ᾿᾽Ορεσθάσιον by 
Paus. viii. 27.3. Thuc. calls the ter- 
ritory belonging to it Ὃρεσθίς in iv. 
134.4.— Matvadrtas: the whole moun- 
tainous district around the Maenalus 
range. See Curtius, Pelopon. I. p. 
311 f. 

8. προεῖπον: cf c. 30. 31. — κατὰ 
πόδας αὑτῶν: close upon their heels. 
See on iii. 98. 11; iv. 126. 38; viii. 17. 
16. ---9. αὐτοὶ πάντες, τῴ λοιπῴ στρα- 
τεύματι ἀφικνοῦνται : a change in the 
content of the subj. the reverse of that 
in c, 61.§3,— 14. dm’ ’ApxdSwv: shows 


that the summons of 8 had been 
obeyed. The Arcadian allies came at 
the proper time; on the other hand 
πέμπουσι kal. . . Λοκρούς, with whom 
the old alliance of ii. 9. 8 still existed. 

17. τοῖς μέν : the more distant al- 
lies just mentioned. — ἐξ ὀλίγου ἐγί- 
yvero: it (with an indefinite subj. 
supplied from what precedes) came 
upon them suddenly. ἐξ ὀλίγου is simi- 
larly used in ii. 11. 17; 61. 11; iv. 108. 
32.— μὴ ἀθρόοις κτέ. : unless in a body, 
and after having waited for one another 
(Arnold). μή shows that the expres- 
sion is hypothetical. G. 288, 4; H. 
1025. — 18. τὴν πολεμίαν: as in i. 
142. 7; ii. 11. 20; iii. 58. 24. This 
refers not only to Argolis, but also to 
the territory of Orchomenus, which 
was in the possession of the Argive 
alliance since the events of c. 61. § 5. 
This whole region ξυνέκλῃε διὰ μέσου, 
i.e. it closed up the communication 
(for those wishing to reach Mantinea 
from the north) by lying just in the 


116 


THUCYDIDES V. 64, 65. 


ξυνέκλῃε yap διὰ μέσον: ὅμως δὲ ἠπείγοντο. Λακεδαι- δ΄ 


20 μόνιοι δὲ ἀναλαβόντες τοὺς παρόντας ᾿Αρκάδων Evupa- 


65 


10 


> 2 > \ , A , 
xous ἐσέβαλον ἐς τὴν Μαντινικήν, καὶ στρατοπεδευσά- 
μενοι πρὸς τῷ Ἡρακλείῳ ἐδήουν τὴν γῆν. 

Οἱ δὲ ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, ὡς εἶδον αὐτούς, 1 
καταλαβόντες χωρίον ἐρυμνὸν καὶ δυσπρόσοδον παρ- 
4 ε > ’ ‘ ε Ἃ 5» ‘ > A 

ετάξαντο ws és μάχην. καὶ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι εὐθὺς αὐτοῖς 2 
5» ~ χὰ Ν ’ ἈΝ λίθ Ἀ 3 7 An > 7 
ἐπῇσαν" καὶ μέχρι μὲν λίθου καὶ ἀκοντίου βολῆς ἐχώ- 
ρησαν: ἔπειτα τῶν πρεσβυτέρων τις Αγιδι ἐπεβόησεν, 
ὁρῶν πρὸς χωρίον καρτερὸν ἰόντας σφᾶς, ὅτι διανοεῖται 
κακὸν κακῷ ἰᾶσθαι, δηλῶν τῆς ἐξ “Apyous ἐπαιτίου ἀνα- 
χωρήσεως τὴν παροῦσαν ἄκαιρον προθυμίαν ἀνάληψιν 


βουλομένην εἶναι. 


ε Ν » Ν Ν 4» «ὦ / ¥ Ν 
ὁ δὲ εἴτε καὶ διὰ τὸ ἐπιβόημα εἴτε καὶ 8 


αὐτῷ ἄλλο τι ἢ κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ δόξαν, ἐξαίφνης πάλιν τὸ 


way of it. ξυγκλή εἰν is similarly used 
in ὁ. 72. 14, κατὰ τὸ διάκενον καὶ οὐ Evy- 
κλησθέν. ----19. ἠπείγοντο : 86. διελθεῖν. 

21. ἐσέβαλον : from the south, the 
side toward Tegea, where the site of 
the temple of Hercules must be 
sought (acc. to Curtius, Pelopon. I. p. 
243, ‘not far from the plain of Alci- 
medon by the heights of Capsa’). 

65. The hostile armies approach one 
another, but the Lacedaemonians sud- 
denly retreat. After some delay the 
Argives follow them. 

2. χωρίον ἐρυμνὸν kal δυσπρόσοδον : 
apparently the southern part of the 
hill called Alesium, which was a point 
of considerable strategic importance 
for Mantinea. See Curtius, Pelopon. 
I. p. 241. It is therefore called (6) 
χωρίον καρτερόν. 

5. τῶν πρεσβυτέρων tis: perhaps 
one of the ten ξύμβουλοι of c. 63. 15. 
—T. κακὸν κακῴ ἰᾶσθαι: proverbial. 
So Hat. iii. 53. 15, μὴ τῷ κακῷ τὸ κακὸν 
ia. Cf. Soph. Aj, 862; Plat. Prot. 


3840 ἃ. It refers to Agis’s words in 
c. 63. 10 f.— ἐπαιτίου: which had 
caused him to be blamed. Cf. c. 60.10; 
63. 2. But in vi. 61. 4 we find the 
pers. use of érairios.— 9. βουλομένην: 
the partic. with δηλοῦν is used also 
in i, 21. 12; ii. 50. 4; with δηλοῦσθαι 
in i. 11. 17. The man called to Agis, 
pointing out (δηλῶν) that his eagerness 
wished, etc. See App. 

εἴτε καί, εἴτε kai: the adv. καί adds 
liveliness and force to the expression, 
as in vi. 60. 11 ἢ. Kiihn. 541, 2, n. 2. 
— τὸ ἐπιβόημα: (cf ἐπεβόησεν, 5) 
occurs nowhere else in Thuc. Poll, 
vi. 208, objects to it as σκληρόν, but 
Dio C. uses it freq. — 10. ἢ κατὰ 
τὸ αὐτό: Kr. explains: “than in ac- 
cordance with the line of action he 
had begun.” See App. — δόξαν : ace. 
abs. (aor. partic.), as in viii. 79. 2; 93. 
7. The partic. is used in a causal 
sense, and the whole expression αὐτῷ 
.. . δόξαν is parallel to διὰ τὸ ἐπιβόημα, 
giving a second reason for his sudden 


THUCYDIDES V. 65. 


στράτευμα κατὰ τάχος πρὶν ξυμμῖξαι ἀπῆγε. 


Ν Ν “Ὁ \ 9 > 4 3 ‘ 
μενος πρὸς τὴν Teyeatw τὸ ὕδωρ ἐξέτρεπεν ἐς τὴν Mav- 


Fd A e ΄ μι A ’ὔ ε ut 
τινικήν, περὶ οὗπερ ws τὰ πολλὰ βλάπτοντος ὁποτέρωσε 
ρ 


ΕΝ 3 , al ‘ A “ 
ἂν ἐσπίπτῃ Μαντινῆς καὶ Τεγεᾶται πολεμοῦσιν. 


ἐβού- 


15 Nero δὲ τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου βοηθοῦντας ἐπὶ τὴν τοῦ 


ὕδατος ἐκτροπήν, ἐπειδὰν πύθωνται, καταβιβάσαι [τοὺς 


> ’ . \ ‘\ 4, ‘ > ~, ε ~ ἈΝ 
Ἀργείους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους] καὶ ἐν τῷ ὁμαλῷ τὴν 


μάχην ποιεῖσθαι: καὶ ὁ μὲν τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην μείνας 


5 la Ν Ν ν 5 , ε >> lal \ ε ’ 
αυτου πέρι ΤΟ ὕδωρ ἐξέτρεπεν "Οὐ ὃ Apyevou και OL ξύμ.- 


20 μαχοι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον καταπλαγέντες τῇ ἐξ ὀλίγου αἰφνι- 


, lal > 4 > ΄, > 
δίῳ αὐτῶν ἀναχωρήσει οὐκ εἶχον ὅ TL εἰκάσωσιν - εἶτα 


> \ > “ > A ’ 5 , ‘\ lal 
ἐπειδὴ ἀναχωροῦντες ἐκεῖνοί τε ἀπέκρυψαν καὶ σφεῖς 


retreat. — ἐξαίφνης : to be const. with 
what follows, and therefore separated 
by a comma (with Cl.) from what pre- 
cedes. Not that his decision was sud- 
den, but that he executed it suddenly 
is important. Hence below, 20, the 
astonishment of the enemy at the 
αἰφνίδιος ἀναχώρησις. Moreover κατὰ 
τάχος indicates the rapidity of the 
march. 

12. πρὸς τὴν Teyedrw : to the border 
of the territory of Tegea. — τὸ ὕδωρ: 
not the brook Ophis, but a stream 
which flows northward from the Te- 
gean territory. See Curtius, Pelopon. 
I. p. 235; Baedeker, Griechenland, p. 
274. — ἐξέτρεπεν : impf., he set about 
turning, etc. This task naturally re- 
quired some time. See 18 f.—13. 
ὁποτέρωσε ἂν ἐσπίπτῃ: since it had 
no sufficient outlet, and tended to 
flood the neighbouring land. — 15. 
τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου : acc. to the well- 
known proleptic use for τοὺς ἐπὶ τοῦ 
λόφου (i.e. the χωρίον ἐρυμνὸν καὶ δὺυ- 
σπρόσοδον of 2). G. 191, ν. 6; H. 788. 
Const. as obj. with the inf. καταβιβά- 
σαι, With which βοηθοῦντας xré. is to 


be connected as a pred. adj.; “he 
wished to make the troops on the hill 
come down and try to stop the turning 
aside of the water (βοηθοῦντας ἐπὶ τὴν 
τοῦ ὕδατος ἐκτροπήν), as soon as they 
heard of it, and fight on the plain.” 
τοὺς ᾿Αργείους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους is 
rightly struck out by St., v. Herwer- 
den, and Cl. as a useless gloss. 

20. ἐξ ὀλίγου: this refers appar- 
ently to the near approach μέχρι λίθου 
kal ἀκοντίου βολῆς (4), 1.6. it is to be 
taken in a local sense. αἰφνιδίῳ refers 
to the unexpectedness of the withdraw- 
al. Cf. ἐξαίφνης, 10. See App. — 21. 
οὐκ εἶχον xré.: on the use of οὐκ ἔχειν 
with deliberative subjv., see on ii. 52. 
11.— 22. ἀπέκρυψαν : ἑαυτοὺς δηλονότι. 
ἀφανεῖς ἐγένοντο. ἰδίως δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν πλοῖ- 
(μένων καὶ οὐκέτι ὁρωμένων λέγεται ὅτι 
ἀπέκρυψαν, Schol. Of this rare use 
only two examples are cited; one 
from Plat. Prot. p. 338 a, φεύγειν εἰς 
τὸ πέλαγος τῶν λόγων ἀποκρύψαντα γῆν, 
and one from Luc. Ver. Hist. ii. 38, 
ἐφεύγομεν . . . ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἀπέκρυψαν (got 
out of sight of ) αὐτούς. Acc. to these 
examples, we should supply αὐτούς 


117 


Ν 
καὶ ἀφικό- 4 


δ 


118 


THUCYDIDES V. 65, 66. 


ε ’ \ > > 4 > Δ ‘ ε aA 
ἡσύχαζον καὶ οὐκ ἐπηκολούθουν, ἐνταῦθα τοὺς ἑαυτῶν 
στρατηγοὺς αὖθις ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον τό τε πρότερον καλῶς 


25 ληφθέντας πρὸς “Apyer Λακεδαιμονίους ἀφεθῆναι καὶ 


νῦν ὅτι ἀποδιδράσκοντας οὐδεὶς ἐπιδιώκει, ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ 


ἡσυχίαν οἱ μὲν σῴζονται, σφεῖς δὲ προδίδονται. 


οἱ δὲ 


Ν > ’ὕ A ἣν , ν 
στρατηγοὶ ἐθορυβήθησαν μὲν τὸ παραυτίκα, ὕστερον 
Ν » 4 5 Ν » A nw , A , > 
δὲ ἀπάγουσιν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου καὶ προελθόντες ἐς 


> ε Ν 3 4 ε 5» ..ἃ Ν 
80 τὸ ὁμαλὸν ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο ὡς ἰόντες ἐπὶ τοὺς πολε- 


μίους. 


Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἵ τε ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ξυν- 


rather than with the Schol. ἑαυτούς. --- 
σφεῖς : is here opp. to ἐκεῖνοι and 
of μέν, and is equiv. to an emphatic 
αὐτοί. This is rare in dir. disc. — 24. 
avis ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον: cf c. 60. 23.— 
καλῶς ληφθέντας : “when they had 
caught them so finely.” Used of the 
favourable opportunity, as in c¢. 36. 
18, καλῶς σφίσι φίλιον γενέσθαι. ---- τό 
τε πρότερον ἀφεθῆναι : see c. 59. § 4; 
60. ὃ 5. The inf. depends upon the 
idea of speaking implied in ἐν αἰτίᾳ 
εἶχον (1.6. it is the inf. of indir. disc.), 
and refers to past time. They pre- 
ferred the charge that the Lacedaemo- 
nians had been let off. Of. vii. 81.3, ἐν 
αἰτίᾳ τὸν Γύλιππον εἶχον ἑκόντα ἀφεῖναι 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. --- 25. καὶ νῦν ὅτι: 
here introduces the continuation of 
the indir. disc., but the change from 
the inf. to ὅτι (which is far less usual 
than the change from ὅτι to the inf.) 
gives the following words somewhat 
the effect of dir. disc. Kr. says " ὅτι 
here means because. If Kr. were 
right, we should have here an exam- 
ple of a causal sent. after a secondary 
tense and implying that the cause is 
assigned by other persons than the 
writer in which the pres. ind. is re- 
tained. It would be difficult to find 


other examples of this const. See 
GMT. 81, 2, Rem. — 26. καθ᾽ ἡσυ- 
χίαν: at their leisure; very ironical, 
esp. with προδίδονται. 

28. ἐθορυβήθησαν μὲν τὸ παραυτίκα : 
a higher degree οἵ ἀπορεῖν. For a 
moment they lost their self-control 
(or, as we say, lost their heads) on 
account of the violence of the re- 
proaches. 

66. Next day the two armies are 
drawn up opposite one another in the 
plain. The organization of the Lace- 
daemonian army appears in all its 
excellence. 

1. οἵ τε ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ of ξύμμαχοι : 
the copula τε does not connect the 
two substs., but stands opp. to τε in 
of τε Λακεδαιμόνιοι. Thus a paratacti- 
cal opposition of the two members of 
the sent. is brought about; on the one 
hand ...on the other hand (cf. i. 8. 
14f.; 26. 8f.; 57. 3f.; ii. 22. 3 ff; 
64. 28 f., etc.). If ὡς were inserted 
before ὁρῶσι (Kr. and Meineke), it 
would interfere with the peculiarly 
Thucydidean structure of the sent. : 
“on the one hand, the Argives drew 
themselves up for battle; on the 
other, the Lacedaemonians, as they 
are returning to their former position, 





THUCYDIDES V. 66. 


ετάξαντο, ὡς ἔμελλον μαχεῖσθαι ἣν περιτύχωσιν: οἵ 
’ > a al A A Ν ε 4 
τε Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος πρὸς τὸ Ἡράκλειον 
’΄ > Ν ΟΡ. ’ὔ >7 ε Le > > ’ 
πάλιν ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ στρατόπεδον ἰόντες ὁρῶσι δι᾽ ὀλίγου 


φου προεληλυθότας. 


x > , > ’ no ’ Ν 3 Ν “ ’ 

5 τοὺς ἐναντίους ἐν τάξει τε ἤδη πάντας καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ λό-͵ 
’ 

* μάλιστα δὴ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐς ὃ 2 


> / > 4 Α΄, a3 ’ Ἀ ’ 

ἐμέμνηντο ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἐξεπλάγησαν. διὰ βραχείας 
γὰρ μελλήσεως 7) παρασκευὴ αὐτοῖς ἐγίγνετο καὶ εὐθὺς 
ὑπὸ σπουδῆς καθίσταντο ἐς κόσμον τὸν ἑαυτῶν, ΓΑγιδος 


~ 
10 τοῦ βασιλέως ἕκαστα ἐξηγουμένου κατὰ τὸν νόμον. 


Ba- 3 


σιλέως yap ἄγοντος ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου πάντα ἄρχεται, καὶ τοῖς 
Ν ’ Ce , Ἀ 7 ε Ν -“ 

μὲν πολεμάρχοις αὐτὸς φράζει τὸ δέον, οἱ δὲ τοῖς λοχα- 

γοῖς, ἐκεῖνοι δὲ τοῖς πεντηκοντῆρσιν, αὖθις δ᾽ οὗτοι τοῖς 


> ΄ \ 2 A > ΄, 
ενωμοταρχαῖις, και OUTOL TY) ενωμοτιᾳ. 


see the enemy already drawn up in 
battle array and brought down from 
the hill.” The order of these last 
words is the reverse of the order of 
the events. See oni. go. 4. Cl. sug- 
gests that ὄντας may have been lost 
before πάντας. Since the Lacedae- 
monians had now attained their ob- 
ject of drawing the enemy down into 
the plain as expressed in c. 65. 14 ff., 
it seems strange that they should be 
surprised at finding them there, ex- 
cept in so far as they may have 
expected them to wait a little longer. 
What follows is evidently told by 
Thue. as a peculiarly good example 
of their excellent military organiza- 
tion, and this idea must be contained 
in the next sent., μάλιστα δὴ κτὲ., since 
the continuation with the words διὰ 
βραχείας γάρ evidently gives a reason 
for what immediately precedes. Yet 
this necessary connexion is certainly 
not clearly expressed in the text. 
For the various emendations pro- 


posed, see App. — 2. ἢν περιτύχωσιν : 


A ε 4 
Kal au Tapayyed- 4 


τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις, Schol.— 3. πρὸς 
τὸ Ἡράκλειον: cf. c. 64. 22. --- 4. δι 
ὀλίγου : αἱ a short distance. διά, which 
is here used in a local sense, is used 
in a temporal sense in 7, διὰ βραχείας 
μελλήσεως, after a short hesitatation, 
i.e. after the interval of a _ short 
delay. 

6. ἐς ὃ ἐμέμνηντο: as far back as 
they remembered ; μετὰ τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 
μνήνην, Schol. — 8. ἡ παρασκευὴ αὐτοῖς 
ἐγίγνετο: ἱ.6. τὴν παρασκευὴν ἐποιοῦντο. 
—9. ὑπὸ σπουδῆς: used also in iii, 
33. 12; viii. 107.1. Elsewhere κατὰ 
σπουδήν and διὰ σπουδῆς. ᾿ 

11. ἄρχεται: pass. as in ii. 41. 11; 
iii. 46. 21.—12. πολεμάρχοις κτέ. : on 
the Spartan military organization, 
see Hermann, Griech. Staatsalt. § 29; 
Schoemann, Antig. of Greece, I. p. 
279 ff. ; Gilbert, Griech. Staatsalt. I. p. 
75 f.; 49 f. 

14. wapayyéAces: the special or- 
ders for the execution of δέον of 12. 
παράγγελσις is an order not given by 
the trumpet but passed along the 


119 


120 


THUCYDIDES V. 66, 67. 


¥ 4 Ν Ν } Soe er a Ν “Ὁ 
15 σεις, ἣν τι βούλωνται, κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ χωρουσι Kal ταχειαι 


> 4 Ν / “ Ν >\ 7 Ν / 
ἐπέρχονται" σχεδὸν γάρ τι πᾶν πλὴν ὀλίγου τὸ στρατό- 


A ’ὔ 3, > , > , ἈΝ 
πεδον των Λακεδαιμονίων αρχοντες apKXOVT@V εισι, και 


67.75 ἐπιμελὲς τοῦ δρωμένου πολλοῖς προσήκει. 


τότε δὲ 


4 Ν + eed La) > A ra ΕΞ 
κέρας μὲν εὐώνυμον Σκιρῖται αὐτοῖς καθίσταντο, ἀεὶ 


4 ἣν 4 / ’, δι. Δ, lal i ἂὲ 
ταυτὴν Τὴν τάξιν μονοι Λακεδαιμονίων επι σφῶν QUT@V 


» Ν > > A ε we , , 
ἔχοντες" Tapa δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ot ἐπὶ Θρᾷκης Βρασίδειοι 


an \ ὃ ay > 5 nw »» > »¥ 
OTPATLWTAL καὶ νεοδαμώδεις MET AUVTWVY* ἔπειτ᾽ ἤδη Λακε- 


δαιμόνιοι αὐτοὶ ἑξῆς καθίστασαν τοὺς λόχους καὶ παρ᾽ 


αὐτοὺς ᾿Αρκάδων “Hpauns, μετὰ δὲ τούτους Μαινάλιοι, 


ranks in such a way as not to attract 
the attention of the enemy. See 
Kr. on Xen. Anab. iv. 1. 5.— 165. 
ταχεῖαι ἐπέρχονται: they reach their 
destination quickly. Cf. iii. 29. 4, σχο- 
λαῖοι κομισθέντες. Cobet’s proposal, 
περιέρχονται, is less appropriate with 
ταχεῖαι used adv.—16. πᾶν... τὸ 
στρατόπεδον : . . ἄρχοντες ἀρχόντων 
εἰσί: “nearly the whole army con- 
sists of officers who in turn have offi- 
cers under them.” (εἰσί is pl. agree- 
ing with the pred. subst.) Further 
details are given in c. 68. § 3, from 
which it appears that πλὴν ὀλίγου, 
referring to those who have no one 
under them, is not to be taken too 
literally. — 18. τὸ ἐπιμελὲς τοῦ Spw- 
μένου: the use of the neut. adj. or 
partic. for the corresponding abstract 
subst. is very common in Thuc. See 
on i. 36. 4. 

67. The disposition of the troops on 
both sides. 

1. τότε δέ : the narrative is resumed 
after the digression of c. 66. § 3 f.— 
2. κέρας εὐώνυμον: stands as pred. 
with καθίσταντο: as the left wing. The 
dat. αὐτοῖς is acc. to the usage of 
c. 44. 6; 57. 2.— Σκιρῖται: λόχος 
Λακωνικὸς οὕτω λεγόμενος, Schol. The 


Sciritae inhabited the rough hilly 
country toward the borders of the 
Tegean territory (Curtius, Pelopon. ΤΙ. 
p. 217). On their precedence in the 
Lacedaemonian army, cf. Xen. Cyr. 
iv. 2.1; Rep. Lac. 12.3; 13.6. This is 
the only passage which records that 
the position on the left wing was their 
special privilege (ἐπὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν for 
themselves alone ; see on ii. 63. 10).— 
4. of ἐπὶ Θράκης Βρασίδειοι: cf. c. 35. 
21. This had apparently become the 
usual designation for the soldiers who 
had served in Thrace with Brasidas, 
though the expression in c. 34. 1, τῶν 
ἀπὸ Θράκης μετὰ Βρασίδου ἐξελθόντων 
στρατιωτῶν was at this time more ac- 
curate, for ἐπί cannot properly be 
used of them after their return to 
Greece. Still, it seems that this prep. 
had become part of their designation, 
so that a change to ἀπό (Haase fol- 
lowed by v. Herwerden and St.) or ἐκ 
(Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 11) is not ad- 
visable. —5. νεοδαμώδεις : see on Cc. 
34. 6.— 6. παρ᾽ αὐτούς: no less ad- 
missible than παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς, as in 4. Cf. 
ii. 2.28; τίθεσθαι παρ᾽ αὑτοὺς τὰ ὅπλα; 
vi. 67.17. But it is not necessary to 
change ἀὐτοῖς above to αὐτούς (St. and 
Badham). —7. ᾿Αρκάδων Ἡραιῆς: 


— στ------ 


’ὕ “~ 4 
10 τερῳ τῳ κέρᾳ. 


THUCYDIDES V. 67, 68. 


. ri . ~ aA 4 ~ \ , 
καὶ ἐπὶ τῳ δεξιῷ κέρᾳ Teyeatar καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων 


2\7 x Κ ¥ \ ee a tm 5.42 
ὀλίγοι, TO €OKXATOV €XOVTEs, καὶ Ol LTTNS αὐτῶν ἐφ εκα- 


Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν οὕτως ἐτάξαντο - οἱ 


> 3 , > a Ν Ν ΄ A > ΟῚ 
ὃ €VAVTLOL AUTOLS δεξιὸν μεν κερας Μαντινῆς €lyov OTL 


> στὰ ὧν . » 4... ὧἱ \ ea Ν ε ΄ 
εν Τῃ εκεινωὼν TO εργον ἐγίγνετο, παρα ὃ αυτους Ob ξύμ.- 


μαχοι ᾿Αρκάδων ἦσαν, ἔπειτα ᾿Αργείων ou χίλιοι λογάδες, 


οἷς ἡ πόλις ἐκ πολλοῦ ἄσκησιν τῶν ἐς τὸν πόλεμον δη- 


15 4 a) A ,.3 4 "7. A e LAX > ~ ‘ 
μοσιᾳ πάρευχε, και εχόμενοι αὐυτῶν Ol AAAOL βγέιοι, και 


3 > ‘ ε ξύ > A Κλ a \ 0 ΄“ 
μετ αὕτους οἱ ξύμμαχοι αὕτων, Κλεωναῖοι καὶ Opvearat, 


¥ > A ¥ Ν 27 , ¥ Ἀ 
επειτα Αθηναῖοι εσχατοι TO ευωνυμον KEpas €XOVTES και 


»“» Φ “ ε > ‘og 
ἱππῆς μετ αὐτῶν Ol OLKELOL. 


Τάξις μὲν nde καὶ παρασκευὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἦν, τὸ δὲ 


στρατόπεδον τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων μεῖζον ἐφάνη. 


ἀριθ- 


Ν A , x er 7 ε ΄ x , 
μον δὲ γράψαι, Ἵ καθ᾽ εκαστους εκατέερων ἼἾ ξύμπαν- 


> x > ’ 5 “A A A ‘ 
τας οὐκ ἂν ἐδυνάμην ἀκριβῶς. TO μεν γαρ Λακεδαιμο- 


part. gen. as ini. 27. 11, Παλῆς Κεφαλ- 
Afvev. The men of Heraea, which 
was situated in the valley of the ΑἹ- 
pheus between the confined mountain 
territory of Arcadia and the open 
country of the Elean coast. Curtius, 
Pelopon. 1. p. 363 f. It had attained 
importance through the union of nine 
communities at the instance of King 
Cleombrotus (Strab. viii. 3.2) ; hence, 
probably, the honourable position of 
the Heraeans beside the Lacedaemo- 
nians. — Μαινάλιοι: from the Arca- 
dian district Maenalia. Cf. c. 64. 7. 
10. οἱ δ᾽ ἐναντίοι: the nom. of the 
whole with the parts in the same case. 
Cf.i. 89. 18 ; ii. 65. 3; iii. 32.2. G. 137. 
n. 2; H.624d.—12. τὸ ἔργον : the action. 
Cf. i. τος. 24; ii. 89. 42; iv. 25. 9. — 
13. ᾿Αρκάδων: from Arcadia, as in c. 
64. 7. —’Apyelwv οἱ χίλιοι λογάδες 
«xré.: this institution is further de- 
scribed by Diod. Sic. xii. 75.77 : ἀπολύ- 
σαντες αὐτοὺς καὶ τῆς ἄλλης λειτουργίας 


καὶ τροφὰς δημοσίας χορηγοῦντες προσέ- 
ταξαν γυμνάζεσθαι συνεχεῖς μελέτας. 
Arist. Pol. v. 4. p. 1304 tells of its 
political results. — 14. ἐκ πολλοῦ: to 
be explained with the help of Diod.’s 
συνεχεῖς μελέται: for a long time, i.e, 
from their youth up. Cf. c. 69. 19. 
— 16. Κλεωναῖοι καὶ “Opvedrar: Cle- 
onae and Orneae were on the northern 
border of Argolis, toward Phlius and 
Corinth. As allies of Argos they 
were among the ξύμμαχοι ὧν ἄρχουσι. 
Cf. «. 47. 3. 

68. The difficulty of ascertaining 
with accuracy the numbers of either 
army. 

1. τάξις : this refers to the arrange- 
ment, παρασκευή to the armament (cf 
c. 67. 13 and 18) of the troops. — 
ἥδε: the more usual word to refer to 
what precedes is αὕτη, as in ii. 9. 22. 
— 2. μεῖζον ἐφάνη : was evidently larger. 
—4. οὐκ av ἐδυνάμην: I could not 
(even if I were trying to do so) 


121 


no 


122 


5 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 68. 


, A \ A ͵΄ ‘ ᾿ > he 
νίων πλῆθος διὰ τῆς πολιτείας τὸ κρυπτὸν ἠγνοεῖτο, 
“ 3 Ss a! Ν 5 , A > Ν > lal 
τῶν δ᾽ αὖ διὰ τὸ ἀνθρώπειον κομπῶδες ἐς τὰ οἰκεῖα 
’ 5 a) > 4 nw nw » , 
[πλήθη] ἠπιστεῖτο. ἐκ μέντοι τοιοῦδε λογισμοῦ ἔξεστί 
τῳ σκοπεῖν τὸ Λακεδαιμονίων τότε παραγενόμενον πλῆ- 
« 
’ Ν Ν > / ε Ν. »* “A 

Bos: λόχοι μὲν yap ἐμάχοντο ἑπτὰ ἄνευ Σκιριτῶν ὄντων 
ἑξακοσίων, ἐν δὲ ἑκάστῳ λόχῳ πεντηκοστύες ἦσαν τέσσα- 
τῆς τε 
> ’ > , 3 ΄“ ’ ~ , > \ 
ἐνωμοτίας ἐμάχοντο ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ζυγῷ τέσσαρες" emt 
Ν ’ὔ » , Ν > ’ ε ’ > > ε 
δὲ βάθος ἐτάξαντο μὲν οὐ πάντες ὁμοίως, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς λο- 


ες, καὶ ἐν τῇ πεντηκοστύι ἐνωμοτίαι τέσσαρες. 
ε 


Ν 9 3 , > τῷ A Ν , 9. ΄.9 ra 
χαγὸς ἕκαστος ἐβούλετο, ἐπὶ πᾶν δὲ κατέστησαν ἐπὶ ὀκτώ. 

Ν Ν 9 Ν “A ’ὔ ἢ, A 
mapa δὲ ἅπαν πλὴν Σκιριτῶν τετρακόσιοι καὶ δυοῖν 


write the number accurately. Kr. sup- 
plies εἰ ἐπεχείρουν, Poppo and Bohme 
ei ἐβουλόμην. Either answers the pur- 
pose of introducing a prot. for ἂν 
ἐδυνάμην. See App. 

5. Sia τῆς πολιτείας τὸ κρυπτόν : 
διὰ τὸ ἔθος εἶναι Λακεδαιμονίοις πάντα 
κρύφα πράττειν, Schol. The order of 
words as in i. 32. 8, μετὰ τῆς ξυμμαχίας 
τῆς αἰτήσεως. ---Ἴ. [πλήθη] : see App. 

9. λόχοι μὲν γὰρ «ré.: the compu- 
tation of Thuc., which is undoubtedly 
correct as applied to the army en- 
gaged in the battle of Mantinea, 
though Xen. Rep. Lac. 11, 4 makes 
a different statement, is correctly 
summed up by the Schol.: ἔχει ἕκα- 
otros λόχος πεντηκοστύας τέσσαρας, καὶ 
γίνονται τῶν ἑπτὰ λόχων εἴκοσι ὀκτώ, 
ἔχει ἑκάστη πεντηκοστὺς ἐνωμοτίας τέσ- 
capas, καὶ γίνονται τῶν εἴκοσι ὀκτὼ πεν- 
τηκοστύων ἐνωμοτίαι ἑκατὸν δώδεκα. 
ἔχει ἑκάστη ἐνωμοτία ἄνδρας τριάκοντα 
δύο (i.e. 4 Χ 8, because four men stood 
in the first rank of each enomoty, and 
they were drawn up as a rule, ἐπὶ πᾶν, 
eight deep), ὥστε γίνεσθαι τὸν πάντα 
στρατὸν τρισχιλίους πεντακοσίους ὄγδοή- 
κοντα τέσσαρας (7K4X4K4X8= 
8684), Thuc. himself gives only the 


sum of the front rank of the army 
when drawn up: 7 (λόχοι) X 4 {πεν- 
τηκοστύες) Χ 4 (ἐνωμοτίαι) Χ 4 (ἄνδρες 
ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ (ζυγῷ) = 448. This multi- 
plied by 8 for the depth of the array 
gives likewise 3584, and with the 600 
Sciritae, makes the whole army of 
the Lacedaemonians 4184. See Riis- 
tow and Koechly, Gesch. d. gr. Kriegs- 
wesens, p. 90 ff.; Gilbert, Griechische 
Staatsalt. I. p. 73 ff. —12. ἐπὶ δὲ Ba- 
Qos... κατέστησαν ἐπὶ ὀκτώ: because 
it seemed strange that the depth 
of the lochi should be left to the 
discretion of the lochagi, Dobree 
struck out the words ἀλλ᾽ ὡς λοχαγὸς 
ἕκαστος ἐβούλετο, and went so far as 
to propose the omission of the whole 
passage, τῆς τε ἐνωμοτίας. . . ἐβού- 
Aero. Others also, and esp. Grote, 
find the passage troublesome. If we 
take the enomoty at 32 men (with the 
Schol.) and assume (with Thuc.) that 
four men stood in the front rank, 
then the arrangement of the remain- 
ing 28 men may have varied some- 
what, so as to cause a variation in the 
depth of the column. Still complete 
certainty is hardly to be obtained in 
this matter, — 16, ἡ πρώτη τάξις : the 


THUCYDIDES V. 69. 


69 δέοντες πεντήκοντα ἄνδρες ἡ πρώτη τάξις ἦν. 


ξυνιέναι 


ἐπεὶ δὲ 1 


ἔμελλον ἤδη, ἐνταῦθα καὶ παραινέσεις καθ᾽ 


ἑκάστους ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκείων στρατηγῶν τοιαίδε ἐγίγνοντο" 

Μαντινεῦσι μὲν ὅτι ὑπέρ τε πατρίδος ἡ μάχη ἔσται καὶ 
“ 9 ‘ 

5 ὑπὲρ ἀρχῆς ἅμα Kai δουλείας, THY μὲν μὴ πειρασαμένοις 


ἀφαιρεθῆναι, 


τῆς δὲ μὴ αὖθις πειρᾶσθαι. ᾿Αργείοις δὲ 


2 5, »“ nn ε ’ Ἁ “ > ’΄ 
ὑπερ τῆς τε παλαιᾶς ἡγεμονίας καὶ τῆς ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ 
ποτὲ ἰσομοιρίας, μὴ διὰ παντὸς στερισκομένους ἀνέχεσθαι, 


‘ 3, 9 > ‘ ‘ > 7 ε A ΄“ 
καὶ ἄνδρας ἅμα ἐχθροὺς καὶ ἀστυγείτονας ὑπὲρ πολλῶν 
10 ἀδικημάτων ἀμύνασθαι" τοῖς δὲ ᾿Αθηναίοις, καλὸν εἶναι 


μετὰ πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν ξυμμάχων ἀγωνιζομένους μη- 
δενὸς λείπεσθαι, καὶ ὅτι ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ Λακεδαιμο- 


οπὲ rank, the meaning being here 
further determined by παρὰ Gray, all 
along the line. 

69. Theleaders encourage their troops 
by suitable addresses. 

2. ξυνιέναι ἔμελλον: cf. c. 59. 22; 
iv. 94. 10.—4. καὶ ἅμα: and besides, 
stands opp. to and in close connexion 
with the preceding re, adding emphasis 
to the second clause. ἅμα is not to 
be const. with ἀρχῆς καὶ δουλείας. 
—5. τὴν μέν: τουτέστι τὴν ἀρχήν, 
Schol.— py: const. with ἀφαιρεθῆναι: 
not to lose. πειρασαμένοις is affirmative : 
after they had made a trial of it. (This 
relation is reversed in ii. 44. 9, ὧν 
ἄντις μὴ πειρασάμενος ἀγαθῶν στερίσκη- 
ται) For the truth of the state- 
ment, see 6. 29. 3 ff.—6. ἀφαιρεθῆναι, 
πειρᾶσθαι: the infs. denote the end 
or purpose of 4 μάχη ἔσται, as in ii. 
89. 45, 6 δὲ ἀγὼν μέγας ὑμῖν, ἢ κατα- 
λῦσαι τὴν ἐλπίδα ἢ καταστῆσαι τὸν φό- 
βον, the infs. express the purpose of 
6 ἀγών. GMT.97; H. 951.— τῆς δέ : 6. 
τῆς δουλείας, their former subjection to 
the supremacy of Sparta, for this is 
the meaning of dovAcia.—’ Ἀργείοις δέ : 


86. παραινέσεις ἐγίγνοντο. The object 
of the struggle is introduced as above 
by the prep. ὑπέρ, and the end to be 
attained is expressed by the infs. μὴ 
ἀνέχεσθαι and καὶ Gua ἀμύνασθαι. ----. 
τῆς τε παλαιᾶς ἡγεμονίας : this refers 
to the earliest times and the rule of 
Atridae, while τῆς ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ ἰσο- 
μορίας refers to the later relation to 
Sparta (in the times before the Per- 
sian war; see c. 41. 15), which is thus 
expressed by Hdt. vii. 149. 17, oi ’Ap- 
γεῖοί φασι οὐκ ἀνασχέσθαι τῶν Σπαρτιη- 
τέων τὴν πλεονεξίην. The opposition 
of these two relations is expressed by 
τε, καί. ---- 8. διὰ παντός : for ever. See 
on i. 38. 2.— στερισκομένους : supple- 
mentary partic. with ἀνέχεσθαι. GMT. 
112,1; H. 983. Cfi. 77. 6, δεινότερα 
τούτων πάσχοντες ἠνείχοντο; ii. 74. 2, 
ἠνείχοντο Kal γῆν τεμνομένην; vi. 16. 
20.—9. καὶ apa: as in 4.—10. ἀμύ- 
vacOat: aor., refers to the particu- 
lar battle before them. — εἶναι : the 
inf. depends, as does also the clause 
ὅτι... ἕξουσι, upon the idea of indir. 
disc. introduced by παραινέσεις ἐγιγ- 
vovro, —12. ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ; is em- 


123 


124 


THUCYDIDES V. 69, 70. 


, ΄ ΄ $35. ΄ \ , 
viovs νικήσαντες THY Te ἀρχὴν βεβαιοτέραν καὶ μείζω 
ἕξουσι, καὶ οὐ μή ποτέ τις αὐτοῖς ἄλλος ἐς τὴν γῆν 

A eet , Ν ’ lal ’ 
15 ἔλθῃ. τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αργείοις καὶ ξυμμάχοις τοιαῦτα παρῃνέθη" 
Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ καθ᾽ ἑκάστους τε καὶ μετὰ τῶν πολεμι- 


κῶν νόμων ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ὧν ἠπίσταντο τὴν παρακέ- 
λευσιν τῆς μνήμης * ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν ἐποιοῦντο, εἰδότες ἔρ- 
γων ἐκ πολλοῦ μελέτην πλείω σῴζουσαν ἣ λόγων Sv ὀλί- 


20 γου καλῶς ῥηθεῖσαν παραίνεσιν. 


Καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ἡ ξύνοδος ἦν, ᾿Αργεῖοι μὲν καὶ οἱ 
ξύμμαχοι ἐντόνως καὶ ὀργῇ χωροῦντες, Λακεδαιμόνιοι 


phatic: “on their own ground.” If the 
Lacedaemonians could be defeated 
there, the Athenians need never fear 
an attack from them in Attica, either 
by ἐσβολαί or ἐπιτειχισμός. This confi- 
dent expectation is expressed here, as 
in iv. 95. 6, by the strongest form of 
the neg. fut. ob μή wore with the aor. 
subjv. GMT. 89, 1; H. 1032. This 
clause is dependent upon ὅτι in 12. 
16. καθ᾽ ἑκάστους : refers to the 
various parts of the Lacedaemonian 
army as Herbst, Jahrbb. 1858, p. 712, 
has shown, who says, ‘for the Spartans 
regarded an army composed of Pelo- 
ponnesian contingents as their own, as 
Lacedaemonian.’ Cf. ii. 39.11. Opp. to 
the various contingents (καθ᾽ éxdorous) 
stand the Lacedaemonians themselves 
(ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς). τὴν παρακέλευσιν 
ἐποιοῦντο belongs with both. But with 
καθ᾽ ἑκάστους this conveys only the 
general notion of exhortation, while 
for the Lacedaemonians proper the 
characteristic manner of the exhorta- 
tion is described. Among themselves 
with (the aid of) war-songs they made 
their exhortation of the memory (i.e. by 
awakening the memory) of those things 
which they knew. μετὰ τῶν πολεμικῶν 
νόμων" νόμους πολεμικοὺς λέγει TA ᾷσμα- 


τα ἅπερ Hoov οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι μέλλοντες 
μάχεσθαι, Schol. They sang the war- 
songs which arouse the courage. Cf. 
the fragments of Tyrt., Bergk, Poet. 
Lyr. Gr. IL. p. 8 ff. νόμος is used in 
this sense by Plat. Legg. iii. 700 b. 
See App.—17. ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ὧν 
ἠπίσταντο τὴν παρακέλευσιν τῆς μνή- 
μῆς ἐποιοῦντο, κτέ.: παρεκελεύοντο 
ἀλλήλοις μεμνῆσθαι ὧν μεμαθήκεσαν καὶ 
ἠπίσταντο, ϑοΠο0]. This consciousness, 
which they were to renew in their 
memory, is expressed in εἰδότες... 
παραίνεσιν. --- 18. ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν : see 
App. 

70. Both armies march into battle, 
the Lacedaemonians advancing to the 
music of flutes. 

A. Gellius, Noct. Ait. i. 11. 5 quotes 
this chap. with the remark: auctor 
historiae graecae grauissi- 
mus Thucydides Lacedaemo- 
nios summos bellatores non 
cornuum tubarumue signis, 
sed tibiarum modulis in proe- 
liis esse usos refert. i 

1. ἡ Evvodos ἦν, ᾿Αργεῖοι μὲν χωροῦν- 
τες Λακεδαιμόνιοι δέ: a decided ana- 
coluthon, ἡ ξύνοδος ἦν being treated 
as if it were ξυνῆλθον. See on ii. 53. 
13.—2, ὀργῇ: summa alacritate 


THUCYDIDES V. 70, 71. 


δὲ βραδέως καὶ ὑπὸ αὐλητῶν πολλῶν νόμῳ ἐγκαθεστώ- 

των, οὐ τοῦ θείου χάριν, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ὁμαλῶς μετὰ ῥυθμοῦ 
’ ’» Ἀ ‘ 7 > A ε ld 

5 βαίνοντες προέλθοιεν καὶ μὴ διασπασθείη αὐτοῖς ἡ τάξις, 


9 “A ‘ , ’ > ” , 
ὅπερ φιλεῖ τὰ μεγάλα στρατόπεδα ἐν ταῖς προσόδοις 


ποιεῖν. 


᾿ς 
ν 


Ξυνιόντων δ᾽ ἔτι Ἄγις ὁ βασιλεὺς τοιόνδε ἐβουλεύ- 
σατο δρᾶσαι: τὰ στρατόπεδα ποιεῖ μὲν καὶ ἅπαντα 


τοῦτο" ἐπὶ τὰ δεξιὰ κέρατα αὑτῶν ἐν ταῖς ξυνόδοις μᾶλ- 


λον ἐξωθεῖται, καὶ περιίσχουσι κατὰ τὸ τῶν ἐναντίων 


εὐώνυμον ἀμφότεροι τῷ δεξιῷ, διὰ τὸ φοβουμένους προσ- 

‘ Ἀ 9 ε A »“ ca > a 
στέλλειν τὰ γυμνὰ ἕκαστον ὡς μάλιστα TH τοῦ ἐν δεξιᾷ 
παρατεταγμένου ἀσπίδι καὶ νομίζειν τὴν πυκνότητα τῆς 


> Nee an » 
ξυγκλήσεως εὐσκεπαστότατον εἶναι" καὶ "ἡγεῖται μὲν τῆς 


(CL). Cf. ii. 85. 9; vii. 68. 2. — 3. ὑπὸ 
αὐλητῶν πολλῶν νόμῳ ἐγκαθεστώτων : 
to the sound of many flute-players placed 
among them according to custom. 'This 
custom is freq. mentioned. Cf. Hat. 
1.17.5 f., ὑπὸ συρίγγων ; Cie. Tuse. ii. 
16. 37, Spartiatarum, quorum 
procedit mora ad tibiam; 
Plut. Lyc. 22, ῥυθμῷ πρὸς τὸν αὐλὸν 
ἐμβαινόντων. See also Milton, Para- 
dise Lost, i. 549 ff. See App.— ἐγκαθ- 
εἐστώτων: 1.6. καθεστώτων ἐν αὐτοῖς, 
referring to their position in the 
ranks: inter exercitum positi, 
Gellius. — 4. οὐ τοῦ θείου χάριν: non 
prorsus ex aliquo ritu religi- 
onum neque rei diuinae gra- 
tia, Gellius.— 5. προέλθοιεν: see 
App. — 6. φιλεῖ: solent. See oni. 
78.5.—T7. ποιεῖν : almost in the sense 
of πάσχειν. So also inc. 71. 2. 

71. Agis tries to extend his left wing 
and strengthen it by a detachment from 
his right. 

1. ξυνιόντων: gen. abs. without a 
subst. Of.c.17. 11; i. 2. 9.—2. τὰ 
στρατόπεδα ποιεῖ μέν κτέ. : the explan- 


ation of τοιόνδε, which begins with 
δείσας δὲ Ἄγις, 14, is preceded by some 
observations on the disposition of all 
armies (const. καὶ ἅπαντα with τὰ στρα- 
τόπεδα) before ἃ battle. The applica- 
tion of these remarks to this particu- 
lar battle explains the purpose of the 
movement undertaken by Agis. ποιεῖ 
is used like ποιεῖν in 6. 70.7. τοῦτο, 
explaining what follows, is elsewhere 
in Thuc. followed by γάρ. See App.— 
3. ἐν ταῖς ξυνόδοις : 1.6. ἐν τῷ ξυνιέναι: 
not in the battle itself, but in the 
advance to attack. — μᾶλλον ἐξωθεῖ- 
ται: i.e. beyond their original position, 
more toward the right. ἐξωθεῖται, ἐκτ εί- 
νεται, Schol.—4. περιίσχουσι: like 
περιέσχον, 12; outflank, extend further. 
Cf. iii. 107. 16, μεῖζον γὰρ ἐγένετο καὶ 
περιέσχε τὸ τῶν Πελοποννησίων στρατό- 
πεδον. --- κατὰ τὸ ... εὐώνυμον : opposite 
their opponents’ left wing. See oni. 33. 
22, κατ᾽ αὐτούς; 48.12.—5. προσστέλ- 
λειν : see Αρν.--- 8. εὐσκεπαστότατον : 
prob. neut., acc. to the usage of Thuc. 
Gf. i. 10.1; 138.27 ; iii. 37. 2; iv. 62.3; 
76.15; vi. 39.1. So far as the form is 


125 


126 


THUCYDIDES V. 71. 


ey’. , ε , A ὃ a , θυ. 
αἰτίας ταύτης 6 πρωτοστάτης τοῦ δεξιοῦ κέρως, προθυ- 
10 μούμενος ἐξαλλάσσειν ἀεὶ τῶν ἐναντίων τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γύμ- 


νωσιν, ἕπονται δὲ διὰ τὸν αὐτὸν φόβον καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι. 


Ν / ’ \ ε “Ὁ 4 a 4 nr 
καὶ TOTE περιέσχον μεν οἱ Μαντινὴς πολὺ T@ κερᾳ των 


Σκιριτῶν, ἔτι δὲ πλέον οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ Τεγεᾶται 


“ 3 , 9 A Ν 4 > 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὅσῳ μεῖζον TO στράτευμα εἶχον. 


δείσας 


15 δὲ ἌἌγις μὴ σφῶν κυκλωθῇ τὸ εὐώνυμον, καὶ νομίσας 


» / Ν ’ Lal Ν ’ Ν 
ἄγαν περιέχειν τοὺς Μαντινέας, τοῖς μὲν Σκιρίταις καὶ 


Βρασιδείοις ἐσήμηνεν ἐπεξαγαγόντας ἀπὸ σφῶν ἐξισῶσαι 


τοῖς Μαντινεῦσιν, ἐς δὲ τὸ διάκενον τοῦτο παρήγγελλεν 


ἀπὸ τοῦ δεξιοῦ κέρως δύο λόχους τῶν πολεμάρχων Ἵπ- 


20 πονοΐδᾳ καὶ ᾿Αριστοκλεῖ ἔχουσι παρελθεῖν καὶ ἐσβαλόντας. 


ληρῶ (ζ 0 θ᾽ ἑαυτῶν δεξιῷ ἔτι περιουσίαν 
πληρῶσαι, νομίζων τῷ ν ¢ ρ 


concerned, it might also be fem. See 
on iii. 89. 21; 101. 9. --- ἡγεῖται τῆς 
αἰτίας: “is originally responsible ” 
(Jowett). — 9. ὁ πρωτοστάτης: the 
man at the extreme right of the front 
rank. Cf. Poll. i.127.—10. ἐξαλλάσ- 
σε . γύμνωσιν : μὴ κατὰ δόρυ τοῦ 
ἐναντίου ἔχειν τὰ γυμνὰ τοῦ σώματος, 
τουτέστι τὰ δεξιά, Schol. ἐξαλλάσσειν 
with gen., as here, means withdraw 
Jrom. 

12. καὶ τότε: and tn this case. The 
special case illustrates the preceding 
general statements. One would ex- 
pect here τότε δὲ καὶ of Μαντινῆς to 
correspond to τὰ στρατόπεδα ποιεῖ μὲν 
καὶ ἅπαντα ταῦτα in 2, but the clause 
with δέ corresponding to μέν of 2 has 
been so long deferred that it is at last 
omitted entirely, and a new sent. is 


begun.—oit Μαντινῆς. . . τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων: of. c. 67. 
17. ἐσήμηνεν : σημαίνειν (cf. c. το. 


18; ii. 84. 5; vii. 50. 26) and παραγ- 
γέλλειν (cf. c. το. 14; 73. 11) are used 
esp. of military orders. — ἐπεξαγαγόν- 


τας : advancing their line. — ἀπὸ σφῶν : 
Jrom themselves, i.e. from their main 
body. Agis said “from us” (ἀφ᾽ 
ἡμῶν), which becomes in indir. disc. 
ard σφῶν. ---ἐξισῶσαι : is intrans. Cf, 
vi. 87.23. They were to move to the 
left, that they might become equal to 
the Mantineans who form the enemy’s 
right wing, 7.e. in order to avoid being 
outflanked. — 18. τὸ διάκενον τοῦτο: 
the gap formed by advancing the 
Sciritae and the Brasidean contingent 
toward the left.—19. τῶν πολεμάρ- 
χων: is part. gen., depending imme- 
diately upon the proper names. & 
i. 24. 5; 126. 7.—20. ” 

perhaps the brother of King Pleisto- 
anax, mentioned in c. 16. 23, if the 
reading ἀδελφοῦ is correct. — ἐσβα- 
Advras: 1.6. throwing themselves into 
the space made vacant by the move- 
ment of the Sciritae and Brasideans 
toward the left. — 21. πληρῶσαι: 86 
τὸ didkevov. — περιουσίαν: cf. 14, ὅσῳ 
μεῖζον τὸ στράτευμα εἶχον. — 22, τὸ 
κατὰ τοὺς Μαντινέας : the part opposed 


8 


—— 


72 ἕεσθαι. 


THUCYDIDES V. 71, 72. 


μι Ν Ν Ν Ν ᾽’ , / 
ἔσεσθαι καὶ τὸ κατὰ τοὺς Μαντινέας βεβαιότερον τετά- 


Ξυνέβη οὖν αὐτῷ ἅτε ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἐφόδῃ καὶ ἐξ 


2 7 / 4 3 ’ Ν Ν ε 
ὀλίγου παραγγείλαντι τόν τε ᾿Αριστοκλέα καὶ τὸν Ἵππο- 
νοΐδαν μὴ θελῆσαι παρελθεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τὸ 
Ἔ τωρ 4 ’ > / " 
αἰτίαμα ὕστερον φεύγειν ἐκ Σπάρτης δόξαντας μαλακι- 
~ \ \ , 4, ~ / ‘ Ἁ 
σθῆναι, καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους φθάσαι τῇ προσμίξει, καὶ 
a > ee oe % ‘ ΄ ε > An 
κελεύσαντος αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τοὺς Σκιρίτας ws οὐ παρῆλθον 


οἱ λόχοι, πάλιν αὖ σφίσι προσμῖξαι, μὴ δυνηθῆναι ἔτι 


μηδὲ τούτους ξυγκλῇσαι. 


to the Mantineans, i.e. the left wing, 
which was formed by the Sciritae. 
See on 4. — βεβαιότερον τετάξεσθαι: 
ἐν ἀσφαλείᾳ ἔσεσθαι, ὡς ἂν μὴ δυνάμενον 
κυκλωθῆναι, Schol. 

72. This order is disobeyed, conse- 
quently the left wing is defeated, but the 
centre and right wing gain a decisive 
victory. 

1. ξυνέβη κτέ.: the two clauses 
τόν τε ᾿Αριστοκλέα. .. μὴ θελῆσαι πα- 
ρελθεῖν and καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους φθάσαι 
τῇ προσμίξει depend upon ξυνέβη. Be- 
tween these is inserted a third clause, 
ἀλλὰ Kal... μαλακισθῆναι, which is 
really parenthetical, but is formally 
dependent upon ξυνέβη because it is 
attracted by its surroundings into the 
ace. and inf. See on c. 48. 3. St. 
would like to read ἔφευγον and δό- 
tavres}; but it is more likely that 
Thuc. employed this peculiar form of 
attraction than that it crept in as a 
later corruption. —@re: const. with 
παραγγείλαντι, for ἅτε is always joined 
with partics. in Thue. Cf iv. 94.7; 
130. 25; vii. 44. 30; 58. 20; 85. 15; 
viii. 52.15. The two adv. expressions, 
ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἐφόδῳ and ἐξ ὀλίγου (at 
short notice) mutually explain one 
another. — 4. φεύγειν : they were ex- 
tiled, doubtless after a trial. Cf. ec. 


ἀλλὰ μάλιστα δὴ κατὰ πάντα 


26. 24. --- δόξαντας μαλακισθῆναι: be- 
cause they were considered (either by 
the people or by their judges) to have 
acted like cowards. —5. φθάσαι τῇ 
προσμίξει: equiv. to προσμίσγοντας 
φθάσαι, they got ahead of them with their 
attack, i.e. they attacked them before 
the movement was carried out. The 
verb προσμιγνύναι in the sense of at- 
tack occurs in i. 111. 13; ii. 39. 17; 
iv. 96.6. The use of the dat. is pecu- 
liar. St.compares Dem. xx1. 38, ὀργῇ 
καὶ τρόπου προπετείᾳ φθάσας τὸν λογι- 
σμόν. See ΑΡΡ. --- 6. ἐπὶ τοὺς Σκιρί- 
τας: this stands before the conj. ὡς 
for emphasis. Cf. i. 19. 2; ii. 64. 17; 
iii. 56.26; iv. 27.2. As the two lochi 
did not move to fill the space left 
vacant (τὸ διάκενον τοῦτο) by the de- 
parture of the Sciritae, Agis com- 
manded the latter to return to the 
main body of the army (σφίσι like ἀπὸ 
σφῶν in 17, and προσμῖξαι as in c. 58. 
8 and iii. 106. 14). This, however, 
they were unable to do, because the 
enemy were already between them 
and their friends. See App. —8. 
ξυγκλῇσαι : intr. as in iv. 35. 2. 

8. ἀλλὰ μάλιστα δή: the force of 
this is the same as that of μάλιστα δή 
of c. 66. 6, except that it is strength- 
ened by ἀλλά. --- 9. ἐμπειρίᾳ; the 


127 


— 


128 THUCYDIDES V. 72. 


ee , ’ > ᾽’ . , “A > 4 
τῇ ἐμπειρίᾳ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐλασσωθέντες τότε TH ἀνδρίᾳ 
“5 > e , 3 δὺ Ν > Ν 

10 ἔδειξαν οὐχ ἧσσον περιγενόμενοι. ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἐν χερσὶν ὃ 
ἐγίγνοντο τοῖς ἐναντίοις, τὸ μὲν τῶν Μαντινέων δεξιὸν 
τρέπει αὐτῶν τοὺς Σκιρίτας καὶ τοὺς Βρασιδείους, καὶ 
ἐσπεσόντες οἱ Μαντινῆς καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν 
᾿Αργείων οἱ χίλιοι λογάδες κατὰ τὸ διάκενον καὶ οὐ ξυγ- 

15 κλῃσθὲν τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους διέφθειρον, καὶ κυκλω- 
4 ¥ Ν > ld 3 Ν ε 4 ἈΝ A 

σάμενοι ἔτρεψαν καὶ ἐξέωσαν ἐς τὰς ἁμάξας Kal τῶν 

πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐπιτεταγμένων ἀπέκτεινάν τινας. καὶ 4 
4 Ν ε A ε , nw > »¥ 

ταύτῃ μὲν ἡσσῶντο οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι: τῷ δ᾽ ἄλλῳ στρα- 

” > 
τοπέδῳ, Kal μάλιστα TO μέσῳ, ἧπερ ὁ βασιλεὺς “Ayis ἢν 


20 καὶ περὶ αὐτὸν οἱ τριακόσιοι ἱππῆς καλούμενοι, προσ- 


experience and the ease and accu- 
racy in the execution of manoeuvres 
which result from experience. In this 
the Lacedaemonians were inferior 
throughout (κατὰ πάντα ἐλασσωθέντες). 
Indeed, this was the first great battle 
upon open ground in which they had 
engaged for many years (see Miiller- 
Striibing, Thuc. Forsch. p. 12 f.), and 
at the very beginning of the battle 
they did not succeed in carrying out 
the movements commanded by Agis. 
Nevertheless they proved that they 
were superior in courage, and thereby 
won the victory. ἔδειξαν περιγενόμενοι, 
showed by the result that they were supe- 
rior (const. as in c. 9. 40 and iv. 73. 
8), is the expression of one who re- 
gards the battle from a later point of 
view ; hence the aor. (not περιγιγνόμενοι 
with Poppo and St.). The account of 
the actual events is introduced by the 
following γάρ. See App. 

12. αὐτῶν: ie. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων. 
The gen. of the pron. stands first as 
in i. 30. 14; iv. 199.2.—14. οἱ χίλιοι 
λογάδες: cf. c. 67. 13.—od ξυγκλῃ- 
σϑέν: cf. μὴ δυνηθῆναι ξυγκλῇσαι, 7.— 


15. τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους : ἴ.6, those 
who, acc. to c. 67. 5 f., had been placed 
next to (és) the Sciritae and Brasi- 
deans, but had been separated from 
them by their movement toward the 
left (c. γι. ὃ 3). The enemy now 
came in between the Sciritae and the 
Lacedaemonians, and attacked the 
flank of the latter. — διέφθειρον : 
impf., “they inflicted great losses 
upon them.” Cf. iii. 98. 12.— κυκλω- 
σάμενοι : since they had advanced 
into the διάκενον. ---16. és τὰς ἁμάξας : 
ἔσω τῶν ἁμαξῶν, Schol. Among the 
baggage-wagons which stood behind 
the army. Near these the πρεσβύτεροι 
were drawn up in reserve, ἐπιτεταγ- 
μένοι. 

20. οἱ τριακόσιοι ἱππῆς καλούμενοι : 
ef. Hat. viii. 124. 18, τριηκόσιοι Σπαρ- 
τιητέων λογάδες, οὗτοι οἵπερ ἱππέες κα- 
λέονται (perhaps Kr., followed by St. 
and vy. Herwerden, is right in insert- 
ing οἱ before ἱππῇς). These men who 
‘were chosen from the flower of the 
Spartan youth, served as a royal body- 
guard as well on foot as on horse- 
back.’ Hermann, Griech. Staatsalt. 


α a 


THUCYDIDES V. 72, 73. 


al 5 ~ 
πεσόντες τῶν ᾿Αργείων τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις καὶ πέντε λό- 


χοις ὠνομασμένοις καὶ Κλεωναίοις καὶ ᾿Ορνεάταις καὶ 


᾿Αθηναίων τοῖς παρατεταγμένοις ἔτρεψαν οὐδὲ ἐς χεῖρας 


τοὺς πολλοὺς ὑπομείναντας, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἐπῇσαν οἱ Λακε- 


, > 3 , ‘ » a ‘ 
25 δαιμόνιοι, εὐθὺς ἐνδόντας καὶ ἔστιν ovs καὶ καταπατὴη- 


73 θέντας τοῦ μὴ φθῆναι τὴν ἐγκατάληψιν. 


ε \ ΄ 
ως δὲ ταυτῃ 


3 ΄ Ν Lee , \ ΄ , 
ἐνεδεδώκει TO Τῶν Ἀργείων και ξυμμάχων στρατευμα, 


΄, Ν ἊΝ ἅμα καὶ ἐφ᾽ ἑκά oe Lae 
Tapeppynyvu TO YON Ap € eKaTEepa, και AGUA TO 


§ 29. 15 ff. They certainly served 
on foot, but of their use as cavalry 
there is no proof. See Gilbert, Griech. 
Staatsalt.1.p.77.— 21. τῶν ᾿Αργείων : 
see App. --- τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις καὶ 
πέντε λόχοις ὠνομασμένοις : ἅμα ἄνα- 
γνωστέον πεντελόχοις. Schol. Noth- 
ing is known of the relation of these 
divisions of the Argive troops to one 
another, or to the χίλιοι λογάδες of 14, 
and c. 67.13. ὠνομασμένοις indicates 
that πέντε λόχοι Or πεντέλοχοι was the 
conventional name of a division of 
troops, which seems, in conjunction 
with the πρεσβύτεροι, to be identical 
with the ἄλλοι ᾿Αργεῖοι of c. 67. 15. 
See Arnold’s note on this passage. — 
23. ᾿Αθηναίων τοῖς παρατεταγμένοις: 
this is that part of the Attic contin- 
gent (cf. c. 61.1; 67.17) which stood 
next the Orneatae, furthest toward 
the right. The fortunes of the main 
body of the Athenians are related in 
c. 73. 4 ΤΥ. ---- οὐδὲ és χεῖρας ὑπομεί- 
ναντας: ἴ.6. οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ ἐς χεῖρας 
ἐλθεῖν ὑπομείναντας : “not waiting until 
they came to close quarters.” Simi- 
larly, μήτε és ἀλκὴν ὑπομεῖναι, iii. 108. 
5.—25. καταπατηθέντας : sc. ὑπ᾽ ἀλ- 
λήλων, as Grote, VI. ο. 56, p. 356 f., 
has shown.— 26. τὴν ἐγκατάληψιν : 
correctly explained by Grote as subj. 
of μὴ φθῆναι. This is equiv. to τοῦ 
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους μὴ φθῆναι ἐγκαταλα- 


βόντας αὐτούς. In their panic they 
fell under the feet of their own com- 
rades, running away, that the enemy 
might not catch them before they 
could’ escape. ἐγκατάληψιν is very 
expressive: “the holding fast, while 
still on the spot ” (ἐν) ; Grote trans- 
lates: “the actual grasp of the Lace- 
daemonians.” — 26. τοῦ μή: with inf. 
expressing purpose. See on i. 4. 6, 
τοῦ Tas προσόδους μᾶλλον ἰέναι αὐτῷ. 
GMT. 98, 1; H. 960. 

73. The Athenians were saved from 
excessive losses by the assistance of their - 
cavalry; nor did the Lacedaemonians 
pursue their defeated opponents very 
far. 

3. παρερρήγνυντο, ἐκυκλοῦτο: the 
two impfs., each with ἅμα, indicate the 
moment of the greatest peril. “The 
(defeated) Argives and their allies 
were on the point of being entirely 
severed from the rest of the army, 
and at the same time the right wing 
of the enemy was on the point of 
surrounding the Athenians.” Among 
the allies the body of Athenians men- 
tioned in c. 72. 23 is included. of 
᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ ξύμμαχοι is to be supplied 
as subj. of παρερρήγνυντο. Cf. iv. 96. 
25; vi. 70. 10.—éq’ ἑκάτερα: they 
were separated on the right from the 
victorious Mantineans, who were 
pressing forward, and on the left 


129 


180 


THUCYDIDES V. 73. 


δεξιὸν τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ Τεγεατῶν ἐκυκλοῦτο τῷ 


5 περιέχοντι σφῶν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, καὶ ἀμφοτέρωθεν 
αὐτοὺς κίνδυνος περιειστήκει, τῇ μὲν κυκλουμένους, τῇ 


δὲ ἤδη ἡσσημένους. 


\ ’ 5. ἃ wn 4 5 
καὶ μάλιστ᾽ ἂν τοῦ στρατεύματος 


5 ’ > A ou Ὁ“ μ ’ > nw > 
ἐταλαιπώρησαν, εἰ μὴ OL ἱππῆς παρόντες αὕτοις ὠφέλι- 


μοι ἦσαν. 


> 
καὶ ξυνέβη τὸν *Ayw, ὡς ἤσθετο τὸ εὐώνυμον 2 


A lal Ν Ν Ν ,ὕ Ν a > ’ 
10 σφῶν πόονουν TO Κατα TOVS Μαντινέας και τῶν Ἀργείων 


τοὺς χιλίους, παραγγεῖλαι παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι χωρῆσαι 


; ΑΝ Ν 7 
€7l TO νικωμέενον. 


Ν / ΄ ε \ 3 
καὶ γενομένου τούτου οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθη- 


“Ὁ > 4 ε “Ὁ Ἀ 5» 7 3 Ν lal 
ναῖοι ἐν τούτῳ, ὡς παρῆλθε καὶ ἐξέκλινεν ἀπὸ σφῶν 


Ν ’ PB .6 ’ 3 A \ “A > ’ 
TO στρατευμα, καθ ησύυχιαν ἐσώθησαν και τῶν ᾿Αργείων 


> 39 A Ν ε ld 
15 μετ᾽ αὐτῶν τὸ ἡσσηθέν. 


οἱ δὲ Μαντινῆς καὶ οἱ ξύμμα- 


Ν a > , ε Χ (ὃ ΓΕ, Ν Ν 5 Lad 
χοι και τῶν Ἀργείων οι ογα ες OUKETL προς TO εγκει- 


~ > ’, Ν , > > > ε fal 
σθαι τοῖς ἐναντίοις τὴν γνώμην εἶχον, ἀλλ᾽ ὁρῶντες 


’ / td ‘\ Ν 
τους TE σφετέρους νενικημένους και TOUS Λακεδαιμο- 


’ 3 , 3 Ν > , 
vious ἐπιφερομένους ἐς φυγὴν ἐτράποντο. 


\ a \ 
και τῶν μεν 4 


20 Μαντινέων καὶ πλείους διεφθάρησαν, τῶν δὲ ᾿Αργείων 


‘from the main body of the Athenians, 
who composed the extreme left wing 
(see c. 67. 17), and were now in dan- 
ger of being surrounded by the right 
wing of the Lacedaemonians and Te- 
geans.—4. τῷ περιέχοντι σφῶν: cf. 
c. 71. 135.—6. αὐτούς : sc. τοὺς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίους, refers to them all, so that their 
two divisions are designated in their 
situation at the moment, the one as 
κυκλούμενοι (pres. pass. on the point of 
being surrounded), the other as ἧσση- 
μένοι acc. to c. 72.23 ff.—8. of ἱππῆς: 
i.e. the three hundred of c. 61. 2 and 
67. 18. --- παρόντες : by their presence, 
because the enemy dared not come 
near them; or possibly we should 
read παριόντες, by advancing to protect 
the foot-force. 

9. καὶ ξυνέβη: then it happened. — 


s 


τὸ εὐώνυμον σφῶν: cfc. 71. 15. —11, 


παραγγεῖλαι : see on 6.71. 17.— χωρῆ- 
σαι ἐπὶ τὸ νικώμενον : to go to (assist) 
the defeated part of the army (the left 
wing). This movement is described in 
the following παρῆλθε καὶ ἐξέκλινε ἀπὸ 
σφῶν (τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων) τὸ στράτευμα: 
they turned toward the left and 
moved away from the Athenians. 
This intr. use of ἐκκλίνειν does not 
occur elsewhere. 

15. τὸ ἡσσηθέν : i.e. the part of the 
Argives which had been defeated 
in c. 72. 21. The aor. is used in 
reference to the action there de- 
scribed; the pf. ἡσσημένους (7), in 
reference to the condition resulting 
from that action. — 16. πρὸς τὸ éyxet- 
oar: cf c. 72. 16 ff. —19. ἐπιφερομέ- 
vous: this results from the χωρῆσαι 
ἐπὶ τὸ νικώμενον of 11. 

20, καὶ πλείους : these words are opp. 


THUCYDIDES V. 73, 74. 131 


λογάδων τὸ πολὺ ἐσώθη. ἡ μέντοι φυγὴ καὶ ἀποχώρη- 
3 ’ὕ 5 A Ἀ > ε A , 

σις ov βίαιος οὐδὲ μακρὰ ἦν οἱ yap Λακεδαιμόνιοι 

μέχρι μὲν τοῦ τρέψαι χρονίους τὰς μάχας καὶ βεβαίους 

τῷ μένειν ποιοῦνται, τρέψαντες δὲ βραχείας καὶ οὐκ ἐπὶ 

25 πολὺ τὰς διώξεις. 

74 Καὶ ἡ μὲν μάχη τοιαύτη Kal ὅτι ἐγγύτατα τούτων 1 
5 ’ὔὕ, ’ A , , A nw ε nw 
ἐγένετο, πλείστου δὴ χρόνου μεγίστη δὴ τῶν Ἑλληνικῶν 

ot δὲ Aa- 2 


κεδαιμόνιοι προθέμενοι τῶν πολεμίων νεκρῶν τὰ ὅπλα 


“ 
ἋΨ 


καὶ ὑπὸ ἀξιολογωτάτων πόλεων ξυνελθοῦσα. 


a 27% μ᾿ Ν Ν Ἂς > , ‘ 
5 τροπαῖον εὐθὺς ἵστασαν Kal τοὺς νεκροὺς ἐσκύλευον καὶ 
Ν “Ὁ ’ὔ Ν 
τοὺς αὑτῶν ἀνείλοντο καὶ ἀπήγαγον ἐς Τεγέαν, οὗπερ 
5 / \ Ν “A ’ ε ’ 3 ’ 
ἐτάφησαν, καὶ τοὺς τῶν πολεμίων ὑποσπόνδους ἀπέδοσαν. 


to the following τῶν ᾿Αργείων λογάδων 
τὸ πολὺ ἐσώθη. Of these only a few 
fell, while a greater number of the 
Mantineans were cut down. καί is 
emphatic; not only did they take to 
flight, but a considerable number 
were killed (more than of the λογάδες; 
200, ace. to c. 74. 9). See App. — 
22. ov βίαιος; “not hotly pursued.” 
Cf. iv. 31. 15. — οὐδὲ μακρά : correctly 
explained by the Schol. as referring 
to distance: οὐδὲ ἐπὶ πολὺ διάστημα.--- 
23. χρονίους (in i. 12. 3, with fem. end- 
ing xpovia) καὶ βεβαίους : these are 
pred. adjs. with τὰς μάχας ποιοῦνται; 
corresponding to advs. with μάχεσθαι. 
So βραχείας (temporal) belongs with 
τὰς διώξεις, sc. ποιοῦνται. Plut. Lyc. 
22 makes a similar statement con- 
cerning the Lacedaemonian manner 
of fighting. 

74. The number of slain on both 
sides. 

1, τοιαύτη καὶ ὅτι ἐγγύτατα τού- 
των: cf. 1. 22. 17, τοιούτων καὶ παραπλη- 
σίων; vii. 42. 10, ἴσον καὶ παραπλήσιον. 
Slightly different is vii. 86.23, τοιαύτῃ 
ἢ ὅτι ἐγγύτατα τούτων αἰτίᾳ. --- 2. 


πλείστου δὴ χρόνου μεγίστη δή: δή is 
repeated with the sups. on account of 
the special emphasis. On the gen. of 
time, see Kr. Spr. 47, 2, 3.—3. ξυνελ- 
θοῦσα: see App. 

4. προθέμενοι τῶν πολεμίων νεκρῶν 
τὸ ὅπλα: 1.6. πρὸ τῶν πολεμίων νεκρῶν 
τὰ ὅπλα θέμενοι (see on ii, 2. 22): 
“they halted in front of the enemy’s 
dead.” So const. by Haase, Lucubr. 
Thuc. p. 7. Herbst, Jahrbb. 1858, p. 
693, shows, by comparison of this 
passage with Xen. Ages. ii. 15, that 
this was done ‘ because then the en- 
emy would certainly be compelled to 
ask for their dead, and thus own 
themselves defeated. — 5. ἵστασαν : 
impf. The erection of the τροπαῖον 
was not perfected until after the en- 
emy owned their defeat. This they 
did ὑποσπόνδους τοὺς νεκροὺς κομιζό- 
μενοι (cf. ii. 79. 29) or ἀναιρούμενοι 
(cf. vii. 5. 10), which corresponds 
to the ἀποδιδόναι of the victors. — 
ἐσκύλευον : the remark of Aelian V.H. 
vi. 6, οὐκ ἐξῆν ἀνδρὶ Λάκωνι οὐδὲ σκυλεῦ- 
σαι τὸν πολέμιον applies, then, only to 
the time of the actual battle. 


132 


75 κοσίους ἀποθανεῖν. 


THUCYDIDES V. 74, 75. 


* Ol. 90. 3; B.c. 418, Aug. 


ἀπέθανον δὲ ᾿Αργείων μὲν καὶ "Opveatav καὶ Κλεωναίων 
ἑπτακόσιοι, Μαντινέων δὲ διακόσιοι, καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων ξὺν 
3 4 4 Ἅ, ε 5 / 
10 Αἰγινήταις διακόσιοι Kal οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἀμφότεροι. Aa- 
’ Ν ε Ν 4 > > 4 
κεδαιμονίων δὲ οἱ μὲν ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἐταλαιπώρησαν 
ν Ν > , , 5" ᾽ ἢ, ὦ A Ν 
ὥστε καὶ ἀξιόλογόν τι ἀπογενέσθαι" αὐτῶν δὲ χαλεπὸν 
\ > \ 9 4 θ , θ 9. 7 δὲ Ἀ 
μὲν ἣν τὴν ἀλήθειαν πυθέσθαι, ἐλέγοντο δὲ περὶ τρια- 


τῆς δὲ μάχης μελλούσης ἔσεσθαι 


A 4, ε . A 3, , 
καὶ Πλειστοάναξ ὃ ἕτερος βασιλεὺς ἔχων τούς TE πρε- 
΄ Ἦν 7 3 , Ν Ζ \ 
σβυτέρους καὶ νεωτέρους ἐβοήθησε: καὶ μέχρι μὲν Te- 
γέας ἀφίκετο, πυθόμενος δὲ τὴν νίκην ἀπεχώρησε. καὶ 3 
ἈΝ S04 , ἈΝ > na , 9 
τοὺς ἀπὸ Κορίνθου καὶ ἔξω ἰσθμοῦ ξυμμάχους ἀπ- 
, , ε ὃ ΄ Ν Φ. ὧδ ΝΣ 
έστρεψαν πέμψαντες οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀνα- 
’ὔ \ ‘ ’, > ’ * ’ A 
χωρήσαντες καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἀφέντες (ἢ Κάρνεια yap 


> a ᾿ ὦ 5, Ν ε Ν > 
αυτοις ετυγχᾶνον ὄντα) Τὴν Εορτὴν γον. 


τ: ἅν 
καὶ Τὴν VITO 


A ε , , > , LW ΨΙ ¥ ’ 
τῶν Ἑλλήνων τότε ἐπιφερομένην αἰτίαν ἔς τε μαλακίαν 


9. ξὺν Αἰγινήταις : this shows that 
Cleruchi from Aegina (see ii. 27. 5 ff.) 
had also been called out.—10. ot 
στρατηγοὶ ἀμφότεροι : Laches and Ni- 
costratus. Cf. c. 61. 2.—11. οἱ Evp- 
μαχοι: 1.6. the allies from Arcadia, 
who are not mentioned in the account 
of the battle; hence οὐκ ἐταλαιπώρη- 
σαν, they had not been exposed and 
had not suffered any considerable 
losses. — 12. ὥστε καὶ ἀξιόλογόν τι 
ἀπογενέσθαι: καί has the effect of 
adding to the assurance that some- 
thing in itself improbable neverthe- 
less really happened. See on i. 15. 
7; iv. 48. 25. ἀπογίγνεσθαι, be miss- 
ing, die, occurs also in ii. 34.4; 51. 22; 
98. 10. , 

75. Remarks on the battle of Man- 
tinea. The hostilities between Epidau- 
rus and Argos are renewed. 

1. τῆς δὲ μάχης μελλούσης κτέ.: 
the epexegetical δέ introduces the 
following aors, (ἐβοήθησε and ἀφίκετο, 


to be translated by the English plpf.), 
which go back to the time before the 
battle. —2. ὁ ἕτερος βασιλεύς : either 
the law mentioned by Hdt. v. 75.9f., 
μὴ ἐξεῖναι ἕπεσθαι ἀμφοτέρους τοὺς βασι- 
λέας ἐξιούσης στρατιῆς, was neglected 
in this instance, or it did not apply 
to the sending of reinforcements. — 
τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους Kal νεωτέρους : 
cf. c. 64. 10 Τῇ ---8. Kal... ἀπέστρε- 
Wav: the narrative of the events suc- 
ceeding the battle is resumed. 

5. τοὺς ἀπὸ Κορίνθου «ré.: see 6. 
64. 15.— ἀπέστρεψαν : they caused 
them to turn back. Cf. iv. 97. 7.—. 
Κάρνεια: on the time of this festival, 
see on c. 54. 8.—8. ἐτύγχανον ὄντα: 
on the pl., see on ἐπῆλθον Ὀλύμπια, i. 
126, 13. 

8. kal... ἀπελύσαντο: “and so 
by this one deed they had done away 
with the accusation which was com- 
monly brought against them at that 
time.” —9. τότε: taken in connexion 


3 


is Ὸ- 


THUCYDIDES V. 75. 


10 διὰ τὴν ἐν TH νήσῳ ξυμφορὰν καὶ ἐς τὴν ἄλλην ἀβου- 


’ ἈΝ “ 
λίαν te καὶ βραδυτῆτα ἑνὶ ἔργῳ τούτῳ ἀπελύσαντο, 


7, A ε 256 / , » ε > Ν 
τύχῃ μὲν ὡς ἐδόκουν κακιζόμενοι, γνώμῃ δὲ οἱ αὐτοὶ 


¥ ΕΣ 
ετι OVTES. 


133 


Τῇ δὲ προτέρᾳ ἡμέρᾳ ξυνέβη τῆς μάχης ταύτης 4 


15 καὶ τοὺς ᾿Επιδαυρίους πανδημεὶ ἐσβαλεῖν ἐς τὴν ᾿Αργείαν 


ε + en > \ ‘ A 
ὡς ἐρῆμον οὖσαν καὶ τοὺς ὑπολοίπους φύλακας TOV 


᾿Αργείων ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν διαφθεῖραι πολλούς. 


\ 
και 


> δὲ “~ lal 
Ηλείων τρισχιλίων ὁπλιτῶν βοηθησάντων Μαντινεῦσιν 


A A 4 x, > ’ ’ Ν = 
ὕστερον τῆς μάχης Kat ᾿Αθηναίων χιλίων πρὸς τοῖς προ- 


fA ’ ν 
20 τέροις, ἐστράτευσαν ἅπαντες οἱ ξύμμαχοι οὗτοι εὐθὺς 


Wee 9 ε 
ἐπὶ ᾿Επίδαυρον, ἕως ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι Κάρνεια ἦγον, καὶ 


’ Ἀ ’, ’ 
διελόμενοι τὴν πόλιν περιετείχιζον. 


καὶ οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι 


3 4 > = Ν σ ’ὔ Ἁ 
ἐξεπαύσαντο, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ὥσπερ προσετάχθησαν τὴν 


with τὴν ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ξυμφοράν, evidently 
refers to the whole period since the 
capture of Sphacteria in 425 B.c. — 
ἐπιφερομένην αἰτίαν : cf. αἰτίαν ἐπιφέ- 
ρειν, ili. 46. 26. --- ἐς μαλακίαν : cf. viii. 
88. 8, ἐς τὴν φιλίαν διαβάλλειν. ---10. 
ἐς τὴν ἄλλην ἀβουλίαν : general stu- 
pidity. On this use οὗ ἄλλος, see on 
i. 128.21; ii. 14.2.—12. κακιζόμενοι: 
being ill-spoken of, having incurred dis- 
grace. This is in accordance with the 
use of this word elsewhere in Thuc. 
(ef. i. τος. 26; ii. 21. 23) and with 
ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐπιφερομένην αἰτίαν 
above. The dat. τύχῃ must then 
be taken to mean “by a mishap,” 
“through unfortunate circumstances.” 
(The explanation “hardly used by 
fortune ” would be appropriate as re- 
gards the sense, but is not in accord- 
ance with the use of xaxi(ec@a.) A 
similar idea is expressed in ii. 87. 
7 ff. 

14. προτέρᾳ: see App.— τῆς μά- 
χης: depends upon the comp. προτέρᾳ 


as, 19, upon ὕστερον. ---16. ὡς ἐρῆμον 
οὖσαν: τοῦ στρατεύματος, Schol. This 
is retaliation for the attack mentioned 
in 6. 56. ὃ 5.—16. τῶν ᾿Αργείων: 
const. with φύλακας. --- 17. ἐξελθόντων 
αὐτῶν : “since the citizens fit for 
military service had gone away.” St. 
strikes out αὐτῶν and takes τῶν ’Ap- 
γείων ἐξελθόντων together.— 17. od- 
Aovs: const. as pred. in great numbers. 

18. λείων: the Eleans had de- 
layed for a time on account of anger. 
See c. 62. 5.—19. τοῖς προτέροις : cf: 
ce. 61.1 ff. Thuc. does not tell what 
general or generals took the command 
of the Athenian troops in place of 
those who had fallen (see 6. 61. 2 ; 74. 
10). Miiller-Striibing, Aristoph. und 
die hist. Krit. p. 447 ff., suggests. De- 
mosthenes. This seems, in view of 
c. 80. 16, not improbable (though Cl. 
thinks otherwise). — 22. διελόμενοι : 
used of like operations in ii. 75. 11; 
78.4; iv. 69.10; vii. το. 6. 

23. ἐξεπαύσαντο : ἀπέκαμον τοῦ περι- 


6 


184 


25 


10 


10 


THUCYDIDES V. 75, 76. * 01. 90, 3; 8.0. 418, Oct. 


»¥ Ν ε “A > Ν 5 y 
ἄκραν τὸ Ἡραῖον εὐθὺς ἐξειργάσαντο. 
ξυγκαταλιπόντες ἅπαντες τῷ τειχίσματι φρουρὰν ἀν- 


καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα. 
* 


εχώρησαν κατὰ πόλεις ἕκαστοι. 
εὐ- 
θὺς οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι [ἐπειδὴ τὰ Κάρνεια ἤγαγον] ἐξ. 


Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ἀρχομένου 


ld Vas ’ > ἢ id 4 
εστράτευσαν, καὶ ἀφικόμενοι ἐς Τεγέαν λόγους προύπεμ- 
> id ’, > δὲ SF ey , , 
πον ἐς τὸ Ἄργος ξυμβατηρίους. ἦσαν δὲ αὐτοῖς πρότερόν 
¥ > ’ Ν ’ Ν Lad Ν > 
τε ἄνδρες ἐπιτήδειοι καὶ βουλόμενοι τὸν δῆμον τὸν ἐν 


ἔλργει καταλῦσαι, καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἡ μάχη ἐγεγένητο, πολλῷ 


μᾶλλον ἐδύναντο πείθειν τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐς τὴν ὁμολο- 
γίαν. ἐβούλοντο δὲ πρῶτον σπονδὰς ποιήσαντες πρὸς 

Ν ’ > ν ἂν ’, \ 
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους αὖθις ὕστερον καὶ ξυμμαχίαν, καὶ 
ὕτως ἤδη τῷ δήμῳ ἐπιτίθεσθαι. καὶ ἀφικνεῖται πρόξε 
ο s Ή ” t NEG . P Ἂ 

a > , ΄ «3 , κ᾿ a 

vos ὧν ᾿Αργείων Λίχας ὃ ᾿Αρκεσιλάου παρὰ τῶν Aake- 


δαιμονίων δύο λόγω φέρων ἐς τὸ ἼΑργος, τὸν μὲν καθ᾽ 


᾿ > , 
Kal ἐν τούτῳ 


τειχίζειν. Schol. The mid. in Thue. 
occurs here only; ἐκπαύσω in Eur. 
Ton, 144.— tiv ἄκραν τὸ Ἡραῖον: 
appos. ‘The Heraeum by the har- 
bour, the site of which can be found 
on the small rocky height.’ Curtius, 
Pelopon. 11. p. 428. Cf. Paus. ii. 29. 
1, τὸ δὲ πρὸς τῷ λιμένι ἐπὶ ἄκρας ἀνεχού- 
ons ἐς θάλασσαν λέγουσιν Ἥρας εἶναι. --- 
24. ἐξειργάσαντο: on this side the 
Athenians finished the wall of cir- 
cumvallation which, with the out- 
works which may have belonged to it, 
formed the τείχισμα of 25. 

76. In Argos the oligarchical party 
gains the upper hand, and brings about 


“αι peace with Sparta. 


1. εὐθύς : const. with ἀρχομένου. Cf 
c. 13. 2; iv. 52. 1.—2. [ἐπειδὴ τὰ 
Κάρνεια ἤγαγον] : see App.—3. λό- 
yous ξυμβατηρίους : proposals of peace. 
Not found elsewhere in Att. writers ; 
later freq. used, esp. by Dion H. (ii. 
45, etc.). 


4. αὐτοῖς: const. grammatically with 
ἐπιτήδειοι, but its position at the be- 
ginning of the sent. points to a gen- 
eral relation: “there had always been 
partizans of theirs there.” —5. τὸν 
δῆμον: τὴν δημοκρατίαν. Schol. Cf. 
iii. 81. 20.—7. τοὺς πολλούς: the 
many, the people (Cl. renders, a great 
number, and cites iv. 6. 6, which does 
not apply).— és τὴν ὁμολογίαν: a 
rare const. with πείθειν which is de- 
fined by the Schol. ἤγουν καταπεῖσαι 
ὁμολογῆσαι καὶ συνθέσθαι. --- 8. σπον- 
Sas ποιήσαντες: after they had first 
made a truce (ef. c. 30. 26; ii. 29. 24); 
with ξυμμαχίαν, 9, we must supply 
ποιῆσαι (cf. c. 30. 26; ii. 29. 24; viii. 
6. 10), depending, like the following 


— 


ἐπιτίθεσθαι, upon ἐβούλοντο. --- 9. av- . 


Gis: denotes progress after πρῶτον or 
πρότερον. Of.c. 36.11; 78. 5; iv. 73. 
26; vi. go. 5. 

11. Λίχας ὁ ᾿Αρκεσιλάου: see on 
6. 50, 14.—12, καθ᾽ ὅ τι, ὡς : the ellip- 


THUCYDIDES V. 76, 77. 


7 > , La) Ν 3 ε 5 5 ’ Ν» 
6 τι εἰ βούλονται πολεμεῖν, τὸν δ᾽ ὡς εἰ εἰρήνην ἄγειν. 


καὶ γενομένης πολλῆς ἀντιλογίας (ἔτυχε γὰρ καὶ ὁ ᾽Αλκι- 


15 βιάδης παρών) οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις πράσ- 


ΦΣ Δ τς A A la ¥ ἈΝ 
σοντες, μ) Ἴ και εκ του φανεροῦ τολμῶντες, επεισαν τους 


᾿Αργείους προσδέξασθαι τὸν ξυμβατήριον λόγον. 


δὲ ὅδε: 


ΕἾ 
εστι 


“Καττάδε δοκεῖ τᾷ ἐκκλησίᾳ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων 


ξυμβαλέσθαι ποττὼς ᾿Αργείως, ἀποδιδόντας τὼς παῖδας 


wn 5 ’, \ Ν » A ’ Ν 
Tous Ὀρχομενίοις καὶ τῶς ἄνδρας τοις Μαιναλίοις, καὶ 


Ν >” A 5 ’ ἴω ,ὔὕ 5 
τως ἄνδρας TWS ἐν Μαντινείᾳ τοις Λακεδαιμονίοις ἀποδι- 


δόντας, καὶ ἐξ ᾿Επιδαύρω ἐκβῶντας καὶ τὸ τεῖχος ἀναι- 


sis in these brief expressions (as in 
Lat. quaestio an or quomodo, 
etc.) cannot be supplied with certainty 
(πολεμήσουσι With καθ᾽ ὅ τι and εἰρήνην 
ἄξουσι with ὡς would do). In case the 
Argives preferred war, the λόγος prob- 
ably contained threats, and in case of 
an agreement, the proposal of the 
terms given in c. 77.—14. ἔτυχε... 
παρών: he was already present in c. 
61. 8.—15. τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις : the 
dat. of advantage with πράσσειν as in 
iii. 4. 21; iv. τοῦ. 10.—16. ἐκ τοῦ 
φανεροῦ : equiv. to φανερῶς. Cf iv. 79. 
10; 106. 11. — τολμῶντες : abs. Cf 
ii. 43. 11. 

77. The terms of the treaty of peace 
between the Lacedaemonians and _ the 
‘Argives. 

1. καττάδε δοκεῖ κτέ. : the Dor. dia- 
lect in the two documents given in 
c. 77 and 79 does not agree in all re- 
spects with the rules laid down by 
Ahrens (de dial Dor. p. 480 ff.). Still, 
it does not seem best to depart from 
the reading of the Mss. in an attempt 
to reconstruct the original language 
of these chaps. See App.—karrdde: 
Att. κατὰ τάδε; 2. ποττώς; Att. πρὸς 


τούς; 5. ἐκβῶντας : Att. ἐκβαίνοντας ; 
6. αἱ δέ κα μὴ εἴκωντι: Att. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ 
εἴκωσι; 7. εἶμεν: Att. εἶναι; 10. ἔχον- 
τι: Att. ἔχουσι; ἀποδόμεν: Att. ἀπο- 
δοῦναι; πολίεσσι: Att. πόλεσι; τῶ σιῶ 
σύματος : Att. τοῦ θεοῦ θύματος ; 11. αἱ 
μὲν λῆν : Att. εἰ μὲν βούλεσθαι; 15. ἀλε- 
ξέμεναι: Att. ἀλέξειν; 18. ἐντι: Att. 
εἰσι; ἐσσοῦνται: Att. ἔσονται; 22. ἀπι- 
ἄλλην : Att. ἀποπέμπειν. For details, see 
the notes in St.’s edit. — τᾷ ἐκκλησίᾳ: 
ace. to Hdt. vii. 134. 9, the proper 
designation of the popular assembly 
at Sparta is aNa, which Ahrens wished 
to insert in the text; but it seems 
more likely that this assembly was 
properly called ἀπέλλα. See Gilbert, 
Griech. Staatsalt. I. p. 58 £.—2. τὼς 
παῖδας : 1.6. the hostages mentioned in 
c. 61.22, —3. τὼς ἄνδρας : these must 
be the ὅμηροι ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας αὐτόθι 
ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων κείμενοι οἵ 6. 61. 18, 
although no mention of the Maena- 
lians is made there. Why the dis- 
tinction between παῖδες and ἄνδρες is 
made is not elear. παῖς seems to be 
used here and in 9 to designate those 
who are not of military age.— 5. τὸ 
τεῖχος : the τείχισμα of c. 75. 25, 


135 


136 


¥ > ’ “a ’ / 
10 EX OVTL, ἀποδόμεν TALS πολίεσσι TACALS. 


THUCYDIDES V. 77. 


a) , > =~ 
ροῦντας. ai δέ κα μὴ εἴκωντι τοὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐξ ᾽᾿Επιδαύρω, 2 
πολεμίως εἶμεν τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις καὶ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις 
καὶ τοῖς τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ξυμμάχοις καὶ τοῖς τῶν 


᾿Αργείων ξυμμάχοις. καὶ αἴ τινα τοὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι παῖδα 3 


περὶ δὲ τῶ σιῶ 4 


4 > A A “ 5 4 9 ’ὕ 5 4 
σύματος, αἱ μεν Anv, τοῖς Ἐπιδαυρίοις ορκον δόμεν, αἱ δέ, 


5» Ν > ’ 
αυτῶς OMOTAL. 


τὰς δὲ πόλιας τὰς ἐν Πελοποννάσῳ, 5 


καὶ μικρὰς καὶ μεγάλας, αὐτονόμως εἶμεν πάσας καττὰ 


πάτρια. 


5 , A > Ν ’ 2% Ν 
αι δέ κα T@V EKTOS Πελοποννάσω τις ἐπι ταν 6 


A » Α A 
15 Πελοπόννασον γᾶν in ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἀλεξέμεναι ἁμόθι Bov- 


20 


λευσαμένως, ὅπᾳ κα δικαιότατα δοκῇ τοῖς Πελοποννα- 


σίοις. 


ὅσσοι δ᾽ ἐκτὸς Πελοποννάσω τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων 


A a A A ἈΝ ~ 
ξύμμαχοί ἐντι, ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ἐσσοῦνται ἐν τῷπερ καὶ TOL 


lal , Ἁ Ν a » ’ 4 a 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ τοὶ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ξύμμαχοί ἐντι, 


4 ε ~ » 
ταν αὐτῶν εχόντες . 


6. τοὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι: the Athenians 
had been most active in the opera- 
tions against Epidaurus. Cf. c. 75. 
25. 

10. περὶ τῶ σιῶ σύματος : on the 
forms, see above. This refers to the 
cause of the quarrel between Argos 
and Epidaurus. See c. 53. 2f. τῶ 
σιῶ, i.e. τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος τοῦ Πυθαέως. 
Perhaps van Herwerden is right in in- 
serting τῶ (i.e. τοῦ) before σύματος, 
though the omission of the art. may 
be explained on account of the pre- 
ceding gen.— 11. al μὲν λῆν, τοῖς 
᾿Επιδαυρίοις ὅρκον δόμεν, al δέ, κτέ.: 
if they wish, they shall impose an oath 
upon the Epidaurians ; but if not, they 
shall swear it themselves. λῆν is inf. 
The inf. after εἰ occurs also in iv. 98. 
12, καὶ αὐτοὶ εἰ μὲν ἐπὶ rréov δυνηθῆναι 
τῆς ἐκείνων κρατῆσαι, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ἔχειν. 
This is not unlike the inf. in rel. 
clauses, Cf. c, 28. 4; 46. 17. ai δέ 


ἐπιδείξαντας δὲ τοῖς ξυμμάχοις Evp- 7 


is for εἰ δὲ μή. Cf. Plat. Conv, 212 ο, 
εἰ μὲν βούλει, ὡς ἐγκώμιον eis Ἔρωτα 
νόμισον εἰρῆσθαι, εἰ δέ, ὅ τι καὶ ὅπῃ χαί- 
pecs ὀνομάζων, τοῦτο ὀνόμαζε. See App. 

18. αὐτονόμως εἶμεν πάσας : the 
Lacedaemonians always endeavoured 
to prevent other cities from estab- 
lishing empires or hegemonies. 

15. ἁμόθι : is another Dor. form for 
Gua, i.e. κοινῇ. See App. —16. ὅπᾳ 
κα: equiv. to ὡς ἄν with subjv. 

18. ἐσσοῦνται : see App. — 19. ἐντι 
κτέ. : see App. 

20. έσθαι: this repeats the 
ξυμβαλέσθαι of 2 with the added con- 
ditions ἐπιδείξαντας τοῖς ξυμμάχοις and 
αἴ κα αὐτοῖς δοκῇ : “they were to com- 
municate (the conditions) to their 
allies, and then conclude the peace if 
they (the Argives and Lacedaemoni- 
ans) thought best.” (Cl. takes αὐτοῖς 
to refer to the allies. But in that 
case there is no distinction between 


* ΒΟ. 418, Nov. 


βαλέσθαι, ai κα αὐτοῖς δοκῇ. 


μάχοις, οἴκαδ᾽ ἀπιάλλην." 


THUCYDIDES V. 77-79. 


ai δέ τι δοκῇ τοῖς Evp- 


Τοῦτον μὲν τὸν λόγον προσεδέξαντο πρῶτον οἱ 


3 lal Ν “ ’ XN 4 > ’ 
Ἀργεῖοι, καὶ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τὸ στράτευμα ἀνεχώ- 


3 A , a2. Φ' » Ν δὲ lal > ,ὔ 
pnoev εκ TNS Τεγέας ΕΙΤ οἰκου" μετα € τοῦτο ἐπιμιξίας 


οὔσης ἤδη παρ᾽ ἀλλήλους, * 


> “A ν » 
οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον ἔπραξαν 


> ε ἈΝ ¥ ο 
5 αὖθις οἱ αὐτοὶ ἄνδρες ὥστε τὴν Μαντινέων καὶ Ἠλείων 


καὶ τὴν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμμαχίαν ἀφέντας ᾿Αργείους σπον- 


"δὰ \ ΄, ΄ Ν , 
ag Kal ξυμμαχίαν ποιήσασθαι προς arene ᾿ 


καὶ ἐγένοντο αἵδε ᾿ 


“Καττάδε ἔδοξε τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ᾿Αργείοις 


σπονδὰς καὶ ξυμμαχίαν εἶμεν πεντήκοντα ἔτη, ἐπὶ τοῖς 


x sex: ΄ , , \ , 
ισοις και OMOLOLS δίκας διδόντας καττα πατρια" 


ἄλλαι πόλιες ταὶ 


ταὶ δὲ 


3 ΄ / lal 
εν Πελοποννάσῳ κοινανεονζων TAV 


8a Ν “ ’, 3 ’ὔ XN 3 / 
oTovoay Kal τας ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι καὶ αὐτοπόλιες 


Ν ε A - »¥ 4, 4 4 , Ν » 
ταν αὐτῶν EXOVTES, καττα πάτρια δίκας διδόντες τας ισας 


\e¢ ΄ 
και ομοιας. 


αἴ κα αὐτοῖς δοκῇ and the following αἱ 
δέ τι δοκῇ τοῖς ξυμμάχοις). Then fol- 
lows αἱ δέ τι δοκῇ (Subj. after the sim- 
. ple ai as inc. 79. 11 and 13) without 
ἄλλο (which only the inferior Mss. 
offer): “if the allies saw fit, they 
might send the treaty home” (οἴκαδ᾽ 
ἀπιάλλην), 1.6. refer it to the govern- 
ing bodies of their respective cities. 

78. Soon after the oligarchical party 
at Argos induces the Argives to relin- 
quish their previous alliances-and make 
an alliance with Sparta. 

1. πρῶτον : pred. agreeing with λό- 
γον. πρῶτον is in contradistinction to 
μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο Kré. in 3.— 3. ἐπιμιξίας : 
ς΄. α.35. 5.--4. παρ᾽ ἀλλήλους : const. 
with ἐπιμιξίας οὔσης, as with the verb 
ἐπιμίσγειν in i. 13. 19.— ἔπραξαν : aor. 
This expresses the result of πράσσον- 
τες in c, 76, 15, — 6. σπονδὰς καὶ ξυμ- 


ὅσσοι δὲ ἔξω Πελοποννάσω Λακεδαιμονίοις 


μαχίαν: see App. on c. 27. 2. The 
same reading must be adopted in ce. 
79. 2 and 8o. 1. 

79. The terms of the treaty of alli- 
ance between the Lacedaemonians and 
the Argives. 

2. ἐπὶ τοῖς ἴσοις Kal ὁμοίοις : cf. c. 
27. 12.—3. διδόντας : as if τοὺς Λακε- 
δαιμονίους κτέ. preceded instead of the 
dat. Cf. i. 31.9; 53.1; 72. 8, ἔδοξεν 
αὐτοῖς παριτητέα és τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους 
εἶναι, τῶν μὲν ἐγκλημάτων πέρι μηδὲν 
ἀπολογησομένους κτὲ. --- 4. κοινανεόν- 
των: Att. κοινωνούντων. An excellent 
emendation of Valckenaer for xoway 
or κοινᾶν ἐόντων of the Mss. — 5. tds 
ξυμμαχίας : the Mss. give ray ξυμμα- 
χιᾶν (or more freq. ξυμμαχίαν). See 
App. on ¢. 27. 2. ----αὐτοπόλιες : this 
does not occur elsewhere. Cf. αὐτο- 
πολῖται, Xen. Hell. v. 2. 14. It cor- 


13 


_ 


138 


THUCYDIDES V. 79, 80, 


| ξύμμαχοί ἐντι, ἐν τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἐσσοῦνται τοῖσπερ Kal τοὶ 
Λακεδαιμόνιοι: καὶ τοὶ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ξύμμαχοι ἐν τῷ 


an ~ nw Ν \ > ‘ 7 A ἂν 
10 αὐτῷ ἐσσοῦνται TWOTEP KAL TOL Ἀργεῖοι, ταν QUTWVY EXOV- 


TES. 


ai δέ ποι opareias δέῃ Kowas, βουλεύεσθαι Aaxe- 3 


ὃ , 43> ld 9 8 , , lal 
QALLOVLWS και Apyetos οπᾳ κα Οικαιοτατα KPLVAVTAS τοις 


ξυμμάχοις. 


αἱ δέ τινι τἂν πολίων ἢ ἀμφίλογα, ἢ τᾶν 4 


“ἃ x A > Ν , ¥ ae ¥ 
€VTOS 7) ταν €KTOS Πελοποννάσω, αὺυτε περι ορων αιυτε 


15 περὶ ἄλλου τινός, διακριθῆμεν. 


ai δέ τις τῶν ξυμμάχων 


πόλις πόλει ἐρίζοι, ἐς πόλιν ἐλθεῖν, av τινα ἴσαν ἀμφοῖν 


aA , ’, Ν Ν ¥ Ν ’ ’ 
ταῖς πολίεσσι δοκείοι. τὼς δὲ ἔτας καττὰ πάτρια δικά- 


ζεσθαι." 
80 


responds to αὐτοτελεῖς καὶ αὐτόδικοι of 
e.18. 7. 

8. rots αὐτοῖς : it is difficult to see 
why this is pl. Cf. c. 77.18. Kirch- 
hoff (Sitzungsber. d. Berl. Akad, 
1883, p. 860) may be right in reading 
τῷ αὐτῷ and τῷῴῷπερ. --- τοῖσπερ: (or 
τῷπερ) is used without the repetition 
of ἐν. Of. c. 42. 2. 

11. στρατείας : so Portus for στρα- 
τιᾶς of the Mss.— 12. ὅπᾳ Ka: sc. κρί- 
νωντι. Of. c. 77. 16.— κρίναντας τοῖς 
ξυμμάχοις : adjudging (i.e. allotting) 
to the allies what part of the burden 
of the war each shall bear. The aor. 
partic. may refer to time preceding 
the execution of the plan expressed 
in βουλεύεσθαι. GMT. 24, ν. 8; Mad- 
vig, Philol. Suppl. Vol. 2, p. 46. Per- 
haps, as Kr. suggests, Thuc. wrote 
κρίνωντι. 

13. ἀμφίλογα: neut. pl. Cf ἀντί- 
mada, c. 8.6; ἀδύνατα, iii. 88.4; ἑτοῖ- 
μα, ii. 3. 15.—15. διακριθῆμεν : like 
all the preceding infs. this and the 
two which follow depend upon ἔδοξε: 
they shall come to an agreement about 
it. This accounts for the opts. ἐρίζοι 


Αἱ μὲν σπονδαὶ καὶ ἡ ξυμμαχία αὕτη ἐγεγένητο, 


and δοκείοι. GMT. 77; H. 937. The 
sent. ai δέ τις τῶν ξυμμάχων πόλις πό- 
λει ἐρίζοι does not introduce new 
subjs., but assumes that there has 
been a failure to come to an agree- 
ment: “but if one of the allied cities 
should get into a (real and open) 
quarrel with another,” they shall have 
recourse to arbitration. — 16. ἴσαν: 
aequam, fair, impartial. —17. 8ο- 
κείοι : (Kirchhoff, δοκίοι) Dor. for the 
Att. δοκοίη. --- τὼς δὲ gras: (Poppo 
and St. for τοῖς δὲ ἔταις of the Mss.) 
τοὺς δὲ πολιτευομένους ἐν μιᾷ ἑκάστῃ 
πόλει δὶ ἀλλήλων λύειν τὰ διάφορα, 
Schol. Ace. to Hesych. ἔται are ἑταῖ- 
po, συνήθεις πολῖται, δημόται, and in 
an inscription from Olympia (Corp. 
Inscr. Gr. I. p, 30 £.) they are opp. to 
the τελεσταῖς, i.e. to τοῖς ἐν τέλει. The 
sense of the passage then is: “the 
citizens (i.e. private individuals as opp. 
to the cities) shall conduct their legal 
business according to the laws of 
their respective states.” See App. 
80. The Lacedaemonians and Ar- 
gives acting together induce Perdiccas 
and the Chalcidian cities to join their 


a a ae 


THUCYDIDES V. 80, 139 


Ν 
καὶ ὁπόσα ἀλλήλων πολέμῳ ἢ εἴ τι ἄλλο εἶχον, διελύσαν- 
na ΑΓ ἊΨ ‘ 
το. κοινῇ δὲ ἤδη τὰ πράγματα τιθέμενοι ἐψηφίσαντο κή- 
‘ , >> , κι : , 
ρυκα καὶ πρεσβείαν παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων μὴ προσδέχεσθαι, 
* Ν 3 4 55 7 ε , > ’ Ἁ 
5 ἢν μὴ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου ἐξίωσι τὰ τείχη ἐκλιπόντες, καὶ 
Ν A > 
μὴ ξυμβαίνειν τῳ μηδὲ πολεμεῖν ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἅμα. καὶ τά τε: 
ΕΣ Ἂν Ν ( 
ἄλλα θυμῷ ἔφερον καὶ ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης χωρία καὶ ὡς 
Περδίκκαν ἔπεμψαν ἀμφότεροι πρέσβεις καὶ ἀνέπεισαν 
Περδίκκαν ξυνομόσαι σφίσιν. οὐ μέντοι εὐθύς γε ἀπέστη 
10 τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ἀλλὰ διενοεῖτο, ὅτι καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αργείους 
cr > δὲ Ν a Oe “a 3 Ψ Ν a 
ἑώρα - ἦν δὲ καὶ αὐτὸς TO ἀρχαῖον ἐξ "Apyous. καὶ τοῖς 
A , . Ψ > re \ » 
Χαλκιδεῦσι τούς Te παλαιοὺς ὅρκους ἀνενεώσαντο Kal ah- 
λους ὥμοσαν. ἔπεμψαν δὲ καὶ παρὰ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους οἱ 8 
᾿Αργεῖοι πρέσβεις, τὸ ἐξ ᾿Ἐπιδαύρου τεῖχος κελεύοντες 
15 ἐκλιπεῖν. 


ξυμφύλακας ἔπεμψαν Δημοσθένην τοὺς σφετέρους ἐξ. 


ἐξ "Αργους: cf. iii. 99. 8, where his 
family is said to be Τημενίδαι. The 
oldest account of this relation is given 


¢ Qo € aA 2\7 x , » \ 
οι ὃ OP@VTES ὀλίγοι προς πλείους OVTES τοὺς 


alliance. The Athenians evacuate Epi- 
daurus. 


2. ἢ εἴ τι ἄλλο εἶχον : with the in- 


definite sense, or whatever else they had 
to find fault with in their relations 
with one another, and in accordance 
with this the expression διελύσαντο is 
chosen ; they came to an agreement about 
it. From this we must suply ἀπέδο- 
σαν with ὁπόσα ἀλλήλων πολέμῳ (sc. 
εἶχον). Of. c.17.12.—3. τιθέμενοι : 
διατιθέμενοι, διοικονομοῦντες, Schol. See 
on i. 25. 2.—5. τὰ τείχη: i.e. the τεί- 
χισμα at the Heraeum near Epidaurus. 
See c. 75.25; 77.5. Perhaps Pylos 
also is meant (cf. c. 39. 6 and 14; 56. 
11), as the pl. τείχη would naturally 
include all fortifications held by the 
Athenians in Peloponnesus. 

7. θυμῴ ἔφερον: “they were very 
energetic.” Cf.i. 31.2, ὀργῇ φέροντες. 
10. διενοεῖτο: sc. ἀποστῆναι. See on 
i 1. 7.—11. ἑώρα: sc. ἀφεστηκότας. 
See on i. 78. 10; 80. 2. --- τὸ ἀρχαῖον 


by Hat. viii. 137. ff.—12. τοὺς πα- 
λαιοὺς ὅρκους: cf. c. 31.26 as regards 
the Argives. The Chalcidians had 
doubtless had treaties of some kind 
with the Lacedaemonians ever since 
they left the Athenian alliance. See 
i. 58. 10. 

14. τὸ ἐξ Ἐπιδαύρου τεῖχος : the 
proleptic use οὗ ἐξ (see on i. 8. 9) is 
here admitted with ἐκλιπεῖν. Cf.i. 105. 
19, τῶν δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ὑπολοίπων. 
—15. ὀλίγοι ὄντες : corrected by 
Abresch for ὄντας of the Mss. This 
is opp. to πρὸς πλείους τοὺς ξυμφύλακας, 
i.e. the Argives, Eleans, and Mantine- 
ans, who far outnumbered the 1000 
Athenians. Cf.c.75.§5and6. See 
App. — 16. Δημοσθένην : this form 
of the acc. seems to have the best 
authority. This Demosthenes is the 
well-known general. See iii. 91. 2; 


140 


άξοντα. 


THUCYDIDES V. 80, 81. 


ε δὶ ’, Ν > a / ’ 
ὁ δὲ ἀφικόμενος καὶ ἀγῶνά τινα πρόφασιν γυ- 


a A » 
μνικὸν ἔξω Tov φρουρίου ποιήσας, ws ἐξῆλθε τὸ ἄλλο 
4, 3 , Ν 4, , ἂν > 4 
φρούριον, ἀπέκλῃσε τὰς πύλας. καὶ ὕστερον Ἐπιδαυρίοις 
> , A ὃ Ν ΕῚ Ν ε» θ “ 5 “ὃ 
20 ἀνανεωσάμενοι τὰς σπονδὰς αὐτοὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀπέδοσαν 


Ν ’ Ν Ν Ν μην > 4 > ’ > ~ 
817d τείχισμα. μετὰ δὲ τὴν τῶν ᾿Αργείων ἀπόστασιν ἐκ τῆς 
A Ἀ A 

ξυμμαχίας καὶ οἱ Μαντινῆς, τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἀντέχοντες, 
¥ > > , ¥ A 3 ΄ , ‘ 
ἔπειτ᾽ ov δυνάμενοι ἄνευ τῶν ᾿Αργείων, ξυνέβησαν καὶ 
> ‘ “ ‘4 Ἁ ‘ > ‘ > Lal lal 
αὐτοὶ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν ἀφεῖσαν τῶν 


πόλεων. 


‘ ‘4 \ 3 ἴω ’ ε ’ 
καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι, χίλιοι ἑκάτεροι, 


ξυστρατεύσαντες, τά T ἐν Σικυῶνι ἐς ὀλίγους μᾶλλον 
, > Ν ε ὃ 4 > θό ‘ > 
κατέστησαν αὐτοὶ ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐλθόντες, καὶ μετ 


ἐκεῖνα ξυναμφότεροι ἤδη καὶ τὸν ἐν ΓΑργει δῆμον κατ- 


έλυσαν, καὶ ὀλιγαρχία ἐπιτηδεία τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις 


iv. 3.8; 66. 14.—17. πρόφασιν : see 
on 6. 53.2. ὑποκρίνας (read ὑποκρινά- 
μενος) ποιεῖν ἀγῶνά τινα γυμνικόν, Schol. 
Under this pretence he enticed the 
garrison out of the fortification, and 
prevented their return (ἀπέκλῃσε τὰς 
πύλας). Afterwards he surrendered 
the place to the Epidaurians. — 19. 
φρούριον: this word, which is found 
in the most and best Mss., must be 
used in the sense of φρουρά. Cf.c. 75. 
25. St. cites (besides some doubtful 
passages of Aesch.) Xen. An. i. 4. 15, 
ὑμῖν χρήσεται καὶ εἰς φρούρια καὶ εἰς Ao- 
χαγίας. See App. — 20. ἀνανεωσάμενοι : 
see App. 

81. Mantinea joins the Lacedaemo- 
nian alliance. Oligarchies are estab- 
lished at Sicyon and Argos. 

1, ἀπόστασιν ἐκ τῆς ξυμμαχίας: 1.6. 
ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. --- ὃ. οὐ δυνάμενοι : 
sc. ἀντέχειν. ----.Αά. τὴν ἀρχὴν ἀφεῖσαν 
τῶν πόλεων : some of these cities had 
been subject to them before they 
joined the Argive alliance (see c. 29. 
8); and they had extended their 


power since that time. See 6. 33.3 
and 10; 62.1. They were obliged to 
give up their sovereignty in compli- 
ance with the provision of the treaty 
in c. 79. 8 ff., ral δὲ πόλιες κοινανεόντων 
τἂν σπονδᾶν καὶ Tas ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι 
καὶ αὐτοπόλιες κτὲ. 

δ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ᾿Αργείοι, αὐτοὶ 
οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ξυναμφότεροι : the 
subj. changes from the whole to one 
of its parts and back again to the 
whole within the same period. (Cf. 
c. 10. 47 ff. —6. ἐς ὀλίγους : this is 
Thuce.’s regular expression for an oli- 
garchy. Cf. viii. 53. 22; 89. 18, and 
see on ii. 37.2; viii. 38. 11.— μᾶλλον: 
i.e. μᾶλλον ἢ πρότερον, intimating that 
the Sicyonian government was not 
thoroughly democratic before. — 8. 
κατέλυσαν: cf. c. 76.6. Diod. xii. 80. 
42 reports that this revolution was not 
accomplished without bloodshed : συλ- 
λαβόντες τοὺς δημαγωγεῖν εἰωθότας 
ἀπέκτειναν. --- 9, ἐπιτήδεια τοῖς Λακε- 
δαιμονίοις : cf. i. 19. 1, καὶ of μὲν Λακε- 
δαιμόνιοι οὐχ ὑποτελεῖς ἔχοντες φόρου 


μ᾿ 


82 


* Ol. 90. 8; B.c. 417, Mar. 


10 κατέστη. ἢ 


THUCYDIDES V. 81, 82. 


ἈΝ Ν ¥ no “ > n “ 
καὶ πρὸς EAP HOH ταῦτα ἣν TOV χειμῶνος 


λ ’ ‘\ 4 ‘ ὃ ia ¥ “Ὁ , > 
NYOVTOS, και τέταρτον καὶ OEKATOV ETOS TQ πολέμῳ ετε- 


λεύτα. 


Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους Διῆς τε οἱ ἐν Αθῳ 


ἀπέστησαν ᾿Αθηναίων πρὸς Χαλκιδέας, καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι 


Ν » > a4 5 > ’ ’ » ’ 
τα εν Αχαΐᾳ ουκ ἐπιτηδείως προτερον εχόντα καθίσταν- 


TO. 


\ 3 ’ 5 ’ “ > ’ ’ > 
και ἀναθαρσήσας ἐπέθεντο τοις ὀλίγοις, THPHNTAVTES αυ- 


x Ν. ’ὔ “"ἢ᾽ , 
τας τας γυμνοπαιδίας των Λακεδαιμονίων. 


καὶ μάχης 


γενομένης ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐπεκράτησεν ὁ δῆμος, καὶ τοὺς 


τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἡγοῦντο, kar’ ὀλιγαρχίαν 
δὲ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς μόνον ἐπιτηδείως ὕπως 
πολιτεύσουσι θεραπεύοντες. 

89, But the next summer the demo- 
cratic party comes again into power at 
Argos, and tries to secure itself by mak- 
ing an alliance with Athens and building 
long walls to the sea. 

1. Aujs: they were the inhabitants 
of the town of Dium (see iv. 109. 10), 
the same who had already (see ec. 
35. 1) engaged in hostilities toward 
Athens, and who now openly joined 
her enemies. Here, as in c. 35. 2, 
some inferior Mss. read Δδικτιδιῆς. ---- 
3. τὰ ἐν ᾿Αχαίᾳ οὐκ ἐπιτηδείως πρότε- 
ρον ἔχοντα: ς 1. 19. 1ff. At the be- 
ginning of the war only the Pelle- 
neans were on the side of the Lace- 
daemonians. See ii. 9. 6.— καθ- 
ίσταντο: sc, ἐπιτηδειότερον or ἐπὶ τὸ σφί- 
σιν ὠφέλιμον. Cf. 1. 76. 2. 

4. ὁ δῆμος ἀναθαρσήσας ἐπέθεντο: 
δῆμος with adjs. in the sing. and the 
verb in the pl. occurs also in iii. 80. 
1f. 6. 188, 8; H. θ09. ---- κατ᾽ ὀλίγον 
ξυνιστάμενός τε καὶ ἀναθαρσήσας : the 
oligarchy which was established in 
Argos πρὸς ἔαρ, say in March (see c. 
81. 10), lasted until the time of the 
gymnopaediae, a period of about five 


months, since this festival took place 
in Hecatombaeum (about July; see 


Schoemann, Griech. Alt. 11. p. 460. 


Diod., xii. 80. 45, wrongly says that the 
oligarchy lasted eight months). Dur- 
ing this period the secret meetings 
and deliberations (ξυνίστασθαι, as in 
ii. 88. 4; iii. 70. 24; viii. 65.6) of the 
popular party were held, until suffi- 
cient confidence for a rising had been 
gained (ἀναθαρσήσας in the aor. denotes 
the conclusion of the deliberations 
expressed by the pres. ξυνιστάμενος). 
—kar ὀλίγον: gradually, in continu- 
ous progress toward completion. Cf 
i. 61. 18; 69. 18. (Cl. now adopts 
this explanation by St.) Paus., ii. 20. 
2, says that this fierce insurrection 
broke out because the leader of the 
χίλιοι λογάδες (cf. c. 67. 13; 72. 14) 
outraged the betrothed bride of a 
man of the common people, and this 
may have been the immediate occa- 
sion of the outbreak. — 6. τὰς γυμνο- 
παιδίας : ‘this was a festival some- 
what resembling the Lupercalia at 
Rome, in which boys and men danced 
naked, each arranged in distinct 
chori, the movements expressing war- 
like and gymnastic contests ; while at 
the same time coarse and licentious 


141 


1 


καὶ ᾿Αργείων ὁ δῆμος κατ᾽ ὀλίγον ξυνιστάμενός τε 2 


142 


μὲν ἀπέκτεινε, τοὺς δὲ ἐξήλασεν. 


THUCYDIDES V. 82. 


οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, 8 


4“. 
ἕως μὲν αὐτοὺς μετεπέμποντο οἱ φίλοι, οὐκ ἦλθον ἐκ 
10 πλείονος, ἀναβαλόμενοι δὲ τὰς γυμνοπαιδίας ἐβοήθουν. 
Ν 3 ’ ’ 9 Δ ε > 7 
καὶ ἐν Τεγέᾳ πυθόμενοι ὅτι νενίκηνται οἱ ὀλίγοι, mpoeh- 
A \ > ’ > , ’ “A ’ 
θεῖν μὲν οὐκέτι ἠθέλησαν δεομένων τῶν διαπεφευγότων, 
» 
ἀναχωρήσαντες δὲ ἐπ᾽ οἴκου τὰς γυμνοπαιδίας ἦγον. 
A..¢% 3 / la > Ν “A > ~ 5x 
καὶ ὕστερον ἐλθόντων πρέσβεων ἀπὸ τε τῶν ἐν TH πόλει 4 
Ν 8 7, aA ¥ > οἱ , ‘ rn 
15 kal ἀγγέλων τῶν ἔξω ᾿Αργείων, παρόντων τε τῶν Evp- 
, 4. Ang , A >>? © , »¥ ‘ 
μάχων καὶ ῥηθέντων πολλῶν ἀφ᾽ ἑκατέρων ἔγνωσαν μὲν 
LO A Ν > A , Ν ἐδ 3 a 4 
ἀδικεῖν τοὺς ἐν TH πόλει καὶ ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς στρατεύειν 


ἐς ΓΑργος, διατριβαὶ δὲ καὶ μελλήσεις ἐγίγνοντο. 


ὁ δὲ 


δῆμος τῶν ᾿Αργείων ἐν τούτῳ, φοβούμενος τοὺς Λακεδαι- 


20 μονίους καὶ τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμμαχίαν πάλιν προσ- 


, , ‘\ ’ ’ “Δ A > , 
αγόμενός TE Kal νομίζων μέγιστον av σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν, 


language was interchanged, as in the 
Roman triumphs.’ Arnold. The‘fes- 
tival was mainly in honour of Apollo. 
See Schoemann, Griech. Alt. II. p. 460. 

9. οὐκ ἦλθον ἐκ πλείονος : the sense 
of this passage evidently is: “while 
their friends were sending for them, 
they failed to come for a very long 
(or too long) time; but at last they 
postponed the festival and started on 
the march” (ἐβοήθουν impf.). The 
fact that they only went as far as 
Tegea before hearing of the revolu- 
tion at Argos seems to show that they 
were in no great hurry. See App. — 
11. προελθεῖν μέν, ἀναχωρήσαντες δέ: 
the opposition of these two parts of 
the sent. is very effective: “as to ad- 
vancing, they had no idea of such a 
thing (οὐκ ἠθέλησαν) ; on the contrary, 
they went home and celebrated their 
festival.”— 12. τῶν διαπεφευγότων : 
i.e. the members of the oligarchical 
party of Argos. 

15. καὶ ἀγγέλλων : see App. — 16. 


ad’ ἑκατέρων : see on iii. 36.24. This 
prep. is freq. used with λέγεσθαι and 
similar words. In these speeches each 
party doubtless tried to justify itself 
and make its opponents seem com- 
pletely in the wrong. 

19. φοβούμενος, προσαγόμενος, vo- 
μίζων: these partics. all interpret 
τειχίζει μακρὰ τείχη. The chief reason 
is expressed in φοβούμενος τοὺς Aake- 
δαιμονίους, which is further enlarged 
by πάλιν προσαγόμενος τὴν τῶν᾿ Αθηναίων 
ξυμμαχίαν and νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς 
ὠφελήσειν, these two expressions being 
closely connected by τε and καί. “The 
Argives undertook the building of 
long walls because they were afraid 
of the Lacedaemonians and (there- 
fore) embraced the alliance of Athens 
and thought they should be greatly 
the gainers.” — 20. προσαγόμενος : 
οἰκειούμενος, Schol. This act was a 
declaration in favour of the Athenian 
policy (and political ideas) and there- 
fore in itself a renewal of the alliance 


es 


* ΟἹ. 90. 4; B.c. 417, Oct. 


THUCYDIDES V. 82, 83. 


, \ , > , 9 a A an 
τειχίζει. μακρὰ τείχη ἐς θάλασσαν, ὅπως, ἣν τῆς γῆς 
9 ε A ’ “ Ν “ 3 ’ 
εἴργωνται, ἡ κατὰ θάλασσαν σφᾶς μετὰ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
ἐπαγωγὴ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ὠφελῇ. ξυνήδεσαν δὲ τὸν τει- 


Ν \ “A 
25 χισμὸν καὶ τῶν ἐν ἸΤελοποννήσῳ τινὲς πόλεων. 


Ἀπ κα 
και οι 


Ν > A ὃ ΄ Ν > \ Ν A ‘ + # 

μὲν ᾿Αργεῖοι πανδημεί, καὶ αὐτοὶ καὶ γυναῖκες Kal oiké- 
> Ὁ ἂ πῷ a > A > A > , 

ται, ἐτείχιζον: καὶ ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν αὐτοῖς ἦλθον τέκτο- 


νες καὶ λιθουργοί. 


καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα. 


η “ δ᾽ > , lal ὃ / ε 
ου ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμωνος Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὡς 


¥ , > , > αν > , 
ἤἥσθοντο τειχιζόντων, ἐστράτευσαν ἐς τὸ ΓΑργος αὐτοί τε 


καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι πλὴν Κορινθίων - ὑπῆρχε δέ τι αὐτοῖς 


\ > 2 Ml ὦ > 4 4, 
καὶ ἐκ τοῦ Apyous αὐτόθεν πρασσόμενον. 


Hye δὲ τὴν 


στρατιὰν ἾΑγις 6 ᾿Αρχιδάμου, Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλεύς. 


with Athens, which remained in force 
from this time. — 21. ὠφελήσειν : the 
subj. is not τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμμα- 
χίαν, but is, as Herbst (Hamburg 
Progr. 1867, p. 32 f.) rightly observes, 
to be supplied from the following 
τειχίζει μακρὰ τείχη. This is further 
explained in ὅπως... ὠφελῇ : for ἡ 
κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐπαγωγὴ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων 
is the advantage derived from the 
long walls. μετὰ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων is a 
secondary and necessary consequence. 
ἂν ὠφελήσειν is equiv. to ὅτε ὠφελήσει 
ἄν with the suppressed prot. ἢν τοῦτο 
γένητα. GMT. 37, 2; 53; H. 845; 
861; 946. Cf. ii. 80. 40; vi. 66. 4; 
viii. 25. 28; and 71. 12 with App. 
See App. 

24. ξυνήδεσαν τὸν τειχισμόν : if this 
reading is correct, the knowing about 
or being privy to this project shows 
an inclination toward the philo-Athe- 
nian policy of Argos which was ex- 
hibited by the building of the long 
walls. See App. — 25. τινες : inter- 
posed between the gens., as in i. 45. 
8, és τῶν ἐκείνων τι χωρίων. --- 28. λι- 
θουργοί : so masons had been brought 


from Athens to assist in the circum- 
vallation of Nisaea. See iv. 69. 6. 

83. The Lacedaemonians attack the 
Argives, take and tear down the long 
walls, and take Hysiae. The Argives 
make an incursion into the territory of 
Phlius. The Athenians blockade the 
coast of Macedonia. 

2. ὡς ἤσθοντο τειχιζόντων : the gen. 
with αἰσθάνεσθαι occurs also in i. 57. 
14; 72. 3; ii. 81. 31; iv. 108. 31, the 
partic. in the gen. here only, but freq. 
in the ace. Cf. c. 37. 15; 1. 47. 1. 
The Lacedaemonians must have 
heard at once of the doings at 
Argos; so that ὡς ἤσθοντο must not 
be taken too strictly. — 3. dmnpxé τι 
αὐτοῖς mparcopevov: the use of πράσ- 
σειν in καί τι αὐτῷ ἐπράσσετο ἐς τὰς 
πόλεις (iv. 121. 12) is here combined 
with that of ὑπάρχειν in ἀσφάλειάν 
τινα ὑπάρχουσάν of in vi. 59. 7, “ there 
was also a party acting from Argos 
itself in their interest.” — 4. ἐκ τοῦ 
"Ἄργους αὐτόθεν: an emphatic com- 
bination. Cf. ii. 25. 18, αὐτόθεν ἐκ 
τῆς περιοικίδος Ἠλείων. See Herbst, 
gegen Cobet, p. 58 ff. 


143 


_ 


144 


84 


THUCYDIDES V. 83, 84. 


* B.C, 416, Mar. 


καὶ τὰ μὲν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως δοκοῦντα mpovmapyxEW οὐ 

προυχώρησεν ἔτι: τὰ δὲ οἰκοδομούμενα τείχη ἑλόντες 
Ν , κε Ν ’ “~ > 4 / 

Kat καταβαλόντες καὶ Ὑσιὰς χωρίον τῆς Apyeias haBov- 
Ἀ Ν 5 ’ὔ 7 > » > ᾿ς 

τες καὶ τοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἅπαντας ovs ἔλαβον ἀποκτεί- 


10 ναντες ἀνεχώρησαν καὶ διελύθησαν κατὰ πόλεις. 


> , 
εστρα- 


Ν Ν ΄ A. ie ay > Ν ’ Ν 
τευσαν δὲ μετὰ τοῦτο καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἐς τὴν Φλιασίαν, καὶ 
, ΕῚ nw 9 an A , ε ὕὔ 
δῃώσαντες ἀπῆλθον, ὅτι σφῶν τοὺς φυγάδας ὑπεδέχον- 


ε Ν \ > A > Lal ’ 
το" οἱ γὰρ πολλοὲ αὐτῶν ἐνταῦθα κατῴκηντο. 


κατέκλῃ.- 


ἴω “ A ‘ 
σαν δὲ τοῦ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος Kal Μακεδόνας ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 


15 Περδίκκᾳ ἐπικαλοῦντες τήν τε πρὸς ᾿Αργείους καὶ Λακε- 


δαιμονίους γενομένην ξυνωμοσίαν καὶ ὅτι παρασκευα- 
, ee) Ν ἊΝ Φ.: ἃ ,΄ Ν ΝΙΝ 
σαμένων αὐτῶν στρατιὰν ἄγειν ἐπὶ Χαλκιδέας τοὺς ἐπὶ 
Θράκης καὶ ᾿Αμφίπολιν Νικίου τοῦ Νικηράτου στρατη- 
a ¥ Ἁ ’ Ν ε , ’ 
γοῦντος ἔψευστο τὴν ξυμμαχίαν καὶ ἡ στρατεία μάλιστα 


20 διελύθη ἐκείνου ἀπάραντος - πολέμιος οὖν ἦν. 


Nie 
καὶ O XEL- 


‘ > 4 & Ν lA Ν δέ ᾿, nw 
μὼν ἐτελεύτα οὗτος, Kal πέμπτον καὶ δέκατον ἔτος τῷ 


πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα. 


6. οὐ προυχώρησεν ἔτι: it made no 
further progress, it failed them. — 7. τὰ 
olxoSopovpeva τείχη: the walls which 
were building, not τὰ κατεσκευασμένα, as 
Diod. (xii. 81. 76) wrongly says. — 8. 
“Ὑσίας : Hysiae was near the Arcadian 
frontier on the road from Argos to 
Tegea, where its ruins may still be 
seen. See Curtius, Pelopon. II. p. 367. 

12. ὅτι σφῶν τοὺς φυγάδας ὑπεδέ- 
χοντο: const. with ἐστράτευσαν and 
δῃώσαντες, not with ἀπῆλθον. σφῶν 
stands before τοὺς φυγάδας with almost 
the effect of the ethical dat. See on 
ἐπεὶ σφῶν of ξύμμαχοι ἐπόνουν, i. 30. 14. 

14. Μακεδόνας, Περδίκκᾳ : see App. 
— 15. τὴν ξυνωμοσίαν : cf. c. 80. 9. --- 
19. ἔψευστο: violated, “did not pre- 
serve.” (ἡ ili. 66, 17, τὴν μὴ κτείνειν 


Tov δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους * ᾿Αλκιβιάδης τε πλεύ- 


ψευσθεῖσαν ὑπόσχεσιν. --- ἡ στρατεία: 
see ΑΡΡ. -- μάλιστα: implies that 
there were also other reasons. — 20, 
διελύθη : as in iii. 114. 21, διέλυσαν τὸν 


πόλεμον. --- ἀπάραντος : this reading of 


4 


the Mss. is certainly wrong. For 


emendations, see App. 

84, Alcibiades places three hundred 
Argives of the oligarchical party under 
custody upon the neighbouring islands. 
The Athenians send an expedition 
against the island of Melos, but try ne- 
gotiations before proceeding to actual 
hostilities. 

1. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης τε, καὶ ἐπὶ Μῆλον: 
the doings of Alcibiades at Argos 
and the expedition against Melos are 
thus (by τε and καί) brought together 
as the two most important events of 


Ν 


THUCYDIDES V. 84. 145 


> »¥ \ ¥ > , ‘ κι 
σας ἐς Ἄργος ναυσὶν εἴκοσιν ᾿Αργείων τοὺς δοκοῦντας 
»¥ ε 4 Ss Ἀ Ν , nr 
ἔτι ὑπόπτους εἶναι καὶ τὰ Λακεδαιμονίων φρονεῖν ἔλαβε, 





7 ἅν ὃ Ν 6 > ‘ > lal 
τριακοσίους avdpas, Kat κατέθεντο αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
> δ > N ΄ a > <p ane A \ 

δ ἐς τὰς ἐγγὺς νήσους ὧν ἦρχον: Kat ἐπὶ Μῆλον τὴν 
aA > “ la 
νῆσον ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐστράτευσαν ναυσὶν ἑαυτῶν μὲν τριά- 
| ; 5 
κοντα, Χίαις δὲ ἕξ, Λεσβίαιν δὲ δυοῖν, καὶ ὁπλίταις éav- 
τῶν μὲν διακοσίοις καὶ χιλίοις καὶ τοξόταις τριακοσίοις 
Ν ’ “ “ 
καὶ ἱπποτοξόταις εἴκοσι, τῶν δὲ ξυμμάχων καὶ νησιωτῶν 
οἱ δὲ Μήλιοι 2 
Λακεδαιμονίων μέν εἰσιν ἄποικοι, τῶν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων οὐκ 


ε 4 ’ ’ Ν , 
10 ὁπλίταις μάλιστα πεντακοσίοις καὶ χιλίοις. 
ἤθελον ὑπακούειν ὥσπερ οἱ ἄλλοι νησιῶται, ἀλλὰ τὸ μὲν 
πρῶτον οὐδετέρων ὄντες ἡσύχαζον, ἔπειτα ὡς αὐτοὺς 
5 ’ ε 3 j Lal lal A Lad 5 ’ 
ἠνάγκαζον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι δῃοῦντες τὴν γῆν, ἐς πόλεμον 


the summer. — 3. ἔτι: still, after τοὺς 
μὲν ἀπέκτειναν, τοὺς δὲ ἐξήλασαν, as 
mentioned in c. 82. 7.— τὰ Λακεδαι- 
poviev φρονεῖν : cf. iii. 68. 18; vi. 51. 
7; viii. 31. 7.— 4. κατέθεντο: de- 
posited. The mid. is always used an 
the sense of “place under custody.” 
See on iii. 72. 2.—5. és τὰς ἐγγὺς 
νήσους : so they had once before con- 
fined the suspected Corcyreans on Ae- 
gina. See iii. 72. 1 ff.— ἐπὶ Μῆλον : 
a previous attempt under Nicias to 


. subjugate the island had been unsuc- 


cessful. See iii. 91. ὃ 1f. and 94. 2. 
Yet from Ol. 88, 3 (426 5.0.) on, the 
Melians are found, and the amount 
of their tribute is specified, on the 
lists of tributaries of Athens. See 
U. Kohler, zur Geschichte des delisch- 
attischen Bundes in Abhh. ἃ, Berl. 
Akad. 1869, p. 146. —7. Λεσβίαιν : 
these were ships of the Methymnae- 
ans, for the rest of Lesbos was now 
held by Athenian Cleruchs to whom 
the Lesbians paid rent in lieu of trib- 
ute. See iii. 50. 5 ff.; vi. 85.8. Weck- 
lein, cur, epigr, Ὁ. 16, shows from in- 


scriptions that this reading is prefer- 
able to AeoBias of most Mss. — 9. 
ξυμμάχων Kal νησιωτῶν: cf. vi. 85. 
6 ff, καὶ yap τοῖς ἐκεῖ ξυμμάχοις ὡς 
ἕκαστοι χρήσιμοι ἐξηγούμεθα, Χίους μὲν 
καὶ Μηθυμναίους νεῶν παροκωχῇ αὐτονό- 
μους, τοὺς δὲ πολλοὺς χρημάτων βιαιό- 
τερον φορᾷ, ἄλλους δὲ καὶ πάνυ ἐλευθέρως 
ξυμμαχοῦντας, καίπερ νησιώτας ὄντας καὶ 
εὐλήπτους, διότι ἐν χωρίοις ἐπικαίροις 
εἰσὶ περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον. From this 
it appears, as Herbst (Philol. 42, p. 
724) observes, that the “islanders ” 
here mentioned are different from the 
ξύμμαχοι. Cf. vii. 57. 32 ff., where 
Cephallenians and Zacynthians are 
mentioned as νησιῶται and αὐτόνομοι. 

11. Λακεδαιμονίων ἄποικοι: see 
Hat. viii. 48. 3.— 13. οὐδετέρων ὄντες : 
γράφεται μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων, Schol. This 
means οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων. Thuc. uses, 
however, both forms. Cf. ξυμμάχους 
μηδετέρων, C. 94. 2; μηδετέρων ὄντας, i. 
35. 2; τοὺς μηδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων, ii. 67. 34; 
ἔστε μηδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων, ii. 72. 11.— 14. 
ἐς πόλεμον φανερὸν κατέστησαν: 80 
also in c, 25. 15, 


140 


15 φανερὸν κατέστησαν. 


THUCYDIDES V. 84, 85. 


ὔὕ > > Ἁ 
στρατοπεδευσάμενοι οὖν ἐς τὴν 8 


γῆν αὐτῶν τῇ παρασκευῇ ταύτῃ οἱ στρατηγοὶ Κλεομήδης 
τε ὁ Λυκομήδους καὶ Τισίας ὁ Τισιμάχου, πρὶν ἀδικεῖν 


τι τῆς γῆς, λόγους πρῶτον ποιησομένους ἔπεμψαν πρέ- 


σβεις. οὺἣς οἱ Μήλιοι πρὸς 


A ἈΝ “A > ¥ 
μὲν τὸ πλῆθος οὐκ ἤγαγον, 


20 ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ τοῖς ὀλίγοις λέγειν ἐκέλευον περὶ 


85 


5 


ὧν ἥκουσιν. οἱ δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πρέσβεις ἔλεγον τοιάδε" 


OR ὃ \ > x x ie θ ε , , 

πειδὴ οὐ πρὸς TO πλῆθος οἱ λόγοι γίγνονται, 
bid Ν Ν πὸ οὐδὸν ε ἈΠ ᾿ς Neue Ν 
ὅπως δὴ μὴ ξυνεχεῖ ῥήσει οἱ πολλοὶ ἐπαγωγὰ καὶ ἀν- 
έλεγκτα ἐς ἅπαξ ἀκούσαντες ἡμῶν ἀπατηθῶσι (γιγνώσκο- 
μεν γὰρ ὅτι τοῦτο φρονεῖ ὑμῶν ἡ ἐς τοὺς ὀλίγους ἀγωγή), 
ε A ε ΄ ¥ 3 ΄ , 
ὑμεῖς οἱ καθήμενοι ἔτι ἀσφαλέστερον ποιήσατε: Kal 


ν Ν ‘\ a oe A 
ἕκαστον yap καὶ μηδ᾽ ὑμεῖς 
δοκοῦν ἐπιτηδείως λέγεσθαι 


‘ A 
VETE. καὶ πρῶτον εἰ ἀρέσκει 


15. στρατοπεδευσάμενοι ἐς τὴν γῆν : 
is elliptical for ἐσβαλόντες ἐς τὴν γῆν 
καὶ στρατοπεδευσάμενοι.--- 17. Τισίας ὁ 
Τισιμάχου : see ΑΡΡ. --- 20. τοῖς ὀλί- 
yous: the ὀλίγοι appear here and in ο. 
85.4 as the chief governing body, a 
small senate or assembly, to which 
the holders of important offices (ai 
apxal, cf. c. 28.2; 47. 52 and 55; i. 
90. 27) belong. 


NEGOTIATIONS BETWEEN THE Envoys 
OF THE ATHENIANS AND THE Coun- 
ΟἿ, OF THE Mexians. Chaps. 85- 
113. 

(On the course of the dialogue, 
see App. jin.) 

85. 2. ὅπως δή: evidently in erder 
that. Cf. vii. 18.5.— ῥήσει : cf. c. 111. 
15, ῥήματος. These words occur in 
Thue. only in these two places. —avé- 
λεγκτα: untested, “against which no 
argument is advanced.” In vi. 53. 14, 


en , > ‘\ ‘ Ν Ν 
ἑνὶ λόγῳ, ἀλλὰ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ 
52 Χ ε ’ Ψ' 
εὐθὺς ὑπολαμβάνοντες κρί- 
ὡς λέγομεν, εἴπατε." 


ἀνέλεγκτον, used of a person, means 
“ot subjected to trial.” — 4. φρονεῖ: 
βούλεται, Schol. δύνασθαι is elsewhere 
(cf. i, 141.5; vi. 36.9) used in this 
sense of mean, have for its object. — 
ὑμῶν: subj. gen. with ἀγωγή. St., 
followed by Cl., writes ἡμῶν as obj. 
gen. — 5. οἱ καθήμενοι : who are sitting 
there to listen to us. This has a slight 
shade of mockery. Cf. iii. 38.32, σοφι- 
στῶν θεαταῖς ἐοικότες καθημένοις μᾶλλον 
ἢ περὶ πόλεως βουλευομένοις, and Vi. 13. 
2.— ἔτι ἀσφαλέστερον ποιήσατε : act 
ina still safer way. ἀσφαλέστερον is 
ady.— 6. ἑνὶ λόγῳ: the only correct 
reading for ἐν ὀλίγῳ of most Mss. The 
meaning is the same as that of ξυνεχεῖ 
ῥήσει. “As you feared that the πολλοί 
would be misled by a ξυνεχὴς phous, 
do not you either (μηδ᾽ ὑμεῖς) form 
your judgment from one speech.” —7. 
ὑπολαμβάνοντες: cf. c. 49. 17.—«plvere : 
“form (and deliver) your judicial 


THUCYDIDES V. 86-88. 147 


ε Ν “ ’ 4 > 
86 Oi δὲ τῶν Μηλίων ξύνεδροι ἀπεκρίναντο: “ἡ pev 1 
3 ’ a ΄ ᾿ 
ἐπιείκεια τοῦ διδάσκειν καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ἀλλήλους οὐ ψέ- 
‘ “A ae: 
γεται, τὰ δὲ τοῦ πολέμου παρόντα ἤδη Kal ov μέλλον- 
ὃ ΄ > A ΄ esa Ν > ΄ 
τα διαφέροντα αὐτοῦ φαίνεται. ὁρῶμεν γὰρ αὐτούς τε 
‘ 9 wn “ 
ὅ κριτὰς ἥκοντας ὑμᾶς τῶν λεχθησομένων, καὶ τὴν τελευ- 
‘ “ “ 
τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς περιγενομένοις μὲν τῷ δικαίῳ 
Ν ὃ > δ’ % ‘ 9 ὃ “ x 4... ὄδὰὲ ΄ 
καὶ δι᾿ αὐτὸ μὴ ἐνδοῦσι πόλεμον ἡμῖν φέρουσαν, πει- 
σθεῖσι δὲ δουλείαν." 
87 ΑΘ. Εἰ μὲν τοίνυν ὑπονοίας τῶν μελλόντων λο- 1 
4 aes al 4 Δ 3 “A / ΛΝ @ 
γιούμενοι ἢ ἄλλο τι ξυνήκετε ἢ EK τῶν παρόντων Kal ὧν 
al 4 “- 
ὁρᾶτε περὶ σωτηρίας βουλεύσοντες τῇ πόλει, πανοίμεθ᾽. 
ΕΣ ~ 
ἄν - εἰ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦτο, λέγοιμεν av. 
88 ΜΗΛ. Εἰκὸς μὲν καὶ ξυγγνώμη ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε καθ- 1 
“~ A -" 
εστῶτας ἐπὶ πολλὰ καὶ λέγοντας καὶ δοκοῦντας τρέ- 


decision.” — 8. ὡς λέγομεν: as we 


propose. 

86. 2. ἐπιείκεια: esp. considera- 
tion on the part of the powerful for 
subjects or inferiors, as opp. to ὕβρις ; 
equity with a touch of clemency. See 
on iii. 40. 7.—4. αὐτοῦ: i.e. τοῦ διδά- 
σκειν καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν GAAhAovs. — φαίνε- 
ται: see App.—6. ἐξ αὐτοῦ: this re- 
fers again to τοῦ διδάσκειν καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν 
ἀλλήλους. “If this is agreed to, then 
the result brings to us,” etc. — περιγενο- 

μένοις: “if we prove ourselves to be 
in the right.”— τῷ δικαίῳ: “by the 
justice of our cause.” 

87. 1. τοίνυν: forms a vigorous 
and almost impatient beginning: well, 
then, if you, etc. τοίνυν occurs in Thuc. 
only in direct address. Cf. c. 89.1; 
105. 1; iii. 45. 14; viii. 53. 20. — ὑπο- 
volas λογιούμενοι: used somewhat 
ironically: to consider hidden thoughts, 
and hence to argue from suspicious fan- 
cies about the future. — 2. ἄλλο τι ἤ: of. 
iii. 85. 19, ὅπως ἀπόγνοια ἢ τοῦ ἄλλο τι 


ἢ κρατεῖν τῆς γῆς, where the Schol. 
supplies πρᾶξαι after ἄλλο τι. A simi- 
lar expression is τί ἄλλο ἤ in iii. 39. 
10 and 58.24. — ὧν ὁρᾶτε: this is still 
dependent upon ἐκ. Cf. c. 42. 2. 
Here, however, the rel. is attracted 
into the case of an omitted indef. an- 
tec.—4. ἐπὶ τοῦτο: sc. ξυνήκετε. 

88. 1. εἰκὸς καὶ ξυγγνώμη: like 
δίκαια καὶ πρέποντα ἅμα in i. 144. 16, 
this alludes to both the objective and 
the subjective aspect of the matter, to 
its intrinsic naturalness and propriety 
as well as to the judgment of others 
respecting it.— ξυγγνώμη : (sc. ἐστι) 
occurs with inf. in iv. 61. 17, with εἰ 
in i. 32. 24.--- καθεστῶτας : the ex- 
pression is a general one: “men in 
such a position.” —2. ἐπὶ πολλὰ τρέ- 
πεσθαι: cf. i. 20.21, ἐπὶ τὰ ἑτοῖμα τρέ- 
πονται, and iv. 104. 6, ἐφ᾽ ἁρπαγὴν τρα- 
πέσθαι.--- καὶ λέγοντας καὶ δοκοῦντας : 
“in words as well as thoughts.” δο- 
κοῦντας is a less invidious expression 
than ὑπονοίας, which the Athenians 


148 


THUCYDIDES V. 88, 89. 


θ ε , , ὃ Ν \ , ἡδὃ 7A 

πεσθαι: ἡ μέντοι Edvodos καὶ περὶ σωτηρίας ἦδε πάρεστι 
a e 4 Me =~ θ 4 > ὃ a , θω 

καὶ ὁ λόγος ᾧ προκαλεῖσθε τρόπῳ, εἰ δοκεῖ, γιγνέσθω. 


ΑΘ. 


ε “ ᾽’ ¥ > ‘ > > , 
Hpes τοίνυν οὔτε αὑτοὶ μετ ὀνομάτων Ka- 


λῶν, ὡς ἢ δικαίως τὸν Μῆδον καταλύσαντες ἄρχομεν ἢ 


> , an 9 ΄ , A ¥ 
ἀδικούμενοι νῦν ἐπεξερχόμεθα, λόγων μῆκος ἄπιστον 


παρέξομεν, οὔθ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἀξιοῦμεν ἢ ὅτι Λακεδαιμονίων 


» » 9 , ἂν re con 2O\ > 
ἄποικοι ὄντες οὐ ξυνεστρατεύσατε ἢ ὡς ἡμᾶς οὐδὲν ἠδι- 


© 
κήκατε λέγοντας οἴεσθαι πείσειν, TA δυνατὰ δ᾽ ἐξ ὧν ἑκά- 


> “ A ὃ , θ > ΄Ζ 
TEPOL ἀληθῶς φρονοῦμεν διαπράσσεσθαι, ἐπισταμένους 


Ν > , 9 ia Ν 3 “~ > ἡ , - ey | 
πρὸς εἰδότας ὅτι δίκαια μὲν ἐν TO ἀνθρωπείῳ λόγῳ ἀπὸ 


used in c. 87. 1.— 3. μέντοι : forms 
the transition from their excuse to 
the question in hand: “but we admit 
that.”— καὶ περὶ σωτηρίας: these 
words admit the right of the Athe- 
nians to remind them of their posi- 
tion, and the following words kal 6 
λόγος ... γιγνέσθω express their re- 
luctant assent to the proposal of the 
Athenians.—4.  mpoxadeioGe τρό- 
πῳ: 1.€. τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ᾧ τὸν λόγον 
γίγνεσθαι προκαλεῖσθε. 

89. 1. τοίνυν : here again this par- 
ticle urges the point at issue: “very 
well; but let us both give up fine 
words.” — 2. δικαίως : const. with ἄρχο- 
μεν. --- 3. ἀδικούμενοι, οὐδὲν ἠδικήκατε: 
these words express the meaning of 
the ὀνόματα καλά which are to be given 
up. — ἐπεξερχόμεθα : “press our just 
right,” “insist upon punishment,” as 
in vi. 38. 10.— λόγων μῆκος: equiv. 
to πολλοὺς καὶ μακροὺς λόγους, and 
with this is joined ἄπιστον, “not carry- 
ing conviction.” — 4. οὐθ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἀξιοῦ- 
μεν κτέ. : const. οὐκ ἀξιοῦμεν ὑμᾶς οἴεσθαι 
πείσειν λέγοντας, upon which ὅτι... 
οὐ ξυνεστρατεύσατε and ὡς... ἠδική- 
κατε depend. —5. οὐ ξυνεστρατεύσατε: 
sc. ἡμῖν. “ That you did not join with 


us in the war because you as colonists 
of the Lacedaemonians were under 
no obligation to do so.” — 6. τὰ δυνατὰ 
δὲ... διαπράσσεσθαι : this also de- 
pends upon ἀξιοῦμεν, the meaning of 
which is somewhat modified: “we 
think it right (for both of us) to aim 
at accomplishing what is possible ac- 
cording to the real opinion (i.e. without 
any misleading fine phrases) of both 
of us.” The subj. of διαπράσσεσθαι is no 
longer ὑμᾶς, but ἐκατέρους, the expres- 
sion of which is rendered needless by 
the presence of ἐκάτεροι. ----. ἐπιστα- 
μένους πρὸς εἰδότας : “since we both 
equally know,” ἐπισταμένων καὶ ὑμῶν 
καὶ ἡμῶν, Schol.— 8. τῴ ἀνθρωπείῳ 
λόγῳ: the Schol. explains this by 
ἀνθρώπινος λογισμό. This is not 
philosophical speculation, but the 
reasoning of practical life, in which, 
ace. to the thoroughly realistic point 
of view here adopted, justice is re- 
garded (κρίνεται) only when the pres- 
sure of necessity is the same on both 
parties. If that is not the case, the 
only thing to be considered is what 
is possible, and this the stronger 
party accomplishes, while the weaker 
party must make the best of it.—9, 


THUCYDIDES ΥΓυ. 89, 90. 149 


nw »¥ 5 7 4 Ν A ε ,ὔ 
τῆς ἴσης ἀνάγκης κρίνεται, δυνατὰ δὲ οἱ προύχοντες 
, A ΞΕ: Ὁ θ ~ cal 
10 πράσσουσι καὶ οἱ ἀσθενεῖς ξυγχωροῦσιν. 
φΦ Ν Ν 
90 MHA. Ἧι μὲν δὴ νομίζομέν γε, χρήσιμον (ἀνάγ- 1 
Ν 3 δὴ ε A ν ‘ x la Ν la 
KN Yap, ἐπειδὴ ὑμεῖς οὕτω παρὰ τὸ δίκαιον τὸ ξυμφέ- 
ὔ ε 4 A 4 e “A Ν ek > 
pov λέγειν ὑπέθεσθε) μὴ καταλύειν ὑμᾶς τὸ κοινὸν ἀγα- 
θό Ἰλλὰ “ 7, “ὦ > ὃ ,ὕ ΄ > Ν a ry 
ov, ἀλλὰ τῴ ἀεὶ ἐν κινδύνῳ γιγνομένῳ εἶναι τὰ εἰκότα 
5 δίκαια, καί τι καὶ ἐντὸς τοῦ ἀκριβοῦς πείσαντά τινα ὠφε- 
cal A »" nr 
ληθῆναι" καὶ πρὸς ὑμῶν οὐχ ἧσσον τοῦτο, ὅσῳ Kai ἐπὶ 


δυνατά: stands first for emphasis. It 
is the obj. of πράσσουσι and also of 
tvyxwpotow in accordance with the 
free use of neut. adjs. and prons., as 
in 6.41. 11 and 20; viii.45.21. Cobet, 
V. LZ. p. 271 and 454, proposes (after 
Dobree) προστάσσουσι for πράσσουσι. 
90. 1. ἡ μὲν δὴ νομίζομέν ye: these 
words introduce in an almost timid 
way an attempt to aid the cause of the 
weaker party by saving the δίκαιον in 
the form of the εἰκός. ye after νομί- 
Couey has its full force, as we think at 
any rate. See App. —2. ἀνάγκη γάρ: 
se. τὸ ξυμφέρον λέγειν. --- οὕτω... 
λέγειν : is the obj. of ὑπέθεσθε: “to 
talk so (as you have just been doing) 
not about justice, but about what is 
advantageous.” — 3. ὑπέθεσθε: ic. 
ὑπόθεσιν ἐποιήσασθε, “you have made 
it the foundation (or the starting- 
point) of the discussion.” This use 
occurs in Thue. only here, but freq. 
in Plat. (e.g. Charm. 171 ἃ, ὃ ἐξ ἀρχῆς 
ὑπετιθέμεθα; Rep. iv. 437 a) and later 
writers. A similar use with added dat. 
is found in Hdt. i. 156. 2, ταῦτά οἱ 
ὑπετίθετο; iv. 135. 12; v. 98. 10; vii. 
237. 10.— τὸ κοινὸν ἀγαθόν: what is 
meant is τὸ δίκαιον as the foundation 
of human society (see on 6. 104. 4), 
which has, however, been excluded 
from the discussion. — ἀλλὰ τῷ κτέ. : 
“yetit is expedient (χρήσιμον embraces 


τῷ Gel... δίκαια as well as the other 
infs.) that to every one in peril what 
is reasonable be accounted right”; 
i.e. even if we must not call it a right 
(Sixaov), still it should have the effect 
of aright. St. strikes out δίκαια in 5, 
but by so doing he loses the point of 
the subtle and artificial argumen- 
tation of the Melians by which, as 
they dare not openly oppose the 
Athenians, they try to substitute εἰ- 
κότα for Bika. (καί, which some 
Mss. insert before δίκαια, is inappro- 
priate.) —5. ἐντὸς τοῦ ἀκριβοῦς πεί- 
σαντα: the aor. for πείσοντα οὗ most 
Mss. seems necessary ; for it must re- 
fer to time antecedent to ὠφεληθῆναι 
“even if one has not entirely proved 
his point, even if one has not attained 
to the ἀκριβές (ἐντός, like Lat. citra 
and sometimes intra, denotes that a 
missile has fallen short of the mark), 
still it is expedient (χρήσιμον) that one 
derive some advantage.” See App. 
—6. πρὸς ὑμῶν : in your interest. Cf. 
ii. 86. 19; iii. 38.3. The reason for 
this is very cautiously expressed. In- 
stead of saying: your contempt of 
justice will sometime cost you dear; 
for if those whom you now oppress 
ever come into power, they will take 
such revenge upon you that your fate 
will be a warning example to other 
ruling states, the Melians express 


ἐὼν 


150 THUCYDIDES Vv. 90-92. 


μεγίστῃ τιμωρίᾳ σφαλέντες ἂν τοῖς ἄλλοις παράδειγμα 
γένοισθε. 
91 ΑΘ. Ἡμεῖς δὲ τῆς ἡμετέρας ἀρχῆς, ἢν καὶ παυ- 1 
θῇ, οὐκ ἀθυμοῦμεν τὴν τελευτήν: οὐ γὰρ οἱ ἄρχοντες 
ἄλλων, ὥσπερ καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, οὗτοι δεινοὶ τοῖς νι- 
κηθεῖσιν (ἔστι δὲ οὐ πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους ἡμῖν ὃ ἀγών), 
5 ἀλλ᾽ ἣν οἱ ὑπήκοοί που τῶν ἀρξάντων αὐτοὶ ἐπιθέμενοι 
καὶ περὶ μὲν τούτου ἡμῖν ἀφείσθω κινδυ- 2 
ὡς δὲ ἐπ᾽ ὠφελίᾳ τε πάρεσμεν τῆς ἡμετέρας 
ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ νῦν τοὺς λόγους ἐροῦμεν τῆς ὑμε- 
τέρας πόλεως, ταῦτα δηλώσομεν, βουλόμενοι ἀπόνως μὲν 
10 ὑμῶν ἄρξαι, χρησίμως δ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἀμφοτέροις σωθῆναι. 
92 MHA. Καὶ πῶς χρήσιμον ἂν ξυμβαίη ἡμῖν Sov-1 


κρατήσωσι" 
νεύεσθαι: 


λεῦσαι, ὥσπερ καὶ ὑμῖν ἄρξαι; 


the same idea in the intentionally ob- 
scure form, inasmuch as you, if you 
should ever fall, would, by the heaviest 
vengeance (which you will then incur), 
be a (warning) example to others. — 
ἐπὶ μεγίστῃ τιμωρίᾳ: the prep. prop. 
denotes the accompanying circum- 
stances or conditions. Cf. ἐπὶ τοῖς 
δεινοῖς εὐέλπιδες, i. 70.10; 143. 8; iii. 
67. 38; iv. 22. 18. 

91. 1. παυθῇ : καταλυθῇ, Schol. — 
2. οὐκ ἀθυμοῦμεν τὴν τελευτήν : we do 
not look forward to the end with dismay. 
The adv. acc. is used with ἀθυμεῖν as 
in 6. 40. 13 with ἀπορεῖν. Elsewhere 
we find the dat. (cf. vii. 60. 27) or 
πρός (cf. ii. 88. 11).— 3. ὥσπερ καί: 
of. c. 44. 9; i. 74. 25; ii. 55. 7.—od- 
τοι: on the emphatic repetition of a 
preceding word by οὗτος, see on iv. 
44. 15.—4. ἔστι δὲ xré.: “with the 
Lacedaemonians, however, we are not 
contending.” This parenthetical re- 
mark, introduced by the adversative 
δέ, is directed against the implied 


meaning of the last part of 6, 90.— 
5. GAN ἣν... κρατήσωσι: sc. οὗτοι 
δεινοί εἰσι. ---- αὐτοὶ ἐπιθέμενοι : the un- 
expected or surprising nature of such 
an attack is indicated by αὐτοί. Those 
very ones who had been oppressed 
now assume the offensive themselves, 

6. ἀφείσθω : “it may be left to us ”; 
imy. pf. pass. Cf. εἰρήσθω, Xen. Mem. 
iv. 2, 19; Isocr. rv. 14. — κινδυνεύε- 
σθαι: “to support this peril,” impers. 
pass. ( i. 73. 15, καὶ yap ὅτε ἐδρῶ- 
μεν, ἐπ᾿ ὠφελίᾳ ἐκινδυνεύετο. ---- 8. τοὺς 
λόγους: 6. the proposals or condi- 
tions to be offered. — 9. ἀπόνως : with- 
out trouble. They hoped to induce the 
Melians to come to terms without 
resorting to force.—10. ἄρξαι: aor., 
to acquire dominion. — χρησίμως : fol- 
lowed by the dat. ἀμφοτέροις. This 
expresses the result of σωθῆναι; “so 
that it will be advantageous to both 
of us.” 

92. 1. χρήσιμον ἂν ξυμβαίη : like 
γίγνεσθαι, ξυμβαίνειν is sometimes 


99 


94 


95 


96 


THUCYDIDES V. 93-96. 


151 


4 £m \ a tal 
ΑΘ. “Oru ὑμῖν μὲν πρὸ τοῦ τὰ δεινότατα παθεῖν 1 


ὑπακοῦσαι ἂν γένοιτο, ἡμεῖς δὲ μὴ διαφθείραντες ὑμᾶς 


κερδαίνοιμεν av. 


MHA. Ὥστε δὲ ἡσυχίαν ἄγοντας ἡμᾶς φίλους μὲν 1 


τ 
εἶναι ἀντὶ πολεμίων, ξυμμάχους δὲ μηδετέρων, οὐκ ἂν 


δέξαισθε; 


ΑΘ. Οὐ γὰρ τοσοῦτον ἡμᾶς βλάπτει ἡ ἔχθρα ὑμῶν 


ὅσον ἡ φιλία μὲν ἀσθενείας, τὸ δὲ μῖσος δυνάμεως 


παράδειγμα τοῖς ἀρχομένοις δηλούμενον. 


ΜΗΛ. 


“ δ᾽ ε A ν ε ε la ‘\ 
Σκοποῦσι υμῶν οὐτως OL VUTNKOOL TO 


> ’ ν Ν. 
εἰκός, ὦστε τούς τε μὴ προσήκοντας καὶ ὅσοι ἄποικοι 


» ε \ ao 9 , \ , 3 ΝΝ 
OVTES οἱ πολλοὶ καὶ ἀποστᾶντες τινὲς κεχείρωνται ἐς τὸ 


5 Ἂς , 
αὐτὸ τιθέασιν ; 


const. with adjs. Cf. i. 74. 1, τοιούτου 
μέντοι ξυμβάντος τούτου; Vi. 34. 60 ; 90. 
1; vii. 30. 21.— δουλεῦσαι : like ἄρξαι 
(c. 91. 10), denotes the beginning of 
the relation. — 2. kal ὑμῖν : cf. c. οἵ. 3. 

93. 1. πρὸ τοῦ ... παθεῖν: before 
suffering the worst. Cf. c. 100. 4. --- 
2. ὑπακοῦσαι: this is the voluntary 
act which would lead to subjection, 
and is therefore substituted as a 
milder word for δουλεῦσαι in c. 92. — 
μὴ διαφθείραντες ὑμᾶς: 1.6. by not 
robbing ourselves of the strength you 
would bring us. 

94. 1. ὥστε δέ: see App. — 3. δέ- 
ξαισθε: see App. 

95. 1. γὰρ : this introduces the rea- 
son for the unexpressed denial, equiv. 
to οὐκ ἂν δεξαίμεθα - od γάρ. Cf. c. 97. 
1; 99. 1. -- 2. ὅσον ἡ φιλία... δηλού- 


. pevov: the simple expression 7 φιλία 


(opp. to ἡ ἔχθρα) is developed, by the 
addition of the reasons for the asser- 
tion that the friendship of the Me- 
lians is worse than their enmity, into 
an ungrammatical form of sent. which 
is inadmissible in English. This com- 


plex expression is equiv. to two inde- 
pendent clauses: “your hostility does 
not injure us so much as your friend- 
ship; for your friendship appears to 
our subjects a proof of our weakness, 
whereas your hostility seems to them 
a proof of our power.” 

96. 1. ot ὑπήκοοι: 1.6. the ἀρχό- 
μενοι οὗ c.95. It has just been stated 
that they would regard the friendship 
of the Melians as a proof of weakness 
on the part of Athens. In reply to 
this, the question is asked whether the 
subjects of Athens regard all rela- 
tions between stronger and weaker 
states in the same way; whether a 
small state which has no special con- 
nexion with a more powerful one 
could not remain on friendly terms 
with it, and yet preserve its own in- 
dependence. “ Do your subjects really 
look at equity in this way so that they 
put all in the same category ?” — 2. 
ὅσοι: these fall naturally under the 
two categories: that of simple ἄποικοι 
(these are the majority, of πολλοί) 
and that of those who have revolted 


_ 


97 


98 


THUCYDIDES V. 97,98. 


ΑΘ. Δικαιώματι yap οὐδετέρους ἐλλείπειν ἡγοῦν- 1 
Ν ΄ \ Ν Ν , Cc 1A 
ται, κατὰ δύναμιν δὲ τοὺς μὲν περιγίγνεσθαι, ἡμᾶς δὲ 
, ie ΟΣ σ΄ " .. ΑἸ ἀ ΡΝ δ ν 
φόβῳ οὐκ ἐπιέναι" ὥστε ἔξω καὶ τοῦ πλεόνων ἄρξαι καὶ 
ὌΝ \ te Ν Ν A x 0, »— 
τὸ ἀσφαλὲς ἡμῖν διὰ τὸ καταστραφῆναι av παράσχοιτε, 
5 ἄλλως τε καὶ νησιῶται ναυκρατόρων καὶ ἀσθενέστεροι 


ef ¥ > ‘\ , 
ἑτέρων ὄντες εἰ μὴ περιγένοισθε. . 


ΜΗΛ. 


Ἔν δ᾽ ἐκείνῳ οὐ νομίζετε ἀσφάλειαν ; (δεῖ 1 


\ ὯΝ Τὸ i We ὴθ C7 ε a lal § ΄, dé 
γαρ av Kat evTavva, ὠσπερ ῃυμεις TOV LKQAL@YV Oy@v 


ε Lal > ’ a ε ὔ ’ ε 4 7 
ἡμᾶς ἐκβιάσαντες TO ὑμετέρῳ ξυμφόρῳ ὑπακούειν πεί- 
θετε, καὶ ἡμᾶς τὸ ἡμῖν χρήσιμον διδάσκοντας, εἰ τυγχά- 
δ νει καὶ ὑμῖν τὸ αὐτὸ ξυμβαῖνον, πειρᾶσθαι πείθειν). ὅσοι 


and been subdued (twes, e.g. the Lesbi- 
ans). The parts are in the same case 
as the whole. Cf c. το. 47 ff. 

97. 1. δικαιώματι: a claim based 
upon justice, as in i. 41. 1.— γάρ : this 
introduces the reason for the unex- 
pressed affirmative answer, as in ὁ. 
99. 1 for the neg. — οὐδετέρους: 1.6. 
neither τοὺς μὴ προσήκοντας nor τοὺς 
ἀποίκους ὄντας καὶ ἀποστάντας. --- 2. τοὺς 
μέν: i.e. τοὺς μὴ προσήκοντας, who 
should, ace. to the opinion just ex- 
pressed by the Melians, be allowed to 
retain their independence; and this 
is the meaning of περιγίγνεσθαι. ---- 4. 
τὸ ἀσφαλὲς ἂν παράσχοιτε: because 
our subjects will no longer believe 
that we are afraid of you. The ex- 
pression, “you will, by the loss of 
your independence, increase our se- 
curity,” is not without a sort of bitter 
irony, which is still sharper in ἄλλως 
Te kal... εἰ μὴ περιγένοισθε. Just 
because you are islanders, and insig- 
nificant islanders at that, you have all 
the less reason for claiming the right 
to retain your independence. — 5. vav- 
κρατόρων : the gen. depends upon 
περιγένοισθε. Cf. i. 55. 10, Κέρκυρα 
περιγίγνεται τῷ πολέμῳ τῶν Κορινθίων. 


G. 175, 2 ; Η. 749.—6. ἑτέρων : than 
others, 1.6. other islanders. 

98. 1. ἐν ἐκείνῳ: 1,6. in the rela- 
tion proposed in c, 94, ὥστε ἡσυχίαν. 
«νον μηδετέρων, or, as the Schol. ex- 
plains, ἐν τῷ μὴ πειρᾶσθαι τοὺς μὴ προσ- 
ἥκοντας καταστρέφεσθα. The chief 
emphasis of the interr. sent. rests 
upon ἐν ἐκείνῳ. ἀσφάλειαν refers back 
to τὸ ἀσφαλές inc. 97.4. The Meli- 
ans ask, “doesn’t that proposal of 
ours seem to you to be a safe one?” 
The following sent., δεῖ yap πειρᾶσθαι 
... πείθειν, is inserted parenthetically 
(with αὖ καὶ ἐνταῦθα referring to c. 90. 
1), to give a reason for recurring to 
the proposal which the Athenians 
have already rejected inc. 95. The 
argument in support of this proposal is 
contained in the next sent., ὅσοι γάρ... 
αὐτοὺς xré., where it is expressed in 
negative form : “if you do not follow 
our advice, you will make enemies of 
all who are now neutral.” — 3. é«Bia- . 
σαντες: force out. See App. — τῷ 
ὑμετέρῳ ξυμφόρῳ, τὸ ἡμῖν χρήσιμον: 
“what is for your interest, what is 
for ours.” The Melians hope to make 
their own interest acceptable to the 
Athenians (πείθειν) only if it coin- 


100 


THUCYDIDES V. 98-100. 


Ν el . 4 n ~ > ’ 
γὰρ νῦν μηδετέροις ξυμμαχοῦσι, πῶς οὐ πολεμώσεσθε 
αὐτούς, ὅταν ἐς τάδε βλέψαντες ἡγήσωνταί ποτε ὑμᾶς καὶ 


lal 9 
ἐπὶ σφᾶς ἥξειν ; κἀν τούτῳ Ti ἄλλο ἢ τοὺς μὲν ὑπάρχον- 


τας πολεμίους μεγαλύνετε, τοὺς δὲ μηδὲ μελλήσαντας γε- 


10 νέσθαι ἄκοντας ἐπάγεσθε; ; 


99 


ΑΘ. Οὐ γὰρ νομίζομεν ἡμῖν τούτους Seworépous, 


yy > la oa ¥ ~ > 4 ἈΝ ‘ 
ὅσοι ἠπειρῶταί που ὄντες τῷ ἐλευθέρῳ πολλὴν THY 


διαμέλλησιν τῆς πρὸς ἡμᾶς φυλακῆς ποιήσονται, ἀλλὰ 


τοὺς νησιώτας τέ που ἀνάρκτους, ὥσπερ ὑμᾶς, καὶ τοὺς 


5 ἤδη τῆς ἀρχῆς τῷ ἀναγκαίῳ παροξυνομένους. 


a \ 
OvTOL yap 


lal > ἃ a 3 , > ΄, al 3 Ν 
πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἀλογίστῳ ἐπιτρέψαντες σφᾶς τε αὐτοὺς 


καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐς προῦπτον κίνδυνον καταστήσειαν. 


cides (τυγχάνει ξυμβαῖνον, sc. τὸ ἡμῖν 
χρήσιμον) with that of the Athenians 
themselves. — 6. πολεμώσεσθε: mid., 
make enemies of. ‘The pass. of this 
occurs in i. 36. 10; 57. 5,6.—7. és 
τάδε: at this which is going on here, 
i.e. at our fate.— 8. κἀν τούτῳ: opp. 
to ἐν ἐκείνῳ of 1.— τί ἄλλο ἤ: cf. c. 
87. 2; ii. 16. 10; iii. 39. 10.— 9. ped- 
λήσαντας : see App. 

‘99. 1. od γὰρ: see on c. 97. 1.— 
2. ὅσοι ἠπειρῶται ποιήσονται, τοὺς 
νησιώτας παροξυνομένους : the inhab- 
itants of the mainland are opp. to the 
islanders. The Athenians wish to 
show that they are in danger not so 
much from the former as from the 
latter. “The people of the mainland 
will in their freedom (the dat. τῷ 
ἐλευθέρῳ denotes not so much cause as 
merely an attendant circumstance, 
and is nearly equiv. to ἐλεύθεροι ὄντες) 
defer indefinitely any measures of 
precaution they may take against us, 
which is not the case with the island- 
ers, whether they are, like you, free 
from restraint, or irritated by the 


MHA. °H που dpa, εἰ τοσαύτην ye ὑμεῖς τε μὴ 


necessity of submission to our rule.” 
For other explanations, see App. — 
6. τῷ ἀλογίστῳ: rash or ill-considered 
action, in consequence of παροξύνεσθαι. 
—7. ἐς κίνδυνον καταστήσειαν : so 
also in ii. 100.25. Similarly és ἀπο- 
play, li. 81. 37; vii. 75. 14; és ταραχήν, 
iv. 75. 10; és ἔκπληξιν, vi. 36.7. The 
Schol. explains this chap. as follows: 
ov yap νομίζομεν τοὺς ἐλευθέρους τῶν 
ἠπειρωτῶν ἡμῖν ἔσεσθαι πολεμίους " μὴ 
δεδιότες γὰρ ἡμᾶς, ὡς ἂν κατὰ γῆν οὐ 
μέλλοντας αὐτοῖς ἐπιστρατεύειν, πολλὴν 
μέλλησιν τοῦ φυλάττεσθαί τε ἡμᾶς καὶ 
πολεμεῖν ποιήσονται. τοὺς δὲ ἐν ταῖς 
νήσοις ἐλευθέρους ὥσπερ ὑμᾶς, καὶ τοὺς 
ὑπακούοντας μὲν ἤδη, διὰ δὲ τὸ ἐξ ἀνάγ- 
κης καὶ μὴ ἑκοντὶ ὑπακούειν παροξυνομέ- 
vous καὶ ταραττομένους τούτους ἡγούμεθα, 
εἰ περιίδοιμεν ὑμᾶς ἐλευθέρους (so Cl. 
for ἡμᾶς: “if we should permit you 
to be free ”), ἐπαρθέντας ἀλογίστως καὶ 
ἀντιστάντας ἡμῖν αὐτούς τε Kal ἡμᾶς 
αὐτοὺς ἐς κίνδυνον καταστήσειν. 

100. 1. 4 που dpa: surely then. An 
emphatic asseveration followed by a 
confident conclusion. Both belong 


153 


154 


101 


102 


103 


THUCYDIDES V. 100-103. 


παυθῆναι ἀρχῆς καὶ ot δουλεύοντες ἤδη ἀπαλλαγῆναι THY 


παρακινδύνευσιν ποιοῦνται, ἡμῖν γε τοῖς ἔτι ἐλευθέροις 


πολλὴ κακότης καὶ δειλία μὴ πᾶν πρὸ τοῦ δουλεῦσαι 


5 ἐπεξελθεῖν. 


ΑΘ. Οὐκ, ἥν γε σωφρόνως βουλεύησθε: οὐ γὰρ 


> Gee. J ΄ 4.) ἃ, Δὲ, 32% aA en Ν > , 
περὶ ἀνδραγαθίας 6 ἀγὼν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου ὑμῖν μὴ αἰσχύ- 


νην ὀφλεῖν, περὶ δὲ σωτηρίας μᾶλλον ἡ βουλὴ πρὸς 
τοὺς κρείσσονας πολλῷ μὴ ἀνθίστασθαι. 


ΜΗΛ. 


᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐπιστάμεθα τὰ τῶν πολέμων ἔστιν 


ὅτε κοινοτέρας τὰς τύχας λαμβάνοντα ἢ κατὰ τὸ διαφέρον 


ἑκατέρων πλῆθος. 


καὶ ἡμῖν τὸ μὲν εἶξαι εὐθὺς ἀνέλπι- 


Ν δὲ ΄ 4 ¥ Ν “ > Ν 5 A 
στον, μετὰ δὲ τοῦ Spwpévov ἔτι καὶ στῆναι ἐλπὶς ὀρθῶς. 


ΑΘ. 


with πολλὴ κακότης, sc. ἂν εἴη. --- 3. 
παρακινδύνευσιν ποιοῦνται: equiv. to 
παρακινδυνεύουσι (cf. iii. 36. 11), with 
the emphatic signification of παρα- 
implying excess. See on iii. 32. 15. 
The aor. infs. παυθῆναι and ἀπαλλαγῆς 
vat, both const. with ἀρχῆς, express 
the purpose of παρακινδύνευσιν ποιοῦν- 
Tat.—4. πρὸ τοῦ δουλεῦσαι: cf c. 93. 
1.j— πᾶν ἐπεξελθεῖν : try (cf. c. 9. 41) 
everything (cf. iii. 45. 20), even the 
most extreme measures. 

101. 1. οὔκ : this refers, not to any 
particular words, but to the whole idea 
of what precedes ; equiv. to οὐ ποιήσετε 
τοῦτο. Of. iii. 66. 19. — 2. ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἴσου: this belongs with 6 ἀγών, and 
is opp. to πρὸς τοὺς κρείσσονας πολλῷ: 
“with equal forces.” See on i. 77. 8. 
— 3. ὀφλεῖν : with Bekker and others 
against the authority of the Mss., 
which read ὄφλειν. The sense (“ not to 
fall into disgrace”) demands the aor. 
(of pres. ὀφλισκάνω) .--- ἡ βουλή : this is 
substituted for 6 ἀγών as if to exclude 
the notion of a decision by violence. 

102, 1. ἀλλά: this does not, like 


Ἐλπὶς δὲ κινδύνῳ παραμύθιον οὖσα τοὺς 


δέ, introduce an objection or direct 
reply, but a new observation or point 
of view. Cf. c. 108. 1. — πολέμων : 
see App.— 2. koworépas: this is to 
be explained from the meaning of 
κοινός, impartial (cf. iii. 53. 8; 68. 7), 
“the fortunes of war sometimes turn 
out more impartially (i.e. more in ac- 
cordance with justice) than the differ- 
ence in the forces on the two sides 
would lead one to expect.” — τὰς 
τύχας λαμβάνοντα: c/. ὅταν καιρὸν Ad, 
βωσιν, vi. 86. 18. -- ἢ κατά: of. i. 76. 
17; ii. 50.2.— 4. τοῦ δρωμένου : this 
is, as in c. 66. 18, prop. pass., but 
since it refers directly to the agent, 
it is used here and in vi. 16. 12 as a 
general expression for independent 
action. On the use of the partic. for 
the inf., see on c. 9. 18.— ἔτι : const. 
with ἐλπίς, and ὀρθῶς with στῆναι. So 
Polyb., xxxiii. 12. 3, has ὀρθῶς ἵσταντο. 
Van Herwerden’s proposal, ὀρθοῖς, is 
needless. Cf. also Soph. O. T. 50, 
στάντες τ᾽ és ὀρθόν. 

103. 1. ἐλπὶς δέ: in introducing 
a reply, δέ throws special emphasis 


“πὶ 


_ 





104 


THUCYDIDES V. 103, 104. 


μὲν ἀπὸ περιουσίας χρωμένους αὐτῇ, Kav βλάψῃ, ov 
καθεῖλε" τοῖς δ᾽ ἐς ἅπαν τὸ ὑπάρχον ἀναρριπτοῦσι (δά- 
πανος γὰρ φύσει) ἅμα τε γιγνώσκεται σφαλέντων καὶ ἐν 
5 ὅτῳ ἔτι φυλάξεταί τις αὐτὴν γνωρισθεῖσαν οὐκ ἐλλείπει. 


ὃ ὑμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς τε καὶ ἐπὶ ῥοπῆς μιᾶς ὄντες μὴ βούλεσθε 


παθεῖν, 


μηδὲ ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πολλοῖς, οἷς παρὸν ἀν- 


θρωπείως ἔτι σῴζεσθαι, ἐπειδὰν πιεζομένους αὐτοὺς 


ἐπιλίπωσιν at φανεραὶ ἐλπίδες, ἐπὶ τὰς ἀφανεῖς καθ. 


’΄ 4A lal 
10 ίστανται, μαντικήν TE καὶ χρησμοὺς καὶ ὅσα τοιαῦτα μετ᾽ 


ἐλπιδων λυμαίνεται. 


upon one word, whether it be (as 
here; c. 91.1; 96.1; 106. 1) the pre- 
ceding or (as in c. 94.1; 98.1; 1 

1) the following word. — παραμύθιον : 
the concrete means of παραμυθία. The 
two are not so entirely equiv. as Lo- 
‘beck (ad Phryn. p. 517) thinks, but 
differ as do the Lat. nouns in -men- 
tum and -io.—2. ἀπὸ περιουσίας: 
cf. ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος, of their abun- 
dance, St. Mark, x11. 44. — οὐ καθεῖλε : 
the gnomic aor., drawing a general in- 
ference from special cases. Cf. i. 69. 
31. GMT. 30,1; H. 840; Kiihn. 386, 
7.—3. τοῖς 8 ἐς απαν τὸ ὑπάρχον 
ἀναρριπτοῦσι : those who cast (the die) 
for all their possessions. With ἀναρριπ- 
τοῦσι supply κίνδυνον, i.e. the die. Cf. 
iv. 85. 13; 95. 5; vi. 13.8. ἐς ἅπαν τὸ 
ὑπάρχον must be taken together. Those 
who, on account of their poverty, are 
obliged to risk their all are opp. to 
those who, like rich men buying lot- 
tery tickets, risk only what they can 
afford to lose. See App.—4. ἅμα: 
const. with γιγνώσκεται σφαλέντων. 
“When misfortune has come upon 
them the true nature of Hope is rec- 
ognized; but then she does not leave 


MHA. Χαλεπὸν μὲν καὶ ἡμεῖς, εὖ ἴστε, νομίζομεν 


(οὐκ ἐλλείπει, trans.; cf. Eur. ΕἸ. 
609) anything in which (1.6. in respect 
to which) one can be on his guard 
against her now that she is known.” 
— 6. 6: but this, expressing a strong 
opposition. Cf. c. 107.3; 109. 3, and 
see on iv. 17. 18. — ἐπὶ ῥοπῆς pias: 
this is a stronger expression than ἐπὶ 
ῥοπῆς μικρᾶς in Eur. Hipp. 1163. The 
meaning is not “ only a little is needed 
to turn the scale,” but, corresponding 
to és ἅπαν τὸ ὑπάρχον ἀναρριπτοῦσι, 
“everything is at the mercy of a sin- 
gle turn.” — μὴ βούλεσθε: this resem- 
bles the Lat. nolite, but partakes of 
the nature of a benevolent warning : 
“pray do not be willing.” Thuc. uses 
this expression in one other place, iv. 
10. 2, μηδεὶς ξυνετὸς βουλέσθω δοκεῖν 
εἶναι. ---- 7. οἷς παρόν, καθίστανται : the 
rel. pron. stands in the dependent 
clause, but must be supplied as subj. 
of the main verb. — ἀνθρωπείως : by 
human means. —9. ἐπιλίπωσιν: de- 
ficiant, fail. ΟΥ̓ ii. 70. 4,6 σῖτος 
ἐπελελοίπει. --- ἀφανεῖς: sc. ἐλπίδας, 
hopes with no visible foundation. The 
explanation, which is added in appos., 
mentions such unstable objects of 


155 


156 


105 


THUCYDIDES V. 104, 105. 


Ν , , Ν ε ΄ Ν Ν 4 > Ἄν, Ae 
πρὸς δύναμίν τε THY ὑμετέραν Kal THY τύχην, εἰ μὴ ἀπὸ 
τοῦ ἴσου ἔσται, ἀγωνίζεσθαι: ὅμως δὲ πιστεύομεν τῇ 


Ἀ ͵ > al , A > , 4 ν Ν 
μὲν τύχῃ ἐκ τοῦ θείου μὴ ἐλασσώσεσθαι, ὅτι ὅσιοι πρὸς 


5 οὐ δικαίους ἱστάμεθα, τῆς δὲ δυνάμεως τῷ ἐλλείποντι 
τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἡμῖν ξυμμαχίαν προσέσεσθαι, ἀνάγ- 
Knv ἔχουσαν, καὶ εἰ μή του ἄλλου, τῆς ye ξυγγενείας 


7 Ν > , a Ν > , y 
EVEKA καὶ αισχυνῃ βοηθεῖν. και OV παντάπασιν οὐτως 


ἀλόγως θρασυνόμεθα. 


ἡμεῖς οἰόμεθα :λελείψεσθαι. 


ΑΘ. Τῆς μὲν τοίνυν πρὸς τὸ θεῖον εὐμενείας οὐδ᾽ 


οὐδὲν γὰρ ἔξω τῆς avOpw- 


, a Ν 5» Ν ~ , A δ᾽ > cal 
TELAS Τῶν μὲν ες TO θεῖον νομισέως τῶν ες σφᾶς 


hope, which, in conjunction μετ᾽ ἐλπί- 
δων, effect men’s ruin, 

104. 2. τὴν τύχην: this is the 
ruling power which affects men’s lives 
without their own action, and is be- 
lieved by the pious to be dependent 
upon τὸ θεῖον. Its special manifes- 
tations are the τύχαι. Cf. c. 102. 2. 
See Introd. to Book I., p. 29. What 
is, in c. 102. 2, expressed by κοιναί in 
connexion with τύχαι is here, with 
τύχη itself, denoted by ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου: 
“not preferring either of the con- 
tending parties.” —4. ἐκ τοῦ θείου : 
cf. α. 112. 7.— dover: this is the only 
instance of the pers. use of this word 
in Thuc., god-fearing, observant of the 
divine ordinances (the ὅσια of i. 71. 
25; ii. 52. 11, and the ὅσιον of iii. 84. 
14) upon which human society is 
based, and the chief of which is the 
δίκαιον which the Melians have called 
(in ec. 90. 3) τὸ κοινὸν ἀγαθόν. The 
opposites of the ὅσιοι are therefore 
plainly called οὐ δίκαιοι, although the 
Athenians are not mentioned by 
name. — 5. ἱστάμεθα: this word is 
used esp. of warlike opposition. Cf 
i. 33. 22; 53. 6; iii. 39. 18.— τῴ ἐλλεί- 


ποντι: const. with προσέσεσθαι, and 
take ἡμῖν as dat. of interest, nearly 
equiv. to the possessive gen., “ their 
alliance will supplement our defi- 
ciency.” — 8. αἰσχύνῃ : from a feeling 
of honour. Of. iv. το. 15.— οὐ παντά- 
πασιν οὕτως ἀλόγως : “not altogether 
so foolish as you may suppose.” See 
on 6. 59. 17 and ii. 11. 24. 

105. 1. τοίνυν : see on ὁ. 87. 1.— 
πρὸς τὸ θεῖον : this in conjunction with 
εὐμένεια denotes a good relation in the 
widest sense; not only that the Athe- 
nians hope for the favour of the gods, 
but also that they fulfil their obliga- 
tions toward them, It is an indirect 
reply to the ὅσιοι πρὸς οὐ δικαίους of the 
Melians. πρὸς τὸ θεῖον is not to be 
changed with Kr. to πρὸς τοῦ θείου, nor 
with Meineke to περὶ τὸ θεῖον. ---- 2. 
λελείψεσθαι : equiv. to ἐλασσώσεσθαι of 
12, “that we shall be inferior there- 
in.” — τῆς ἀνθρωπείας : this belongs 
to both the following substs. (vouloews 
and βουλήσεως), and is therefore placed 
before both in the sent. Cf. ii. 44. 4. 
—3. νομίσεως : this is here used not 
so much of opinion or belief as of the 
exercise of religious customs and cer- 


THUCYDIDES V. τος. 157 
> Ν ΄ ᾿ a x ἜΣ ε ΄ 
αὐτοὺς βουλήσεως δικαιοῦμεν ἢ πράσσομεν. ἡγούμεθα 2 
5 γὰρ τό τε θεῖον δόξῃ, τὸ ἀνθρώπειόν τε σαφῶς διὰ παν- 


——— 


‘ 69) , , ἤμ «a - » \ 
τὸς ὑπὸ φύσεως ἀναγκαίας, οὗ ἂν κρατῇ, ἄρχειν. καὶ 
ε Lol »> ~~ 
ἡμεῖς οὔτε θέντες τὸν νόμον οὔτε κειμένῳ πρῶτοι χρη- 


4 + A ’ Ἁ > ld > : aS 
σάμενοι, ὄντα δὲ παραλαβόντες καὶ ἐσόμενον ἐς ἀεὶ Ka- 
ταλείψοντες χρώμεθα αὐτῷ, εἰδότες καὶ ὑμᾶς ἂν καὶ ἀλ- 

10 λους ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ δυνάμει ἡμῖν γενομένους χδρῶντας͵ ἂν 
ταὐτό. καὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸ θεῖον οὕτως ἐκ Tov εἴκότος οὐ 8 

φοβούμεθα ἐλασσώσεσθαι: τῆς δὲ ἐς Λακεδαιμονίους᾽ 

δό a 8 x Ν > Ν δὺ θ ΄ ec a 4 
Eys, ἣν διὰ τὸ αἰσχρὸν δὴ βοηθήσειν ὑμῖν πιστεύετε 


αὐτούς, μακαρίσαντες ὑμῶν τὸ ἀπειρόκακον οὐ ζηλοῦμεν 


emonies, τὰ νενομισμένα, τὰ εἰθισμένα 
περὶ τοὺς θεούς, Schol. —és σφᾶς av- 
τοὺς βουλήσεως : i.e. ἐς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, 
which is suggested by the preceding 
GvOpwrelas. Like Lat. voluntas, 
βούλησις denotes one’s state of mind 
toward others. — 4. δικαιοῦμεν, πράσ- 
σομεν: the first refers to βουλήσεως: 
“we put forward no unwarranted pre- 
tensions,” the second to both vouicews 
and βουλήσεως. 

5. δόξῃ, σαφῶς : these words, placed 
respectively after the substs. τὸ θεῖον 
and τὸ ἀνθρώπειον, denote the degree 
of certainty of ἡγούμεθα as applied 
to these substs., and are not to be 
const. with ἄρχειν: “for of the gods 
we believe, and of men we know, that 
by a law of their nature, wherever 
they have power (i.e. throughout the 
realm of their power), they always 
rule.” Greater stress is laid upon ἀν- 
θρώπειον, as is evident from its posi- 
tion before re. — διὰ παντός : this is 
temporal, as usual. See on i. 38. 2. 
Like ὑπὸ φύσεως ἀναγκαίας, it belongs 
with ἄρχειν. The Athenians leave it 
to the Melians to give the general 
proposition τὸ ἀνθρώπειον οὗ ἂν κρατῇ 
ἄρχειν its application to the case in 


hand: οὕτω καὶ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις προσή- 
Kew ὡς κατὰ θάλασσαν κρατοῦντας ὑμῶν 
νησιωτῶν ὄντων ἄρχειν. But the propo- 
sition itself, ἄρχειν τινὰ οὗ ἂν κρατῇ, or 
“might makes right,” is the νόμος to 
which reference is made in the sub- 
sequent words. —9. ὑμᾶς dv, δρῶντας 
ἄν: the repetition of ἄν with subj. 
and verb adds clearness as well as 
emphasis. Cf. c. 9. 16.—11. ταὐτό 
see App. — ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος : in accord- 
ance with probability. This refers to 
the statement of 2, οὐδὲν ἔξω τῆς ἀνθρω- 
metas és τὸ θεῖον νομίσεως πράσσομεν. 

12. φοβούμεθα: is here followed 
by the fut. inf. on account of the 
implied notion of indir. disc. GMT. 
46, κ. 6 (6); H. 948 a.— τῆς δόξης : 
const. with τὸ ἀπειρόκακον, 14, and τὸ 
ἄφρον, 15. — ἐς Λακεδαιμονίους : c/- iii. 
14.1, τὰς és ὑμᾶς ἐλπίδας, and iv. 81. 
12, ἐπιθυμία és τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους. ---- 
13. ἥν : cognate acc. with πιστεύετε, 
since δόξη is here nearly equiv. to 
πίστις. See App.— διὰ τὸ αἰσχρόν: 
equiv. to αἰσχύνῃ of c. 104.8. αἰσχρὸν 
νομίζοντας τοὺς ἀποίκους πολεμουμένους, 
Schol. — 14, ὑμῶν τὸ ἀπειρόκακον : 
your simplicity, which arises from inex- 
perience of evil. 


158 THUCYDIDES V. 105-107. 


Λακεδαιμόνιοι yap πρὸς σφᾶς μὲν αὐτοὺς 4 
καὶ τὰ ἐπιχώρια νόμιμα πλεῖστα ἀρετῇ Χρῶνται" πρὸς δὲ 


15 τὸ ἄφρον. 


ξυνελὼν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν δηλώσειεν ὅτι ἐπιφανέστατα ὧν 
ἴσμεν τὰ μὲν ἡδέα καλὰ νομίζουσι, τὰ δὲ ξυμφέροντα 
20 δίκαια. καίτοι οὐ πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας νῦν ἀλόγου σωτη- 
ρίας ἡ τοιαύτη διάνοια. 
106 MHA. 
στα πιστεύομεν τῷ ξυμφέροντι αὐτῶν Μηχῶυς ἀποίκους 


Ἡμεῖς δὲ κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἤδη καὶ pads 


-_ 


ὄντας μὴ βουλήσεσθαι προδόντας 7 τοῖς μὲν εὔνοις τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων ἀπίστους καταστῆναι, τοῖς δὲ πολεμίοις ὠφε- 
δ λίμους. 
107 ΑΘ. οΟὐκ οὖν οἴεσθε τὸ ξυμφέρον μὲν μετὰ ἀσφα- 
λείας εἶναι, τὸ δὲ δίκαιον καὶ καλὸν μετὰ κινδύνου 


a 


δρᾶσθαι; ; ὃ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἥκιστα ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ τολ- 
WANK ASAN, aya dinwee 
μῶσιν. 


10. πλεῖστα: adv. See on i. 3. 23. 
—17. πολλὰ dv tis ἔχων εἰπεῖν : a 
common rhetorical expression. Cf. 
Dem. 11. 27; vii1. 52.— 18. ξυνελών : 
freq. used by Thuc. to introduce a 


τῷ αὐτῶν ξυμφέροντι, but αὐτῶν, even in 
the position in which it stands here, 
may have the sense of ἴδιον (Lat. 
ipsorum). Still we should natu- 
rally translate it of them (Lat. eo- 


brief summing up, esp. in speeches. 
Cf. ii. 41.1; iii. 40. 16; vi. 80. 14.— 
20. καίτοι: and yet (see on ii. 60. 16; 
iv. 18. 5) this selfish character of the 
Lacedaemonians is not favourable to 
the fulfilment of your present foolish 
hope of deliverance. The ἄλογος 
σωτηρία is here intentionally opp. to 
the οὐκ ἀλόγως θρασυνόμεθα of c. 104. 
9. 

106. 1. κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τοῦτο : precisely 
because the Lacedaemonians νομίζουσι 
τὰ ξυμφέροντα δίκαια. --- 2. τῷ ξυμφέ- 
ροντι αὐτῶν : const. with μὴ βουλήσεσθαι 
(not with πιστεύομεν). διὰ τὸ ἴδιον ξυμ- 
φέρον, Schol. We should, as St. ob- 
serves, expect τῷ αὑτῶν ξυμφέροντι or 


rum, i.e. of some other people), which 
is here plainly impossible. See App: 
— 4. katraoryvar: an emphatic γενέ- 
σθαι. Cf. i. 70. 3; ili, 102. 26; iv. 92: 
15; vi. 82. 13. 

107. 1. οὐκ οὖν κτέ.: this is the 
ordinary neg. introduction of a ques- 
tion expecting an affirmative answer: 
don’t you think then? 1.6. “of course 
you understand.” This sense would 
appear more plainly if we were to 
read οὐκ οὖν tore instead of οἴεσθε, as 
the Schol. may perhaps have done, 
who explains: ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, ὥσπερ ἴστε, 
συμφέρει κτὲ. --- 3. δρᾶσθαι: see App. 
--ὅ: “but just that.” Cf c. 103. 6; 
109. 3. 








109 
᾿ 





2 


108 MHA. 


‘ 


THUCYDIDES V. 108-110, 


3 ‘ . A »“"“ὥ. 
Αλλὰ καὶ τοὺς κινδύνους τε ἡμῶν ἕνεκα 1 


βϑλλον ᾿ἡγούμεθ' ἃ ἂν ἐγχειρίσ' σασθαι αὐτούς, καὶ βεβαιο- 
τέρους ἢ ἐς ἄλλους νομιεῖν, ὅσῳ πρὸς μὲν τὰ ἔργα τῆς 
Βελοποννήσου ἐ ἐγγὺς κείμεθα, τῆς δὲ γνώμης τῷ ξυγγενεῖ 


5 πιστότεροι ἑτέρων ἐφμέες 


ΑΘ. Τὸ δ᾽ ἐχυρόν γε τοῖς ξυναγωνιουμένοις οὐ 
. τὸ εὔνουν τῶν ἐπικαλέσαμνων caverns, ἀλλ᾽ ἣν τῶν 
ἔργων τις δυνάμει πολὺ προύχῃ᾽ ὃ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ 


πλεῖόν τι τῶν ἄλλων σκοποῦσι. 


τῆς γοῦν οἰκείας παρα- 


δ σκευῆς ἀπιστίᾳ καὶ μετὰ ξυμμάχων πολλῶν τοῖς πέλας 


110 


ἐπ᾿ ἔρχοντι αι" 


ὥστε οὐκ εἰκὸς ἐς νῆσόν γε αὐτοὺς ἡμῶν 


ναυκρατόρων ὄντων περαιωθῆναι. 


108, 1. καὶ τοὺς κινδύνους: the 
dangers which are connected with the 
δίκαιον and καλόν. “The Lacedaemo- 
nians will be more ready to face them 
for our sake, and will consider them 
less dangerous (βεβαιοτέρους with κιν- 
δύνους; cf. iii. 39. 5, τὸν μετὰ τῶν 
ὀλίγων κίνδυνον ἡγησάμενοι βεβαιότερον) 
than in relation to others (ἐς ἄλλους), 
i.e. than if they were to face them 
for the sake of others. és expresses 
a general relation, as in c. 105. 12. — 
τε: const. not with κινδύνους alone, 
but as the connective of the first 
clause, ἀλλά... ἐγχειρίσασθαι αὐτούς 
with, the second, καὶ βεβαιοτέρους νομι- 
civ. — 2. ἐγχειρίσασθαι : the mid. does 
not occur elsewhere in Attic Greek. 


—8. dow: inasmuch α8. --- πρὸς τὰ 
ἔργα: adres gerendas, “when 
anything is to be done.” Melos is 


so near the coast of Peloponnesus 
that it could easily send troops. or 


‘supplies to the Lacedaemonians. — 


4. κείμεθα : equiv. to 7 ἡμετέρα νῆσος 
κεῖται. The application of the word 
is transferred from the island to its 


MHA. Οἱ δὲ καὶ ἄλλους ἂν ἔχοιεν πέμψαι - πολὺ 


inhabitants. τῆς γνώμης τῷ ξυγγενεῖ: 
“on account of the likeness of our 
views which arises from our relation- 
ship.” This is indirectly an explana- 
tion of τῆς tvyyeveias ἕνεκα, of c. 104. 
7. γνώμη is used of views on political 
matters, as in i. 113. 10; iii. 70. 27; 
iv. 56. 17. — 5. ἑτέρων : than any others. 
See on i. 84. 7. 

109. 1. τὸ éxvpov: stands in the 
relation of pred. to τὸ εὔνουν after 
φαίνεται, and the art. is added to em- 
phasize the subst. use of ἐχυρόν (cf: 
ii. 43.22 f.) : “the thing which inspires 
confidence is not the good will,” ete. ; 
the positive side is then expressed by 
the cond. sent. ἀλλ᾽ ἤν τις προύχῃ. --- 
5. καὶ μετὰ ξυμμάχων πολλῶν : a sim- 
ilar idea is expressed in ii. 39. § 2.— 
6. οὐκ εἰκὸς αὐτοὺς περαιωθῆναι : εἰκός 
regularly takes the inf. aor. (never 
the fut.) where the probability of the 
occurrence of a fut. action is to be 
expressed. See oni. 81. 18. 

110. 1. καὶ ἄλλους: i.e. the allies, 
a list of whom is given in ii. 9. § 2. 
The Corinthians would be esp. fitted 


159 


160 


11 


THUCYDIDES V. 110, 111. 


δὲ τὸ Κρητικὸν πέλαγος, δι᾿ οὗ τῶν κρατούντων ἀπορώ- 
ε “a x» “~ Lal 4 ε 4 

Tepos ἡ Anus ἢ τῶν λαθεῖν βουλομένων ἡ σωτηρία. 
ἈΝ > nw , 4 5 *» A > 4 r 

καὶ εἰ τοῦδε σφάλλοιντο, τράποιντ᾽ ἂν καὶ ἐς THY γῆν 2 


ε A Ν ee Ν ‘ “A Ud 9 ‘ 
5 ὑμῶν καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς τῶν ξυμμάχων, ὅσους μὴ 
Βρασίδας ἐπῆλθε." καὶ οὐ περὶ τῆς μὴ προσηκούσης μᾶλ- 
λον 7) τῆς οἰκειοτέρας ξυμμαχίδος τε καὶ γῆς. ὁ πόνος 


ὑμῖν ἔσται. 


for such ΒΟΥΥΪΟΘ, --- πολύ: cf. πολλὴ ἡ 
Σικελία, vii. 13. 16.—2. τὸ Κρητικὸν 
πέλαγος: the sea to the south and 
southeast from Peloponnesus. See on 
iv. 53. 18.— 68? οὗ: per quod, ie. 
on account of its greatness. — τῶν 
κρατούντων, τῶν βουλομένων : subjec- 
tive gens. — ἀπορώτερος : on the Πηᾶ80: 
ending in the comp. of compound adjs., 
see on iii. 89. 21 and iv. 31.15. Κα, 
Spr. § 23, 1, Rem. — 3. λῆψις : in the 
sense of λαμβάνειν, as in 6, 115. 5; 
vii. 25. 16. 

4. τοῦδε: sc. τοῦ κατὰ θάλασσαν βοη- 
θῆσαι ἡμῖν. ---- 5. τοὺς λοιποὺς τῶν ξυμ- 
μάχων: esp. those on the Thracian 
coast. This, as the most important 
part of the Athenian empire, may be 
particularly referred to in τῆς οἰκειο- 
τέρας ξυμμαχίδος of 7. — ὅσους μὴ 
ἐπῆλθε: such as he did not reach, The 
cond. rel. (with μή, not οὐ) is equiv. 
to εἴ τινας μὴ ἐπῆλθε. GMT. 61, 1; 
H. 913. —6. οὐ μᾶλλον ἤ: not so much 
as, See on i. 73.17.— 7. οἰκειοτέρας : 
this is opp. to τῆς μὴ προσηκούσης (not 
τῆς ov mpoohkovens, and therefore a 
general expression applicable to other 
places besides Melos; G. 283, 4; H. 
1025 a), and belongs with both ξυμ- 
μαχίδος and γῆς. With προσηκούσης 
we should supply ξυμμαχίδος. rather 
than γῆς, for it was as ξυμμαχίς that 
new territory was added to the Athe- 


ΑΘ. Τούτων μὲν καὶ πεπειραμένοις av τι γένοιτο 


nian empire. γῆς is then added as an 
afterthought: “not about territory 
which you hope to add to your em- 
pire without any right, but about 
your own empire and, for that matter, 
your own country.” Cl. supplies γῆς 
with μὴ προσηκούσης, and cites i. 13. 
18; ii, 11. 20; 20.17. Cf also 6. 111. 
20. There is no difficulty in supply- 
ing γῆς, but the above explanation 
seems better. See App. 

111. 1. τούτων μὲν kal πεπειραμέ- 
νοις κτέ. : the point of this reply to 
the threatening language of the Meli- 
ans lies in the proud assurance that 
such a double attack was nothing 
new for the Athenians. It is, there- 
fore, certain that, as St. observes, πε- 
πειραμένοις refers to the Athenians 
only. In the litotes (οὐκ ἀνεπιστήμοσιν, 
i.e. εὖ εἰδόσιν) the Athenians express 
with self-conscious irony the confi- 
dent belief that “the fame of our — 
campaigns has probably come to your 
ears.” The effect of τούτων τι is 
somewhat similar: “some of these 
things (with which you threaten us) 
would not come upon us without our 
having experienced the like before,” 
i.e. “nothing of all this is new to us.” 
On the pers. const. of πεπειραμένοις, 
see on ii. 3. 9.. This const. occurs 
with γίγνεσθαι also in ii. 60.1. See 
App. + 


THUCYDIDES V. 111. 161 


ε lal ‘\ ea > > /, 9 ANS > ‘ “Ἵ 
ἡμῖν, καὶ ὑμῖν οὐκ ἀνεπιστήμοσιν ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ἀπὸ μιᾶς 
πώποτε πολιορκίας ᾿Αθηναῖοι SV’ ἄλλων φόβον ἀπεχώ- 
> 4 Ν ν ’ = Ἁ ’ 

pnoav. ἐνθυμούμεθα δὲ ὅτι φήσαντες περὶ σωτηρίας 2 
6 βουλεύσειν οὐδὲν ἐν τοσούτῳ λόγῳ εἰρήκατε ᾧ ἄνθρωποι 
ἂν πιστεύσαντες νομίσειαν σωθήσεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ὑμῶν τὰ 

4 > ’ 5 / tA Ν 3 ε , 

μὲν ἰσχυρότατα ἐλπιζόμενα μέλλεται, τὰ δ᾽ ὑπάρχοντα 
βραχέα πρὸς τὰ ἤδη ἀντιτεταγμένα περιγίγνεσθαι. πολ-. 
λήν τε ἀλογίαν τῆς διανοίας παρέχετε, εἰ μὴ μεταστη- 
10 σάμενοι ἔτι ἡμᾶς ἄλλο τι τῶνδε σωφρονέστερον γνώσεσθο, 

, οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἐπί γε τὴν ἐν τοῖς αἰσχροῖς καὶ προύπτους 8 

; 


| κινδύνοις. πλεῖστα διαφθείρουσαν ἀνθρώπους iad bul 


ἰδγρέψέσθε, 


πολλοῖς γὰρ προορωμένοις ἔτι ἐς οἷα φέρον- 


4. ἐνθυμούμεθα: in the freq. oc- 11. οὐ γὰρ 81... τρέψεσθε: a simi- 


‘curring sense of sympathetic inter- 
est (cf. c. 32.5); here “we observe 
with regret.” --φήσαντες : see c. 87; 
88.—5. ἄνθρωποι: is used with ref- 
erence to what is said in c. 105. 4 ff. 
about the θεῖον and the ἀνθρώπειον. --- 
6. νομίσειαν: see App.— ὑμῶν τὰ 
ἰσχυρότατα ἐλπιζόμενα μέλλεται : your 
strongest (grounds of confidence), be- 
ing (mere) hopes, are held in abeyance. 
τὰ μὲν ἰσχυρότατα ὑμῶν ἐλπίδες εἰσὶ 
μέλλουσαι, Schol. The sense is ex- 
pressed in a characteristic manner by 
the pass. wéAAera: (in Xen. An. iii. 1. 
47 it is different, where μέλλεσθαι 
means be put off). — 8. βραχέα: 
const. περιγίγνεσθαι with this. Cf.i. 50. 
25, ὀλίγαι ἀμύνειν; ii. 61. 12, ταπεινὴ 
ἐγκαρτερεῖν. --- πολλήν Te: a final con- 
clusion: “ and so you exhibit great 
want of sense.” — 9. μεταστησάμενοι: 

causing to withdraw. See on i. 79. 3, 
and compare with this trans. aor. par- 
tic. the corresponding intrans. μετα- 
στάντων in 25.—10. : come 
toa conclusion. Cf. c. 36.10; i. 70.7; 
ii. 61. 12; iii. 40. 18. 


lar expression is used in i. 122. 23, ob 
γὰρ δὴ πεφευγότες ταῦτα ἐπὶ τὴν πλεί- 
στους δὴ βλάψασαν καταφρόνησιν κεχω- 
ρήκατε. In both passages an urgent 
warning is expressed; but here the 
danger is in the future, and therefore 
may still be avoided, while in the 
other case the fault is regarded as 
already committed. — 13. πολλοῖς γάρ 
κτὲ. : this sent. contains, in chiastic 
order, an explanation of the two epi- 
thets in the preceding sent.: προορω- 
μένοις ἔτι (ἔτι With προ-, while it is 
still time to avoid them) corresponds 
to προύπτοις κινδύνοις and τὸ αἰσχρὸν 
καλούμενον to αἰσχροῖς. This explains 
the unusual αἰσχροῖς κινδύνοις (for 
which ἐσχάτοις, ἄκροις, ἰσχυροῖς have 
been proposed), 7.e. “in dangers which 
threaten disgrace,” by which the loss 
of political independence is here 
meant. The Schol. renders: τὸ ἀπρε- 
πὲς τοῦ ὀνόματος, and adds: τουτέστι 
τὸ ὑπακούειν ἔχον τι ποιητικὸν αἰσχύνης. 
Cf. Dem. xvi. 178, μὴ δεῖσθαι Θη- 
βαίων μηδέν" αἰσχρὸς γὰρ ὃ καιρός, “it 
would bring you disgrace.” — 14, ἀπα- 


162 THUCYDIDES V. 111. 


ται TO αἰσχρὸν καλούμενον ὀνόματος ἐπαγωγοῦ δυνάμει 
15 ἐπεσπάσατο ἡσσηθεῖσι τοῦ ῥήματος ἔργῳ ξυμφοραῖς 
ἀνηκέστοις ἑκόντας περιπεσεῖν καὶ αἰσχύνην αἰσχίω μετὰ 
ἀνοίας ἢ τύχης προσλαβεῖν. ὃ ὑμεῖς, ἣν εὖ βουλεύησθε, 4 
φυλάξεσθε καὶ οὐκ ἀπρεπὲς νομιεῖτε πόλεώς τε τῆς με- 
γίστης ἡσσᾶσθαι μέτρια προκαλουμένης, ξυμμάχους γε- 
νέσθαι ἔχοντας τὴν ὑμετέραν αὐτῶν ὑποτελεῖς, καὶ δο- 
θείσης αἱρέσεως πολέμου πέρι καὶ ἀσφαλείας μὴ τὰ 
χείρω φιλονικῆσαι ὡς οἵτινες τοῖς μὲν ἴσοις μὴ εἴκουσι, 
τοῖς δὲ κρείσσοσι καλῶς προσφέρονται, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς 
ἥσσους μέτριοί εἶσι, πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν ὀρθοῖντο. σκοπεῖτε οὖν 5 
καὶ μεταστάντων ἡμῶν καὶ ἐνθυμεῖσθε πολλάκις ὅτι 
περὶ πατρίδος βουλεύεσθε, * ἣν μιᾶς πέρι καὶ ἐς μίαν 
κατορθώσασαν ἔσται 


20 


25 


βουλὴν τυχοῦσαν τε καὶ μὴ 


γωγοῦ : seductive, misleading. Cf. 6. 85. 
2; vi. 8. 7. --- 15. ἐπεσπάσατο : aor. 
as in c. 103.3. The mid. of this verb 
is used in iii. 44. 15; it is therefore 
not necessary to write, with v. Her- 
werden, Stud. Thuc. p. 80, ἐπέσπασε τό. 
Even without the art., περιπεσεῖν (16) 
and προσλαβεῖν (17) contain the obj. 
of πολλοῖς ἐπεσπάσατο: ‘so-called 
baseness by the power of a seductive 
word brings upon many (the misfor- 
tune) to fall into real troubles,” etc. 
— ῥήματος ἔργῳ: the juxtaposition 
makes the opposition in meaning all 
the more noticeable.— 16. ἑκόντας : 
acc. as subj. of περιπεσεῖν in spite of 
the preceding dats. πολλοῖς, προορω- 
μένοις, and ἡσσηθεῖσι. --- αἰσχύνην al- 
σχίω μετὰ ἀνοίας ἢ τύχης : a disgrace 
which is more disgraceful when incurred 
through folly than (it would be if incurred 
through) fortune. See App.— 17.προσ- 
λαβεῖν: “incur disgrace in addition to 
their misfortunes.” (Cf. iii. 82. 50. 
18. πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης : the order 


is like that in ii. 61. 17; iv. 10. 7; 86. 
2 and 8, with emphasis upon the adj. 
placed after the subst. and art.—19. 
μέτρια προκαλουμένης: cf ο. 37. 23, 
τὰ εἰρημένα προκαλούμενοι. The sub- 
stance of these proposals follows in 
the inf. γενέσθαι κτέ. ---- 20. ὑποτελεῖς : 
sc. φόρου (cf. i. 19.1; 80.14). With 
the exception of the few αὐτόνομοι (of 
i.g7.1) this was the regular condition 
of the Athenian ξύμμαχοι, in which 
respect they differed from those of 
the Lacedaemonians, acc. toi. 19. 1. — 
21. kal... φιλονικῆσαι: const. with 
οὐκ ἀπρεπὲς νομιεῖτε. φιλονικῆσαι (on 
the spelling, see St. Quaest. Gram. p. 
13) with the neut. obj. τὰ χείρω as in 
Plat. Prot. 360 e.— 23. καλῶς προσ- 
φέρονται: behave properly; a euphe- 
mism for submit. 

25. ἐνθυμεῖσθε: consider earnestly. 
Cf. 4. —26. ἣν μιᾶς πέρι... ἔσται: 
the expianation of the Schol. πολλάκις 
πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν λάβετε ὅτι περὶ πατρίδος 
ἡ σκέψις μιᾶς οὔσης, περὶ hs ἐν μιᾷ βου- 


THUCYDIDES V. 112, 113. 163 


2 Καὶ οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι μετεχώρησαν ἐκ τῶν λόγων" 1 
ot δὲ Μήλιοι κατὰ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς γενόμενοι, ὡς ἔδοξεν 
αὐτοῖς παραπλήσια καὶ ἀνχέλεγον; ἀπακρίναντο: τάδε- 

“Οὔτε ἄλλα δοκεῖ ἡμῖν ἢ ἅπερ καὶ τὸ πρῶτον; ὦ ᾽Αθη- 2 

δ ναῖοι, ovr. ἐν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ πόλεως ἑπτακόσια ἔτη ἤδη 
οἰκουμένης τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἀφαιρησόμεθα, ἀλλὰ τῇ τε 
μέχρι τοῦδε σῳζούσῃ τύχῃ ἐκ τοῦ θείου αὐτὴν καὶ τῇ 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων τιμωρίᾳ πιστεύ- 
οντες πειρασόμεθα σῴζεσθαι. προκαλούμεθα δὲ ὑμᾶς 8 

10 φίλοι μὲν εἶναι, πολέμιοι δὲ μηδετέροις, καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς 
ἡμῶν ἀναχωρῆσαι σπονδὰς ποιησαμένους αἵτινες δοκοῦσιν 
ἐπιτήδειοι εἶναι ἀμφοτέροις." 


113 Oi μὲν δὴ Μήλιοι τοσαῦτα ἀπεκρίναντο' 


Aw ἢ κατορθώσετε ἢ σφαλήσεσθε un- 
doubtedly gives the meaning intended; 
but the sent. is certainly corrupt, and 
the difficulties are not overcome by 
the various emendations proposed. 
See App. — 27. τυχοῦσάν τε καὶ κατ- 
ορθώσασαν:: the alternatives are ex- 
pressed in the same way, as in ii. 35. 
8, εὖ τε καὶ χεῖρον. εἰπόντι. 

112, 1. μετεχώρησαν: corresponds 
to μεταστάντων of c. 111. 25.—2. κατὰ 
σφᾶς αὐτούς : by themselves alone; κατά 
as in ii. 39. 11. --- 8, παραπλήσια καί: 
similia atque: about the same as. 
Cf. ii. 60. 20; iii. 14. 2.— ἀντέλεγον : 
the impf. because the negotiations 
were not yet atanend. We should, 
however, use the plpf. in English. 

4. οὔτε ἄλλα δοκεῖ ἡμῖν, οὔτε ἀφαιρη- 
σόμεθα: “neither our opinion nor our 
intention has changed.” The theo- 
retical and the practical aspects of 
the affair are placed side by side. — 
amwep καί: see on 6. 13. 7, ὧν κἀκεῖνος 
ἐπενόει. ---ὅ. ἑπτακόσια ἔτη: this 
statement, which is evidently not in- 
tended to be exact, carries us back to 


the time of the Dorian invasion. 
Conon, narrat. 36, mentions the Spar- 
tan Philonomus as founder of Melos 
soon after the Dorians took posses- 
sion of Sparta. See Miiller, Orcho- 
menos, Ὁ. 317. — 7. ἐκ τοῦ θείου : opp. 
to ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, with reference to 
6. 105. ὃ ff.; 11 ff. τὸ θεῖον is further 
explained by τύχη, and of ἄνθρωποι by 
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, the whole being ar- 
ranged in chiastic order. καὶ Λακεδαι- 
poviwy, which St. rejects, should there- 
fore be retained. καί introduces the 
specification of ἀνθρώπων, and is equiv. 
to et — quidem. 

9. παρακαλούμεθα xré.: first comes 
the proposal of the Melians as it af- 
fects themselves (φίλοι... underé- 
pos), then as it affects the Athenians. 
This is equiv. to ἡμῶν φίλων ὄντων 
ὑμῖν, πολεμίων δὲ μηδετέροις, ὑμᾶς ἐκ 
τῆς γῆς ἡμῶν ἀναχωρῆσαι. ---10. φίλοι: 
nom. referring to the subj. of προκα- 
λούμεθα. G. 136, κ. 3 (a); H. 940.— 
12. ἐπιτήδειοι : elsewhere this adj. has 
three terminations. Cf. c. 21.7; 81. 
9; viii. 11. 12. 


οἱ δὲ ᾽Αθη- 1 


164 


114 


THUCYDIDES V. 113, 114. 


vaio. διαλυόμενοι ἤδη ἐκ τῶν λόγων ἔφασαν" “᾿Αλλ᾽ 


> , ee , a % , ε ε κα ὃ 
ουν μόνοι γε ΑἼΤΟ Τούτων Τῶν βου ευὐυμάτων, ως μιν ο- 


΄Ὁ Ν Ν [2 A ε , 4 ’ 
κεῖτε, τὰ μὲν μέλλοντα τῶν ὁρωμένων σαφέστερα κρί- 


δ νετε, τὰ δὲ ἀφανῆ τῷ βούλεσθαι ὡς γιγνόμενα ἤδη θεᾶ- 


σθε, καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τύχῃ καὶ ἐλπίσι πλεῖστον δὴ 
΄ Ν , } Ν 4 
παραβεβλημένοι καὶ πιστεύσαντες πλεῖστον καὶ σφαλή- 


oealbe.” 


Kai οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων πρέσβεις ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς 


Ν ’ ε Ν Ν δ. χ ὧν ε 294 ε , 

ΤΟ στρατευμα" οι δὲ oTpaTnyot αὐτῶν, WS οὐδὲν UT - 
ε Ν / 79% > , x 

Kovov ot Μήλιοι, πρὸς πόλεμον εὐθὺς ἐτρέποντο καὶ δι- 


/ Ν ’ὔ ’ 4 Ν ’ 
ελόμενοι κατὰ πόλεις περιετείχισαν κύκλῳ τοὺς Μηλίους. 


»»κν | Ν A | Ν A tA 
καὶ ὕστερον φυλακὴν σφῶν τε αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων 


’ Γῆν a Ν Ν “A \ Mm” ’ 
καταλιπόντες οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασ- 


118. 2. διαλυόμενοι ἤδη : as they were 
on the point of leaving. . διαλύεσθαι as 
in ii. 12. 18; vi. 41. 16, διελύθησαν ἐκ 
τοῦ ξυλλόγου. ἐκ τῶν λόγων (cf. c. 112. 
1) is the opposite of ἐς λόγους (cf. iii. 
8. 6; iv. 38. 4; 73. 38). --- ἀλλ᾽ οὖν: 
well then. This introduces the final 
summing up of the result of the con- 
ference. —3. ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν βουλευ- 
μάτων: judging from the conclusion at 
which you have arrived. —4. τὰ ὁρώ- 
peva: that which lies before your eyes. 
Cf. ii. 42. 21; iii. 45. 23.—5. τῷ Bov- 
λεσϑαι: equiv. to βουλήσει ἀσαφεῖ in 
iv. 108. 21.—6. παραβεβλημένοι καὶ 
πιστεύσαντες : With these words πλεῖ- 
στον (6) is to be taken adv. being most 
entirely given over to (the Lacedaemo- 
nians, etc.) and having trusted them 
most entirely. παραβεβλημένοι is pass., 
as in Ar. Pl, 248, πόρναισι καὶ κύβοισι 
παραβεβλημένος. The pf. partic. is 
used because this expresses a trait of 
the character of the Melians; the aor. 
partic. πιστεύσαντες is used to refer to 
the action of the Melians in putting 
their faith in the Lacedaemonians, 


etc., in this particular instance. Cf, 
ἐλθόντας καὶ κεκτημένους, Vii. 66.6. Kr. 
Spr. § 56,14. This explanation of 
St. makes it unnecessary to strike 
out either καὶ πιστεύσαντες (with v. 
Herwerden) or καί (with CL, who 
takes παραβεβλημένοι as mid., having 
risked, with πλεῖστον as its obj.). 

114. After the conference has come 
to an end, the Athenians invest the town, 
and begin the siege with part of their 
army. 

2. οὐδὲν ὑπήκονον : a common ex- 
pression. Cf. i. 26. 16; 29. 1.—3. 
ἐτρέποντο : the impf. denoting the be- 
ginning of the new course of action is 
the reading of the best Mss. though 
many editt. read ἐτράποντο. ΟἿ vii. 
71,13. In i. 5. 4 and ii. 52. 11, érpd- 
movro denotes also the accomplish- 
ment; hence the aor. — διελόμενοι 
περιετείχισαν: cf. ο. 75. 22, where the 
impf. περιετείχιζον is used because the 
building of the wall was a work of 
some time, and was, in fact, never 
finished. —5. φυλακὴν καταλιπόντες 
.. . ἀνεχώρησαν : so also in ii. 78. 6 ff. 


* Ol. 91.1; 5.0. 416, Oct. THUCYDIDES V. 114, 115. 165 


σαν ἀνεχώρησαν τῷ πλείονι τοῦ στρατοῦ, οἱ δὲ λειπόμε- 

Ε΄ "οἱ παραμένοντες ἐπολιόρκουν τὸ χωρίον. 
11 
᾿ λόντες ἐς τὴν Φλιασίαν καὶ λοχισθέντες ὑπό τε Φλιασίων 
καὶ τῶν σφετέρων φυγάδων διεφθάρησαν ὡς ὀγδοήκον- 
τα, καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς Πύλου ᾿Αθηναῖοι Λακεδαιμονίων πολ- 
5 λὴν λείαν ἔλαβον. 
σπονδὰς οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἀφέντες ἐπολέμουν αὐτοῖς, ἐκήρυξαν δὲ 


Ἀ > ~- Ν 
Καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι κατὰ τὸν χρόνον τὸν αὐτὸν ἐσβα- 1 


καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι δι’ αὐτὸ τὰς μὲν 2 

» A 

εἴ τις βούλεται παρὰ σφῶν ᾿Αθηναίους λήζεσθαι. καὶ 3 

4 > 4 > ? ad lal 2 nr 

Κορίνθιοι ἐπολέμησαν ἰδίων τινῶν διαφορῶν ἕνεκα τοῖς 
> 
Αθηναίοις - οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι Πελοποννήσιοι ἡσύχαζον. εἷλον 4 

10 δὲ «αἱ οἱ Μήλιοι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τοῦ περιτειχίσματος τὸ 
κατὰ τὴν ἀγορὰν προσβαλόντες νυκτός, καὶ ἄνδρας τε 
ἀπέκτειναν καὶ ἐσενεγκάμενοι σῖτόν τε καὶ ὅσα πλεῖστα 
5» 4 ΄ 3 ’ ε 4 ‘\ εν» 
ἐδύναντο χρήσιμα ἀναχωρήσαντες ἡσύχαζον " καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι ἄμεινον τὴν φυλακὴν τὸ ἔπειτα παρεσκευάζοντο, 

16 * καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα. 


- 6. καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν : 
const. with φυλακὴν καταλιπόντες. 

115. Hostilities in various parts of 
Peloponnesus. The Melians make a suc- 
cessful sally against the Athenians. 

1. καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι xré.: they had done 
the same thing the previous year. See 
c. 83. 10 ff.—rév χρόνον τὸν αὐτόν: 
the order of words as in τῇ ἐπιχειρήσει 
τῇ αὐτῇ, vii. 39. 2.—2. λοχισθέντες : 
falling into an ambuscade, pass. of λο- 
χίζειν, the act. of which is used in 
iii. 107. 18, where, however, the 
troops employed in the ambush are 
the dir. obj. of the action of the verb. 
—3. διεφθάρησαν ds ὀγδοήκοντα : the 
general subj. ᾿Αργεῖοι is limited in the 
course of the period. Cf.c. το. 47 ff.; 
59. 1 ff. 

4, οἱ ἐκ τῆς Πύλου ᾿Αθηναῖοι: cf c. 


56. 11, where the sending of fresh 
forces is mentioned. —6. ἀφέντες τὰς 
σπονδάς : cf. ἀφέντες τὴν ξυμμαχίαν, Cc. 
78. 6; i. 102. 19.—ov8 ὥς : const. 
with ἐπολέμουν, not merely with ἀφέν- 
τες. There was as yet no renewal of 
the war, for this is not recorded until 
vi. 105. 5.— 7. εἴ τις βούλεται. .. 
λῃηζεσθαι : on the ellipsis, see on i. 27. 
4; iii. 52. 11; iv. 37.8.— παρὰ σφῶν: 
ef. ii. 41. 3. 

8. διαφορών : see App. 

10. τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἀγοράν : this must 
refer to that part of the Athenian 
camp which was used as a market. 
Of. i. 62. 4; iii, 6. 12. —12. ἐσενεγκά- 
μενοι : equiv. to ἐσκομισάμενοι. Cf. 1. 
117.5; vi. 22.6.—13. χρήσιμα: see 
App.—14. τὸ ἔπειτα : after this. Cf. 
iv. 54. 14; 170. 2. 


166 


116 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES V. 116. 


Tov δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος Λακεδαιμόνιοι ped- 
λήσαντες ἐς τὴν ᾿Αργείαν στρατεύειν, ὡς αὐτοῖς τὰ δια- 
βατήρια ἱερὰ ἐν τοῖς ὁρίοις οὐκ ἐγίγνετο, ἀνεχώρησαν. 
ν 9 A ‘ Ἀ 5 ’ / Lal > ἱρὰ ’ 
καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι διὰ τὴν ἐκείνων μέλλησιν τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει 
Ν ε 4 Ἁ Ν lA ε > 5 ‘ 
Twas ὑποπτεύσαντες τοὺς μὲν ξυνέλαβον, ot δ᾽ αὐτοὺς 


ἃ , \ e / Ν Ν > ‘ /, 
καὶ διέφυγον. καὶ οἱ Μήλιοι περὶ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους 


αὖθις καθ᾽ ἕτερόν τι τοῦ περιτειχίσματος εἷλον τῶν ᾿Αθη- - 


ναίων, παρόντων ov πολλῶν τῶν φυλάκων. καὶ ἐλθού- 
A 9 9 lal > al ἊΨ ε lal 
ons στρατιᾶς ὕστερον ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν ἄλλης, [ὡς ταῦτα 
“2 a , ε , ν ‘ ΄ 
ἐγίγνετο], ἧς ἦρχε Φιλοκράτης ὁ Δημέου, καὶ κατὰ κρά- 
τος ἤδη πολιορκούμενοι, γενομένης καὶ προδοσίας τινὸς 
> > > A , A > 7 A > > 4 
ἀφ᾽ ἐαυτῶν, ξυνεχώρησαν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ὥστ᾽ ἐκείμρυς 
Ν > A A ε Δ ἐπ Σὰ 7 9 
περὶ αὐτῶν βουλεῦσαι. οἱ δὲ ἀπέκτειναν Μηλίων. ὅσους 
ἡβῶντας ἔλαβον, παῖδας δὲ καὶ γυναῖκας ἠνδραπόδισαν. 
τὸ δὲ χωρίον αὐτοὶ ᾧκισαν, ἀποίκους ὕστερον πεντακο- 


’ὔ , 
σίους πέμψαντες. 


116. Prosecutions at Argos for po- 
litical reasons. The Melians make an- 
other sally, but the Athenians, having re- 
ceived reinforcements, oblige the town to 
surrender, and treat the inhabitants with 
great severity. 

2. μελλήσαντες : aor., when they had 
prepared everything for the expedition. 
Of. i. 134. 16; viii. 23. 28.—3. ἱερὰ 
ἐν τοῖς ὁρίοις : see App.—4. διὰ τὴν 
ἐκείνων μέλλησιν : this corresponds to 
μελλήσαντες οἵ 2, “because of this 
plan of the Lacedaemonians, of which 
they had heard.” See Grote, VI. c. 
ὅθ, p. 372.— 5. ὑποπτεύσαντες : see 
App. 

7. καθ᾽ ἕτερόν τι: at another point 
(than that κατὰ τὴν ἀγοράν ; cf.c. 115. 
11). is limited by τοῦ περτειχίσ- 
ματος. 


9. ὡς ταῦτα ἐγίγνετο : this is a su- 
perfluous and awkward addition, and 
Cl. and others are prob. right in re- 
jecting it.— 11. γενομένης καὶ προ- 
δοσίας : when treason had also made its 
appearance. Cf. iv. 103. 20, ἅμα τῆς 
προδοσίας ofons. —12. ad’ ἐαντῶν : from 
among themselves. — 12. ὥστε: on condi- 
tion that. See on i. 28. 18; 29. 22. 
GMT. 98, 2; H. 953 b. 

12. ἀπέκτειναν : at the instigation 
of Alcibiades, acc. to Andoc, 1v. 22 
and Plut. Alc. 16, who uses the ex- 
pression ἀποσφαγῆναι, i.e. they were 
killed by the sword, So Diod. xii. 80. 
55 says ἀποσφάξαι. ---1δ. ᾧκισαν : with 
good Mss. instead of ῴᾧκησαν. For 
such a new settlement @xioay is the 
proper expression. See on i. 98. 4; 
ii, 70. 21, 


1 


4 


APPENDIX. 167 


APPENDIX. 


1, 1. αἱ μὲν ἐνιαύσιοι σπονδαὶ διελέλυντο μέχρι ΙΤυθίων. The difficulty of 
this passage arises from the fact that whereas the truce had, acc. to iv. 118. 
48, been ended since the 14th of Elaphebolion (about the end of March) and 
the plpf. διελέλυντο refers to past time,a temporal limitation, until the Pythian 
games, is added which refers to the future. The sense is: “In the following 
summer there was a period (after the 14th of Elaphebolion) when the year’s 
truce had expired (which period lasted) until the Pythian games. And in the 
ἐκεχειρία (at the very end of this period) the Athenians removed the Delians,” 
etc. Inc. 2 the narrative proceeds: “but Cleon,” etc. Here δέ corresponds to 
pevine.1.1. This is essentially the explanation offered by Herbst, Philol. 
42, p. 662 ff. and adopted in the main by Schiitz, Ztschr. f. d. Gymn. Wesen, 
31, p. 246. 

Cl. offers two explanations. According to the first, Thuc. originally intended 
to write: “The truce had, to be sure, come to an end in March, but not until 
August did Cleon finish the necessary preparations and set out with the expe- 
dition for Thrace.” Into this simple account he may, then, have inserted the 
mention of the second purification of Delos, for which the sacred truce of 
the Pythian games was the time chosen. Being led in this way to mention 
the games, he connected them loosely with what precedes by the expression 
μέχρι Πυθίων, and then, with reference to the games, gave the needful clear 
statement of time by ἐν τῇ ἐκεχειρίᾳ and, c. 2. 2, μετὰ τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν. Without 
this addition, which may have been made at a later time, the passage would 
read: τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους ai μὲν ἐνιαύσιοι σπονδαὶ διελέλυντο᾽ Κλέων 
δὲ ᾿Αθηναίους πείσας μεσοῦντος ἤδη τοῦ θέρους ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης χωρία ἐξέ- 
πλευσεν. Η 

In his second explanation, Cl. proposes to take μέχρι in the sense οὗ “ with 
the exception of,” for which he cites Plat. Legg. vi. 772 a; γυμνοὺς καὶ μέχρι 
περ αἰδοῦς σώφρονος, naked, all but (“bis auf”), etc., and a fragment of the 
comic poet Machon in Athen. xiii. p. 581 f. verse 40, ἄνθρωπον ἄχρι τοῦ στόμα- 
τος ἠσβολωμένον, a man blackened with soot up to (“bis auf”) his mouth. Then 
the passage under discussion would mean: “The truce for one year had come 
to an end (on the 14th of Elaphebolion), and there was war. again with the 
exception of (the time of) the Pythian games.” The words καὶ ἐν τῇ ἐκεχειρίᾳ 
serve to explain the unusual expression μέχρι ἸΤυθίων: “and it was just 
in the time of the truce resulting from this festival that the Athenians under- 
took the purification of Delos,” which, as a religious act, presupposes 8 con- 
dition of peace. 


168 APPENDIX. 


Miiller-Striibing, Aristophanes und die hist. Krit., p. 392, note, thinks some- 
thing has been lost, and proposes to supply ἀναβολὴ δὲ ἦν (ΟΥ ἐγένετο) τοῦ 
πολέμου, or words to that effect, after διελέλυντο.ς. Philippi, Rhein. Mus. 36, 
p. 254, proposes to read διελέλυντο, καὶ ἐν τῇ μέχρι Πυθίων (ἔτι) ἐκεχειρίᾳ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι κτλ. This would assist St.’s explanation which follows. 

St., in his note on this passage, says: αἱ ἐνιαύσιοι σπονδαὶ διελέλυντο μέχρι 
Πυθίων idem valet quod τῶν ἐνιαυσίων σπονδῶν διάλυσις ἦν μέχρι [vile 
pariter atque iv. 16. § 2, ἐσπεῖσθαι δὲ αὐτὰς μέχρι οὗ ἐπανέλθωσιν nihil 
aliud est quam εἶναι δὲ τὰς σπονδὰς μέχρι οὗ ἐπανέλθωσιν. Est autem 
διάλυσις τῶν σπονδῶν is rerum status quo foedus exiit necdum 
bellum renovatum est, qui medius inter bellum et pacem 
status deinde ἐκεχειρία dicitur. To this Cl. observes that Thuc. always 
(1.6. in iv. 58. 2; 117. 2, 15; 118. 46; 119. 11; 122.3; 123.3; 134. 2; v. 15. 
10; 26.14; 32. 22; 49. 14; vi. 26.9) uses ἐκεχειρία to denote a truce based 
upon special treaty or religious agreement, and that the preps. ἐν (τῇ éxexet- 
ρίᾳ) and μετὰ (τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν) seem to indicate that the time referred to was 
clearly defined. The word cannot, therefore, be used of a “state between 
war and peace.” οἱ before ᾿Αθηναῖοι is the reading of Vat. 

Kirchhoff (Monatsberichte d. Berlin Akad. 1864, p. 129 ff.) has proved by 
the testimony of an inscription from Delphi, that the Pythian games were 
held in the Delphic month Bucatius, and therefore in the Attic month Meta- 
geitnion. (This was the opinion of Kriiger, Weissenborn, and Grote, Boeckh 
and Clinton wrongly placed the Pythian games in the Attic month Munychion.) 

1, 5. ἢ πρότερόν por δεδήλωται. Cl. puts a comma after δεδήλωται, making 
these words a parenthetical clause with which he supplies Δῆλον καθαρθῆναι. 
In support of this understanding of the passage, he cites iii. 104. He adds 
that 9... δεδήλωται would be simpler. Then ds ἀνελόντες... ποιῇσαι would 
recapitulate the manner of the purification. The explanation given in the 
note is that of Kr. 

2. 7. Κωφὸν λιμένας A sure emendation of Pluygers after Strabo vii. 
frg. 32. The Mss. give Κολοφωνίων λιμένα. 

2. 10. és τὴν πόλιν. Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 3, proposes ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν, 

2. 11. ἐς τὸν λιμένα, Rightly corrected by Bekker for τὸν λιμένα, as is 
seen from c. 3. 4. 

8. 4. περιέπλεον περιπεμφθεῖσαι. ΟἹ., following Haacke, inserts αἱ after 
περιέπλεον. This would be more regular, but is not necessary, esp. as περι- 
πεμφθεῖσαι is not necessarily attrib. 

4, 9. Συρακοσίοις, Συρακούσας : these forms of the names of the city 
and its inhabitants are those adopted by most editt., though the spelling in 
the Mss. is far from uniform. The Vat. has usually Συρακοῦσαι and Svpa- 
κούσσιοι. See Buttmann, Ausf. Sprachl. § 21, κ. 9. 

4, 24. αἰσθόμενος. Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 4, proposes oldpevos, which may 
be correct, as αἰσθόμενος is rarely const. with the inf. But see Kiihn. 484, 4. 
Cf. iii. 38. 27; vi. 59.10; Plat. Phaedr. 235 ο. 


APPENDIX. 169 


5. 8. [rots κομιζομένοις, Cl. brackets these words; other editt. reject 
only τοῖς. These Locrians were on the way home, and perhaps instead of 
omitting τοῖς κομιζομένοις, it would be simpler to read (with Cobet, Mnem. 14, 
p. 4) ἐπ᾽ οἴκου κομιζομένοις. 

5. 13. Ἱπωνιέας καὶ Μεδμαίους. The Mss. give Ἰτωνέας καὶ Μελαίους. 
Weidner (see Rhein. Mus. 9, p. 141) recognized the places referred to in 
Strabo, vi. 5, and corrected to ‘Immwvdras καὶ Μεδμαίους. Beloch (Jahrbb, 
1881, p. 392), with the help of coins of Hipponium, corrects to the form given 
in the text. 

7. 6. ξυνῆλθον. Dobree, Ullrich, and Cl. read ξυνεξῆλθον. But the repeti- 
tion of ἐξ seems in this case hardly necessary. 

7. 7. καὶ οὐ βουλόμενος, αὐτοὺς διὰ τὸ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καθημένους Bapiver Oa: 
ἀναλαβὼν ἦγε. Cl. punctuates with a comma after βαρύνεσθαι, with no comma 
after BovAcpevos. He explains: “not wishing them to be depressed by remain- 
ing in inactivity.” διὰ τὸ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καθημένους is, according to this view 
(which is also held by Jowett), equiv. to διὰ τὸ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καθῆσθαι. This use 
of the partic. might be adopted here if anywhere because of the awkwardness 
which the two infs. καθῆσθαι βαρύνεσθαι would present. Cl. gives two other 
examples of the same const. in Thuc.: iv. 63. 2, διὰ τὸ ἤδη φοβεροὺς παρόντας 
᾿Αθηναίους, and viii. τος. 10, διὰ τὸ κρατήσαντες ἀδεῶς. In his App. on iv. 63. 2, 
he explains the use of the partic. (for the inf.) in these three passages, as a result 
of the nature of the partic., which, as a part of speech, stands midway between 
verb and noun, and compares it with other uses of the partic. (such as those 
mentioned in GMT. 108, ν. 4). Although Thuc. may have employed the partic. 
as Cl. thinks, for the syntax of Thuc. is sometimes tentative and hence not 
unnaturally at variance with that of later writers, it may be better to adopt 
St.’s explanation and punctuate after βουλόμενος : “ although he did not wish it, 
he put his forces in motion because they were being depressed by remaining 
too long inactive.” This involves the necessity of taking καὶ οὐ βουλόμενος in 
a concessive sense: “although he did not wish it”; but there is no objection 
to this. ‘That οὐ βουλόμενος in this sense does not occur elsewhere in Thuc. 
is doubtless merely the result of chance. 

A. von Velsen (sched. crit. p. 18 ff.) regards διὰ τὸ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καθημένους 
βαρύνεσθαι not as the obj. of οὐ βουλόμενος, but as a repetition of the idea 
expressed in τῶν στρατιωτῶν ἀχθομένων τῇ ἕδρᾳ, and thinks a second inf, 
ἀτολμοτέρους γίγνεσθαι, belonging to αὐτούς, is needed after βαρύνεσθαι. Thuc. 
may well have been guilty of such an omission, for the verb to be supplied fc~ 
αὐτούς would naturally seem almost like a repetition of βαρύνεσθαι. 

7. 20. οὐκ ἀνῆλθεν. Corrected by Haacke for οὐ κατῆλθεν of the Mss. 

9. 5. ἵνα μή τῳ τὸ κατ᾽ ὀλίγον... ἀτολμίαν παράσχῃ. Most Mss. and the 
‘best ones read: ἵνα μὴ τῷ τε κατ᾽ ὀλίγον κτέ, Bekker, Kr., and Poppo, feeling 
‘the need of a subj. for φαινόμενον παράσχῃ, wrote μὴ τό τε. Cl., as well as 
Bekker, saw that since κατ᾽ ὀλίγον and μὴ amavras express the same idea, 
they cannot be connected by τε, καί (Bohme cites ii. 2. 19 against this view, 


170 APPENDIX. 


but there ἐν εἰρήνῃ denotes the condition or circumstances, while τοῦ πολέμου 
μήπω φανεροῦ καθεστῶτος denotes the time). Consequently Cl. adopts Poppo’s 
conjecture, and writes ἵνα μή τῳ τὸ κατ᾽ ὀλίγον. When once the indef. pron. 
τῳ had been misunderstood and its place taken by the art., the change of the 
following τό to re was very natural, The reading μή τῳ τό is eminently sat- 
isfactory; for (1) we are not obliged to supply from ἐπιχείρησιν some word 
like ἐπιχειρεῖν as subj. of ἐνδεὲς φαινόμενον ἀτολμίαν παράσχῃ instead of the 
natural and simple subj. τὸ... κινδυνεύειν, and (2) by means of the indef, 
pron. τῷ both φαινόμενον and παράσχῃ receive a personal application which 
is almost necessary in a lively speech like that of Brasidas. Similar expres- 
sions in giving admonition or advice occur freq. in other speeches. Of i. 33, 
17; ii. 63. 7; vi. 33. 16; and in Brasidas’s former speech, iy. 86. 9. 

9. 20. ξυνταθῆναι. Kriiger followed by St. and Cl. for Ms. ξυνταχθῆναι, 
since the real opposition to τὸ ἀνειμένον appears only in ξυντείνεσθαι, not in 
ξυντάττεσθαι, and the same expression oceurs in Xen. Oec. 2. 18, συντεταμένῃ 
γνώμῃ. 

9. 31. νομίσατε τρία εἶναι τοῦ καλῶς πολεμεῖν. The Mss. omit τρία. St, 
(followed by Cl.) is undoubtedly right in restoring τρία from Stob. Flor. 
II. p. 326, ed. Meineke. The Schol., too, says: ὅτι ἐκ τριῶν γίγνεται τὸ καλῶς 
πολεμεῖν. Nothing is more easily lost in Mss. than numerals. Besides, as St: 
shows, Thuc. likes numerical expréssions in sententious remarks. Cf. i. 33: 
23; 74.5; 122. 22; iii. 40.6; iv. 64.19. It is also necessary that the three infs, 
which follow should form parallel expressions, i.e, that they should all have 
the art. or all be without it. If the first and second infs. have the art., and 
the third does not, we should have only two alternatives, the first expressed 
by τὸ ἐθέλειν, the second by τὸ αἰσχύνεσθαι καὶ πείθεσθαι. St. and ΟἹ, there- 
fore insert τό before τοῖς ἄρχουσι πείθεσθαι. The loss of τό before τοῦς is 
easily explained. ) 

9. 37. καὶ δουλείαν. Schiitz, Ztschr. f. 4. Gymn. Wesen 31, p. 249, follow- 
ing Bohme, thinks ὑπάρχειν must be supplied with δουλείαν to complete a 
chiastic arrangement by which δουλείαν is opp. to ἐλευθερίαν and ᾿Αθηναίων 
δούλοις to Λακεδαιμονίων ξυμμάχοις. Then κεκλῆσθαι must be understood with 
᾿Αθηναίων δούλοις. 

10. 9. ὑπὸ τὰς πύλας ἵππων τε πόδες πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνθρώπων ὡς ἐξιόντων ὑπο- 
φαίνονται. Naber, Mnem. 14, p. 316, calls attention to the fact that this spy- 
ing under the gate is unnecessary, not to say absurd, in view of 1. 5, ἐν τῇ 
πόλει ἐπιφανεῖ οὔσῃ ἔξωθεν περὶ τὸ ἱερὸν τῆς ᾿Αθηνᾶς θυομένου (sc. Βρασίδου), 
which Grote, VI. ¢. 54, p. 248, renders: “so conspicuous was the interior 
of the city to spectators without, that the temple of Athéné, and Brasidas 
with its ministers around him, performing the ceremony of sacrifice, was dis- 
tinetly recognized.” If the interior of the city was so conspicuous, why 
should the scouts expose themselves to useless danger by spying under the 
gates? Naber proposes σποδὸς πολλὴ . . . ὑποφαίνεται for πόδες πολλοὶ... 
ὑποφαίνονται. This cloud of dust could be seen from any point from which 


APPENDIX. 171 


the interior of the city was visible. Though this conjecture may be incorrect, 
the explanation (of Cl.) given in the note does not seem entirely satisfactory. 

10. 16. σχολῇ, with Kr., St., and Béhme for σχολή (cf. i. 142. 2; iii. 46. 
10). The subj. of γίγνεσθαι (what he has commanded) must be supplied 
from the preceding words, as often with παρεσκεύαστο. Cf. i. 46.1; iv. 67. 2. 

10. 39. τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ... αὐτοὺς ἔτρεψαν. For a proper 
appreciation of this passage, a clear understanding of the narrative is neces- 
sary. Thuc., who doubtless possessed most accurate information concerning 
the details of the events at Amphipolis, inasmuch as his Thracian property 
was in the immediate neighbourhood, certainly ascribes the defeat of the 
Athenians in great measure to Cleon’s foolishness and bad generalship. 
Cleon’s conduct, from the moment when he is first opposed to Brasidas, lacks 
firmness and method. He sets his forces in motion merely to appease the 
discontent of his men, and always takes up his position with the intention of 
avoiding a battle (ἀπιέναι ἐνόμιζε, ὁπόταν βούληται, ἀμαχεί, c. 7.17). Brasi- 
das succeeds by a well-planned and well-executed attack in throwing the 
Athenian troops on both wings into confusion; but the left wing, which was 
already retreating, is able to escape and continue the retreat. The right wing, 
on the contrary, against which Brasidas himself charged (and was mortally 
wounded) stood its ground longer. Cleon, to be sure, ran away as he had all 
along intended to do, and was presently killed by a Myrcinian peltast ; but the 
hoplites on the right wing, who had formed in close array at this point, 
defended themselves bravely for some time, until the constant attacks of the 
enemy’s cavalry forced them at last to take to flight. 

In this account a form of expression which is often used in narration occurs 
twice, —a general statement is followed by a more particular statement of 
details, the parts of which are introduced by καί --- μέν --- δέ. So after ξυνέβη 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους θορυβηθῆναι in 33, the two parts follow: καὶ τὸ μὲν εὐώνυ- 
pov κέρας ... ἀπορραγὲν ἔφυγε (54-36) and τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν... ἔμενε (39), and 
again after this general statement: καὶ ὁ μὲν Κλέων... . ἀποθνήσκει (40-42) 
and ot δὲ... ἔτρεψαν (42-46). This careful and elaborate structure of the 
period makes it prob. that the clearly expressed subj. καὶ ὁ μὲν Κλέων is 
opposed to an equally clearly expressed substantive subj. οἱ δὲ αὐτοῦ ξυστρα- 
'φέντες ὁπλῖται. St., who rejects Cl.’s explanation as given above, strikes out 
ὁπλῖται, taking of αὐτοῦ in the sense of sui, like τοῖς ἑαυτῶν in viii. 45. 14. 
He then takes ξυστραφέντες as pred. with ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον, which he explains 
‘by reference toc. 7.15. This explanation is, on the whole, less satisfactory 
than Cl.’s. 

10. 47. οὕτω δή. This is the only proper introduction for the ultimate 
consequence instead of οὕτω δέ of the Mss. Cf. iv. 30. 7; 73.27, and the 
numerous dependent clauses introduced by οὕτω δή, ¢.g. i. 131. 8; ii. 12. 
16, etc. : 

11. 4. wepiéptavres. The reading of the best Mss. (cf. Soph. Aj. 593, 
tuvéptere), although we find in Thuc. εἴργειν and εἰρχθῆναι, iv. 63. 5; v. 49. 3; 
ἀπείρξει, iii. 45. 9, and ἀπεῖρξαν, iv. 37. 4. 


112 APPENDIX. 


11. 5. ἥρῳ. More correct than ἥρωι acc. to Hdn. ii. 714. τὴν δοτικὴν els 
t ἀνεκφώνητον ποιοῦσιν οἱ ᾿Αττικοὶ οἷον τῷ ἥρῳ. 

14. 19. ἐδεδίεσαν, Lobeck, ad Phryn. p. 181, thinks that here and in iv, 
55. 18, the only correct form is ἐδέδισαν. But this is not found in the best 
Mss. See v. Bamberg, Ztschr. f. d. Gymn. Wesen, 1874, p. 36. 

14, 23. ὥστ᾽ ἀδύνατα εἶναι ἐφαίνετο ᾿Αργείοις καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις ἅμα πολεμεῖν, 
The introduction of this sent. by ὥστε is hard to explain. St., omitting ὥστε, 
and inserting δέ, regards the whole clause as a parenthesis. The clause is thus 
to be understood as expressing the result of all which precedes. This is also 
Kr.’s explanation. Cl. thinks this is no great improvement, and suggests 
ὅλως τ᾽ ἀδύνατα εἶναι ἐφαίνετο, and it was evidently utterly impossible (cf. ἁπλῶς 
τε in iii. 45.29). Thuc. does not elsewhere use ὅλως, but Cl. thinks it is so 
common in Plato and the orators that there is no objection to it here. 

15. 5. πρῶτοί re καὶ ὁμοίως σφίσι ξυγγενεῖς. That this reading of the 
Mss. (which is also that of the Schol. on Ar. Paz, 479) is in some way cor- 
rupt, is generally acknowledged (Jowett explains ὁμοίως ξυγγενεῖς as meaning 
either that they were all equally related to the first men of the state, or that 
they were all of the first rank, and accordingly were related to the governing 
body). The trouble has generally been sought in ὁμοίως, which has accord- 
ingly been changed to ὁμοίων (Reiske) or ὁμοίοις (Bekker). Herbst, Philol. 
16, p. 310, and Steup, Rhein. Mus. 25, p, 304, defend ὁμοίοις. Herbst explains: 
“for the Spartans among them were the first men of the state, and related 
to them, who were Homoei”; Steup: “and related to them their peers” (i.e. 
belonging like them to the first and most respected families), Neither of 
these explanations is thoroughly satisfactory. Steup very properly compares 
the passage of Plut. Nic. 10, οἱ γὰρ ἐκ Πύλου κομισθέντες ἦσαν ἐξ οἴκων τε 
πρώτων τῆς Σπάρτης καὶ φίλους καὶ ξυγγενεῖς τοὺς δυνωτάτους ἔχοντες. Cl. 
suggests πρῶτοί τε καὶ οἴκοις ἐπιφανέσι ξυγγενεῖς, and since Steup, p. 287, is 
certainly right in saying that the 120 Spartans who were captured at Sphac- 
teria could not all belong to the first families, Cl. further suggests that we 
might read ἦσαν γὰρ of Σπαρτιᾶται αὐτῶν «ré.: “for there were among them 
some Spartans of the first rank and related to the most distinguished fami- 
lies.” This agrees very well with ἤδη καὶ ἀρχάς τινας ἔχοντας in c. 34. 11. 
St. accepts Rauchenstein’s conjecture (Philol. 36, p. 234) ὅμοιοι σφίσι Evy- 
yevets, and explains: Spartiatae captivi cum homoei essent, ho- 
moeis Lacedaemoniis, qui rei publicae administrationem ha- 
bebant, cognati erant. On the Homoei, see Schoemann, Opusc. Acad. 
I. p. 108; Gilbert, Griech. Staatsalt. I. p.41; Lachmann, Spartan. Staatsverf, 
p. 222 ff.; Hermann, Griech. Alterth, I. § 26, 12 ff. 

15. 7. otras. This reading of the best Mss. for οὔπω does not occur 
elsewhere in Thuc., but Photius and Suid. testify to its use: οὔπως, οὐδένα 
τρόπον καὶ Θουκιδίδης ἐν ε΄ kal Ὅμηρος. Still, as the corruptions of the Mss. 
are very old, the reading οὔπως is perhaps somewhat doubtful. See Cobet, 
Mnem. 14 (1886), p. 6. 


APPENDIX. 173 


15. 9. ἐνδεξαμένους, St.’s reading, though supported only by a few Mss. 
and the quotation of Thomas Mag. p. 616, 6, is better than the fut. ἐνδεξομέ- 
vous. ἂν ἐνδεξαμένους is equiv. to ὅτι ἄν ἐνδέξαιντο; then ἂν ἐνδεξομένους would 
be equiv. to ὅτι ἂν ἐνδέξοιντο (or ἐνδέξονται) ; but the fut. opt. (or fut. ind.) 
in apod. with dy is, to say the least, of very doubtful propriety. GMT. 37, 
2, Ν,1, and 41,4. Herbst, Hamburg Progr. 1867, p. 37 f., thinks differently. 

16, 6. τότε δέ. Since all the Mss. read τότε δέ, not δή, it seems best to 
judge of this case after the analogy of i. 11. 4 and 18.1. See on i. 11. 4. 
There is a certain opposition to the previous state of things under Brasidas 
and Cleon, and this justifies the use of δέ. Kiihn. 583,1, However common 
the use of τότε δή and οὕτω δή to introduce explanatory and additional clauses 
may be in Thuc., the present case does not exactly correspond to this usage, 
since here the description of a gradual infiuence (σπεύδοντες... προεθυμοῦντο) 
is introduced, not of a definite event as in i. 49. 30; 58.9; ii. 12. 16; iii. 98,6. 
St., in his note ad. loc., takes the opposite view. 

16. 6. ἑκατέρᾳ τῇ πόλει σπεύδοντες τὰ μάλιστ᾽ αὐτήν. (The vulgate 
has οἱ ἐν ἑκατέρᾳ τῇ πόλει σπεύδοντες τὰ μάλιστα τὴν ἡγεμονίαν.) So St. 
restores this passage. σπεύδειν τί τινι is rare, but not unparalled (cf. Eur. 
Iph, T. 579), and is supported by general analogy. The corruptions of this 
passage are of early origin, and have given rise to many attempts at emen- 
dation. Now, however, the passage is perfectly clear, and the genesis of the 
corruptions in the Mss. can be distinctly traced. It begins with the common 
mistake of μάλιστα τήν for μάλιστ᾽ αὐτήν (cf. c. 38.17). Then the art, was 
utterly senseless without a subst., and some copyist supplied from what he 
understood of the context ἡγεμονίαν, thinking this would be properly used 
in connexion with the men who stood at the head of their respective states. 
Some one else, who thought personal leadership, not the hegemony of the 
state was meant, inserted οἱ ἐν before ἑκατέρᾳ in order to define the position 
of Pleistoanax and Nicias, and this reading, which is that of some Mss., was 
accepted by some editt. before Bekker. That this is wrong, is generally 
recognized by recent editt., and various emendations for ἡγεμονίαν have been 
proposed, such as ἡσυχίαν, ὁμόνοιαν, ὁμολογίαν, and ἠρεμίαν, but all in vain. 
By removing the additions arising from the original mistake, St. has in all 
probability restored the passage to its original form. Now the partic. σπεύ- 
Sovres clearly expresses the common motive of Nicias and Pleistoanax, and 
πολλῴ δὴ μᾶλλον προεθυμοῦντο, standing at the end of the passage, shows 
the effect of the events recorded in the preceding chaps. Miiller-Striibing, 
Aristoph. und die hist. Krit. p. 634, proposes to read διαβάλλων, ἄλλως τε καὶ 
ἑκατέρᾳ TH πόλει σπεύδοντες τὰ μάλιστα τὴν ἡγεμονίαν" τότε δὴ ᾿Πλειστοάναξ 
ὁ ἸΠαυσανίου βασιλεὺς Λακεδαιμονίων «ré. This sounds well, but there is no 
reason to think that Thuc. wrote it. 

16. 18. év@vplav. Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 7, is probably right in changing 
ἐνθυμίαν to ἐνθύμιον, a word of much more frequent occurrence. 

16. 23. ἀδελφοῦ. Cobet, Mnem, 14, p 8, suggests AcAdov. These two words 


174 APPENDIX. 


are freq. confused. So the modern inhabitants of the site of Delphi imagined 
a story about some brothers (ἀδελφοί) to account for the name Δελφοί applied 
by travellers to the place. 

16. 28. δοκοῦσαν. The reading δοκοῦσαν seems to be assured by the 
agreement of the best Mss. It is more doubtful whether Thuc. wrote the 
concise expression μετὰ δώρων in the sense of “bribery.” All the Mss. collated 
by Bekker insert ἕως after δοκοῦσαν, but this gives no sense. We must there- — 
fore recognize in ἕως the remnant.of some word which was early corrupted. 
Perhaps the original reading was: διὰ τὴν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ποτε μετὰ Swpodo- 
κήσεως (Not δωροδόκησιν, as others following Suid. s.v. δώρων δόκησιν, have 
suggested) δοκοῦσαν ἀναχώρησιν. The various corruptions of the Mss. arise 
from the juxtaposition of -δοκήσεως and δοκοῦσαν both beginning with the 
same letters. St. now reads pera δώρων δοκήσεως ἀναχώρησιν. None of the 
various conjectures seem certain. 

17. 6. καὶ τόν τε χειμῶνα τοῦτον ἧσαν ἐς λόγους. Julius Steup has sub- 
jected the text from c. 13 to this point to careful investigation and criti- 
eism (Rhein. Mus. 25, p. 273-305). He tries to prove that there are a num- 
ber of interpolations, and after removing these from c. 13-17, he comes to 
the conclusion that the original and genuine narrative of Thuc. consists of 
the following words: τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος εὐθὺς μέχρι μὲν Πιερίου 
τῆς Θεσσαλίας διῆλθον οἱ περὶ τὸν Ῥαμφίαν, κωλυόντων δὲ τῶν Θεσσαλῶν, καὶ 
ἅμα Βρασίδου τεθνεῶτος ᾧπερ ἦγον τὴν στρατιάν, ἀπετράποντο ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. ξυνέβη 
τε εὐθὺς μετὰ τὴν ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει μάχην καὶ τὴν ἹΡαμφίου ἀναχώρησιν ἐκ Θεσσα- 
Aas ὥστε πολέμου μὲν μηδὲν ἔτι ἅψασθαι μηδετέρους, πρὸς δὲ τὴν εἰρήνην 
μᾶλλον τὴν γνώμην εἶχον, οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι πληγέντες ἐπὶ τῷ Δηλίῳ καὶ Sv 
ὀλίγου αὖθις ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες τὴν ἐλπίδα τῆς ῥώμης πιστὴν ἔτι, 
ἧπερ οὐ προσεδέχοντο πρότερον τὰς σπονδάς, δοκοῦντες τῇ παρούσῃ εὐτυχίᾳ 
καθυπέρτεροι γενήσεσθαι. οἱ δ᾽ αὖ Λακεδαιμόνιοι (or καὶ οὐχ ἧσσον οἱ Aake- 
δαιμόνιοι) ἐπιθυμίᾳ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῶν ἐκ τῆς νήσου κομίσασθαι. ξυνέβαινε δὲ καὶ 
πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους αὐτοῖς τὰς τριακονταέτεις σπονδὰς ἐπ᾽ ἐξόδῳ εἶναι, καὶ ἄλλας 
οὐκ ἤθελον σπένδεσθαι οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι, εἰ μή τις αὐτοῖς τὴν ΚΚυνοσουρίαν γῆν ἀπο- 
δώσει, ὥδτε ἄφυκτα (conjecture for ἀδύνατα) εἶναι ἐφαίνετο ᾿Αργείοις καὶ 
᾿Αθηναίοις ἅμα πολεμεῖν. 

The notes on c. 13. 7; 14.1 and 4; 24. 12, and those on c. 15, 16, and 17 
explain the passages which Steup rejects, and show their connexion with the 
rest of the narrative. We must not lose sight of the evident purpose of 
Thue. to show how internal relations and the feelings which prevailed at 
Sparta and Athens paved the way for peace. It is therefore natural that 
a detailed exposition of these relations and feelings should form the transition 
from the account of the last warlike undertakings (the battle of Amphipolis 
and the march of the 900 hoplites under Rhamphias) to the description of 
the negotiations for peace. Seen in this light, the fact that the author recurs 
to what he has previously told, and that he gives various reasons for the 
same thought regarded from different sides, is not so remarkable as it appears 


APPENDIX. 175 


to Steup (p.279f). It cannot be denied that several passages in the chapters 
in question contain corruptions of early origin. Such are esp. c. 14. 23; 15. 
4, 5;-16. 7 and 28, which have been discussed above. Steup rightly observes 
(p. 301) that in the four or five chapters in question four words occur which 
are not found elsewhere in Thuc.; but this is not a strong argument against 
the genuineness of our text, for it is well known that hardly any writer has 
more ἅπαξ εἰρημένα than Thuc.; and the four words, διαγίγνεσθαι, ἐνθυμία 
(ἐνθύμιον 1) ἀνεπίληπτος and οὔπως (possibly οὔπω) are in themselves unob- 
jectionable. On the other hand, οὔπως in c. 15.7 is expressly cited by Photius, 
Suid. (Θουκιδίδης ἐν ε΄) ; Plut. de Pyth. orac. 403 B, mentions the oracle of c. 
16. 26; and the Schol. on Ar. Paz, 479, gives a long quotation from c. 15. 
§ 1. These are such strong arguments for the genuineness of our text, that 
only the most urgent necessity would justify us in overruling them by the 
assumption of a far earlier interpolation (Steup, p. 303). 

17. 7. ἧσαν. This form is preferable to ἤισαν or ἤεσαν of most Mss. See 
App. oni. 1. 5. 

17. 9. ὡς és ἐπιτειχισμόν. Poppo’s conjecture, adopted by St. and Cl, 
for ὡς ἐπὶ τειχισμόν. The Schol. explains correctly: ὡς μελλόντων φρούρια 
ἐπιτειχίσειν ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων, which would not be sufficiently 
expressed by τειχισμόν. 

17. 12. ὥστε ἃ ἑκάτεροι... , τὴν Νίσαιαν. Steup, Stud. I. p. 55-59, 
comes to the conclusion that these words, which do not accord with the fol- 
lowing treaty of peace, are not part of the account of Thuc., but an interpo- 
lation. 

18. 1. Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο xré. J. Steup, in the first number of his 
Thukydideische Studien, p. 29-72, and A. Kirchhoff in the Sitzungsberichte 
der Preussischen Akademie d. Wissenschaften, 1882, p. 909-940, have dis- 
cussed this document with great care and acuteness. To both of these essays 
reference has been made in the notes (l. 8, 18, 28, 45, etc.). Steup suggests 
many considerable changes in the text, which he thinks are necessary to 
make it thoroughly comprehensible, but it is not safe to depart so widely from 
the Mss., although some of the changes proposed by Steup are perhaps im- 
provements.. As proposals of Steup which demand consideration, Cl. men- 
tions the following: in 21 Steup reads τάσδε tas πόλεις, and in 25 he construes 
ἐπειδὴ αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐγένοντο with ἀποδόντων, explaining σπονδαί as “ state of 
peace.” In 34 he punctuates with a period after ’Araddvrny, after which he 
changes the order of two parts of the sent., and reads: καὶ τοὺς ἐν Σκιώνῃ 
πολιορκουμένους Πελοποννησίων (᾿Αθηναίους) ἀφεῖναι καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ὅσοι 
“Λακεδαιμονίων ξύμμαχοι ἐν Σκιώνῃ εἰσὶ καὶ ὅσους Βρασίδας ἐσέπεμψε καὶ τοὺς 
ἄνδρας ὅσοι εἰσὶ Λακεδαιμονίων ἐν τῳ δημοσίῳ τῷ ᾿Αθηναίων ἢ ἄλλοθί που ὅσης 
᾿Αθηναῖοι ἄρχουσιν ἐν δημοσίῳ, ἀποδόντων δὲ καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ξύμμαχοι 
οὕστινας ἔχουσιν Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων κατὰ ταὐτά. In 46 he reads πέρι 
for περί, and gives 47 ff. in the following form: ὅρκους δὲ ποιήσασθαι ᾿Αθηναίους 
πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους Kal τοὺς ξυμμάχους᾽ ὁ δ᾽ ὅρκος ἔστω d5e° “ἐμμενῶ ταῖς 


176 APPENDIX. 


ξυνθήκαις καὶ ταῖς σπονδαῖς ταῖσδε δικαίως kal ἀδόλως." ἔστω δὲ Λακεδαιμο- 
νίοις καὶ τοῖς ξυμμάχοις κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὅρκος πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους κατὰ πόλεις, ὀμνύν- 
των δὲ τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον ἑκάτεροι τὸν μέγιστον, ἑπτακαίδεκα ἐξ ἑκάστης 
πόλεως τὸν δὲ ὅρκον ἀνανεοῦσθαι κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν ἀμφοτέρους. 

The most important changes proposed by Kirchhoff are mentioned else- 
where. The others are mainly in the forms of words, as θάλαττα for θάλασσα 
and ἐάν for ἤν. These changes are made in order to make the language of 
this document agree with that of similar documents found in inscriptions of 
this date. One such inscription has preserved to us part of the document 
given by Thuc. in c. 47. A comparison of ¢. 47 with the inscription shows 
that the copy furnished us in the Mss. of Thuc. is by no means accurate, and 
in the chapter now under discussion the inaccuracies seem to be still greater 
than in c. 47. Cl., in his preface to Book VIII. p. xxvi., and Jowett in his 
note on ὁ. 47, think that the discrepancies between the inscription and the 
text of Thue. are of little account, and should not affect our estimate of the 
trustworthiness of the Mss. They somewhat underrate the importance of 
the discrepancies in question, but they are right in thinking that we should 
not attempt to restore the text of Thuc. to agree with the inscription even in 
c. 47, where part of the inscription corresponding to the chapter of Thuc. is 
preserved, and much less here where we have not the stone as a guide. 
Whether we accept Cl.’s view, and believe that Thue. wrote this part of his 
history during his absence from Athens, and therefore owed his copy of the 
document to the kindness of some friend, or follow Kirchhoff in assuming 
that the copy was not made until after the historian returned to Athens, we 
have no means of knowing how accurate that copy was. Since, then, our 
object must be to give the text of Thuc. as nearly as possible as he wrote it 
(not as he ought to have written it), we ought not to depart widely from the 
reading of the Mss., and adopt the language of the inscriptions, so long as 
there is any uncertainty in regard to the accuracy with which Thue. (or the 
person whom he employed) copied the documents in question. It seems, 
therefore, inadvisable to adopt many of the formal changes proposed by 
Steup and Kirchhoff, though their labours, as well as St.’s, in restoring the 
text to a form which expresses the proper meaning are deserving of high 
praise and grateful recognition. 

18. 3. ἐξεῖναι. Kirchhoff’s conjecture (Sitzungsber. ἃ. Berl. Akad., 1882, 
p. 911) for καὶ ἱέναι. St. and Cl. bracket καὶ ἱέναι, which could be under- 
stood only as an amplification and explanation of θεωρεῖν, unless ἱέναι without 
καί were placed after βουλόμενον ; in either case it would be superfluous. 

18. 16. qv. Only the form ἐάν is found in Attic inscriptions before 
the Macedonian period, but Thuc. has the form ἤν in all documents cited 
by him excepting iv. 118. 13, and v. 47. 68. See St.’s note ad loc. 

18. 18. ἀποδόντων δὲ κτέ. St. who considers Cl.’s explanation of this 
passage as given in the note inadmissible, conjectures that a considerable 
gap occurs after ᾿Αμφίπολιν. This he would fill out as follows: ὅσαι δὲ πό- 


APPENDIX. 177 


λεις τῶν ἐπὶ Θράκης ἀποστᾶσαι ᾿Αθηναίων Λακεδαιμονίοις προσεχώρησαν παρα- 
δοῦναι Λακεδαιμονίους ᾿Αθηναίοις. Steup, p. 33, would supply καὶ Οἰσύμην 
καὶ Θυσσὸν καὶ εἴ τινα ἄλλην ἔχουσιν ἐν τῇ ᾿Αθωίδι ᾿Ακτῇ πόλιν. The best 
explanation is perhaps that proposed by Kirchhoff, Sitzungsber. ἃ. Berl. Akad. 
1882, p. 917, who reads in 19 παρέλαβον for παρέδοσαν, for the Lacedaemo- 
nians had taken cities, but had certainly not restored any. If this reading 
be accepted, the comma in 20 must be placed before ᾿Αθηναίοις, and perhaps 
we should read ᾿Αθηναίους. 

18. 28. βουλομένας ταύτας. St. rejects βουλομένας ταύτας as an interpo- 
lation added to explain αὐτούς. The punctuation adopted in the text is that 
proposed by Steup, Stud. I. p. 39 (with reference to Xen. Anab. v. 1. 14, and 
Hell. vi. 1. 18), and Kirchhoff, Sitzungsber. d. Berl. Akad. 1882, p. 916. Cl. 
places the comma before βουλομένας, and explains that βουλομένας ταύτας 
being used almost abs., the reference to the cities is repeated in αὐτούς for 
the sake of clearness. 

18. 34. St. and Kirchhoff write Mé@ava with Strabo viii. 15, and in- 
scriptions. 

18. 46. βουλεύεσθαι περὶ αὐτῶν xré. Perhaps Kirchhoff, /.c. p. 929, and others 
are right in rejecting αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων and writing πέρι. The 
reading of the text is certainly at variance with the usage of Attic official 
documents. 

18. 50. (ἑπτακαίδεκα ἐξ ἑκάστης πόλεως.) The Mss. give simply ἐξ ἑκάστης 
πόλεως. Ullrich, Beitr., 1862, p. 15, suggests that ἐξ is a mistake for ιζ΄, 
observing that in c. 19 and 24 the oath is taken by seventeen delegates. But 
ἐξ is necessary after ἑπτακαίδεκα; hence St. and Cl. assume that cf’ has fallen 
out of the Mss., and give the above reading. Kirchhoff, /.c. p. 932, observes 
that the number seventeen is probably the result of chance, and could not 
have been determined beforehand. He therefore brackets ἑπτακαίδεκα... 
πόλεως as an interpolation added by some one after reading c.19 and 24. He 
suggests, however (p. 935), the possibility that this number may have arisen 
from the combination of the Spartan kings and ephors (2+ 5) with ten other 
delegates. See on 6. 19. 8. 

18. 55. ᾿Αθήνησι. The correct reading suggested by v. Herwerden for 
᾿Αθήναις. The ἐν before ᾿Αθήναις is wanting in the best Mss. 

19. 5. Πλειστοάναξ, "Ays. Both names are wanting in all Mss. (evi- 
dently on account of the identical beginning of the following name), but have 
very properly been added by all modern editt. from c. 24. 2. 

20. 3. ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων παρενεγκουσῶν «ré. Cl., in his notes on 6. 19. 1 and 
this passage, thinks that two dates are referred to,— the middle of April in 
c. 19. 1, and the first of April here. But the attack upon Plataea occurred 
the first of April, so that ten years and a few days after that would be so 
near the middle of April that one can hardly avoid regarding this date as 
identical with that of c. 19. 1. ἐκ Διονυσίων εὐθύς (2) must, then, not be 
taken too strictly. One might say in English, “just after the Christmas holi- 


178 APPENDIX. 


days,” though the day referred to fell about the middle of January. St., with 
Miiller, de temp. quo bell. Pelop. init, ceperit, p. 14, thinks the words ἡ ἐσβολὴ 
ἡ és τὴν ᾿Αττικήν are a clumsy mierpolatian. 

20. 6. Kal μὴ τὴν ἀπαρίθμησιν τῶν ὀνομάτων τῶν ἑκασταχοῦ ἢ ἀρχόντων ἢ 
ἀπὸ τιμῆς τινος [ἐς] τὰ προγεγενημένα σημαινόντων. This is the reading pro- 
posed by Cl., whose explanation is given in the notes. [ἐς] has come into 
the text through a misunderstanding. As ols, in 9, explains ἀρχόντων ἢ ἀπὸ 
τιμῆς τινος, the words οὐ γὰρ ἀκριβές ἐστιν must be isolated by punctuation so 
that the force of οἷς passes over them to the preceding words. This explana- 
tion at least makes the text comprehensible, and gives it in a form which is 
in accordance with Greek usage. The Mss. give the words in the following 
order: kal μὴ τῶν ἑκασταχοῦ ἢ ἀρχόντων ἢ ἀπὸ τιμῆς τινος τὴν ἀπαρίθμησιν 
τῶν ὀνομάτων ἐς τὰ προγεγενημένα σημαινόντων. But this cannot be understood 
except by means of a forced and artificial interpretation. Gdller and Arnold 
saw the necessity of a change in the order; and St. follows Arnold in reading : 
καὶ μὴ τῶν ἑκασταχοῦ ἢ ἀρχόντων ἢ ἀπὸ τιμῆς τινος ἐς τὰ προγεγενημένα 
σημαινόντων τὴν ἀπαρίθμησιν τῶν ὀνομάτων. This gives the proper sense, but 
the order is still very awkward, since τὴν ἀπαρίθμησιν must be taken with κατά 
at the beginning of the sentence. (Schiitz, Ztschr. f. d. Gymn. Wesen, 1877, 
p. 251, proposes to read τῇ ἀπαριθμήσει) The order proposed by Cl. is 
simpler, and the omission of és before τὰ προγεγενημένα makes the const. much 
easier. οἱ σημαίνοντες τὰ προγεγενημένα, “those who give events their desig- 
nation,” are those from whose names events are designated, 7.e. the ἐπώνυμοι 
τοῖς ἔτεσι γεγενημένοι, as the Schol. says. 

21. 11. ἀπολογησόμενος. The fut. is necessary, though the most and 
best Mss. read ἀπολογησάμενος. 

21. 14. κατειλημμένους. So Cl., with Kr., Haase, and St. for κατειλημμένας 
of the Mss. καταλαμβάνειν in the sense of confirm or bind is used by Thuc, 
with a pers. obj. only. Cf. i. 9. 2; iv. 86.2. We must supply rots Aaxe- 
Satpovious. 

22. 1. αὐτοῦ ἔτυχον ὄντες. The Mss. read αὐτοί, but Kr.’s emendation 
αὐτοῦ is necessary in consideration of c. 17. 17, παρακαλέσαντες τοὺς ἑαυτῶν 
ξυμμάχους (the same idea is repeated inc. 27.3). The allies, although they 
had not all shared in the negotiations for the peace, were still present in 
Sparta. αὐτοῦ ἔτι ἔτυχον ὄντες (which St. writes) would be still clearer. 

22, 4. δέξασθαι. St. writes δέξεσθαι, referring to his Quaest. Gramm. 1872, 
p. 6. The fut. would be more regular, but there is no Ms. authority for it, and 
the aor. inf. may be admissible when reference to particular circumstances (as 
here to the expressed condition) is intended. See on c. 1. 7, and App. on ii. 3. 
7. Here οὐκ ἔφασαν meaning refused may not introduce indir. disc. at all. 

22. 6. αὐτοὶ δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους κτέ. The translation of this passage 
given in the note is substantially in accordance with the explanation of Arnold. 
He says: ‘ Few sentences in Thuc. exhibit a more extraordinary specimen of 
anacoluthon than this. The clause νομίζοντες... ᾿Αργείους is repeated after the 


APPENDIX. 179 


parenthetical clause ἐπειδὴ... ἐπισπένδεσθαι, but in different words, νομίσαντες 
. «0% δεινοὺς εἶναι : and the parenthetical clause itself refers only to the name of 
the Argives, explaining the reason why they in particular had been separately 
mentioned. In order to make the construction grammatical, the words vopt- 
σαντες αὐτοὺς and the negative οὐ must be omitted. The sense is as follows: 
Thinking that the Argives, whose hostile intentions were manifested by their 
late refusal to renew the truce, would cease to be formidable if deprived of 
the aid of Athens; and that the other states of Peloponnesus would, from the 
same cause, be most disposed to remain quiet; as the Athenian alliance would 
thus be closed against them, under which they would otherwise have ranged 
themselves.’ The same explanation is adopted by Bekker, Kr., Poppo, 
Bloomfield, and Jowett, and is the only one possible if the text is to be pre- 
served unchanged. But it is almost incredible that Thuc. wrote such an 
obscure, confused, and ungrammatical sent. The repetition of νομίζοντες by 
νομίσαντες makes the former partic. entirely superfluous, and ov is written 
without regard to the preceding ἥκιστα. Then, too, the clause πρὸς γὰρ ἄν 
..+ χωρεῖν is quite out of place after ἡσυχάζειν, and can only be explained 
as an afterthought. 

Many emendations have been proposed. Boéhme suggests μόλις ἄν for pa- 
λιστ᾽ ἄν, and bases a new explanation upon this change; J. Steup, Rhein. 
Mus. 25, p. 282, strikes out νομίσαντες... εἶναι and πρὸς γὰρ... χωρεῖν “as 
awkward explanations of an interpolator”; Madvig, Adverss. Crit. I. p. 324, 
reads: νομίζοντες ἥκιστ᾽ dv σφίσι τούς te Apyelous ἐπιτίθεσθαι (ἐπειδὴ . . . οὐ 
δεινοὺς εἶναι) kal τὴν ἄλλην Πελοπόννησον μάλιστ᾽ dy ἡσυχάζειν. St. strikes 
out νομίσαντες... οὐ, and puts the parenthetical clause πρὸς γὰρ ἄν... χω- 
ρεῖν after δεινοὺς εἶναι. He thinks the words which he rejects are part of an 
explanation or marginal note νομίσαντες αὐτοὺς ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων ov δεινοὺς εἶναι. 
This does not, however, seem very probable, and until the manner in which 
these words came into the text is more satisfactorily explained, we must re- 
gard them as a part of the original narrative of Thuc. 

Cl. brackets νομίζοντες ἥκιστα dv σφίσι, and changes ᾿Αθηναίους of 12 to 
᾿Αργείους. He observes that νομίσαντες... οὐ cannot be an interpolation, 
because αὐτοὺς ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων is necessary as a contrast to dpa in c. 14. 24, 
and he explains the insertion of νομίζοντες ἥκιστα ἂν σφίσι by supposing that 
some copyist took αὐτούς as subj. of εἶναι, not as a pred. modification of τοὺς 
᾿Αργείους, and therefore added νομίζοντες ἥκιστα ἂν αὐτούς to form a gram- 
matical connexion for τοὺς ᾿Αργείους. He explains the change of ᾿Αθηναίους in 
12 to ᾿Αργείους by comparison with c. 14. ὃ 4. But an alliance of Sparta with 
Athens would not necessarily keep the Peloponnesian states from joining Argos, 
while it would prevent them from looking to Athens for assistance. Still, as 
the Peloponnesian states were not likely to join the Athenians, the change to 
᾿Αργείους is almost necessary if πρὸς γὰρ dv . . . χωρεῖν is taken to refer to the 
Peloponnesian states and not to the Argives themselves. These changes seem, 
however, rather violent, and Cl.’s arguments are not conclusive. 


180 APPENDIX. 


Philippi, Rhein. Mus. 36, p. 254, brackets νομίζοντες in 7 and οὐ in 10, con- 
struing ἥκιστα ἄν with δεινοὺς εἶναι, and taking αὐτούς as pred. modification 
of τοὺς ᾿Αργείους. He further considers πρὸς γὰρ ἂν... χωρεῖν a gloss, in 
which he may be right; but certainly if these words belong in the text, they 
must be placed (with St.) after δεινοὺς εἶναι, for the Argives were likely to 
join with the Athenians, while the other states of Peloponnesus were not. 

But some other change besides the transposition of πρὸς γὰρ ἂν... χωρεῖν 
seems to be necessary. Perhaps the following reading may commend itself: 
omitting re of 8 punctuate with a comma after ἐλθόντον and with a colon 
after ἐπισπένδεσθαι. Then νομίσαντες must be changed to ἐνόμισαν γάρ (the 
partic. might possibly stand in a causal sense, but this would be harsh). The 
passage then reads: αὐτοὶ δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ξυμμαχίαν ἐποιοῦντο, νομίύ- 
tovres ἥκιστα ἂν σφίσι τοὺς ᾿Αργείους, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἤθελον ᾿Αμπελίδου καὶ 
Λίχου ἐλθόντων, ἐπισπένδεσθαι " ἐνόμισαν γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων οὐ δεινοὺς 
εἶναι (πρὸς γὰρ ἂν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, εἰ ἐξῆν, χωρεῖν) καὶ τὴν ἄλλην Τελοπόννη- 
σον μαλιστ᾽ ἂν ἡσυχάζειν. “But they themselves were about to make an 
alliance with the Athenians, thinking that the Argives would certainly not 
renew the treaty with them, since they had refused when Ampelidas and Lichas 
came to them (for that purpose); for they thought that they were not 
dangerous without the Athenians (for they supposed they would be joining 
the Athenians if they were able) and that the rest of Peloponnesus would be 
most likely to keep quiet.” Before they concluded even a peace with Athens, 
the Lacedaemonians had tried in vain to renew their treaty with Argos (see 
c. 14. ὃ 4). They were now, therefore, sure that a treaty with Argos was 
impossible. They were, moreover, afraid that the Argives would make an 
alliance with Athens (πρὸς yap dv τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους .. . χωρεῖν), which would 
at once give power to Argos, and endanger the stability of the new peace 
which the Lacedaemonians and Athenians had just concluded. Besides, they 
thought that if they made an alliance with Athens, even the disaffected states 
of Peloponnesus would be afraid to move. νομίζοντες... ἐπισπένδεσθαι gives 
as the reason for making the alliance the impossibility of renewing the treaty 
with Argos, and the rest of the passage shows why the impossibility of a 
treaty with Argos had the effect of driving the Lacedaemonians into the 
arms of the Athenians. This explanation seems to meet the exigencies of 
the case, and the emendations proposed are not violent. Even if πρὸς γὰρ 
dv ... χωρεῖν is not a gloss, it is easy for a clause to be shifted from its 
proper place; the change from ἐνόμισαν γάρ to νομίσαντες is not great, and 
when that had once taken place, the insertion of τε in τούς τε ᾿Αργείους to 
correspond to καὶ τὴν ἄλλην Πελοπόννησον was very natural. 

23. 1. (καὶ A@nvaior). These words are wanting in the Mss., but are in- 
dispensable. καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις, 24, is also omitted in some Mss. It is also nec- 
essary to read with Bohme ἤν τινες, 2, for ἣν δέ τινες of the Mss. Kirchhoff 
(Sitzungsber. ἃ. Berl. Akad. 1883, p. 830) writes ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι; 
but there is no fixed order for these words in this document, St. and v. Her- 


APPENDIX. 181 


werden assume that after Λακεδαιμόνιοι, not καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, but a number of 
other words have been lost, which they supply to correspond to c. 39. 12, 
and 46.15. Steup, Stud. I. p. 73-83, in a careful discussion of the question, 
arrives at the conclusion that interpolations have crept into the text in the 
two last-mentioned passages. Kirchhoff adopts the same conclusion in a 
modified form. See App. on c. 39. 12. : 

98. 17. ᾿Αθηναίους. Acc. to Miiller-Striibing, Aristophanes und die hist. 
Krit. p. 281, the Ms. in the British Museum, No. 11,727 (St.’s M, but he 
does not mention this variation) reads ᾿Αθηναίοις, and he suggests that the 
original reading may have been: ᾿Αθηναίοις Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους 
«Λακεδαιμονίοις ; but as a servile insurrection was not one of the dangers the 
Athenians had to fear, they may well have promised to aid the Lacedaemo- 
nians without exacting a similar promise in return. 

95, 3. δεκαετῆ. St., Quaest. Gramm. p. 15, recommends the form δεκέτη 
which he has accepted in his text here and in ὁ. 26. 15 (and ini. 112. 2, πεν- 
τέτεις). The Mss. vary in this and similar forms, but all give Sexaery here. 

25. 11. καὶ ἐπὶ ἕξ ἔτη μὲν καὶ δέκα μῆνας. Ullrich, in a learned and care- 
ful discussion of this passage (in his Beitraége zur Erklérung des Thuc. p. 153— 
168), comes to the conclusion that Thuc. thought of the beginning of the 
Sicilian expedition as the beginning of the second war, and proposes there- 
fore to read ἕξ ἔτη καὶ τέσσαρας (δ΄) μῆνας, six years and four months, from 
the conclusion of the peace, early in the spring of 421 8.c., to the departure 
of the great fleet in the middle of summer, 415 B.c. He sees in the Sicilian 
expedition the most important division of the whole war, and feels the lack 
of any mention of such an important event in the description (in c. 26. § 2) 
of the intervening period (the διὰ μέσου ξύμβασις). But Thuc. mentions as 
the end of the middle period ἐπὶ τὴν ἑκατέρων γῆν στρατεῦσαι, which does not 
apply to the Sicilian expedition. This expedition is referred to, however, in 
c. 25. 12 ff., ἔξωθεν... ἔβλαπτον ἀλλήλουβ τὰ μάλιστα, and also in c. 26. 12, 
és ἄλλα ἀμφοτέροις ἀμαρτήματα ἐγένοντο (with which cf és Σικελίαν πλοῦς 
mentioned as an ἁμάρτημα in ii. 65.45). Thuc. also refers to the second war 
as τὸν χρόνῳ ὕστερον μετὰ τὰ ἐκ Σικελίας πόλεμον in iv. 81.9. Bohme thinks 
that the end of the time of peace is marked by the plan which the Lacedae- 
monians had for the invasion of Attica in the middle of the seventeenth year 
of the war (see vi. 93. 1ff.), and defends the reading ἕξ ἔτη καὶ δέκα μῆνας 
upon this ground. But this assumption is incompatible with py... στρατεῦσαι. 
Duker and those who think that the end of the διὰ μέσου ξύμβασις is marked 
by the Athenian plundering expedition along the coast of Laconia in the 
summer of 414 B.c. (see vi. 105. 11 ff.), propose ἑπτὰ ἔτη καὶ δύο μῆνας. But 
this explanation (by reference to an attack from one side) leaves ἑκατέρων 
unexplained. Therefore Kr. (on Clinton’s Fasti for the year 414 B.c.), who 
thinks that the condition ἐπὶ τὴν ἑκατέρων γῆν στρατεῦσαι is not fulfilled 
before the occupation of Decelea (early_in the spring of 415 B.c., cf. vii. 
19. 1 ff.) conjectures ἑπτὰ ἔτη καὶ τέσσαρας μῆνας. The words αὖθις ἐς πό- 


182 APPENDIX. 


λεμον φανερὸν κατέστησαν (in c. 25. 15) seem also to refer to this event. 
Still, the inroad upon Laconia (see vi. 105) is certainly στρατεῦσαι ἐπὶ τὴν 
γῆν, though only from one side, not ἑκατέρων, and the date of the ξυμμαχία 
μετὰ τὰς σπονδάς cannot be exactly determined; consequently it is best to 
follow ΟἹ. in leaving the reading of the Mss. unchanged, though without 
vouching for its correctness. Schiitz, Ztschr. f. d.Gymn.-Wesen, 31, p. 243 ff., 
thinks that the appointment of Gylippus (see vi. 93. 8 ff.) agrees best with 
the words ἕξ ἔτη καὶ δέκα μῆνας. L. Herbst, Philol. 1881, p. 357 ff., thinks 
Thue. considered the decision of the assembly at Sparta (see vi. 93) the end 
of the peace, and Steup, Thukyd. Studien, I. p. 87 note, thinks the descent of 
the thirty Attic ships upon the coast of Laconia (see vi. 105) marks the renewal 
of the war. W. Jerusalem, Wiener Studien, 3, p. 287, thinks that the em- 
phatic distinction made between the summer of 421 B.c. as a time of peace, 
and the following winter as the time when covert hostilities began (see 6. 35. 
1, and 36. 1), shows that Thuc. regarded not the σπονδαί nor the ξυμμαχία, 
but the beginning of the following winter, as the beginning of the six years 
and ten months. This agrees with the fact that the descent of the Athenians 
upon the coast of Laconia (see vi. 105) took place in the middle of summer, 
414 B.c., i.e. six years and ten months later. 

25. 13. ἀνοκωχῆς. St., Quaest. Gramm. p. 14, has shown that this is the 
proper reading for the usual ἀνακωχῆς here as well as in i. 40. 16; 66. 9; iii. 
4. 12; iv. 38.4; 117. 7. 

26. 8. διήρηται. Bohme understands τὰ ἔργα as subj.: “according to the 
acts as they have been recounted by me,” but then we should certainly expect 
τὰ ἔργα as obj. of ἀθρείτω, and could dispense with rots ἔργοις. Kr. explains: 
“how the peace is separated by the facts from the preceding and succeeding 
war.” Others take διαιρεῖν in the sense of “define”; but none of these 
explanations is satisfactory. Perhaps the passage is corrupt. Some Mss. 
give διείρηται. 

26. 10. οὔτ᾽ ἀπεδέξαντο. Bekker’s proposal to read οὐδ᾽ is inadmissible. 
ἀπέδοσαν and ἀπεδέξαντο are both in the closest connexion with their common 
obj. πάντα. 

26. 11. ἔξω τε τούτων. Cl. says that ἔξω τε τούτων is opp. to τοῖς τε ép- 
yous (8). St. rightly observes that the events introduced by ἔξω Te τούτων are 
quite as much ἔργα as anything which precedes. He accordingly brackets 
τε (8), reading τοῖς γὰρ ἔργοις. Prob. Thuc. wrote re intending to introduce ~ 
something to correspond to it, but eventually finished the period in a different 
way. 

26. 13. οἱ ἐπὶ Θράκης. .. ἐκεχειρίαν δεχήμερον ἦγον. Steup, Stud. 1. 
p. 86 note, thinks these words were not written by Thuc. because the account 
of the διὰ μέσου ξύμβασις herein contained is neither complete nor accurate ; 
but completeness and accuracy could not be expected in so brief a summary. 

26. 14. ἐκεχειρίαν Sexrjpepvo. Grote and others explain: “a truce termina- 
ble at ten days’ notice.” Certainly a truce which must be renewed every ten 


APPENDIX. 183 


days would be very inconvenient, but δεχήμεροι σπονδαί are always mentioned 
as the most unstable kind of truce, and in c. 32. 17 the exvression δεχημέρους 
ἐπισπονδάς occurs. This can hardly mean anything else than a truce renewed 
every ten days. Cf. ἐπισπένδεσθαι, renew a treaty. Cobet, Mnem. 14, p. 10, 
proposes to emend ἐπισπονδάς to σπονδάς, but this avoids instead of explain- 
ing the difficulty. 

26. 28. αἴσθεσθαι. St. refuses to recognize this pres. inf. here and in ii. 
93-17; iii. 83. 13; vii. 75. 8, but the accentuation of most of the Mss. can 
hardly be the result of chance, esp. as the pres. inf. would, owing to the gen- 
eral nature of the impressions to which reference is made, be in all these 
cases more natural than the aor. Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. 11. p. 68, has pointed 
out other traces (among them Plat. Rep. x. 608 a) of this lost usage. The 
preservation of the short form of the pres. αἴσθεσθαι by the side of αἰσθάνεσθαι 
is the more easily explained, because, in being lengthened by the addition of 
-ay, the stem could not introduce a nasal before o nor undergo a shortening 
of the stem vowel, as λήβω, λαμβάνω, τεύχω, τυγχάνω. See on the whole 
question G. Curtius, das Verbum der griech. Spr. 11. 2f. 

27. 2. καὶ ὕστερον ἡ ξυμμαχία κτέ. St. considers the form of expression 
as explained in the note too awkward, but it is comprehensible and gram- 
matical. If this is the proper understanding of the passage, the reason which 
led Campe, Philol. 11, p. 52, and St. to omit καί before of μὲν ἄλλοι (4) and 
begin the main clause at that point, loses its force. The clause beginning 
καὶ at ἀπὸ τῆς Πελοποννήσου πρεσβεῖαι repeats more in detail the state- 
ment of c. 22. 6, ἐκείνους μὲν ἀπέπεμψαν. The introductory impf. ἀνεχώρουν 
is then particularized acc. to common usage (by means of the introduc- 
tory particles καί, μέν, δέ, see on i. 19. 1), and its parts expressed by the 
aor. ἀπῆλθον and the pres. ποιοῦνται. The reading ἡ ξυμμαχία for αἱ ξυμ- 
μαχίαι of the Mss., first proposed by Cobet and opposed by Herbst, gegen 
Cobet, p. 6, is adopted by Cl. This treaty of alliance between Athens and 
Sparta was a distinctly separate agreement (cf. 22. 6, αὐτοὶ δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθη- 
valovs), and is elsewhere (c. 23. 25; 24.9; 25.2; 27. 8) invariably mentioned 
in the sing. The close proximity of the pls. at σπονδαί and at πρεσβεῖαι led 
the copyist to write the pl. ai ξυμμαχίαι, which is freq. employed where the 
circumstances warrant it. Similarly, in iii. 65. 2, tepopnviars for ἱερομηνίᾳ is 
wrongly written after σπονδαῖς. 

27. 14. ἀρχήν. Philippi, Rhein. Mus. 36, p. 255, suggests that ἀρχήν is a 
gloss on αὐτοκράτορας which has crept into the text. The plenipotentiaries 
are, then, explained by the gloss as an ᾽ρχή or magistracy. 

27. 15. τοῦ μὴ καταφανεῖς γίγνεσθαι. Cl. quotes the Schol., ἵνα μὴ φωρα- 
θῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων οἱ συνθέμενοι τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις. He explains: ‘in 
order that those among them who might eventually fail in persuading the 
communities to which they belonged to join the alliance against Sparta, might 
not,’ etc., making τὸ πλῆθος refer, not to the Argives, but to the other states. 
This explanation is possible, but that given in the note is simpler, 


184 APPENDIX. 


81. 2. ἐποιήσαντο. This reading of the best Mss, is easily explained after 
the collective subst. πρεσβεία. G. 135,3; H. 609. ἐποιήσατο of some Mss. 
is a needless correction. ᾿ 

31. 9. καὶ λυσάντων τὸν πόλεμον. Kr. reads καταλυσάντων without καί, 
and takes καταλυσάντων as a cond. partic., “if they put an end to the war.” 
But then, as Cl. observes, the fulfilment of the condition is wanting. Cl. 
therefore reads καὶ καταλυσάντων, but St. calls attention to Strabo xiii. 1. 38, 
where λύειν πόλεμον occurs, and returns to the reading of the Mss. Else- 
where we find καταλύειν, or more rarely διαλύειν, but the analogy of λύειν 
σπονδάς is strong enough, even without the passage in Strabo, to justify us 
in retaining the reading of all the Mss. 

31. 21. τὴν ξυνθήκην προφέροντες ἐν ἢ εἴρητο «ré. Steup, Stud. I. p. 62, 
thinks the words ἐν ἢ εἴρητο... kal ἐξελθεῖν are an interpolation by a ‘reader 
who did not understand that τὴν ξυνθήκην referred to the treaty ae 
Sparta and the other Peloponnesians.’ 

31. 28. περιορώμενοι [ὑπὸ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων]. The words in brackets 
must have been inserted by some reader who thought περιορώμενοι was pass. 
Their omission was proposed by Dobree. The common reading forces us to 
take mepropwpevor as pass. It is then understood by some to mean neglected 
(Grote VI. p. 287: ‘left to themselves by the Lacedaemonians”’), by others 
carefully watched (Jowett, ‘jealously watched by,’ etc.). Both are unsatis- 
factory. Miiller-Striibing, Pol. Beitr. p. 27, proposes: ἡσύχαζον Kal περιορώ- 
μενοι ὑπὸ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων, νομίζοντες κτέ., with καί in the sense of although, 
and περιορώμενοι in that of treated with neglect. ' 

32. 3. παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας ἠνδραπόδισαν. Miiller-Striibing, Aristoph. und 
die hist. Krit. p. 45, observes that this passage does not agree with the 
statement of iv. 123. 15, that Brasidas had removed the women and children 
of the Scioneans and Mendeans to Olynthus two years before. He discusses 
also the similar statement in regard to the Plataeans. Thuc. (in iii. 68. 15) 
says that when Plataea was taken (in the summer of 427 B.c.), the Lacedae- 
monians γυναῖκας ἠνδραπόδισαν, although he had previously informed us 
(in ii. 6. 15 ff.) that the Athenians τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοὺς ἀχρειοτάτους ξὺν γυναιξὶ 
kal παισὶν ἐξεκόμισαν, in the spring of 431 8.c. Cl. thinks that in the case of 
Plataea the words γυναῖκας (not παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας) ἠνδραπόδισαν (iii. 68. 
15) are an indication that the 110 women left behind as σιτοποιοί (cf. ii. 78. 
13 f.) were not slaves; and that in the case of Scione the removal of the 
women and children by Brasidas (cf. iv. 123. 15), not being compulsory, was 
not completely carried out. Miiller-Striibing, Thukydideische Forschungen, 
p- 142 ff., maintains his previous opinion. He rejects von Velsen’s explana- 
tion (Philol. Anz. 1876, p. 373) that the σιτοποιοί at Plataea were slaves, and 
that Thuc. uses ἠνδραπόδισαν only in contradistinction to διέφθειραν (equiv. 
to daréxravov) in iii. 68, 13 (διέφθειραν ἸΤλαταιῶν οὐκ ἐλάσσους διακοσίων Kré.), 
and proposes to omit τοὺς ἡβῶντας, παῖδας δὲ καὶ γυναῖκας ἠνδραπόδισαν (in 
v. 32.3) as an interpolation. There certainly must have been σιτοποιοί in 


APPENDIX. 185 


Scione as well as in Plataea, but this would not account for the παῖδες if the 
removal of the women and children was as complete as the character of 
Brasidas would lead us to expect ; but it is possible that‘something may have 
interfered with the thorough execution of his plan. St. suggests that the 
narrative is defective concerning this point. 

32. 18. [τούτων] τῶν πεντηκοντουτίδων. Dobree, followed by Cl., St., and 
others, rejects tovrwv. The form πεντηκοντουτίδων, after the analogy of 
τριακοντουτίδων in i. 87. 19, is better than πεντηκονταετίδων. 

32. 21. ὥσπερ Βοιωτοὶ εἶχον. St. brackets these words (which were not in 
Valla’s text) as superfluous. Perhaps, however, they refer to some provisions 
of the truce which are not specified. 

35. 1. ἐν τῇ Ἄθω ᾿Ακτῇ Διῆς. This reading is that of Didot and Bergk 
(Hall. Progr. 1859) for ἐν τῇ “A®m Δικτιδιῆς of the Mss. The Διῆς (also in 
e. 82. 1 acc. to the best Mss.), from the town of Δῖον (cf iv. τορ. 10, 16), 
appear repeatedly in the tribute-lists of the Delian confederacy (Boeckh, 
Staatshaushalt, II. p. 488; U. Kohler, Abhandlgn. ἃ. Berl. Akad. 1869, p. 76; 
Corp. Inser, Att. I. 226 ff.) as Aujs é&”A@e, and in company with them are the 
Θύσσιοι. The ’Axry is mentioned in iv. 109.4. A name Δικτιδιῆς is un- 
known, and must be a mistake for’*Axrq Aujs. Poppo conjectured Χαλκιδῆς. 
Meineke prefers ἐν τῇ ᾿Αθωίδι ᾿Ακτῇ. v. Herwerden reads ἐν τῇ A0@ Διῆς. 

35. 31. καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους [Εϊλωτάς τε καὶ] ὅσοι. Cl. brackets only re. The 
reading of the text is that of St. Cl. thinks that besides the Helots some of 
the Perioeci may have deserted to Pylos, but the passage he cites in support 
of this view (iv. 41. 11 ff., τῶν τε Εἱλώτων αὐτομολούντων καὶ φοβούμενοι (sc. of 
“Λακεδαιμόνιοι) μὴ Kal ἐπὶ μακρότερον σφίσι τι νεωτερισθῇ τῶν κατὰ THY χώραν) 
seems to refer esp. to the Helots, and this is made more evident by v. 14. 17 ff. 
Desertions on the part of the Perioeci are nowhere mentioned. Kr. omits 
only te καί. The words Εϊλωτάς τε καί may possibly have arisen from a mar- 
ginal gloss Ei\wrds τε καὶ Μεσσηνίους, as St. suggests. 

36. 3. σπονδαῖς. The Mss. have no art. before σπονδαῖς, thereby seeming 
to show that these men were opposed not only to the peace which had lately 
been concluded, but to any peace with Athens. Cf. iv. 21.3. CL. following 
Steup, inserts ταῖς on the ground that since the peace had been concluded 
there could be no opposition to treaties with Athens, but only to the treaty then 
in force. The reading of the Mss. seems, however, to be preferable, for though 
the opponents of treaties in general would, of course, be opposed to the treaty 
in particular, the existence of the treaty would not change’ their general 
attitude, but they would still be opposed to treaties. 

36. 7. Elevdpns. This is the reading of the best Mss. here and in 6. 37; 
38; 46; not Ἐξενάρκης which Bekker adopts. 

36. 11. μετὰ Βοιωτῶν κτέ. If Cl.’s interpretation of this passage as given 
in the note is correct, it is not necessary to read (with Ullrich, Beitr. 1846, 
p. 37 ff.) μετὰ Κορινθίων for μετὰ Βοιωτῶν, nor to adopt the changes proposed 
by St., who omits Βοιωτῶν ᾿Αργείους and ξυμμάχους, and reads αὖθις μετὰ Tove 


180 APPENDIX. 


των. These readings are simpler than that given in the text, but depart too 
widely from the Mss. 

86. 13. ἥκιστ᾽ dv. The Mss. read ἥκιστα, but ἄν (which could easily be 
lost before ἀναγκασθῆναι) seems indispensable, and its force also affects ἑλέσθαι. 

36. 14. ἑλέσθαι γὰρ Λακεδαιμονίους πρὸ τῆς ᾿Αθηναίων ἔχθρας ure. St. 
brackets ᾿Αθηναίων, and refers ἔχθρας καὶ διαλύσεως τῶν σπονδῶν to the Ar- 
gives and the treaty of peace with them, which was nearing its end (see c. 14. 
20; 22.8; 28.8), but Cl.’s explanation given in the note is more satisfactory. 
Jowett translates: “for the Lacedaemonians would prefer the friendship and 
alliance of Argos to anything which they might lose by the enmity of Athens 
and the dissolution of the treaty.” This is also Kr.’s understanding of the 
passage. But to obtain this sense one would naturally write not ἔχθρας καὶ 
διαλύσεως σπονδῶν, but rather φιλίας καὶ σπονδῶν. 

36. 18. ἡγουμένους. So St. for ἡγούμενοι. The nom. may haye come into 
the Mss. through a mistaken idea that the word referred to the subj. of ἠπί- 
σταντο. : 

86. 20. ἐδέοντο κτέ. This passage is evidently corrupt, for the acc. Βοιω- 
τούς and ὅπως cannot both stand after ἐδέοντο. Herbst, Philol. 24, p. 653, 
tries to defend the reading of the Mss. Schiitz, Ztschr. f. d. Gymn. Wesen, 
31, p. 256, proposes to omit Βοιωτούς. The Schol. explains, ἐδέοντο Βοιωτοὺς 
οὕτω ποιῆσαι ὅπως παραδώσουσι, and St. therefore makes a gap in the text. 
Some word is wanted in place of ἐδέοντο, which shall signify ἐδέοντο οὕτω 
ποιῆσαι. Kr. suggests ἠτοῦντο, Cl. ἐπήγοντο with reference to c. 41.11. Cl. 
suggests, however, that the similarity of this passage to c. 39. ὃ 2 is such 
as to awaken the suspicion that some copyist, thinking that Panactum might 
prob. have been mentioned in these negotiations, inserted at this point a 
clumsy imitation of c. 39. ὃ 2. St. rejects this suggestion on the ground that 
c. 39. § 2 is not exactly a repetition of this passage, and remarks that we have 
no reason for calling the passage spurious because it is corrupt. 

39. 12. εἰρημένον ἄνευ ἀλλήλων μήτε σπένδεσθαί τῳ prre πολεμεῖν. St., in 
his note on c. 23.1, and Steup, Thuk. Stud. I. p. 73-83, have proved conclu- 
sively that the provision of the treaty to which reference is made here and 
in c. 46. 15 (εἴρητο ἄνευ ἀλλήλων μηδενὶ ξυμβαίνειν) is not contained in the 
treaty as it is given in c, 23. St. tries to bring about an agreement by filling 
the gap in c. 23. 1, as follows: κατὰ τάδε ξύμμαχοι ἔσονται Λακεδαιμόνιοι (καὶ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπὶ τοῖς ἴσοις καὶ ὁμοίοις, μήτε σπένδεσθαί Tw ἄνευ κοινῆς γνώμης 
μήτε πολεμεῖν " εἶναι δὲ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν) πεντήκοντα ἔτη. Steup, on the other 
hand, after a careful and thorough discussion of the whole account of the 
negotiations with which we are here concerned, comes to the conclusion that 
the words εἰρημένον... πολεμεῖν in c. 39. 12 f., as well as εἴρητο... ξυμβαίνειν 
in c. 46. 15 f., are interpolated. He thinks these words may have been in- 
serted by the same reader to whom he ascribes the interpolations in ec. 17. 
13 ff. and c. 31. 21 ff. In cases of this kind, certainty is always hard to at- 
tain, and in this book harder than elsewhere. Cl.’s caution in leaving the text 


APPENDIX. 187 


unchanged is therefore to be commended, though the present condition of the 
text is far from satisfactory. 

40. 3. ἧκον. The Mss. read ἵκοντο and ἥκοντο, but Thuc. cannot have 
used the simple verb ἵκεσθαι, which is not Att. The reading of the Mss. prob. 
arose from careless repetition of the following τό. 

40. 10. πρότερον ἐλπίζοντες ἐκ τῶν διαφορῶν, εἰ μὴ pelverav αὐταῖς αἱ πρὸς 
«Λακεδαιμονίους σπονδαί, τοῖς γοῦν ᾿Αθηναίοις ξύμμαχοι ἔσεσθαι. Cwiklinski, 
Hermes, 1877, p. 84 ff., maintains that these words are an interpolation. Cl.’s 
explanation, however, as given in the notes, is satisfactory. Thuc. explains 
clearly and with some irony the unpleasant position in which the Argives 
were placed by their foolish confidence in the representations of Cleobulus and 
Xenares (see c. 36). They were ill-informed concerning the events which 
had taken place, and did not find out until too late that the Boeotians, whom 
they had hoped to win over to their side, had concluded a treaty with Sparta. 
Meanwhile the alliance between Athens and Sparta had been formed, so that 
the Argives had now lost their former advantageous position between the 
rival powers, πρότερον ἐλπίζοντες ἐκ τῶν Stadhopay . . . τοῖς γοῦν ᾿Αθηναίοις Evp- 
μαχοι ἔσεσθαι, “whereas they had formerly (even after the peace of Nicias) 
hoped (pres. part. expressing continuance) that if their treaty with the Lace- 
daemonians did not last (ἐπ᾿ ἐξόδῳ yap πρὸς αὐτοὺς ai σπονδαὶ ἦσαν, c. 28. 8), 
z.e. should not be renewed, they could make an alliance with the Athenians at 
any rate.” γοῦν with ᾿Αθηναίοις, to which Cwiklinski (p. 86) objects, seems 
to be peculiarly expressive and appropriate. 

42, 3. ᾿Ανδρομένης. The best Mss. (followed by Bekker and Cl.) read 
᾿Ανδρομέδης. But St. has shown that the masc. name corresponding to An- 
dromeda is ᾿Ανδρομέδων. The common reading ᾿Ανδρομένης is therefore pre- 
ferable. 

43. 7. οὐ μέντοι ἀλλά. Chrysosthenes Balassides, ᾿Αθήναιον, 1880, p. 221- 
227, discusses the origin and use of this and the corresponding neg. expression 
οὐ μέντοι οὐδέ. He explains the ellipsis by reference to what follows, thinking 
that the opposite of the following idea should be supplied, whereas it is 
usually explained by reference to what precedes: this, however, is not all, but, 
etc. Kiihn. 535,7. In this passage, Balassides supplies οὐ μέντοι ταύτῃ ye 
μόνον τῇ δόξῃ ἐπηίρετο (or προήγέτο) ἀλλὰ κτέ. 

48. 9. ἑαυτόν. This reading of the better Mss. (some give ἑαυτῶν, which 
amounts to the same thing) is more emphatic than αὐτόν, which Bekker and 
Kr. adopt. 

44, 10. τὴν κατὰ θάλασσαν. St. and v. Herwerden bracket these words, 
but it is natural that the Argives should lay most stress upon the powerful 
navy of Athens since they were themselves weak in that respect. See Miiller- 
ΕΣ Pol. Beitr. p. 26. 

45. 2. ἣν καί. Poppo and Kr. for καὶ ἤν of the Mss. which Cl. detent: 
But the passages he cites (i. 120. 9; iii. 5. 11; iv. 63. 13) offer no sufficient 
analogy. καί belongs evidently with és τὸν δῆμον, and must therefore stand 


188 APPENDIX. 


after qv. St. and others take καί with ἐπαγάγωνται and read μὴ καί, ἢν κτέ,, 
citing Plut. Nic. 10, μὴ καὶ τὸν δῆμον ἀπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν λόγων ἐπαγάγωνται. 

45. 4. ταὐτά. St. for ταῦτα. Rightly, both in view of the connexion, and 
with reference to Plut. Nic. 10, τῶν αὐτῶν λόγων. 

45. 5. μηχανᾶται δέ. This reading of the Mss. is entirely satisfactory. 
δέ introduces the sent. and at the same time marks a slight opposition between 
Alcibiades’s conduct and that of the envoys. Cl. changes δέ to δή, and com- 
pares vi. 64. 13, τοιόνδε τι οὖν μηχανῶνται, but the change is needless. 

46. 1. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων αὐτῶν ἠπατημένων. St. and vy, Herwerden (Stud. 
Thuc. p. 75) consider these words an interpolation. vy. Herwerden omits also 
περὶ τοῦ... . ἥκειν. Miiller-Striibing, Pol. Beitr. p. 29, changes ἠπατημένων to 
ἠπατηκότων. But no change is needed. Both perf. partics. express the suc- 
cessful result of Alcibiades’s trick of c. 45. ὃ 8, which deceived both Nicias and 
the Lacedaemonian envoys. Alcibiades deceived the Lacedaemonians, who, 
being themselves deceived, in turn deceived Nicias, and he, though he had 
himself been deceived, nevertheless urged the cause of the Lacedaemonians, 
So, since the deception of Nicias is a result of that of the envoys, we have 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων αὐτῶν ἠπατημένων placed before καὶ αὐτὸς (likewise; see 
on i, 50. 18) ἐξηπατημένος. The hopes of Nicias had been raised by the envoys 
who had declared the day before in the senate that they had full powers to 
conclude a treaty, and now that they, being themselves deceived by Alcibiades, 
contradicted their former statement, Nicias was doubly deceived (ἐξηπατη- 
μένος more emphatic than the simple ἠπατημένος ; cf. ili. 43. 10; viii. 56. 24). 
Thue. lays great stress upon Alcibiades’s trick and its success. So also Plut. 
Comp. Alc. et Coriol. 2, μάλιστα δὲ κατηγοροῦσιν αὐτοῦ κακοήθειαν kal ἀπάτην, 
ἡ τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίων πρέσβεις παρακρουσάμενος, ὡς Θουκιδίδης ἱστόρηκε, τὴν 
εἰρένην ἔλυσεν. 

47. 1. Σπονδάς ἐποιήσαντο κτέ. A fragment of the official document re- 
cording this treaty was found by the Archaeological Society at Athens, in the 
spring of 1877, upon a marble slab on the southern slope of the Acropolis. 
This was published by Kumanudes, ᾿Αθήναιον 5, p. 313, and discussed by 
Kirchhoff, Hermes 12, p. 368 ff., who published it, C. 7. A., IV. p. 15f., No. 
46 Ὁ, with some remarks by Foucart (see also Schéne, Hermes 12, p. 472 ff., 
and St. in his note and appendix). Kirchhoff devotes another discussion to 
this treaty in the Sitzungsber. ἃ. Berl. Akad. 1883, p. 839 ff. The fragment 
contains the last letters of the right-hand side of the first half of the entire 
inscription. Each line originally consisted of 76 or 77 letters. The fragment 
contains 12 or 13 letters of each of the first 12 lines, and a gradually decreasing 
number of the next 14 lines, the last letters being the end of the 25th line, 
ovat ὃ of ὀμόσαι δέ in 1. 44 of our text. The reading of the inscription differs 
from that of our Mss. in the following cases (the variations in orthography 
due to the difference between the Att. and Ion. alphabets are not taken into 
account) :— 

1, 2, after ᾿Ηλεῖοι the inscription reads πρὸς ἀλλήλους. 


APPENDIX. 189 


1, 8 and 11, for ᾿Ηλείους καὶ Μαντινέας : Μαντινέας καὶ ᾿Ηλείους. 

1. 21 f., for τὴν Ἠλείων 7: τὴν ᾿Αργείων 7. 

1. 28, for ἢν : ἐᾶν. 

1. 41, for μεταπεμψαμένη τὴν : μεταπεμψαμέ ΝΈ ΕΙΣ, prob. μεταπεμψαμένη 
τῇ στρατιᾷ. 

1, 42, the inscription has before ταῖς the letters IX, prob. from a preceding 
ἁπάσαις. 

The text of the inscription has been completed and restored by Kirchhoff, 
Schone, Foucart, and St. with no material disagreement. Assuming that the 
text as given by Kirchhoff is correct (and but few points admit of a possible 
doubt), there are 31 variations between the inscription and our text of Thuc. 
Of these thirteen are merely orthographical (ἐάν for ἤν nine times, θάλατταν for 
θάλασσαν twice, ἁπασῶν for πασῶν and ἁπάσαις for πάσαις). In three cases 
the order of the names ‘ Eleans, Mantineans, Argives,’ is reversed. In four 
cases words which do not occur in our text are inserted in the inscription. 
Once our text inserts rats πόλεσιν in 1. 29. In eight cases the variations de- 
pend upon conjectures which are not absolutely certain, and may therefore be 
passed over. The two remaining variations are ἐς τὴν γῆν in 1. 12 for ἐπὶ τὴν 
γῆν and dv ἂν ἄρχωσιν in 1. 31 for dv ἄρχουσι. None of these are of any 
importance so far as the substance of the document is concerned, but it is at 
the first glance surprising and somewhat alarming that so many variations, 
slight though they may be, exist between the inscription and the text of Thuc. 
The importance of these variations depends, however, entirely upon the man- 
ner in which they arose. Kirchhoff, Schone, St., and others believe that the 
variations are due to the writer or writers of that Ms. from which all the 
extant Mss. of Thuc. are derived; in other words, they believe that the copy 
inserted by Thuc. into his history was correct in every particular, and agreed 
exactly with the inscription. According to this view, there are in this one 
chapter thirty or more cases in which our Mss. depart from the text as written 
by Thuc. But there is no reason for assuming more corrupt readings at this 
point than elsewhere ; and though the variations here do not much affect the 
sense, the same cannot safely be assumed to be the case throughout the work. 
If, then, the differences between our text in this chapter and the inscription 
are all due to corruptions in our Mss., but very little confidence can be placed 

‘in the Mss., nor can we rely implicitly upon any statement contained in a 
book which has come down to usin such acorrupt form. Butitis by no means 
necessary to assume that Thuc. originally gave an absolutely correct copy 
of the document part of which is preserved to us in the inscription. Thuc. 
wrote at a time when the demands made by the public upon the historian 
were not such as we are justified in making now, and even now mistakes in 
‘the copying of official documents are not entirely banished from our histories. 
Even if we believe with Kirchhoff, that this part of his work was composed 
by Thue. after his return to Athens, when he had access to the public archives, 
or at any rate to the Acropolis where a copy of this document was placed (cf. 


190 APPENDIX. 


c. 47. 65), it is no discredit to Thue. if he contented himself with an accurate 
rendering of the sense and general form of the treaty without taking pains to 
make a literal copy. If, however (and this is not positively disproved), Thue. 
obtained his copy of the treaty during his absence from Athens, the chance 
that the variations from the text of the inscription date from the very origin 
of his work is still further increased. In view of these considerations Cl. is 
justified in giving this chapter of the history as it is preserved in the Mss., 
leaving for others the task of establishing the text of the inscription and the 
original form of the treaty. That Thuc. obtained his copy of the treaty from 
Athens can, however, not be doubted. Gilbert, Philol. 1879, p. 265, suggests 
that the variations may be fully accounted for by supposing that Thuc. copied 
the document in Olympia (see c. 47. 10), but as Kirchhoff (/.c. p. 848) observes, 
Thuc. would am that case have given the treaty in the dialect of Elis. 

47. 68. ἐὰν δοκῇ .. . τοῦτο κύριον εἶναι. This formula corresponds so 
closely to ree of c. 23 jin. that Bekker is certainly right in reading ὅτι ἂν 
δοκῇ for ὅτι δ᾽ ἂν δόξῃ of the Mss. On the form ἐάν, see on c. 18. 16. 

49. 5. ἐν τῷ... νόμῳ: Naber, Mnem. 14, p. 320, proposes ἐκ τοῦ. 
νόμου, according to the law. But ἐν τῷ νόμῳ seems to emphasize the fact that 
they imposed a fine within the law, i.e. not exceeding the limits preseribed by 
it. Of.i. 77.2 (ἐν δικασταῖς οὐκ ἐν ἄλλοις, in iii. 53. 3, is different). 

49. 6. σφᾶς. This need not be changed (with Dobree, Géller, and others) 
to σφῶν nor (with St.) to σφίσι. Kiihn. 555, 5, x. 8. It seems rather that 
the reference to the Lacedaemonians is made more emphatic by the unusual 
σφᾶς (a similar case is vi. 61. 27, where Bekker and St. read σφίσι). Nor is 
it likely that the same relation would be expressed once by σφῶν, the second 
time by αὑτῶν. For that matter, σφῶν would be unnecessary, for αὐτῶν is 
sufficient for both parts of the clause, since Φύρκον τεῖχος is contrasted with 
the more important Lepreum (see on c. 31. 6) and at the same time brought 
into relation with it by τε καί. 

49. 7. αὑτῶν ὁπλίτας. Cl. inserts χιλίους between these words, remarking 
that the numeral (a) might easily have been lost. He thinks 8 and 9 make 
the numeral necessary, but if the fine was 2000 minae at two minae for each 
man, it is evident that there were 1000 men, and the numeral is superfluous. 

50. 5. ἐπομόσαι. With Cl. and St. for ἀπομόσαι, for the sense demands 
not an oath of negation, but the affirmative ἐπομόσαι as in ii. 5. 25. 

51. 3. Μηλιᾶς. For Ms. Μηλιέας (with Cl.) after the analogy of «Αλιᾶς 
(i. 105. 1), Δωριᾶς (i. 107. 4), ἙἝ στιαιᾶς (i. 114. 6). 
54. 9. ἱερομηνία. So St. and v. Herwerden (with two Mss.) for ἱερομήνια 
of most Mss. The neut. pl. is generally explained (so Cl.) by reference to 
the fact that besides the Carneia several other festivals occurred in this 
month, while in iii. 56.4 and 65/2, ἱερομηνία is used to designate a particular 
point within the month, not the whole month. But the neut. pl. must come 
from an adj. ἱερομήνιος which occurs nowhere, and Schol. Pind. Nem. iii. 4, 

uses ἱερομηνία of the entire month. 


APPENDIX. 191 


55. 18. πυθόμενοι [δὲ] τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους. The omission of δέ was first 
proposed by Portus. δέ was doubtless inserted because πυθόμενοι was wrongly 
const. with ἀπῆλθον instead of with ἐβοήθησαν. Then ἐξεστρατεῦσθαι was 
taken to mean had finished their campaign (‘the Lacedaemonian campaign 
was over,’ Jowett), without regard to the fact that in 13, ἐξεστράτευσαν is 
used in its usual sense, marched out. 

57. 10. Φλιοῦντα. St. writes Φλειοῦντα and, 13, Φλειάσιοι from inscriptions. 

58. 1. ᾿Αργεῖοι δὲ προαισθόμενοι κτέ. The explanation given in the note 
is that of St., who, following Heilmann, writes τό τε (1) as two words. Cl. 
writes τότε in 1 as one word, and strikes out καί ἰῃ 2. He translates: ‘after 
the Argives had, to be sure, been informed at the beginning concerning the 
warlike preparations of the Lacedaemonians, nevertheless they did not move 
until (τότε δή, see on i. 49. 30) the enemy started for Phlius to join the others.’ 
The chief reason for these changes is the desire to avoid the necessity of sup- 
plying αἰσθόμενοι καὶ τοῦτο or a similar expression with ἐπειδὴ . . . ἐνχώρου ; 
but St.’s explanation does away with any such presumed necessity, and though 
the const. as explained by St. is undoubtedly loose, it is not more so than in 
many other cases in Thuc. To Cl.’s reading St. justly objects that τότε mpa- 
τον does not mean “at the beginning,” but “not until then (tum primum),” 
and that whereas τότε of 1 must refer to c. 57. 5 (€orpdrevov), the second 
τότε in the same sent. (5) refers to another and later time (ἐχώρουν, 3). 
Miiller-Striibing, Thuk. Forsch. p. 101, thinks we should read τό re and insert 
παρεκάλεσαν τοὺς ξυμμάχους or words to that effect after τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων. 
He discusses this-and the following chapters with great liveliness in Aristoph. 
τι. d. Hist. Krit. p. 401 ff. A. Philippi, Rhein. Mus. 1881, p. 255 f., discusses 
the movements of the troops as here described, and finds that they are impos- 
sible. He thinks the narrative is incomplete or imperfect, and that the move- 
ments described in this and the following chapter must have taken a day 
longer than appears from our text. 

58. 3. προσμῖξαι. Cl. in his App. on ii. 84. 34, cites Apoll. Dyse., Hdn., 
and later grammarians, as authority for writing προσμίξαι. The Mss. and 
most editt. read προσμῖξαι. See v. Bamberg, Ztschr. f. ἃ. Gymn. Wesen, 
1874, p. 10 ff. ! 

58. 21. ἐκάθηντο. After the analogy of c. 6. 22; iii. 97. 11; iv. 44. 14, for 
καθῆντο of nearly all Mss. 

59. 22. προσελθόντες. With Vat. The inferior Mss. read προσελθόντες. 

60. 2. εἰπόντες [τῶν ᾿Αργείων]. Cl. renders: “since they made these 
declarations from the Argives,” 1.6, “in the name of the Argives,” and adds 
that τῶν ᾿Αργείων, which is dependent upon ταῦτα, refers expressly to érot- 
pous γὰρ εἶναι ᾿Αργείους above. It is better with St. and v. Herwerden, Stud. 
Thuc. p. 76, to omit τῶν ᾿Αργείων, which may be a mistaken gloss on ἑαυτῶν 
or a marginal explanation of τοῦ πλήθους. 

60. 20. ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄλλῃ ἔτι προσγενομένῃ. So the Mss. The allies thought 


ἀξιόμαχοί ἐσμεν ov τῇ ᾿Αργείων μόνον ξυμμαχίᾳ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄλλῃ προσγένο- 


192 APPENDIX. 


μένῃ (i.e. ἐὰν ἄλλη προσγένηται καὶ ταύτῃ ἀξιόμαχοί ἐσμεν). If this idea were 
expressed in indir. disc. without the use of ἃ partic., we should have καὶ ἄλλῃ 
el προσγένοιτο without ἄν in the prot. or the apod. Bekker, followed by Cl. 
and others, reads κἂν ἄλλῃ for καὶ ἄλλῃ, on the ground that προσγενομένῃ is 
equiv. to εἰ προσγένοιτο (or προσεγένετο), and requires an apod. ἀξιόμαχοι ἂν 
εἴημεν (or ἦμεν). The allied forces might have thought et ἄλλη προσγένοιτο 
ἀξιόμαχοι ἂν εἴημεν or el ἄλλη προσεγένετο ἀξιόμαχοι ἂν ἦμεν, and either would 
be expressed by κἂν ἄλλῃ προσγενομένῃ ; but if they thought ἐὰν ἀλλή προσγέν- 
ται, this would be expressed by καὶ ἄλλῃ προσγενομένῃ, and the omission of 
ὄν shows that this is the thought attributed to them by Thuc. ϑοκοῦντες may 
be taken in the sense of seeming (to the spectator) instead of that of thinking, 
but this would not affect the const. of the dependent clause. 

61. 8. παρόντος κτέ. St. reads παριόντος, because, as he says, there is no 
doubt that Alcibiades was not only present, but came forward to speak (cf i. 
67. 12; vi. 15. 1; 19. 3), and spoke in behalf of the Athenians. If he was 
present at all, he doubtless spoke, so that παρόντος really answers the same 
purpose as παριόντος, and St.’s emendation is unnecessary. πρεσβευτόυ παρόν- 
tos shows clearly enough that Alcibiades, who had been στρατηγός in the 
preceding autumn (see c. 55. 17) now conducted these negotiations as a pri- 
vate individual (ἰδιώτης ὦν, Diod. xii. 79), Nevertheless, as he spoke in be- 
half of the Athenians, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι is the subj. of the sent. 

61. 9. ταῦτα. Cl. changes this reading of the Mss. to ταὐτά on the ground 
that ταῦτα referring to what follows is superfluous, and that the same things 
were said to the Argives and their allies. But there is no sufficient reason 
for Cl.’s assumption that the allies could not have been present in the same 
assembly with the Argives (Jowett renders, ‘ told the Argives in the presence 
of the rest,’ and Grote, VI. c. 66, p. 345, says, ‘an assembly was therefore 
convened, in which these allies took part along with the Argeians’), and if 
they were, ταὐτά is worse than superfluous, That the discussion was carried 
on in a joint assembly of Argives and allies is indicated by ἔν τε τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις 
καὶ ξυμμάχοις; for if the allies were not with the Argives, we should expect 
ἔν τε τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις καὶ rots ξυμμάχοις. 

62. 8. [Τεγεατῶν. St. rightly brackets Teyea, leaving only the art. Τεγεα- 
τῶν would have to stand after πόλει unless it were itself followed by the art. 
The reading of the Mss. may have arisen from a gloss (Τεγέᾳ) on woke. 

63. 4. ds οὔπω πρότερον αὐτοί ἐνόμιζον. The explanation given in the 
note seems satisfactory. Cl. accepts Hertlein’s proposal ( Wertheimer Progr. 
1862) to insert a comma and ὡς after πρότερον. Kr., Badham, and Cobet 
strike out αὐτοὶ ἐνόμιζον. 

. 68. 11. στρατευσάμενος. So some Mss., though most give στρατευσόμε- 
vos. St., after v. Herwerden, reads στρατευόμενος. But the aor. partic. seems 
admissible, being equiv. to ἐπειδὰν στρατεύσηται. 

65. 9. βουλομένην. Cl. and St. after v. Herwerden and Meineke read 
βουλόμενον because δηλῶν introduces an explanation of διανοεῖται, which 


APPENDIX. 193 


they think is best given by the pers. use of βουλόμενον, The Schol. (νῦν 
ἀκαίρως αὐτὴν προθυμεῖσθαι ἀναλαβεῖν καὶ ἐπανορθῶσαι τὴν τότε γενομένην 
ἁμαρτίαν) seems to have read βουλόμενον, and Plut., Mor. 797 c, does so read. 
But βουλομένην, the reading of the Mss., can be explained by a somewhat 
unusual use of βούλεσθαι (cf. Plat. Crat. 414 a), and there is no subj. for 
βουλόμενον. “΄ : 

65. 10. ἢ κατὰ τὸ αὐτό. In spite of Kr.’s explanation given in the note, 
these words are at best a troublesome addition. Dobree prefers to omit them. 
St. omits only q, and renders κατὰ τὸ αὐτό by eadem ratione (as in viii. 
5. 36; 66.16), making ratio refer to πρὸς χωρίον καρτερὸν ἰόντας σφᾶς. This 
is reasonable, but not certain. 

65. 20. ἐξ ὀλίγου. In c. 64. 17, ἐξ ὀλίγου is used in the sense of suddenly. 
Perhaps, then, it is here a gloss on αἰφνιδίῳ or vice versa. Arnold marks 
αἰφνιδίῳ as spurious, for the Schol.’s gloss on ἐξ ὀλίγου, viz., καιροῦ δηλονότι, 
would be nonsense if his text contained αἰφνιδίῳ. 

66. 6. μάλιστα δὴ Λακεδαιμόνιοι κτέ. The sense which must be contained 
in these words is indicated in the note, but it is hardly contained in the text. 
Meineke (Hermes 3, p. 356) therefore approves Campe’s conjecture ἐξεφάνη- 
σαν for ἐξεπλάγησαν and explains: “the Lacedaemonians, when (ὡς ὁρῶσι) 
they saw the enemy advance from the hill, showed themselves upon this occa- 
sion more than ever Lacedaemonians.” But St. is justly suspicious of this 
use of ἐκφαίνεσθαι. Rauchenstein, Philol. 36, p. 237, proposes διεφάνησαν in 
the same sense. Madvig (Adverss. Crit. I. p. 325) suggests: μάλιστα δὴ Aaxe- 
Sapovious . . . ἐξεπλάγησαν, using ἐξεπλάγησαν in the sense of “ wondered at”; 
but it is difficult to find a subj. for this verb, since the Argives who are men- 
tioned some lines above, being already drawn up in line of battle, have no 
reason ἐκπλαγῆναι (unless we take this verb to mean simply “admire,” for 
which there is no precedent), and they were not so surprised or astonished as 
to prevent them from attacking the Lacedaemonians with great energy (see 
ec. 70.1f.). St. thinks there is a gap before ἐξέπλαγησαν, and suggests that 
the passage may originally have read μάλιστα δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι és ὃ ἐμέμνηντο 
ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῴ ἐξαναγκασθέντες εὐθὺς ἐκ πορείας μάχεσθαι οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἐξεπλά- 
γῆσαν or something to that effect. He formerly supplied ὅμως δὲ διὰ τάχους 
ὡς ἐς μάχην ἀντικατέστησαν after ἐξεπλάγησαν. Cl. suggests that éferAdyn- 
σαν may mean “excited admiration” or “ caused astonishment,” but of this 
use there is no known example. He also suggests that we might read ἐξηλλά- 
γησαν for ἐξεπλάγησαν: “they were different from all others,’ and therefore 
“they excelled all others,” and cites Eur. Iph. Aul. 564, τάν τ᾽ ἐξαλλάσσουσαν 
χάριν as well as the use of ἐξηλλαγμένος in late authors. But these words are 
not used to mean more than simply “unusual,” so that the use of ἐξηλλάγη- 
σαν in the sense of “excelled” is unparalleled. _Miiller-Striibing, Thuk. 
Forsch. p. 39, proposes to change the order and read: μάλιστα δὴ Aaxedar- 
μόνιοι és ὃ ἐμέμνηντο ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῴ ἐξεπλάγησαν. καὶ εὐθὺς ἀπὸ σπουδῆς 
— διὰ βραχέως γὰρ μελλήσεως ἡ παρασκευὴ αὐτοῖς ἐγίγνετο --- καθίσταντο ἐς 


194 APPENDIX, 


κόσμον κτέ. This still leaves the astonishment of the Lacedaemonians unex- 
plained, and the introduction by means of δή is not quite satisfactory (St. 
reads μάλιστα δέ, and Cl. suggests μάλιστα δὲ δή), but perhaps the Argives 
had advanced further than the Lacedaemonians expected, or, as Schiitz, 
Ztschr. f. ἃ. Gymn.-W. 1877, p. 260 f., suggests, the momentary panic of the 
Lacedaemonians may have been due to the fact that the enemy were drawn 
up in battle array, while they were themselves unprepared for battle. 

68. 4. οὐκ av ἐδυνάμην. St.’s note on these words reads: οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην 
pro codd. scriptura nunc emendavimus, Haec enim, licet εἰ 
ἐβουλόμην subaudiatur, falsa est, cum contrarii affirmationem 
ei tribuere sententia vetemur. Nudum ἐδυνάμην Thue. seribere 
poterat, non ἂν ἐδυνάμην. Cl. agrees with St., and asks ‘how can εἰ ἐπε- 
xelpouv or εἰ ἐβουλόμην be supplied when no reason for not wishing or trying 
can be imagined?’ Miiller-Striibing, Thuk. Forsch. p. 41, thinks the reason 
was that Thuc. did not wish to make an indiscreet use of the confidential 
statements of his Lacedaemonian friends. This is somewhat fanciful, but 
why is any definite reason necessary? ‘Thuc. says: “It would now be impos- 
sible for me to give the exact numbers (if I were trying to do so; and knowing 
this beforehand, or not thinking the matter of sufficient importance to warrant 
troublesome investigations, I do not try).” 

68. 6. τῶν δ᾽ αὖ διὰ τὸ ἀνθρώπειον κομπῶϑες ἐς τὰ οἰκεῖα [πλήθη] ἠπιστεῖτο, 
The numbers of the Lacedaemonians could not be given accurately on account 
of their habitual secrecy concerning affairs of state, and those of the others 
were open to suspicion Std τὸ ἀνθρώπειον κομπῶδες ἐς τὰ οἰκεῖα, on account of 
the boastfulness which is natural to men in speaking of their own affairs (not 
the boastfulness which is natural to men in speaking of their own affairs (not © 
in speaking of their own numbers, πλήθη, any more than of other things). 
πλήθη evidently does not belong with οἰκεῖα. Cl. accordingly inserts τά before 
πλήθη, making τὰ πλήθη the subj. of ἠπιστεῖτο. But this is an unnecessary 
repetition of πλῆθος from 5, and besides, Thuc. uses the pl. πλήθη nowhere 
else. If the word were necessary to the sense, we might retain it; for, as Cl. 
says, the occasions for the use of the pl. are not freq., and it occurs in Dem, | 
vi. 24 and Aeschin, 111, 134, but, inasmuch as it is quite superfluous, itis better 
to follow Kr., Meineke, and St. in omitting it. 

69. 16. καθ ἑκάστούς re. Perhaps St. is right in marking a gap in the — 
text after these words, This gap he proposes to fill by τῶν ξυμμάχων βραχείᾳ 
παραινέσει or words to that effect. Schiitz strikes out re, and takes kat before 
pera in the sense of also, 

69. 18. * ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν. In the explanation of this much discussed pas- 
sage given in the note, the words ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν are disregarded. Nor should 
we feel any lack if they were omitted. If we follow Haack, Poppo, and 
Béhme in connecting these words with ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, we get no clear ex- 
pression of a thought, certainly not unless we insert ds. Kr. proposes ἀγαθοῖς 
ἀγαθὴν οὖσαν and translates: “they made their exhortation of those things - 


APPENDIX. 195 


concerning which they knew that the exhortation to the memory of them was 
useful to brave men,” παρακέλευσιν being supplied with ἐποιοῦντο. Jowett 
translates: “but the Lacedaemonians, both in their war songs and in the 
words which a man spoke to his comrade, did but remind one another of what 
their brave spirits knew already,” from which it does not appear clearly how 
he understands the passage, though he seems on the whole to follow Haack, 
ete. St. proposes dv ἠπίσταντο [τὴν] παρακέλευσιν τὴν μνήμην ἀγαθοῖς οὖσαν 
ἐποιοῦντο, mentionem eorum faciebant, quorum mentionem vi- 
ris fortibus adhortationem esse sciebant or, as an alternative, éy 
σφίσιν αὐτοῖς τὴν παρακέλευσιν ὧν ἠπίσταντο τῇ μνήμῃ (ds) ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν 
ἐποιοῦντο, apud se ipsos earum rerum quarum periti erant (sc. 
St ἔργων ἐκ πολλοῦ μελέτης) mentione adhortationem (sibi) ut 
Viris strenuis (πειρασαμένοις͵ 5) faciebant. He compares the similar 
passage in iv. 95. 1 ff., δ ὀλίγου μὲν ἡ παραίνεσις γίγνεται, τὸ ἴσον δὲ πρός ye 
τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς ἄνδρας δύναται καὶ ὑπόμνησιν μάλλον ἔχει ἢ ἐπικέλευσιν. ΟἹ. 
conjectures that ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν belongs in 19 after σῴζουσαν, and translates : 
“they were thoroughly convinced, that practice continued through actual 
exertion from early youth (ἐκ πολλοῦ as in c. 67. 14), if one is of a good char- 
acter, does more good than any eloquent exhortations.” ἀγαθοῖς οὖσιν is then 
opp. to καλῶς ῥηθεῖσαν. St., however, justly objects to this use of σῴζειν 
with the dat. in the sense of “do good” or “help.” πλείω τινὶ σῴζειν naturally 
means “preserve (or save) more things for a person,” which would be quite 
out of place here. None of these explanations are very satisfactory, and as 
the passage is corrupt, it may be impossible to explain it perfectly. 

70. 3. ὑπὸ αὐλητῶν πολλῶν νόμῳ ἐγκαθεστώτων. This is the reading of 
A. Gellius, adopted by most editt. including St. The best Mss. (and Cl.) 
read νόμου, which must be const. with ὑπό: to the music of, etc. But this 
makes the order of words rather awkward, and the idea is sufficiently expressed 
by ὑπὸ αὐλητών. 

70. 5. προέλθοιεν. St. follows Gellius in writing προσέλθοιεν, and com- 
pares ἐν tats προσόδοις of 6. But though προσέλθοιεν is in itself unobjection- 
able, it seems unnecessary when followed so closely by προσόδοις. 

71. 2. ποιεῖ μὲν καὶ ἅπαντα τοῦτο. St. brackets these words, but though 
they may be unnecessary, it is rash to omit them, for they are not likely to 
have been added by a later hand than the author’s. 

71. 5. προσστέλλειν. On the spelling, see App. oni. 15.3. This reading 
is necessary for προστέλλειν of the Mss. The dat. τῇ ἀσπίδι can be explained 
only by προσ-, not by mpo-. Each man pressed his uncovered right side as 
closely as possible toward the shield of his right-hand neighbour. This pas- 
sage is imitated by Dio C. xl. 23. 3, ταῖς τῶν παραστατῶν ἀσπίσι τὰς γυμνώ- 
σιες σφῶν προσστέλλειν (vulg. προστέλλειν). 

72. 5. τῇ προσμίξει. Kr. and Philippi (Rhein. Mus. 36, p. 257) may be 
right in thinking this is corrupt, esp. as the verb προσμῖξαι is used in another 
sense two lines below, 


196 APPENDIX. 


72. 6. ἐπὶ τοὺς Σκιρίτας «ré. Cl. changes τούτους in 8 to τούτοις, and ex- 
plains as follows: ‘ Since the two lochi had not been able to join the Sciritae 
at the proper time to fill up their loosened ranks (τὸ διάκενον τοῦτο), the king 
commanded them to unite again with them (the Lacedaemonians on the right 
wing) from whom they had already moved away some distance; but they 
could no longer effect an union with them. τούτοις refers to the Lacedaemo- 
nians, the σφίσι of 7. The subj. of ξυγκλῇσαι is still of λόχοι of 7 ; therefore 
the opposition indicated by μηδέ can only be found in those with whom the 
λόχοι are to unite, and these are, as opp. to the Sciritae, ἐφ᾽ ods οὐ παρῆλθον, 
the Lacedaemonians of the right wing, here referred to by τούτοις. St. objects 
to this, and his objections are well founded. In the first place τούτοις, refer- 
ring to the same troops to whom σφίσι refers is awkward, and in the second 
place Thuc. expressly says that the commanders of the two lochi refused to 
move (μὴ θελῆσαι παρελθεῖν, 3), so that Cl.’s assumption that they made a 
vain attempt to reach the Sciritae is in no way justified. The opposition in- 
dicated by μηδέ is between τούτους (the Sciritae), subj. of μὴ δύνασθαι 
' ξυγκλῇσαι, and the two lochi. Agis ordered the two lochi to fill the gap 
between the main body and the Sciritae, and when they did not obey he 
ordered the Sciritae to return to their former position, ‘but he found that it 
was too late, and that neither could they now fill the vacant space’ (Jowett). 

72. 9. τῇ ἐμπειρίᾳ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐλασσωθέντες. Cl.’s explanation as given 
in the note takes ἐμπειρίᾳ ἐλασσωθέντες in the sense of “inferior in experi- 
ence,” giving ἐλασσωθέντες the force of an adj. with no verbal significance. 
Some commentators, wishing to preserve the verbal force of the partic., have 
changed ἐμπειρίᾳ to some word with an almost opposite meaning. So Kr. pro- 
poses ἀπορίᾳ, and Miiller-Striibing, Thuk. Forsch. p. 13, ἀταξίᾳ, “having been 
beaten through want of discipline.” This, is, however, unnecessary, as ἐλασ- 
σοῦσθαι with the dat. occurs elsewhere in the sense of “be inferior” in a 
quality. Cf Plat. Alc. 1. 121 b, dpa μὴ τῷ τε γένους ὄγκῳ ἐλαττώμεθα τῶν 
ἀνδρῶν καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ τροφῇ, and Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 28, μεγάλη ζημία ἦν τό τε ἐλατ- 
τοῦσθαι πᾶσι τούτοις. Madvig, Advv. I. p. 325, advises the omission of ἐλασ- 
σωθέντες, and translates: Lacedaemonii, qui semper arte, tum non 
minus virtute se praestare ostenderunt. 

72, 21. τῶν ᾿Αργείων. Some inferior Mss. have τε between τῶν and ’Ap- 
yelwv, but as three names of peoples follow, each connected by καί with the 
preceding, te is better omitted. ᾿ 

78. 20. καὶ τῶν μὲν Μαντινέων καὶ πλείους διεφθάρησαν. Three Mss. read 
Μαντινέων οἱ πλείους, which St. thinks points to an original reading Μαντινέων 
καὶ οἱ πλείους, which he adopts. But οἱ πλείους means the majority. Now in 
c. 74.9, we are told that of the Mantineans 200 fell, and this cannot be a 
majority of the Mantineans engaged, for as the battle was fought in the imme- 
diate vicinity of Mantinea there is every reason to believe that the entire 
military force of the state (certainly then more than 400 men) was in the 
battle. καὶ πλείους is peculiar, though it can be explained as in the note. 


APPENDIX. 197 


Possibly, however, we should read Μαντινέων καὶ ξυμμάχων πλείους or some- 
thing of the sort. 

74. 3. ξυνελθοῦσα. This in connexion with μάχη is unusual, but cannot 
be omitted on account of the pred. modifiers (πλείστου χρόνου, efc.). The 
pass. signification of the expression ἡ μάχη ξύνεισι or ξυνίσταται (cf. Hat. i. 
74. 8) sufficiently explains ὑπό. It is therefore unnecessary to read (with 
Kr.) ἀπό, and wrong to read (with v. Herwerden) ξυνελθουσῶν. 

75. 14. προτέρᾳ This reading of the Mss. should not be changed (with 
Cobet) to προτεραίᾳ. See Herbst, gegen Cobet, p. 35. 

76. 2. [ἐπειδὴ τὰ Κάρνεια ἤγαγον]. These words are prob. a gloss derived 
from c. 75. 21. Their omission is recommended by Kr., St., Cobet, and vy. 
Herwerden. “Now that the Carnea were over,” even if ‘not intended as a 
mark of time’ (Jowett) can hardly be said in connexion with an expedition 
undertaken at the beginning of winter (on the time of the χειμών, see Introd. 
to Book I. p. 40), 7.e. six weeks (Cl.) or two months after the Carnea. See on 
ce. 54. 8. 

77. 1. Καττάδε δοκεῖ κτέ.: Kirchhoff, Sitzungsber. d. Berl. Akad. 1883, 
p. 850 ff., discusses this document, and decides that it is probably of Lacedae- 
monian origin, although on account of the change from the original alphabet 
to the Ionic, the orthography (σ᾽ for 6, etc.) does not decide the matter with 
certainty, for the peculiarly Laconian spelling of our Mss. may be due to the 
person who transcribed the document from the older to the later alphabet. 
It is therefore not impossible that the dialect of the document was originally 
Argive. 

77. 11. at μὲν λῆν, τοῖς "Εἰπιδαυρίοις ὅρκον δόμεν, al δέ, αὐτὼς ὀμόσαι. The 
Mss. read ἐμενλὴν (Vat. ἐμέλην), which is joined in the inferior Mss. with the 
preceding σύματος in various ways, as συμβατόσαιμεν Any, συμβατόσαι μὲν λῆν, 
σύματος aipev Any, etc. The Mss. have no al after δόμεν. The reading given 
in the text was proposed by Ahrens, who translates: de sacrificio Apol- 
linis Argivi, si placet, iusiurandum in Epidaurios transfe- 
rant,si minus,ipsiiurent. St. says he cannot see why the Argives 
should swear an oath about a sacrifice due from the Epidaurians, and asks, 
«How could it please the Argives to take the oath themselves instead of the 
Epidaurians? What could they swear that they would do in this matter any- 
way ? That they would force the Epidaurians to perform the sacrifice due ?’ 
Boehme says Ahrens thought the choice was given to the Epidaurians whether 
the oath should be sworn by them (that the sacrifice had been unjustly 
imposed upon them) or the Argives should swear (that they were bound to 
perform the sacrifice). St. objects to this on the ground that the Epidau- 
‘rians would not be likely to allow the Argives to impose the sacrifice upon 
them by an oath, and that the interests of Apollo are not sufficiently con- 
sulted if the Epidaurians are permitted to get rid of the sacrifice due from 
-them by means of an oath. He therefore reads: περὶ δὲ τῶ σιῶ σύματος 
μέλην τοῖς ᾿Επιδαυρίοις, ὅρκον δόμεν δὲ avtws (and brackets ὀμόσαι) trans- 


198 APPENDIX. 


lating dei sacrificium Epidauriis curae sit,iuramentum autem 
(de ea re, we, sacrificium sibi curae fore) praestent; ize. the 
Epidaurians are to attend to the sacrifice, but must bind themselves by an 
oath to do so. The objection to this is that it necessitates the omission of 
ὀμόσαι and the change of ἐμενλῆν to μέλην (Att. μέλειν). Kirchhoff, Sitzungs- 
ber. ἃ. Berl. Akad. 1883, p. 857, explains Ahrens’ reading (which he adopts) 
as follows: ‘ Finally, the question which had furnished the ostensible cause 
of the feud between Argos and Epidaurus (¢/f. c. 53. 2 ff.) remains to be 
settled in some way for the sake of propriety, even if Argos has relinquished 
the idea of settling it by force. It is, accordingly, to be determined, not 
by the judgment of an umpire chosen and acknowledged by both parties, but 
simply by an oath, which the Argives are permitted either to swear themselves 
or to impose upon the Epidaurians, a method of procedure which was not 
infrequently employed in analogous cases. Cf. c. 18. 16 f., ἐὰν δέ τι διάφορον. 
ἡ πρὸς ἀλλήλους, δικαίῳ χρήσθων Kal ὅρκοις, a clause in the treaty of the 
peace of Nicias.’ The Argives were to be allowed to make oath that the 
Epidaurians were bound to perform the sacrifice, and this oath was to be 
accepted as evidence, as was freq. done in private suits. If, however, the 
Argives preferred, they could propose to the Epidaurians to swear that they 
were not bound to perform the sacrifice. If the Epidaurians took this oath, 
they would then be free from the obligation of the sacrifice, their oath being 
* taken as sufficient proof of their case. If they refused to take the oath, they 
thereby confessed themselves in the wrong, and if they still persisted in their 
refusal to perform the sacrifice, they could be coerced by the united arms of 
Argos and Sparta. Thus a perfunctory settlement of the original dispute 
was reached. Cl. objects to all emendations as yet proposed because the 
words δόμεν δὲ αὐτὼς ὀμόσαι are not taken together. These words he trans- 
lates: “but they must take an oath to give (the sacrifice),” and he thinks 
that ἐμεν λῆν must contain an inf. with the signification “impose,” such as 
ἐπιθεῖναι or ἐπιτάξαι, so that the sense of the whole passage would be: “ con- 
cerning the sacrifice of Apollo, an oath must be imposed upon the Epidau- 
rians; but they must swear that they will perform it (1.6. the sacrifice).” In 
this case, however, the Epidaurians would be treated as if the question at issue 
had been already decided against them, which does not seem to agree with the 
spirit of the treaty and the relations of the states concerned, nor does any 
sufficient reason appear for wishing to connect the words δόμεν δὲ αὐτὼς 
ὀμόσαι. Although the reading proposed by Ahrens is not altogether certain, 
it gives a satisfactory sense, and it is certainly better to adopt it than to retain 
the incomprehensible reading of the Mss. 

77. 15. ἁμόθι. This is St.’s reading for ἀμοθεί, which Ahrens renders 
sine seditione et dissensione. 

77. 18. ἐσσοῦνται. Ahrens writes, here and in c. 79. 8, 10, ἐσσίονται, 
which is certainly more in accordance with the peculiarities of the Dor. 
dialect. 


APPENDIX. 199 


77. 19. καὶ τοὶ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ξυμμαχοί evti, τὰν αὐτῶν ἔχοντες. Kirchhoff, 
Sitzungsber. ἃ. Berl. Akad. 1883, p. 855, reads καὶ τοὶ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ξύμμαχοι 
ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ἐσσίονται ἐν τῴπερ Kal τοὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι, τὰν αὐτῶν ἔχοντες, which he 
takes from the corresponding passage in c. 79. 9 ἢ, This may well be correct, 
for one certainly feels the lack of any mention of the Argives in the text of 
the Mss. 

79. 17. τὼς δὲ ras. Cl. reads τοῖς δὲ ras (the Mss. give rots δὲ ἔταις) 
and translates: “but citizens of the town shall conduct the negotiations with 
them,” efc.; 1.6. the court to which the cities appeal shall consist of private 
citizens, not of officials or public judges. But he confesses that this use of 
δικάζεσθαι 15 unusual. The question of quarrels between states has been settled, 
and now a provision is made for private suits. These are to be conducted 
καττὰ πάτρια, i.c. the cities are to retain their ancient laws and customs. St. 
compares Cic. in Verr. Act. ii. 13. 32, Siculi hoe iure sunt, ut quod 
civis cum cive agat domi certet suis legibus, and ibid. 37. 90, ut 
cives inter se legibus suis agerent. This interpretation gives to 
δικάζεσθαι its regular signification. 

80. 15. ὀλίγοι ὄντες. The reading ὀλίγους ὄντας is possible, referring to 
τοὺς σφετέρους ; for the complete identification in ὀλίγοι ὄντες of the Athe- 
nians at home (of δέ) with the 1000 who were sent to Epidaurus is somewhat 
forced. The acc. would, however, cause confusion with τοὺς ξυμφύλακας. 

80. 19. φρούριον. Haack, Poppo, Kr., and Boehme write φρουρικόν with 
some inferior Mss., for which only one parallel, in Dio C. lvi. 42, is cited. 
Possibly φρουρίον in 18 should also be taken in the sense of φρουρά. In that 
case it should be const. with ἀγῶνα γυμνικόν. Philippi, Rhein. Mus. 36, p. 
257, proposes to omit τοῦ φρουρίου. 

80. 20. ἀνανεωσάμενοι. We have no knowledge of any previous treaty 
with the Epidaurians, nor is it probable that there was one. St. therefore 
strikes out "EmSavpiois, and makes ἀνανεωσάμενοι tas σπονδάς refer to a re- 
newal of the treaty with Argos. Cl. suggests that ἀνανεωσάμενοι τὰς σπονδάς 
may have come into the text through confusion with 12. Miiller-Striibing, 
Aristoph. u. d. hist. Krit. p. 446 ff., discusses this passage in connexion with 
6. 74 and 75, but does not succeed in explaining it. Possibly "Emdavpiots 
should stand after ἀπέδοσαν, and ἀνανέωσάμενοι κτέ. should be understood as 
referring to the treaty with Argos. But even then the passage is not clear, 
and seems to lack the final revision of the author. 

82, 8. of δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἕως μὲν αὐτοὺς μετεπέμποντο οἱ φίλοι, οὐκ 
ἦλθον ἐκ πλείονος. This passage has given much trouble. Kr. thinks it is 
not genuine. St. (and van Herwerden) marks a gap after πλείονος, and 
remarks that the gap is indicated by the want of connexion in sense between 
ἦλθον and ἐκ πλείονος, and also by the fact that ἀναβαλόμενοι δέ is not prop. 
opp. to the preceding ἕως μὲν... of φίλοι, to which the mention of some sub- 
sequent time ought to correspond. He offers as a possible reading: ἕως μὲν 
αὐτοὺς μετεπέμποντο of φίλοι, οὐκ ἦλθον, ἐκ πλείονος δ᾽ ἐπεὶ οὐ τυχόντες ἐπαύ- 


200 APPENDIX. 


σαντο (sc. μεταπεμπόμενοι), ἀναβαλόμενοι δὲ τὰς γυμνοπαιδίας ἐβοήθουν. The 
chief difficulty is evidently in ἐκ πλείονος, which does not seem appropriate. 
Cl. says that in all the six places where we find this expression in Thuc. (iy. 
42. 15; 103. 13; 129, 22; this passage; viii. 88. 6; 91. 1), the explanation is 
more or less uncertain. In iv. 129. 22, it is taken in a local sense, “ from a 
great distance,” “by a long roundabout way,” while elsewhere it is explained 
as a temporal expression: “a long time before,” “fora long time.” Every- 
where, however, there is a marked opposition between the clause containing 
ἐκ πλείονος and some other clause. Cl. suggests, therefore, that ἐκ πλείονος 
may mean “with great zeal,” and the passage under discussion would then 
mean: “the Lacedaemonians did not, to be sure, hurry to take the field with 
any particular eagerness as long as their friends were sending for them, still 
they did put off the Gymnopaediae,” ete. To this St. justly objects that as 
far as we know ἐκ πλείονος always refers to distance in time or space, as do 
the similar expressions ἐκ πολλοῦ, ἐκ πλείστου, ἐξ ὀλίγου, ἐξ ἐλάσσονος, ἐξ 
ἐλαχίστου. Rauchenstein, Philol. 36, p. 238, proposes to read ἐκ πλείονος δὲ 
ἀναβαλόμενοι τὰς γυμνοπαιδίας ἐβοήθουν, but this would mean that they came 
long before, not long after. Jowett says: “ἐκ πλείονος, sc. χρόνου, “did not 
come for a long time,” not with μετεπέμποντο, “ while their friends were send- 
ing for them for a long time,’ which the order of the words forbids.’ This 
use of ἐκ πλείονος (though Jowett’s explanation is the usual one) seems a little 
peculiar. If we could take ἐκ πλείονος with μετεπέμποντο, it would very prop. 
designate the moment from (ék) which the repeated sending on the part of 
the φίλοι was counted ; but if taken with οὐκ ἦλθον, it cannot denote any point 
from which, since the not-coming of the Lacedaemonians does not date from 
any particular point. Still, ἐκ πλείονος διεθρόει, in viii. 91. 1, is so much like 
this passage that the assumption of a defect in the text is hardly warranted. 
82. 14. ἐλθόντων πρέσβεων ἀπό τε τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει Kal ἀγγέλων τῶν ἔξω 
᾿Αργείων. So Miiller-Striibing, Pol. Beitr. p. 82. The reading of the Mss. 
(ἀγγέλων kal) is evidently corrupt. Most editt. strike out ἀγγέλων, and under- 
stand: “envoys came to them both from the Argives in the city and from 
those outside.” Miiller-Striibing justly observes that the Argives outside the 
city were exiles, not a body politic, and could, therefore, not send πρέσβεις, 
but only ἄγγελοι, not envoys, but only messengers (he ascribes a similar sugges- 
tion to Arnold’s first edit.; in his later editt. it is not to be found), Accord- 
ingly he proposes to read: ἐλθόντων πρέσβεών τε ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει Kal ἀγγέ- 
λων τῶν ἔξω ᾿Αργείων. This is perfectly clear and good sense. Unquestionably, 
too, the change from πρέσβεων ἀπό τε to πρέσβεών τε ἀπό is necessary to bring 
about an exact correspondence between πρέσβεων and ἀγγέλων. It is, how- 
ever, possible to have re after ἀπό, because it seems not unlikely that ἀγγέλων 
may have been the result of an afterthought, so that Thuc. may have left τε 
where it would have been had ἀγγέλων been omitted. Still, when once the 
position of καὶ ἀγγέλων had been improperly reversed, it would be natural for 
πρέσβεών τε ἀπό to be changed to πρέσβεων ἀπό τε. Cl., following other com- 


APPENDIX. 201 


mentators, suggests that perhaps we should read ἀπό τε (position as in iv. 70. 
4) τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει ᾿Αργείων καὶ τῶν ἔξω. 

82, 21. St. rejects as a gloss the words τε καὶ νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς 
ὠφελήσειν, because (as he explains, Quaest. Gramm. p. 10) the connexion of 
προσαγόμενός τε καὶ νομίζων is bad since the opinion indicated by νομίζων is 
the reason of the act denoted by προσαγόμενος. Cl. rightly says that this is 
no sufficient reason for rejecting these words. St. also objects to ἄν with the 
fut. inf. (which occurs acc. to the best Ms. authority five times in Thuc.) ; but 
even if this is to be avoided, it is better to write μέγιστα or μέγιστον δή 
(Meineke, Hermes 3, p. 371) for μέγιστον ἄν than to reject the whole passage. 

82. 24. tuvySecav. ξυνήνεσαν (Kr.) would not much change the sense. 
Meineke proposes ξυνήνυσαν with transposition of ξυνήνυσαν.... πόλεων to a 
place after ἐτείχιζον. But this is inadmissible because the walls were never 
finished, for the Lacedaemonians τὰ οἰκοδούμενα τείχη εἷλον, c. 83. 7. St. 
strikes out τὸν τειχισμόν on the ground that the political tendencies of the 
Argives, not merely the building of the walls, were viewed with sympathy by 
the Peloponnesian states. But these tendencies found their expression in the 
τειχισμός. Miiller-Striibing’s change of ξυνήδεσαν to ξυνετέλεσαν ἐς ( Thuk, 
Forsch. p. 63) is unnecessary and unwarranted. 

83. 14. κατέκλῃσαν... Μακεδόνας ᾿Αθηναῖοι, Περδίκκᾳ ἐπικαλοῦντες. 
Goeller’s emendation for Μακεδονίας and Περδίκκαν, The Schol. explains 
τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι τῶν εἰσαγωγίμων τῆς θαλάσσης αὐτοὺς ἀπέκλῃσαν, which shows 
that his reading was that given in the text. St. compares i. 117.6, (οἱ Σάμιοι) 
ἐλθόντος τοῦ Περικλέους κατεκλήσθησαν, while just before ἐσεκομίσαντο καὶ 
ἐξεκομίσαντο a ἐβούλοντο. The Athenians prevented the Macedonians from 
carrying on their coasting trade. Even if winter put an end to naval warfare, 
trade between neighbouring harbours was doubtless carried on whenever the 
weather permitted. Meineke doubts this, and proposes κατέλῃσαν, praeda- 
bantur, retaining Μακεδονίας. But an act. verb Aq{w does not occur even 
in composition. 

83. 19. στρατεία. Cl. and St. for στρατιά of the Mss. (on the freq. con- 
fusion of these words, see App. on i. 10.18). Here only an intended expedi- 
tion can be meant, which was given up when the defection of Perdiccas 
became known. Jowett keeps the reading of the Mss., but is obliged to as- 
sume that the expedition was actually sent. 

83. 20. ἀπάραντος. Thuc. uses ἀπαίρειν only of departing by sea, which 
would make no sense here. ἀναπεισϑέντος, which the Schol. gives as an 
explanation, is taken from ὁ. 80. 8, and is not adapted to the context here. 
Poppo suggested ἀποστάντος, which expresses the required meaning, and is 
not a violent change. St.’s ἀπαρνηθέντος hardly agrees with ἔψευστο; for 
Perdiccas is not likely to have given a plain refusal. ἀπατήσαντος and ἀπο- 
Spavros and οὐ παρόντος are suggested by Cl. as possible readings. 

84. 17. Τισίας ὁ Τισιμάχουι Both names are spelled in inscriptions 
(6. 1. A. I. 181, 299) Τεισίας, Tacipaxos, but, as Cl. says, the propriety of ~ 


j 


202 APPENDIX. 


changing the reading in Thuc. is doubtful. Not only would similar names 
(Tisamenes in iii. 92. 8, Tisander in iii. 100. 4) have to be changed, but con- 
sistency would require many other changes from the received orthography. 

86. 4. διαφέροντα αὐτοῦ φαίνεται. Dion. H. fle Thue, iud. ο. 37, finds fault 
with Thuc. for writing αὐτοῦ when he should have written αὐτῆς referring to 
ἐπιείκεια Or αὐτά referring to τὰ τοῦ πολέμου. The first would be much less 
expressive, as αὐτοῦ refers very appropriately to τὸ διδάσκειν ἀλλήλους καθ᾽ 
ἡσυχίαν, and αὐτά would make no sense, as a gen. after διαφέροντα is indis- 
pensable. Buecheler, Jahrbb. 1874, p. 691, concludes that Dion. H. must 
have read φαίνετε, drawing this conclusion from the words of Dion. τῷ πλη- 
θυντικῴ Kal οὐδετέρῳ (kal) κατὰ τὴν αἰτιατικὴν ἐσχηματισμένῳ πτῶσιν which 
refer to τὰ τοῦ πολέμου; for if τὰ τοῦ πολέμου be neut. acc., φαίνεται is incom- 
prehensible. Buecheler adds: nec quicquam ego morae habeo quo 
minus haec scriptura ipsi reddatur Thucydidi. (St. has taken 
φαίνετε into his text.) Cl. objects to this, urging that Thuc. nowhere uses 
φαίνειν (though he uses φαίνεσθαι more than ninety times) ; and further that 
the parallelism of the period (ἡ μὲν ἐπιείκεια... οὐ ψέγεται, τὰ δὲ τοῦ πολέ- 
μου διαφέροντα αὐτοῦ φαίνεται), one of the most effective rhetorical devices of 
Thuc., is destroyed by the adoption of φαίνετε. 

90. 1. ἢ μὲν δή. This reading has the best Mss. authority. ἡμεῖς μὲν δή 
and ἡμεῖς δή are adopted by Bekker, Kr., and St. on the authority of some Mss. 

90. 5. πείσαντα. Cl. reports and rejects an explanation communicated ~ 
orally by Bekker, that ‘the fut. πείσοντα seems to refer to a presentiment of 
the speaker.’ Jowett renders “although he may be destined to fail in making 
out a strict case, he should be profited.” But it would be difficult to find 
examples for such a use of the fut., and the change to πείσαντα is very easy, 
and even supported by two Mss. 

94, 1. ὥστε δέ. δέ is wanting in the majority of Mss., but it is more 
likely to have been dropped than inserted after ὥστε, and is freq. used in this 
dialogue to introduce a reply with some emphasis. Cf. c. 91.1; 96.1; 98.1 
(this is very like the case in question ); 103. 1; 106.1; 109. 1, 

94. 3. δέξαισθε.ς This is the reading of two Mss. and Procop. p. 221 
adopted by most editt. Herbst, Hamburg Progr. 1867, p. 26 f., and Cl. retain 
the reading of the most and best Mss., δέξοισθε, but the fut. opt. not in indir, 
disc. and with ἄν is unparalleled. See GMT. 26 and Rem.; Stahl, Quaest. 
Gram. p. 10. 

98. 3. ἐκβιάσαντεςς. This (and ἐκβιάζοιεν in vi. 64. 6) is the reading of Vat. 
and others of the best Mss. for ἐκβιβάσαντες (and ἐκβιβάζοιεν). This is surely 
not accidental; and though the act. form ἐκβιάζω is found only in late writers 
(e.g. Plut. Sympos. iv. 662 a), still it is reasonable that an act. ἐκβιάζω, in 
which external force is opp. to the δίκαιον, should exist by the side of the mid, 
βιάζεσθαι, καταβιάζεσθαι, etc., in which the force (Bla) proceeding from the 
subj. is most important. ἐκβιβαζειν in a figurative sense is also without par- 
allel. (St. rejects ἐκβιάζειν in both passages.) 


APPENDIX. 203 


98. 9. μελλήσαντας, Reiske’s emendation for μελλήσοντας of the Mss. is 
adopted also by Cl., St., and others, The Schol. explains, τοὺς μηδὲ διανοη- 
θέντας ὑμῖν τὴν ἀρχὴν πολεμεῖν. The sense is of μηδὲ ἐμέλλησαν (πολέμιοι) 
γενέσθαι, not of μελλήσουσιν κτέ. 

99. 2. ὅσοι ἠπειρῶταί που ὄντες κτέ. Cl. explains as follows: ‘the inten- 
tion of the Athenians is to prove that they are not so much in danger from 
the inhabitants of the Greek mainland as from the islanders. The reason 
lies in the ἐλεύθερον in the case of those on the mainland, in the ἀναγκαῖον τῆς 
ἀρχῆς in the case of the islanders. The ἐλεύθερον as a consequence of the 
ἠπειρῶται ὄντες is used here in the sense of freedom of motion (not without 
reference to the fundamental ἐλεύθω equiv. to εἶμι), in consequence of which 
the ἠπειρῶται could turn whithersoever they would for their defence, and 
could also call in others to their assistance. But for this very reason they 
were less likely to make warlike preparations against the more powerful state, 
whereas the islanders, even if they were as yet free from the ἀρχή, were 
nevertheless in constant anxiety on account of the inevitableness of it (τῆς 
ἀρχῆς τῷ ἀναγκαίῳ), and were therefore driven to acts of hostility.’ Cl. is, 
however, unable to reconcile the re after νησιώτας and the τούς before δἤη 
(both in 4) with this explanation, and therefore strikes out these two words. 
St. changes τῷ ἐλευθέρῳ, in 2, to τῶν ἐλευθέρων, and cites the explanation of 
the Schol. τοὺς ἐλευθέρους τῶν ἠπειρωτῶν. He compares vii. 44. 44, ὅσοι ἦσαν 
τῶν προτέρων στρατιωτῶν. Rauchenstein, Philol. 36, p. 239, thinks that ro 
ἐλευθέρῳ means that the inhabitants of the mainland believed that there was 
less danger to their liberty (than to that of others) from the naval power of 
the Athenians. It is hard to see how this can all be contained in τῷ ἐλευθέρῳ. 

102. 1. πολέμων. This is the only correct reading, though nearly all Mss. 
give πολεμίων. τὰ τῶν πολέμων occurs also in ii. 11, 16. 

103. 3. τοῖς δ᾽ és ἅπαν τὸ ὑπάρχον ἀναρριπτοῦσι. The explanation given 
in the note is that of St. Cl. says: ‘If Thuc. wrote this as it stands, the 
opposition to the ἀπὸ περιουσίας χρωμένοις is not exact; it should be τοῖς ὀλίγα 
κεκτημένοις. It is still more remarkable that the reason for the rash conduct 
of men is sought in the nature of hope, which is represented as inclined to 
extravagance. Both causes of offence are removed if we read ἀναρριπτοῦσα: 
then we understand by τοῖς δέ all except those who ἀπὸ περιουσίας τῇ ἐλπίδι 
χρῶνται (“ but in the case of the others”’), and it is said of Hope (personified) 
that in the case of these people she stakes all that they have upon a cast of 
the die, i.e. that she leads them on to ruinous rashness. ἐς ἅπαν TO ὑπάρχον 
is to be taken together: for the unexpressed κίνδυνον, which must be supplied 
with avappurretv, makes their “whole property ” appear as the stake for which 
the die is thrown.’ Cl. adds that he does not see how δάπανος δὲ φύσει can 
be said of ἐλπίς unless her activity has already been expressed in ἀναρριπ- 
τοῦσα. He explains that he means the dat. τοῖς δέ to be const. with γιγνώ- 
σκεται, in the same way in which τοῖς δὲ ἀναρριπτοῦσι is const. in the note. 
But there is no reason why τοῖς δέ should mean all others, and ἀναρριπτοῦσι 
is at least as easy to understand as Cl.’s ἀναρριπτοῦσα. 


204 APPENDIX. 


105. 11. ταὐτό. This reading for αὐτό of the Mss. was rightly adopted 
by St. from the explanation of the Schol. εἰδότες ὅτι Kal ὑμεῖς καὶ ἄλλος 
ὁστισοῦν ἐν TH ὁμοίᾳ δυνάμει γενόμενος ἡμῖν τὸ αὐτὸ ἂν ἔπραττεν. 

105. 13. ἥν. So Kr., Poppo, and St., with the best Mss. authority. Reiske 
proposes ἢ» which would be like ᾧ πιστεύσαντες of 6. 111. 5. Cl. approves of 
this, but suggests also καθ᾽ ἥν 

106. 2. τῷ ξυμφέροντι αὐτῶν. St. strikes out these words as a gloss on 
Kat αὐτὸ τοῦτο, being led to this by the unusual use of αὐτῶν. Certainly 
very little is lost by the omission, but ξυμφέρον of c. 107. 1 makes it prob. 
that ξυμφέροντι should be retained here. 

107. 3. δρᾶσθαι. Nearly all Mss. give δρᾶσαι, but δρῶσθαι is necessary, as 
the act. is incomprehensible. 

110. 7. τῆς οἰκειοτέρας ξυμμαχίδος τε kal γῆς. All Mss. contain the words 
tuppax (Sos τε kal γῆς, and the Schol. explains περὶ τῆς τῶν ξυμμάχων καὶ τῆς 
ὑμετέρας, so that St. is not justified in rejecting these words. ξυμμαχίς is here 
rather the country of the allies than equiv. to τὸ ξυμμαχικόν as in c. 36. 4. 

111. 1. τούτων μὲν καὶ πεπειραμένοις. The next words in the Mss. are 
ἄν τι γένοιτο καὶ ὑμῖν Kal οὐκ xré. To obtain the prop. sense, St. strikes out 
καί after ὑμῖν, and Cl. (who is followed in the text) also adds ἡμῖν after 
γένοιτο. This brings πεπειραμένοις ἡμῖν into the necessary opposition to ὑμῖν 
οὐκ ἀνεπιστήμοσιν. The Schol. evidently had the common reading, for he 
explains: τούτων μὲν καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπείρασϑε kal οὐκ ἀνεπιστήμονές ἐστε. But 
this cannot be right, since the Melians had not experienced these things. 

111. 6. νομίσειαν. This is the form of the third pers. pl. aor. opt. always 
used by Thuc. It must therefore be adopted here, though the Mss. read 
νομίσαιεν. Seg on iii. 49. 10; St. Quaest. Gram. p. 18. (So the third pers. sing. 
should, as St. observes, be written” -σειε, NOt -σαι, in ii. 49. 11; 84. 8.) 

111. 17. τύχης. St., following the Schol., reads τύχῃ, but there is no real 
objection to the reading of the text. 

111, 26. ἣν μιᾶς πέρι... ἔσται. St. proposes js μιᾶς πέρι with the com- 
ment: ‘intellege ἧς μιᾶς πέρι καὶ és μίαν βουλὴν... βουλεύσασθαι ora 
és de effectu dictum ut vii. 87. 6; viii. 1. 25; 86. 80; cf Hom. Jl. B 
879, ἔς ye μίαν βουλεύσομεν. Other emendations are proposed by Rauchen- 
stein, Philol. 36, p. 241; Schiitz, Ztschr. f. ἃ. Gymn.-Wesen, 31, p. 268; Ber- 
nadakis, Jahrbb. 23, p. 154. Prob. some words, in which the opposition 
between σῴζεσθαι and διαφθείρεσθαι was expressed, have been lost either 
before or after ἔσται. Until this loss is correctly restored, any conjectures 
concerning the form of the rel. pron. ἥν are uncertain. 

115. 8. διαφορῶν. This form (from ἡ διαφορά) is, as the reading of the 
Mss., preferable to διαφόρων (from τά διάφορα). The meaning may be quar- 
rels (διαφοραί) quite as well as grounds of disagreement (διάφορα). Cl., how- 
ever, prefers διαφόρων. 

115. 13. χρήσιμα. Cl. prefers χρήματα (see on vi. 49. 3), which may 
certainly mean supplies of any kind, not money only. The Mss. read χρήμασι, 


APPENDIX. Z 205 
which is certainly corrupt, and the change from this to χρήσιμα, useful things, 
necessaries, is very slight. Valla renders quae ex usu forent. 

116. 3. ἱερὰ ἐν τοῖς ὁρίοις. These words are not elsewhere (cf. c. 54. 6; 
55. 14) added to διαβατήρια. Cobet therefore (V. L. p. 454, and Nov. L. 
p. 477) strikes them out. They certainly do look very like a gloss on διαβα- 
τήρια; still it is possible that they belong in the text. 

116. 5. ὑποπτεύσαντες. So Meineke for ὑποτοπεύσαντες. 
(see on i. 20.9) means only surmise, and is always (except in i. 56.4) followed 
by the inf. 


SUMMARY OF THE DiaLocue. Chaps. 85-113. 


85 The Athenians suggest that the various points at issue be discussed 
86 and settled one ata time. The Melians see the advantage of this course, 
but express their apprehension that the warlike movements of the Athe- 
nians may interfere with the freedom of discussion, and prevent argu- 

87 ments from having their proper weight. The Athenians call upon them 
to give up all other thoughts and consider only the welfare of their city, 

88 whereupon the Melians agree to conduct the deliberations in the way 
proposed. 

89 The Athenians then bring to the front the practical point of view: that 
there is no use in talking of rights acquired or wrongs suffered, but only 
of what is attainable in view of the available resources, because in human 
affairs right has power only in proportion to the resources at its disposal; 
and in accordance with that which is attainable the powerful must act 
and the weak submit. 

90 To this the Melians reply that, even if they may no longer advance 
arguments based upon right, still a regard for reasonable claims which 
do not rest solely upon brute force is not only for the benefit of the weak, 
but may also, in case of a change of fortune, prove to be advantageous 

91 to the powerful. The Athenians refuse to consider this point; for they 
say there could be no danger to them unless it came from an uprising of 
their subjects, and against that they could protect themselves. They 
then undertake to show that the voluntary surrender of the Melians will 

92 be advantageous to both parties alike. When the Melians question this 

93 statement, the Athenians reply that the Melians would by surrendering 
escape a much harder but inevitable fate, while the Athenians would be 
the gainers by obtaining possession of the city with all its resources un- 

94 impaired. “Is it not enough for you,” the Melians ask, “if we maintain 

95 friendly relations toward you, but preserve our neutrality ?” — “No; for 
your friendship would be regarded by our subjects as a proof of our 
weakness (because they would think we were unable to reduce you to 
subjection), while the hatred you would feel toward us after your subju- 
gation would be regarded as a proof of our power (inasmuch as it would 

96 result from that power).” —“ Will your subjects not regard our relations 

« 


206 


97 


98 


99 


100 
101 


102 


108 


104 


105 


106 


107 
108 


Σ APPENDIX, 

to you, if you leave us our freedom, in a different light from those of 
states which are chiefly your own colonies, and in some cases have re- 
volted and been subdued by you? For we have never had anything to 
do with you.” — “No; for on the score of right and justice both would 
have a good deal to say for themselyes, but they will think that states 
like yours have maintained their freedom by their own power, and that 
we are afraid to reduce them by force of arms. Therefore your subjec- 
tion would not only add to our power, but would increase the safety of 
our position. Least of all must you, who are islanders, and insignifi- 
cant ones besides, be allowed to retain your independence.” — “ But don’t 
you think the neutrality we propose is good for your safety? (For, since 
you have forced us to discuss only the question of expediency, we must 
try to show you that our interest is yours also.) For will not violence 
toward us make all who are now neutrals your enemies? Will they 
not fear a fate like ours? And are you not therefore strengthening the 
enemies whom you already have, and exciting against you others who 
never before thought of being your enemies ?”” — “ We are not afraid of 
that: for the people of the mainland in their freedom have nothing to 
fear from us, and therefore put off all such preparations as might make 
them dangerous to us. The islanders, both our subjects and those who 
are as yet unsubdued, are our danger; for these are the ones whose reck- 
lessness is most likely to bring ruin upon themselves and us.” 

The Melians say that it would be base and cowardly for them to yield, 
to which the Athenians reply that the question is not one of baseness or 
honour, but merely whether they shall risk their existence in a conflict 
with a much more powerful enemy. When the Melians declare that, 
since the’ fortunes of war are variable, there is still some hope for them 
if they fight, the Athenians warn them that Hope is a great deceiver, and 
is only detected when men, yielding to her blandishments, have staked 
their all and been ruined. They add that only the foolish forsake the 
natural means for saving themselves, and have recourse to supernatural 
aid, from which only harm results. Still the Melians, with the confidence 
of righteousness, refuse to give up their trust in the divine assistance, 
and they also expect powerful aid from the Lacedaemonians, who cannot 
with honour desert their kinsmen. The Athenians reply that trust in the 
gods should not pass beyond the bounds of the external laws accord- 
ing to which the deity acts, and that it is better in human affairs to 
rely upon human resources. From the Lacedaemonians, moreover, the 
Melians must not expect much help, since they are notorious for act- 
ing always in accordance with their own convenience and interest, But 
their own interest would, the Melians suggest, induce the Lacedaemonians 
to help them, since they would otherwise suffer a loss of reputation with 
friends and foes.— The Lacedaemonians, however, would not risk any- 
thing for the sake of a reputation for magnanimity. — But they might 

e 


APPENDIX. 207 


need the aid of the Melians, whose geographical position and faithfulness 

109 to their kinsmen make them of value.— “In war,” the Athenians reply, 
“men regard not the good will, but the material power of their allies, 
and nobody does this more than the Lacedaemonians, who are not likely 
to run the risk of trying to protect an island against an overwhelming 

110 naval force.” — “On the other hand,” the Melians say, “a naval war in the 
open Cretan sea offers other advantages, and the Lacedaemonians may 
attack you in Attica and in Thrace, so that you will need your strength 

111 for your own preservation.” — The Athenians reply that they have neyer 
yet retired from a siege through fear of a foe elsewhere. But all this 
discussion has not really touched upon the point to be considered, the 
best interest of Melos (cf. c. 87), whose existence is at stake. Therefore 
the Athenians call upon the Melians to consider the matter once more 
with a proper understanding of the true state of the case, without allow- 
ing uncertain hope or an unreasonable feeling of honour to mislead them, 
and to come to a wise decision. But the only wise decision would be to 
yield to the overwhelming power of Athens and become tributary. For 
there is no disgrace in yielding to those who are more mighty than our- 
selves, however disgraceful it may be to submit to our equals. 

.112 = After consulting among themselves, the Melians still persevere in their 
decision, resolving not to give up the independence they had enjoyed for 
seven hundred years, but to put their trust in the gods and the Lacedae- 
monians and defend themselves to the last. 

113 The Athenians then leave the conference, exclaiming: “If that is your 
decision, you are the only men we have ever met who consider the future 
more certain than the present, and regard that which is. wrapped in 
obscurity as already existing; and so by casting yourselves upon the 
Lacedaemonians and fortune and hope, and trusting them entirely, you 
will bring down utter ruin upon yourselves,” 


208 


GREEK INDEX. 


[The references to the Greek text are by chapters and thirds of chapters; to the notes, by 
chapter and line of text annotated: e.g., 18a refers to the Greek text at the first third of 
c. 18; and 87, 2 refers to the note on line 8 of c. 67.] 


ἀγώνισις, 50. 18. 
αἴσθεσθαι, 26. 28 App. 
αἰσθόμενος, ὑπό, 2. 8. 
with inf. 4. 24 App. 
ἀλλά, 102. 1. 
ἄλλο τι ἤ, 87, 2. 
ἅλωσις, 15. 6. 
ἅμιπποι, 57. 12. 
ἁμσθι, 77. 15. 
ἄν, repeated, 9. 16; 
105. 9. 
with fut. inf. 82. 21. 
ἀναγκαίαν οὖσαν, 8. 10. 
ἀναδάσασθαι, 4. 5. 
ἀναφέρειν, 28. 2. 
ἀνοκωχή, 25. 13 App.; 
32. 30. 
ἀπό, proleptic, 65. 15. 
with ἐπιστέλλεσθαι, 
37. 2. 
ἀπάγειν, 53.3; 63. 16. 
ἀπέχειν, 3. 14. 
ἀπογίγνεσθαι, 74. 12. 
ἀποκρύπτειν, 65. 22. 
τὰ ἄριστα, πράσσειν, 9. 
86. 
ἀρκείτω δεδηλωμένον, 
9. 3. 
αἱ ἀρχαί, 28. 2. 
ἀρχήν, 27. 14. 
αὐτός, τρίτος, 4. 1. 
ταὐτὰ γιγνώσκειν, 36.10. 
τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, 31. 27; 
ποιεῖν, 38. 6. 





αὐτοβοεί, 3. 9. 
αὐτόδεκα, 20 2. 
αὐτοδίκους, 18 a. 
αὐτοπόλιες, 79. 5. 
αὐτοτελεῖς, 18 a. 


βίᾳ αἱρεῖν, 7. 14, 


γνώμην ἔχειν πρός, 136; 
14a; 44.7. 

γράμμα, 29. 17. 

γυμνά, το. 17. 


δέ, epexegetical, 10. 21; 

30. 11. 
with ἔπειτα, 7. 1. 

δεινὰ ποιεῖν, 42. 15, 

δεκαετῆ, 25. 3. 

δεχήμερος, 26. 14; 32. 
17. 

δημόσιον, 18. 35. 

δι’ ὀργῆς ἔχειν, 29. 18; 
46. 82. 

δι᾿ ὀλίγου, 66. 4. 

διὰ παντός, 69.8; 105. 5. 

διαβατήρια, 54. 6. 

διαμάχεσθαι, 41. 14. 

διελθεῖν, 20a; 55. 20. 

δικαίωμα, 97. 1. 

δικαίωσις, 17. 11. 


ἐγχειρίσασθαι, 108. 2. 
αἱ δέ, for εἰ δὲ μή, 77. 11. 
εἴ πως, 4. 17. 





εἰκός, with aor, inf, 
109. 6, 

εἶναι, with advs. 23. 8. 

ἐκ, with ἀπολιπεῖν, 4. 
11. 

proleptic with ἐκλι- 

πεῖν, 80. 14. 

ἐκ πλείονος, 82. 9. 

ἐξ ὀλίγου, 64.17; 65. 20. 

ἐκ Tov φανεροῦ, 76. 16. 

ἐκεχειρία, 1.2;2a;49b. 

δεχήμερος, 26. 14 App. 

ἐκπίπτειν, 5. 4. 

ἐν, with κατοικίζειν, 35. 
33. 

ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχειν, 60. 10; 
όο ο; 63. 2; 65. 
24. 

ἐν βλάβῃ, 52. 16. 

ἐν καλῴ, 46.6; το. 17; 
60 b. 

ἔνδημοι ἀρχαί, 47. 52, 

ἐνέκειντο, 43. 3. 

ἐξελεῖν, 43. 16. 

ἐξορκοῦν, 47. 52. 

ἐπὶ πολύ, 16, 23. 

ἐπιλιπεῖν, 103. 9. 

ἐπιπαριέναι, το. 37. 

ἐπισπένδεσθαι, 22. 9, 

ἐπισπονδαί, 32. 17, 

ἐπιτειχισμός, 17.9 App. 

ἐπιτρέπειν, 31. 14. 

ἐπιφέρειν αἰτίαν és, 
75. 9. 


és, with ἔχειν, 2. 5. 
with πείθειν, 76. 5. 
with σπεύδειν, 37. 22. 
with χωρεῖν, 40. 6. 

ἐς ὀλίγους, 81. 6. 

ἔτας, 79. 17. 

εὐθύς, 13.2; 76.1. 


θῦμα, 53.2; 77. 11. 


ἱερὰ τέλεια, 47. 47. 
ἱερομηνία, 54. 9 App. 


καθαρόν, 8. 7. 
καί, emphatic, 21. 16. 
proleptic, 45. 9. 
for ἤ, 74. 1. 
κακὸν κακῴ ἰᾶσθαι, 
65. 7. 
Kat ὀλίγον, 9. 5. 
καταλαμβάνειν, 59. 7. 
καθίστασθαι ἐς θροῦν, 
29. 11. 
καταλύειν, 23. 8. 
κατατίθεσθαι, 84. 4. 
κλέμματα, 9. 15. 


λύειν, for καταλύειν, 31. 
9 App. 


μέντοι, 88. 3. 
μέχρι Πυθίων, 1.1 App. 
μήν irregular, 60. 28. 
in hypothetical ex- 
pression, 64. 17. 


ξυγγνώμη, with inf. 88.1. 

᾿ξυγγραφή, 35. 12. 

ξυγχεῖν, 39. 15. 

Evyx py; impers. 40. 21. 

ξυμβαίνειν, with ady. 
92. 1. 


ξύμβασιν, τὴν διὰ μέσου, 
26. 7. 





GREEK INDEX. 


ξύν ὅπλοις, 50. 9. 
ξυνελών, 105. 18. 


ὁρᾶν, 27. 9. 
ὅσιος, 104. 4. 
ὅτι, explanatory, 9. 2. 
introducing a dir. 
quot. το. 20. 
with μεταμέλεσθαι, 14. 
10. 
ὅτου, for ὁτουοῦν, 18. 57. 
οὐ μέντοι ἀλλά, 43. 7 
App. 
οὐχ ἧσσον, 15. 3. 
οὐκ οὖν, 30.19; 107. 1. 
οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων, 48. 3. 
οὔπως, 15. 7 App. 
ὀφλεῖν, τοι. 3. 


παράγγελσις, 66. 14. 
παρακαλεῖν, 17. 17; 
55:0. 
παρακινδύνευσιν ποιεῖ- 
oat, 100. 8. 
παραμύθιον, 103. 1. 
παρασχόν, impers. abs., 
14. 11; 60. 25. 
ἐν τῷ παρατυχόντι, 38. 
3. 
ἀπὸ περιουσίας, 103. 2. 
περιορώμενοι, 31. 27. 
περιτείχισμα, 2. 12. 
ποιεῖν, like πάσχειν, 70. 
irik ee 
πόλεμος φανερός, 25. 15; 
84. 14. 
πολεμοῦσθαι, 98. 6. 
πράγμα, 4. 22. 
πράσσειν, 15.5; 32.12. 
προεπανασείειν, 17. 8. 
προτίθεσθαι, 35. 11. 
προσκαθέζεσθαι, with 
acc., 61. 15. 
προσκεῖσθαι, 9. 28. 





209 


προσστέλλειν, 71. 5 
App. 

προστάττειν, 8. 14, 

προτέρᾳ, for προτεραίᾳ, 
75. 14, 

πρῶτος πόλεμος, 20. 13; 
24 α. 


ῥαβδοῦχοι, 50. 15. 
ἐπὶ ῥοπῆς pias, 103. 6. 
ῥύεσθαι, 63. 11. 


ἐτετάχατο, 6. 23. 
τέ, introductory, 28. 7. 
between the art. and 
its noun, 30. 5. 
of alternative action, 
39. 3. 
τοίνυν, 87. 1; 89. 1; 
105. 1. 
τότε, 6. 1. 
τότε δέ, 16.6 App. 
τοῦ μή, with inf. ex- 
pressing purpose, 
72. 26. 
τρέπεσθαι κατά, 9. 10. 
τρὶς ἐννέα, 26. 21. 
τύχη, 104. 2. 


ὑπὸ σπουδῆς, 66. 9. 


φιλεῖ, solet, 70. 6. 
φρονεῖν, with ra and 
the gen. 84. 3. 

φρούριον, 80. 19. 


ἐν χερσί, 3. 12. 
ἐς χεῖρας, 72. 28. 
χρηματίζειν, 5. 2. 


ὥσπερ καί, 14 Cc; 29.9; 
44 Ὁ; 91.3." 
ὥστε, in emphatic tran- 
sition, 14. 3. 
on condition that, 27. 
13; 61. 21. 


210 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Acanthus, provision re- 
specting, in the treaty 
between Lacedaemon 
and Athens, 18 b. 

Acanthus, a Lacedae- 
monian, 19b; 24 ἃ. 

Accusative (abs.), 30. 9; 
53. 3; 56. 5; 60. 25; 
63 a; 65. 10; (adv.), 
91. 2; (cognate), 105. 
13; (instead of dat.), 
79. 3; 111. 16; (with 
τρέπομαι), 58. 15. 

Achaea, 82 a. 

Acropolis of Athens, 
18,03.,23.05 47/0. 

Adramyttium, I c. 

Aegina, 53 ¢; 74 ¢. 

Aenianians, 51 a. 

Aeson, 40 c. 

Agesippidas, 56 a. 

Agis, 24 ἃ; 54; 58; 59; 
60 ; 63; 65a,c; 66a; 
70-74; 83a. 

Agreement with pred. 
subst. 3. 14; 49. 9. 

Agrigentum, 4 c. 

Alcaeus, 19 a; 25 a. 

Alcibiades, 43-46; 526; 
53; 55; 56b; 61 b; 
76b; 84 ἃ. 

Alcinidas, 19 Ὁ. 

Alciphron, 59 c; 60 a. 

Altar of Olympian Zeus, 
50 a. 

Ampelidas, 22 b. 

Amphipolis, 10 a, b; 





Amphipolis, 
Il ἃ: 12 Ὁ 18a; 21; 
35; 46; 83 c; battle 
of, 6-11. 
Amyclar, 18 ὁ. 
Anacoluthon, 41. 10. 
Anactorium, 30 b. 
Andromenes, 42 a. 
Androsthenes, 49 a. 
Anthene, 41 a. 
Antimenidas, 42 a. 
Antippus, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 
Aorist, gnomic, 103: 2; 
inceptive, 17. 12; 28. 
73 98s 103 "om ay 12% 
inf. without dy, 9. 27; 
22. 4; partic. with 


αἰσθάνεσθαι, το. 38; 
partic. referring to 


idea suggested by 
main verb, 79. 11. 

Apollo, 18 a, c; 23 a; 
53 8. 

Apposition (partitive), 
3. 23; 57.3; 67. 10. 

Arcadia, 29 a. 

Arcadians, 57 Ὁ; 58 c; 
60b; 64; 67 Ὁ; 73 ἃ. 

Arcesilaus, 50 b; 76 b. 

Archers (mounted) ,84 Ὁ. 

Argilus, 18 b. 

Argives, 14; 22b; 27; 
28; 29; 31; 36-38; 
40; 41; 43; 44; 46; 
47; 50 b; 52 b; 53- 
56; 58-62 ; 64-67 ; 70- 
74; 76-84; 115 a; 1168. 





Argos, 27 4; 30 a; 31a; 
36 6; 37 6; 38 ©; 
41 b, C; 430; 47 8,6; 
57b; 58b; 63a; 65a, 
c; 768,6; 80b; 81¢; 
82 b; 83 8; 84a. 

Aristides, 18 b. 

Aristocles, 16 b. 

Aristocrates, 19 c; 24 Ὁ. 

Artemisium, 19 a. 

Article, not repeated, 5. 
1; 10.31; omitted, ro. 
55. 

Artynae, 47 ¢. 

Assimilation, 37. 13. 

Atalante, 18, 34. 

Athena, 10 a; 23 6. 

Athenians, passim. 

Athens, passim. 

Athos, 3c; 35a; 82a. 

Autocharidas, 12 b. 


Boeotarchs, 37 c; 38 Ὁ. 

Boeotia, councils of, 
38. 8. 

Boeotians, 3 c; 17 ¢; 
26 ὃ; 31 c; 32 Ὁ; 69 
35-393 52 ἃ; 57-60; 
64 b. 

Brasidas, 6-11; 16 a. 

Brasideans, 34 a; 67 a; 
τα; 72b. 

Brycinniae, 4 Ὁ. 


Carnea, 75 a; 76a. 
Carneus, 54. 8, 9. 
Caryae, 55 b. 


Cephallenia, 35 c; 56b. 
Cerdylium, 6-10. 
' Chaleidians, 80 Ὁ; 82 a. 
Chalcidice, 2-11; 150,6; 
21 b; 316; 80b; 82a. 
Charadrus, 60 c. 
Chians, 84 a. 
Chiastic order, 16. 3; 
ΕΥ}.,. 13; 112. 17. 
Chionis, 19 b; 24 a. 
Clearidas, 6-11; 21 b; 
34 a. 
Clinias, 43. 4. 
Cleobulus, 36-38. 
Cleomedes, 84 c. 
Cleon, 2a; 306; 6-11. 
Cleonae, 67 ¢ ;72¢;74b. 
Cnidis, 51 c. 
Comparatives with two 
terminations, 110. 2. 
Construction changed, 
61. 10; 65. 25. 
Corinth, 30 a,c; 50 α; 
53 b; 64b. 
Corinthians, 17 ¢ ; 25 a; 
27 ; 30-32 ; 355 365 38; 
48; 506; 520; 558; 
576; 586; 59a; 60b; 
64 b; 75 ἃ; 83 a; 
II5 Ὁ. 
Coryphasium, 18. 33. 
Council, of eighty at 
Argos, 476; four of 
Boeotia, 38. 8. 
Cranii, 35 ¢; 56 Ὁ. 
Cretan Sea, 110 a. 
Cynuria, 14 ¢; 41 a. 
Cythera, 14 Ὁ; 18. 33. 


Damagetus, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 
Dative, of advantage, 76. 
15; of cause, 26, 22; 
of interest, 3.21; 46. 
22; 57.2; ethical, 44. 





INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Dative, 
6; object for which 
coinciding with the 
limit of motion, to. 
11; 13. 4; of person 
with respect to whom, 
10. 28; by continued 
force of a prep. 42.2; 
with plpf. pass. 29. 3; 
with φθάσαι, 72. 5; 
with φιλία, 5. 3. 
Delium, 14 a; 18 ο. 
Delos, 1; 32 ἃ. 
Delphi, 16 b; 18 8, 6. 
Demeas, 116 ο. 
Demiurgi, 47 c. 
Demosthenes, 19c¢;24b; 
80 c. 
Dians, 35. 2; 82. 1. 
Diathus, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 
Dionysia, 20. 2; 23. 20. 
Dium, see Dians. 
Dolopes, 51 a. 
Dorians, 9 a; 54 Ὁ. 
Doric dialect, 77; 79. 
Drachma, Aeginetan, 
47. 40. 


Earthquake, 45 c; 50 6. 

Edonians, 6 b. 

Eighty, council of, at 
Argos, 47 ¢. 

Eion, 6-12. 

Elaphebolion, 19 a. 

Eleans, Elis, 17¢; 31 a,b; 
439; 44b; 46 c; 47; 
49; 50; 58a; 62; 75¢; 
78. 

Ellipsis, 1. 8; 4. 8; 15. 
7; 76. 11; 84. 15; 
115. 7. 

Empedias, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 

Emphasis, 89. 9; 98. 1. 

Endius, 44 ¢. 





211 


Enomoty, 68. 9. 
Ephors, 19 a ; 36.4; 374. 
Epicydidas, 12 a. 
Epidaurians, Epidaurus, 
53-56; 75 b,c; 77a,b; 
80 Ὁ, 6. 
Erasistratus, 4 a. 
Euphamidas, 55 a. 
Eustrophus, 40 ec. 
Euthydemus, 196 ; 24b. 
Expediency and justice, 
90; 98; 107. 


Factions in Messene, 
5. 5. 

Festivals, 23 ὁ; 41 ¢; 
47¢;54b;75b; 76a; 
82 a. 

Fines, 49; 63. 

Flute players, 70. 3. 

Funeral, 11 a. 

Future, inf. with ἄν, 
82. 21. 


Galepsus, 6 a. 

Games, I a; 47 C; 49; 
50. 

Genitive (abs.), 56. 18; 
71.1; (objective), 8. 
12; (subjunctive), 85. 
4; 110. 2; (partitive), 
37- 21; 52.11; 71.19; 
(predicate partitive), 
16. 29; (of price), 6. 
7; (of time), 14. 18; 
(with αἰσθάνεσθαι), 
83.2; (with προτίθε- 
σθαι), 74. 4; (with 
tvvalper Oar), 28. 13. 

Gymnopaediae, 82. 6. 


Hagnon, II 8; 


24 b. 
Hegesippidas, 52 a. 


19 Ὁ; 


212 


Helots, 348; 356; 56b. 
Hera, temple of, 75 6. 
Heraclea, 126; 51; 52. 
Heracles, temple of, 
64¢; 66a. 
Heraeans, 67. 7. 
Hiponieans, 5 Cs 
Hipponoidas, 71 c; 724. 
Hyacinthia, 236; 41 Ο. 
Hysiae, 83 b. 


Imbrians, 8 b. 

Imperative pf. pass. 
οι. 6. 

Indicative, in general 
protasis, 9. 12. 

Infinitive, by attraction, 
53. 8; 72. 1; of pur- 
pose, 69. 6; in depen- 
dent clauses, 28. 4; 
46. 17; 77. 11; for 
imy., 9. 26; inter- 
changing with finite 
moods, 18. 38; 23. 
18; with περιόψεσθαι, 
29. 6; aor. with εἰκός, 
109 6. 

Tolcius, 19 c; 24 Ὁ. 

Ionians, 9 a. 

Ischagoras, 19 a; 21; 
24 ἃ. 

Isthmionicus, 19 6; 24b. 

Isthmus, 18 c. 

Italy, 4; 5. 


Justice, 89 ¢; 90; 98; 
107. 


Kings, Spartan, give all 
orders in battle, 66 b. 
Knights, 72 c. 


Lacedaemon, Lacedae- 
monians, passim ; their 





INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Lacedaemonians, 
military organization, 
66; 68. 9. See In- 
trod. p. 4. 

Laches, 19 c;24b; 43b; 
61; 74¢. 

Lamachus, 19 6; 24 Ὁ. 

Lampon, 19 6; 24 Ὁ. 

Laphilus, 19 b; 24 ἃ. 

Lemnians, 8 a. 

Leon, a Lacedaemonian, 
44 ¢. 

Leon, an Athenian, 196; 
24 b. 

Leontini, 4 a, c. 

Lepreum, 31 ; 34b; 49a; 
50 a; 62. 

Leuctra, 54 a. 

Lichas, 22 Ὁ; 50b; 76b. 

Litotes, 111. 1. 

Locrians (Opuntian), 
64 b. 

Locrians (in Italy), 

5 a, Ο. 

Lot, 21 a. 

Lycaeum, 16 6; 54 ἃ. 

Lycomedes, 84 c. 


Macedonia, 80 Ὁ; 83 c. 
Maenalia, 64 a; 67 b; 
77 ἃ. 
Malians, 51 a. 
Mantinea, Mantineans, 
26 b; 29b; 33; 4306; 
44; 46; 47; 50 b; 
55 a; 58 a; 61; 62; 
64 ¢; 65; 75 6; 78; 
81 a; battle of, 66-74. 
Mecyberna, 18. 29; 39 a. 
Megara, Megarians, 
17C; 31; 38a; 580; 
59 b; 60b. 
Medmaeans, 5 c. 
Melos, 84-116, 





Menas, 19 b; 21; 24a. 
Mercenaries, 6 6, 
Messene in Sicily, 5 a. 
Messenians, 356; 56. 
Metagenes, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 
Methone, 18 b. 
Methydrium, 58 a. 
Myrcinus, 6c; 10 ¢c. 
Myrtilus, 19 c; 24 Ὁ. 


Nemea, 58-60. 
Neodamodes, 34 b; 67 a. 
Niceratus, 16 a; 83. 
Nicias, 16a; 196: 24b; 
43 Ὁ; 46; 83¢. 
Nicostratus, 61 a; 74 6. 
Nisaea, 17 b. 
Nominative, referring to 
the subj. of the main 
verb, 112. 10. 


Obols, Aeginetan, 47 b. 
Odomantians, 6 a. 
Oecist, 12. 12. 
Olympia, 18 6; 476; 49; 
50; Zeus of, 31 b; 50a. 
Olynthus, 3c; 18b; 39a. 
Oracle, 16b; 266; 328; 
103 6. 
Orchomenus, 61 Ὁ, 6. 
Orestheum, 64 a. 
Orneae, 67 ¢; 726; 74. 


Panactum, 3 6; 18 Ὁ; 
359; 36 α; 39 6; 
428,6; 446; 46}. 

Panathenaea, 47 ¢. 

Pancratium, 49 a. 

Parrhasians, 33. 

Participle, attributive, 
after its subst. 5. 4; 
16. 21; predicate, 30. 
2; supplementary, 69. 
8 ; for infinitive, 9. 18 ; 
66. 18; 102. 4. 


Pasitelidas, 3 Ὁ. 

Patrae, 52 ο. 

Pay of soldiers, 47 b. 

Peace, of Nicias, 18; 26; 
between Argos and 
Lacedaemon, 77. 

Pellene, 58 ¢; 59 Ὁ; 
60 b. 

Pentecosty, 68. 

Perdiceas, 6 a; 80 Ὁ; 
83 ¢. 

Perfect infinitive, 9. 35; 
16. 12. 

Phaedimus, 42 a. 

Phaeax, 4; 5. 

Pharnaces, I c. 

Philocharidas, 19 b ; 21; 
248; 44. 

Philocrates, 116 ο.ὕ 

Phlius, 57; 58 Ὁ; 59 Ὁ; 
60 b; 83 Ὁ; 115 ἃ. 

Phocians, 32 ἃ; 64 Ὁ. 

Phyrcus, 49 a. 

Pierium, 13 a. 

Plataea, 17 b. 

Plataeans, 32 a. 

Pleistoanax, 16 ἢ, c; 


24 4; 33; 75 ἃ. 
Pleistolas, 19 b; 24 a; 
25 a. 


Plural verb with neut. 
subj. 26. 12; 75. 8. 
Polemarchs, 47 c; 66 b. 

Polles, 6 a. 
Present infinitive for 
imperfect, 60. 27. 
Prisoners of war, 18 b. 
Procles, 19 6; 24 b. 
Pteleum, 18 b. 
Pylos, 7 b; 14; 18 δὲ 
35 €3 36 6; 39 b; 
44-46; 56b; 115 a. 
Pythian games, I a. 
Pytho, 18 b. 





INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Pythodorus, 19 c; 24 Ὁ. 


Relative, not repeated, 
2.14; conditional, 110. 
5; with antecedent 
omitted, 103. 7. 

Rhamphias, 12; 13. 

Rhium, 52 6. 


Saminthus, 58 c. 

Sane, 18 Ὁ. 

Scione, 18 Ὁ; 32 ἃ. 

Sciritae, 67 ἃ; 68 b; 
71 Ὁ; 72b. 

Scritis, 33 b. 

Scolus, 18 b. 

Scyllaeum, 53 c. 

Sermyle, 18 Ὁ. 

Seventeen make oath, 
19. 8; 18. 50 App. 

Sicels, 4 c. 

Sicily, 4; 5. 

Sicyonians, 52 c; 58- 
60; 81 c. 

Singaeans, 18 b. 

Six Hundred at Elis, 
47 ¢- 

Sollium, 30 b. 

Sparta,see Lacedaemon. 

Spartolus, 18 b. 

Speech of Brasidas, 9. 

Stageirus, 6a; 18 Ὁ. 

Strymon, 7 c. 

Subject, divided, το, 47; 
changed, 61. 12; 64. 
9; 81.5; 115. 3; plu- 
ral with sing. verb, 47. 
35; singular with pl. 
verb, 47. 37; 60. 22; 
82. 4. 

Superstition, caused by 
earthquakes, 45 C};, 
50c; causes expedi- 
tions to be given up, 
54 Ὁ; 55 b; 116 a; 





213 


Superstition, 
in observance of fes- 
tivals, 54 Ὁ; 75a; 82a. 
Syracusans, 4. 


Tegea, Tegeans, 32 a; 
57 b; 62; 64 b; 65 b; 
67-76; 78; 824. 

Tellis, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 


Thasos, 6 a. 

Theagenes, 19 c; 24 Ὁ. 

Theori, 47 ¢. 

Thessalians, 13; 51 a. 

Thousand Argives, 67¢; 
72 Ὁ; 73¢. 


Thrace, 6 a,c; toc. 

Thrasycles, 19 c; 24 Ὁ. 

Thrasyllus, 59 c ; 608, c¢. 

Thucydides, 26 c. 

Thyrea, 41 b. 

Thyssus, 35 a. 

Timocrates, 19 c; 24 b. 

Tisias, 84 c. 

Torone, 2; 3; 18 b. 

Trachinians, see Hera- 
clea. 

Treaties, 18 f.; 23 f.; 
47; 773 79- 

Tribute, 18 b. 

Truce, ten days,’ 26b; 
32 b. 


Walls, long, of Patrae, 
52 α; of Argos, 82; 
83 a. 


Xenares, 36-38; 46 6; 
another, 51 c. 


Zeus, Olympian, 31 a; 
Lycaean, 16 c; tem- 
ple of, at Mantinea, 
50 a. 

Zeuxidas, 19 Ὁ; 24 ἃ. 


7 
pias hrs 
afar 
4" oF sy tes 


ere a 
bth de ΔΑ 





ig 


νι 


sear hs f * 








ὅπ 
Rh get: 





SOS LE ee τ τ τ 








UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA AT LOS A 
THE UNIVERSITY ‘LIBRARY 





nt LIBRARY FACILITY _ 
THERN REGI ὶ 
ace Waar ‘Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
Return this material to the library 
from which it was poe 




















A ES ne ale Pay 











| 
| 
> {ΠΠΠ|ΠΠ|}}1}}} 
3 1158 00657 3413 
π΄ -----ςς--.-. --- 


A 000 134992 7 





